UC-NRLF 


ELEMENT  a  < 


FRENCH 


oMdriMikskr-Sioiik 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

Microsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementaryfrenchOOaldrrich 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


THE  ESSENTIALS  OF  FRENCH  GRAMMAR 
WITH  EXERCISES 


BY 

FRED  DAVIS  ALDRICH,  A.M. 

// 

SENIOR    MASTER    IN    WORCESTER    ACADEMY 

IRVING  LYSANDER  FOSTER,  Litt.D. 

PROFESSOR   OF  THE   ROMANCE   LANGUAGES   IN 
THE   PENNSYLVANIA   STATE   COLLEGE 

AND 

CLAUDE  ROULE 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR  OF  FRENCH   IN  DARTMOUTH  COLLEGE 


REVISED  EDITION 


GINN  AND  COMPANY 

BOSTON  •  NEW  YORK  •  CHICAGO  •  LONDON 
ATLANTA  •  DALLAS  •  COLUMBUS  •  SAN  FRANCISCO 


COPYRIGHT,  1922,  BY  FRED  DAVIS  ALDRICH 
IRVING  LYSANDER  FOSTER  AND  CLAUDE  ROULE 


ALL   RIGHTS   RESERVED 


322.4 


1  •   •■ 

:• :  . 


EDUCATION  DEFT* 


Cfte  gtftenaum  ffrtgg 

G1NN  AND  COMPANY-  PRO- 
PRIETORS •  BOSTON  •  U.S.A. 


PREFACE 

During  the  European  war  old  pupils  of  the  authors,  in 
service  in  France,  repeatedly  wrote  for  copies  of  the  former 
edition  of  this  book,  that  they  might  furbish  up  their  rusty 
knowledge  of  French  from  its  familiar  pages.  Others  reported 
finding  grimy  copies  passing  from  hand  to  hand  in  the  bomb- 
proofs  of  the  first-line  trenches.  Such  continued  loyalty  from 
former  pupils  has  given  the  greatest  satisfaction  to  the 
authors  of  this  book.  These  friends,  and  the  many  others  who 
as  teachers  or  pupils  have  used  "  Elementary  French  "  since 
it  was  published  fifteen  years  ago,  have  encouraged  them  to 
prepare  this  new  edition,  entirely  rewritten  and  containing 
several  new  features  of  promise. 

The  general  plan  of  the  former  volume,  which  has  com- 
mended itself  so  widely,  is  rigorously  retained.  As  before,  the 
work  in  content  covers  the  elementary  French  requirement  as 
generally  understood.  The  book  is  adapted  either  to  serve  in 
a  secondary  school  or  to  constitute  the  nucleus  of  the  first 
year's  work  in  a  college  course  that  does  not  demand  French 
for  entrance.  Pupils  in  the  third  year  of  the  high  school  or 
at  a  more  advanced  stage  can  complete  the  work  in  a  single 
year,  and  have  sufficient  time  left  for  the  reading  of  simple 
French  texts. 

The  modifications  that  characterize  this  revision  lie  along 
three  lines.  By  further  subdividing  certain  topics,  especially  at 
the  start  and  when  dealing  with  critical  subjects,  and  by  post- 
poning certain  exceptions  in  syntax  to  later  supplementary 

iii 

889455 


iv  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

pages,  the  ground  covered  by  separate  lessons  is  reduced. 
The  admission  into  the  Models  of  a  larger  and  more  varied 
vocabulary,  especially  of  everyday  words  and  phrases,  per- 
mits much  greater  flexibility  and  vividness  in  the  French 
employed.  Pictures  and  other  forms  of  illustration,  drawn 
to  an  unusual  degree  from  scenes  of  daily  life,  bring  to  the 
pupil  the  characteristic  atmosphere  of  the  vivacious  and 
intellectual  people  whose  language  he  is  learning. 

Special  attention  is  called  to  the  following  features,  most 
of  which  this  edition  shares  with  its  predecessor : 

i.  Unity  and  system  are  secured  by  grouping  the  succes- 
sive lessons  in  natural  relations  around  a  common  topic, 
such  as  the  verb,  the  pronoun,  etc. 

2.  The  statement  of  principles  of  grammar  is  adapted 
to  the  point  of  view  of  the  English-speaking  pupil,  without 
assuming,  however,  that  he  is  a  master  of  English  syntax. 

3.  The  French  text  of  each  lesson  consists  of  a  connected 
paragraph,  narrative  or  descriptive, v  dealing  more  and  more, 
as  facility  increases,  with  the  situations  of  everyday  life. 

4".  Each  Model  is  the  center  of  abundant  exercises,  which 
continually  emphasize  the  essential  points  of  the  lesson. 
These  are  set  in  a  great  variety  of  forms,  including  exercises 
for  thorough  drill  and  in  supplying  omitted  words  and  in 
making  the  substitutions  that  are  today  considered  so  valuable, 
and  also  giving  a  considerable  amount  of  connected  discourse. 
Every  task  propounded  has  a  definite  aim.  Plenty  of  material 
is  offered  for  constant  and  effective  review. 

5.  A  serious  effort  is  made  to  teach  the  inflection  of  the 
verb  by  developing  it  from  the  principal  parts.  For  the  use 
of  those  who  prefer  to  memorize  from  visualizing,  the  para- 
digms and  the  irregular  verbs  are  given  in  full  in  the 
Appendix. 


PREFACE  *  v 

6.  The  sentences  and  other  matter  taken  directly  from 
college  papers  will  prove  of  great  assistance  in  preparing  for 
entrance  examinations. 

v  7.  The  illustrations  are  connected  in  nearly  every  instance 
with  the  subject  matter  with  which  they  are  placed,  forming 
thus  an  integral  part  of  the  course.  Each  is  explained  by  a 
paragraph  in  ordinary  French.  No  attempt  is  made  to  limit 
the  phraseology  of  these  explanations  to  words  that  the  pupil 
has  at  the  time  mastered.  It  is  believed  that  many  a  student, 
at  times  out  of  mere  curiosity,  will  be  tempted  by  the  pictures 
to  set  himself  at  unraveling  the  meaning  of  the  attached  para- 
graphs. For  this  purpose  the  general  vocabulary  is  ample. 
These  paragraphs  can  also  be  assigned  at  the  end  of  the  course 
for  additional  translation. 

8.  To  bring  the  flavor  of  French  life  and  thought  more  fully 
before  the  pupil,  the  pictures  are  supplemented  by  proverbs, 
by  a  menu,  by  French  posted  signs,  by  models  of  correspond- 
ence, by  classroom  phrases,  and  by  other  similar  matter. 

9.  Not  only  the  illustrative  material  mentioned  in  the  last 
paragraphs  but  also  the  theme  and  construction  of  the  main 
exercises  readily  lend  themselves  to  the  molding  hand  of 
the  instructor  who  strives  to  impart  a  practical  command  of 
the  living  language.    Oral  exercises  form  a  part  of  each  lesson. 

10.  The  phonetic  alphabet  of  the  International  Phonetic 
Association  is  fully  developed  in  the  Introduction,  and  abun- 
dant material  for  practice  is  placed  in  the  Appendix,  including 
the  phonetic  reproduction  of  the  first  twelve  models.  The  body 
of  the  book  and  the  vocabularies  are  free  from  this  notation, 
except  to  indicate  the  sound  of  words  pronounced  irregularly. 

1 1 .  The  completeness  and  analytical  clearness  of  the 
English-French  vocabulary  will  prevent  many  an  error  in 
the  pupil's  work. 


vi  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Only  the  more  mature  and  energetic  classes  will  find  it 
practicable  to  take  a  whole  lesson  at  a  single  session.  A  con- 
venient point  of  division  into  two  parts  is  at  the  end  of  the 
Model ;  into  three,  after  the  Drill  and  the  Theme.  A  con- 
cise and  yet  thoroughly  complete  and  unified  course  can  be 
secured  by  assigning  only  the  Resume,  in  connection  with 
the  grammar.  Some,  on  the  contrary,  may  prefer  to  omit 
the  Resumes  until  a  certain  portion,  or  even  the  whole  book, 
has  been  covered,  and  then  assign  them  in  connection  with 
the  review  work.  Such  a  plan,  moreover,  easily  adapts  the 
book  to  serve  as  a  text  for  a  second  review  course. 

The  authors,  themselves  bringing  to  their  task  long  experi- 
ence, partly  in  college  and  partly  in  secondary  schools,  and 
combining  in  their  equipment  both  a  native  and  an  acquired 
knowledge  of  the  language,  have  been  aided  by  multifold 
suggestions  from  numerous  colleagues  and  friends.  They 
desire  to  acknowledge  with  gratitude  the  valuable  aid  fur- 
nished among  others  by  Professor  Sidney  C.  Hazelton  of 
Dartmouth  College  and  by  Professor  H.  H.  Arnold  of  the 
Pennsylvania  State  College.  They  are  much  indebted  also  to 
the  accurate  scholarship  and  resourceful  suggestions  placed  at 
their  command  by  the  editorial  department  of  the  publishers. 

THE  AUTHORS 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

List  of  Abbreviations x 

Introduction i 

LESSON 

I.    Gender  —  The  Articles 25 

II.    Contraction  —  Possession 29 

III.  Verb  and  Subject  —  Etre 33 

Review  —  Lessons  I-1 1 1 38 

IV.  The  Negative  —  Avoir 39 

V.    Interrogative  Forms 44 

VI.    Present  Tense  Forms 48 

Review  —  Lessons  IV- VI 53 

VII.    Plural  of  Nouns 55 

VIII.   Agreement  of  Adjectives 60 

IX.    Position  of  Adjectives 64 

X.    Irregular  Adjectives 71 

Review  —  Lessons  VI I-X 75 

XL    Comparison  of  Adjectives yj 

XII.   Adverbs  and  their  Comparison 82 

XIII.  The  Partitive  Construction 89 

XIV.  Uses  of  the  Articles 94 

Review  —  Lessons  XI-XIV 99 

XV.    Regular  Conjugations  —  Present  Indicative 102 

XVI.    Principal  Parts  —  The  Imperfect 107 

XVII.    The  Past  Definite 115 

Review — Lessons  XV-X VI I 122 

XVIII.   The  Future 124 

XIX.   The  Conditional 129 

XX.    The  Imperative 135 

XXI.    Subjunctive  —  Simple  Verbs  Completed 140 

Review  — Lessons  XVIII-XXI 147 

vii 


Vlll 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


LESSON  PAGE 

XXII.    Inflection  and  Use  of  Avoir 149 

XXIII.  A  voir  in  Perfect  Tenses 155 

XXIV.  Etre  in  Perfect  Tenses 163 

XXV.    Agreement  of  Participles 167 

Review  —  Lessons  XXI I-XXV 174 

XXVI.    Interrogation 177 

XXVII.    Negation 183 

Review  — Lessons  XXVI,  XXVII 190 

-  XXVIII.    Conjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 192 

XXIX.    Disjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 199 

—  XXX.    V  and  En 204 

-»      XXXI.    Possessives 211 

Review  — Lessons  XXVIII-XXXI 219 

XXXII.    Demonstratives 221 

XXXIII.  Relative  Pronouns 229 

XXXIV.  Relative  Pronouns  (continued) 237 

XXXV.    Interrogatives 244 

Review  — Lessons  XXXI I-XXXV  .     .     ...     .     .  250 

XXXVI.    Numerals  —  Cardinals 253 

XXXVII.    Numerals— Ordinals 258 

XXXVIII.    Numerals  in  Expressions  of  Time,  etc 263 

Review—  Lessons  XXX  VI-XXXVI 1 1       ....  270 

-  XXXIX.    Reflexive  Verbs 273 

_^,       XL.    Passive  Voice 280 

XLI.    Special  Uses  of  the  Passive  and  the  Reflexive      .     .  286 

Review— Lessons  XXXI X-XLI      ......  292 

XLI  I.    Orthographic  Changes  in  the  First  Conjugation   .     .  294 

XLIII.    Irregular  Verbs  in  er 300 

XLIV.    Irregular  Verbs  in  ir 308 

Review  —  Lessons  XLI  I-XLIV 314 

XLV.    Irregular  Verbs  in  oir 316 

XLVI.    Irregular  Verbs  in  oir 322 

XLVII.    Irregular  Verbs  in  re 328 

XLVIII.    Irregular  Verbs  in  re 334 

XLIX.   Faire  and  its  Construction 339 


CONTENTS  ix 

LESSON  PAGE 

Review  —  Lessons  XLV-XLIX 346 

L.    Dependent  Infinitives 348 

LI.    The  Subjunctive  Mood 355 

LII.    The  Subjunctive  in  Object  and  Adjective  Clauses     .     .     .  361 

LIII.    The  Subjunctive  in  Adverbial  Clauses 368 

Review — Lessons  L-LIII 375 

LIV.    Supplementary  —  Inflection 378 

LV.    Supplementary  —  Articles,  Pronouns 383 

LVI.    Supplementary  —  Word  Order,  etc 388 

Sentences  for  General  Review 395 

Appendixes 

I.    Drill  Sentences  from  College  Papers 399 

II.    Material  for  Phonetic  Practice 415 

III.  Gender  of  Nouns      • 428 

IV.  Plural  of  Nouns 429 

V.    Formation  of  Adverbs 430 

VI.    Verbal  Endings 431 

VII.    Regular  Conjugations 432 

VIII.    Irregular  Verbs 440 

Vocabularies 

French-English 457 

English-French 502 

General  Index 533 


LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS 


adj.  sb  adjective 

adv.  =  adverb 

ant.  =  anterior 

art.  =  article 

cond.  =  conditional 

conj.  sa  conjunction 

conj.  pron.  =  conjunctive  pronoun 

def.  =  definite 

dir.  =  direct 

disj.  =  disjunctive 

f.  =  feminine 

Fr.  s=  French 

fut.  =  future 

imp.  =  imperfect 

imv.  =  imperative 

ind.  =53  indicative 

indef.  =  indefinite 

indir.  =  indirect 

inf.  SB  infinitive 

int.  =s  interrogative 

inten.  =  intensive 

intj.  ss  interjection 

intr.  ss  intransitive 

irr.  ss  irregular 

m.  s=  masculine 


n.  ss  noun 
neg.  =  negative 
num.  =  numeral 
obj.  =  object 
p.  ss  page 
part.  =  participle 
pass.  =s  passive 
per.  53  person 
perf.  =  perfect 
pers.  =  personal 
pi.  (plu.)  =  plural 
pluperf .  =  pluperfect 
poss.  =s  possessive 
prep.  =B  preposition 
pres.  =  present 
pret.  =  preterit 
pron.  ss  pronoun 
refl.  =  reflexive 
rel.  =  relative 
Sec.  ss  Section 
sing.  =  singular 
sub.  =  subject 
subj.  =  subjunctive 
tr.  ss  transitive 
v.  =  verb 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


INTRODUCTION 

THE  FRENCH  LANGUAGE 

1.  French  and  Latin.  The  French  language  is  one  of 
the  forms  of  modern  Latin  now  spoken  in  those  parts  of 
Europe  which  the  Romans  conquered,  colonized,  and  ruled 
in  the  days  of  Julius  Caesar  and  his  successors.  These  forms, 
called  collectively  the  Romanic  or  Romance  languages,  com- 
prise French,  Italian,  Spanish,  and  Portuguese,  the  four  most 
important ;  Provencal,  the  old  language  of  the  south  of 
France  ;  Rhaetian,  used  in  parts  of  the  Alps ;  and  the  speech 
of  Rumania.  There  is  an  unbroken  continuity  between  the 
Latin  of  the  Roman  Empire  and  these  languages,  so  much 
so  that  one  cannot  tell  just  where  Latin  leaves  off  and  the 
others  begin.  French,  therefore,  is  Latin  as  it  has  been 
modified,  on  the  soil  of  France,  by  twenty  centuries  of 
influences,  internal  and  external. 

The  student  of  French  who  is  familiar  with  Latin  will 
see  many  obvious  resemblances  between  the  two  languages ; 
others  are  apparent  when  suggested.  Of  the  elaborate  Latin 
inflection  not  much  remains  except  in  the  verb.  The  great 
essential  qualities  that  characterized  Latin  persist,  however, 
and  the  pupil  will  realize  more  and  more  that  in  French  he 
has  a  language  unsurpassed  for  clearness  of  expression  and 
for  artistic  value. 


2  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

TEE  ALPHABET 

2.  The  Alphabet.  The  letters  of  the  French  alphabet  are 
the  same  as  those  of  the  English.  K  and  w  are  used  only 
in  a  few  words  borrowed  or  formed  from  other  languages. 

3.  The  French  Names  of  the  Letters  are 


a 

a 

h 

ache 

0 

0 

V 

ve 

b 

bt 

i 

i 

P 

pe 

w 

double  ve 

c 

ce 

J 

P 

q 

ku 

X 

iks 

d 

de 

k 

ka 

r 

erre 

y 

i  grec 

e 

e 

1 

die 

s 

esse 

z 

zcde 

f 

effe 

m 

em?ne 

t 

te 

g 

ge 

n 

enne 

u 

u 

Note.  In  oral  spelling  the  consonants  are  sometimes  pronounced 
with  the  sound  of  mute  e.    Thus  d  is  pronounced  de ;  g,  gue  orje ;  etc. 

4.  Vowels  and  Consonants.  The  alphabet  is  divided  into 
vowels  and  consonants. 

The  letters  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  and  y  are  vowels ;  the  rest  are 
consonants. 

Note.  I,  o,  u,  and  y  often  have  the  value  of  consonants  when  they 
precede  a  vowel  sound.    See  Sees.  34-37. 

CAPITALS 

5.  Capitalization.  The  French  use  of  capital  letters  is 
the  same  as  the  English,  except  that  proper  adjectives,  the 
names  of  months  and  days,  titles  of  rank  or  office,  and  the 
personal  pronoun  je  (I)  are  not  capitalized. 

Note.  In  titles  of  books,  names  of  corporations,  and  the  like,  French 
aims  to  capitalize  one  main  word,  generally  the  first  noun  unless  it  is 
preceded  by  a  preposition.  To  this  one  capital  there  is  added  a  capital 
on  any  adjective  preceding  the  noun,  on  nouns  connected  coordinately 


INTRODUCTION  3 

with  the  capitalized  noun,  and  on  any  adjective  preceding  this  second 
noun.  If  an  article  is  used  as  the  first  word  of  a  title,  it  is  not  capitalized 
unless  it  begins  a  sentence. 

ORTHOGRAPHIC  MARKS 

6.  Accent  Marks.  There  are  certain  marks  in  written 
French,  called  accents,  placed  over  vowels.  These  are  not 
used,  as  in  English,  to  indicate  that  the  syllable  where 
they  stand  is  to  be  pronounced  more  strongly,  but  they 
serve  in  general  to  distinguish  the  sounds  of  the  vowels. 

7.  The  Three  Accents.  There  are  three  accents :  the 
acute  (aigu)  ('),  the  grave  {grave)  (*),  and  the  circumflex 
(circonflexe)  (")  :  6tant,  pere,  tete. 

Note  i.  The  acute  accent  occurs  only  on  e;  the  grave  on  e,  and 
rarely  on  a  or  u  to  distinguish  words  otherwise  spelled  alike;  the 
circumflex  on  any  vowel  (except  y). 

Note  2.  The  circumflex  accent  is  usually  a  sign  of  contraction  in  the 
formation  of  the  word,  especially  of  the  omission  of  an  s :  for  example, 
fete,  from  Latin festa;  compare  English  "feast." 

Note  3.    Vowels,  except  e,  usually  omit  their  accent  when  capitalized. 

8.  The  Other  Orthographic  Marks  are 

a.  The  cedilla  (cidille)  (J,  placed  under  c  to  indicate  a 
soft  sound  :  5a. 

b.  The  diaeresis  (trema)  (*"),  placed  over  the  second  of 
two  consecutive  vowels  to  denote  that  it  does  not  unite 
with  the  first  to  form  a  digraph,  but  is  pronounced 
separately :  Noel. 

Note.    A  diaeresis  over  an  i  crowds  out  the  dot :  hair. 

c.  The  apostrophe  (apostrophe)  ('),  which  indicates  the 
omission  of  a  vowel :  j'ai. 

d.  The  hyphen  (trait  d'union)  (-),  which  is  used  to  join 
words  in  close  connection :  avez-vous  ? 


4  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

SYLLABLES 

9.  Syllabication.  The  correct  division  of  words  into 
syllables  is  more  important  in  French  than  in  English, 
because  it  not  only  shows  where  words  are  to  be  divided 
at  the  end  of  lines,  but  it  also  often  determines  how  a 
letter  or  group  of  letters  is  pronounced. 

10.  Number  of  Syllables.  There  are  as  many  syllables  in 
a  word  as  there  are  vowels  (or  digraphs)  :  a-mi,  par-lent, 
cou-pe-rai,  vic-toi-re,  pro-pri-£-tai-re. 

Note  i.  E  and  u,  when  added  as  explained  in  Sec.  50,  &,  Note, 
do  not  form  a  syllable :  man-gea,  guer-re. 

Note  2.  A  mute  e  (Sec.  22)  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  following 
a  vowel,  does  not  form  a  syllable:  joue-rai. 

Note  3.  I,  y,  0,  ou,  and  u,  when  preceding  other  vowels,  are  often 
sounded  as  consonants  (Sec.  4,  Note;  Sees.  34-37),  and  then  do  not 
form  a  syllable :  bien,  6-tions,  yeux,  loin,  fouet-ter,  lui,  6-cuel-le. 

Note  4.  Observe  that  final  mute  e,  though  usually  not  pronounced, 
is  regarded  as  forming  a  syllable  :  no-te,  ra-re,  pat-te.  It  has  full  syllabic 
value  in  the  meter  of  poetry  and  songs. 

11.  A  Single  Consonant  (except  x)  at  the  point  of  division 
belongs  to  the  following  syllable :  a-mi,  a-vant,  pa-ro-les, 
i-nS-ga-li-te" ;  but,  ex-a-men. 

Note.  At  the  end  of  a  line  in  writing  or  printing,  division  is  usually 
avoided  between  x  and  a  vowel.    See  Sec.  62. 

12.  Treatment  of  Two  Consonants.  When  there  are  two 
consonants  at  the  point  of  division,  the  break  is  generally 
made  between  them  :  ad-mi-ra,  es-poir,  par-la,  don-nai. 

Combinations  of  two  consonants,  however,  which  can  be 
pronounced  together,  are  not  divided.  Such  pairs  are  treated 
as  a  single  consonant  and  so  go  with  the  following  syllable : 
ta-ble,  mai-grir,  cou-vrit,  a-che-ta,  ga-gna. 


INTRODUCTION  5 

Note  i  .  Such  pairs  are  those  ending  in  1  or  r  (but  not  rl,  lr),  and  ch, 
ph,  th,  and  gn. 

Note  2.  Since  h,  unless  aspirate  (Sec.  52),  has  no  consonantal  value, 
a  preceding  consonant  is  put  with  such  an  h  in  the  syllable  that  follows  : 
si-lhouet-te. 

13.  Three  Consonants.  In  groups  of  three  (or  more) 
consonants,  the  last  consonant,  or  the  last  two  when  they 
form  one  of  the  special  combinations  mentioned  in  Sec.  12, 
go  with  the  syllable  that  follows  :  trans-po-ser,  com-bla,  per-dre. 

PRONUNCIATION 

14.  Pronouncing  French.  One  of  the  elements  involved  in 
pronouncing  French  is  the  ability  to  utter  the  sounds  correctly. 
Few  of  these  sounds  have  an  exact  counterpart  in  English ; 
many  are  strikingly  strange.  The  task,  for  one  whose  habits 
of  speech  are  formed,  demands  persistent  and  well-guided 
effort.  It  is  necessary  to  hear  and  imitate  a  person  who 
pronounces  the  language  correctly.  An  understanding  of 
the  positions  assumed  by  the  vocal  organs  is  also  a  great  aid. 

15.  Characteristics  of  Spoken  French,  important  for  the 
attention  of  an  English-speaking  pupil,  include 

a.  More  energetic  action  of  the  vocal  organs,  especially 
of  the  lips  and  tongue. 

b.  Pure  vowel  sounds.  Many  English  vowels  are  not  pure, 
but  begin  with  one  sound  and  glide  into  another  at  the  end. 
That  is,  they  are  really  diphthongs.  The  i  in  "bite,"  for 
example,  is  a  combination  of  a  in  "far"  and  e  in  "meet" 

c.  The  grouping  of  a  medial  consonant  with  the  following 
syllable.  The  impression  upon  the  ear  of  the  French  ci-t6  is 
very  different  from  the  English  cit-y.    See  Sec.  1 1 . 

d.  The  absence  of  strongly  accented  syllables  in  words 
and  word-groups. 


6 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


16.  Sounds  of  Letters.  Another  element  in  pronunciation 
is  knowledge  of  what  sounds  the  various  French  letters 
represent  in  their  different  positions.  French  has  greater 
regularity  in  this  respect  than  English ;  still  there  are 
numerous  exceptions  to  the  rules. 

17.  A  Phonetic  Alphabet,  in  which  a  certain  written 
character  always  represents  a  certain  sound,  obviates  the  diffi- 
culties involved  in  an  ordinary  unphonetic  alphabet.  The 
following  alphabet  of  the  International  Phonetic  Association 
is  in  general  use,  and  is  employed  here  to  supplement  the 
discussion  of  sounds  and  to  indicate  irregular  pronunciations. 

The  "  Description  of  Sound  "  in  the  list  below  is  only 
approximate ;  later  sections  give  more  accurate  descriptions. 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  PHONETIC  ALPHABET 


Symbol 

Description  of  Sound 

Regularly  Represented  by 

a.  Pure  Vowels 

M 

open  a ;    between  a  in 
"  father "    and    a    in 
"  fat " 

a,  Sec.  1 8,  a 

w 

closed  a ;  a  in  "  father  " 

a,  a,  Sec.  18,  b 

[e] 

closed  e ;  a  in  "  fate  " 

4,  Sec.  19  ;  final  er,  Sec.  21, 
Note  1;  ai,  Sec.  29,  a 

W 

open  e\  e  in  "  met " 

e,  e,  Sec.  20;  e,  Sec.  21  ;  ai, 
Sec.  29,  b\  ei,  Sec.  30 

M 

mute  e\  e  in  "the  man" 

e,   Sec.  22 

m 

i  in  "  machine  n 

i,  Sec.  23  ;  y,  Sec.  27 

[o] 

closed  o ;  o  in  "  holy  " 

6,  Sec.  24  ;  0,  Sec.  25,  a  ;  au, 
Sec.  31 

M 

open  o ;  o  in  "  wholly  " 

0,  Sec.  2  5 ,  £ ;  au,  Sec.  3 1 ,  Note 

w 

oo  in  "  moon  " 

ou,  Sec.  33 

INTRODUCTION 


Symbol 

Description  of 

Sound 

Regularly  Represented  by 

b.  Rounded  Vowels 

W 

rounded  [e] 

eu,  Sec.  32,  a 

r«i 

rounded  [e] 

eu,  Sec.  32,  b 

[y] 

rounded  [i] 

u,  Sec.  26 

c.  Nasal  Vowels 

M 

nasal  [a] 

an,  en,  etc.,  Sec.  40 

m 

nasal  [e] 

in,  etc.,  Sec.  40 

M 

nasal  [o] 

on,  etc.,  Sec.  40 

[•] 

nasal  [oe] 

un,  etc.,  Sec.  40 

d. 

Consonantal  Vowels 

[j] 

y  in  "  yes  " 

h  y,  Sec.  35  ;  1,  Sec.  54 

[w] 

w  in  "  was  " 

ou-,  0-,  Sec.  37 

w 

French  u  before  vowel 

u-,  Sec.  36 

e.   Consonants 

w 

b  in  "  bad  " 

b 

M 

d  in  M  dim  " 

d,  Sec.  48 

w 

/in  "fan" 

f 

[g] 

g  in  "  get " 

g,  Sec.  50,  b 

Ed 

s  in  "  measure 

» 

g,  Sec.  so,  a-  j,  Sec.  53 

M 

k  in  M  kit " 

c,  Sec.  46,  b ;  qu,  Sec.  58 

[•] 

/  in  M  lid  " 

1,  Sees.  48,  54,  Note,  55 

M 

m  in  "  man  " 

m 

M 

n  in  "  nap  " 

n,  Sec.  48 

[P] 

p  in  "  pie  " 

P 

r*i 

r  trilled 

r,  Sec.  59 

w 

j-  in  M  so  " 

s,  Sec.  60 ;  c,  9,  Sec.  46,  a ; 
t,  Sec.  61 

w 

/in  "tin" 

t,  Sea  48 

M 

p  in  "  vine  " 

V 

[«] 

s  in  "  rose  " 

s,  Sec.  60 ;  z 

ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Symbol 

Description  of  Sound 

Regularly  Represented  by 

in 

sh  in  M  shall  " 
ny  in  "  canyon  " 

ch,  Sec.  47 
gn,  Sec.  51 

/.   Quantity 

[0 

a  long  vowel 

This  symbol  is  placed 
after  the  vowel   af- 
fected; Sec.  42 

Note  1 .    Phonetic  symbols  in  this  book  are  inclosed  in  brackets. 

Note  2.  In  this  volume,  to  aid  the  beginner,  a  hyphen  is  used  to 
separate  the  syllables  of  a  word  or  word-group,  a  usage  not  general  in 
technical  works  on  phonetics. 

SOUNDS  OF  VOWELS 

18.  A  has  two  sounds. 

a.  It  usually  has  a  sound  between  a  in  "father"  and  a  in 
"fat"  :  ami,  malle,  malade,  page,  table,  la. 

This  is  known  as  open  a.  The  mouth  is  widely  open,  and  the 
tongue  lies  flat.  Its  phonetic  symbol  is  [a].  Thus :  ami  [a-mi], 
malle  [mal],  malade  [ma-lad],  page  [pa^],  table  [tabl],  la  [la]. 

b.  When  it  has  the  circumflex  accent,  or  is  followed  by 
s,  it  usually  has  a  sound  much  like  a  in  "  father  "  :  ame, 
batir,  base,  classe,  pas. 

This  is  known  as  closed  a.  The  mouth  is  less  open  than  for 
open  a,  and  the  tongue  is  drawn  farther  back.  Its  phonetic  symbol 
is  [a].  Thus:  ame  [a:m],  batir  [ba-ti:r],  base  [ba:z],  classe  [kla:s], 
pas  [pa]. 

Note  i.   A  is  closed  also  before  ille:  paille  [pa:j]. 
Note  2.    A  circumflex  in  the  verb  endings  ames,  ates,  at  is  open : 
donnames  [do-nam],  donnat  [do-na]. 
Note  3.   A  is  silent  in  aout  [u]. 


INTRODUCTION  9 

19.  E  acute  (e)  has  the  sound  of  a  in  li  fate,"  without  the 
vanishing  sound  of  e  in  "meet"  which  is  heard  in.  long  a  in 
English  :  6t6,  c6da. 

This  is  known  as  closed  e  (eferme).  Its  phonetic  symbol  is  [e]. 
Thus :  6te"  [e-te],  c6da  [se-da]. 

20.  E  grave  (e)  and  e  circumflex  (e)  have  a  sound  much 
like  e  in  "met,"  often  somewhat  prolonged :  leve,  tete. 

This  sound  is  known  as  open  e  (e  ouverf).  Its  phonetic  symbol 
is  [e].    Thus :  leve  [lev],  tete  [te:t]. 

21.  E  unaccented,  when  not  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  has  the 
same  sound  as  e  (e  in  "  met,"  Sec.  20):  tel,  pressa,  mer,  cadet. 

Thus :  tel  [tel],  pressa  [pre-sa],  mer  [me:r],  cadet  [ka-de]. 

Note  i  .  Er,  when  final  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  has  the 
sound  of  closed  e  (Sec.  19),  the  r  being  silent.  Thus:  parler  [par-le], 
dernier  [der-nje].  In  the  following  words,  however,  final  r  is  sounded 
and  the  e  is  open  (Sec.  20):  amer  [a-me:r],  cuiller  [kqi-je:r],  enfer  [a-fe:r]. 

Note  2.  E  is  closed  (Sec.  1 9)  in  final  ez,  and,  among  other  words, 
in  the  final  sounds  of  pied  [pje],  assied(s)  [a-sje],  clef  [kle],  and  et  [e]. 

Note  3.   E  in  femme  has  the  sound  of  French  open  a  [fam]. 

22.  E  mute.  Unaccented  e  at  the  end  of  a  syllable  is 
sounded  as  little  as  possible,  whatever  sound  it  has  approxi- 
mating that  of  e  in  the  expression  "  the  man  "  when  fluently 
pronounced.    This  sound  is  known  as  mute  e  (e  muef). 

The  phonetic  symbol  for  mute  e  is  [9]. 

Three  positions  in  which  mute  e  occurs  must  be  noted. 
a.  At  the  end  of  a  word  of  one  syllable  it  is  sounded 
fully :  le,  me. 

Note.  When  such  words  as  le  and  me  are  closely  connected  in 
thought  with  other  words,  as  is  almost  always  the  case,  the  e  is  more 
or  less  obscured.  Thus  in  le  pere  the  e  in  le  is  sounded  but  slightly.  In 
je  le  fais  the  e  in  le  is  silent  when  the  expression  is  uttered  fluently  [3al-fe]. 


IO  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

b.  At  the  end  of  a  word  of  more  than  one  syllable  it  is 
silent :  malle,  apporte,  table. 

c.  When  it  is  not  at  the  end  of  a  word,  the  fullness  of  its 
pronunciation  is  determined  by  the  character  of  the  sounds 
that  precede  and  follow  it.  It  is  sounded  rather  clearly  in 
regarda,  pesa ;  it  is  sounded  slightly  in  petit,  sera ;  it  is  silent 
in  samedi,  appela. 

Phonetically,  the  examples  above  are  represented  as  follows : 
le  [b]  apporte  [a-port]  pesa  [pa-za]       samedi  [sam-di] 

me  [ma]  table  [tabl]  petit  [pa-ti]       appela  [a-pla] 

malle  [mal]      regarda  [re-gar-da]      sera  [s9-ra] 

Note  i.  In  es  at  the  end  of  a  word  of  more  than  one  syllable,  and 
in  ent  at  the  end  of  the  third  person  plural  of  verbs,  the  e  is  mute,  and 
the  final  consonants  are  silent :  tetes  [te:t],  paries  [pari],  parlent  [pari]. 

Note  2.    See  Sec.  50,  Note,  for  silent  e  after  g. 

23.  I  (with  or  without  accent)  has  the  sound  of  i  in 
"  machine  "  :  il,  ile,  midi. 

Avoid  the  vanishing  sound  of  y  in  "yet"  usually  heard  in  English. 
The  corners  of  the  mouth  should  be  drawn  out.  The  phonetic 
symbol  of  this  sound  is  [i].    Thus :  il  [il],  ile  [il],  midi  [mi-di]. 

24.  0  circumflex  (6)  has  the  sound  of  0  in  "  holy,"  without 
the  vanishing  sound  of  00  in  "  moon  "  heard  in  long  0  in 
English  :  cote,  notre. 

This  sound  is  known  as  closed  0.  The  lips  are  tensely  rounded 
(puckered)  and  protruded.  The  phonetic  symbol  is  [o].  Thus : 
cdte  [kot],  notre  [no:tr]. 

25.  0  unaccented  has  two  sounds. 

a.  When  it  is  the  final  sound  of  a  word,  it  has  the  sound 
of  6  (0  in  "holy,"  Sec.  24)  :  mot,  cachot. 

Phonetically :  mot  [mo],  cachot  [ka-Jo]. 


INTRODUCTION  1 1 

b.  When  it  is  not  the  final  sound  of  a  word,  it  has  a 
more  open  sound,  somewhat  like  o  in  the  Yankee  pro- 
nunciation of  M  wholly  "  :  fol,  robe,  notre,  or. 

This  sound  is  known  as  open  o.  The  lips  are  less  strongly- 
rounded  than  in  closed  o;  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  lower.  The 
phonetic  symbol  is  [o].  Thus:  fol  [fol],  robe  [rob],  notre  [notr], 
or  [o:r]. 

Note.  0  is  closed  (Sec.  24)  in  the  terminations  ome  and  one,  before 
the  ending  tion,  and  before  the  sound  of  z  [z]:  tome  [torn],  notion 
[no-sj5],  chose  [Jo:z]. 

26.  U  (with  or  without  accent)  has  no  equivalent  in 
English.  To  produce  its  sound,  round  or  pucker  the  lips 
as  if  to  pronounce  00  in  "  moon,"  and  then  try  to  pronounce 
e  in  M  meet "  :  du,  sucre,  mur. 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [y].  Thus:  du  [dy],  sucre  [sykr], 
mur  [my:r]. 

Note.    See  Sec.  50,  Note,  for  silent  u  after  g. 

27.  Y  has  the  sound  of  French  i:  'style. 

Phonetically :  style  [stil]. 

Note.  Y  between  vowels,  and  in  pays  and  derivatives,  is  equivalent 
to  i-i.  The  first  i  goes  with  the  preceding  vowel  (Sec.  28);  the  second,  ex- 
cept in  pays  etc.,  is  consonantal  (Sec.  35):  asseyant  {assei-yant  [a-se-ja]), 
appuyai  (appui-yai  [a-pqi-je]),  pays  {pai-i  [pe-i]). 

SOUNDS  OF  DIGRAPHS 

28.  The  Digraphs.  The  vowels  in  the  common  groups 
ai,  ei,  au  (eau),  eu  (ceu),  ou,  however,  are  not  sounded  as 
above,  but  each  group  represents  a  single  sound.  These 
are  called  compound  vowels  or  digraphs  (or,  when  there 
are  three,  trigraphs). 


12  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

29.  Ai  has  two  sounds. 

a.  When  final  in  verbs,  it  has  the  sound  of  e*  (a  in  "fate," 
Sec.  19)  :  parlai. 

Phonetically :  parlai  [par-le]. 

Note.  Ai  has  the  sound  of  e"  also  in  gai  [ge],  quai  [ke],  sais,  sait  [se]. 

b.  Elsewhere  it  has  the  sound  of  e  (e  in  "met,"  Sec.  20) : 
vrai,  faible,  mais,  parlais,  aimer. 

Phonetically:  vrai  [vre],  faible  [fe:bl],  mais  [me],  parlais  [par-le], 
aimer  [e-me]. 

Note.  In  faisant  and  derived  forms  ai  has  the  sound  of  mute  e 
(Sec.  22,  c):  faisant  [fa-za]. 

30.  Ei  has  the  sound  of  e  (e  in  "met,"  Sec.  20)  :  reine. 
Phonetically :  reine  [rem]. 

31.  Au  and  eau  usually  have  the  sound  of  6  (o  in  "  holy," 
Sec.  24)  :  autre,  chaud,  beau. 

Phonetically:  autre  [otr],  chaud  [Jo],  beau  [bo]. 

Note.  Au  has  the  sound  of  open  0  (Sec.  25,  b)  in  mauvais  [mo-ve],  and 
in  aurai  [o-re]  and  related  forms. 

32.  Eu  and  oeu  have  a  sound  somewhat  like  11  in  "  fur." 
More  exactly,  they  have  two  distinct  sounds,  formed  as 
follows : 

a.  When  they  are  the  final  sound  in  a  word,  or  are  before 
t  or  a  z  sound,  round  the  lips  as  if  to  pronounce  o  in  "  holy  " 
(Sec.  24)  and  pronounce  e*  (a  in  "  fate,"  Sec.  19) :  feu,  veux, 
meute,  creuser. 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [0].  Thus :  feu  [f0],  veux  [v0],  meute 
[m0:t],  creuser  [kr0-ze]. 


INTRODUCTION  1 3 

b.  When  they  precede  a  pronounced  consonant  (except  t 
or  one  that  has  the  sound  of  z),  round  the  lips  as  if  to 
pronounce  0  in  "  holy  "  (Sec.  24)  and  pronounce  e  (e  in 
"  met,"  Sec.  20) :  neuf,  jeune,  sceur. 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [ce].  Thus :  neuf  [noef],  jeune  [3cen], 
soeur  [soe:r]. 

Note  i.  Eu,  and  also  oe  and  ue,  when  before  the  liquid  sound 
(Sec.  54),  have  the  sound  [ce]:  feuille  [fce:j],  ceil  [ce:j],  orgueil  [or-gce:j], 
cueillir  [kce-ji:r]. 

Note  2.  Eu  in  all  forms  of  the  verb  avoir  has  the  sound  of  the 
French  u  (Sec.  26) :  eut  [y],  eussions  [y-sj5]. 

33.  Ou  (with  or  without  accent)  has  the  sound  of  00  in 
"  moon  "  :  tour,  gout. 

The  lips  are  tensely  rounded.  Avoid  carefully  the  vanishing 
sound  of  u  in  "must."  The  phonetic  symbol  is  [u].  Thus:  tour 
[tu:r],  gout  [gu]. 


CONSONANTAL  VOWELS 

34.  Consonantal  Vowels.     When  i   (or  y),   0,   u,   or  ou 

precede  a  strongly  uttered  vowel  sound,  they  take  on  a 
value  approaching  that  of  a  consonant.  They  then  give  rise 
to  three  well-distinguished  sounds. 

Note.  These  sounds  are  often  called  semivowels.  Observe  that 
these  letters  (except  0  in  ou)  cannot  begin  a  digraph. 

35.  Consonantal  i  or  y  gives  a  sound  much  like  y  in 
*'  yes  "  :  viande,  ciel,  yeux. 

The  sound  is  formed  by  blending  naturally  the  sound  of  i  with 
the  following  vowel.  The  phonetic  symbol  is  [j].  Thus :  viande 
[vja:d],  ciel  [sjel],  yeux  [J0]. 


14  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

36.  Consonantal  u  has  nothing  corresponding  to  it  in 
English.  The  sound  is  almost  inevitably  formed  when  the 
French  u  is  blended  with  a  following  vowel :  lui,  suis. 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [q].  Thus:  lui  [lip],  suis  [suj].  The 
rounded  characteristic  of  the  u  must  be  preserved. 

37.  Consonantal  ou  or  o  gives  a  sound  much  like  w  in 
"  was  "  :  oui,  nouer,  oasis. 

The  sound  is  formed  by  blending  naturally  the  sound  of  ou  or  o 
with  the  following  vowel.  The  phonetic  symbol  is  [w].  Thus : 
oui  [wi],  nouer  [nwe],  oasis  [wa-zis]. 

38.  Oi  is  conveniently  classed  with  the  consonantal  vowels. 
It  has  the  sound  of  wa>  the  a  being  usually  open  (Sec.  18,  a) : 
moi,  poire. 

Phonetically  it  is  represented  by  [wa].  Thus:  moi  [mwa], 
poire  [pwa:r]. 

NASAL  VOWELS 

39.  Nasal  Vowels.  A  vowel  or  digraph  followed  im- 
mediately in  the  same  syllable  by  a  single  m  or  n  acquires 
a  nasal  quality.  The  m  and  n  are  silent :  bon,  mon-trer, 
temps,  faim. 

The  nasal  quality  is  produced  by  leaving  the  opening  from  the 
pharynx  to  the  nasal  passage  open,  thus  allowing  a  part  of  the  air 
of  expiration  to  escape  through  the  nose. 

Note  i.  From  the  rule  for  dividing  words  into  syllables  (Sec.  ii), 
it  will  be  seen  that  (disregarding  a  few  exceptions)  m  or  n  must  be  final 
or  followed  by  a  consonant  to  produce  the  nasal  sound. 

Note  2.  If  the  m  or  the  n  is  doubled,  the  preceding  vowel  is 
usually  not  nasal :  bonne  [bon]. 


INTRODUCTION 


40.  The  Four  Nasal  Vowels  are  represented  and  sounded 
as  follows  : 


an 

am 

en 

em 

in 

im 

yn 

ym 

ain 

aim 

ein 

eim 

Have  the  sound  of  a  in  M  far  "  (more  exactly,  the 
sound  of  a  of  Sec.  18,  b)  pronounced  through  the 
nose  :  dans,  chambre,  enfant,  temple. 


Have  the  sound  of  a  in  w  fan"  (more  exactly,  the 
sound  of  e,  Sec.  20)  pronounced  through  the  nose : 
fin,  simple,  nymphe,  pain,  faim,  plein. 


on 


om 


Have  the  sound  of  aw  in  "  fawn  "  (more  exactly, 
the  sound  of  0  of  Sec.  25,  b)  pronounced  through 
the  nose :  Don,  nom,  tromper. 


un 
eun 


um 
eum 


Have  the  sound  of  u  in  M  fur  "  (more  exactly,  the 
sound  of  eu  of  Sec.  32,  b)  pronounced  through 
the  nose  :  brun,  humble,  jeun. 


No  trace  of  the  m  or  n  should  appear  in  the  pronunci- 
ation of  the  nasal  vowels,  except  in  liaison  (Sec.  65,  Note). 

The  phonetic  symbols  of  the  four  nasal  vowels  are  respectively 
[a]  [e]  [5]  [«]. 

Thus,  the  examples  above  are  represented  as  follows : 
dans  [da]  fin  [fe]  faim  [fe]         tromper  [tr5-pe] 

chambre  [Ja:br]       simple  [se:pl]        plein  [pie]       brun  [brde] 
enfant  [a-fa]  nymphe  [ne:f]       bon  [b5]  humble  [ce:bl] 

temple  [ta:pl]  pain  [pe]  nom  [n5]         jeun  [362] 

Note  i.  Final  en  after  i  or  y  has  the  sound  of  the  nasal  in;  also 
nasal  en  after  i  everywhere  in  the  verbs  tenir  and  venir:  bien  [bje], 
moyen  [mwa-je] ;  tiens  [tje],  viendra  [vje-dra]. 

Note  2.  Before  the  nasal  in,  0  has  its  consonantal  sound  of  w  in 
"was  '  (Sec.  37):  loin  [lwe],  moins  [mwe]. 

Note  3.    On  in  monsieur  has  the  sound  of  mute  e :  [ma-sje]. 

Note  4.    For  final  ent  in  verbs,  see  Sec.  22,  c,  Note  1. 


1 6  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

QUANTITY  OF  VOWELS 

41.  Quantity.  The  extent  to  which  a  vowel  sound  is 
prolonged  is  called  its  quantity.  It  varies  according  to  its 
position,  and  is  styled  long  or  short. 

Note  i.  Similar  variations  occur  in  English,  though  less  markedly. 
Compare  "  I  am  sad  "  (the  a  short  in  quantity)  with  "  I  am  mad  "  (the 
a  longer  in  quantity). 

Note  2.  The  length  of  vowels  is  not  so  important  for  the  attention 
of  a  beginner  as  getting  the  correct  and  pure  sounds. 

42.  The  Phonetic  Symbol  for  a  long  vowel  is  [:],  placed 
after  the  vowel  affected  :  reine  [re:n],  Mtir  [ba-ti:r]. 

43.  Rules  for  Quantity.  Long  vowels  occur  only  in  the 
last  stressed  (Sec.  63)  or  clearly  pronounced  syllable  of  a 
word.    Hence  short  vowels  predominate. 

The  following  vowels  are  long : 

a.  Vowels  in  final  syllables  before  an  r  pronounced :  fer  [fe:r], 
finir  [fi-ni:r],  fort  [foir],  noir  [nwa:r]. 

b.  Certain  vowels  in  the  next  to  the  last  syllable  of  words  that 
end  in  a  mute  e  syllable,  namely  : 

(1)  Vowels  with  a  circumflex  accent:  ame  [a:m],  tete  [te:t], 
notre  [no:tr]. 

(2)  Nasal  vowels:  chambre  [ja:br],  prince  [pre:s],  ronde  [ro:d], 
humble  [ce:bl]. 

(3)  Vowels  when  followed  by  the  sounds  [v],  [z],  [3],  [j],  [r] : 
rive  [ri:v],  chaise  [Je:z],  rouge  [111:3],  fille  [fi:j],  terre  [ten:]. 

Note  i.  The  vowels  [o],  [0],  [a],  and  [e]  are  often  long  in  the  situ- 
ation of  b  even  when  other  consonants  than  those  of  (3)  follow  them : 
faute  [fo:t],  meule  [mo:l],  tasse  [ta:s],  reine  [re:n],  dixieme  [di-zje:m]. 

Note  2.  Vowels  other  than  those  mentioned  in  a  and  b  above  are 
usually  short.  In  particular,  vowels  that  constitute  the  final  sound  of  a 
word  are  short :  donne"  [do-ne],  chat  [Ja],  enfant  [a-fa]. 


INTRODUCTION  1 7 

SOUNDS  OF  CONSONANTS 

44.  Consonants  in  General  have  approximately  the  same 
sounds  as  in  English.  The  principal  differences  are  given 
below. 

45.  Final  Consonants  are  not  sounded  except  c,  f,  1,  and  r. 
Likewise  of  final  groups  of  consonants  only  c,  f,  1,  and  r  are 
sounded  :  nid,  trop,  des  (silent)  ;  sec,  vif,  nul,  pour  (sounded)  ; 
neufs  (f  sounded)  ;  corps  (r  sounded). 

Phonetically : 


nid  [ni] 

sec  [sek] 

pour  [pur] 

trop  [tro] 

vif  [vif] 

neufs  [noef] 

des  [de] 

nul  [nyl] 

corps  [ko:r] 

46.  a.  C  before  e,  i,  and  y,  and  likewise  9,  have  the  sound 
of  c  in  "  certain  "  :  cette,  ca. 

This  is  the  soft  c.   The  phonetic  symbol  is  [s] :  cette  [set],  ca  [sa]. 

b.  C  in  other  positions  (except  in  ch)  has  the  sound  of 
c  in  M  cast "  :  col,  avec. 

This  is  the  hard  c.  The  phonetic  symbol  is  [k] :  col  [kol], 
avec  [a-vek]. 

Note  i  .  Final  c,  usually  sounded,  is  silent  after  nasal  n :  blanc  [bla] ; 
also  in  clerc  [kle:r],  estomac  [es-to-ma],  pore  [po:r],  tabac  [ta-ba],  and  in 
a  few  other  words. 

Note  2.   C  in  second  has  the  sound  of  g  (Sec.  50,  b)  [so-g5]. 

v  47.  Ch  usually  has  the  sound  of  sh  in  "  shall  "  or  ch  in 
"  machine  "  :  chat,  chercher. 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [j] :  chat  [Ja],  chercher  [Jer-Je]. 

Note.  In  some  words,  mostly  those  derived  from  Greek,  ch  has  the 
sound  of  k :  chr6tien  [kre-tje],  dcho  [e-ko]. 


1 8  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

48.  In  pronouncing  the  English  d,  1,  n,  and  t,  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  is  placed  against  the  hard  palate  some  distance  back  of  the 
roots  of  the  upper  teeth.  In  French  it  is  generally  placed  against 
the  upper  teeth.  An  appreciably  different  sound  is  produced : 
dame  [dam],  ronde  [r5:d],  les  [le],  aller  [a-le],  nette  [net],  donner 
[do-ne],  tete  [tat]. 

49.  Final  f,  usually  sounded,  is  silent  in  clef  [kle],  and'  in  the 
plurals  bceufs  [b0],  nerfs  [ne:r],  ceufs  [0]. 

50.  a.  G  before  e,  i,  and  y  has  the  sound  of  s  in  "  meas- 
ure "  :  geler,  large,  gilet. 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [3] :  geler  [sjS-le],  large  parg],  gilet  [3i-le]. 

b.  G  in  other  positions  (except  in  gn)  has  the  sound  of 
g  in  "get":  gai,  grand. 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [g] :  gai  [ge],  grand  [gra]. 

Note.  After  g,  e  is  often  inserted  before  a,  0,  and  u,  to  indicate  the 
first  sound  of  g ;  u  is  often  inserted  before  e,  i,  and  y,  to  indicate  the 
second.    The  e  and  the  u  are  silent :   mangea  [ma-3a] ;  guerre  [ge:r]. 

51.  Gn  represents  a  single  sound,  much  like  the  last  part 
of  ny  in  "  canyon  "  :  gagner.  • 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [p]  :  gagner  [ga-ne]. 

52.  H  is  never  sounded  :  homme,  the\ 

In  some  words,  however,  initial  h  has  sufficient  force  to 
prevent  elision  and  linking,  as  in  huit,  haut.  The  h  is  then 
called  aspirate ;  otherwise  it  is  called  mute. 

Phonetically:  homme  [5m],  the"  [te] ;  le  huit  [te-qit],  le  haut  [b-o]. 

Note.    Among  the  commonest  words  beginning  with  aspirate  h  are 

haine  hardi  haut  honte 

hair  haricot  Havre  hors 

halle  hasard  hlros  huit 

hangar  hate  hibou  hurler 

Consult  a  lexicon  for  others. 


INTRODUCTION  19 

53.  J  has  the  sound  of  s  in  "  measure  "  :  je,  jardin. 

The  phonetic  symbol  is  [3] :  je  [39],  jardin  [3ar-de]. 

54.  Liquid  L.  Final  il  preceded  by  a  vowel  has  the  so- 
called  liquid  sound.  In  this  position  il  is  sounded  much  like 
the  English  consonant  y  in  "  yes."  The  preceding  vowel 
(or  digraph)  does  not  unite  with  the  i,  but  retains  its  indi- 
vidual sound,  the  e  of  the  ending  eil  having  the  sound  of  e 
([e],  Sec.  20)  :  travail,  sommeil,  seuil. 

This  is  called  liquid  1  (1  mouille).  The  phonetic  symbol  is  [j] : 
travail  [tra-va:j],  sommeil  [sD-me:j],  seuil  [soe:j]. 

Ill,  when  not  initial,  has  also  in  most  words  the  liquid 
sound  explained  above,  that  of  English  y :  veille,  fille. 

Phonetically :  veille  [ve:j],  fille  [fi:j]. 

Note.  In  the  following  words  ill  is  not  liquid:  mille  [mil],  ville 
[vil],  tranquille  [tra-kil]. 

55.  In  Final  il  preceded  by  a  consonant,  the  1  is  some- 
times sounded,  as  in  fil,  mil,  civil;  sometimes  silent,  as  in 
gentil,  fusil. 

Phonetically:  fil  [fil],  mil  [mil],  civil  [si-vil] ;  gentil  [3a-ti], 
fusil  [fy-zi]. 

Note  i.    For  the  tongue  position  in  1,  see  Sec.  48. 
Note  2.   In  fils  (meaning  "  son  ")  1  is  silent :  [fis]. 

56.  M  is  silent  in  automne  [o-ton].  For  m  and  n  nasal,  see 
Sees.  39  and  40.  For  the  tongue  position  in  n,  see  Sec.  48. 

1 

57.  P  is  silent  in  sept  [set]  and  compter  [k5-te]. 

58.  Qu  generally  has  the  sound  of  k :  quel,  quoique. 

Phonetically :  quel  [kel]  ;  quoique  [kwa-ka]. 


20  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

59.  R  is  pronounced  more  prominently  than  in  English : 
rose,  tres,  tenir,  irai. 

Phonetically :  rose  [ro:z],  tres  [tre],  tenir  [ta-ni:r],  irai  [i-re]. 

Note  i.  Two  different  sounds  of  r  are  in  common  use  in  France. 
One  is  a  trill  of  the  tip  of  the  tongue,  the  other  a  trill  of  the  extremity 
of  the  soft  palate.  Either  is  correct,  though  the  best  usage  perhaps  now 
favors  the  latter. 

Note  2.    R  is  silent  in  monsieur  [ma-sje]. 

Note  3.    For  final  er,  see  Sec.  21,  Note  1. 

60.  S  is  usually  sounded  like  English  initial  s,  but  between 
two  vowels  it  has  the  sound  of  z  :  salle,  pense,  classe  ;  rose, 
maison. 

Phonetically  :  salle  [sal],  pense  [pais],  classe  [kla:s] ;  rose  [ro:z], 
maison  [me-z5]. 

Note.    Final  s,  usually  silent,  is  sounded  in 
fils  [fis]  lis  [lis]  {usually)  ours  [urs] 

heias  [e-la:s]  mars  [mars]  sens  [sa:s]  {usually) 

jadis  [3a-dis]  mceurs  [mcers]  tous  [tus]  {as  a  pronoun) 

61.  T  in  the  combinations  tion,  tial,  tiel,  tieux,  and  tie 
usually  has  the  sound  of  s.    This  is  true  especially  in  words 


L'INSTITUT  ET  LE  PONT  DES  ARTS.  Pour  conserver  les  belles  traditions 
de  la  langue  frangaise  et  pour  l'embellir  (y  compris  meme  les  questions  d'or- 
thographe,  d'accentuation,  etc.),  il  y  a  une  fameuse  institution  connue  sous 
le  nom  d'Academie  frangaise,  reconnue  par  le  parlement  en  1637.  Elle  est 
composee  de  40  membres,  generalement  connus  sous  le  nom  d'  « immortels  ». 
lis  sont  ordinairement  choisis  a  cause  de  leur  talent  litteraire,  et,  quand  un 
membre  meurt,  les  survivants  elisent  son  successeur.  Les  ecrivains  francais 
se  considerent  tres  honores  d'etre  admis  au  sein  de  cette  assemblee.  L'Aca- 
demie  publie  le  Dictionnaire,  code  de  la  langue  frangaise. 

Les  seances  de  cette  Academie  ont  lieu  au  palais  de  l'lnstitut,  situe  sur 
la  rive  de  la  Seine,  en  face  du  pont  des  Arts.  Dans  le  meme  edifice  se 
reunissent  aussi  les  quatre  Academies  consacrees  aux  arts  et  aux  sciences, 
lesquelles  avec  l'Academie  frangaise  forment  l'lnstitut  de  France. 


22  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

that  correspond  in  form  and  meaning  to  English  words  in 
which  t  has  the  sound  of  sh  (not  ch),  or  is  represented  by 
soft  c :  nation,  partial,  essentiel,  ambitieux,  democratic 

Phonetically :  nation  [na-sjo],  partial  [par-sjal],  essentiel 
[e-sa-sjel],  ambitieux  [d-bi-sj'0],  democratic  [de-mo-kra-si]. 

Note  i.  Final  t,  usually  silent,  is  sounded  in  dot  [dot],  est  [est] 
(point  of  compass),  net  [net],  ouest  [west]. 

Note  2.    For  the  tongue  position  in  t,  see  Sec.  48. 

Note  3.     Since  h  is  always  silent,  th  is  sounded  like  t:  the*  [te]. 

62.  X  usually  has  the  sound  of  ks:  luxe,  exposer.  It  has 
the  sound  of  gz  in  ex  initial  before  a  vowel  or  mute  h  : 
exemple,  exhaler. 

Phonetically:  luxe  [lyks],  exposer  [eks-po-ze] ;  exemple  [eg-za:pl], 
exhaler  [eg-za-le]. 

Note.  X  has  the  sound  of  s  in  six  [sis],  dix  [dis],  soixante  [swa-sa:t], 
Bruxelles  [bry-sel] ;  the  sound  of  z  in  dix-huit  [di-zqit],  dix-neuf  [diz-ncef  ], 
deuxieme  [d0-zje:m],  sixieme  [si-zje:m],  dixieme  [di-zje:m]. 

STRESS 

63.  Stress.  As  indicated  in  Sec.  15,  d,  French  words  do 
not,  like  English,  have  a  strong  accent,  but  each  syllable  (ex- 
cept those  containing  mute  e)  is  clearly  pronounced.  There 
is,  however,  an  apparent  stress  of  voice  that  normally  falls 
on  the  last  syllable.  Phrases  likewise  have  a  stress  falling  on 
the  last  syllable  of  their  last  word. 

LIAISON 

64.  Liaison.  A  final  consonant  before  an  initial  vowel 
sound  is  often  pronounced  with  this  vowel  sound  when 
the    two   words    are   closely   connected   in   thought.     The 


INTRODUCTION  23 

result  of  this  is  that  the  words  are  run  together  and  pro- 
nounced as  one.  This  is  called  linking  (in  French,  liaison) : 
beaucoup"a  faire,  es£il. 

Phonetically:  beaucoup  a  faire  [bo-ku-pa-fe:r],  est-il  [e-til]. 

65.  Consonant  Changes  in  Liaison.    When  carried  over, 
a  final  d  is  sounded  like  t :  gramTenfant ; 

a  final  f  is  sounded  like  v :  neufhommes ; 

a  final  g  is  sounded  like  k :  longpiiver ; 

a  final  s  or  x  is  sounded  like  2 :  les"amis,  dixlunis. 

Phonetically:  grand  enfant  [gra-ta-fa],  neuf  hommes  [noe-vom], 
long  hiver  [l5-ki-ve:r],  les  amis  [le-za-mi],  dix  amis  [di-za-mi]. 

Note.  M  and  n  in  nasal  groups  are  carried  over.  The  nasal  quality 
of  the  vowel  is  then  largely  lost,  except  in  un  and  a  few  other  words. 
Monlimi  [mo-na-mi],  un~nomme  [ce-nom]. 

66.  Omission  of  Liaison.  Some  words,  notably  et,  and, 
never  permit  their  final  consonant  to  be  carried  over  to  a 
following  word. 

ELISION 

67.  Elision.  A  final  vowel  is  often  dropped  before  an 
initial  vowel  or  mute  h,  an  apostrophe  taking  its  place.  This 
is  called  elision  :  j'ai,  s'ils,  l'homme. 

68.  Cases  of  Elision.  The  following  words  alone,  undergo 
elision : 

a.  All  monosyllables  ending  in  mute  e. 
p.  Jusque ;  also  lorsque,  puisque,  and  quoique  before  il,  ils, 
elle,  elles,  on,  and  un. 

c.  La,  both  the  article  and  the  pronoun. 

d.  Si,  before  il  and  ils. 

e.  A  few  special  cases,  such  as  quelqu'un. 


24 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


PUNCTUATION 

69.  Punctuation  in  French  follows  in  the  main  the  same 
principles  as  in  English. 

The  use  of  the  dash  ( — )  to  denote  a  change  of  speaker 
in  a  conversation  is  to  be  noted.  The  whole  conversation 
quoted  may  then  be  inclosed  in  quotation  marks.  For 
many  purposes  the  place  of  the  dash  is  taken  by  les  points 
suspensifs  (.  .  .). 


70.  The    French    Names 

marks   are  — 

the  period 

the  comma 

the  semicolon 

the  colon 

the  dash 

the  quotation  marks 

the  interrogation  point 

the  exclamation  point 


for    the    common    punctuation 

le  point 

la  virgule 

le  point  et  virgule 

les  deux  points 

le  tiret 

les  guillemets 

le  point  d' interrogation 

le  point  d' exclamation 


LESSON   ONE 

GENDER -THE  ARTICLES 

71.  Gender  of  Nouns.  In  French  all  nouns,  whether  the 
names  of  persons,  animals,  or  things,  are  either  masculine 
or  feminine.  There  is  no  neuter  gender.  The  gender  of 
names  of  persons  or  animals  of  definite  sex  is  determined, 
as  in  English,  by  that  sex.  The  gender  of  other  nouns 
seems  arbitrary,  and  must  be  learned  for  each  word. 

Note  i.  Nouns  ending  in  certain  letters  are  apt  to  have  the  same 
gender;  likewise  the  names  of  certain  classes  of  things.    See  page  427. 

Note  2.  French  nouns  derived  from  Latin  masculines  and  neuters 
are  regularly  masculine  in  French ;  those  from  Latin  feminines  are 
regularly  feminine. 

72.  The  Definite  Article  the  is  expressed 

a.  With  masculine  nouns  in  the  singular  by  le. 

b.  With  feminine  nouns  in  the  singular  by  la. 

c.  With  all  nouns  in  the  plural  by  les. 

the  father,  leph-e  the  fathers,  lesperes 

the  mother,  la  mere  the  mothers,  les  meres 

73.  L'  in  Elision.  Before  words  beginning  with  a  vowel 
or  mute  h,  le  and  la  become  P. 

the  child,  Venfant  the  children,  les  enfatits 

the  man,  Vhomme  the  men,  les  hommes 

Notei  This  dropping  of  a  final  vowel  before  an  initial  vowel  sound 
for  the  sake  of  euphony,  and  the  substitution  of  the  apostrophe,  is  called 
elision.  It  takes  place  in  several  other  short  words ;  for  example,  de,  of. 
See  Sec.  68. 

25 


26  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

74.  The  Indefinite  Article  a  or  an  is  expressed 

a.  With  masculine  nouns  by  un. 

b.  With  feminine  nouns  by  une. 

a  brother,  unfrere  a  sister,  une  sceur 

75.  Repetition  of  Articles.     The  definite  and  indefinite 
articles  are  repeated  before  each  noun  to  which  they  belong. 

the  father  and  brother,  le  pere  et  lefrere 
a  brother  and  sister,  unfrere  et  une  soeur 

76.  The  Plural  of  Nouns  is  regularly  formed  by  adding 
s  to  the  singular. 

le  mari,  the  husband  les  maris,  the  husbands 

la  femme,  the  wife  les  femmes,  the  wives 

l'enfant,  the  child  les  enfants,  the  children 

VOCABULARY 

a,  has  le  frere,  the  brother 

aussi,  also  le  garcon,  the  boy 
avec,  with  l'homme,  the  man 

de,  of  le  mari,  the  husband 

deux,  two  la  mere,  the  mother 
l'enfant  m.f,  the  child  ont,  have 

est  [e],  is  ou,  where 

et  [e],  and  le  parent  m.f,  the  parent 

la  famille,  the  family  le  pere,  the  father 

la  femme  [fam],  the  woman,  the  qui,  who 

wife  la  sceur,  the  sister 

la  fille,  the  girl  sont,  are 

Drift  EXERCISE 

I .  Prefix  to  the  following  nouns  the  proper  word  for  the  : 
pere  garcons  filles  parents  homme 

mere  enfant  mari  sceur  hommes 


.    GENDER  — THE  ARTICLES  27 

2.  Prefix  to  the  following  nouns  the  proper  word  for  a  : 

garc,on  enfant  homme 

soeur  mere  parent 

3.  Change  to  the  plural  form  — 

le  frere  la  femme  la  soeur 

le  mari  l'homme  l'enfant 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

two  boys  of  the  man 

two  girls  also  a  father  and  mother 

the  brother  has  a  man  is 

the  brothers  have  the  men  are 

who  has  a  sister  ?  where  is  the  boy  ? 

of  the  girl  where  are  the  children  ? 

of  a  girl  the  husband  and  wife 

of  a  husband  with  the  women 


Model 


Une  Famille 


Un  gargon  et  une  fille  sont  avec  un  homme  et  une  femme.  Le 
gargon  est  le  frere  de  la  fille.  Le  gargon  a  une  soeur.  La  fille  a 
un  frere.  Le  gargon  est  le  frere  de  la  soeur.  La  fille  et  le  gargon 
ont  deux  parents.  L'homme  et  la  femme  sont  les  parents.  Les 
parents  ont  deux  enfants.  Les  enfants  de  l'homme  et  de  la  femme 
sont  le  gargon  et  la  fille.  Les  enfants  ont  un  pere  et  une  mere. 
La  mere  est  la  femme  de  l'homme.  L'homme  a  une  femme.  La 
femme  de  l'homme  est  la  mere  de  la  fille.  Le  frere  de  la  fille 
est  aussi  l'enfant  de  la  mere.  Le  mari  de  la  mere  est  le  pere. 
Le  pere  et  la  mere  sont  les  deux  parents.  Ou  est  le  pere?  Le 
pere  est  avec  la  mere.  Oil  sont  les  enfants  ?  Les  enfants  sont 
avec  les  parents.  Qui  sont  les  enfants?  Le  gargon  et  la  fille 
sont  les  enfants.    Qui  sont  les  parents? 


28  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH     . 

Theme 

A  man  is  with  a  boy  and  a  girl.  The  boy  and  the  girl  are  the 
children  of  the  man.  The  boy  is  the  brother  of  the  girl.  The  boy 
has  a  sister.  The  girl  is  the  sister.  The  girl  has  a  mother.  The 
mother  of  the  girl  is  the  wife  of  the  man.  The  man  has  a  wife. 
The  wife  of  the  man  is  the  mother  of  the  girl.  The  father  of  the 
girl  is  the  husband  of  the  woman.  The  father  and  mother  have 
two  children.  The  children  are  the  boy  and  girl.  Who  is  the 
brother  of  the  girl  ?  The  boy.  The  man  has  two  children.  Where 
is  the  sister  of  the  child  ?  The  girl  is  with  the  boy.  The  children 
are  with  the  man.  W7ho  is  the  man  ?  The  man  is  the  husband  of 
the  woman.  The  father  and  mother  are  the  parents  of  the  girl. 
The  boy  and  the  girl  have  a  father  and  mother. 

Oral 

i.  Qui  est  avec  l'homme  ?  2.  Qui  est  le  frere  de  la  fille  ? 
3.  Qui  a  une  sceur?  4.  Oil  est  la  sceur?  5.  Qui  a  deux  parents? 
6.  Qui  sont  les  parents  ?  7.  Qui  a  deux  enfants  ?  8.  Qui  sont  les 
enfants  de  la  femme?  9.  Qui  est  le  pere  de  la  fille?  10.  Qui  a 
une  femme?  11.  Qui  est  le  mari  de  la  mere?  12.  Oil  sont  les 
enfants  ?  13.  Oil  est  le  frere  de  la  fille  ?  14.  Qui  a  un  pere  et  une 
mere  ?    15.  Oil  sont  le  garcon  et  la  fille  ? 

Resume 

1.  The  boy  has  a  sister.  2.  The  woman  has  a  husband.  3.  The 
boy  and  girl  are  the  children.  4.  Wiho  are  the  parents  of  the  child  ? 
5.  Where  is  the  child  of  the  man  ?  6.  The  father  and  mother  are 
the  parents  of  the  child.  7.  The  boy  has  a  brother  and  sister. 
8.  Who  is  the  girl  with  the  woman  ?  9.  The  man  has  two  children. 
10.  The  children  have  a  father  and  mother.  11.  Who  is  the 
brojher  of  the  girl?  12.  The  man  is  the  father  of  two  children. 
13.  The  woman  is  with  the  boy  and  girl.  14.  Where  is  the  mother 
of  the  child?    15.  The  two  children  have  a  brother  and  sister. 


CONTRACTION  —  POSSESSION  29 

LESSON  TWO 

CONTRACTION  -  POSSESSION 

77.  Contraction  with  the  Article.  Whenever  the  prepo- 
sitions de  and  a  directly  precede  the  articles  le  and  les,  they 
contract  as  follows  : 

de  +  le  =  du  a  +  le  =  au 

de  +  les  =  des  a  4-  les  =  aux 

of  the  father,  dupere  to  the  father,  aupere 

of  the  fathers,  des  per es  to  the  fathers,  aux  pe  res 

the  son  of  the  father,  lefils  dupere 

Note.    No  contraction  takes  place  before  la  and  1\ 

of  the  family,  de  lafamille  to  the  man,  a  Vhomme 

78.  Possession  is  not  expressed  in  French  by  's,  but  by 
the  preposition  de,  of. 

John's  friend,  Pami  de  Jean 
the  girl's  father,  le pere  de  lafille 
the  boy's  sister,  la  sceur  du  gar  con 
the  children's  uncle,  Poticle  des  en/ants 

79.  Some  Possessive  Adjectives.  Possessive  adjectives, 
like  the  articles,  change  in  form  according  to  the  gender 
and  number  of  the  nouns  they  modify.    Among  them  are 


Before 

Before 

Before 

Masc.  Sing. 

Fem.  Sing. 

Pl. 

my 

mon 

ma 

mes 

his,  her 

son 

sa 

ses 

your 

votre 

votre 

vos 

Note.    Possessive 

adjectives,  like  articles,  are  repeated  before  each 

noun  they  modify. 

my 

father  and  mother, 

mon  ph~e  et  ma  mere 

3o 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 
VOCABULARY 


a,  to 

l'ami  m.,  the  friend 
Berthe,  Bertha 
cher,  dear 
le  cousin,  the  cousin 
dans,  in 


la  fille,  the  daughter,  girl 
le  fils  [fis],  the  son 

Jean,  John 

Marie,  Mary 
l'oncle,  the  uncle 
la  tante,  the  aunt 


Drill 


EXERCISE 


I.  Prefix  to  the  nouns  below  the  proper  form  for  (a)  my 
(b)  your,  (c)  his,  (d)  the,  (e)  her : 


famille 
oncle 

2.  Express  in  French 

of  the  father, 
of  the  mother 
of  the  child 
of  the  children 
to  the  father 
to  the  mother 
to  the  child 


freres 
homme 


sceurs 
pere 


to  the  children 
of  the  uncle 
to  the  son 
to  the  men 
of  the  sisters 
of  a  wife 
to  an  aunt* 


UNE  HUMBLE  FAMILLE  DE  PAYSANS.  Dans  la  gravure,  a  l'autre  page, 
assise  sur  le  tronc  d'arbre,  est  la  grand'mere,  un  fichu  sur  la  tete,  coiffure 
plutot  commune  des  femmes  de  la  campagne.  A  cote  d'elle  est  sa  bru,  la 
femme  de  son  fils,  l'homme  qui  se  tient  debout  a  ses  cotes.  C'est  la  fin 
d'une  dure  journee  de  travail,  et  ils  se  reposent  dans  la  cour  de  la  ferme 
avec  leurs  enfants,  apres  le  repas  du  soir.  Face  a  leurs  parents  et  a  leur 
grand'mere  nous  voyons  la  fille  la  plus  agee,  son  frere  sur  les  genoux  et  sa 
petite  soeur  a  cote  d'elle.  La  famille  est  pauvre,  et  cependant  c'est  par  le 
labeur  de  ces  gens  honnetes  et  economes  que  la  France  est  ce  qu'elle  est. 


32  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

my  brother  your  aunt 

my  father's  brother  the  boy's  aunt 

my  cousin's  brother  a  friend's  wife 

my  cousins'  brother  dear  to  the  son 

the  child's  brother  dear  to  her  son 

John's  brother  dear  to  his  mother 

Ma  Famille 

Dans  une  famille  le  fils  et  la  fllle  sont  les  enfants  du  pere  et  de 
la  mere.  Le  fils  est  cher  au  pere  et  a  la  mere  aussi.  Le  fils  est 
cher  aux  deux  parents.  Les  parents  sont  le  pere  et  la  mere.  La 
mere  est  la  femme  du  pere.  Le  pere  et  la  mere  sont  les  parents 
des  enfants.  Dans  ma  famille  mes  parents  ont  deux  filles  et  un 
fils.  Mon  pere  a  une  femme.  Sa  femme  est  ma  mere.  Mon  pere 
est  le  mari  de  ma  mere.  Mon  pere  et  ma  mere  sont  mes  parents. 
Mes  sceurs,  Marie  et  Berthe,  sont  les  filles  de  mes  parents.  Mon 
pere  a  une  sceur.  Ma  tante  est  la  sceur  de  mon  pere.  Ma  tante 
a  un  mari.  Son  mari  est  mon  oncle.  Les  enfants  de  mon  oncle 
sont  mes  cousins.   Mon  cousin  Jean  est  cher  au  frere  de  mon  oncle. 

Theme 

John  is  my  friend.  My  friend  has  a  father  and  mother.  His 
father  and  mother  are  his  parents.  My  friend  has  two  sisters, 
Mary  and  Bertha.  The  sisters  are  the  children  of  the  parents. 
John's  father  is  my  mother's  friend.  My  mother  has  a  brother. 
My  mother's  brother  is  my  uncle.  Who  is  your  uncle's  wife  ? 
My  aunt  is  my  uncle's  wife.  My  uncle  and  aunt  have  a  son.  An 
uncle's  son  is  a  cousin.  John  has  a  cousin  also.  The  cousin's 
mother  is  John's  aunt.  John  is  dear  to  the  cousin  and  to  the 
cousin's  family.  The  girls  with  John  are  his  sisters.  Who  is  dear 
to  John's  sisters  ? 


CONTRACTION  —  POSSESSION  33 

Oral 

1.  Qui  sont  les  enfants  ?  2.  Qui  sont  les  parents  ?  3.  Qui  est  la 
femme  de  votre  pere  ?  4.  Qui  sont  les  parents  des  enfants  ?  5.  Qui 
est  votre  pere  ?  6.  Qui  a  une  femme  ?  7.  Qui  est  votre  mere  ? 
8.  Qui  sont  les  filles  de  votre  mere  ?  9.  Qui  sont  Marie  et  Berthe  ? 
1  o.  Qui  est  la  femme  de  votre  oncle  ?  1  r .  Qui  est  votre 
cousin?  12.  Qui  est  la  mere  de  votre  ami  ?  13.  Qui  est  le  fils  de 
votre  oncle?  14.  Qui  sont  les  parents  de  votre  cousin?  15.  Qui 
est  cher  aux  parents  ? 

Resume 

1.  My  friend  has  an  uncle.  2.  His  uncle's  wife  is  his  aunt. 
3.  My  cousin  has  two  children,  a  son  and  a  daughter.  4.  My  uncle 
is  my  father's  brother.  5.  My  friend's  wife  is  your  mother's  sister. 
6.  The  children  of  John's  parents  are  my  cousins.  7.  The  son  is 
dear  to  the  father.  8.  The  son  is  dear  to  the  friends  of  his  family 
also.  9.  Who  is  the  father  of  the  boys?  10.  The  boys  are  with 
my  cousin  John.  11.  Where  are  the  children's  parents?  12.  My 
friend  has  a  boy  and  girl  in  his  family.  13.  The  child  is  dear 
to  the  mother.  14.  The  boy  is  the  son  of  my  father's  sister. 
15.  Mary  and  Bertha  are  the  daughters  of  my  brother's  friend. 


LESSON  THREE 

VERB  AND  SUBJECT  -  &TRE 

80.  Present  Tense  of  itre,  to  be. 

je  suis,  I  am  nous  sommes,  we  are 

tu  es,  thou  art  vous  etes,  you  are 

il  (elle)  est,  he  (she)  is  ils  (elles)  sont,  they  are 

Note  i.  This  tense  illustrates  the  fact  that  in  French,  as  in  English, 
the  form  of  a  verb  changes  with  the  person  and  number  of  its  subject. 
Note  2.    Observe  that  je  is  not  capitalized.    See  Sec.  5. 


34  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

81.  It  and  They,  French,  having  no  neuter  gender,  has 
no  special  form  for  the  subject  pronoun  it.  II  or  elle  is 
used  according  to  the  gender  of  the  word  to  which  the  it 
refers.    Likewise  they  is  ils  or  elles  as  the  gender  demands. 

I  have  a  book  ;  it  is  here.  J'ai  tin  livre ;  il  est  ici. 

I  have  a  pen ;  it  is  here.  fai  une  plume  ;  elle  est  ici. 

She  has  two  pencils ;  they  are  Elle  a  deux  crayons ;  ils  sont  ici. 

here. 

He  has  two  pens ;  they  are  here.  77  a  deux  plumes  ;  elles  sont  ici. 

82.  Subject  Noun.  When  the  subject  of  an  affirmative 
sentence  is  a  noun  expressed,  a  subject  pronoun  does  not 
accompany  the  verb. 

My  brother  has  two  books.  Monfrere  a  deux  livres. 

The  men  are  here.  Les  hommes  sont  ici. 

VOCABULARY 

a,  at,  to  la  fenetre,  the  window 
fe  banc  [ba],  the  bench,  settee  ici,  here 

le  bureau,    the    desk    (of    the  le  livre,  the  book 

teacher)  le  maitre    d'&ole,    the    school- 
le  cahier  [ka-je],  the  notebook  teacher  m. 

la  classe,  the  class  la  maitresse,  the  teacher  f. 

le  crayon,  the  pencil  la  plume,  the  pen 

dans,  in,  into  la  porte,  the  door 
derriere,  behind  pour,  for 

devant,  before,  in  front  of  le  pupitre,    the   desk    (of    the 
l'e*cole/,  the  school  pupil) 

al'&ole,  at  school  quatre,  four 

l'eleve  m.f.,  the  pupil  la  salle  de  classe,  the  classroom 
etes-vous,  are  you  sur,  on 

le  fauteuil,  the  armchair,  chair  le  tableau,  the  blackboard 

(of  the  teacher)  un,  une,  (as  a  numeral)  one 


VERB  AND  SUBJECT—  ETRE 


35 


Drill 

i.  Translate  into  French  — 

a.  of  the  boy 
of  the  girl 
cf  the  man 
of  the  men 
to  the  boy 
to  the  girl 
to  the  man 
to  the  men 

b.  the  teacher 

the  school-teacher 

to  the  teacher 

the  desk  (of  the  teacher) 

the  desk  (of  the  pupil) 

the  class 

c.  the  armchair,  it  is  here 
a  pen,  it  is  here 

one  pen 

one  of  the  windows 

2.  Give  the  full  tense  of  — 


of  the  parents 

to  the  teachers 

of  the  pens 

to  the  book 

of  the  pupil 

at  the  blackboard 

at  the  window 

at  one  window 

the  classroom 

of  the  classroom 

the  school 

at  school 

in  the  school 

on  the  blackboard 

the  notebooks,  they  are 

here 
the  pens,  they  are  here 
the  pens  are  here 


Model 


je  suis  ici,  tu  es  ici,  etc. 

je  suis  a  l'ecole 

je  suis  devant  la  fenetre 

Ma  Salle  de  Classe 


Je  suis  a  l'ecole  avec  mon  frere.  Nous  sommes  ici.  Nous  sommes 
dans  la  salle  de  classe.  Elle  a  deux  portes  et  quatre  fenetres.  Le 
fauteuil  et  le  bureau  devant  le  tableau  sont  pour  le  maitre  d'ecole ; 
les  bancs  et  les  pupitres  pour  les  eleves  de  la  classe.  Les  livres  et 
les  crayons  du  maitre  sont  sur  le  bureau.    Ses  plumes  sont  aussi 


36  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

sur  son  bureau.  Les  cahiers  des  e'leves  sont  sur  les  pupitres.  Le 
maitre  est  au  tableau  derriere  son  bureau.  Une  eleve  est  devant 
le  bureau  du  maitre.  Deux  des  eleves  sont  aux  fenetres.  «Ou 
sont  vos  livres  ?  — *  lis  sont  sur  le  pupitre  de  mon  frere.  —  Oil  sont 
vos  plumes  ?  —  Elles  sont  sur  mon  pupitre. » 

Theme 

We  are  at  school.  The  teacher  and  the  pupils  are  in  the  class- 
room. The  classroom  has  four  windows.  It  has  also  two  doors. 
One  pupil  is  at  the  board.  The  teacher  has  the  pupil's  notebook. 
I  am  in  front  of  the  teacher.  "  Who  has  my  books  ? "  "  I  have 
my  books.  They  are  here  on  the  teacher's  desk."  The  pupils'  pens 
and  pencils  are  in  the  desks.  The  teacher  has  his  book  on  his  desk. 
The  teacher's  desk  and  chair  are  in  front  of  the  blackboard.  The 
blackboard  is  behind  the  teacher.    Are  you  behind  the  teacher  ? 

Oral 

i.  Ou  etes-vous?  2.  Sommes-nous  dans  la  salle  de  classe? 
3.  Ou  est  le  fauteuil  du  maitre?  4.  Qui  a  un  pupitre?  5.  Qui 
a  un  bureau?  6.  Ou  sont  les  livres  du  maitre?  7.  Oil  est  le 
crayon  de  l'eleve  ?  8.  Qui  a  vos  livres  ?  9.  Ou  sont  les  cahiers 
des  eleves?  10.  Etes-vous  a.  l'ecole  ?  11.  Qui  est  au  tableau? 
12.  Qui  a  la  plume?  13.  Etes-vous  dans  le  fauteuil?  14.  Oil  est 
votre  livre  ?    15.  Qui  est  dans  la  salle  de  classe  ? 

1  A  dash  in  French  usually  indicates  a  change  of  speaker.    See  Sec.  69. 


UNE  SALLE  DE  CLASSE.  Cette  gravure  represente  une  salle  de  classe 
dans  une  ecole  primaire,  oil  les  petits  garcons  sont  generalement  en  tablier 
noir,  en  pantalon  court,  et  portent  des  chaussettes.  Ici  Tun  d'eux,  debout 
entre  son  banc  et  le  pupitre,  et  le  livre  a  la  main,  lit  pendant  que  les  autres 
suivent.  Son  voisin  de  droite,  cependant,  cherche  quelque  chose  dans  son 
pupitre  ouvert.  Derriere  eux,  au  mur,  nous  voyons  une  couple  de  cartes, 
et  des  gravures  pour  venir  en  aide  aux  descriptions  que  pourra  leur  faire 
le  maitre.  Les  petits  Francais  apprennent  tous  le  dessin,  et  le  relief  en 
platre  est  la  pour  servir  de  modele. 


UNE  SALLE  DE  CLASSE 


38  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Resume 

i.  Are  you  also  at  school  with  your  brother  and  sister?  2.  The 
two  windows  of  the  classroom  are  behind  the  teacher's  desk. 
3.  The  pupil's  pen  and  pencil  are  here.  4.  Four  of  the  books  are 
■for  the  school-teacher.  5.  We  are  at  the  blackboard  behind  the 
door.  6.  The  pupils  have  the  notebooks  on  the  benches.  7.  The 
man's  son  and  daughter  are  at  school.  8.  I  have  her  pencils ; 
they  are  on  my  desk.  9.  One  of  the  pupils  of  the  class  is  his 
sister.  10.  Where  is  the  pen?  It  is  in  my  desk.  11.  I  am  the 
teacher's  son.  12.  The  classroom  has  four  windows  and  two 
doors.  13.  Who  is  the  man  at  the  window?  14.  Where  are  the 
notebooks?  They  are  on  your  desk  with  the  books.  15.  The 
teacher  has  her  chair  before  her  desk. 


REVIEW 

(Lessons  One  to  Three) 
A.  General  Drill 

1 .  Give  all  forms  of  the  French  words  for  the,  a,  my, 
his,  your,  her. 

2.  Give  the  gender  of  the  following  nouns  and  state  in 
each  case  how  the  gender  is  known  : 

pere  fille  famille 

plume  eleve  livre 

3.  Place  before  the  nouns  below  the  proper  form  for 
(a)  the,  (b)  his,  (c)  to  the,  (d)  your,  (e)  of  the.  Also,  when 
the  number  allows,  for  (f)  a,  (g)  two. 

sceur  tantes  e'leve 

tableau  fen£tre  livres 

4.  Illustrate  by  examples  elision  and  contraction. 


THE  NEGATIVE—  AVOIR  39 

5.  Continue  je  suis  a  l'ecole,  tu  es  a  Pecole,  etc. 

6.  Fill  in  the  blanks : 

Ou  est livre  ?    est  sur bureau.    Ou  est 

plume?    est  sur pupitre.    Ou  est oncle?    

est  avec  femme.     Oil  sont enfants?     sont  sur 

bancs.    Nous dans salle.   Vous devant  - 

fenetre.    Le  cahier garcon.    Les  cahiers Aleves. 

,  B.  Translate  into  French 

1.  Mary  has  a  brother  and  sister.  2.  Her  father  and  mother 
are  her  parents.  3.  The  man  and  woman  have  a  family  of  two 
children.  4.  The  child  is  dear  to  the  father.  5.  My  brother  and 
sister  are  at  school.  6.  The  school-teacher  is  dear  to  the  pupils. 
7.  The  boys  are  at  the  windows.  8.  Where  are  Bertha's  pens? 
They  are  on  her  desk.  9.  The  pupil  has  one  pen ;  it  is  here. 
10.  The  boys'  notebooks  are  on  the  desk.  11.  Four  of  the  pupils 
at  the  blackboard  have  a  book.  12.  Who  is  at  school  with  the 
children  ?  13.  The  teachers  have  the  books  and  pencils.  14.  Where 
are  the  girls?  They  are  behind  the  armchair.  15.  Who  is  at  the 
door  ?  My  uncle  and  aunt. 


LESSON   FOUR 

THE  NEGATIVE-  A  VOIR 

83.  The  Negative  ne  .  .  .  pas.    The  ordinary  form  for  not 
with  a  verb  is  ne  .  .  .  pas,  ne  before  the  verb  and  pas  after  it. 

I  am  not  in  the  yard.  Je  ne  suis  pas  dans  la  cour. 

He  has  not  the  pen.  //  n*a  pas  la  plume. 

The  men  are  not  seated.  Les  homtnes  ne  sont  pas  assis. 

Note.    Observe  that  ne  undergoes  elision. 


40 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


84.  Present  Tense  of  erre,  Negatively. 

je  ne  suis  pas,  /  am  not  nous  ne  sommes  pas,  we  are  not 

tu  n'es  pas  etc.  vous  n'etes  pas  etc. 

il  (elle)  n'est  pas  ils  (elles)  ne  sont  pas 


85.  Present  Tense  of  avoir. 

a.  Affirmatively : 

j'ai,  I  have 

tu  as,  thou  hast 

il  (elle)  a,  he  (she)  has 

b.  Negatively : 

je  n'ai  pas,  I  have  not 
tu  n'as  pas       etc. 
il  (elle)  n'a  pas 


nous  avons,  we  have 
vous  avez,  you  have 
ils  (elles)  ont,  they  have 


nous  n'avons  pas,  we  have  not 
vous  n'avez  pas  etc. 

ils  (elles)  n'ont  pas 


86.  The  Present  of  avoir  with  Past  Participles  of  other 
verbs  forms  a  compound  tense,  the  past  indefinite,  which 
represents  sometimes  the  English  perfect,  sometimes  the 
English  simple  past. 


J'ai  trouve"  la  regie. 
P211e  a  trouve"  sa  plume. 
Nous   n'avons   pas  apporte  les 
livres. 


/  have  found  (I  found)  the  ruler. 
She  has  found  {she  found)  her  pen. 
We  have   not  brought  (did  not 
bring)  the  books. 

Note.    Observe  the  position  of  pas,  directly  after  the  form  of  avoir 
and  preceding  the  past  participle. 


apportS,  brought 

apres,  after 

assis,  seated,  sitting 
le  bras,  the  arm 
la  carte,  the  map 


VOCABULARY 

la  cloche,  the  bell 
la  cour,  the  yard 
debout,  standing 
donne,  give,  gives 
l'encre  /.,  the  ink 


THE  NEGATIVE  —  AVOIR 


41 


l'encrier  [a-kri-e]  m.,  the  ink- 
stand 
la  France,  France 
la  lecon,  the  lesson 
mais,  but 

montre,  shows,  is  showing 
le  porte-plume,  the  penholder 


quand,  when 
la  regie,  the  ruler 
sonne,  rings 
sous,  under 
trouve\  found 
voici,  here  is 
vont,  go  ( 3dpi.) 


EXERCISE 


Drill 

1.  Translate  into  French  — 


a. 

I  am 

he  has 

you  are 

I  have 

he  is 

the  man  has 

they  have 

she  is 

the  men  are 

they  are 

we  have 

we  are 

b. 

I  have  found 

we  brought 

she  gives 

I  found 

they  have  found 

they  go 

we  have  brought 

they  brought 

he  gives 

2.  Put  into  French  negatively,  the  expressions  in  1 ,  a  and  b. 

3.  Continue  — 

j'ai  un  encrier  je  ne  suis  pas  debout 

je  n'ai  pas  le  porte-plume  j'ai  trouve'  un  crayon 

4.  Read  the  Model  below,  making  the  affirmative  sen- 
tences negative,  and  the  negative  affirmative.  Make  no  change 
in  the  questions,  nor  in  expressions  beginning  with  voici. 


Model 


Une  Salle  de  Classe 


Le  maitre  est  avec  ses  e'leves  dans  la  classe.  II  n'est  pas  assis. 
II  est  debout  devant  ses  eleves.  II  a  une  regie  sous  le  bras ;  un 
eleve  est  au  tableau.  Le  maitre  montre  une  carte  de  France  a 
l'eleve.  Deux  eleves  sont  assis  devant  le  tableau.  lis  ont  un  porte- 
plume  et  un  cahier.    L'encre  est  dans  l'encrier.   Nous  sommes  assis. 


42  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Je  donne  une  plume  a  un  eleve.  II  a  un  porte-plume.  Je  n'ai  pas 
mon  cahier.  II  n'est  pas  ici.  Void  un  cahier.  « Avez-vous  un 
crayon?  — Je  n'ai  pas  trouve  mon  crayon,  mais  j'ai  apporte  ma 
plume.  Elle  est  dans  mon  pupitre. »  Apres  la  lecon,  la  cloche 
sonne.  Les  eleves  vont  dans  la  cour.  «  Ou  est  la  cour  ?  —  Elle 
est  derriere  l'ecole.    Nous  ne  sommes  pas  dans  la  cour. » 

Theme 

11  Who  is  in  the  yard  ? "  M  The  pupils  are  in  the  yard.  The 
yard  is  not  in  front  of  the  school.  We  are  not  with  the  teacher." 
M  Where  is  the  teacher  ? "  "  He  is  at  the  window  of  the  class- 
room." The  bell  rings.  When  it  rings,  the  pupils  go  into  the 
class.  The  teacher  is  standing  at  the  blackboard.  He  has  his 
ruler.  He  is  showing  the  map  to  the  pupils.  The  pupils  are  not 
at  the  blackboard.  My  uncle's  son  is  not  at  school.  He  has  not 
his  books.  I  have  brought  my  books,  but  I  did  not  bring  my  pencil. 
I  have  found  a  penholder  on  the  teacher's  desk.  Where  is  the 
inkstand  ?  The  teacher  has  not  his  book.  A  pupil  gives  a  book 
to  the  teacher. 

Oral 

i.  Avez-vous  trouve  le  maitre  dans  la  gravure  (picture)  ?  2.  Qui 
est  dans  la  salle  de  classe  ?  3.  Qui  est  debout  ?  4.  Qui  a  une  regie 
sous  le  bras?  5.  Qui  est  au  tableau?  6.  Qui  montre  la  carte? 
7.  A  qui  (whom)  ?  8.  Ou  sont  les  eleves  ?  9.  Qui  a  un  porte- 
plume  ?  1  o.  Ou  est  l'encre  ?  11.  Avez-vous  apporte  vos  livres  ? 
12.  Ou  vont  les  eleves  apres  la  classe?  13.  Oil  est  la  cour? 
14.  Qui  est  dans  la  cour  quand  la  cloche  sonne?  15.  Qui  est 
avec  les  e'leves  dans  la  cour  ? 

Resume 

1.  The  ink  is  in  the  inkstand  on  the  pupil's  desk.  2.  My  sister 
gives  a  penholder  to  her  son.  3.  The  pupils  are  standing  behind 
the  armchair  in  the  classroom.    4.  The  children  are  not  in  the  yard 


UNE  SALLE  DE  CLASSE  EN  ALSACE 

Le  maitre  demande  a  l'eleve  t  «  Quel  est  le  pays  represente  au  tableau  ? 
—  La  France,  monsieur  » ,  repond  l'eleve 


44  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

with  your  brother.  5.  We  found  his  pen,  but  we  did  not  find  her 
notebook.  6.  Here  is  the  woman;  she  brought  the  books  to  the 
teacher.  7.  The  teacher  is  showing  the  map  to  the  pupils.  8.  The 
boy  and  girl  go  into  the  classroom  when  the  bell  rings.  9.  She  has 
found  the  ruler.  It  is  on  her  desk.  1  o.  Who  has  John's  pencils  ? 
They  are  not  on  the  bench.  11.  Two  of  the  men  are  seated  at  the 
window.    12.  Who  is  the  man  standing  in  front  of  the  blackboard  ? 

13.  Mary  did  not  find  her  father  and  mother  after  the  lesson. 

14.  Here  is  the  teacher's  son;  he  rings  the  bell.  15.  The  school- 
teacher gives  a  lesson  to  the  class. 


LESSON   FIVE 

INTERROGATIVE  FORMS 

87.  The  Interrogative  Form  of  a  sentence  with  a  personal 
pronoun  as  subject  is  made  by  placing  the  pronoun  after 
the  verb  and  joining  the  two  words  by  a  hyphen. 

Is  he  in  the  room  ?  Est-il  da?is  la  chambre  f 

Have  you  not  two  brothers  ?        JV'avez-vous  pas  deux  freres  ? 
Have  you  found  a  pen  ?  Avez-vous  trouve  une  plume  ? 

88.  Present  Tense  of  itre>  Interrogatively. 

o.  Affirmatively  : 

suis-je  ?  am  I?  sommes-nous  ?  are  we  ? 

es-tu  ?  etc.  etes-vous  ?  etc. 

est-il(elle)  ?  sont-ils(elles)  ? 

b.  Negatively : 

ne  suis-je  pas?  am  I  not?  ne  sommes-nous  pas?  are  we  not? 

n'es-tu  pas  ?  etc.  n'etes-vous  pas  ?        *        etc. 

n 'est-il  (elle)  pas  ?  ne  sont-ils(elles)  pas  ? 


INTERROGATIVE  FORMS 


45 


89.  Present  Tense  of  avoir,  Interrogatively. 
a.  Affirmatively : 


ai-je  ?  have  I? 
as-tu  ?      etc. 
a-t-il(elle)  ? 

b.  Negatively : 

n 'ai-je  pas  ?  have  I  not  ? 
etc. 


avons-nous  ?  have  we  ? 
avez-vous  ?       etc. 
ont-ils(elles)  ? 


n'avons-nous  pas  ?  have  we  not  1 
etc. 


Note.  The  presence  of  t  in  the  forms  a-t-il  and  a-t-elle  is  in  order 
to  prevent  the  succession  of  two  vowels. 

90.  Interrogative  Form  with  Subject  Nouns.  A  sentence 
whose  subject  is  a  noun  is  made  interrogative,  among  other 
ways,  by  placing  the  subject  first,  and  repeating  it  by  the 
proper  form  of  the  subject  pronoun  placed  after  the  verb. 


Are  the  men  in  the  room  ? 

Has   his   sister  found   the  two 

pens? 
Have  not  your  sisters  my  book  ? 


Les    hommes    sont-ils    dans    la 

chambre  ? 
Sa  sceur  a-t-elle  trouve  les  deux 

plumes  1 
Vos   saeurs  n'ont-elles  pas  mon 

livre  ? 


VOCABULARY 


aujourd'hui,  today 
la  chaise,  the  chair 
la  chambre,  the  room 
la  grand' mere,  the  grandmother 
le  grand-pere,  the  grandfather 
le  jardin,  the  garden 
la  maison,  the  house 


le  neveu,  the  nephew 
la  niece,  the  niece 


non,  no 

ou,  or 

oui,  yes 

qui,  who, 

whom, 

which 

table,  the  table 

a  la  maison,  at  home,  at  the  house 


46  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Drill  EXERCISE 

i.  Translate  into  French  — 

have  you  a  cousin  ?  the  inkstands  are  not  here 

has  John  a  cousin  ?  are  not  the  inkstands  here  ? 

has  John's  father  a  cousin  ?  has  she  ? 

is  she  at  home  ?  are  they  not  ? 

is  Mary  at  home  ?  am  I  not  ? 

is  your  sister  at  home  ?  have  I  not  ? 

is  Mary's  sister  at  home  ?  have  they  not  found  ? 

the  children  are  here  the  men  who  are  here 

are  the  children  here  ?  the  tables  which  are  here 

2.  Change  into  questions  — 

Marie  est  debout  Nous  ne  sommes  pas  k  la  maison 

La  niece  de  Jean  a  une  sceur  Son  tils  n'est  pas  ici 

3.  Continue  — 

Suis-je  a  la  maison  ?  Ne  suis-je  pas  avec  Marie  ? 

N'ai-je  pas  une  table  ?  Ai-je  trouve  le  crayon  ? 

4.  Change,  in  the  Model  below,  the  affirmative  sentences 
(except  voici  .  .  .)  into  negative,  omitting  the  words  oui,  non, 
and  mais. 

Model  LA  Famille  a  la  Maison 

«  Etes-vous  a.  Pe'cole  aujourd'hui  ?  —  Non,  nous  ne  sommes  pas 
a  l'ecole ;  nous  sommes  a  la  maison.  —  Vos  parents  sont-ils  avec 
vous  ?  —  Oui,  ils  sont  aussi  a  la  maison.  —  Oil  sont-ils  ?  —  lis 
sont  dans  ma  chambre.  Voici  ma  chambre.  —  A-t-elle  une  table  ? 
—  Oui,  elle  a  une  table,  deux  chaises  et  un  fauteuil.  J'ai  aussi  un 
bureau  dans  ma  chambre.  —  Etes-vous  debout  devant  votre 
bureau  ?  — Non,  je  suis  assis  dans  mon  fauteuil.  — Votre  grand- 
pere  est-il  dans  la  maison  ?  —  Non,  il  est  assis  dans  le  jardin  avec 
mon  cousin  Jean.    — Votre  cousin  est-il  l'enfant  de  votre  oncle? 


INTERROGATIVE  FORMS  47 

—  Oui,  et  il  est  aussi  le  neveu  de  mon  pere.  — Votre  cousin 
n'a-t-il  pas  une  ou  deux  sceurs  ?  —  II  a  deux  soeurs  qui  sont  les 
nieces  de  mon  pere.  —  Ne  sont-elles  pas  dans  la  cour  qui  est 
derriere  la  maison  ?  —  Marie  est  dans  la  cour,  mais  sa  sceur  est 
ici  avec  sa  grand 'mere. » 

Theme 

"  Has  your  grandmother  a  husband  ?  "  M  My  grandmother  has 
a  husband,  who  is  my  grandfather."  "Is  not  your  grandfather 
seated  with  his  wife  on  a  bench  in  the  garden  ? "  "  No,  he  is  in 
my  brother's  room.  My  grandmother  is  with  my  cousin  in  front 
of  the  house."  M  Is  not  your  cousin  at  school  today  ?  "  M  No,  my 
cousin  John,  and  Mary,  John's  sister,  are  at  home  today.  John  is 
my  father's  nephew ;  Mary  is  my  father's  niece."  M  Is  the  family 
at  home  ?  "  M  Yes,  it  is  at  home."  M  Are  not  your  uncle  and  your 
cousin  John  in  the  yard  ?  "  M  Yes,  they  are  in  the  yard  which  is  in 
front  of  the  house."  "Has  your  room  an  armchair?  Has  it  a 
blackboard  ? " 

Oral 

1.  Etes-vous  a  l'e'cole  aujourd'hui  ?  2.  Ou  sont  vos  parents? 
3.  Ou  est  votre  chambre  ?  4.  Votre  chambre  a-t-elle  une  table  ? 
5.  N'a-t-elle  pas  aussi  deux  chaises  ?  6.  Avez-vous  un  pupitre  dans 
votre  chambre?  7.  Votre  grand-pere  est-il  a  la  maison?  8.  Votre 
grand-pere  a-t-il  une  femme  ?  9.  Qui  est  le  neveu  de  votre  pere  ? 
10.  Votre  maison  a-t-elle  une  cour?  11.  La  cour  n'est-elle  pas 
derriere  la  maison?  12.  Marie  est-elle  dans  la  cour?  13.  Qui  est 
Jean  ?    14.  Ou  est  Jean  ?    15.  Jean  est-il  le  frere  de  Marie  ? 

Resume 

1.  My  mother  is  at  home  with  her  children.  2.  My  father's 
mother  is  one  of  my  grandmothers.  3.  Here  is  John's  chair  behind 
the  door  in  my  room.  4.  Is  Mary  in  the  house  with  her  cousin  ? 
No,   she   is   here   in   the   garden.     5.  Where   is   your   nephew's 


48  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

penholder?  It  is  in  my  desk.  6.  Who  is  the  man  who  rings  the 
bell  at  school?  7.  My  uncle  is  my  aunt's  husband,  and  he  has  a 
son  and  daughter.  8.  Are  you  seated  before  the  class  or  standing 
at  the  blackboard  ?  9.  Are  not  my  books  on  the  table  which  is  in 
John's  room?  10.  Mary,  John's  niece,  is  his  brother's  daughter. 
1 1.  Has  he  not  brought  the  pens  to  his  uncle's  children?  12.  Did 
the  pupil  bring  a  pencil  and  a  notebook  to  school  today  ?  13.  Yes, 
and  he  found  also  the  teacher's  inkstand  on  his  desk.  14.  Is  my 
grandfather's  chair  in  front  of  the  window?  15.  The  teacher  is 
showing  a  map  of  France  to  his  class. 


LESSON   SIX 

PRESENT  TENSE  FORMS 

91.  The  Present  Tense  (indicative)  is  treated  in  full  later. 
In  the  majority  of  verbs  it  follows  the  model  below. 

je  donne,  I  give  nous  donnons,  we  give 

tu  donnes,  thou  givest  vous  donnez,  you  give 

il  donne,  he  gives  ils  donnent,  they  give 

Note  i.  The  pupil  is  already  familiar  with  the  irregular  presents  of 
etre  and  avoir.  Others  will  be  given  from  time  to  time  in  the  lesson 
vocabularies. 

Note  2.  Interrogative  forms  of  the  present  are  made  in  accordance 
with  Lesson  Five.    Thus  : 


nous  donnons 

becomes 

donnons-nous  ? 

il  ecrit 

becomes 

ecrit-il  ? 

il  donne 

becomes 

donne-t-il  ? 

l'eleve  lit 

becomes 

l'eleve  lit-il  ? 

92.  Auxiliary  Forms  in  English  often  correspond  to  the 
French  simple  present.    Thus  : 

je  donne,  I  give,  I  am  giving,  I  do  give 


PRESENT  TENSE  FORMS  49 

Likewise,  in  negative  and  interrogative  forms : 

il  ne  donne  pas,  he  is  not  giving,  he  does  not  give 

donne-t-il  ?  is  he  giving  ?  does  he.  give  t 

ne  donne-t-il  pas  ?  is  he  not  giving  ?  does  he  not  give  ? 

VOCABULARY 

la  craie,  the  chalk  mademoiselle,  Miss 

difficile,  difficult  monsieur  [mo-sjo],  Mr.,  sir 

l'exemple  m.,  the  example,  illus-     je  montre,  etc.,  I  show,  etc. 

trative  sentence  montrez-moi,  show  me 

facile,  easy  le  morceau,  the  piece 

francais,  French  la  phrase,  the  sentence 

la  grammaire,  the  grammar  la  regie,  the  rule 

la  lecture,  the  reading  au  tableau,  on  (at)  the  blackboard 

madame,  Mrs.,  madam  je  trouve,  etc.,  I  find,  etc. 

lecon  de  grammaire,  grammar  lesson 
lecon  de  lecture,  reading  lesson 
livre  de  francais,  French  book 

Note  i  .  These  last  three  phrases  illustrate  a  common  French  usage 
in  which  two  nouns  connected  by  de  correspond  in  English  to  a  noun 
preceded  by  an  adjective. 

Note  2.  Livre  de  francais  means  a  book  of  French,  that  is,  a  French 
textbook ;  livre  francais.  an  expression  with  which  we  are  soon  to  become 
familiar,  means  a  book  that  is  printed  in  French  or  that  has  some  French 
characteristic. 

Irregular  Presents 

je  lis,  /  read  nous  lisons,  we  read 

tu  lis,  thou  readest  vous  lisez,  you  read 

il  lit,  he  reads  ils  lisent,  they  read 

j'ecris,  I  write  nous  ecrivons,  we  write 

tu  ecris,  thou  writest  vous  e'crivez,  you  write 

il  ecrit,  he  writes  ils  ecrivent,  they  write 


5o 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


EXERCISE 


Drill 

i .  Translate  into  French  — 

a.  he  shows 
she  reads 
he  writes 
we  give 

we  are  giving 
are  we  giving  ? 
do  we  give  ? 

b.  a  book 

a  French  book 
a  reading  book 

c.  Mr.  Lacour 
Mrs.  Lacour 

Miss  Lacour 


yes,  sir 

no,  sir 

I  am  here,  sir 


are  we  not  giving  ? 
does  he  read  ? 
does  the  pupil  read  ? 
are  they  showing  ? 
have  I  found  ? 
did  he  find  ? 
does  he  find  ? 

the  grammar  lesson 
the  grammar  rules 
my  French  lesson 

yes,  Mrs.  Lacour  ! 
no,  Miss  Lacour 
yes,  Mr.  Lacour 


2.  Continue  — 
je  montre 

je  donne  les  regies 
je  ne  donne  pas 
je  lis  la  lecon 

3.  Fill  the  blanks  : 
nous  montr—  la  phrase 

montrent carte 

elle  donn regies 

vous  lis--- grammaire 


je  trouve 

je  n'ecris  pas  mes  phrases 
n'ai-je  pas  trouve  la  grammaire  ? 
suis-je  au  tableau  ? 

don—  elle cahier? 

ils  lis lecon 

_  enfants  ecriv--  la  regie 

je  ne  donn deux  legons 


4.  Replace  in  the  following  Model  the  subjects  of  the  verbs 
by  je,  whenever  the  meaning  allows,  making  the  corresponding 
changes  in  the  verbs.    Replace  them  likewise  by  vous ;  elles. 

1  In  conversation  the  French  say  oui,  madame,  not  out,  Madame  Lacour  \ 
similarly  with  mademoiselle  and  monsieur. 


PRESENT  TENSE  FORMS  51 

Model  La  Leqon 

«  N'avez-vous  pas  votre  livre  de  francais  ?  —  Oui,  monsieur,  il 
est  sur  mon  pupitre. »  Le  maitre  donne  une  leQon  de  grammaire 
aux  e'leves.  11  lit  les  regies,  et  il  e'crit  les  exemples  au  tableau  avec 
un  morceau  de  craie.  II  montre  les  exemples  aux  eleves.  J'e'cris 
dans  mon  cahier  avec  ma  plume.  Nous  ecrivons  les  phrases  qui 
sont  sur  le  tableau.  Mon  frere  n'ecrit  pas  les  exemples.  II  a  sa 
grammaire,  mais  il  n'a  pas  apporte  son  cahier.  «  Montrez-moi  la 
lecon.  La  lecon  est-elle  difficile  ?  —  Non,  elle  est  facile. »  Apres 
la  lecon  de  grammaire  nous  avons  la  le^on  de  lecture.  Les  e'leves 
n'e'crivent  pas.  Le  maitre  lit  devant  les  e'leves.  Nous  lisons  apres 
le  maitre,  et  nous  ecrivons  les  exercices  a  la  maison. 

Theme 

Today  we  have  a  reading  lesson.  The  teacher  is  standing  in 
front  of  the  class.  We  read  the  lesson  with  the  teacher.  My 
cousin  is  not  at  his  desk.  He  is  at  the  board  and  he  is  writing 
the  exercise.  "Is  not  your  brother  writing  with  the  chalk  ? " 
M  Yes,  sir ;  he  is  writing  with  a  piece  of  chalk."  "  Have  we  not 
a  grammar  lesson  ?  "  M  Yes,  sir."  The  teacher  gives  the  rules  of 
the  lesson  to  the  pupils  and  they  write  the  examples  in  a  notebook. 
M  Where  are  the  examples  ? "  "  They  are  on  the  blackboard." 
"  Show  me  the  examples."  After  the  lesson  the  children  go  home 
and  write  the  exercises.  We  show  the  exercises  to  the  teacher. 
M  Show  me  your  notebook." 

Oral 

1.  Montrez-moi  votre  livre  de  francais.  2.  Oil  est-il?  3.  Qui 
donne  la  lecon  de  grammaire?  4.  Le  maitre  ecrit-il  les  regies 
au  tableau?  5.  ficrit-il  les  regies  au  tableau  avec  un  crayon? 
6.  Les  enfants  lisent-ils  les  regies  ?  7.  Votre  frere  a-t-il  apporte  sa 
grammaire?    8.  La  lecon  de  grammaire  n'est-elle  pas  difficile? 


52 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


9.  Avons-nous  une  le- 
c,on  de  lecture  aujour- 
d'hui  ?  1  o.  Qui  lit  apres 
le  maitre?  11.  Ou 
sont  les  exemples  de  la 
lecon?  12.  Les  eleves 
ecrivent-ils  au  tableau  ? 

13.  ficrivez-vous  vos 
exercices     a     l'ecole  ? 

14.  A  qui  (whom)  les 
eleves  donnent-ils  les 
exercices  ?  15.  Les  en- 
fants  vont-ils  dans  la 
cour  apres  la  lecbn  ? 

Resume 

1.  The    pupils    are 
writing   the   grammar 
lesson   on   the   black- 
board.    2.  When  does 
he    give    the    French 
lesson  to  the  children? 
'  3.  I  am  giving  a  map 
of  France  to  my  sister's  son.    4.  The  teacher  is  reading  the  rules 
of  grammar  to  his  class.     5.  Is  the  lesson  for  today  easy?    No, 

1  L'histoire  d'Alphonse  Daudet,  La  Demttre  Classe,  dont  nous  repro- 
duisons  ici  quelques  paragraphes,  est  un  incident  de  cette  epoque : 

«  Mes  enfants,  c'est  la  derniere  fois  que  je  vous  fais  la  classe.  Le  nouveau 
maitre  arrive  demain.    Aujourd'hui,  c'est  votre  derniere  lecon  de  francais. » 

Tout  a  coup  l'horloge  de  1'eglise  sonna  midi,  puis  PAngelus.  Au  meme 
moment,  les  trompettes  des  Prussiens  qui  revenaient  de  l'exercice  ecla- 
terent  sous  nos  fenetres.  .  .  .    M.  Hamel  se  leva,  tout  pale,  dans  sa  chaire. 

«  Mes  amis,  dit-il,  mes  amis,  je  . . .  je  .  . . »  Mais  quelque  chose  l'etourrait. 
II  ne  pouvait  pas  achever  sa  phrase.  Alors  il  se  tourna  vers  le  tableau,  prit 
un  morceau  de  craie,  et,  en  appuyant  de  toutes  ses  forces,  il  ecrivit  aussi 
gros  qu'il  put :  «  Vive  la  France  !  » 


LA  DERNIERE  CLASSE 

A  la  suite  de  la  guerre  de  1 870,  l'Alsace  et  la  Lor- 
raine devinrent  allemandes,  et  la  langue  fran- 
caise  cessa  d'etre  enseignee  dans  les  ecoles1 


PRESENT  TENSE  FORMS  53 

sir,  it  is  difficult.  6.  Do  you  read  the  reading  lesson  after  the 
teacher  ?  7.  Yes,  Miss  Hamel,  but  we  write  the  exercises  at 
home.  8.  Miss  Riou  writes  the  sentences  in  her  notebook.  9.  At 
school  the  teachers  write  the  examples  with  a  piece  of  chalk. 
10.  After  the  lesson  the  boys  and  girls  go  into  the  yard.  11.  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Riou,  John's  father  and  mother,  are  in  the  house. 
12.  Show  me  the  French  books  which  are  on  your  desk.  13.  Mary 
is  showing  her  French  exercises  to  the  pupils.  14.  When  the  bell 
rings,  my  brother  and  sister  go  to  school.  15.  Here  is  the  man 
who  found  the  pencils ;  they  are  on  the  table. 


REVIEW 

(Lessons  Four  to  Six) 
A.  General  Drill 

1.  Complete    the    present    indicative    of    (a)    je    montre, 
(b)  j'&ris  (neg.),  (c)  j'ai  (neg.-int),  (d)  je  suis  (int.). 

2.  Express  in  French  — 

(7.  she  gives  she  has  found  she  writes 

she  has  she  found  she  is 

b.  did  she  bring  ?  does  she  bring  ?  is  she  giving  ? 
has  she  brought  ?            is  she  ?                          is  she  reading? 

c.  we  are  not  showing  we  do  not  show 
we  did  not  show  we  have  not  found 

d.  do  you  not  read  ?  did  you  not  find  ? 

have  you  not  found  ?  are  you  not  giving  ? 

3.  Change  to  the  interrogative  — 

vous  etes  il  n'a  pas  trouve 

les  chaises  sont  le  maitre  lit 

les  hommes  ont  la  fille  n'e'crit  pas 


54  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

he  is  reading  the  grandfather  or  the  grand- 
he  is  sitting  in  the  chair  mother 
we  are  standing  she  is  at  home 
they  go  to  school  a  grammar  lesson 
yes  or  no  .a  French  grammar 
here  is  a  penholder  show  me  the  map 
where  is  it  ?  a  map  of  France 

5 .  Replace,  below,  je  by  il ;  by  nous  ;  vous  ;  elles  ;  l'61eve  ; 
ses  freres.  Then,  with  each  subject,  change  to  the  negative 
form ;  to  the  interrogative ;  negative-interrogative. 

je  suis  a  l'e'oole  je  lis  la  lecon 

j'ai  un  livre  je  montre  la  carte  aux  eleves 

j'ecris  les  exercices 

B.  Translate  into  French 

1.  John  is  not  with  his  brother  and  sister.  2.  Are  you  writing 
the  grammar  lesson  on  the  blackboard?  3.  Here  is  the  girl  who 
found  the  teacher's  pencils.  4.  The  school-teacher  is  showing  his 
map  of  France  to  the  pupils.  5.  Where  did  you  find  my  pen? 
It  is  here  on  my  desk.  6.  Where  is  the  French  lesson  ?  We  have 
a  reading  lesson  today.  7.  The  man  who  rings  the  bell  is  not  my 
uncle.  8%  Show  me  your  notebook ;  I  am  writing  my  French 
exercise.  9.  Did  the  boy  bring  his  French  book  to  school  today  ? 
10.  Are  you  reading  the  book  which  is  on  your  desk?  11.  Do  you 
write  your  exercises  with  a  pen  or  with  a  pencil?  12.  Are  the 
children  at  home  today?  No,  sir,  they  are  at  school.  13.  The 
pupil  who  is  sitting  on  the  bench  is  reading  his  grammar  lesson. 
1 4.  The  girl  who  is  standing  in  front  of  the  teacher's  desk  is  your 
niece.  15.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Lebon,  Mary's  father  and  mother,  are 
standing  at  the  window. 


PLURAL  OF  NOUNS  55 

LESSON   SEVEN 

PLURAL  OF  NOUNS 

93.  Irregular  Plurals.  It  has  been  stated  in  Sec.  y6  that 
nouns  in  French  regularly  form  their  plural  by  the  addition 
of  8..  The  following  exceptions  are  important : 

a.  Nouns  ending  in  s,  x,  or  z  remain  unchanged. 

le  fils,  the  son  les  fils,  the  sons 

la  noix,  the  nut  les  noix,  the  nuts 

le  nez,  the  nose  les  nez,  the  noses 

b.  Nouns  ending  in  au  and  eu,  and  seven  in  ou,  add  x. 

Poiseau,  the  bird  les  oiseaux,  the  birds 

le  neveu,  the  nephew  les  neveux,  the  nephews 

le  bijou,  the  jewel  les  bijoux,  the  jewels 

The  seven  nouns  in  ou  are 

le  bijou,  the  jewel  le  hibou,  the  owl 

le  caillou,  the  pebble  le  joujou,  the  plaything 

le  chou,  the  cabbage  le  pou,  the  louse 

le  genou,  the  knee 

Note  i.  The  h  in  hibou  is  aspirate :  therefore,  le  hibou.  See  Sec.  52. 
Note  2.    Other  nouns  in  ou  add  s. 

le  trou,  the  hole  les  trous,  the  holes 

c.  Most  nouns  ending  in  al  change  this  termination  to  aux. 
le  cheval,  the  horse  les  chevaux,  the  horses 

Note.    For  exceptions  to  this  see  Sec.  311. 

d.  The  following  nouns  have  irregular  plural  forms : 

le  del,  the  sky  les  cieux,  the  skies 

Poeil,  the  eye  les  yeux,  the  eyes 


56 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


VOCABULARY 


l'all<§e/.,  the  path 
l'animal  m.,  the  animal 
l'arbre  m.,  the  tree 

le  bois,  the  wood 

la  bonne,  the  maid,  nursemaid 

le  chapeau,  the  hat 

le  gateau,  the  cake 


gns,  gray 
le  journal,  the  newspaper 
le  manteau,  the  cloak 
le  monsieur  [ma-sjo],  the  gentle- 
man 
le  pare  [park],  the  park 
le  sac,  the  bag 

je  chante,  etc.,  I  sing,  etc. 

a  cote*  de,  beside 

en  face  de,  opposite 

voila,  there  is  (are)  {calling  attention  to  an  object) 

il  y  a,  there  is  (are)  (merely  stating  existence  of  an  object) 


Note.     Other  words  used  in  the  exercises  below  will  be  foui 

in  Sec.  93. 

Drin                                                EXERCISE 

I.  Give  the  plural  of  — 

le  nez                       la  niece 

Foiseau 

le  journal                 votre  fils 

le  ciel 

la  noix                     le  caillou 

son  ceil 

le  fils                        l'homme 

un  bijou 

le  neveu                   mon  animal 

le  chapeau  de  Jean 

2.  Give  the  singular  of  — 

ses  chevaux        mes  yeux       les  hiboux 

ves  manteaux 

les  enfants         les  nez            deux  bras 

les  sacs 

3.  Continue  — 

j'ai  deux  yeux 

je  n'ai  pas  deux  nez 

je  donne  un  sac  de  noix 


je  ne  chante  pas 

je  lis  les  journaux 

ne  suis-je  pas  dans  les  bois  ? 


PLURAL  OF  NOUNS  57 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

there 's  my  horse  he  is  singing 

there  is  a  horse  in  the  park  does  he  sing  ? 

behind  the  trees  the  owl  is  gray 

beside  the  tree  the  owl's  hole 

opposite  the  park  the  owls'  holes 

5.  Take  from  the  Model  below  each  noun  with  the  modi- 
fying word  (if  any)  that  precedes  it,  and  then  change  each 
from  the  singular  to  the  plural  and  vice  versa  (change  un  to 
deux,  deux  to  un). 

Model  Le  Parc 

Je  suis  dans  le  parc  avec  les  neveux  de  mon  pere.  Le  parc  est 
en  face  de  ma  maison.  Les  oiseaux  chantent  dans  les  arbres. 
Dans  le  bois  il  y  a  deux  hiboux.  Le  hibou  est  un  oiseau.  Voila 
un  homme  qui  lit  ses  journaux  sur  le  banc.  A  cote  de  l'homme  il 
y  a  une  bonne  et  les  fils  de  l'homme.  Un  des  fils  est  sur  les 
genoux  du  monsieur.  Les  yeux  de  l'enfant  sont  gris.  Son  chapeau 
est  derriere  le  banc  sur  les  cailloux  de  l'allee.  Les  joujoux  et  les 
manteaux  des  enfants  sont  dans  les  bras  de  la  bonne.  Elle  donne 
aux  enfants  les  noix  et  les  gateaux  qui  sont  dans  son  sac.  Dans 
l'allee  pour  les  chevaux  il  y  a  un  homme  et  son  cheval. 

Theme 

There  is  a  park  opposite  my  house.  In  the  woods  there  is  a 
path  for  the  horses.  The  two  horses  of  my  nephews  are  not  in 
the  park.  There  is  a  bench!  On  the  bench  a  maid  is  reading 
a  book  to  a  child.  The  child's  eyes  are  gray.  He  is  in  the  arms 
of  the  maid  and  he  has  two  cakes.  The  maid  reads  the  lesson 
on  the  animals  and  birds.  M  Here  are  two  owls.  The  owl  is  a 
bird."  Beside  the  maid,  on  the  bench,  are  the  children's  cloaks, 
hats,  and  playthings.  There 's  a  gentleman  and  his  sons.  He  is 
reading  his  newspapers. 


58  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Oral 

i.  Le  pare  est-il  en  face  de  votre  maison  ?  2.  Les  oiseaux  sont- 
ils  dans  les  arbres  ?  3.  Ou  sont  les  arbres  ?  4.  Le  hibou  est-il  un 
animal?  5.  Lisez-vous  les  journaux?  6.  Ou  est  la  bonne?  7.  Qui 
est  sur  les  genoux  de  la  bonne  ?  8.  L'enfant  est-il  dans  les  bras  de 
la  bonne  ?  9.  0 11  est  l'allee  pour  les  chevaux  ?  10.  Votre  livre  est-il 
sur  vos  genoux?  11.  Vos  yeux  sont-ils  gris?  12.  Les  chapeaux 
des  eleves  sont-ils  dans  la  classe  ?  13.  Vous  et  votre  frere  etes-vous 
les  fils  de  vos  parents?  14.  Avez-vous  deux  genoux?  15.  Avez- 
vous  deux  nez? 

Resume 

1.  The  maid  who  is  on  the  settee  is  reading  a  French  book. 
2.  The  man  gives  the  nuts  to  the  children.  3.  My  nephews  found 
the  birds  in  the  trees  of  my  uncle's  garden.  4.  My  aunt  is  giving 
the  jewels  to  my  sister.  5.  My  father's  horses  are  in  the  woods 
which  are  opposite  his  house.  6.  Has  the  man  two  noses?  No, 
sir,  but  he  has  two  eyes  and  two  knees.  7.  The  skies  are  gray, 
and  the  children  are  not  going  (vont)  to  school.  8.  There  are  two 
owls  in  the  holes  of  the  trees  in  front  of  our  house.  9.  There  is 
the  gentleman  who  brought  the  cakes  and  playthings  to  the  pupils. 

10.  The  reading  lesson  is  on  the  animals  and  it  is  not  difficult. 

1 1.  The  maid  is  singing  to  the  child  who  is  in  her  arms.    12.  Where 


LA  FONTAINE  DE  MEDiCIS.  Paris  est  fameux  pour  ses  pares,  dont  1'un 
des  mieux  connus  et  des  plus  beaux  est  celui  du  Luxembourg.  II  est  situe 
pres  du  Quartier  Latin,  oil  demeurent  beaucoup  des  etudiants  de  Paris,  et 
est  tres  frequente  par  les  etudiants  eux-memes  ainsi  que  par  les  enfants 
du  voisinage,  ces  derniers  visitant  surtout  la  partie  du  pare  reservee  pour 
leurs  jeux.  Le  jardin  est  orne  de  statues  et  d'autres  oeuvres  d'art,  parmi 
lesquelles  se  detache  la  fontaine  de  Medicis,  encadree  de  grands  arbres, 
que  vous  voyez  dans  la  gravure  d'a  cote.  Le  batiment  que  Ton  distingue 
derriere  est  le  palais  du  Luxembourg,  ou  le  Senat  tient  ses  seances.  Ce  palais 
fut  construit  de  1615  a  1620  pour  Marie  de  Medicis,  femme  de  Henri  IV, 
et  fut  habite  par  divers  princes  et  princesses  jusqu'a  la  Revolution. 


LA  FONTAINE   DE  M^DICIS 


60  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

are  the  children's  hats  and  cloaks?  They  are  not  here.  13.  Did 
not  the  boy  find  the  cabbages  in  the  gentleman's  garden  ?  1 4.  My 
son  is  standing  on  the  pebbles  in  the  path  and  is  singing  to  his 
mother.  15.  Here  is  the  gentleman  who  reads  his  newspapers  in 
the  park.  16.  He  has  also  a  bag  of  nuts  for  the  animals.  17.  Is 
the  French  teacher  giving  a  reading  lesson  or  a  grammar  lesson 
to  his  class  today?  18.  Did  you  give  the  French  books  to  the 
pupils  who  are  seated  on  the  benches?  19.  The  boys  found 
the  nuts  which  are  on  the  table.  20.  Here  is  the  park ;  are  the 
birds  singing  in  the  woods  ? 


LESSON   EIGHT 

AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES 

94.  Agreement  of  Adjectives.  Adjectives  in  French  vary 
in  form  to  agree  with  the  gender  and  number  of  the  words 
they  modify. 

95.  The  Feminine  of  Adjectives  is  regularly  formed  by 
adding  mute  e  to  the  masculine. 

le  grand  jardin,  the  large  garden      la  grancle  cour,  the  large  yard 

96.  The  Plural  of  Adjectives  is  generally  formed  in  the 
same  way  as  the  plural  of  nouns  of  similar  ending. 

le  petit  garc,on,  the  little  boy  les  petits  gargons,  the  little  boys 

le  gros  chien,  the  big  dog  les  gros  chiens,  the  big  dogs 

la  grande  ville,  the  large  city  les  grandes  villes,  the  large  cities 

Note  i.   Bleu,  blue,  however,  takes  s  in  the  plural. 

Note  2.  An  adjective  has,  therefore,  normally  four  forms  :  masculine 
singular  and  plural,  feminine  singular  and  plural ;  for  example,  grand, 
grands,  grande,  grandes. 


AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES  6 1 

97.  Double  Agreement.  When  the  same  adjective  modi- 
fies nouns  of  different  gender,  it  takes  the  masculine  form. 
His  son  and  daughter  are  small.      Sonjils  et  sajille  sont  petits. 

98.  Feminine  of  Nouns.  A  few  nouns  which  may  be 
applied  to  either  sex  have  a  feminine  form  made  in  the 
same  way  as  the  feminine  of  adjectives. 

le  cousin,  la  cousine,  the  cousin       un  ami,  une  amie,  a  friend 

Note.  Enfant  and  many  other  nouns  of  this  type  have  the  same  form 
for  both  genders. 

VOCABULARY 

l'ami  (/.  amie),  the  friend  je  joue,  etc.,  I  play,  etc. 
beau,  beautiful,  handsome  long,  long 

bleu,  blue  parce  que,  because 

charmant,  attractive  petit,  small,  little 

le  chien,  the  dog  la  piece,  the  room 

le  ciel,  the  sky  plein,  full 

content,  glad  pourquoi,  why 

la  cuisine,  the  kitchen  je  represents,  etc.,  I  represent,^. 

je  demeure,  etc.,  I  dwell,  live,  etc.      le  rideau,  the  curtain 

la  feuille,  the  leaf  rond,  round 

la  fleur,  the  flower  la  rue,  the  street 

gai,  cheerful  le  salon,  the  parlor 
grand,  large  seul,  only,  alone 

gros,  big  le  tableau,  the  picture,  blackboard 

haut  (Note),  high  le  vase,  the  vase 
l'herbe/,  the  grass  vert,  green 

joli,  pretty  la  ville  [vjl],  the  city 

la  chambre  a  coucher,  the  bedroom 
la  salle  a  manger,  the  dining-room 
etre  de  retour,  to  be  back 
de  quelle  couleur  ?  of  what  color  ? 

Note.    The  h  in  haut. is  aspirate;  see  Sec.  52. 


62  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Drin  EXERCISE 

i.  Give  all  forms  (both  numbers  and  genders)  of  — 

petit  le  votre  son 

joli  charmant  bleu  mauvais 

francais  plein  seul  gai 

2.  Translate  into  French  — 

a  large  table  a  big  dog 

the  window  is  round  two  beautiful  curtains 

the  pretty  leaves  the  skies  are  blue 

his  cousin  (/)  is  attractive  full  of  pictures 

the  grass  is  green  your  friend  (/)  is  glad 

the  flower  is  blue  the  boy  and  girl  are  pretty 

my  little  room  his  brother  and  sister 

3.  Replace  in  the  following  sentences,  making  all  neces- 
sary changes  in  agreement,  Jean  by  Marie ;  by  vos  neveux ; 
by  mes  cou sines. 

Jean  est  mon  petit  ami.  II  n'est  pas  grand,  mais  il  est  bon.  II 
est  ici.    II  a  deux  gros  chiens.   Est-il  seul  ? 

Model  _      _. 

La  Maison 

Jean  est  de  retour  a  la  maison.  Son  oncle  a  une  grande  maison 
parce  qu'il  a  une  grande  famille.  Le  salon  est  tres  joli.  II  a  deux 
grandes  et  hautes  fenetres.  Les  longs  rideaux  des  fenetres  sont 
tres  beaux.  Voici  une  petite  table.  Elle  est  ronde.  Un  tableau 
represente  un  jardin.  Le  ciel  du  tableau  est  tres  bleu.  II  y  a  deux 
charmants  enfants  dans  le  tableau.  Le  garcon  est  debout  et  joue 
avec  un  gros  chien.  La  petite  fille  est  assise  sur  l'herbe.  L'herbe 
est  tres  verte.  Les  arbres  et  les  feuilles  sont  verts  aussi.  Le  jardin 
est  plein  de  jolies  fleurs.    Le  salon  n'est  pas  la  seule  piece  de  la 


AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES  63 

maison.  II  y  a  aussi  une  salle  a  manger  et  une  cuisine.  Les 
chambres  a  coucher  sont  petites  mais  gaies.  La  cousine  de  Jean 
a  apporte  un  vase  de  fleurs. 

Theme 

My  aunt  is  your  friend.  My  uncle's  large  family  lives  in  a  street 
where  the  houses  are  high.  We  are  back  at  home.  Here  is  the 
parlor.  It  is  large  and  has  two  large  and  high  windows.  The  long 
curtains  are  very  beautiful.  On  the  table,  which  is  round,  there 
is  a  pretty  flower  in  a  little  vase.  The  flower  is  blue.  The 
dining-room  and  kitchen  are  small.  My  bedroom  is  very  cheerful. 
We  are  back  in  the  parlor.  There 's  a  beautiful  picture !  It  repre- 
sents two  children,  a  little  boy  and  a  little  girl,  who  are  in  a  garden 
full  of  pretty  flowers.  On  the  grass  the  boy  is  playing  with  a  big 
dog.    The  little  girl  is  seated  in  the  grass  under  the  trees. 

Oral 

1.  Oil  l'oncle  de  Jean  est-il?  2.  Pourquoi  l'oncle  de  Jean  a-t-il 
une  grande  maison?    3.  De'crivez  (describe)  les  rideaux  du  salon. 

4.  Decrivez  la  table.  5.  Oil  est  le  beau  tableau?  6.  Le  tableau 
represente-t-il  un  pare?  7.  Qui  est  dans  le  jardin  de  l'oncle? 
8.  Le  jardin  est-il  petit?  9.  Avec  qui  le  petit  garcon  joue-t-il? 
10.  Nommez  (name)  les  pieces  de  la  maison.  11.  Votre  maison 
est-elle  haute  ?  12.  Votre  pere  a-t-il  une  grande  famille  ?  1 3.  Avons- 
nous  une  table  dans  la  classe  ?  1 4.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  ciel  ? 
15.  De  quelle  couleur  est  l'herbe? 

Resume 

1.  The  gardens  of  the  city  are  small,  but  the  grass  in  the  park 
is  green.  2.  Did  you  find  the  boy's  big  dog  in  the  street?  3.  The 
sky  is  blue  today  and  the  little  boys  are  going  to  school.  4.  The 
beautiful   birds   are    singing   in    the   large   trees   of   the  woods. 

5.  The  windows  of  my  cousin's  bedroom  are  high,  but  the  cur- 
tains are  not  long.    6.  I  live  in  a  house  which  has  a  large  kitchen 


64  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

and  an  attractive  dining-room.  7.  There  is  a  vase  full  of  pretty 
flowers  on  the  table  of  the  parlor.  8.  We  are  back  at  home,  and 
are  glad  because  the  rooms  are  very  cheerful.  9.  The  picture  rep- 
resents a  large  room  with  four  windows  and  a  table.  10.  The 
table  is  round;  a  little  girl  is  sitting  in  an  armchair.  11.  The 
leaves  of  the  trees  in  the  yard  are  very  green.  12.  A  boy  is 
standing  under  the  trees  and  is  playing  with  a  small  dog.  13.  My 
friend  lives  alone  in  an  attractive  house  of  four  rooms.  14.  Here 
is  the  man  who  found  the  horses ;  they  are  behind  the  house. 
15.  Of  what  color  are  your  mother's  jewels?  They  are  blue  and 
green.  16.  The  curtains  for  the  windows  of  Mary's  room  are  blue. 
17.  The  bedrooms  of  my  uncle's  house  are  not  large,  but  they  are 
cheerful.  1 8.  Why  are  the  pupils  going  to  the  woods  today  ?  19.  The 
flowers  in  the  girl's  garden  are  blue ;  she  is  giving  a  flower  to  her 
teacher.    20.  We  are  playing  in  the  park,  where  the  grass  is  high. 


LESSON   NINE 

POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES 

99.  Position  of  Adjectives.  Qualifying  adjectives,  as  a 
rule,  follow  the  word  they  modify. 

l'arbre  vert,  the  green  tree 

les  tables  rondes,  the  round  tables 

100.  Thirteen  Adjectives  that  Precede.  Several  of  the 
most  common  adjectives  regularly  precede  their  noun. 
Among  the  most  important  are 

beau,  beautiful  grand,  large  vieux,  old 

joli,  pretty  gros,  big  jeune,  young 

vilain,  homely  petit,  little  nouveau,  new 

bon,  good  long,  long 

mauvais,  bad  court,  short 


POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES  65 

une  jolie  femme,  a  pretty  woman 
deux  petits  enfants,  two  tittle  children 

Note.  The  position  of  adjectives  is  further  discussed  in  Sec.  326. 
The  beginner  should  put  every  adjective  after  its  noun  unless  he  knows 
a  definite  reason  to  the  contrary. 

101.  Tout  and  tel.  The  irregular  adjectives  tout  (tous, //.; 
toute,  toutes,  /.),  all,  every,  and  tel  (telle,  /.),  such,  require 
special  attention  in  regard  to  their  position  when  used  with 
an  article. 

tout  le  pays,  the  whole  country,  all  the  country 
tous  les  arbres,  every  tree,  all  (the)  trees 
tout  le  monde,  everybody  (all  the  world) 
un  tel  homme,  such  a  man 
une  telle  femme,  such  a  woman 

102.  Adjectives  used  as  Nouns.  The  noun  which  an 
adjective  modifies  is  often  omitted,  and  the  adjective,  pre- 
ceded by  an  article,  then  stands  alone,  taking  the  gender 
and  number  of  the  noun  it  represents.  This  construction 
is  most  frequent  with  nouns  that  denote  persons. 

Le  Francais  est  ici.  The  Frenchman  is  here. 

Une  Francaise  est  ici.  A  Frenchwoman  is  here. 

Les  Francais  ont  un  beau  pays.  The    French    (people)    have    a 

beautiful  country. 

II  est  avec  la  petite.  He  is  with  the  little  girl. 

J'ai  deux  pommes  ;  une  verte  et  /  have  two  apples ;  a  green  one 
une  rouge.  and  a  red  one. 

Note.  Proper  adjectives  are  not  capitalized  in  French  when  used  as 
adjectives ;  they  are  capitalized  when  used  as  nouns.    See  Sec.  5. 

les  enfants  francais,  the  French  children 
les  Francais,  the  French  (people) 


66 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


VOCABULARY 


j 'admire,  etc.,  I  admire,  etc. 
l'arbre  (m.)  fruitier,  fruit  tree 

bon,  good 
la  campagne,  the  country  (Note) 
la  cerise,  the  cherry 
le  cerisier,  the  cherry  tree 
le  chemin,  the  road 

chez,  at  (to)  the  house  of 
la  ferme,  the  farm 
le  feuillage,  the  foliage 
en  fleur,  in  bloom 
la  foret,  the  forest 
le  gout,  the  taste 

jeune,  young 

maintenant,  now 

mauvais  [mo-ve],  bad 
le  monde,  the  world 

mur,  ripe 

nouveau,  new 
le  noyer,  the  walnut  tree 


le  pays  [pe-i],  the  country  (Note) 

plusieurs,  several 
la  poire,  the  pear 
le  poirier,  the  pear  tree 
la  pomme,  the  apple 
le  pommier,  the  apple  tree 
il  pousse,  etc.,  it  grows,  etc. 

rouge,  red 
je  sSpare,  etc.,  I  separate,  etc. 
souvent,  often 

tel  (/  telle),  such  (Sec.  101) 
tendre,  delicate,  tender 
tout  (m.  pi.  tous),  all,  every 

(Sec.  101) 
tree,  very 
le  verger,  the  orchard 
le  vert,  the  green 
vieux,  old 
vilain,  homely 
le  village  [vi-laig],  the  village 

tout  le  monde,  everybody 
a  la  campagne,  in  the  country 
chez  son  oncle,  at  (to)  his  uncle's 

Note.    Pays,  a  geographical  unit ;  campagne,  the  rural  district,  n6t 
the  city. 


Driu  EXERCISE 

I.  Give  the  four  forms  of  the  French  words  for 

bad  such  all  blue 

ripe  glad  round  green 


short 


French 


round 
high 


my 


•POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES 


67 


2.  Give  the  French  for  — 
the  round  window 

a  green  forest 

the  French  children 

my  good  uncle 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

a.  he  lives  in  a  beautiful  country 
he  lives  in  the  country 

the  apples  on  the  apple  trees 
we  admire  his  farm 
the  country  is  in  bloom 
the  pears  are  not  ripe 

b.  all  the  trees 
the  whole  forest 
every  orchard 
everybody 

4.  Continue  — 


the  red  apples 
a  delicate  green 
a  new  teacher 
a  very  green  pear 

several  roads . 

several  streets 

it  has  a  good  taste 

at  John's  house 

at  my  friend's  (house) 

at  John's  father's 

such  a  picture 

such  a  flower 

all  flowers 

all  my  friends 


Model 


j 'admire  un  grand  arbre 

je  ne  demeure  pas  a  la  campagne 

suis-je  chez  ma  tante  ? 

je  ne  suis  pas  grand 

je  lis  dans  la  foret 

A  la  Campagne 


Aujourd'hui  Jean  est  a  la  campagne.  Tout  le  pays  est  en  fleur. 
Son  ami  a  une  grande  ferme  dans  un  joli  petit  village.  II  y  a  deux 
hommes  chez  son  ami,  un  vieux  et  un  jeune.  Le  jeune  est  francais. 
Le  Francois  n'est  pas  ici.  II  est  maintenant  dans  les  bois.  Le 
chemin  separe  la  ferme  de  la  foret.  Nous  admirons  souvent  les 
beaux  arbres  qui  ont  un  feuillage  d'un  vert  tres  tendre.  Tout 
le  monde  admire  une  telle  foret.  Les  arbres  fruitiers  ne  poussent 
pas  dans  les  bois.    lis  poussent  dans  le  verger.    Dans  le  verger  il 


68  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

yaun  cerisier,  un  gros  noyer,  plusieurs  pommiers  et  un  poirier. 
Toutes  les  cerises  sont  rouges.  Elles  ont  un  bon  gout  quand  elles 
sont  mures.  Elles  ont  un  mauvais  gout  quand  elles  sont  vertes. 
Les  noix  dans  ma  poche  sont  les  noix  du*  noyer  qui  est  devant 
vous.    Les  gros  arbres  du  verger  sont  tres  vieux. 

Theme 

John  is  with  a  young  Frenchman  at  my  friend's  farm.  The 
French  have  a  beautiful  country,  but  the  little  village  where  my 
friend  has  his  little  farm  is  beautiful  also.  The  whole  country  is 
now  in  bloom.  My  friend's  apple  trees,  pear  trees,  and  little 
cherry  trees  are  in  the  orchard  behind  the  barn,  but  the  big 
walnut  trees  are  in  the  forest.  There  is  a  ripe  pear.  It  has  a 
good  taste.  Everybody  admires  such  a  pear.  Are  his  pears  large 
or  small  ?  The  cherries  on  the  table  are  red.  The  old  walnut  tree 
produces  (gives)  the  nuts  which  are  on  the  table  of  the  dining-room. 
There 's  a  bad  nut,  but  all  the  nuts  are  not  bad.  The  walnut  tree 
is  a  fruit  tree  which  grows  in  the  woods.  The  foliage  of  the 
beautiful  trees  beside  the  road  that  separates  the  forest  from  the 
farm  is  of  a  very  delicate  green. 

Oral 

i.Jean  est-il  a  l'ecole  aujourd'hui?  2.  Le  pays  est-il  beau? 
3.  Oil  est  la  grande  ferme  de  l'ami  de  Jean  ?  4.  Qui  est  a.  la 
ferme  ?    5.  Le  Francais  n'est-il  pas  dans  le  bois  ?    6.  De  quelle 


LA  CAMPAGNE  — VUE  PRISE  D'UN  AEROPLANE.  Nous  avons  ici  une 
photographie  prise  d'un  aeroplane,  laquelle  represente  a  la  lettre  un  pay- 
sage  tel  qu'on  ne  manque  pas,  pour  ainsi  dire,  de  voir  a  quelque  endroit  de  la 
France  qu'on  aille.  Les  ecuries,  les  etables,  les  hangars  forment  generale- 
ment  un  groupe  au  centre  duquel  se  trouve  la  cour,  l'abreuvoir,  etc.  La  photo 
montre  bien  le  morcellement  considerable  de  la  propriete  en  France,  beau- 
coup  de  ces  lots  separes  les  uns  des  autres  par  les  routes  nombreuses  qui 
sillonnent  le  pays.  Tout  le  terrain  est  cultive,  et,  sauf  les  vergers  et  une  foret 
par-ci  par-la,  il  n'y  a  pas  d'espaces  cultivables  qui  ne  soient  pas  utilises. 


fO  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

couleur  est  le  feuillage  des  arbres?  7.  Ou  les1  arbres  fruitiers 
poussent-ils  ?  8.  Les *  noyers  ne  poussent-ils  pas  aussi  dans  le 
verger?  9.  Les1  pommes  vertes  ont-elles  un  bon  gout?  10.  De 
quelle  couleur  sontles *  cerises  mures  ?  1 1  -  Toutes  les  fleurs  sont-elles 
rouges?  12.  Le  Francais  est-il  vieux  ou  jeune?  13.  Les  Francois 
n'ont-ils  pas  un  beau  pays  ?  1 4.  Etes-vous  chez  votre  oncle  ?  15.  Jean 
n'est-il  pas  chez  son  ami  avec  le  Frangais?  16.  Admirez-vous  le 
pays  des  Francois  ?    17.  Demeurez-vous  a  la  campagne  ? 

Resume 

1.  In  every  country  all  the  orchards  are  full  of  fruit  trees. 

2.  There  are,  in  his  orchard,  several  trees  which  are  now  in  bloom. 

3.  All  the  good  pupils  write  the  French  exercises  at  home.  4.  When 
the  apples  are  green,  they  have  a  bad  taste.  5.  Of  what  color  are 
(the)  cherries  when  they  are  ripe  ?  6.  The  old  curtains  which  sepa- 
rate the  parlor  from  the  dining-room  are  very  homely.  7.  Who 
gave  to  the  teacher  the  pretty  flowers  in  the  vase  which  is  on  her 
table  ?  8.  The  little  girl  found  the  large  nuts  in  the  forest  under  the 
old  walnut  trees.  9.  All  the  houses  in  the  little  French  village  are 
very  attractive.  1  o.  Do  you  not  admire  my  sister's  pretty  cloaks  ? 
1 1.  All  her  children  are  now  at  her  father's  in  the  country.  1 2.  John's 
teacher  often2  reads  the  French  lesson  to  his  pupils.  13.  Such  a 
teacher  is  dear  to  the  pupils  of  every  school.  14.  In  my  new 
orchard  every  pear  tree  is  full  of  pears.  15.  Everybody  admires 
the  cherry  tree  which  is  growing  in  our  yard.  16.  There  is  a  big 
tree  beside  the  path  which  separates  the  garden  from  the  yard. 
17.  He  found  the  apples  under  the  apple  tree,  a  green  one  and  a 
ripe  one.  18.  I  admire  the  delicate  green  of  the  foliage  of  the 
apple  trees.  19.  Are  they  going  to  school  today?  No,  sir,  they 
are  going  to  his  uncle's.  20.  There  is  the  Frenchman  who  gave 
th    French  books  to  John's  brother. 

1  See  Sec.  119.  2  See  Sec.  no. 


IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES  7 1 

LESSON  TEN 

IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES 

103.  Irregular  Feminines.  French  adjectives  regularly 
form  their  feminine,  as  stated  in  Sec.  95,  by  the  addition 
of  mute  e.    The  following  exceptions  are  important : 

a.  Adjectives  already  ending  in  mute  e  remain  unchanged. 

le  jeune  homme,  the  young  man 
la  jeune  femme,  the  young  woman 

b.  Adjectives  ending  in  f  change  the  f  to  v  on  adding  e. 

II  est  actif.  He  is  active. 

Elle  est  active.  She  is  active. 

c.  Most  adjectives  ending  in  x  change  the  x  to  8  on 
adding  e. 

II  est  heureux.  He  is  happy. 

Elle  est  heureuse.  She  is  happy. 

d.  The  following  adjectives,  among  many  others,  present 
special  irregularities : 


Masculine 

Feminine 

bas 

basse 

low 

gros 

grosse 

big,  stout 

dpais 

e'paisse 

thick 

bon 

bonne 

good 

cher 

chere 

dear 

sec 

seche 

dry 

blanc 

blanche 

white 

long 

longue 

long 

frais 

fraiche 

fresh 

doux 

douce 

sweet,  gentle 

72 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Note  i.  The  first  four  of  these  adjectives,  as  well  as  those  of 
Sec.  1 04  below,  illustrate  a  common  tendency  to  double  a  final  consonant 
on  the  addition  of  the  e. 

Note  2.   For  a  more  complete  list  of  irregular  feminines  see  Sec.  3 1 2. 

104.  Two  Masculine  Forms.  The  following  adjectives, 
among  other  irregularities,  have  two  forms  in  the  masculine 
singular.  Of  these  two  forms,  the  first  is  used  before  words 
beginning  with  a  consonant ;  the  second,  before  words  be- 
ginning with  a  vowel  sound. 


Masculine 

Sing. 

Plu. 

beau,  bel 

beaux 

nouveau,  nouvel 

nouveaux 

vieux,  vieil 

vieux 

fou,  fol 

fous 

mou,  mol 

mous 

Feminine 
Sing.  Plu. 

belle  belles 

nouvelle  nouvelles 

vieille  vieilles 

folle  folles 

molle  molles 

un  beau  tableau,  a  beautiful  picture 
un  bel  arbre,  a  beautiful  tree 


beautiful 

new 

old 

crazy 

soft 


VOCABULARY 
l'air  m.,  the  air 

l'ecurie/.,  the  stable  (for  horses) 
ratable/.,  the  stable  (for  cattle) 
la  ferme,  the  farmhouse,  farm 
fort,  strong,  loud 
large,  broad 


neuf,  new  (Note  2) 

noir,  black 
le  pr6,  the  field,  pasture 

pur,  pure 
la  vache,  the  cow 
la  voix,  the  voice 


de  qui  ?    of  (by)  whom  ?  whose  ? 

a  haute  voix,  aloud 

a  voix  basse,  in  a  low  voice 

Note  i  .  For  other  adjectives  used  in  this  lesson  see  Sees.  1 03  and  1 04. 
Note  2.   Neuf,  new,  in  the  sense  of  newly  made ;  nouveau,  new,  in 
the  sense  of  different,  newly  acquired. 


IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES 


73 


Drill 

i.  Give  all  forms  of  the  French  words  for 
dry 
thick . 
old 
young 

2.  Give  a  French  sentence  or  phrase  containing  — 
blanches  nouvel  jeune  deux 


broad 

white 

low 

long 

seated 

dear 

big 

gentle 

good 

new  {two  words) 

high 

all 

heureuse 
neuve 


chere 
beaux 


3.  Translate  into  French  — 

the  cow's  stable  a  thick  leaf 

the  horses'  stable  she  is  reading  aloud 

a  large  farm  a  dry  nut 

a  broad  path  a  new  friend 

4.  Continue  — 

je  suis  heureux 

je  chante  a  voix  basse 

je  ne  demeure  pas  dans  une  e'curie 

je  n'admire  pas  tout  le  monde 

n'ai-je  pas  trouve  une  pomme  rouge  ? 


telle 

bonne 

doux 

vieille 

a  new  house 

ud 

a  dear 1  aunt 

an  old  aunt 

an  active  aunt 

Model 


A  la  Ferme 


La  ferme  de  M.  Leblanc,  le  bon  ami  de  Jean,  est  une  belle 
maison  blanche.  Elle  est  neuve.  Dans  la  cour,  qui  est  longue  et 
large,  sont  les  grandes  etables  pour  les  grosses  vaches  et  les 
ecuries  pour  les  beaux  chevaux  de  la  ferme.  A  cote  du  verger 
le  gros  cheval  noir  de  M.  Leblanc  est  dans  le  pre  oil  T'herbe 


1  Dear  precedes  its  noun  when  it  means  beloved. 


74  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

est  e'paisse.  La  petite  fille  de  M.  Leblanc  est  sous  le  feuillage 
epais  du  vieil  arbre  de  la  cour.  Elle  lit  a  haute  voix  le  nouveau 
livre  d'Anatole  France,  et  elle  est  heureuse.  La  petite,  assise  sur 
une  chaise  basse,  a  une  voix  tres  douce  et  est  Pamie  de  tout  le 
monde.  Son  pere  est  vieux  et  gros,  mais  il  est  tres  actif.  Sa  mere 
n'est  pas  tres  vieille,  et  elle  est  active  aussi.    lis  sont  heureux. 

Theme 

M  Where  is  the  little  daughter  of  Mr.  Lebon  ?  "  M  She  is  in  the 
yard  seated  with  her  mother  on  a  very  low  bench."  Mary  is  a  good 
little  girl.  She  is  very  beautiful  and  gentle.  Mary  is  everybody's 
friend.  Under  the  thick  foliage  of  the  old  tree  of  the  yard  she  is 
reading  aloud  to  her  mother  the  new  book  by  (of)  Anatole  France. 
The  mother  of  the  little  girl  is  an  active  woman ;  she  is  not  old. 
Her  husband  is  old.  He  is  stout,  but  he  is  active  also.  Mr.  Lebon's 
farmhouse  is  new.  It  has  a  beautiful  yard.  The  big  cows  are  not 
in  the  stable,  which  is  long  and  low.  They  are  in  the  thick,  green 
(thick  and  green)  .grass  of  the  field.  Two  of  the  cows  are  black. 
The  air  of  the  country  is  dry  and  pure. 

Oral 

i.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  maison  de  M.  Leblanc?  2.  Est-elle 
vieille  ou  neuve?  3.  Oil  sont  les  etables  de  la  ferme?  4.  Les 
beaux  chevaux  de  M.  Leblanc  sont-ils  a  l'ecurie?  5.  M.  Leblanc 
a-t-il  un  enfant  ?  6.  Ou  est  sa  petite  ?  7.  Lit-elle  a  haute  voix  ou 
a  voix  basse?  8.  De  qui  est  le  livre?  9.  A  qui  lit-elle?  10.  Pour- 
quoi  la  petite  est-elle  heureuse  ?  11.  A-t-elle  une  forte  voix  ?  1 2.  Sa 
mere  est-elle  jeune?  13.  Votre  pere  est-il  vieux?  14.  Etes-vous 
assis  sur  une  chaise  basse  ?    15.  Votre  mere  est-elle  active  ? 

Resume 

1.  In  the  orchard  the  leaves  of  the  trees  are  fresh  and  green. 

2.  My  uncle's  black  cows  are  in  the  pasture  behind  the  farmhouse. 

3,  My  friend's  new  house  is  in  a  pretty  French  village  beside  an 


IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES  75 

attractive  road.  4.  Mr.  Lebon's  daughter  has  a  sweet  voice ;  she 
is  reading  aloud  to  her  father.  5.  A  Frenchman  gave  (to)  my 
nephews  the  white  horses  which  are  in  the  stable.  6.  In  the  country 
all  children  are  strong  because  the  air  is  pure.  7.  My  dear  mother 
often  sings  to  her  children  when  they  are  at  home.  8.  The  old 
man  who  is  standing  at  the  window  is  the  friend  of  all  the  animals. 

9.  A  crazy  woman  lives  in  the  white  house  behind  the  woods. 

10.  The  apples  which  are  on  the  trees  are  red,  but  they  are  not 
ripe.  1 1.  Show  me  the  new  book  by  (of)  Rend  Bazin  which  is  on  the 
round  table.  12.  The  little  boy  sitting  in  front  of  the  low  table  is 
everybody's  friend.  13.  We  have  two  big  cows  in  the  stable,  a  red 
one  and  a  white  one.  1 4.  John's  sisters  are  now  writing  the  long 
French  exercises.  15.  In  the  field  the  grass  is  green  and  thick. 
16.  My  aunt  lives  in  a  small  house,  but  she  is  happy  and  cheer- 
ful. 17.  Where  did  you  find  the  red  flowers?  They  are  very 
beautiful.  18.  The  Frenchwoman  is  not  young,  but  she  is  strong 
and  active.  19.  He  is  reading  the  French  lesson  in  a  low  voice 
before  the  class.    20.  The  old  owls  are  in  the  holes  of  the  old  tree. 


REVIEW 

(Lessons  Seven  to  Ten) 
A.  General  Drill 

1.  Give  the  exceptions  to  the  regular  formation  of  the 
plural  of  nouns  and  adjectives.    Illustrate. 

2.  Give  the  list  of  nouns  ending  in  ou  that  form  the  plural 
by  adding  x. 

3.  Give  the  plural  of  — 

homme  ciel  genou  joli  votre 

bras  trou  ceil  tout  nez 

doux  animal  heureux  beau  assis 


76 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


4.  Give  the  feminine  singular  of  — 
jeune                  actif  le 

cher  sec  bon 

fou  tel  vieux 

5.  Give  all  the  forms  of  — 
mauvais  vieux  tout 
rouge              blanc          nouveau 

6.  Express  in  French  — 
a  young  man 
the  white  horse 
your  pretty  house 

7.  Translate  into  French 
the  leaves  are  green 
two  eyes 
a  French  picture 
every  house 


bas 
mou 


a  low  voice 
a  new  friend 
my  dear  friend 


tout 

doux 

ami 

heureux 
votre 


frais 

enfant 

epais 

beau 
joli 


a  new  house 
a  short  road 
a  long  lesson 


such  a  house 
all  houses 
all  the  house 
everybody 
the  old  woman 


the  new  cloak  and  the  old  one 

we  are  back 

a  house  of  four  rooms 

a  beautiful  dining-room 

the  white  owl 

there  is  a  boy 

here  is  a  good  pear 

there 's  a  bad  pear 

there  is  a  tree  in  the  yard 

parentheses    by   the    correct 


8.  Replace    the    words    in 
French  forms  : 

Le  (old)  homme  est  (happy).  (His  good)  femme  est  (old),  mais 
elle  est  (beautiful).  (Her)  fils  a  (two  young)  filles.  (They)  sont 
(small),  mais  tres  (sweet)  et  (pretty).  (The  whole)  famille  demeure 
dans  une  (new  white)  maison  sous  un  (old  green)  arbre. 

B.  Translate  into  French 

1.  The  old  woman  lives  alone  in  the  white  house.  2.  Such  a 
girl  is  everybody's  friend.  3.  All  the  pupils  are  reading  the  French 
lesson  aloud.    4.  Is  the  stable  for  the  horses  in  the  yard  ?    5.  All 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  77 

the  birds  are  now  in  the  thick  forest.  6.  Where  are  the  child's 
playthings  ?  7.  Do  you  not  write  the  French  exercises  at  home  ? 
8.  In  my  new  orchard  all  the  cherry  trees  are  in  bloom.  9.  There 
are  two  cows  in  the  pasture,  a  white' and  a  black  one.  10.  When 
the  apples  are  ripe  they  are  of  a  red  color.  11.  Everybody  admires 
her  beautiful  black  eyes.  12.  We  are  writing  the  long  grammar 
lesson  on  the  blackboard.  13.  Such  a  woman  is  a  friend  of  all  the 
children  of  the  village.  14.  In  the  country  the  grass  is  now  fresh 
and  green.  15.  The  Frenchman  is  showing  the  French  books  to 
his  friends.  1 6.  John's  father  and  mother  are  old,  but  they  are  very 
active.  17.  The  leaves  of  the  pear  tree  are  dry,  but  the  pears  are 
sweet  and  good.  18.  All  the  girls  are  back  at  home  and  they  are 
happy.  19.  Show  me  the  old  owls  which  are  in  the  old  walnut  tree. 
20.  The  maid  is  singing  in  a  low  voice  to  the  children. 


LESSON   ELEVEN 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

105.  Regular  Comparison.  The  comparative  degree  of 
adjectives  is  regularly  formed  by  prefixing  plus,  more ;  the 
superlative,  by  prefixing  the  proper  form  of  the  definite 
article  to  the  comparative.  Thus :  grand,  plus  grand,  le  plus 
grand,  large,  larger,  largest. 

grand  cheval,  large  horse 

plus  grand  cheval,  larger  horse 

le  plus  grand  cheval,  largest  horse 

une  belle  dame,  a  beautiful  lady 

une  plus  belle  dame,  a  more  beautiful  lady 

la  plus  belle  dame,  the  most  beautiful  lady 

deux  jolis  enfants,  two  pretty  children 
deux  plus  jolis  enfants,  two  prettier  children 
les  plus  jolis  enfants,  the  prettiest  children 


78  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Note  i.  The  prettier  picture  of  two  and  the  prettiest  picture  of 
more  than  two  are  alike  in  French,  le  plus  joli  tableau. 

Note  2.    An  adjective  that  follows  its  noun  in  the  positive  follows 

it  also  in  the  comparative  and  superlative.    Observe  the  repetition  of 

the  article. 

le  ciel  le  plus  bleu,  the  bluest  sky 

Note  3.  When  a  possessive  adjective  is  used  before  a  superlative, 
the  definite  article  is  not  required. 

mon  plus  cher  ami,  my  dearest  friend 

106.  Irregular  Comparison.  The  following  three  adjec- 
tives are  usually  compared  irregularly : 

bon,  good  meilleur,  better  le  meilleur,  best 

mauvais,  bad         pire,  worse  le  pire,  worst 

petit,  little  moindre,  less  le  moindre,  least 

Note.   Petit  is  compared  regularly  when  it  means  small  in  size. 
My  house  is  smaller.  Ma  maison  est  plus  petite. 

But  the  least  occasion  la  moindre  occasion 

107.  Comparison  Downward.  To  express  less  and  least 
degrees,  moins,  less,  and  le  moins,  least,  are  prefixed. 

II  est  moins  poli.  He  is  less  polite. 

Son  frere  est  le  moins  poli.  His  brother  is  least  polite. 

108.  Comparative  Connectives.  In  comparative  sentences 
than  is  expressed  by  que,  as  ...  as  by  aussi  .  .  .  que,  so  .  .  . 
as,  in  negative  expressions,  by  si  .  .  .  que. 

The  boy  is  taller  than  his  sister.      Le  gar  con  est  plus  grand  que  sa 

sceur. 
He  is  as  rich  as  his  brother.  II  est  aussi  riche  que  son  frere. 

She  is  not  so  beautiful  as  her     Elle   n'est  pas   si  belle  que  sa 
mother.  mere. 

Note.    In  after  superlative  expressions  is  de. 
The  most  beautiful  woman  in  (of)       La  plus  belle  femme  de  la  ville. 
the  city. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  79 

VOCABULARY 

Page  m.,  the  age  malade,  sick 

ag£,  old  (in  years)  (Note)  meilleur  (le),  better  (best) 

agreable,  pleasant  moindre  (le),  less  (least) 

aimable,  kind  naturellement,    naturally,    of 

attentif ,  attentive  course 

avanc£,  advanced  l'occasion/.,  the  occasion 

le  camarade,  the  chum,  comrade  paresseux,  lazy 

cependant,  however  pire  (le),  worse  (worst) 

enclasse,  in  class  poli,  polite 

aucontraire,  on  the  contrary  riche,  rich 

different,  different  robuste,  sturdy 

gai,  cheerful,  merry  studieux,  studious 

grand,  tall,  large  je  tombe,  etc.,  I  fall,  etc. 

intelligent,  bright  toujours,  always 

Jeanne,  Jane  vif,  lively 
bien  (mal)  61ev6,  well-bred  (ill-bred) 
a  la  moindre  occasion,  on  the  least  occasion 

Note.   Age"  is  used  to  define  anyone's  age,  whether  old  or  young; 
vieux  means  advanced  in  years,  not  young. 

jy   ...  EXERCISE 

i.  Compare  upward  and  also  downward  — 
grand  beau  cher  avance 

petit  bonne  mauvais  vive 

2.  Compare  (upward  simply)  — 

vieille  dame  belles  filles  un  homme  aimable 

mauvais  garcon     la  chambre  haute     ma  petite  sceur 

3.  Form  sentences  or  phrases  in  French  containing  — 
moins  belle  si  grand  que        meilleurs        agee 
aussi  petit  que       bien  e'levees        la  pire  plus  polis 


80  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

he  is  better  than  you  she  has  a  better  book  than  you 

he  is  not  so  good  as  you  she  has  the  best  book 

the  best  boy  in  the  class  the  pretty  house 

she  is  not  so  attractive  as  your  the  prettier  house  (of  the  two) 

friend  the  prettiest  house  (of  all) 

John  is  older  than  Charles  my  best  friends 

5.  Continue  — 

je  suis  plus  grand  que  l'enfant 

suis-je  aussi  robuste  que  vous  ? 

je  ne  suis  pas  si  riche  que  son  frere 

j'ai  le  banc  le  plus  bas  de  la  salle  de  classe 

Model  les  Deux  Camarades  d'Ecole 

J'ai  deux  camarades,  Jean  et  Charles.  Jean  demeure  a  Paris, 
la  plus  belle  ville  du  monde.  Charles  demeure  dans  une  ville  plus 
grande  mais  moins  belle.  Jean  est  riche  ;  ses  parents  ont  une 
grande  maison.  Charles  n'est  pas  si  riche  que  Jean.  Sa  maison  est 
moins  grande ;  elle  est  cependant  aussi  belle.  Elle  n'est  pas  si  vieille. 
Jean  est  plus  age  que  Charles.  II  est  grand  et  robuste.  Charles 
est  aussi  grand  mais  moins  fort.  II  est  bien  eleve,  poli,  et  toujours 
aimable.  Jean,  au  contraire,  est  mal  eleve.  II  n'est  pas  si  agreable 
que  son  camarade  et  est  moins  poli.  En  classe  il  est  paresseux. 
Charles  est  plus  studieux.  Jean  est  naturellement  moins  avance' 
parce  qu'il  n'est  pas  si  attentif  en  classe.  II  est  cependant  aussi  in- 
telligent que  Charles.  Charles  est  le  meilleur  des  deux  et  mon  plus 
cher  ami.  Jean  n'est  pas  cependant  le  pire  des  garcons  de  son  age. 

Theme 

Jane  and  Mary  are  two  well-bred  girls,  but  very  different.  Jane 
is  very  merry  and  lively ;  Mary  is  not  so  pleasant.  Jane  is  the 
younger  and  the  less  strong.    She  is  less  sturdy  than  Mary,  who 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  8 1 

is  the  taller  and  also  the  elder  of  the  two.  Mary  is  not  so  kind  as 
Jane,  who  is  more  attractive  than  she.  Jane  is,  however,  less 
handsome.  The  two  girls  sing  well.  Mary  has  the  stronger  voice, 
but  her  voice  is  less  pleasing.  Jane's  voice  is  less  strong.  Jane  is 
not  so  sturdy  as  Mary.  She  falls  sick  on  the  least  occasion.  Mary 
is  the  brighter  of  the  two,  but  she  is  not  the  best  pupil  in  her  class. 
She  is,  however,  not  so  attentive  as  Jane,  who  is  always  more 
studious.    They  live  in  the  most  beautiful  street  in  the  city. 

Oral 

i.  Jean  n'est-il  pas  riche?  2.  Qui  est  le  plus  riche,  Jean  ou 
Charles?  3.  La  maison  de  Charles  est-elle  aussi  grande  que  la 
maison  de  son  camarade  ?  4.  Qui  est  le  plus  age,  Jean  ou  Charles  ? 
5.  Charles  n'est-il  pas  le  plus  jeune?  6.  Est-il  plus  grand  que 
Jean  ?  7.  Jean  est-il  aussi  bien  eleve  que  Charles  ?  8.  Qui  est  le 
moins  studieux,  Jean  ou  Charles  ?  9.  Jean  n'est-il  pas  aussi  avance 
que  Charles  ?  1  o.  Qui  est  le  meilleur  des  eleves,  Jean  ou  Charles  ? 
1 1.  Pourquoi  Charles  est-il  plus  avance  que  Jean  ?  12.  Demeurez- 
vous  dans  la  plus  belle  rue  de  la  ville?  13.  Etes-vous  aussi  age 
que  le  maitre  ?  14.  Tombez-vous  malade  souvent  ?  15.  Etes-vous 
tou jours  attentif  en  classe  ? 

Resume 

1.  His  sons  are  better  than  his  nephews.  2.  Who  has  the  most 
beautiful  jewels  in  the  city  ?  3.  He  falls  sick  when  the  teacher 
gives  a  long  French  lesson.  4.  The  boys  are  younger  than  the 
girls  and  are  also  more  active.  5.  The  grass  is  greener  in  the 
meadow  than  in  the  forest.  6.  Is  she  more  attentive  in  class  than 
your  daughter?  7.  Jane  is  less  studious  than  Mary,  but  more 
lively.  8.  Her  sons,  on  the  contrary,  are  lazier  than  your  children. 
9.  Bertha  is  the  least  intelligent  girl  in  the  whole  class.  10.  Natu- 
rally she  is  less  advanced  than  the  girls  of  her  age.  1 1.  The  French 
woman  is  as  tall  as  my  mother.    12.  Mary  is  the  elder  of  the  two 


82  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

sisters.  13.  My  chum  is,  however,  the  eldest  in  the  family.  14.  Jane 
is  very  different  from  her  younger  sister.  15.  His  horses  are  the 
largest  in  the  world.  16.  On  the  least  occasion  he  reads  aloud  his 
grammar  lesson.  1 7 .  Everybody  admires  a  well-bred  child.  18.  Such 
a  son  is,  of  course,  dear  to  his  parents.  19.  The  best  nuts  are  dry 
when  they  are  ripe.  20.  The  merriest  pupils  are  not  always  the 
brightest. 


LESSON  TWELVE 

ADVERBS  AND  THEIR  COMPARISON 

109.  Formation  of  Adverbs.  Many  French  adverbs  are 
formed  by  adding  ment  to  an  adjective. 

This  syllable  ment  is  added 

a.  To  the  masculine  of  an  adjective  when  it  ends  in  a  vowel. 

joli,  pretty  joliment,  prettily 

b.  To  the  feminine  when  the  masculine  ends  in  a  consonant. 

doux,  douce,  sweet  doucement,  sweetly 

Note.  French  has,  of  course,  many  adverbs  not  thus  formed  from 
adjectives;  for  example,  bien,  well)  tre3,  very. 

110.  Position  of  Adverbs.  An  adverb  modifying  a  finite 
verb  usually  directly  follows  it ;  it  never  directly  precedes 
it,  as  it  does  sometimes  in  English. 

He  writes  at  the  board  well.  77  ecrit  bien  au  tableau. 

We  often  read.  Nous  lisons  souvent 

Note.  In  a  compound  tense,  as  the  past  indefinite,  short,  simple 
adverbs  are  usually  placed  between  the  form  of  avoir  and  the  past 
participle. 

You  wrote  well.  Vous  avez  bien  ecrit. 

You  wrote  at  length.  Vous  avez  ecrit  longuement. 


ADVERBS  AND  THEIR  COMPARISON 


83 


111.  Comparison  of  Adverbs.  Adverbs  are  compared  in 
the  same  way  as  adjectives.  As  they  undergo  no  variation 
for  agreement,  the  form  of  the  article  in  the  superlative  is 
always  le. 

souvent,  plus  souvent,  le  plus  souvent,  often,  qftener,  oftenest 

112.  Irregular  Comparison.  The  following  four  adverbs 
are  compared  irregularly : 

beaucoup,  plus,  le  plus 
bien,  mieux,  le  mieux 
mal,  pis,  le  pis 
peu,  moins,  le  moins 


much,  more,  most 
well,  better,  best 
badly,  worse,  worst 
little,  less,  least 


113.  Adverbs  of  Quantity.  The  following  common  ad- 
verbs denoting  quantity  are  often  used  with  the  force  of 
nouns.  In  this  construction  they  take  de  before  a  following 
noun. 


assez,  enough 

autant,  as  much,  as  many 

beaucoup,  much,  many,  a  great 

deal 
combien?  how  much?  how  many? 

Le  maitre  a  beaucoup  d'eleves. 
Elle  a  trop  d' argent. 
II  a  autant  de  fils  que  de  filles. 
J'ai  assez  d'argent. 

J'ai  peu  de  livres. 


moins,  less,  fewer 

peu,  little,  few 

plus,  more 

tant,  so  much,  so  many 

trop,  too  much,  too  many 

The  teacher  has  many  pupils. 
She  has  too  much  money. 
He  has  as  many  sons  as  daughters. 
I  have  money  enough  {enough  of 

money). 
I  have  few  books. 


Note.    When  these  words  are  used  in  a  strictly  adverbial  sense, 
without  a  dependent  noun,  they  do  not  require  de. 


II  ecrit  trop  souvent. 
II  lit  assez  bien. 


He  writes  too  often. 
He  reads  well  enough. 


84 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


VOCABULARY 


l'argent  m.,  the  money 

autre,  other 
le  chateau,  the  castle 
la  chose,  the  thing 
la  croix,  the  cross 

donne\  given 
de  droite,  right-hand 

encore,  still,  yet 

fier  [fje:r]  (/.  fiere),  proud 
en  France,  in  France 

g6ne*ral,  general 

g6ne>eux,  generous 
la  guerre,  the  war 

jaloux,  jealous 

leur  {pi.  leurs),  their 
la  page,  the  page 

Note.    For  additional  words 


pauvre,  poor 

pendant,  during 
je  pense,  etc.,  I  think,  etc. 
le  plaisir,  the  pleasure 

que,  that  (conj.) 

quelquefois,  sometimes 

rare,  rare 
la  robe,  the  dress 

seulement,  only 
le  soldat,  the  soldier 

sur,  sure 
la  tour,  the  tower 
je  travaille,  etc.,  I  work,  etc. 

travail^,  worked 

un,  one,  a 
les  vetements  m.,  the  clothes 

see  Sec.  113. 


Drill 

1.  Compare 


EXERCISE 


bien           souvent           petit           beaucoup           mal 

bon            peu                   sur              mauvais              rarement 

2.  Form  the  adverbs  meaning  — 

actively                 dearly 

generally 

prettily                  surely 

proudly 

3.  Express  in  French  — 

he  reads  much                more  friends 

less  money 

much  money                   more  attractive 

fewer  benches 

a  little  money                  apples  enough 

as  much  money 

a  little  boy                       less  attractive 

too  many  rules 

how  much  money           a  great  deal  of  chalk 

too  surely 

ADVERBS  AND  THEIR  COMPARISON  85 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

she  is  better  than  Mary  on  the  left-hand  page 

she  is  the  best  girl  in  the  city  he  rarely  works 

she  rarely  reads  he  worked  well 

she  gives  generously  she  is  sure  of  her  friend 

she  has  several  dresses  she  surely  is  jealous 

she  has  many  dresses  I  have  too  many  pleasures 

she  has  money  enough  I  am  too  poor 

they  are  proud  of  their  clothes  you  are  less  advanced 

in  France  you  have  less  ink 

5.  Continue  — 

j'ai  trop  de  leQons 

n'ai-je  pas  assez  d'amis  ? 

je  suis  le  meilleur  e'leve  de  la  classe 

je  travaille  le  mieux 

Model  LES  Riches  et  les  Pauvres 

Dans  tous  les  pays  il  y  a  generalement  beaucoup  de  pauvres 
et  peu  de  riches.  Les  pauvres  ont  peu  d'argent ;  les  riches  ont 
beaucoup  d'argent.  Les  riches  ont  plus  d'argent  que  les  pauvres. 
Les  pauvres  ont  moins  d'argent  que  les  riches.  Les  pauvres  n'ont 
pas  assez  d'argent.  lis  pensent  quelquefois  que  les  riches  ont  trop 
d'argent,  de  maisons  et  de  beaux  vetements.  lis  sont  jaloux  des 
riches.  Les  pauvres  ont  souvent  autant  d'amis  que  les  riches,  mais 
ils  n'ont  pas  tant  de  plaisirs.  Les  pauvres  sont  souvent  aussi 
heureux  que  les  riches;  ils  ne  sont  pas  cependant  si  fiers.  Les 
femmes  des  riches  ont  beaucoup  de  beaux  bijoux  et  de  belles 
robes.  Les  enfants  des  pauvres  ont  moins  de  joujoux  que  les 
enfants  des  riches.  Les  riches  donnent  beaucoup  de  joujoux  et 
d'autres  choses  aux  petits  enfants  des  pauvres.  Pendant  la  grande 
guerre  les  riches  et  les  pauvres  ont  donne  tres  ge'nereusement 
aux  soldats  et  aussi  a  la  Croix-Rouge.    Naturellement  les  riches 


86  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

ont  donne  plus  que  les  pauvres.  Les  petits  ont  donne  moins 
que  leurs  parents.  En  France  les  riches  ont  beaucoup  de  chateaux. 
Voici,  sur  la  page  de  droite,  un  des  grands  chateaux.  Combien  de 
tours  a-t-il  ?    Est-il  plus  beau  que  les  maisons  de  votre  pays  ? 

Theme 

The  rich  live  most  often  in  the  prettiest  houses  in  the  city. 
They  do  not  always  work  the  most;  they  have,  however,  more 
money  than  the  poor.  The  poor  have  naturally  fewer  pleasures 
because  they  have  not  so  much  money.  They  have  generally  not 
enough  money.  They  have  very  often  a  large  family,  and  have 
rarely  too  much  money.  Happily  the  rich,  who  are  sometimes 
generous,  give  much  to  the  children  of  the  poor.  The  children 
of  the  poor  have  few  playthings,  and  their  mothers  have  still 
fewer  jewels,  but  they  are  happy  and  have  as  many  friends  as  the 
rich.  On  the  other  page  there  is  a  castle.  It  is  surely  very 
beautiful.  Has  it  enough  towers?  How  many  towers  has  it? 
The  richest  man  in  my  country  has  a  castle  also.  He  has  given 
a  great  deal  to  the  soldiers  during  the  great  war. 

Oral 

i.  Qui  a  le  plus  d'argent,  les  riches  ou  les  pauvres?  2.  Les 
pauvres  ont-ils  plus  de  vetements  que  les  riches  ?  3.  Ne  sont-ils 
pas  jaloux  des  riches  ?  4.  Ont-ils  moins  d'amis  que  les  riches  ? 
5.  Ont-ils  autant  de  plaisirs?    6.  Les  femmes  des  riches  ont-elles 


LE  CHATEAU  DE  CHAUMONT.  La  France  est  parsemee,  particulierement 
au  centre,  d'un  grand  nombre  de  chateaux.  Quelques-uns  de  ces  chateaux 
etaient  autrefois  des  forteresses,  mais  furent  plus  tard  amenages  pour 
servir  de  residences.  lis  furent  construits,  pour  la  plupart,  aux  quinzieme 
et  seizieme  siecles.  Leur  exterieur  imposant  et  l'interieur  richement  decore 
ont  ete  une  inspiration  aux  architectes,  un  grand  nombre  de  proprietes 
americaines  en  montrant  les  traits  caracteristiques.  Un  des  chateaux  les 
plus  interessants  de  la  region  de  la  Loire  est  celui  de  Chaumont. 


88  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

assez  de  robes  ?  7.  Qui  a  le  plus  de  joujoux,  les  enfants  des  riches 
ou  des  pauvres?  8.  A  qui  les  riches  donnent-ils  ge'nereusement  ? 
9.  Quand  les  riches  ont-ils  donne  aux  soldats  ?  10.  Ont-ils  donne 
seulement  aux  soldats?  11.  Les  petits  ont-ils  donne  autant  que 
leurs  parents  ?  12.  Combien  de  tours  a  le  chateau  de  la  page  87  ? 
13.  N'a-t-il  pas  trop  de  f  enetres  ?  14.  A-t-il  autant  de  portes? 
15.  Qui  est  l'homme  le  plus  riche  de  votre  pays  ? 

Resume 

1.  Her  youngest  brother  has  more  horses  than  John.  2.  Here 
is  one  of*  the  most  beautiful  castles  in  the  world.  3.  The  Red 
Cross  gave  many  things  to  the  soldiers  during  the  war.  4.  The 
rich  have  rarely  too  much  money.  5.  The  girl  surely  has  as  many 
pleasures  as  a  boy.  6.  The  generous  women  of  the  city  are  giving 
many  playthings  to  the  children.  7.  How  much  money  does  he 
have  ?  8.  There  are  generally  more  boys  than  girls  in  my  French 
class.  9.  Does  Mary  sing  better  than  the  other  sisters?  10.  John 
is  the  least  studious  boy  in  the  whole  school.  1 1 .  Jane  reads  badly, 
but  Mary  reads  the  worst  of  all  the  girls.  12.  The  French  woman 
has  more  beautiful  dresses  than  my  sister.  13.  His  eldest  son  has 
not  clothes  enough  for  his  children.  14.  We  think  that  he  is  still 
the  richest  man  in  the  country.  15.  At  school  we  sometimes  read 
aloud  the  reading  lesson.  16.  You  have  few  books,  but  Jane  has 
fewer  books  than  you.  17.  The  beautiful  castle  on  page  87  has 
many  high  towers.  18.  Most  often  I  write  my  French  exercises 
at  home.  19.  Their  nephews  work  a  great  deal  in  the  country. 
20.  There  are  still  more  castles  in  France  than  in  my  country. 

Proverbes 

C'est  le  premier  pas  qui  coute. 
fc  Le  chemin  le  plus  long  est  souvent  le  plus  court. 

Plus  on  se  h&te,  moins  on  avance. 
Le  mieux  est  Tennemi  du  bien. 


THE  PARTITIVE  CONSTRUCTION  89 

LESSON  THIRTEEN 

THE  PARTITIVE  CONSTRUCTION 

114.  The  Partitive  Idea.  The  use  of  a  noun  to  represent 
an  indefinite  part  of  its  class  of  objects  is  called  the  parti- 
tive use.  In  English  this  idea  is  expressed  by  some  or 
any,  which,  however,  are  often  omitted  when  the  thought 
is  clear  without  them ;  thus,  /  have  some  bread,  or  /  have 
bread  \  I  have  not  any  bread,  or  I  have  no  bread. 

115.  The  Partitive  Construction.  The  partitive  idea  is 
expressed  in  French  by  de  with  the  proper  form  of  the 
definite  article.  The  contractions  noted  in  Sec.  yy  take  place. 

some  (any)  bread,  du  pain  some  (any)  water,  de  Veau 

some  (any)  meat,  de  la  viande         some  (any)  books,  des  livres 

She  has  some  coffee.  Elle  a  du  cafe. 

You  always  have  friends.  Vous  avez  toujours  des  amis. 

Have  you  (any)  apples  ?  Avez-vous  des  pommes  ? 

He  gives  money  to  the  children.  71  donne  de  V argent  aux  enfants. 

Note.   The  partitive  sign  is  repeated  before  each  noun. 

There  are  bread  and  meat  on  the       II y  a  dupain  et  de  la  viande  sur  la 
table.  table. 

116.  Article  Omitted.  The  partitive  idea  is  expressed  by 
de  alone,  without  the  article, 

a.  When  the  noun  is  the  direct  object  of  a  negative  verb. 

I  have  no  (not  any)  bread.  Je  n'ai  pas  de  pain. 

I  have  no  (not  any)  ink.  Je  n'ai  pas  d*encre. 

He  has  no  (not  any)  pen.  77  n^a pas  deplume. 

There  are  no  (not  any)  pens.  II  rty  a  pas  de  plumes. 


90 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


&.  When  the  noun  is  preceded  by  an  adjective. 

I  have  (some)  good  bread.  fai  de  bon  pain. 

There  is  some  old  wine  on  the      II  y  a  de  vieux  vin  sur  la  tablt. 
table. 

But  when  the  adjective  follows  the  noun,  the  article  is  used. 

I  have  some  fresh  water.  fai  de  Veau  fraiche. 

Note.    The  use  of  de  without  the  article  after  adverbs  of  quantity 
(Sec.  1 1 3)  must  not  be  confused  with  the  partitive  construction. 

John  has  many  books.  Jean  a  beaucoup  de  livres. 

John  has  some  books.  Jean  a  des  livres. 

117.  Nouns  of  Measure  or  quantity  are  followed  by  de 
without  the  article. 

a  pound  of  meat,  une  livre  de  viande 
a  glass  of  water,  tin  verre  d'eau 


VOCABULARY 


achetS,  bought 
j'aime,  etc.,  I  like,  love,  etc. 
l'assiette/,  the  plate 

autour  de,  around 
la  banane,  the  banana 
le  bceuf ,  the  beef 
la  bouteille,  the  bottle 
le  cafe\  the  coffee 

chaque,  each 
le  couteau,  the  knife 
la  cuiller  [kiri-je:r],  the  spoon 
le  cuisinier,  the  cook  (m.) 
la  cuisiniere,  the  cook  (/) 

d6ja,  already 
le  dessert,  the  dessert 
le  diner,  the  dinner 


l'eau/,  the  water 
les  6piceriesy!,  the  groceries 

6t6,  been 
la  fourchette,  the  fork 
le  fruit,  the  fruit 
les  fruits,  the  fruit  (collectively) 
le  haricot  vert,  the  string  bean 
la  laitue,  the  lettuce 
le  legume,  the  vegetable 
le  marchi,  the  market 
au  marchi,  to  market 
la  nappe,  the  tablecloth 
notre  (pi.  nos),  our 
l'orange/.,  the  orange 
le  pain,  the  bread 
la  place,  the  place 


THE  PARTITIVE  CONSTRUCTION 


91 


la  pomme  de  terre,  the  potato 
je  prepare,  etc.,  I  prepare,  etc. 

pr6par£,  prepared 

quant  a,  as  for 
la  salade,  the  salad 


la  serviette,  the  napkin 
la  tasse,  the  cup 
le  verre,  the  glass 
la  viande,  the  meat 
le  vin,  the  wine 


EXERCISE 


Drill 

1.  Translate  into  French  — 

a.  he  has  a  horse 

we  have  some  horses 
has  he  any  white  horses  ? 
she  has  horses 
you  have  no  white  horses 
they  have  no  horse 

b.  some  red  apples 
some  red  wine 
some  red  fruit 

"  some  bad  fruit 
enough  fruit 

c.  around  the  house 
each  knife 

each  fork 

as  for  the  dessert 

our  meat 


I  have  some  good  horses 
we  have  no  coffee 
she  has  coffee 
she  has  black  coffee 
she  has  good  coffee 
have  we  the  coffee  ? 

too  much  fruit 

a  glass  of  water 

the  water 

little  cups 

a  bottle  of  black  coffee 

our  spoons 

I  have  been  in  France 
she  bought  a  dress 
she  brought  a  dress 
do  you  like  my  salad  ? 


2.  Replace  the  parentheses  by  French  forms : 

II  a  (some)  cafe.  Elle  a  (no)  viande.  J'ai  (no)  assiette.  Ont-ils 
(any)  cuillers  ?  Vous  avez  (little)  viande.  J'ai  (little  of  the)  salade. 
Elle  a  (not  any)  legumes.  lis  ont  (some)  bon  bceuf.  A-t-elle  (any) 
fleurs  blanches  ? 


92  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Model  Le  Diner 

Mon  pere  a  des  amis  a  diner  aujourd'hui.  II  a  donne  de  l'argent 
a  ma  mere.  Elle  a  ete  au  marche  et  a  achete  beaucoup  de  choses 
pour  le  diner:  des  epiceries,  du  pain,  des  legumes,  de  la  viande 
et  des  fruits.  Elle  n'a  pas  achete  de  cafe.  Elle  a  assez  de  cafe 
a  la  maison.  Pour  legumes  il  y  a  des  pommes  de  terre,  des  haricots 
verts,  et  de  la  laitue  tres  fraiche  pour  la  salade.  Quant  a  la  viande, 
ma  mere  a  achete  du  bceuf.  Elle  n'a  pas  achete  beaucoup  de  fruits 
parce  qu'ils  sont  chers.  Pour  le  dessert  elle  a  achete  seulement 
des  pommes,  de  bonnes  oranges,  de  belles  bananes  et  une  bouteille 
de  bon  vin.  Notre  salle  a  manger  est  grande.  Autour  de  la  table 
ronde  il  y  a  des  chaises.  Sur  la  table  il  y  a  une  nappe  blanche  et 
de  belles  serviettes ;  a  chaque  place  une  assiette,  une  fourchette, 
un  couteau,  de  grandes  et  de  petites  cuillers  et  des  verres.  Nous 
avons  de  bonnes  choses  pour  le  diner.  II  est  ge'neralement  bon 
parce  que  nous  avons  une  bonne  cuisiniere. 

Theme 

Today  my  mother  has  been  to  market  because  we  have  friends 
of  my  father  at  dinner.  My  father  gave  some  money  to  my 
mother,  and  with  the  money  she  bought  some  fresh  vegetables, 
meat,  bread,  groceries,  and  good  fruit.  My  mother  did  not  buy  any 
coffee;  she  has  coffee  enough  for  the  dinner.  After  (the)  dinner 
we  always  have  black  coffee.  Do  you  not  like  a  cup  of  black  coffee 
after  your  dinner  ?  As  for  meat,  my  mother  bought  some  beef.  We 
like  (the)  beef  much.  She  found  good  vegetables,  new  potatoes, 
very  tender  string  beans,  and  lettuce  for  the  salad.  The  lettuce 
is  very  fresh.  We  have  fruit  from  our  orchard,  but  my  mother 
has  bought  good  oranges,  and  also  some  bananas,  which  are  very 
dear.  Of  course  she  bought  a  bottle  of  wine,  which  is  already  on 
the  table  of  the  dining-room.  A  large  white  tablecloth  and  some 
napkins  are  on  the  table,  and  at  each  place  there  are  plates. 


THE  PARTITIVE  CONSTRUCTION  93 

Oral 

1.  Qui  (whom)  votre  pere  a-t-il  a  diner  aujourd'hui  ?  2.  Oil  votre 
mere  a-t-elle  e'te  ?  3.  A-t-elle  achete  de  la  viande  ?  4.  Les  fruits 
sont-ils  chers  ?  5.  Pourquoi  votre  mere  n'a-t-elle  pas  achete  de  cafe? 
6.  A-t-elle  trouve'  des  le'gumes  ?  7.  Votre  mere  n'a-t-elle  pas  assez 
de  fruits  dans  son  verger?  8.  Vos  parents  ont-ils  une  bonne 
cuisiniere  ?  9.  La  nappe  est-elle  sur  la  table  de  la  salle  a  manger  ? 
10.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  nappe?  11.  Oil  sont  les  serviettes? 
12.  Les  cuillers  sont-elles  petites  ou  grandes?  13.  Qui  a  prepare 
la  salade  ?  1 4.  Avez-vous  du  vin  sur  la  table  de  votre  salle  a  manger? 
15.  Avez-vous  toujours  de  la  viande  ? 

Resume 

1.  Do  you  have  friends  at  dinner  today?  2.  Yes,  sir,  and  our 
mother  has  already  been  to  market.  3.  The  cook  has  bought  fresh 
lettuce  for  the  salad.  4.  Happily  she  has  found  some  good  string 
beans.  5.  Did  not  your  mother  buy  any  potatoes  today  ?  6.  As 
for  the  fruit,  she.  found  only  some  big  red  bananas.  7.  At  each 
place  there  is  a  knife,  a  fork,  and  some  spoons.  8.  The  large  glasses 
are  for  the  water  and  the  smaller  ones  for  the  wine.  9.  Show  me 
your  pretty  white  tablecloth  and  your  beautiful  napkins.  10.  In 
our  dining-room  there  are  always  chairs  around  the  table.  1 1 .  The 
cook  is  preparing  beef  and  vegetables  for  the  dinner.  12.  We  are 
having  some  large  sweet  oranges  for  (the)  dessert.  13.  Often  we 
like  some  fresh  nuts  with  the  oranges.  14.  The  cook  has  brought 
a  piece  of  tender  beef  on  each  plate.  15.  After  a  good  dinner  do 
you  not  like  a  cup  of  black  coffee?  16.  There  is  no  fresh  water 
in  the  house.  17.  My  father  found  many  big  cabbages  at  the  other 
market.  18.  Have  you  fresh  bread  enough  for  the  dinner?  19.  I 
like  a  dinner  in  the  woods  with  the  whole  family.  20.  Did  your 
cook  also  buy  some  groceries  for  your  mother  ? 


94  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

LESSON   FOURTEEN 

USES  OF  THE  ARTICLES 

118.  Articles  in  French  are  used,  in  the  main,  as  in  Eng- 
lish ;  important  cases  where  the  two  languages  differ  follow. 

119.  The  General  Sense.  Common  nouns  take  the  defi- 
nite article  in  French  when  they  are  used  in  a  general  or 
inclusive  sense  ;  that  is,  when  they  refer  to  the  whole  of  a 
class  of  objects. 

Men  are  mortal.  Les  hommes  sont  mortels. 

Glass  is  useful.  Le  verre  est  utile. 

Ripe  strawberries  are  red.  Les  /raises  mures  sont  rouges. 

I  love  good  children.  J'aime  les  bons  enfants. 

Vice  is  odious.  Le  vice  est  odieux. 

Life  is  short.  La  vie  est  courte. 

Note  i  .  The  last  two  sentences  above  illustrate  the  general  use  of 
the  article  with  abstract  nouns,  which  represent  an  entire  quality  or  con- 
ception rather  than  a  class  of  objects.  ' 

Note  2.  The  general  sense  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the 
partitive  use. 

She  loves  flowers  (as  a  class).  Elle  aime  lesfleurs. 

She  has  (some)  flowers.  Elle  a  desfleurs. 

Birds  {general)  have  wings  (parti-  Les  oiseaux  ont  des  ailes. 

live). 

Note  3.  The  use  of  the  article  in  French  is  so  extensive,  for  one 
reason  or  another,  that  the  student  should  never  use  a  common  noun 
without  an  article,  possessive  adjective,  or  some  similar  word,  unless  he 
has  a  definite  reason  for  such  omission.  Such  reasons  are  found  in 
Sees.  121  and  149. 

We  have  meat  for  dinner.  Nous  avons  de  la  viande pour  le  diner. 

Morning  is  the  best  part  of  the  day.     Lemattn  est  la  meilleure partie  du  jour. 


USES  OF  THE  ARTICLES  95 

120.  Proper  nouns  take  the  definite  article  in  French 

a.  When  preceded  by  a  title  or  adjective  (except  in 
direct  address). 

Marshal  Foch,  le  marechal  Foch 
little  Charles,  le  petit  Charles 
beautiful  France,  la  belle  France 

b.  When  they  are  the  names  of  countries  or  other  large 
geographical  divisions. 

France  is  beautiful.  La  France  est  belle. 

America  saved  Europe.  L'Amerique  a  sauve  VEurope. 

Note.  Most  names  of  countries  ending  in  e  are  feminine;  most 
others  are  masculine.  Before  feminine  singular  names  of  countries,  in 
and  to  are  expressed  by  en ;  before  masculine  and  plural  names  of 
countries,  by  a.  The  definite  article  is  omitted  after  en,  and  also  after  de 
when  it  means/raw,  with  feminine  names  of  countries ;  but  with  mas- 
culine and  plural  names  the  article  is  used. 
London  is  in  England.  Londres  est  en  Angleterre. 

He  is  going  to  Italy.  //  va  en  Italic 

She  is  coming  from  Germany.  Elle  vient  d'Atiemagne. 

They  live  in  Canada.  Its  demeurent  au  Canada. 

We  live  in  the  United  States.  Nous  demeurons  aux  iZtats-Unis. 

He  is  coming  from  Japan.         #  //  vient  dujapon. 

121.  The  Indefinite  Article  is  not  used  in  French  before 
an  unmodified  predicate  noun  denoting  profession,  rank, 
nationality,  and  the  like. 

I  am  a  soldier.  Je  suis  soldat. 

She  is  a  queen.  Elle  est  reine. 

His  friend  is  an  Englishman.  Son  ami  est  anglais. 

Note.  The  small  a  of  anglais  shows  that  in  such  a  sentence  the 
word  appears  to  the  French  as  an  adjective. 

But  the  article  is  used  when  the  predicate  noun  is  modified. 
My  friend  is  a  good  teacher.  Mon  ami  est  un  bon  maitre. 

John  is  a  soldier  of  France.  Jean  est  un  soldat  de  la  France. 


96 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


VOCABULARY 


les  Alpes/.,  the  Alps 
americain,  American 
anglais,  English 
l'Angleterre/.,  England 
le  Canada,  Canada 
la  capitale,  the  capital 
dit,  says,  said 
en,  in,  into,  to 
les  Etats-Unis  /#.,  the  United 
States 
l'&ranger  (/  -ere),  the  for- 
eigner 
l'Europe/,  Europe 
le  fleuve,  the  river  (Note) 

jamais,  ever 
le  lac,  the  lake 

Londres  m.,  London 
le  marshal,  the  marshal 


le  mont,  the  mount 

la  montagne,  the  mountain 

odieux,  odious 
Fouest  [west]  m.,  the  west 
h  l'ouest,  in  the  west 

Paris  m.,  Paris 
la  population,  the  population 

quel  ?  (/.  quelle  ?)  what  ? 
la  riviere,  the  river  (Note) 
la  Seine,  the  Seine 

servi,  served 
la  Tamise,  the  Thames 
le  Texas,  Texas 

utile,  useful 

va,  goes,  is  going 
le  vice,  the  vice 

vient,  comes,  is  coming 

visiter,  to  visit 


Note.    Fleuve  generally  means  a  large  river ;  riviere,  a  smaller  one. 


Drill 

I .  Express  in  French  — 

a.  horses  are  useful 

good  students  are  attentive 
boys  are  taller  than  girls 
vice  is  odious 

c.  he  is  a  teacher 

his  brother  is  a  teacher 
John  is  a  good  teacher 
we  have  a  teacher 


EXERCISE 


b.  they  have  horses 
he  has  good  pupils 
some  boys  are  here 
I  have  no  fork 

d.  she  is  French 

she  is  an  American 
she  is  a  French  cook 
we  have  a  French  lesson 


USES  OF  THE  ARTICLES  97 

2.  Express  in  French  — 

is  she  in  France  ?  in  Canada 

she  is  in  France  he  is  going  to  Germany 

in  the  United  States  it  is  in  the  city 

in  England  from  Paris 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

leaves  are  green  from  England 

he  is  a  soldier  France  is  rich 

England  is  small  little  John 

owls  have  big  eyes  his  father  is  a  polite  man 

4.  Select  all  the  nouns  in  the  Model  that  are  used  in  the 
general  sense ;  in  the  partitive  sense. 

Model  La  France 

La  France  est  un  tres  beau  pays.  Elle  est  a  l'ouest  de  l'Europe. 
Elle  est  beaucoup  plus  petite  que  les  litats-Unis.  Elle  est  plus 
petite  que  le  Texas,  mais  sa  population  est  plus  grande.  Les 
Francais  sont  vifs  et  gais.  La  France  est  un  vieux  pays.  En 
France  il  y  a  des  montagnes  qui  sont  tres  hautes.  Les  montagnes 
sont  toujours  tres  jolies  aux  yeux  des  etrangers.  La  plus  haute 
montagne  est  le  mont  Blanc.  La  France  a  de  grands  fleuves.  II 
n'y  a  pas  de  grands  lacs.  Paris  est  la  capitale  de  la  France.  Paris 
est  sur  la  Seine.  Les  villes  qui  sont  aussi  belles  que  Paris  sont 
rares.  Londres,  sur  la  Tamise,  est  en  Angleterre  et  est  la  capitale 
du  pays.  Les  Anglais  vont  souvent  en  France.  II  y  a  des 
Francais  a  Londres  et  des  Anglais  a  Paris.  Avez-vous  jamais 
visite  Paris  ?  II  y  a  des  Francais  aux  £tats-Unis.  J'ai  un  ami  qui 
a  ete  soldat  pendant  la  grande  guerre.  II  a  servi  sous  le  mare'chal 
Foch.  Le  marechal  Foch  est  un  grand  general.  Les  bons  generaux 
sont  rares. 


98 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Theme 

France  is  an  old  country.    Paris,  which  is  the  capital  of  the 
country,  is  on  the   Seine.     Foreigners  often  visit  Paris.    There 

are  many  Americans  in  Paris, 
and  there  are  French  people 
(Sec.  102)  in  the  United  States. 
The  English  often  go  to  France 
too.  There  are  English  who  live 
in  Canada.  Your  brother  is  not 
an  American.  He  comes  from 
Canada,  where  he  is  a  soldier. 
He  has  been  in  France.  He 
says  that  war  is  odious.  France 
is  in  the  west  of  Europe.  The 
country  is  smaller  than  Texas, 
but  it  has  a  greater  population. 
In  France  there  are  very  high 
mountains.  Mont  Blanc  is  the 
highest  mountain  in  the  Alps. 
France  has  great  rivers.  Rivers 
are  useful. 

Oral 

1.  Votre    ami   est-il   soldat? 

2.  Qui  est  le  mare'chal  Foch  ? 

3.  La  France  est-elle  plus  grande 
que  les  fitats-Unis  ?  4.  Oil  est 
la  France  ?  5.  La  France  a-t-elle 
des  fleuves  ?  6.  Les  fleuves  ne 
sont-ils  pas  utiles?  7.  Quelle  est 


le  marfxhal  foch 

Foch,  general  en  chef,  commandant 
les  armees  de  tous  les  Allies  a  la  fin 
victorieuse  de  la  grande  guerre,  op- 
cupait  encore  dans  Parmee  franeaise, 
en  191 4,  une  position  subordonnee. 
II  s'etait  consacre,  toute  sa  vie,  a 
Petude  et  a.  l'enseignement  des  tac- 
tiques  militaires.  Ses  qualites  de  com- 
mandant devinrent  si  evidentes  que 
son  elevation  au  supreme  commande- 
ment  etait  inevitable.  II  a  ete  fait,  de- 
puis,  marechal  de  France  et  membre 
de  PAcademie.    Voir  page  20 


la  capitale  de  la  France  ?  8.  Sur 
quel  fleuve  est  Paris?  9.  N'avez-vous  pas  ete  a  Paris?  10.  Les 
etrangers   ne  visitent-ils   pas    Paris?     11.  Etes-vous  francais  ou 


USES  OF  THE  ARTICLES  99 

americain?    12.  Le  Canada  est-il  en  Amerique?    13.  Avez-vous 
ete  au  Canada  ?    1 4.  Quelle  est  la  capitale  des  fitats-Unis  ? 

Resume 

1.  All  Americans  love  France.  2.  Good  apples  are  dear  now. 
3.  There  are  often  little  lakes  on  high  mountains.  4.  In  the  west 
of  Europe  there  are  four  long  rivers.  5.  All  countries  are  not  so 
small  as  England.  6.  Paris,  the  largest  city  of  France,  is  on  a  long 
river.  7.  Friends  are  useful ;  have  you  many  friends  ?  8.  Marshal 
Foch,  one  of  the  best  generals  of  the  great  war,  is  a  Frenchman. 
9.  Foreigners  do  not  always  love  the  United  States.  10.  Such  men 
are  odious  to  all  friends  of  America.  1 1 .  The  population  of  France 
is  less  than  the  population  of  the  United  States.  12.  He  is  at 
Paris,  but  his  sister  is  in  England.  13.  Little  Charles  has  the  best 
books  in  the  house.  1 4.  Englishmen  admire  the  Thames ;  they 
love  also  forests  and  mountains.  15.  My  aunt  is  a  teacher  and 
reads  French  books  well.  16.  Young  Leblanc  is  a  good  soldier; 
he  served  in  France  under  General  Pershing.  17.  Canada  is  larger 
than  England;  many  French  live  in  Canada.  18.  I  have  a  friend 
who  visits  Europe  often.  19.  Chalk  is  useful  to  pupils  at  school. 
20.  My  chum  has  some  good  nuts,  but  he  has  no  big  oranges. 

REVIEW 

(Lessons  Eleven  to  Fourteen) 
A.  General  Drill 

1.  Compare  the  French  adjectives  meaning  — 

pretty  poor  proud 

good  little  bad 

2.  Compare  the  French  adverbs  meaning  — 

often  little  badly 

well  proudly  much 


IOO  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

3.  Compare  downward  — 

grand  cruellement  age 

4.  Form  the  adverbs  meaning  — 

richly  happily  rarely 

prettily  usefully  jealously 

5.  Define  the  partitive  construction.    How  is  it  expressed 
in  French  ?  When  is  the  article  omitted  ? 

6.  1/anslate  into  French,  and  complete  by  inserting  in 
the  blanks  in  turn  the  word  for  bread,  meat,  water,  apples : 
we  have  some more 

he  has enough 

has  she  any ?  how  much  (many) ? 

I  have  no most 

you  have  some  good good 

7.  Give  three  cases  where  the  definite  article  is  used  in 
French  but  not  in  English.    Illustrate. 

8.  Give  French  sentences  containing  — 

meilleures  sur  jouent 

agee  Canada  mieux 

leurs  en  ete 

sur  pires  dit 

9.  Translate  into  French  — 

the  most  attractive  lady  in  England 

she  sings  most  sweetly  in  the  United  States 

she  is  young  in  the  room 

she  is  younger  than  you  in  the  country 

she  is  as  young  as  you  young  Peter 

she  is  not  so  young  as  you  I  am  a  merchant 

the  best  pupils  in  the  school  my  father  is  a  rich  merchant 

horses  are  useful  he  is  an  Englishman 

chalk  is  white  France  and  England 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XI-XIV  IOI 

General  Montcalm  much  less  badly 

she  has  no  friend  on  the  least  occasion 

fresh  water  enough  .  I  often  play 

the  prettier  of  the  two  he  has  played  often   - 

the  prettiest  of  all  a  glass  of  v/ine" 

10.  Rewrite  correctly  the  words  in  italics  : 
Les  hommes  aime  des  montagnes.  II  y  ont  beaucoup  des  mon- 
tagnes  dans  France.  France  a-t-i/  de  pres  verts  ?  Les  Francais 
enfants  sont  bien  eleves.  Aimez-vous  des  petits  enf antes'!  Avez 
vous  plus  des  cousins  que  votre  vieux  ami,  Marie  ?  Etes-vous  plus 
age  de  la  petite  fille?  Avez-vous  ete  en  Canada  et  en  Paris? 
licrivez-vous  mauvais  ? 

B.  Translate  into  French  ♦ 

i.  My  uncle  is  the  oldest  man  in  your  city.  2.  My  friend  is  a 
good  teacher  and  he  has  many  friends  in  England.  3.  Many  rich 
men  have  beautiful  houses.  4.  I  have  much  less  money  than  you. 
5.  Such  attentive  girls  are  always  bright  pupils.  6.  The  Thames, 
the  largest  river  in  England,  is  not  very  long.  7.  All  the  children 
have  bread  enough,  but  we  have  little  meat.  8.  Good  fresh  water 
is  better  than  tea  or  coffee.  9.  Are  all  the  generals  brave  ?  No,  but 
they  are  dear  to  the  soldiers.  1  o.  You  have  too  much  mpney,  but  I 
do  not  have  money  enough.  11.  He  has  big  bananas  and  sweet 
oranges,  but  there  is  no  lettuce  for  the  salad.  12.  Wood  is  more 
useful  than  glass,  and  it  is  less  dear.  13.  Does  the  little  girl  write 
better  than  her  older  sister?  Yes,  and  she  reads  better  also.  14.  His 
brother,  who  is  an  English  soldier,  has  been  in  France.  15.  The 
Frenchman  is  not  so  tall  as  his  English  friend.  16.  London  is  one 
of  the  oldest  cities  in  Europe.  17.  John's  mother  has  bought  some 
new  dresses  and  many  beautiful  jewels.  18.  Are  there  any  owls 
in  the  holes  of  the  old  trees  in  the  garden  ?  19.  America  is  larger 
than  France  and  has  more  beautiful  lakes.  20.  My  friend  lives  in 
the  country ;  she  has  some  white  horses  and  many  beautiful  cows. 


102 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


LESSON    FIFTEEN 

REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS  -  PRESENT  INDICATIVE 

122.  The  Three  Conjugations.  The  infinitive,  which  in 
French  as  in  English  is  the  fundamental  form  of  the  verb, 
ends  in  either  er,  ir,  or  re.  This  infinitive  ending  determines 
the  conjugation,  or  system  of  inflection,  to  which  a  verb 
belongs.  There  are  three  such  systems,  or  conjugations,  in 
French  verbs. 

First  Conjugation 

Infinitive  ending  in  er :  donn-er,  to  give 

* 

Second  Conjugation 
Infinitive  ending  in  ir :  fin-ir,  to  Jifiish 

Third  Conjugation 
Infinitive  ending  in  re :  vend-re,  to  sell 

Note.  That  portion  of  a  verb  to  which  the  endings  are  added  is* 
called  the  stem. 

123.  Formation  of  Present  Indicative.  The  endings  of 
the  present  indicative  of  the  three  regular  conjugations  are, 
reading  vertically, 


Singular 


First 
Conjugation 


Second 
Conjugation 

is 
is 
it 


Third 
Conjugation 

s 
s 


Plural 

All 
Conjugations 

ons 

ez 

ent 


PRESENT  INDICATIVE  103 

124.  Present  Indicative  of  the  Three  Conjugations,  illus- 
trating the  endings  above  : 

donner  (1st)  finzr  (2d)  vendre  (3d) 

je  donne  je  finis  je  vends 

tu'donnes  tu  finis  tu  vends 

il  donne  il  finit  il  vend 

nous  donnons  nous  finissons  nous  vendons 

vous  donnez  vous  finissez  vous  vendez 

ils  donnent  ils  finissent  ils  vendent 

Note  i.  Observe  the  connecting  syllable  iss  in  the  plural  of  the 
second  conjugation.  The  i  in  the  singular  of  this  conjugation  is  also  a 
sort  of  connecting  vowel.  For  a  complete  rule  for  the  formation  of  this 
tense  see  Sec.  1 28. 

125.  The  Translation  of  the  Present  Indicative  often 
leads  to  auxiliary  forms  in  English,  such  as  are  briefly 
mentioned  in  Sec.  92. 

a.  In  progressive  and  emphatic  forms : 

je  donne,  I  am  giving,  I  do  give 
il  donne,  he  is  giving,  he  does  give 

b.  In  negative  sentences  : 

*!"''«  f  He  is  not  giving 

II  ne  donne  pas^   ,,    _        \    . 
[  He  does  not  give 

c.  In  interrogative  sentences  : 

_  f  Are  you  giving? 

Donnez-vous?i  ^  .     _ 

{Do you  give? 

,T    ,  A  .,  ,  [Are  they  not  giving? 

Ne  donnent-ils  pas?^  ^     ,  y     „    .     J 
[Do  they  not  give  ? 

Note.  In  translating  a  compound  English  verb  form  into  French, 
the  pupil  should  observe  that  the  auxiliary,  in  the  present  tense  and  in 
other  forms  to  be  met  later,  is  expressed  merely  by  the  proper  tense 
ending  of  the  French  verb. 

We  are  giving.         Nous  donnons.  He  will  give.         //  donnercu 


104 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


VOCABULARY 


aimer,  to  love,  like 

aimer  mieux,  to  prefer 

arranger,  to  arrange 

Particle  m.,  the  thing 

le  bl£,  the  wheat 

le  boucher,  the  butcher 

le  boulanger,  the  baker 

choisir,  to  select 
le  comptoir,  the  counter 
la  corbeille,  the  basket 

demander,  to  ask  (for) 

d^penser,  to  spend 

descendre,  to  go  down,  come 
down 

donner,  to  give 
l'emplette/.,  the  purchase 

emporter,  to  carry  away 

enfin,  finally,  at  last 
PSpicier  m.,  the  grocer 

faire,  to  make 

fait,  makes 


le  filet,  the  net-bag 

finir,  to  finish,  end 
le  fruitier,  the  fruit  dealer 
le  magasin,  the  store 
la  monnaie,  the  change 

montrer,  to  show 
le  mouton,  the  mutton 

obligeant,  obliging 

p£trir,  to  knead 

pour,  for,  in  order  to,  to  (Note) 

que,  that,  which,  (as  object)  • 

rendre,  to  give  back 
le  sel,  the  salt 
la  sorte,  the  kind 
le  sucre,  the  sugar 

tendre,  to  hand  out 
le  thS,  the  tea 
la  tomate,  the  tomato 

tomber,  to  fall 

trouver,  to  find 
le  veau,  the  veal 

vendre,  to  sell 


la  farine,  the  flour 

garcon  de  magasin,  clerk 

descendre  en  ville,  to  go  down  town 

chez  le  fruitier,  etc.,  at  the  fruit  dealer's,  etc, 

Note.    To,  when  it  means  in  order  to,  is  always  pour. 


~   .„  EXERCISE 

Drill 

I.  Give  the  present  indicative  in  full  of  — 

trouver  rendre  choisir 

pe'trir  aimer  descendre 


PRESENT  INDICATIVE  105 

2.  Complete  these  forms  in  the  present  tense : 


tu  montr—                ils  fin— 

ils  emport— 

vous  tend—              elle  arrang— 

vous  chois— 

j'aim—                      je  chois— 

elles  demand — 

il  rend—                   nous  pe'tr— 

ils  rend— 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

she  comes 

we  < 

io  not  show 

we  are  not  finding 

she 

is  going 

they  choose 

you 

are  not  finding 

he  is  going  down 

the) 

r  are  giving  back 

she  kneads 

I  do  not  love 

you  do  spend 

she  does  not  carry  away 

he  comes  to  sell 

the 

tea  that  I  like 

4.  Give  the  full  tense  of  — 

je  rends  la  monnaie 
je  choisis  une  corbeille 
je  n'aime  pas  le  mouton 

5.  Use  successively  je,  nous,  vous,  tu,  elles,  as  the  sub- 
jects of  the  italicized  verbs  in  the  Model  below,  making  the 
corresponding  changes  in  the  verbs. 

Model  Au  Marche 

Ma  mere  descend  en  ville  pour  faire  des  emplettes.  Le  fruitier 
montre  a  ma  mere  les  beaux  fruits  murs  et  les  legumes  frais  qui 
sont  dans  des  corbeilles  et  dans  de  grands  sacs.  Ma  mere  choisit 
des  poires,  des  tomates,  et  des  pommes  de  terre  nouvelles.  Le 
fruitier  donne  une  belle  pomme  rouge  &  ma  mere.  Elle  emporte 
ses  emplettes  dans  un  filet.  Chez  Pepicier,  qui  vend  du  sucre,  du 
cafe  et  beaucoup  d'autres  epiceries,  elle  demande  du  the  et  du  sel. 
Le  garcon  de  magasin,  qui  est  tres  obligeant,  arrange  les  articles 
sur  le  comptoir.    Ma  mere  tend  de  l'argent  a  l'e'picier,  qui  rend  la 


106  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

monnaie.  L'epicier  ne  vend  pas  de  pain.  Le  boulanger  fait  le  pain 
avec  de  la  farine  de  ble',  qu'il  petrit  avec  de  l'eau.  Le  boucher  vend 
du  boeuf,  du  veau  et  du  mouton.  Ma  mere  depense  beaucoup 
d'argent  chez  le  boucher  parce  que  la  viande  est  chere.  Y&zfinit 
enfin  ses  emplettes.  Elle  est  de  retour  a  la  maison.  Elle  a  achete 
beaucoup  de  choses. 

Theme 

At  the  market  we  bought  many  things  today.  The  butcher 
generally  has  beef  that  we  like.  Do  you  like  beef  as  much  as  veal  ? 
I  prefer  veal.  The  butcher  sells  also  mutton.  Meat  is  dear  now. 
At  the  fruit  dealer's,  where  we  often  find  beautiful  fruit  that  he 
arranges  well  on  the  counters,  we  bought  pears  and  cherries.  We 
always  choose  the  best  ones.  The  fresh  vegetables  that  we  also 
find  at  the  fruit  dealer's  are  in  baskets  or  in  large  bags.  The  fruit 
dealer  is  very  obliging.  The  grocer  is  opposite  the  fruit  dealer. 
He  sells  sugar  and  coffee.  He  has  two  kinds  of  coffee.  We 
choose  the  best.  We  hand  out  money  to  the  clerk,  who  gives  back 
the  change  to  my  mother.  At  the  baker's  we  bought  bread.  We 
always  spend  much  money  when  we  go  down  town  to  make  our 
purchases. 

Oral 

i.  Ou  notre  mere  descend-elle  ?  2.  Pourquoi  descend-elle  en 
ville  ?  3.  Quels  legumes  votre  mere  choisit-elle  ?  4.  Qui  montre 
les  legumes  a  votre  mere  ?  5.  Choisit-elle  seulement  des  legumes  ? 
6.  Ou  sont  les  legumes  et  les  fruits  ?  7.  L'epicier  vend-il  seulement 
du  cafe  ?  8.  Le  garcon  de  magasin  est-il  aimable  ?  9.  Qui  vend  du 
pain?  10.  Quelle  viande  le  boucher  vend-il?  11.  Pourquoi  votre 
mere  depense-t-elle  beaucoup  d'argent  chez  le  boucher?  12.  Ou 
a-t-elle  demande  du  the  ?  13.  Aimez-vous  le  mouton  mieux  que  le 
veau?  14.  Quel  fruit  aimez-vous  le  mieux?  15.  L'e'picier  vend-il 
du  pain  ? 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS  — THE  IMPERFECT         107 

Resume 

1.  Children  like  apples  or  pears  for  (the)  dessert.  2.  My  mother  is 
asking  for  tea  and  coffee.  3.  The  cook  does  not  find  any  sugar. 
4.  The  fruit  dealer  does  not  sell  bread ;  he  sells  fruit.  5.  My  father 
always  spends  more  money  than  my  mother.  6.  We  found  our 
purchases  at  last  and  carried  away  the  things  in  our  baskets. 
7.  Do  you  like  oranges  as  much  as  bananas  ?  8.  Does  he  not  sell 
many  groceries  to  the  women  of  the  city?  9.  The  grocer  is 
showing  (to)  my  mother  some  fine  white  flour.  10.  My  aunt  hands 
out  some  money  to  the  obliging  boy,  and  he  gives  back  the  change. 

11.  Did  you  buy  bread  and  some  other  things  at  the  baker's? 

12.  Are  you  going  down  town  to  buy  vegetables  ?  13.  Do  parents 
always  choose  good  toys  for  their  children  ?  1 4.  You  are  finishing 
your  grammar  lesson  ;  I  am  writing  my  French  exercise.  15.  Does 
the  teacher  give  long  lessons  to  the  pupils  that  he  likes  ?  1 6.  Are 
the  cooks  kneading  bread  for  dinner  ?  17.  Do  not  apples  fall  from 
trees  when  they  are  ripe?  18.  Many  women  like  tea  better  than 
coffee.  19.  Does  he  work  at  the  butcher's  or  at  the  fruit  dealer's  ? 
20.  When  we  are  at  the  market  we  choose  fresh  veal  or  mutton. 


LESSON   SIXTEEN 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS -THE  IMPERFECT 

126.  Principal  Parts.  Before  proceeding  to  other  tenses, 
attention  must  be  given  to  those  basal  forms  from  which 
the  rest  of  the  verb  is  derived  by  the  application  of  certain 
rules.  These  are  called  the  principal  parts.  They  are  five 
in  number  in  the  French  verb,  namely, 

Infinitive,  Present  Participle,  Past  Participle,  First  Person 
Singular  of  the  Present  Indicative,  First  Person  Singular  of 
the  Past  Definite. 


108 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


127.  The   Principal   Parts   of  the  Model   Verbs   of  the 
three  regular  conjugations  are 


First  Conjugation 


Infinitive 

donner 

to  give 

Pres.  Part. 

donnant 

giving 

Past  Part. 

donn£ 

given 

Pres.  Ind. 

je  donne 

I  give 

Past  Def. 

je  donnai 
Second  Conjugation 

I  gave 

Infinitive 

finir 

to  finish 

Pres.  Part. 

fin-iss-ant 

finishing 

Past  Part. 

fini 

finished 

Pres.  Ind. 

je  finis 

I  finish 

Past  Def. 

je  finis 
Third  Conjugation 

I  finished 

Infinitive 

vendre 

to  sell 

Pres.  Part. 

vendant 

selling 

Past  Part. 

vendu 

sold 

Pres.  Ind. 

je  vends 

I  sell 

Past  Def. 

je  vendis 

Isold 

Note.    Observe  that  the  present  participle  always  ends  in  ant 
that  it  has  the  connecting  syllable  iss  in  the  second  conjugation. 


also 


128.  Present  Indicative  and  Principal  Parts.  The  present 
indicative,  already  given  in  Lesson  Fifteen,  is  formed  from 
the  principal  parts  by  the  following  rules  : 

a.  The  first  person  singular  of  the  present  indicative  is 
itself  one  of  the  principal  parts.    It  ends  (in  regular  verbs) 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS  — THE  IMPERFECT 


109 


in  e,  is,  or  s.    The  corresponding  sets  of  endings  for  the 
singular  of   this   tense   are,   reading  vertically, 


ST  CONJ. 

2D  CONJ 

e 

is 

es 

is 

e 

it 

3D  CONJ. 


Note.  Another  series  of  endings,  x,  x,  t,  is  found  in  some  irregular 
verbs. 

b.  The  plural  of  the  present  indicative  is  formed  by- 
dropping  the  ending  ant  of  the  present  participle  and  adding 
ons,  ez,  ent. 

129.  The  Imperfect  is  formed  by  dropping  the  ending  ant 
of  the  present  participle,  and  adding  ais,  ais,  ait,  ions,  iez, 
aient.    Thus  : 


First  Conjugation 

je  donnais 

/  was  giving;  I  used  to  give,  etc. 

tu  donnais 

thou  wast  giving,  etc. 

il  donnait 

he  was  giving,  etc. 

nous  donnions 

we  were  giving,  etc. 

vous  donniez 

you  were  giving,  etc. 

ils  donnaient 

they  were  giving,  etc. 

Second  Conjugation 

je  fin-iss-ais 

I  was  finishing,  etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

Third  Conjugation 

je  vendais 

/  was  selling,  etc. 

etc. 

etc 

no 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


130.  The  Imperfect  expresses 

a.  What  is  thought  of  as  continued,  repeated,  or  habitual 
in  past  time. 


He  was  spending  his  money. 
He  did  not  love  his  children. 
They  used  to  sell  meat. 
She  often  kneaded  bread. 
We  would  ask  for  money  every 

morning. 
The  Gauls  used  to  worship  many 


//  depensait  son  argent. 
II  n'aimait  pas  ses  enfants. 
lis  vendaient  de  la  viande. 
Elle  petrissait  souvent  du  pain. 
Nous  demandions  de  V argent  tous 

les  matins. 
Les  Gaulois  adoraient  beaucoup 

de  dieux. 


gods. 

b.  What  is  thought  of  as  going  on  when  something  else 
happened  or  was  going  on. 


I  was  going  down  town  when  I 

found  the  money. 
I  was  working  when  you  were 

going  down  town. 
Caesar  attacked  the  Gauls  when 

they  were  divided. 


Je  descendais  en  ville  quand  fat 
trouvk  V argent. 

Je  travaillais  quand  vous  descen- 
diez  en  ville. 

Cesar  attaqua  (past  def.)  les  Gau- 
lois quand  Us  etaient  divises. 


Note.    The  use  of  the  imperfect  includes  the  expression  of  a  past 
mental  state. 

The  soldiers  thought  that  he  was       Les  soldats  pensaientqu,il  etait  brave. 
brave. 

VOCABULARY 


adorer,  to  worship 

autrefois,  formerly 

Cesar,  Caesar 
le  chef,  the  chief 
les  cheveux  m.,  the  hair 

comme,  like,  as 

couvert  de,  covered  with 
le  dieu,  the  god 

diviser  (en),  to  divide  (into) 


le  druide,  the  druid 
le  duel,  the  duel 

6tais,  etc.  [imp.  of  etre),  was,  etc. 
le  festin,  the  feast 

former,  to  form 
la  Gaule,  Gaul  (the  country) 
le  Gaulois,  the  Gaul  (a  person) 
l'habitant  m.,  the  inhabitant 

habiter,  to  inhabit 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS  — THE  IMPERFECT         III 


le  heros,  the  hero 

hospitalier  (/.  -iere),  hospi- 
table 

inde*pendant,  independent 

inviter,  to  invite 

Jules,  Julius 
la  justice,  the  justice 
*  le  mar&age,  the  swamp 

mener,  to  lead 
le  moment,  the  moment 
la  moustache,  the  mustache 
•la  nation,  the  nation 

national,  national 


le  nom,  the  name 

le  nombre,  the  number 

la  peau,  the  skin 

penser,  to  think 
le  peuple,  the  people,  tribe 

porter,  to  bear,  wear 

premier  (/.  -iere),  first 
le  pretre,  the  priest 

rendre,  to  render 

rude,  rude 
le  siecle,  the  century 

sombre,  dark,  gloomy 
la  vie,  the  life 


jr)n7/  EXERCISE 

1.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  the  regular  verbs  former, 
choisir,  tendre,  adorer,  perdre.  Give  their  imperfect  in  full ; 
their  present  indicative. 

2.  Give  the  imperfect  of  the  verbs  whose  present  participles 
are  allant,  6tant,  prenant,  e*tudiant,  punissant. 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 


a.  you  give 

you  were  giving 
you  gave 
you  used  to  give 
you  are  giving 
do  you  give  ? 
you  do  give 

b.  she  used  to  worship 
they  have  not  sold 
we  were  not 

does  he  not  love  ? 
I  was  not  showing 


were  you  giving  ? 

you  have  given 

you  are  not  giving 

giving 

you  were  not  giving 

do  you  not  give  ? 

to  give 

she  handed  out  a  pen 

you  were  asking  for  a  basket 

he  was  leading  a  rude  life 

are  they  finishing  ? 

they  were  going  down  town 


112  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

4.  Give  the  full  tense  of  — 

je  vends  du  bois 

j'ai  vendu  du  bois 

je  choisissais  un  bon  livre 

je  descendais  en  ville 

je  rends  la  justice 

Model  Les  Gaulois1 

Autrefois  la  France  portait  le  nom  de  Gaule.  Elle  etait 
couverte  de  forets  et  de  marecages.  Les  habitants,  les  Gaulois, 
ne  f ormaienU  pas  une  nation  comme  les  Francais  d'aujourd'hui.' 
lis  etaient  divises  en  un  grand  nombre  de  petits  peuples  inde- 
pendants.  Leurs  pretres,  les  druides,  rendaient  la  justice.  Les 
Gaulois  etaient  grands  et  forts.  lis  etaient  braves,  genereux,  et 
hospitaliers.  lis  aimaient  beaucoup  la  guerre  et  avaient  de  nom- 
breux  duels  apres  leurs  festins.  lis  choisissaient  pour  chefs  les 
plus  braves  de  leurs  soldats.  lis  adoraient  de  nombreux  dieux 
et  menaient  une  vie  simple  et  rude.  Leur  peau  etait  blanche,  leurs 
cheveux  blonds  et  longs,  et  ils  portaient  de  longues  moustaches. 
lis  habitaient  des  maisons  basses  et  sombres.  Au  moment  de 
l'invasion  de  la  Gaule  par  les  Romains,  Jules  Cesar  avait  une 
armee  mieux  disciplined  que  les  legions  du  chef  gaulois  Vercinge- 
torix,  le  premier  heros  national  de  la  France.  Apres  d'heroiques 
efforts  Vercingetorix  est  vaincu,  et  la  Gaule  est  romaine  pendant 
quatre  siecles. 

Theme 

Vercingetorix  is  the  first  national  hero  of  France.  He  was  chief 
of  the  Gauls.  He  wore  a  (the)  long  mustache ;  his  hair  was  long 
also.  Gaul  was  formerly  the  name  of  France,  and  it  was  not  the 
beautiful  country  that  it  now  is.    The  inhabitants  were  divided 

1  A  few  words  appearing  in  this  model,  but  not  elsewhere  in  this  lesson, 
must  be  sought  in  the  general  vocabulary,  at  the  end  of  the  book. 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS  — THE  IMPERFECT 


113 


into  independent  tribes  and 
did  not  form  a  nation.  They 
liked  war  very  much.  They 
were  hospitable  and  used 
to  invite  strangers  to  their 
feasts,  which  ended  often 
in  {par)  duels.  They  in- 
habited houses  which  were 
low  and  dark.  The  Gauls 
led  a  rude  life  in  a  country 
covered  with  many  great 
forests.  Their  priests,  who 
bore  the  name  of  druids, 
rendered  justice.  The  Gauls 
worshiped  a  great  number 
of  gods. 

Oral 

1.  Quel  nom  la  France 
portait-elle  autrefois?  2.  La 
Gaule  etait-elle  comme  la 
France   de   notre   temps  ? 

3.  Quel  nom  portaient  les 
habitants    de    la    Gaule? 

4.  Les  Gaulois  formaient- 
ils  une  nation?  5.  Qui  ren- 
dait  la  justice  ?  6.  Decrivez 
les  Gaulois.  7.  Quelle  vie 
menaient-ils  ?  8.  Leursche- 
veux  etaient-ils  courts  ? 
9.  Les  Frangais  portent-ils 
la  moustache?  10.  Quelles 
maisons  les  Gaulois  habi- 
taient-ils  ?     11.    Qui    etait 


VERCINGETORIX 

Ceux  qui  ont  etudie  la  conquete  des  Gaulois 
par  Cesar  connaissent  le  nom  de  Vercin- 
getorix.  Sa  defense  d'Alesia  est  un  des 
hauts  faits  d'armes  de  l'histoire.  Pres  de 
remplacement  probable  d'Alesia,  Napo- 
leon III  fit  eriger  une  statue  heroique  de 
ce  chef,  le  premier  a  concevoir  les  avan- 
tages  de  l'union  de  toutes  les  tribus  gau- 
loises  contre  l'envahisseur,  avantages  si 
bien  demontres  par  ses  paroles  gravees 
sur  le  piedestal  de  la  statue  :  «  La  Gaule 
unie,formant  une  seule  nation  animee  d'un 
meme  esprit,  peut  defier  l'univers  » 


114  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Jules  Cesar?  12.  Qui  etait  Vercingetorix?  13.  Pourquoi  les 
Francois  aiment-ils  Vercingetorix?  14.  Les  Francais  d'aujourd'hui 
sont-ils  grands  ?    15.  Nommez  un  ou  deux  de  leurs  heros. 

Resume 

1.  I  am  working;  you  were  working.  2.  The  Gauls  used  to 
inhabit  France.  3.  Formerly  Gaul  was  divided  into  small  tribes. 
4.  Did  the  inhabitants  of  Gaul  wear  long  mustaches  ?  5.  The 
priest  would  render  justice  to  the  Gauls.  6.  Every  feast  would 
end  in  (par)  a  duel.  7.  Vercingetorix,  who  was  their  first1  chief, 
is  now  a  national  hero  of  France.  8.  The  Gauls  inhabited  houses 
that  were  low  and  dark.  9.  The  father  was  working  and  the  sons 
were  spending  his  money.  10.  Gaul  did  not  form  one  nation  like 
France  of  today.  11.  They  used  to  sell  good  wood.  12.  Caesar 
used  to  select  the  bravest  men  for  his  soldiers.  13.  The  clerk  was 
handing  back  the  change  to  the  little  girl.  14.  My  grandfather's 
hair  was  black  when  he  was  young.  15.  The  inhabitants  of  Europe 
used  to  lead  a  rude  life.  1 6.  Were  all  the  mountains  covered  with 2 
thick  forests?  17.  The  druids  thought  that  their  gods  were 
stronger  than  men.  18.  He  would  often  fall  when  he  came  down 
from  his  room.  19.  Was  the  cook  preparing  vegetables  for  the 
children's  dinner?  20.  The  apples  were  ripe  and  were  falling 
from  the  trees. 

Mots  Celebres 

J'y  suis  et  j'y  reste.    (MacMahon  a  Sevastopol.) 

La  garde  meurt  et  ne  se  rend  pas.    (Cambronne  a  Waterloo.) 

On  ne  passera  pas.    (L'armee  francaise  a  Verdun.) 

Tout  est  perdu  fors  l'honneur.    (Francois  I  a.  Pavie.) 

1  For  position  of  the  adjective  see  Model. 

2  See  Model ;  de  alone  expresses  the  with  and  the  partitive. 


THE  PAST  DEFINITE  1 15 

LESSON   SEVENTEEN 

THE  PAST  DEFINITE 

131.  The  Past  Definite  (or  the  preterit)  is  the  other 
simple  past  tense.  Its  first  person  singular  is  itself  one  of 
the  principal  parts,  and  ends  (in  regular  verbs)  in  either  ai 
or  is.  The  other  five  forms  of  the  tense  are  made  by 
changing 

ai  to  as,  a,  ames,  ates,  erent  (first  conjugation) ; 

is  to  is,  it,  imes,  ites,  irent  (second  and  third  conjugations). 

Note.  A  third  set  of  endings,  us,  us,  ut,  etc.,  is  found  in  certain 
irregular  verbs. 

132.  The  Past  Definite  of  the  Model  Verbs,  in  accordance 
with  the  above  rule,  is 

First  Conjugation 

je  donnai,  I  gave,  I  did  give  nous  donnames,  we  gave,  etc. 

tu  donnas,  thou  didst  give  vous  donnates,  you  gave,  etc. 

il  donna,  he  gave,  etc.  ils  donnerent,  they  gave,  etc. 

Second  Conjugation 

je  finis,  I  finished,  I  did  finish        nous  finimes 
tu  finis  etc.  vous  finites 

il  finit  ils  finirent 

Third  Conjugation 

je  vendis,  I  sold,  I  did  sell  nous  vendimes 

tu  vendis  etc.  vous  vendites 

il  vendit  ils  vendirent 


t 

116  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

133.  Use  of  Past  Definite.    The  past  definite  expresses 
an  act  thought  of  as  taking  place  once  in  past  time. 
Cassar  attacked  Vercingetorix  at       Cesar  attaqua    Vercingetorix   a 

Alesia.  Alhia. 

She  left  France  forever.  Elle  quitta  la  France  pour  tou- 

jours. 
He  was  sitting  in  his  room  when      //  etait  assis  dans  sa  chambre 

he  heard  the  bell.  quand  il  entendit  la  cloche. 

134.  Past  Definite  and  Imperfect.  The  following  sen- 
tences illustrate  the  fundamental  difference  between  the 
past  definite  and  imperfect. 

He  did  not  sell  houses.       •  77    ne    vendait    (imp.)   pas    de 

maisons.    • 
He  did  not  sell  his  house.  II  ne  vendit  (past  de/.)  pas  sa 

maison. 
Joan  often  heard  voices.  Jeanneentenda.it  souvent des  voix. 

One  day  Joan  heard  a  voice.  Un  jour  Jeanne  entendit  une  voix. 

Note.  The  imperfect  is  often  called  the  descriptive  past,  and  the 
past  definite  the  narrative  past.  Essentially,  as  these  names  suggest,  the 
former  describes,  the  latter  narrates.  The  past  definite  is  also  frequently 
called  the  preterit. 

135.  The  Past  Indefinite,  a  compound  of  the  present  of 
avoir  with  past  participles,  has  been  used  since  Lesson  Four. 
Besides  expressing  the  English  perfect  it  serves  as  a 
substitute  for  the  past  definite,  a  substitution  that  becomes 
the  common  usage  in  colloquial  or  informal  style  for  most 
cases  where  the  past  definite  may  be  used. 

I  finished  my  work.  faifird  mon  travail. 

He  worked  four  days.  //  a  travailli  quatre  jours. 

We  saw  your  son  yesterday.  Nous  avons  vu  voire  Jils  hier. 

I  sold  the  house  last  year.  Jai   vendu    la    maison    Vannee 

passie. 


THE  PAST  DEFINITE 


117 


Note  i.  The  past  indefinite  is  mentioned  above  as  a  substitute  for 
the  past  definite.  Theoretically  the  past  definite,  like  the  English  past, 
locates  the  action  at  a  definite  point  in  a  period  of  time  fully  elapsed ; 
the  past  indefinite,  much  like  the  English  perfect,  locates  it  somewhere 
in  time  previous  to  the  present.  This  distinction  is  reflected  in  the 
names  past  definite  and  past  indefinite.  From  its  formation  as  a  com- 
pound tense,  the  past  indefinite  is  often  called  the  perfect. 

Note  2.  The  following  is  a  practical  working  rule  for  the  beginner, 
in  his  choice  of  the  correct  tense  to  represent  the  English  past.  If  the 
verb  has  the  active  auxiliary  was,  were,  or  is  preceded  by  used  to;  if  it 
expresses  a  habit;  if  it  describes  a  situation  in  which  or  along  with 
which  an  action  takes  place,  use  the  imperfect.  Elsewhere  use  the  past 
indefinite,  reserving  the  past  definite  for  formal  narrative  and  matters 
of  historical  importance. 

Note  3.  The  past  definite  will,  of  course,  be  regularly  met  in  French 
texts,  since  these  are  generally  in  formal  literary  style.  Even  here  the 
past  indefinite  is  the  prevailing  tense  in  the  conversational  portions. 


VOCABULARY 


x    ardent,  burning 
1'arniee/,  the  army 

attaquer,  to  attack 
le  Bourguignon,  the  Burgundian 

bruler,  to  burn 

chasser,  to  drive  (out) 

comment,  how 
le  courage,  the  courage 

ctesirer,  to  desire 

dix  (Sec.  216,  a),  ten 
la  domination,  the  control 

entendre,  to  hear 
la  foi,  the  faith 

fut,  was 

Jeanne,  Joan,  Jane 
le  jour,  the  day 
le  maitre,  the  master,  teacher 


Orleans,  Orleans 

partir,  to  start,  set  out 
le  paysan  (f.  -nne),  peasant 

pleurer,  to  weep 

presque,  almost 
le  prisonnier  (f.  -iere),  prisoner 

prit,  took 

ranimer,  to  revive 

regarder,  to  look  at  (upon) 
le  roi,  the  king 
le  saint  (/.  sainte),  the  saint 
le  sorcier  (/.  -iere),  the  sorcerer 
le  sort,  the  fate 

sur,  over,  on 

triste,  sad 

vif,  alive 

vu,  seen 


118 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Drill 


EXERCISE 


i.  Inflect  in  full  the  forms  thus  far  given  of  — 

(a)  entendre,  penser,  p6trir ;  (£)  the  verb  whose  principal  parts 
are  coudre,  cousant,  cousu,  je  couds,  je  cousis. 

2.  Locate  (that  is,  give  tense,  person,  and  number  of)  — 
pleurerent  finissent  hesitiez  finirent 


tombe 

demeura 

portent 

etais 

tombe 

choisites 

finissons 

entendant 

vend 

montrait 

choisissions 

adorames 

3.  Give  the  forms  for  — 

pres.  3d  sing,  of  demeurer 
imp.  2d  sing,  of  tendre 
past  def.  2d  pi.  of  trouver 
pres.  3d  pi.  of  finir 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

you  finish 

they  were  finishing 

he  showed 

he  does  not  hear 

you  were  thinking 


imp.  3d  pi.  of  choisir 
pres.  3d  sing,  of  entendre 
past  def.  3d  pi.  of  montrer 
pres.  2d  pi.  of  finir 


are  we  not  carrying  away  ? 

we  chose 

was  he  not  selling  ? 

you  are  selling 

are  they  not  kneading  ? 


5.  Supply  the  correct  forms  of  the  verbs  in  the  paren- 
theses, successively  in  the  present,  imperfect,  and  past 
definite  tenses  : 

Nous  (entendre)  un  enfant.  II  (pleurer)  et  (demander)  des  jou- 
joux.  Ses  parents  (demeurer)  a  la  campagne.  lis  (finir)  leur 
travail.  Le  pere  (vendre)  du  bois.  La  mere  (petrir)  du  pain. 
Elle  ne  (etre)  pas  gaie.   (Penser)  vous  qu'elle  (choisir)  du  fruit  ? 


THE  PAST  DEFINITE  1 19 

Model  Jeanne  d'Arc  1 

A  une  certaine  epoque,  la  France  etait  presque  sous  la  domi- 
nation anglaise,  quand  parut  Jeanne  d'Arc,  une  jeune  paysanne  de 
Domremy  en  Lorraine.  Elle  avait  vu  tres  sou  vent  les  habitants 
des  villages  fuir  devant  les  Anglais,  et  elle  pleurait  sur  le  triste  sort 
du  pays.  Elle  desirait  voir  l'ennemi  chasse  de  France.  Un  jour 
elle  entendit,  pensa-t-elle,2  des  voix  celestes,  qui  inspirerent  a  la 
jeune  fille  une  foi  ardente  et  un  grand  patriotisme.  Elle  ranime  le 
courage  du  peuple.  Elle  partit  trouver  le  roi  pour  obtenir  une 
armee.  II  hesita  longtemps,  mais  enfin  il  consentit.  Elle  attaqua 
Orleans,  qu'elle  prit  dix  jours  apres.  A  Compiegne,  Jeanne,  pri- 
sonniere,  est  vendue  aux  Anglais  par  les  Bourguignons,  leurs  allie's. 
Elle  fut  brule'e  vive  comme  sorciere  h  Rouen.  Les  Francais,  encore 
aujourd'hui,  regardent  Jeanne  comme  une  sainte. 

Theme 

Joan  of  Arc  lived  with  her  parents  at  Domremy  in  Lorraine. 
The  English,  who  were  masters  of  France,  often  attacked  the 
country  of  Domremy.  Almost  all  France  was  under  their  con- 
trol, and  Joan  wept  over  the  sad  fate  of  the  country.  Joan  had  a 
burning  faith.  She  desired  to  drive  the  English  from  France.  The 
king  finally  gave  an  army  to  Joan.  She  revived  the  courage  of  her 
soldiers,  who  attacked  Orleans  and  took  (prirenf)  the  city  ten  days 
after.  At  Compiegne  the  Burgundians  sold  Joan,  their  prisoner, 
to  the  English.  The  English  burned  alive,  in  Rouen,  the  young 
peasant,  whom  they  thought  to  be  a  sorceress. 

Oral 

1.  Ou  avez-vous  vu  un  portrait  "de  Jeanne  d'Arc?  2.  De  quel 
pays  etait  Jeanne  ?  3.  fitait-elle  vieille  ou  jeune  ?  4.  £tait-elle 
generalement   gaie  ?     5.  Pourquoi  ?     6.  Qui    etait    maitre   de   la 

1  Consult  the  general  vocabulary  for  new  words  not  found  in  the  vocabu- 
lary of  this  lesson.  2  See  Sec.  328,  a. 


JEANNE   D'ARC    (CEUVRE   DE  CHAPU) 

Une  paysanne  de  Domremy,  Jeanne  d'Arc,  possedant,  selon  la  tradition  et 
les  croyances  de  sa  chere  France,  un  pouvoir  surnaturel  d'esprit  et  de 
volonte,  est  reconnue,  par  tous  les  historiens,  comme  ayant  ete  animee  par 
un  amour  de  la  patrie  et  un  desinteressement  de  caractere  remarquables 
au  plus  haut  degre.  Femme  qu'elle  etait,  elle  ne  pouvait  esperer  acquerir 
des  benefices  personnels,  et  prouva  jusqu'au  bout  son  devouement  et  sa 
Constance  envers  son  roi,  lequel  personnifiait  un  pays  sur  le  point  de  ceder 
sans  resistance  a  l'ennemi.  «  Tout  ce  que  j'ai  fait,  j'ai  bien  fait  de  le  faire  », 
fut  sa  replique  a  ses  juges 


THE  PAST  DEFINITE  121 

France?  7.  Qu'entendit-elle  un  jour?  8.  Qui  Jeanne  partit-elle 
trouver?  9.  Que  desirait-elle  ?  10.  Le  roi  donna-t-il  une  armee 
a  Jeanne  ?  11.  Quelle  ville  attaqua-t-elle  ?  1 2.  En  combien  de  jours 
Jeanne  prit-elle  la  ville?  13.  A  qui  les  Bourguignons  vendirent- 
ils  Jeanne  ?  14.  De  qui  Jeanne  e'tait-elle  la  prisonniere  ?  15.  Com- 
ment la  France  regarde-t-elle  Jeanne  ? 

Resume 

1.  Joan  used  to  hear  voices  during  the  war.  2.  One  day  Joan 
heard  voices.  3.  I  heard  your  voice  in  the  classroom  today. 
4.  When  Joan  was  living  with  her  parents,  the  English  attacked 
her  village.  5.  The  soldiers  burned  many  of  the  peasants'  houses. 
6.  The  young  girl  often  wept  over  the  sad  fate  of  the  king  when 
the  English  would  attack  her  country.  7.  With  her  little  army 
she  drove  the  English  from  the  city.  8.  Soldiers  sold  Joan  to  the 
English,  who  burned  alive  their  prisoner.  9.  Peasants  almost 
always  live  in  the  country  or  in  small  villages.  10.  Joan  had 
courage  and  much  faith.  11.  When  the  French  army  took  the 
city,  the  Englishmen  started  for  England.  12.  Everybody  loves 
the  young  peasant  of  Domremy.  13.  Faith  revives  the  courage 
of  soldiers.  14.  The  French  looked  upon  Joan,  the  peasant  girl, 
as  a  saint.  15.  Your  sister  asked  for  a  new  dress  and  some 
jewels.  16.  He  did  not  give  as  much  money  to  his  sons  as  to  his 
daughters.  17.  The  teacher  would  show  a  new  map  to  his  pupils 
every  day.  18.  Did  Joan  show  great  courage  when  the  English 
army  took  the  city?  19.  He  thinks  that  I  found  the  nuts  in  the 
forest.    20.  The  English  and  French  used  to  burn  sorcerers. 


122  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

REVIEW 

(Lessons  Fifteen  to  Seventeen) 
A.  General  Drill 

1.  Name  the  five  principal  parts  in  order. 

2.  Give  the  ending  of  the  infinitive  of  the  three  conju- 
gations ;  of  the  present  participle ;  of  the  past  participle. 

3.  Name  four  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation ;  of  the 
second ;  of  the  third.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  a  verb 
from  each  conjugation. 

4.  Give  the  endings  of  the  present  indicative  plural ;  of 
the  imperfect. 

5.  Give  the  sets  of  endings  of  the  present  indicative 
singular ;  of  the  past  definite.  Which  sets  are  used  in  each 
conjugation  ? 

6.  Give  the  endings  of  the  whole  present  indicative  in 
each  conjugation ;  of  the  past  definite. 

7.  Give  the  principal  parts  and  the  three  tenses  thus  far 
treated  of  pleurer,  entendre,  punir. 

8.  Give  the  past  indefinite  of  the  three  verbs  of  7. 

9.  Give  the  three  tenses  thus  far  treated  of  the  verb 
whose  principal  parts  are  mettre,  mettant,  mis,  je  mets,  je  mis. 

10.  Give  the  forms  in  these  three  tenses  of  — 


2d  plu.  of  rendre 

1  st  plu. 

of  vendre 

3d  plu.  of  tomber 

3d  sing. 

of  punir 

2d  sing,  of  p&rir 

3d  plu. 

of  entendre 

11.  Give  French  sentences 

containing  - 

depenses 

fini 

habitaient 

e'tait 

aimait 

unit 

dieux 

chez 

REVIEW,  LESSONS  XV-XVII  123 

12.  Translate  into  French  — 

she  is  hearing  we  were  not  asking 

they  used  to  build  is  he  showing  ? 

is  he  weeping  ?  do  you  like  ? 

does  it  not  burn  ?  he  is  going  down 

were  you  inviting  ?  we  have  given 

13.  Translate  into  French  — 

we  worship  one  god  ,  Joan  selected  a  white  horse 
we  are  worshiping  our  god  I  selected  a  good  book 

the  Gauls  worshiped  many  gods        she  would  often  worship 
Joan  was  worshiping  in  the  garden      her  parents  loved  Joan 

14.  Supply  the  proper  form  of  the  verbs  in  the  parentheses, 
first  in  the  present  tense,  and  then  in  the  imperfect. 

Nous  (depenser)  beaucoup  d'argent  quand  nous  (acheter)  des 
legumes.  Ma  mere  (choisir)  des  pommes  et  (tendre)  Pargent  a 
l'epicier.  Je  (porter)  les  choses  a  la  maison.  Les  garcons  (aimer) 
aller  au  marche. 

1 5 .  Correct  the  following : 

Mon  ami  emportent  ses  livres.  II  a  beaucoup  des  livres.  II 
aimes  des  livres.  II  desires  a  avoir  des  bons  livres.  II  est  vendant 
un  nombre  des  livres  que  il  ne  desires  pas. 

B.  Translate  into  French 
1.  I  was  playing,  but  he  was  working  in  the  garden.  2.  Do 
teachers  always  punish  lazy  pupils  ?  3.  He  does  not  read  as  well 
as  you,  but  he  reads  better  than  his  brothers.  4.  Does  your  brother 
go  to  school  every  day?  5.  The  boys  used  to  bring  ripe  apples  to 
the  house  when  they  were  in  the  country.  6.  Many  birds  would 
sing  in  our  orchard  behind  the  house.  7.  The  children  often  found 
beautiful  flowers  in  the  meadow.  8.  Joan  used  to  hear  voices  in 
the  trees  when  she  was  living  in  Domremy.  9.  When  the  French 
attacked  the  English  they  drove  the  soldiers  from  the  country. 


124  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

10.  When   do   you   carry  back  the  playthings  to  the  children? 

1 1 .  Did  you  find  any  nuts  under  the  old  nut  tree  in  the  woods  ? 

12.  The  Gauls  would  often  choose  a  soldier  for  their  chief.  13.  My 
sister  bought  two  dresses  yesterday,  a  white  one  and  a  red  one. 

1 4.  He  sold  his  horses  to  my  friend,  who  is  now  living  in  Canada. 

15.  Did  you  see  the  little  boy  who  was  sitting  on  the  bench? 

16.  My  best  friend  did  not  prepare  his  lessons  and  was  always 
looking  at  the  teacher.  1 7.  We  are  choosing  your  French  grammar 
because  we  desire  the  best  orte.  18.  The  soldiers  burned  many 
houses  when  they  were  in  our  country.  19.  Did  the  king  finally 
give  an  army  to  the  young  French  girl  ?  20.  Formerly  he  went  to 
town  every  day  and  spent  more  money  than  his  friends. 

LESSON   EIGHTEEN 

THE  FUTURE 

136.  Formation  of  the  Future.  The  future  tense  is 
formed  by  adding  the  endings  ai,  as,  a,  ons,  ez,  ont  to  the 
r  of  the  infinitive,  a  final  e  being  dropped  as  the  endings 
are  added.    Thus : 

First  Conjugation 

je  donnerai,  I  shall  give  nous  donnerons,  we  shall  give 

tu  donneras,  thou  wilt  give  vous  donnerez,  you  will  give 

il  donnera,  he  will  give  ils  donneront,  they  will  give 

Second  Conjugation  Third  Conjugation 

je  finirai,  I  shall  finish  je  vendrai,  I  shall  sell 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

I  shall  leave  the  city  soon.  Je  quitterai  la  ville  bientbt. 

If  he  arrives  today,  I  shall  stay.      SHI  arrive  aujourd'huije  resterai. 

Note.   The  i  of  si  elides  before  il  and  ils.    See  Sec.  68. 


THE  FUTURE 


125 


137.  Future  after  Quand,  etc.  While  the  uses  of  the 
French  future  are  mainly  the  same  as  in  English,  the 
following  peculiarity  must  be  noted.  After  quand,  when, 
aussitot  que,  as  soon  as,  and  other  like  words,  the  future 
must  be  used  when  the  verb  denotes  future  time.  Similar 
constructions  in  English  are  usually  in  the  present. 
He  will  leave  the  room  when      li  quittera  la  salle  quand  elle 


she  sings. 
As   soon   as   he   arrives   (shall 
arrive)    I     shall    close     the 
window. 


chantera. 
A  ussitbt  qu  'il  arrivera,  jefermerai 
la /entire. 


But  when  future  time  is  not  implied,  the  future  is  not  used. 
He  leaves  the  room  when(ever)      77  quite  la  chambre  quand  elle 
she  sings.  chante. 


VOCABULARY 


accompagner,  to  accompany 
aller,  to  go 
l'annSe/.,  the  year 
arriver,  to  arrive 
v  aussitot  que,  as  soon  as 
les  bagages    m.,    the    baggage, 
luggage 
bientot,  soon 
au  bord  de,  on  the  edge  of 
le  buffet,  the  lunch  counter 

chercher,  to  look  for,  seek 
le  cocher,  the  coachman 
compter,  to  intend 
dejeuner,    to    lunch,    break- 
fast * 
dernier  (f,  -iere),  last 
ensemble,  together 


TStude/,  the  study 
la  fois,  the  time 
la  gare,  the  (railway)  station 
heler,  to  call,  hail 
il  y  avait,  there  was 
le  lieu,  the  place 
le  monde,  the  world 
du  monde,  people,  company 
monter    a    cheval,    to    ride 

horseback 
nager,  swim 

passer,  to  pass,  spend  (time) 
i  p£cher,  to  fish 
pendant  que,  while 
porter,  carry 
pr£t  (a),  ready  (to) 
prochain,  next 


126 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


quitter,  to  leave 
la  salle  d'attente,   the  waiting- 
room 
le  s6jour,  the  stay 
la  semaine,  the  week 

sur  le  point  de,  on  the  point  of,  about  to 

Note.    Phrases  like  last  week,  etc.,  take  the  article, 
last  week,  la  semaine  demiere  next  year,  Vannee  prochaine 


je  serai,  I  shall  be,  etc. 

si,  if 
les  vacances/!,  the  vacation 

vite,  quickly 
en  voyage,  on  a  journey 


Drin  EXERCISE 

1 .  (a)  Inflect  the  future  of  passer,  choisir,  entendre,  etre,  dire. 
(b)  Inflect  all  forms  treated  thus  far  of  finir,  compter,  tendre. 

2.  Locate  (that  is,  give  tense,  person,  and  number  of)  — 
vendrons  vendions  vendons 
vendant  vendent  vendront 
comptes  compteras  comptas 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 


vendre 

vendra 

montre 

montera 

montre 

monta 

a.  will  they  arrive  ? 
do  they  think  ? 
we  shall  not  seek 
does  he  not  leave  ? 

b.  I  shall  call  the  coachman 
they  will  fish  in  the  river 
shall  you  not  leave  the  house  ? 
when  he  wept  I  heard 

c.  last  week 
next  week 
the  last  time 
ready  to  fish 


were  we  choosing  ? 
did  she  lunch  ? 
were  they  asking  ? 
have  you  heard  ? 

when  he  arrives  we  go  down 
when  he  arrives  we  shall  go  down 
as  soon  as  he  arrives  I  shall  leave 
if  we  seek,  we  shall  find 

I  shall  spend  my  vacation  here 
in  order  to  give 
I  intend  to  give 
while  she  wept 


4.  Change  to  the  future  the  verbs  (except  avoir)  in  the 
Model  on  page  119. 


THE  FUTURE  1 27 

5.  Give  the  full  tense  of  — 
je  vendrai  du  ble 
je  ne  petrirai  pas  de  pain 
je  ne  serai  pas  pret  a  partir 

Model  Mes  Vacances 

Mon  ami  a  fini  ses  e'tudes  et  il  est  sur  le  point  de  partir1  en 
voyage.  II  quittera  la  ville  la  semaine  prochaine  pour  passer  ses 
vacances  a  la  campagne.  II  cherche  un  lieu  agreable.  L'annee 
derniere  il  e'tait  dans  un  joli  petit  village  au  bord  d'un  lac.  Aussitot 
que  ses  vacances  arriveront,  il  preparera  ses  bagages.  Quand  ses 
bagages  seront  prets,  il  he'lera  un  cocher  pour  aller  k  la  gare. 
J'accompagnerai  mon  ami.  La  derniere  fois  que  nous  e'tions  a 
la  gare  il  y  avait  beaucoup  de  monde  dans  la  salle  d'attente.  Dans 
deux  semaines  je  compte  aller  visiter  mon  ami.  Quand  j'arriverai, 
il  sera  a  la  gare.  Nous  dejeunerons  ensemble  au  buffet  Pendant 
mon  sejour  chez  mon  ami  nous  monterons  a  cheval,  nous  pecherons 
et  nagerons  dans  les  eaux  du  lac  ou  du  fleuve.  Nos  vacances 
finiront  trop  vite.  Quand  je  suis  a  la  campagne,  les  semaines 
passent  toujours  trop  vite. 

Theme 

I  shall  soon  finish  my  studies.  I  shall  leave  the  city  in  order  to 
go  to  the  country.  I  shall  spend  my  vacation  in  a  pleasant  place 
on  the  edge  of  a  lake  where  I  was  last  year.  I  shall  start  next  week 
if  I  am  ready.  I  shall  prepare  my  luggage  today.  The  coachman 
will  carry  my  luggage  to  the  station.  The  waiting-room  is  large 
and  beautiful.  When  I  arrive  in  the  country,  I  shall  find  my 
friend,  whom  I  shall  accompany  to  the  waiting-room.  We  shall 
look  for  the  lunch  counter  and  we  shall  lunch  together.  My  stay 
will  be  very  pleasant  because  I  shall  ride  horseback  often.    While 

1  Infinitives  following  a  preposition  must  often  be  translated  into  English 
by  a  present  participle.    See  Sec.  298. 


128  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

my  friend  fishes,  I  shall  swim  in  the  waters  of  the  lake.  Last  year 
I  was  often  in  the  water.  I  intend  to  spend  my  vacation  agreeably. 
My  stay  will  end  too  quickly.  When  I  spend  my  vacation  in  the 
country,  it  always  passes  too  quickly. 

Oral 

i.  Pourquoi  votre  ami  est-il  sur  le  point  de  partir  ?  2.  Partira-t-il 
aujourd'hui  ?  3.  Oil  passera-t-il  ses  vacances  ?  4.  Ou  etait-il  Panne'e 
derniere?  5.  A-t-il  trouve'  le  lieu  ou  il  desire  aller?  6.  Quand 
pre'parera-t-il  ses  bagages  ?  7.  Ses  bagages  sont-ils  prets?  8.  Pour- 
quoi votre  ami  helera-t-il  un  cocher  ?  9.  Ou  est  la  salle  d'attente  ? 
10.  Qui  comptez-vous  visiter?  11.  Serez-vous  seul  quand  vous 
arriverez  a  la  gare  ?  12.  Ou  nagerez-vous  quand  vous  serez  a  la 
campagne?  13.  Les  semaines  passent-elles  vite  a  la  campagne? 
14.  Passerez-vous  vos  vacances  ici?    15.  Montez-vous  a  cheval? 

Resume 

1.  My  friend  spends  his  vacation  in  the  country.  2.  His  parents 
used  to  spend  their  vacations  in  Canada  or  in  Europe.  3.  Do  you 
intend  to  spend  your  next  vacation  on  the  edge  of  a  river  ?  4.  Did 
my  friend  and  his  coachman  leave  the  waiting-room  together? 
5.  Joan  left  her  parents  and  accompanied  the  army.  6.  I  shall 
accompany  my  friend  to  the  station  when  he  leaves  the  school. 

7.  When  they  desire  to  go  to  the  station,  they  will  hail  a  coachman. 

8.  We  shall  start  next  week,  and  shall  soon  arrive  at  my  friend's 
home.  9.  The  friends  will  swim  in  the  pure  waters  of  the  lake. 
10.  Do  coachmen  often  spend  a  day  at  home  ?  n.  She  would  ride 
horseback  almost  every  day  in  the  park.  12.  I  shall  soon  finish 
my  studies  and  shall  leave  the  city  for  my  vacation.  13.  Did  you 
breakfast  sometimes  at  the  lunch  counter  when  you  were  about  to 
start  on  a  journey?  14.  The  first  time  that  we  were  on  the  edge  of 
the  lake,  we  saw  some  large  birds  on  the  water.  15.  Cities  gener- 
ally have  large  railway  stations.    16.  While  we  were  breakfasting 


THE  CONDITIONAL  129 

at  the  lunch  counter  last  week,  we  heard  the  coachman's  voice. 

17.  The  pupil  was  sitting  before  the  teacher's  desk  to  hear  better. 

18.  Is  she  not  yet  ready?  They  will  soon  be  here.  19.  As  soon 
as  he  is  ready,  we  shall  start.  20.  He  spent  last  week  at  the  lake 
with  his  parents,  who  always  have  company. 


LESSON   NINETEEN 

THE  CONDITIONAL 

138.  Formation  of  the  Conditional.  The  conditional  mood, 
which  has  but  one  simple  tense,  is  formed  by  adding  the 
endings  ais,  ais,  ait,  ions,  iez,  aient  to  the  r  of  the  infinitive, 
a  final  e  being  dropped  as  the  endings  are  added.    Thus : 

First  Conjugation 

je  donnerais,  I  should  give  nous  donnerions,  we  should  give 

tu  donnerais,  thou  wouldst  give       vous  donneriez,  you  would  give 
il  donnerait,  he  would  give  ils  donneraient,  they  would  give 

Second  Conjugation  Third  Conjugation 

je  finirais,  I  should  finish  je  vendrais,  I  should  sell 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

Such  a  man  would  love  the  sea.       Un  tel  homme  aimerait  la  mer. 

Note  i.  Observe  that  the  endings  of  the  conditional  are  the  same 
as  those  of  the  imperfect. 

Note  2.  The  conditional  is  a  sort  of  past  to  the  future,  as,  in  English, 
would  and  should  are  the  past  of  will  and  shall.  The  following  sen- 
tences illustrate  this  relation : 

I   think   that  he   will   give   some  Je  pense  qtSil  donnera  de  I 'argent. 

money. 

I  thought  that  he  would  give  some  Je  pensais  qu'il  donnerait  de  P  argent. 

money. 


130  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

139.  Conditions  in  French.  Neither  the  future  nor  the 
conditional  may  be  used  in  a  clause  introduced  by  si,  if. 
The  verb  in  a  French  conditional  clause  is 

a.  Present,  when  the  English  verb  is  present  or  future. 
If  the  child  falls,  he  weeps.  Si  V enfant  tombe,  il  pleure. 

If  the  child  falls  (shall  fall),  he      Si  /'enfant  tombe,  il  pleurera. 
will  weep. 

b.  Imperfect,  when  the  English  verb  is  past,  or  is  com- 
pounded with  should  or  would. 

If  the  child  fell  (should  fall),  he  Si  Penfant  tombait,  il pleurerait. 

would  weep. 

If   the   child   were   falling,    he  Si  V  enfant  tombait,  il  pleurerait. 

would  weep  (be  weeping). 

Note  i  .  Classical  students  will  observe  that  the  first  of  the  construc- 
tions above  corresponds  to  both  the  simple  present  and  the  more  vivid 
future  conditions;  the  second  to  both  the  less  vivid  future  and  the 
unreal  conditions. 

Note  2.  As  illustrated  above,  the  conclusion  of  a  conditional  sen- 
tence usually  corresponds  in  tense  and  mood  to  the  English  form. 

Note  3.  When  si  has  the  meaning  whether,  the  future  or  condi- 
tional may  follow  it. 

He  is  asking  whether  (if)  you  will       II  demande  si  vous  resterez. 

stay. 
He  was  asking  whether   (if)   you      77  demandail  si  vous  resteriez. 

would  stay. 

VOCABULARY 

acheter,  to  buy  dit  {past part),  said,  told 

admirer,  to  admire  les  Economies/,  savings 

le  bord  de  la  mer,  the  seashore  les  grands-parents,    the    grand- 
la  chance,  the  good  luck  parents 

chasser,  to  hunt,  drive  l'hotel  m.,  the  hotel 

combien  de  temps  ?  how  long  ?  intgressant,  interesting 

demain,  tomorrow  l'itine"raire  m.,  the  itinerary 


THE  CONDITIONAL 


131 


jamais,  ever 

la,  there 

libre,  free 

longtemps,  long  (adv.) 
le  matin,  the  morning 
la  mer,  the  sea 

midi,  noon 
le  mois,  the  month 
la  necessity/.,  the  necessity 
la  peche,  the  fishing 


le  point,  the  point,  place 
quelques,  a  few 
rester,  to  stay,  remain 
les  richesses/.,  the  wealth 

je  sais,  I  know 
vous  savez,  you  know 
surtout,  especially 

le  temps,  the  time 
tracer,  to  trace  out 
voyager,  to  travel 


D  .„  EXERCISE 

i.  Give  the  conditional  of  — 

(a)  chasser,  choisir,  descendre ;   (p)  the  verbs  whose  infinitives 
are  dire,  prendre. 

2.  Give  all  the  forms  thus  far  treated  of  — 

(a)  admirer,  p£trir,  rendre ;  (b)  the  verb  whose  principal  parts 
are  taire,  taisant,  tu,  tais,  tus. 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 
he  will  carry 
he  would  carry 
he  did  carry 
he  does  carry 
if  he  finds,  he  sells 


if  he  finds,  he  will  sell 
if  he  found,  he  would  sell 
when  he  finds  he  sells 
when  he  finds  he  will  sell 
as  soon  as  he  finds  he  sells 


4.  Supply  the  forms  of  the  verbs  in  the  parentheses, 
successively  in  the  present,  future,  conditional,  past  definite, 
and  past  indefinite. 

Je  (passer)  quelques  jours  chez  mon  oncle.  II  (demeurer)  a  la 
campagne.  Je  (admirer)  sa  ferme.  Nous  (chercher)  des  fleurs  et 
(entendre)  les  oiseaux.  Mon  oncle  et  ma  tante  (choisir)  des 
tableaux.  (Aimer)  vous  les  tableaux?  Nous  (descendre)  au  lac 
et  (pecher).    Mes  vacances  (finir)  vite. 


132  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Model 


Le  Voyage  a  la  Campagne 


Demain  matin  nous  partirons  pour  la  campagne.  J'ai  dit  a  mon 
frere  que,  s'il  e'tait  libre,  nous  resterions  a  la  campagne  quelques 
jours.  J'ai  trace'  l'itineraire.  Si  nous  avons  de  la  chance,  nous 
arriverons  a  midi.  Le  lieu  est  si  joli  que  nous  resterions  Ik  un 
mois  si  nous  avions  le  temps.  Je  ne  passe  pas  toujours  mes 
vacances  a  la  campagne.  L'anne'e  derniere  j'etais  au  bord  de  la 
mer.  L'annee  prochaine  je  passerai  un  mois  chez  mes  grands- 
parents.  Si  j'etais  chez  mes  grands-parents  avec  mon  frere,  nous 
monterions  a  cheval,  nous  chasserions  ou  nous  pecherions.  J'aime 
la  peche.  Quelquefois  nous  nagerions  dans  le  lac.  Si  j'etais  riche, 
je  voyagerais  beaucoup.  Je  visiterais  surtout  la  France.  Je 
choisirais  les  meilleurs  hotels.  Je  visiterais  tous  les  points  inte- 
ressants  et  admirerais  les  richesses  du  pays.  Mais  je  ne  suis  pas 
riche.  Si  j'ai  de  l'argent,  je  depense  mes  economies  pour  les 
necessites  de  la  vie.    Je  ne  sais  pas  si  je  serai  jamais  riche. 

Theme 

We  should  pass  good  vacations  if  we  had  much  money.  We 
should  travel  much  and  we  should  admire  the  wealth  of  the  country 
that  we  should  visit.  We  should  remain  especially  in  France,  where 
we  should  choose  the  best  hotels.  We  should  visit  the  big  stores 
and  should  spend  much  money.  Our  vacation  would  end  too 
quickly.  But  we  are  not  rich.  With  my  savings  I  shall  start 
tomorrow  for  the  seashore  if  I  am  free.  My  friend  said  that  if  he 
were  free  he  would  set  out  also.  We  have  traced  out  an  itinerary. 
I  do  not  know  whether  we  shall  remain  a  long  time.  If  we  had 
time,  we  should  pass  a  few  days  at  a  place  where  we  were  last  year. 
I  should  hunt  and,  as  I  like  fishing,1 1  should  fish.  We  should  ride 
horseback  and  should  visit  all  the  interesting  points.  We  should 
find  much  which  we  should  admire. 

1  See  Sec.  1 19. 


FRONT  DE   BATAILLE  DE  L'OUEST 

Les  Americains  qui  voyagent  maintenant  en  France  sont  naturellement 
attires  vers  les  champs  de  bataille  de  la  grande  guerre.  En  jetant  un  coup 
d'ceil  sur  la  carte,  notamment  sur  Paris,  on  se  rend  compte  de  la  proximite 
dangereuse  des  lignes  ennemies  pendant  ces  annees  de  guerre.  La  distance 
entre  le  front  de  bataille  du  15  juillet  1918  et  celui  du  moment  de  l'armistice 
montre  jusqu'a  quel  point  les  Allemands  ont  ete  repousses  pendant  le 
temps  de  la  cooperation  des  troupes  americaines.  Les  noms  de  Cantigny, 
Chateau-Thierry,  foret  de  l'Argonne,  resteront  a  jamais  fameux  dans 
l'histoire  de  la  participation  des  litats-Unis  dans  la  grande  guerre 


134  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Oral 

i.  Quand  partirez-vous  pour  la  campagne  ?  2.  Combien  de  jours 
resterez-vous  a  la  campagne  ?  3.  Avez-vous  souvent  de  la  chance  ? 
4.  Quand  arriverez-vous  a  la  campagne  ?  5.  fitiez-vous  a  la  cam- 
pagne l'annee  derniere  ?  6.  Combien  de  temps  passerez-vous  chez 
vos  grands-parents  l'annee  prochaine  ?  7.  Montez-vous  a  cheval  ? 
8.  Monteriez-vous  a  cheval  si  vous  habitiez  la  campagne  ?  9.  Pour- 
quoi  ne  voyagez-vous  pas  beaucoup  ?  10.  Voyageriez-vous  si  vous 
etiez  riche?  11.  Quel  pays  visiteriez-vous  ?  12.  Quels  hotels 
choisiriez-vous  ?    13.  Depensez-vous  toutes  vos  economies? 

Resume 

1.  My  father  will  pass  his  vacation  in  the  country  if  he  has 
money  enough.  2.  My  father  will  visit  the  seashore  when  he  is 
free.  3.  He  would  stay  longer  at  the  seashore  if  he  had  more 
money.  4.  If  I  finish  my  studies,  I  shall  start  on  a  journey  next 
week.  5.  We  should  visit  Europe  and  especially  France  next  year 
if  we  had  the  time.  6.  When  I  was  living  in  the  country,  I  used  to 
fish  a  great  deal  in  the  lake.  7.  If  I  were  living  in  the  country 
now,  I  should  fish  every  day.  8.  If  the  boy  should  not  work  in  the 
store  tomorrow,  he  would  hunt  with  his  father.  9.  He  said  that 
he  would  give  some  money  to  the  boy  if  he  finished  his  lesson. 
10.  He  said  that  he  would  give  some  money  to  the  boy  if  he  would 
stay  at  home  tomorrow.  1 1 .  Do  you  know  whether  your  brother 
will  ride  horseback  today  ?  12.  Children  like  oranges  for  breakfast 
in  (omit)  the  morning.  13.  Have  you  not  all  your  savings  there  in  the 
desk  ?  14.  How  much  money  would  you  spend  if  you  lived  at  the 
best  hotels?  15.  Would  he  ever  trace  out  an  itinerary  for  his 
friends  ?  1 6.  If  he  finds  a  pleasant  place,  he  will  stay  in  the  moun- 
tains two  months.  17.  How  long  did  you  travel  in  France  with 
your  grandparents  ?   18.  If  I  have  good  luck,  I  shall  start  at  noon. 

19.  If  I  were  staying  at  the  seashore,  I  should  swim  every  morning. 

20.  The  king  did  not  give  Joan  great  wealth. 


THE  IMPERATIVE  1 35 

LESSON   TWENTY 

THE  IMPERATIVE 

140.  Formation  of  the  Imperative.  The  imperative  has  but 
three  forms  :  second  person  singular,  first  and  second  persons 
plural.  These  forms  are  the  same  as  the  first  person  singular 
and  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  present 
indicative,  the  pronoun  being  omitted.   Thus : 

First  Conjugation  Second  Conjugation 

donne,  give  finis,  finish 

donnons,  let  us  give  finissons,  let  us  finish 

donnez,  give  fati&s&z,  finish 

Third  Conjugation 

.  vends,  sell 
vendons,  let  us  sell 
vendez,  sell 

141.  The  Translation  of  the  Imperative,  which  expresses 
a  command  or  exhortation,  is  illustrated  by  the  following : 

Parlez  frangais.  Speak  French. 

Ne  parlons  pas  anglais.  Let  us  not  speak  English. 

Ne  tombe  pas.  Do  not  fall. 

142.  Tu  and  Vous.  The  second  person  plural  subject 
pronoun  vous  is  generally  used  (like  the  English  pronoun 
you)  in  addressing  one  person  as  well  as  more  than  one. 
Tu,  however,  is  used  in  addressing  in  the  singular  near 
relations,  intimate  friends,  small  children,  and  servants ;  in 
general,  those  whom  one  may  address  in  English  usage  by 
the  first  name. 


136 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


John,  you  speak  well. 

Mr.  Leblanc,  you  speak  well. 

My  friends,  you  speak  well. 


Jean,  tu  paries  bien. 

M.  Leblanc,  vous parlez  bien. 

Mes  amis,  vous  parlez  bien. 


Note.  An  adjective  or  a  participle  in  agreement  with  the  subject 
pronoun  vous  is  singular  when  vous  refers  to  one  person,  plural  when 
it  refers  to  more  than  one. 


Mon  ami,  vous  etes  fort. 
Mes  amis,  vous  etes  forts. 


My  friend,  you  are  strong. 
My  friends,  you  are  strong. 


143.  Imperative  Singular  and  Plural.  The  imperative, 
likewise,  uses  the  second  singular  in  situations  where  tu 
would  be  used  in  address,  the  second  plural  where  vous 
would  be  used. 


John,  speak  more  loudly. 
Explain  the  lesson,  sir. 


Jean,  park  plus  haut. 
Expliquez  la  lefon,  monsieur. 


VOCABULARY 


absent,  absent 

ah!  ah! 

apprendre,  to  learn 

bien  I  good ! 

ce,  this 
la  conjugaison,  the  conjugation 

conjuguer,  to  conjugate 

deranger,  to  disturb 

deuxieme,  second 

donne-moi,  give  me 

eaniter,  to  listen  (to) 
*  ensuite,  afterward 

e*tudier,  to  study 

expliquer,  to  explain 

ferme,  hard 
le  futur,  the  future 


haut,  loud,  loudly 

Henri,  Henry 
J  hier,  yesterday 
l'indicatif  m.,  the  indicative 
le  mot,  the  word 
le  nom,  the  noun 

nommer,  to  name 
de  nouveau,  again 

parler,  to  speak 

Pierre,  Peter 
le  pluriel,  the  plural 
le  present,  the  present 

primaire,  elementary 

prononcer,  to  pronounce 
la  prononciation,  the  pronunci- 
ation 


THE  IMPERATIVE  137 

reciter,  to  recite  ton,  ta,  tes,  your,  thy  (Note  2) 

rep£ter,  to  repeat  le  verbe,  the  verb 

le  soir,  the  evening  J  le  voisin,  the  neighbor 

gtudier  le  frangais,  to  study  French 

en  frangais,  in  French 

parler  frangais,  to  speak  French 

s'il  vous  (te)  plait,  if  you  please 

Note  i.  Names  of  languages  are  masculine,  do  not  begin  with  a 
capital,  and  require  the  definite  article,  which  is  omitted,  however,  after 
en,  and  preferably  after  parler. 

Note  2.   Ton  is  used,  not  votre,  when  tu  is  the  form  of  address. 


-.«  •  EXERCISE 

1.  (a)  Give  the   imperative   of  montrer,   entendre,   choisir, 
both  affirmatively  and  negatively. 

(b)  Give  all  forms  thus  far  treated  of  punir ;  of  the  verb 
whose  principal  parts  are  lire,  lisant,  lu,  je  lis,  je  lus. 

(c)  Give  the  conditional  of  rendre,  neg. ;    the  future  of 
tendre,  int. ;  the  past  definite  of  e*couter,  neg.-int. 

2.  Express  the  following  to  a  person  addressed  as  tu  : 

listen  give  back  the  change 

finish  the  lesson  love  your  neighbors 

do  not  fall  name  the  months 

3.  Express  the  foregoing  phrases  to  one  addressed  as  vous. 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

let  us  speak  he  speaks  French 

my  father,  you  are  kind  she  is  studying  English 

my  friend,  you  are  kind  choose  an  orange,  if  you  please 

John,  pronounce  this  word  again  does  she  not  read  French  ? 

Mr.  Ledoux,  speak  more  loudly  love  thy  neighbor 


138  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Model  la  Le^on  a  l'Ecole  prim  aire 

Nous  sommes  de  nouveau  en  classe.  Nous  etudions  nos  legons. 
Travaillons  ferme.  Quel  livre  as-tu  sur  ton  pupitre  ?  J'ai  ma 
grammaire  francaise.  Donne-moi  ton  livre  un  moment,  s'il  te 
plait.  Je  desire  chercher  une  regie.  Si  nous  etudions  bien,  nous 
parlerons  bientot  frangais.  Notre  maitre  parle  frangais  parce  qu'il 
est  frangais.  Ah!  voici  le  maitre.  II  explique  la  lecon.  Jean, 
prononce  les  mots  de  ta  lecon.  Bien,  ta  prononciation  est  bonne. 
Charles,  ecris  l'exercice  au  tableau.  Henri,  reste  a  ta  place  et  lis 
tes  regies  de  grammaire.  — J'etais  absent  hier,  monsieur;  je  ne 
sais  pas  la  page.  Montrez-moi  la  page,  s'il  vous  plait.  — Voici 
la  legon.  Maintenant,  donne  le  pluriel  du  mot  cheval.  Nomme 
deux  verbes  de  la  deuxieme  conjugaison.  Conjugue  le  present  de 
I'indicatif  du  verbe  finir.  Recite  aussi  le  futur  du  verbe  vendre. 
Bon.  Donne  du  papier  a  Henri,  qui  n'a  pas  apporte  son  cahier. 
Passons  a  la  lecture,  et  ecoutez  bien.  Jean,  quand  tu  liras,  parle 
plus  haut.  Tu  lis  mal.  Jean,  ne  parle  pas  si  haut  a.  ton  voisin. 
Tu  deranges  la  classe.  Mes  enfants,  demain  etudiez  mieux  ou 
je  punirai  toute  la  classe.  Quand  vous  serez  chez  vous  ce  soir, 
travaillez  bien. 

Theme 

Henry,  write  the  first  sentence  of  the  lesson  on  the  board,  and 
John  will  write  the  last.  You  have  no  chalk?  John,  give  some 
chalk  to  Henry  and  afterward  read  the  new  rules  of  grammar. 
Do  not  read  the  last  rule.  Good.  Charles  and  Peter,  you  are  not 
listening.  If  all  the  pupils  were  like  you,  they  would  not  learn  their 
lessons.  Peter,  recite  the  first  rule.  Now  finish  the  lesson  in  your 
notebook  and  do  not  disturb  the  class.  Charles,  you  do  not  listen 
and  you  read  very  badly.  Read  aloud  and  Henry  will  repeat  the 
sentences.  Now  conjugate  the  present  indicative  {Model)  of  the 
verbs.    Look  at  the  master  when  you  recite.    If  you  spoke  more 


THE  IMPERATIVE  1 39 

loudly,  the  class  would  listen  better.  For  tomorrow  all  the  pupils 
will  study  the  plural  of  nouns.  Work  hard  when  you  study  your 
lessons  this  evening  at  home.  If  you  are  not  absent  too  often, 
you  will  soon  speak  French.  Always  listen  well  when  the  master 
explains  the  lessons. 

Oral 

1.  Ob  sommes-nous  maintenant?  2.  Les  eleves  travaillent-ils 
ferme  ?  3.  Pourquoi  un  eleve  demande-t-il  le  livre  d'un  autre  eleve  ? 

4.  Le  professeur  trouve-t-il  que  la  prononciation  de  Jean  est  bonne  ? 

5.  Votre  maitre  est-il  francais  ou  ame'ricain  ?  6.  Donnez  le  pluriel 
des  mots  cheval,  general.  7.  Nommez  deux  verbes  de  la  deuxieme 
conjugaison.   8.  ficoutez-vous  toujours  quand  vous  etes  en  classe  ? 

9.  Parlez-vous  a  haute  voix  ou  a  voix  basse  quand  vous  re'citez? 

10.  Le  maitre  parle-t-il  plus  haut  que  vous?  11.  Lisez-vous  bien 
ou  mal  ?  12.  Lisez-vous  plus  vite  que  le  maitre  ?  13.  Ou  preparez- 
vous  vos  lecons  ?  1 4.  Aimeriez-vous  le  maitre  s'il  donnait  de  longues 
lecons?    15.  Le  maitre  punirait-il  les  eleves  s'ils  n'e'tudiaient  pas? 

Resume 

1.  My  brother  is  back  from  his  vacation  and  is  again  at  school. 
2.  He  is  studying  French,  but  he  does  not  pronounce  the  words 
well.  3.  Today  the  teacher  said,  "  Henry,  work  well,  and  you  will 
soon  learn  French."  4.  Repeat  the  last  sentence,  Miss  Riou,  you 
were  not  attentive.  5.  John,  if  you  do  not  recite  all  the  rules 
of  grammar  well,  the  teacher  will  give  a  longer  lesson  for  to- 
morrow. 6.  Let  us  leave  the  classroom  and  play  under  the  trees. 
7..  Peter,  look  at  your  book,  and  do  not  speak  to  your  chum  when 
he  is  writing  his  exercise  on  the  board.  8.  The  teacher  said  to  her 
French  class,  u  Study  better  or  I  shall  punish  every  pupil."  9.  We 
should  not  disturb  the  school  so  much  if  we  were  studying  the 
English  lesson.  10.  Give  the  present  indicative  {Model)  of  this 
verb,  please.    11.  Charles,  you  pronounce  badly;  read  the  French 


140 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


aloud  in  your  room  every  evening.  12.  If  you  would  study  the 
rules  more,  you  would  finish  the  French  lesson  today.  13.  Write 
the  future  of  the  verb  vendre  for  the  next  lesson.  14.  John, 
you  were  absent  yesterday;  study  hard  today.  15.  Do  not 
speak  so  loudly ;  the  class  will  hear  if  you  read  in  a  low  voice. 
16.  Would  Americans  learn  French  verbs  well  if  they  studied 
more?  17.  (My)  children,  always  listen  to  the  gentleman  when 
he  is  reading  French  to  the  class.  18.  Who  will  name  all  the 
verbs  of  the  .second  conjugation  which  are  in  the  lesson  ? 
19.  Peter,  how  many  nouns  did  you  find  in  the  reading  lesson 
this  morning?  20.  There  are  many  French  people  in  the  United 
States  who  speak  English  as  well  as  they  speak  French. 


LESSON   TWENTY-ONE 

SUBJUNCTIVE  -  SIMPLE  VERBS  COMPLETED 

144.  The  Subjunctive  Mood,  a  discussion  of  whose  uses 
is  reserved  for  later  lessons,  is  introduced  here  to  complete 
the  verb.    It  has  two  simple  tenses. 

145.  The  Present  Subjunctive  is  formed  by  dropping  the 
ending  ant  of  the  present  participle  and  adding  e,  es,  e, 
ions,  iez,  ent.    Thus  : 


First  Conjugation    Second  Conjugation    Third  Conjugation 

je  donne  je  finisse  je  vende    ■ 

tu  donnes  tu  finisses  tu  vendes 

il  donne  il  finisse  il  vende 

nous  donnions  nous  finissions  nous  vendions 

vous  donniez  vous  finissiez  vous  vendiez 

ils  donnent  ils  finissent  ils  vendent 


SUBJUNCTIVE  — SIMPLE  VERBS  COMPLETED     141 

146.  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  formed  by  dropping 
the  final  letter  of  the  first  person  singular  of  the  past 
definite  and  adding  sse,  sses,  At,  ssions,  ssiez,  ssent.    Thus  : 

First  Conjugation    Second  Conjugation    Third  Conjugation 


je  donnasse 

tu  donnasses 

il  donnat 
nous  donnassions 
vous  donnassiez 

ils  donnassent 


je  finisse 

tu  finisses 

il  finit 
nous  finissions 
vous  finissiez 

ils  finissent 


je  vendisse 

tu  vendisses 

il  vendit 
nous  vendissions 
vous  vendissiez 

ils  vendissent 


147.  The  Synopsis.  The  formation  of  all  the  simple 
tenses  of  the  active  voice  has  now  been  treated.  A  concise 
outline  of  the  conjugation  of  a  verb  is  furnished  by  the 
so-called  synopsis,  which  consists  of  the  first  three  principal 
parts  and  the  first  form  in  each  tense,  in  order. 


Form 
Pres.  Inf. 
Pres.  Part. 
Past  Part, 
ist  Sing.  Pres.  Ind. 
ist  Sing.  Imp.  Ind. 
ist  Sing.  Past  Def.  Ind. 
ist  Sing.  Future  Ind. 
ist  Sing.  Conditional 
2D  Sing.  Imperative 
ist  Sing.  Pres.  Subj. 
ist  Sing.  Imp.  Subj. 


Synopsis  of  donner 

French  Name 
Infinitif  Present 


Participe  Present 
Participe  Passe 
Indicatif  Present 
Imparfait 
Passe  Defini 
Futur 

Conditionnel 
Imperatif 
Subjonctif  Present 
Imparfait  du  Subj. 


Synopsis 
donner 
donnant 
donne 
je  donne 
je  donnais 
je  donnai 
je  donnerai 
je  donnerais 

donne 
je  donne 
je  donnasse 


Note  i  .   The  synopsis  of  donner  in  the  third  person  singular,  for 
example,  would  be  il  donne,  il  donnait,  etc. 


142 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Note  2.  A  summary  of  the  rules  by  which  the  several  tenses  are 
formed  is  given  on  pages  300  and  301.  For  a  table  of  verb  endings,  see 
page  431 ;  for  a  fully  inflected  model  of  regular  verbs,  see  page  432. 

Note  3.  The  following  table  summarizes  the  derivation  of  the  verb 
from  the  five  principal  parts : 


Inf. 

Pres.  Part. 

Past  Part. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Past  Def. 

Future 
Conditional 

Pres.  Ind.  PI. 
Imperative  PL 
Imperfect 
Pres.  Subj. 

All  com- 
pound 
tenses 

Pres.  Ind.  Sing. 
Imperative  Sing. 

Past  Def. 
Imp.  Subj. 

VOCABULARY 


aimer  a,  like  to 

allemand,  German 

apprecier,  to  value  correctly 
l'artillerie/.,  the  artillery 

Brienne,  the  seat  of  a  French 
military  school 

comment  1  what !  why  1 
l'&olier  m.,  the  student 

eh  bien  !  well ! 
l'empereur,  the  emperor 
l'examen  m.,  the  examination 

facile,  easy 

futur  (adj.),  future 
l'imb&ile  m.,  the  dunce 
l'inaptitude/.,  the  inaptitude 

inspirer,  to  inspire 

ironique,  ironical 
la  langue,  the  language 

lourd,  heavy 

M.,  abb.  for  monsieur 

mais,  why !  but 


le  mathe*maticien,     the     mathe- 
matician 
les  matbimatiques/!,  the  mathe- 
matics 
le  mgpris,  the  scorn 
le  m6"rite,  the  merits 
Fofficier  m.,  the  officer 
peut-6tre,  perhaps 
le  professeur,  the  professor 
profond,  deep 

quelque    chose,     something, 
anything 
la  remarque,  the  remark 
re*pondre,  to  reply 
saisir,  to  grasp,  seize 
il  sait,  he  knows 
je  savais  (imp.),  I  knew 
un  seul,  a  single  one 
subir,  to  undergo 
supposer,  to  suppose 
vaut,  is  worth 


SUBJUNCTIVE— SIMPLE  VERBS  COMPLETED     143 

j)rill  EXERCISE 

1.  (a)  Give  the  present  subjunctive  of  ecouter,  subir,  r£pondre. 
(J?)  Give  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  porter,  choisir,  tendre. 

2.  (a)  Which  forms  of  the  present  subjunctive  of  donner  differ 
from  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  present  indicative  ?  Which  of 
finir  ?  of  vendre  ? 

(&)  Which  forms  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  finir  differ 
from  the  corresponding  forms  of  its  present  subjunctive? 

3.  Locate  in  all  possible  places  — 

parle  vendiez         repondent         montreras         joua 

subissent        rendons        vende  subi  jouera 

subissant        petrit  donniez  finis  rendissent 

4.  Give  all  the  forms  of  the  verb  whose  principal  parts  are 
battre,  battant,  battu,  je  bats,  je  battis. 

5.  Give  the  synopsis  of  subir ;  of  descendre  in  the  second  plural. 

Model  Napoleon  Eleve 

«  Un  homme  qui  sait  deux  langues  vaut  deux  hommes  » ,  dit  un 
jour  Napoleon  quand  il  etait  empereur.  Cependant,  a  l'ecole,  le 
jeune  Napoleon  ne  saisissait  pas  facilement  les  langues  etrangeres. 
Un  seul  des  professeurs  de  Napoleon,  M.  Bauer,  gros  {Sec.  314)  et 
lourd  professeur  d'allemand,  n'apprecia  pas  le  me'rite  de  son  eleve, 
qui  n'aimait  pas  1'allemand.  L'inaptitude  de  l'e'leve  avait  inspire 
le  plus  pro  fond  mepris  k  M.  Bauer,  qui  supposait  que  son  eleve 
n'etait  pas  intelligent.  Un  jour  le  futur  officier  n'etait  pas  a  sa  place. 
M.  Bauer  demanda  011  il  etait.  Un  eleve  repondit  qu'il  subissait  peut- 
etre  son  examen  pour  rartillerie.  «  Mais  sait-il  quelque  chose  ? »  dit 
ironiquement  M.  Bauer.  —  «  Comment,  monsieur,  mais  Bonaparte 
est  le  plus  fort  mathematicien  de  l'e'cole. »  «  Eh  bien,  je  savais  bien 
que  les  mathematiques  etaient  seulement  pour  les  imbeciles ! » 


144  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Theme 

Napoleon  was  (a)  student  at  Brienne  and  later  at  Paris.  He  had 
for  professor  of  German  M.  Bauer,  a  {Model)  man  big  and  heavy. 
M.  Bauer  was  a  German.  The  professors  of  the  school  appreciated 
much  the  merits  of  their  student,  but  as  Napoleon  did  not  grasp 
the  German  grammar  very  well,  M.  Bauer  had  only  scorn  for  the 
future  officer.  Napoleon  did  not  like  to  study  foreign  languages, 
and  showed  naturally  much  inaptitude  in  the  study  of  German. 
He  was,  however,  intelligent,  and  knew  that  a  man  who  knows 
two  languages  is  worth  two  men.  One  day,  as  Napoleon  was  not 
in  (at)  his  place,  M.  Bauer  supposed  that  he  was  perhaps  in  the 
country.  Napoleon  was  undergoing  a  difficult  examination  for  the 
artillery.  M.  Bauer  did  not  know  that  Napoleon  was  the  best 
mathematician  in  the  school,  and  the  thing  inspired  the  professor 
with  {Model)  the  ironical  remark  that  mathematics  was  only 
for  dunces. 

Oral 

i.  Qui  etait  Monsieur  Bauer  ?  2.  Decrivez  le  monsieur.  3.  Mon- 
sieur Bauer  e'tait-il  francais  ?  4.  Napoleon  saisissait-il  facilement 
les  langues  etrangeres  ?  5.  Pour  qui  M.  Bauer  avait-il  du  mepris  ? 
6.  Pourquoi  avait-il  du  mepris  pour  Napole'on  ?    7.  Ou  le  futur 


NAPOLEON  A  BRIENNE.  Bonaparte  fut  etudiant  a  Brienne  depuis  l'age 
de  neuf  ans  et  demi  jusqu'a  quinze  ans.  II  n'etait  pas  populaire  parce 
qu'il  etait  moins  riche  que  ses  camarades,  et  ceux-ci  le  taquinaient  a  cause 
de  son  accent,  qui  etait  celui  de  la  Corse,  son  pays  natal.  Tout  ceci  lui  fit 
hair  la  France,  et  il  en  vint  meme  a  regretter  que  la  Corse  fut  devenue 
francaise.  Son  talent  pour  les  mathematiques  et  les  sciences  militaires 
etait  si  evident  qu'on  vit  bientot  en  lui  un  chef.  En  general,  il  ne  se 
joignait  pas  a  ses  camarades  pour  jouer  et  passait  plutot  ses  heures  de 
loisir  a  lire,  ses  auteurs  favoris  etant  Homere  et  Plutarque.  Chose  inte- 
ressante,  alors  qu'il  etait  etudiant,  il  critiquait  le  mode  d'education,  qui 
developpait,  pensait-il,  l'amour  de  la  gloire.  Cet  amour,  plus  tard  dans 
sa  vie,  semble  avoir  ete  son  motif  principal. 


146  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

officier  n'etait-il  pas  un  jour?  8.  Pourquoi?  9.  Subissez-vous 
souvent  des  examens?  10.  Napoleon  etait-il  bon  mathematicien  ? 
1 1.  M.  Bauer  aimait-il  les  mathe'matiques  ?  12.  Etes-vous  francais  ? 
13.  fitudiez-vous  les  langues  etrangeres  ?  14.  La  langue  francaise 
est-elle  plus  facile  que  la  langue  anglaise  ?  15.  Combien  vaut  un 
homme  qui  sait  deux  langues  ? 

Resume 

1.  We  are  studying  two  languages,  but  we  like  the  French 
language  best.  2.  Do  all  pupils  grasp  foreign  languages  easily? 
3.  M.  Bauer  did  not  like  Napoleon  because  he  did  not  study 
German.  4.  Students  like  professors  who  give  short  examinations. 
'5.  In  school  we  used  to  undergo  examinations  in  (de)  mathematics 
often.  6.  When  the  officer  asked  where  Napoleon  was,  the  other 
student  did  not  reply.  7.  Work  hard  and  you  will  like  all  your 
studies  well.  8.  Good  boys  and  girls  will  be  in  (a)  their  places 
every  day  when  the  bell  rings.  9.  If  I  were  not  a  mathematician, 
my  teacher  would  think  that  I  was  a  dunce.  10.  He  will  perhaps 
write  the  French  exercises  on  the  blackboard  for  the  class  tomorrow. 
11.  Always  speak  French  in  class;  do  not  speak  English.  12.  If 
the  emperor  had  soldiers  enough,  he  would  drive  out  the  English. 
13.  Miss  Leblanc,  you  are  very  bright;  you  are  much  more 
studious  than  the  other  girls.  1 4.  Shall  you  carry  something  to  my 
nephews  when  you  go  down  town  ?  15.  If  my  friend  had  as  much 
money  as  you,  he  would  pass  his  vacation  in  Europe.  16.  He 
intends  to  visit  France  every  year  if  his  savings  are  large  enough. 

17.  How  many  horses  shall  you  sell  to  my  friend  when  he  arrives  ? 

1 8.  John,  listen  to  the  teacher  or  you  will  not  learn  French.  1 9.  When 
we  are  in  school,  let  us  not  carry  our  books  home  evenings. 
20.  (My)  children,  when  the  lesson  is  long,  write  the  exercises  in 
your  notebooks. 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XVIII-XXI  147 

REVIEW 

(Lessons  Eighteen  to  Twenty-One) 
A.  General  Drill 

1 .  Give  the  endings  of  the  future ;  of  the  conditional ; 
of  the  present  subjunctive ;  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 

2.  Give  the  rule  for  forming  the  imperative. 

3.  What  forms  of  the  verb  are  derived  from  the  infinitive  ? 
from  the  present  participle  ?  from  the  first  person  singular  of 
the  present  indicative  ?  from  the  first  person  singular  of  the 
past  definite  ? 

4.  Name  the  tenses  in  order. 

5.  Give  other  names  for  the  imperfect  and  past  definite. 

6.  Give  the  full  conjugation  of  the  verb  whose  principal 
parts  are  suivre,  suivant,  suivi,  je  suis,  je  suivis. 

7.  Name  in  proper  order  the  forms  that  constitute  the 
synopsis  of  a  verb. 

8.  Give  the  synopsis  of  vendre,  choisir,  chasser;  of  the  verb 
whose  principal  parts  are  mettre,  mettant,  mis,  je  mets,  je  mis. 

9.  Give  the  — 

fut.  of  adorer  imp.  of  Studier 

pres.  subj.  of  punir  imp.  subj.  of  tendre 

imv.  of  rester  cond.  of  lire 

1  o.  Locate  (in  all  possible  places)  — 
porte  aimes  tracez  rendit 

punis  punissent  rendit  emportons 

11.  Translate  into  French  — 
let  us  carry  carry  away  the  books,  John 

he  will  not  stay  carry  away  the  chairs,  sir 

I  shall  not  reply  do  not  come  down 


148  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

12.  Translate  into  French  — 

if  he  speaks,  I  shall  reply  he  would  always  reply 

if  he  speaks,  I  reply  he  would  reply  if  he  heard 

if  he  spoke,  I  should  reply  they  are  asking  if  he  will  sell 

if  he  should  speak,  they  would  as  soon  as  she  arrives,  I  shall 

reply  speak 

he  will  reply  when  they  speak  I  was  speaking  when  he  arrived 

13.  Supply  the  proper  forms  of  the  verbs  in  parentheses  : 

Je  compte  (quitter)  la  ville  demain  avec  un  ami.  Nous  (passer) 
nos  vacances  a  la  campagne.  II  (aimer)  a  entendre  les  oiseaux ; 
je  (aimer)  a  nager.  Nous  avons  souvent  (visiter)  la  campagne. 
Si  vous  (visiter)  la  campagne,  (chercher)  nous.  Si  j'avais  un  bon 
cheval,  je  (monter)  a  cheval.  Avez-vous  jamais  (monter)?  Jeanne 
d'Arc  (monter)  toujours  a  cheval  quand  elle  (attaquer)  ses  ennemis. 
Elle  (chasser)  les  Anglais  de  son  pays. 

•  14.  Change  the  verbs  in  turn  to  the  imperfect,  past 
definite,  future,  conditional,  imperative,  and  past  indefinite : 
J'etudie  le  frangais.  Saisissez-vous  facilement  les  langues  ?  Les 
eleves  subissent  un  examen.  lis  passent  beaucoup  de  temps  a 
Tecole.  Nous  entendons  les  eleves.  Une  des  eleves  regarde  son 
cahier.    Elle  rend  le  cahier  a  sa  voisine.    Jean,  finis-tu  ta  lecon  ? 

B.  Translate  into  French 
1.  Tomorrow  I  shall  ask  whether  the  teachers  give  long  lessons. 

2.  I  think  that  I  shall  like  the  school  if  the  boys  are  studious. 

3.  If  we  study  hard,  we  shall  finish  in  four  years.  4.  The  girl  was 
singing  sweetly  when  he  arrived.  5.  You  will  pronounce  French 
well  if  you  read  your  lesson  aloud  every  day.  6.  My  father  used 
to  live  in  a  large  city  when  he  worked  for  my  uncle.  7.  As  soon  as 
he  leaves  the  house,  I  shall  close  the  doors.  8.  The  teacher  always 
gives  the  pupils  longer  lessons  when  they  do  not  study.  9.  As  soon 
as  he  finishes  his  lessons,  he  swims  in  the  lake.     10.  If  I  should 


INFLECTION  AND  USE  OF  AVOIR  149 

pass  my  vacation  in  the  country,  I  would  bring  some  apples  to  the 
children.  1 1 .  Punish  the  lazy  pupils  ;  do  not  punish  the  attentive 
ones.  12.  Let  us  not  always  choose  the  easy  lessons.  13.  When 
the  nuts  fall  from  the  trees,  they  are  usually  ripe.  1 4.  If  my  friend 
spoke,  I  should  hear  his  voice.  15.  You  would  speak  French 
better  if  you  studied  your  grammar  lessons  more.  16.  My  father 
will  sell  his  horses  to  the  Frenchman  if  he  will  give  money  enough. 
17.  Good  pupils  will  pronounce  well  the  new  words  in  every 
lesson.  18.  There  are  many  beautiful  birds  in  the  forest;  they 
sing  sweetly  every  morning.  19.  He  was  asking  if  I  would  not 
give  back  the  money  to  the  poor  man.  20.  John,  write  on  the 
blackboard  the  future  of  the  verb  vendre. 


LESSON  TWENTY-TWO 

INFLECTION  AND  USE  OF  AVOIR 

148.  The  Verb  Avoir,  to  have,  is  inflected  as  follows 

Principal  Parts 
avoir,  to  have  ayant,  having  eu,  had 

j'ai,  I  have  j'eus,  I  had 

Present  Indicative 


j'ai,  I  have 

nous  avons 

tu  as 

vous  avez 

ila 

ils  ont 

Imperfect 

Past  Definite 

j'avais,  I  was  having 

j'eus,  I  had 

etc. 

etc. 

Future 

Conditional 

j'aurai,  I  shall  have 

j'aurais,  I  should  have 

etc.. 

etc. 

150 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Imperative 

aie,  have 

ayons, 

let 

us  have 

Present 

Subjunctive 

I  MI 

•ERFECT 

j'aie 

nous  ayons 

j'eusse 

tu  aies 

vous  ayez 

etc. 

il  ait 

ils  aient 

ayez,  have 


Note.    The  tenses  of  which  the  first  person  singular  alone  is  given 
are  to  be  completed  by  the  addition  of  the  regular  endings. 


149.  Avoir  in  Idioms.  Av6ir  is  used  with  nouns  in  the 
following  idiomatic  expressions,  where  in  English  is  found 
the  verb  to  be  with  adjectives,  the  subject  being  a  person 
or  animal : 


avoir  chaud,  to  be  warm  (hot) 
avoir  froid,  to  be  cold 
avoir  faim,  to  be  hungry 
avoir  soif,  to  be  thirsty 
avoir  sommeil,  to  be  sleepy 

I  am  warm. 

Are  you  hungry  ? 

I  am  not  afraid  of  the  cold. 

I  am  too  warm. 

I  am  in  need  of  (I  need)  some 

money. 
He  is  colder  than  the  others. 


avoir  raison,  to  be  right 
avoir  tort,  to  be  wrong 
avoir  honte,  to  be  ashamed 
avoir  peur,  to  be  afraid 
avoir  besoin,  to  be  in  need,  need 

fai  chaud. 

Avez-vous  faim  ? 

fe  n'ai  pas  peur  du  froid. 

fai  trop  chaud. 

fai  besoin  d'argent. 

II  a  plus  froid  que  les  autres. 


Note.  Observe  the  absence  of  the  partitive  sign  in  the  last  sentence 
but  one.  When  the  word  which  governs  a  noun  used  partitively  itself 
requires  de,  the  whole  partitive  construction  (de  and  the  article)  is 
omitted.  Observe  also  in  j'ai  trop  chaud  that  a  simple  adverb  (without 
de)  is  used.    Similarly,  j'ai  tres  chaud,  j'ai  plus  froid  que  .... 


INFLECTION  AND  USE  OF  AVOIR 


151 


150.  II  y  a.  The  third  person  singular  of  the  various 
tenses  of  the  verb  avoir  in  connection  with  the  pronoun  y, 
there,  has  the  following  special  meanings : 


il  y  a,  there  is  (are) 

il  y  avait,  there  was  (were) 

il  y  eut,  there  was  (were) 

il  y  aura,  there  will  be 

il  y  aurait,  there  would  be 

il  y  ait 

il  y  efit 

II  y  a  un  arbre  dans  le  jardin. 
II  n'y  avait  pas  de  bois. 
Y  aura-t-il  une  lecon  demain  ? 
N'y  a-t-il  pas  de  vin  ? 
II  y  a  eu  un  festin  hier. 


il  n'y  a  pas,  there  is  (are)  not 

etc. 

y  a-t-il  ?  is  (are)  there  ? 

etc. 

n'y  a-t-il  pas  ?  is  (are)  there  not  ? 

etc 

There  is  a  tree  in  the  garden. 

There  was  ?io  wood. 

Will  there  be  a  lesson  tomorrow  f 

Is  there  no  wine  ? 

There  was  a  feast  yesterday. 


Note.  To  express  there  is  with  accented  there,  calling  attention  to 
an  object  or  stating  its  location,  voila  is  used.  II  y  a  merely  affirms  the 
existence  of  the  object. 


There  is  your  horse  (see  your  horse) . 
There  is  a  horse  in  the  street. 
There  *s  a  bad  pen. 
There  is  my  desk ;  here  is  John's 
desk. 


Voila  votre  cheval. 
H  y  a  un  cheval  dans  la  rue. 
Voila  une  mauvaise  plume. 
Voila  mon  pupitre ;  void  le  pupitre 
de  Jean. 


VOCABULARY 


le  bruit,  the  noise 
fermer,  to  close 
l'heure/.,  the  hour 
l'ignorance    /,     the     igno- 
rance 
manger,  to  eat 
ouvert  (past part.),  open 
la  punition,  the  punishment 


rentrer,  to  go  back  in,  enter 
again 

six  (Sec.  216,  a),  six 
la  sortie,  the  leaving,  dismissal 
le  souper,  the  supper 

tout,  all,  everything 
le  travail,  the  work 

voici,  here  is,  now  is 


Note.  Faim  and  other  words  used  after  avoir  are  to  be  found  in  Sec.  1 49. 


152  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

'.„  EXERCISE 

Drill 

i.  Give  the  synopsis  of  avoir;    its  synopsis  in  the  first 
person  plural. 

2.  Give  all  the  forms  of  il  y  a,  (a)  affirmative,  (b)  nega- 
tive, (c)  interrogative,  {d)  negative-interrogative. 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

we  should  not  have  should  we  not  have  ? 

I  had  I  have  had 

he  would  have  thou  wilt  have 

let  us  have  does  he  have  ? 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

there  was  a  king  is  there  a  pen  ? 

there  were  kings  was  she  afraid  ? 

there  were  bad  kings  there  are  the  chairs 

there  was  no  king  there  are  chairs  in  the  room 

there  were  no  kings  I  need  some  bread 

are  you  hungry  ?  had  he  no  money  ? 

is  he  not  right  ?  now  (it)  is  the  hour 

there  's  your  brother  is  there  no  money  ? 

would  there  be  a  school  ?  here  is  the  pen 

we  were  ashamed  he  is  not  thirsty 

5.  Give  the  full  tense  of  — 

je  n'avais  pas  peur 

n'ai-je  pas  besoin  de  plumes  ? 

6.  Give  the  form  in  the  various  tenses  of  — 

il  y  a  des  enfants  ici 
il  n'y  a  pas  de  viande 
n'y  a-t-il  pas  d'eau  la? 
y  a-t-il  beaucoup  de  bruit  ? 


INFLECTION  AND  USE  OF  AVOIR  153 

Model  En  Classe 

Quand  nous  arrivons  en  classe,  nous  trouvons  les  fenetres 
ouvertes,  mais  si  nous  avons  froid,  nous  fermons  les  fenetres 
et  les  portes.  II  y  a  six  fenetres  et  deux  portes  dans  ma  classe. 
Dans  la  salle  de  classe  oil  j'etais  l'annee  derniere  il  y  avait  dix 
fenetres  et  quatre  portes.  Nous  fermons  les  fenetres  si  nous 
avons  froid,  et  si  nous  entendons  trop  le  bruit  des  autres  classes, 
nous  fermons  aussi  les  portes.  II  y  a  un  tres  mauvais  eleve  dans 
ma  classe.  II  n'a  pas  peur  du  maitre.  II  n'etudie  pas  ses  lecons, 
et  a  toujours  besoin  des  exercices  des  autres  quand  il  travaille.  II 
re'cite  tres  mal,  mais  il  n'a  pas  honte  de  son  ignorance.  J'aurais 
honte  si  je  ne  savais  pas  mes  lecons.  J'aurais  peur  des  punitions. 
J'ai  souvent  sommeil  quand  j'etudie  a  la  maison,  mais  je  reste  a 
mon  travail.  Voici  l'heure  de  la  sortie.  Nous  avons  tres  faim  et 
tres  soif,  et  nous  mangerons  bien.  Nous  aurons  besoin  de  beau- 
coup  de  choses,  mais  il  y  aura  assez  de  tout.  Si  nous  n'avons  pas 
trop  sommeil  apres  le  souper,  nous  jouerons  un  peu.  Quand  nous 
aurons  chaud,  nous  rentrerons. 

Theme 

Last  year,  in  my  class,  there  was  a  bad  student  who  was  not 
ashamed  of  his  poor  work.  He  was  always  in  need  of  the  other 
pupils'  exercises.  When  he  did  not  know  his  lessons,  he  was  not 
afraid  of  punishment(s).  Would  you  not  be  ashamed  of  your  igno- 
rance ?  Yes,  you  would  study  hard  and  you  would  be  right.  The 
pupils  who  do  not  study  are  wrong.  When  we  need  the  master, 
he  explains  the  rules  of  the  lesson.  We  play  a  little  after  the 
lesson,  at  the  hour  of  leaving.  I  am  often  very  hungry  after 
school,  but  there  is  always  enough  of  everything  on  the  table 
at  home.  If  I  am  cold,  I  close  the  windows;  but  we  like  the 
windows  open  when  we  are  warm.  When  I  am  warm,  I  am  thirsty 
also.  Is  there  any  water  on  the  table?  Yes,  there  is  enough  water 
for  you.    There  is  a  glass. 


154  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Oral 

i.  Combien  y  a-t-il  de  fenetres  dans  la  classe?  2.  Les  fe- 
netres sont-elles  ouvertes  ou  ferme'es  ?  3.  Quand  fermez-vous  les 
fenetres  ?  4.  N'y  a-t-il  pas  du x  bruit  dans  l'autre  classe  ?  5 .  Entendez- 
vous  du  bruit  ?  6.  Avez-vous  besoin  des  exercices  de  votre  cama- 
rade  quand  vous  travaillez  ?  7.  Votre  camarade  travaille-t-il  ferme  ? 
8.  Entendez-vous  bien  ou  mal  ?  9.  Le  maitre  donne-t-il  des  puni- 
tions  quand  vous  ne  savez  pas  vos  lecons  ?  1  o.  Avez-vous  sommeil 
quand  vous  avez  fini  votre  travail  ?  11.  Restez-vous  en  classe  a. 
l'heure  de  la  sortie?    12.  Avez-vous  besoin  d'encre  pour  e'crire  ? 

Resume 

i.  If  you  are  cold,  close  the  windows.  2.  The  lazy  pupils  said 
that  the  teachers  gave  too  long  lessons.  3.  My  uncle  has  sold  all 
his  black  horses  to  the  French  officer.  4.  Now  is  the  hour  of 
dismissal  from  the  school.  5.  If  we  were  hungry,  we  should  find 
enough  of  everything  in  the  kitchen.  6.  Are  there  not  too  many 
knives  and  forks  on  the  table?  7.  Charles  and  Mary,  when  you 
are  hungry,  do  not  eat  too  fast.  8.  John,  if  you  do  not  pronounce 
French  well,  you  will  be  ashamed  of  your  great  ignorance.  9.  My 
friend  has  already  wealth  enough ;  now  he  needs  a  larger  house. 
1  o.  Were  there  any  lazy  boys  in  your  class  when  you  were  at  school  ? 
1 1 .  After  (the)  supper  I  shall  read  my  French  book  if  I  am  not 
sleepy.  12.  When  Napoleon  was  a  student  at  Brienne,  he  did  not 
like  all  his  studies.  13.  When  you  are  thirsty,  you  will  find  fresh 
water  enough  in  the  dining-room.  14.  You  are  right;  there  are 
many  large  streets  in  the  city  of  Paris.  15.  Peter,  do  not  play  so 
much;  finish  your  work  quickly.  16.  Yesterday  we  were  warm  in 
the  house,  and  we  had  the  doors  open  all  the  morning.  17.  How 
many  American  soldiers  were  there  in  France?  18.  Do  not  be  afraid 
of  the  animals  which  are  in  this  park.  1 9.  There  has  been  much  noise 
in  the  classroom  today.    20.  The  lessons  will  be  longer  tomorrow. 

1  Du,  because  the  thought  is  really  affirmative.    See  Sec.  116,  a. 


AVOIR   IN  PERFECT  TENSES        1 55 

LESSON   TWENTY-THREE 

AVOIR  IN  PERFECT  TENSES 

151.  Perfect  Tenses  are  made,  as  in  English,  by  combin- 
ing the  forms  of  an  auxiliary  verb  (usually  avoir)  with  past 
participles.  The  compound  tense  made  of  the  present  of 
the  auxiliary  has  already  been  treated  in  Sec.  135.  Below  is 
given  the  synopsis  of  the  perfect  active  tenses  of  donner. 

Perfect  Infinitive  (Fr.,  infinity passe) 
avoir  donne  to  have  given 

Perfect  Participle  (Fr.,  participe passe  compose) 
ay  ant  donne  having  given 

Past  Indefinite  (Fr.,  passe  indefini) 
j'ai  donne  I  have  given 

Pluperfect  (Fr.,  plus-que-parfait) 
j'avais  donne  I  had  given 

Past  Anterior  (Ft.,  passe  anterieur) 
j'eus  donne  I  had  given 

Future  Perfect  (Ft.,  futur  anterieur) 
j  'aurai  donne  /  shall  have  given 

Conditional  Perfect  (Fr.,  conditiofinel  passf) 
j  'aurais  donne  /  should  have  given 

Perfect  Subjunctive  (Fr.,  subjonctif  passe) 
j'aie  donne 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive  (Fr.,  plus-que-parfait  du  subjonctif) 
j'eusse  donne 


156  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Note  i  .    The  past  indefinite  is  sometimes  called  the  perfect. 

Note  2.  Observe  that  the  perfect  conjugation  has  nothing  corre- 
sponding to  the  past  participle  or  the  imperative. 

Note  3.  The  past  indefinite,  pluperfect,  past  anterior,  and  future 
perfect  are  tenses  of  the  indicative  mood. 

152.  Pluperfect  and  Past  Anterior.  In  the  synopsis  above 
there  are  two  forms  for  had  given.  The  past  anterior  is 
used  only  in  clauses  introduced  by  quand,  when,  aussitot  que 
or  des  que,  as  soon  as,  and  other  words  or  phrases  indicat- 
ing immediate  priority  of  action.  Elsewhere  the  pluperfect 
is  used. 

Quand  il  eut  parle*,  il  quitta  la  When  he  had  spoken,  he  left  the 

salle.  room. 

II  apporta  son  cahier  aii  maitre  He  brought  his  notebook  to  the 

aussitot    qu'il    eut    fini    son  teacher   as   soon    as   he   had 

exercice.  finished  his  exercise. 

II  avait  travaillS  hier.  He  had  worked  yesterday. 

153.  Word  Order  in  Perfect  Tenses.  The  rules  of  order 
given  for  simple  tenses  apply  also  to  perfect  tenses,  provided 
that  we  consider  the  auxiliary  alone  as  the  verb.  Thus, 
the  negative  forms  are  made  by  placing  ne  before  the 
auxiliary  and  pas  after  (between  the  auxiliary  and  the  past 
participle)  ;  interrogative  forms  by  inverting  a  subject  pro- 
noun and  the  auxiliary.    See  also  Sec.  no,  Note. 

He  had  not  spoken.  77  ri avait  pas  parte. 

Had  he  spoken  ?  Avait-il  parte  f 

Had  he  not  spoken  ?  N' avait-il  pas  parte  ? 

He  would  have  spoken  well.  II  aurait  bien  parte. 

154.  Special  Rules  for  Perfect  Tenses.  The  principles 
already  laid  down  for  governing  the  tense  in  subordinate 
clauses  apply  equally  to  perfect  tenses,  but  concern  here 


AVOIR   IN  PERFECT  TENSES        157 

only  the  auxiliary,  the  participle  being  invariable  from  the 
point  of  view  of  tense.  This  must  be  observed  especially  in  — 

a.  Future  clauses  introduced  by  quand,  etc.  (see  Sec.  137). 

He  will  give  back  the  money      II  rendra  V argent  quand  il  aura 
when    he    has    (shall    have)  vendu  la  maison. 

sold  the  house. 

Note.  Often  in  this  construction  the  English  omits  even  the  have 
and  translates  the  above,  .  .  .  when  he  sells  the  house. 

b.  Conditions  (see  Sec.  139). 

If  they  have  not  eaten,  they  will  S'ils  n'ontpas  mange,  Us  auront 

be  hungry.  faim. 

If  they  had  not  eaten,  they  would  S'ils   n'avaient  pas   mange,  Us 

have  been  hungry.  auraient  eufaim. 

155.  Construction  with  depuis.  The  following  tense  usage, 
at  variance  with  English,  demands  special  mention. 

a.  When  an  action  or  state  has  begun  in  the  past  and 
continues  into  the  present,  the  present  tense  is  used,  followed 
by  depuis,  since,  for. 

I  have  been  speaking  (for)  an  Je  park  depuis  une  heure. 

hour. 

I  have  been  at  home  (for)  two  Je  suis  a  la  maison  depuis  deux 

days.  jours. 

How  long  have  you  been  here  ?  Depuis  quand  etes-vous  id  ? 

Note  i  .  When  the  action  is  completed  in  past  time,  a  past  tense  is 
used,  either  alone  or  with  pendant,  during,  for. 

He  worked   (for)   two   hours  this      //  a  travaille  {pendant)  deux  heures 

morning.  ce  matin. 

How  long  did  you  work  ?  Combien  de  temps  avez-vous  travaitle? 

Note  2.   Alternative  forms : 

I  have  been  speaking  an  hour.  II  y  a  une  heure  que  je  park. 

He  had  been  here  an  hour.  77  y  avait  une  hetire  qu'il  etait  ici. 


158  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

6.  When  an  action  or  state  is  continued  in.  the  past  up 
to  a  definite  past  time  referred  to,  the  imperfect  is  used  for 
the  English  pluperfect,  similarly  with  depuis. 

I  had  been  speaking  (for)  three  Je  parlais  depuis  trois  heures. 

hours. 

How  long  had  you  played  (been  Depuis  quand  jouiez-vous  quand 

playing)  when  he  spoke  ?  il  a  parte  ? 

Note  i.  How  long  is  expressed  by  combien  de  temps  except  in 
cases  where  the  corresponding  answer  demands  depuis.  It  is  then 
expressed  by  depuis  quand. 

Twill  you  speak  ?  f parlerez-vous ? 

How  long  \  do  you  speak  ?  Combien  de  temps  •{  parlez-vous  ? 

[_  did  you  speak  ?  ^  avez-vous  parle  ? 

f  have  you  been  speaking  ?        _        .  ,        (parlez-vous? 

How  long  <  .     ,         ,  i  .      -,       Depuis  quand       <\     ...  „ 

°  (^ had  you  been  speaking?  *        1  yparhez-vous  ? 

Note  2.  Observe  that  when  depuis  is  required  the  English  usually 
has  the  word  been. 

VOCABULARY 

Pamusement  m.,   the  amuse-      un  jour,  one  day,  some  day 

ment  puis,  then 

l'an  m.,  the  year  le  repos,  the  rest 

&onomiser,  to  save  retourner,  to  return,  go  back 

§tre  en  vacances,  to  have  a           tot,  soon 

vacation  en  ville,  in  town 
il  y  a  un  mois,  a  month  ago 


Drin  EXERCISE 

i.  Give  the  synopsis  of  the  perfect  tenses  of  saisir  and  vendre. 

2.  Inflect  the  perfect  tenses  of  regarder  throughout. 

3.  Give  the  pluperfect  of  tendre,  neg. ;  future  perfect  of  subir; 
past  definite  of  trouver,  neg. -int. ;  past  anterior  of  rendre;  plu- 
perfect subjunctive  of  Studier;  conditional  perfect  of  entendre,  neg. 


AVOIR   IN  PERFECT  TENSES        159 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

he  would  have  finished  I  shall  not  have  chosen 

they  had  not  said  as  soon  as  he  listens 

will  you  not  have  visited  ?  as  soon  as  he  had  heard 

had  she  shown  ?  we  have  worked 

when  you  had  sold  we  worked 

let  us  not  speak  we  were  working 

she  had  not  had  working 

5 .  Translate  into  French  — 

how  long  did  he  work  ?  how  long  do   you   sing   every 

he  worked  for  an  hour  morning  ? 

how  long  have  they  been  work-  I  sing  an  hour  every  morning 

ing  ?  how  long  will  they  stay  ? 

they  have  been  working  two  hours  they  will  stay  a  long  time 

how  long  has  he  been  working  ?  he  has  been  studying  a  month 
he  had  been  working  many  days  (two  ways) 

6.  Locate  the  verbs  in  the  Model  below. 

Model  LES  Vacances 

Mon  oncle  demeure  a  la  campagne.  II  est  Ik  depuis  dix  ans.  II 
y  avait  six  ans  qu'il  etait  en  ville  quand  il  a  achete  sa  ferme. 
II  n'aime  pas  la  ville  autant  que  la  campagne.  II  dit  qu'il  aurait 
achete  sa  ferme  plus  tot  s'il  avait  e'te  plus  riche.  Aussitot  qu'il  eut 
economise  assez  d 'argent,  il  quitta  la  ville.  Je  suis  chez  mon  oncle 
depuis  deux  semaines.  Je  ne  sais  pas  si  je  resterai  encore  long- 
temps.  J'e'tais  en  vacances  depuis  une  semaine  quand  j'ai  quitte 
la  ville.  Ma  sceur  n'est  pas  ici.  Quand  elle  aura  passe  la  semaine 
au  bord  de  la  mer,  elle  voyagera  un  peu,  puis  passera  quelques 
jours  ici.  Nous  retournerons  ensemble  a  la  maison.  Quand  ma 
sceur  arrivera  ici,  elle  aura  voyage  beaucoup  et  aura  besoin  de 
repos.    Ma  tante  a  prepare  la  plus  belle  chambre  de  la  maison. 


160  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Quand  ma  sceur  aura  eu  assez  de  repos,  nous  comptons  passer  le 
temps  agreablement.  Depuis  deux  jours  nous  preparons  toutes 
sortes  d'amusements.    Notre  sejour  aura  e'te  trop  court. 

Theme 

Last  year,  as  soon  as  I  had  finished  my  studies,  I  visited  the 
country,  where  my  uncle  has  a  beautiful  farm.  Formerly  he  lived 
in  town,  but,  as  he  needed  the  air  of  the  country,  he  left  the  city 
as  soon  as  he  had  saved  enough  money  (in  order)  to  buy  his  new 
house.  He  did  not  like  the  city  much,  and  would  have  left  Paris 
sooner  if  he  had  been  rich  enough.  He  had  been  in  the  city  for 
six  years.  My  father  intends  to  live  some  day  in  the  country  when 
he  has  worked  enough.  I  do  not  know  whether  my  mother  would 
prefer  to  remain  in  town ;  she  has  been  there  so  long.  When  I 
have  finished  my  studies,  I  shall  pass  a  few  weeks  at  my  uncle's. 
I  shall  have  much  rest.  My  sister,  who  is  now  at  the  seashore, 
where  she  has  all  kinds  of  amusements,  will  also  have  spent 
happy  days. 

Oral 

i .  Ou  demeure  votre  oncle  ?    2 .  Y  a-t-il  longtemps  qu'il  est  Ik  ? 

3.  Depuis  quand  etait-il  en  ville  quand  il   a  achete   sa  ferme? 

4.  Aimeriez-vous   mieux   la  ville   ou   la   campagne?     5.  Pourquoi 

FERME  DE  NORMANDIE.  Les  paysans  represented  plus  de  la  moitie 
de  la  population  de  la  France.  Le  paysan  francais  est  simple  dans  sa 
maniere  de  vivre  et  est  satisfait  de  son  sort  tres  humble,  lequel  a  ete  celui 
de  ses  ancetres  et  sera  vraisemblablement  celui  de  ses  enfants.  II  est 
econome.  Cette  qualite  en  fait  le  sauveur  de  son  pays  dans  les  crises 
economiques ;  il  l'est  aussi  par  sa  bravoure  et  son  patriotisme  quand  le 
pays  est  en  danger.  La  gravure  montre  certaines  caracteristiques  par- 
ticulieres  au  paysan :  la  nature  substantielle  de  sa  demeure  construite 
de  pierres  rugueuses;  le  bonheur  apparent  des  membres  de  la  famille, 
tous,  hommes,  f emmes  et  enfants  ayant  leur  part  des  travaux  de  la  ferme ; 
la  carrure  de  tous  et  leurs  vetements  simples  mais  durables. 


ivood  &  Underwood 


FERME  DE  NORMANDIE 


1 62  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

votre  oncle  n'a-t-il  pas  achete  sa  ferme  plus  tot  ?  6.  Quand  quitta- 
t-il  la  ville  ?  7.  Depuis  quand  etes-vous  chez  votre  oncle  ? 
8.  Resterez-vous  la  longtemps  ?  9.  Votre  sceur  est-elle  avec  vous  ? 
1  o.  Ne  passera-t-elle  pas  quelques  jours  avec  vous  ?  11.  Restera- 
t-elle  chez  votre  oncle  quand  vous  partirez  ?  12.  Quelle  chambre 
votre  sceur  aura-t-elle  chez  votre  oncle?  13.  Qui  aura  prepare  la 
chambre  ?  14.  N'aurez-vous  pas  besoin  de  repos  quand  vous  aurez 
fini  la  lecon?  15.  Combien  de  temps  etudierez-vous  votre  lecon 
pour  demain  ? 

Resume 

1.  Have  your  parents  been  living  in  the  United  States  long? 
2.  My  uncle  used  to  pass  his  vacations  at  the  seashore.  3.  As 
soon  as  he  has  saved  enough,  he  will  have  a  vacation.  4.  As 
soon  as  he  had  selected  a  house  in  the  country,  he  sold  his  store. 
5.  How  long  did  you  travel  in  Europe  last  year?  6.  How  long 
had  you  been  studying  French  when  you  left  the  United  States  ? 
7.  If  you  work  too  long,  you  will  need  rest.  8.  My  friends  were  in 
Paris  a  week  several  years  ago.  9.  The  American  officer  will  be 
in  England  for  two  months.  10.  The  pupils  were  singing  loudly 
when  the  teacher  returned.  11.  How  long  is  he  intending  to  stay 
at  his  cousin's  today?  12.  My  uncle  and  aunt  have  been  traveling 
in  Canada  for  several  weeks.  13.  If  you  are  too  cold,  I  will  close 
the  window.    1 4.  How  long  shall  you  remain  in  Paris  next  year  ? 

1 5 .  My  friends  have  been  desiring  to  go  to  France  for  many  years. 

16.  My  brother  and  sister  will  return  together  when  they  finish 
their  work.  17.  John,  how  long  have  you  been  writing  on  the 
board?  18.  Peter,  you  have  been  speaking  to  your  chum  too 
long ;  study  your  lesson.  19.  Do  you  know  whether  there  will  be 
any  students  at  school  tomorrow?  20.  The  poor  man  would  have 
bought  more  clothes  if  he  had  had  the  money. 


ETRE  IN  PERFECT  TENSES  163 

LESSON  TWENTY-FOUR 

ETRE  IN  PERFECT  TENSES 
156.  The  Inflection  of  the  Verb  etre,  to  be,  is  as  follows : 

Principal  Parts 

etre,  to  be  etant,  being  ete,  been 

je  suis,  I  am  je  fus,  I  was 

Present  Indicative 


je  suis,  I  am 

nous  sommes 

tu  es 

vous  etes 

il  est 

ils  sont 

Imperfect 

Past  Definite 

j'etais,  I  was 

je  fus,  I  was 

etc. 

etc.   (Sec.  131,  Note) 

Future 

Conditional 

je  serai,  I  shall  be 

je  serais,  I  should  be 

etc. 

etc. 

Imperative 

sois,  be 

soyons, 

let  us  be                              soyez 

Present  Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive 

je  sois           nous  soyons 

je  fusse 

tu  sois          vous  soyez 

etc. 

il  soit            ils  soient 

Note.    The  forms  not  given  are  made  regularly. 

157.  Etre  in  Perfect  Tenses.  £tre,  as  well  as  avoir,  is  used 
as  an  auxiliary  in  the  formation  of  perfect  tenses.  Avoir  is 
used  with  the  great  majority  of  verbs  ;    etre  with  certain 


1 64  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

intransitive  verbs  of  motion  and  transition.    The.  following 
are  the  past  participles  of  the  most  important  of  these  verbs  : 

alle',  gone  arrive,  arrived 

venu,  come  entre,  entered 

devenu,  become  reste,  remained 

revenu,  come  back  tombe,  fallen 

parti,  started  ne,  born 

sorti,  gone  out  mort,  died 

I  have  come.  Je  suis  venu. 

He  had  started.  H  etait parti. 

158.  Below  is  given  the  synopsis  of  the  perfect  active  of  alter : 

Perf.  Inf.  etre  alle,  to  have  gone 

Perf.  Part.  etant  alle,  having  gone 

Past  Indef.  je  suis  alle,  I  have  gone 

Pluperf.  Ind.  j'etais  alle,  I  had  gone 

Past  Ant.  je  fus  alle,  I  had  gone 

Fut.  Perf.  je  serai  alle,  I  shall  have  gone 

Cond.  Perf.  je  serais  alle,  I  should  have  gone 

Perf.  Subj.  je  sois  alle 

Pluperf.  Subj.  je  fusse  alle 

VOCABULARY 

d'abord,  (at)  first  le  client,  the  customer,  client 

l'accident  m.,  the  accident  le  commercant,     the     business 

les  affaires/,  business  man,  merchant 

arriver,  to  arrive,  happen  diner,  to  dine 

l'avocat,  m.,  the  lawyer  entrer  (dans),  to  enter  (tr.) 

de  bonne  heure,  early  gros  (/.  grosse),  great,  big 

le  bureau,  the  office  lu,  read  (past part.) 

la  chute,  the  fall  la  suite,  effect,  continuation 

parler  d'affaires,  to  talk  business 
des  suites  de,  because  of,  from 
aller  en  ville,  to  go  to  town 


ETRE  IN  PERFECT  TENSES  165 

~  .,/  EXERCISE 

1 .  Give  the  synopsis  of  Stre ;  its  synopsis  in  the  third  plural. 

2.  Give  the  synopsis  of  the  perfect  tenses  of  rester;  of 
partir ;  of  alter  in  the  third  singular. 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

he  has  gone  out  had  she  had 

they  have  seen  had  I  not  come  ? 

I  had  remained  as  soon  as  I  had  arrived 

has  he  not  become  ?  let  us  be  useful 

we  should  have  been  be  not  lazy 

will  he  be  ?  there  will  be 

had  he  not  started  ?  they  will  be 

they  were  not  did  we  not  read  ? 

4.  Supply  the  French  for  the  words  in  parentheses. 

Je  (have)  un  client.  II  (has)  alle  en  ville.  II  (had)  lu  que  les 
commercants  (have)  de  nouvelles  e'toffes.  II  (had)  parti  quand 
son  ami  (arrived).  II  ne  (had)  pas  assez  d'argent.  Je  (had)  tou- 
jours  de  l'argent.  Quand  je  (have)  de  l'argent,  je  (shall  be)  con- 
tent^). Quand  je  (have)  de  l'argent,  je  ne  (am)  jamais  honte. 
Mon  ami  (has  had)  beaucoup  d'argent.  II  (has)  devenu  riche.  II 
(would  have)  parle  aussitot  qu'il  (had)  entre',  s'il  (had  had)  l'argent. 

Model  MON  PeRE  au  Bureau 

Mon  pere,  qui  est  revenu  hier  d'un  long  voyage,  est  alle  en 
ville  ce  matin.  II  est  sorti  pour  aller  a  ses  affaires.  Je  suis  sorti 
aussi  pour  aller  a  l'ecole,  mais  mon  pere  est  parti  plus  tot.  II  aime  a 
arriver  a  son  bureau  de  bonne  heure.  Mon  pere  est  avocat  II  est 
alle,  d'abord,  acheter  un  journal.  II  a  lu  que  son  ami  qui  etait 
venu  ici  l'anne'e  derniere  etait  mort  des  suites  d'une  chute.  II  est 
tombe  de  son  cheval.    II  etait  devenu  un  gros  commercant  et  serait 


1 66  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

reste  encore  longtemps  dans  les  affaires  si  l'accident  n'etait  pas 
arrive.  Quand  mon  pere  est  arrive  a  son  bureau,  il  a  trouve  un 
de  ses  clients,  Monsieur  Leblanc,  qu'il  n'avait  pas  vu  depuis  long- 
temps.  Comme  Monsieur  Leblanc  est  en  ville  pour  quelques  heures 
seulement,  mon  pere  est  revenu  diner  a  la  maison  avec  son  client. 
Quand  je  suis  rentre  de  l'ecole,  j'ai  trouve  mon  pere  dans  le  salon. 
II  parlait  d'affaires  avec  Monsieur  Leblanc.  lis  parleraient  encore 
si  ma  mere  n'avait  pas  dit  que  le  diner  etait  pret. 

Theme 

My  father,  who  is  a  lawyer,  came  back  early  from  his  office.' 
He  was  back  when  my  brother  arrived  from  school.  He  did  not 
remain  long  in  town.  He  had  been  in  his  office  an  hour  when  one 
of  his  clients,  whom  he  had  not  seen  for  a  long  time,  came  in. 
They  talked  business,  and,  as  Mr.  Leblanc  was  in  town  for  a  few 
hours  only,  he  left  soon  after.  My  father  went  out  to  buy  a  news- 
paper. He  read  that  an  accident  had  happened  to  one  of  his  friends, 
Mr.  Leroux.  This  gentleman,  who  had  become  a  great  merchant, 
fell  from  his  horse  and  died  an  hour  after  from  the  effects  of  the 
fall.  He  had  been  in  business  a  long  time.  Last  year  he  came  to 
spend  a  week  here.  My  father  would  have  gone  to  his  friend's 
during  his  vacation  if  the  accident  had  not  happened. 

Oral 

i.  D'ou  votre  pere  est-il  revenu  hier  ?  2.  Est-il  reste  a  la  maison 
ce  matin?  3.  Pourquoi  est-il  sorti  ?  4.  Est-il  sorti  le  premier? 
5.  Etes-vous  arrive  a  l'ecole  de  bonne  heure  ?  6.  Qui  est  mort 
des  suites  d'un  accident?  7.  L'ami  de  votre  pere  etait-il  avocat? 
8.  Qui  votre  pere  a-t-il  trouve  h  son  bureau  ?  9.  Depuis  quand 
n'avait-il  pas  vu  son  client?    10.  Monsieur  Leblanc  est-il  en  ville 

A. 

pour  longtemps  ?  11.  Votre  pere  est-il  revenu  seul  ?  12.  Etes-vous 
jamais  tombe  de  votre  cheval  ?  13.  Etes-vous  alM  a  l'ecole  hier? 
14.  Votre  diner  sera-t-il  pret  quand  vous  rentrerez?  15.  Etes-vous 
alld  a  la  campagne  l'annee  derniere  ? 


AGREEMENT  OF  PARTICIPLES  167 

Resume 

1.  My  brother  started  for  his  office  early  this  morning.  2.  My 
uncle  entered  the  house  an  hour  ago.  3.  He  would  have  come 
home  sooner  if  he  had  finished  his  business.  4.  When  John  arrived 
home,  his  brother  had  gone  to  school.  5.  An  accident  happened 
to  my  friend  when  he  was  in  Paris.  6.  One  of  his  sons  died  from 
a  fall  from  a  horse.  7.  He  would  be  speaking  yet  if  a  customer 
had  not  entered  the  store.  8.  The  merchant  was  talking  business 
with  the  clerk.  9.  Peter,  you  are  lazy,  you  did  not  go  to  school 
today.  10.  He  would  have  stayed  longer  if  he  had  had  more 
money.  11.  Your  grandfather  was  born  more  than  a  century 
ago.  12.  Mr.  Leblanc,  do  you  know  that  (the)  dinner  is  ready? 
13.  He  read  in  the  newspaper  that  the  American  general  had 
returned  from  France.  14.  My  father  arrived  this  morning  after  a 
short  stay  in  London.  15.  How  long  did  you  stay  in  England  last 
year?  16.  There  used  to  be  many  castles  in  this  country.  17.  The 
officer  became  ill  when  he  was  in  England.  18.  He  bought  play- 
things for  the  children  when  he  went  to  town.  19.  The  child  had 
not  seen  his  father  for  a  long  time.  20.  As  soon  as  the  emperor 
had  gone  out,  the  soldier  entered  the  room. 


LESSON   TWENTY-FIVE 

AGREEMENT  OF  PARTICIPLES 

159.  Variable  Form  of  Participles.  The  participles,  pres- 
ent as  well  as  past,  are  often  used  as  adjectives,  and  in  cer- 
tain cases,  as  explained  below,  they  take  a  feminine  ending 
in  e  and  a  plural  in  s,  in  accordance  with  the  regular  rules 
for  adjectives.    Thus : 

charmant,  charmante  ;  charmants,  charmantes 
blesse,  blesse'e  ;  blesses,  blessees 


168  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

160.  Agreement  after  Auxiliary  etre.  When  etre  is  the 
auxiliary,  the  past  participle  agrees  in  number  and  gender 
with  the  subject. 

Elle  est  arrived.  She  has  arrived. 

lis  sont  venus.  They  (m.)  have  come. 

Elles  sont  entries.  They  (f .)  have  entered. 

161.  Agreement  after  Auxiliary  avoir.  When  avoir  is  the 
auxiliary,  the  past  participle  does  not  vary  unless  a  direct 
object  precedes  the  verb,  in  which  case  the  participle  agrees 
with  this  object. 

J'ai  trouve*  la  plume.  /  have  found  the  pen. 

La  plume  que  j'ai  trouvee.  The  pen  which  I  have  found. 

Les  livres  qu'il  a  ported.  The  books  which  he  carried. 

Note.  The  past  participle,  when  used  as  an  adjective,  agrees  with 
the  noun  it  modifies. 

une  salle  6clair6e,  a  lighted  room 

162.  The  Present  Participle  is  used 

a.  As  in  English,  to  denote  an  attendant  circumstance. 
It  is  then  generally  introduced  by  the  preposition  en,  which 
in  this  use  may  be  translated  while,  in,  by.  Sometimes 
the  en  is  emphasized  by  prefixing  tout.  In  this  use  the 
participle  is  invariable. 

Elle  est  entree  en  parlant.  She  entered  (while)  speaking. 

En  Sconomisant  il  est  devenu  By  saving  he  has  become  rich. 

riche. 

Elle  a  repondu,  tout  en  pleurant.  She  replied  (even)  while  weeping. 

b.  As  a  simple  adjective.  It  then  agrees  with  the  noun 
it  modifies,  and  usually  follows  it. 

II  a  deux  enfants  charmants.  He  has  two  attractive  children. 

De  l'eau  courante.  Running  water. 


AGREEMENT  OF  PARTICIPLES 


169 


VOCABULARY 


"    alors,  then 

attendre,  to  await,  wait  for 
l'automobile  m.,the  automobile 
boncte  (de),  crowded  (with) 
border  (de),  to  border  (with) 
le  bureau  de  poste,  the  post  office 
la  chaussee,  the  roadway 
les  chaussures/,  the  shoes,  foot- 
wear 
le  commerce,  the  business 
continuel  (/.  -elle),  continual 
crier,  to  shout,  cry 
la  devanture,  the  show  window 
a  droite,  to  (at)  the  right 
Sclairer  (a),  to  light  (by) 
l'Slectricite*  /,  the  electricity 
e*lectrique,  electric 
entre,  between 

1 'Stage  m.,  the  story  (of  a  house) 
Staler,  to  display 


a  gauche,  to  (at)  the  left 
le  gaz  [gaz],  the  gas 
le  long  de,  along 
le  marchand,  the  merchant 
le  marchand  ambulant,  the  push- 
cart peddler 
la  marchandise,  the  merchandise 

marcher,  to  walk 
le  mouvement,  the  moving  about 
la  paire,  the  pair 

particulier  (/  -ifcre),  private 
la  personne,  the  person,  people 
le  piSton,  the  pedestrian 

rencontrer,  to  meet 
le  restaurant,  the  restaurant 
le  Soulier,  the  low  shoe 
le  tramway,  the  (street)  car 

traverser,  to  cross 
le  trottoir,  the  sidewalk 
la  voiture,  the  carriage 


Note.  In  is  often  to  be  rendered  in  French  by  a  rather  than  dans, 
as  has  already  been  seen  in  special  expressions.  Dans  denotes  position 
inside  of,  as  dans  la  maison,  in  the  house ;  a  denotes  position  at  or 
near,  as  a  la  devanture,  in  the  show  window. 


Drill  EXERCISE 

1 .  Give  all  the  forms  (both  genders  and  both  numbers)  of 
the  participles  trouvS,  vendu,  subi,  eu,  criant,  mort. 

2.  Give  the  synopsis  of  the  perfect  tenses  of  entrer  in  the 
third  plural. 

3.  Give  the  past  indefinite  of  sorti ;  perfect  subjunctive  of 
aller  ;  pluperfect  indicative  of  venu,  neg. ;  conditional  perfect 


170  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

of  parti,  int. ;  past  anterior  of  passer,  neg.-int. ;  future  perfect 
of  6tre  ;  future  perfect  of  mort,  neg. 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

a.  she  has  remained  we  shall  have  examined 
we  fell  they  {/.)  had  come 

they  had  not  started  as  soon  as  they  had  come  back 

we  shall  have  arrived  had  you  not  become  ? 

b.  the  pen  which  I  have  bought      she  has  entered 

the  books  which  I  had  sold        she  has  entered  the  room 
I  had  sold  the  books  the  lesson  which  she  will  give 

5.  Give  the  full  tense  of  — 

je  suis  reste  depuis  longtemps 
j'ai  ecoute  longtemps 
je  suis  alle  a.  la  maison 
la  plume  que  j'ai  trouvee 

Model     .  La  Rue 

La  rue  011  je  demeure  a  de  larges  trottoirs.  Les  pietons  marchent 
sur  les  trottoirs.  Entre  les  trottoirs  il  y  a  la  chausse'e.  La  rue  est 
eclaire'e  au  gaz  et  a  l'electricite.  Les  trottoirs  sont  borde's  de  hautes 
maisons.    Ma  maison  a  seulement  deux  etages.    II  y  a  beaucoup 


LE  BOULEVARD  DE  LA  MADELEINE.  Le  boulevard  de  la  Madeleine 
forme  une  partie  de  la  grande  artere  de  Paris  appelee  « les  grands  boule- 
vards)), qui  vade  la  place  de  la  Concorde  a  la  Bastille.  Cette  artere  est  sur 
l'emplacement  des  anciens  boulevards  de  l'enceinte  fortifiee  demolie  sous 
Louis  XIV.  Le  boulevard  dont  il  est  question  ici  commence  la  serie.  Sur 
les  trottoirs  d'une  ample  largeur  s'y  promenent  une  foule  de  gens  affaires 
ou  de  promeneurs  attires  la  par  les  magasins,  les  cafes  et  restaurants  qui 
bordent  cette  avenue  spacieuse,  theatre  fidele  de  la  vie  parisienne.  A 
Tangle  gauche  de  la  photographie  nous  voyons  un  coin  de  la  Madeleine, 
une  des  eglises  principales  et  des  plus  belles  de  Paris.  Entouree  qu'elle 
est  d'une  majestueuse  colonnade,  elle  affecte  la  forme  d'un  temple  grec. 


172  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

de  maisons  particulieres  dans  la  rue  oil  je  demeure.  Ce  matin  il  y 
avait  un  mouvement  continuel  de  voitures  et  d'automobiles.  Les 
marchands  ambulants  criaient  leur  marchandise.  Beaucoup  de 
personnes  attendaient  les  tramways  electriques,  qui  etaient  toujours 
bonde's.  Ma  mere  est  allee  faire  ses  emplettes.  Les  fruits  qu'elle 
a  vus  etales  a  la  devanture  du  fruitier  etaient  tres  beaux,  et  elle  a 
achete  des  poires  et  des  bananes  qu'elle  a  emportees  dans  son  filet. 
Ma  mere  et  ma  sceur  sont  alors  sorties.  Elles  ont  traverse  la  rue 
en  regardant  a  droite  et  a  gauche.  Tout  en  passant  le  long  des 
magasins  elles  ont  rencontre  deux  de  leurs  amies,  et  elles  sont 
entrees  dans  un  restaurant,  ou  elles  ont  dine.  Chez  le  marchand  de 
chaussures  ma  sceur  a  demande  plusieurs  paires  de  souliers,  qu'elle 
a  examinees.  La  paire  qu'elle  a  choisie  est  chere.  Ma  mere  et  ma 
sceur  sont  revenues  en  passant  par  (by)  le  bureau  de  poste. 

Theme 

Do  not  cross  the  street.  Look  to  the  right  and  to  the  left 
because  there  is  a  continual  moving  about  of  carriages.  There 
is  an  automobile  that  is  passing  by.  This  push-cart  peddler  cries 
his  merchandise  while  walking  on  the  roadway  along  the  sidewalk. 
The  sidewalks  are  crowded  with  pedestrians,  who  look  at  the  show 
windows  of  the  stores  while  speaking.  There  are  many  pretty 
things  displayed  in  the  show  windows.  There  's  a  restaurant.  A 
lady  has  gone  in  with  her  daughter.  The  lady  has  a  net  bag  in 
which  (ou)  are  the  things  that  she  bought.  She  went  to  the  shoe 
dealer's  (Model)  and  bought  low  shoes.  The  pair  that  I  bought  last 
month  was  better  than  the  pair  in  the  show  window  of  this  store. 
The  whole  street  is  bordered  with  stores  better  lighted  than  the 
rooms  of  the  house  where  I  live.    They  are  lighted  with  gas. 

Oral 

i.  Les  pietons  marchent-ils  generalement  sur  la  chaussee? 
2.  Les  trottoirs  sont-ils  aussi  larges  que  la  chausse'e  ?  3.  Decrivez 
une  rue.    4.  Ou  votre  mere  a-t-elle  vu  des  fruits  ?   5.  D'oii  votre 


AGREEMENT  OF  PARTICIPLES  173 

mere  et  votre  soeur  sont-elles  sorties  ?  6.  Qui  ont-elles  rencontre  ? 
7.  Ou  ont-elles  rencontre'  ces  personnes  ?  8.  Les  chaussures  sont- 
elles  cheres  maintenant  ?  9.  Comment  votre  mere  est-elle  revenue  ? 
10.  Ou  achetez-vous  vos  chaussures?  11.  Y  a-t-il  des  marchands 
ambulants  dans  votre  rue?  12.  Ne  demeurez-vous  pas  dans  une 
maison  particuliere  ?  13.  Y  a-t-il  seulement  des  maisons  particu- 
lieres  dans  votre  rue?  14.  Avez-vous  dine  au  restaurant  hier? 
15.  Comment  la  classe  est-elle  eclairee  ? 

Resume 

1.  I  did  not  see  the  horses  which  my  friend  sold.  2.  Shall  you 
not  need  a  new  pair  of  shoes  next  week  ?  3.  The  hats  which  we 
saw  at  the  store  were  very  expensive.  4.  My  aunt  would  always 
look  to  the  right  and  left  when  she  went  out.  5.  My  sister  had 
been  visiting  for  two  weeks  when  she  became  ill.  6.  As  soon  as 
my  mother  had  died,  we  sold  all  the  jewels  that  she  had  bought. 
7.  Merchants  always  like  to  display  their  merchandise  in  show 
windows.  8.  How  long  have  you  been  waiting  for  the  street  car  ? 
9.  In  our  city  the  streets  are  always  crowded  with  people.  1  o.  There 
were  no  seats  {places)  in  the  street  car  when  she  entered.  11.  The 
house  which  I  gave  to  my  son  is  lighted  by  electricity.  12.  My 
brother  and  sister  returned  from  Europe  a  week  ago.  13.  Have  you 
found  the  newspapers  which  the  lawyer  read?  14.  While  going 
down  the  street  I  saw  my  friend  in  his  automobile.  15.  Are  there 
attractive  pictures  in  every  room  of  your  house  ?  16.  While  speak- 
ing to  my  brother  she  went  out  of  the  railway  station.  17.  The 
leaves  have  been  •  dead  for  a  long  time  and  the  apples  have 
already  fallen.    18.  Where  did  she  go?   She  started  for  (the)  school. 

19.  Did   you  look   at  the  castles  which  the   Englishman  sold? 

20.  My  mother  lived  ten  years  in  the  house  where  she  was  born. 


174  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

REVIEW 

(Lessons  Twenty-Two  to  Twenty-Five) 

A.  General  Drill 

i.  Give  the  synopsis  of  avoir;  present  subjunctive  of 
avoir ;  imperative  of  avoir ;  all  the  forms  of  il  y  a ;  all  the 
forms  of  il  y  a,  neg.-int. 

2.  Give  the  synopsis  of  6tre ;  present  subjunctive  of  6tre ; 
imperative  of  etre. 

3.  Name,  in  proper  order,  the  forms  that  constitute  the 
synopsis  of  the  perfect  tenses  of  a  verb. 

4.  Give  the  synopsis  of  the  perfect  forms  of  apporter, 
arriver,  avoir. 

5.  Give  the  — 

perf.  subj.  of  tomber  pluperf.  ind.  of  choisir,  neg.-int. 

past  ant.  of  traverser,  neg.  cond.  perf.  of  entrer 

imp.  subj.  of  penser  pluperf.  subj.  of  rendre,  neg. 

perf.  ind.  of  rester,  int.  past  ant.  of  punir,  neg. 

fut.  perf.  of  avoir  imp.  subj.  of  etre 

6.  Give  the  list  of  past  participles  that  take  etre  as 
auxiliary. 

7.  State  both  cases  of  agreement  of  the  past  participle, 
and  illustrate  each. 

8.  Give  complete  French  sentences  containing  respec- 
tively the  following  forms  :  imperfect ;  past  definite ;  per- 
fect indicative  ;  pluperfect  indicative  ;  past  anterior  ;  future 
perfect ;  conditional ;  conditional  perfect ;  imperative. 

9.  Give  complete  French  sentences  containing  all6s  ;  aurait 
vu  ;  depuis  ;  achet&s  ;  tout  en  ;  traversant ;  furent. 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XXII-XXV  175 

10.  Translate  into  French  — 

did  you  see  ?  they  talked  would  there  not  be  ? 

he  is  wrong  was  he  thirsty  ?  we  are  not  afraid 

is  there  not  ?  there  was  not  would  she  have  fallen  ? 

has  he  not  ?  I  had  not  said  had  they  not  started  ? 

had  you  heard  ?  had  she  gone  out  ?  while  going 

1 1 .  Translate  into  French  — 

there  is  a  book  on  the  desk  if  he  had  bought,  he  would  have 

there 's  your  book  sold 

here  's  my  pen  they  saw  some  fields 

does  he  need  a  dog  ?  the  fields  which  they  saw 

does  he  need  some  horses  ?  the  field  which  I  saw 

as  soon  as  he  had  bought,  he  sold      many  months  ago 

if  he  has  bought,  he  will  sell  he  lived  in  the  country 

r      12.  Express  and  answer  in  French  — 

how  long  will  it  burn  ?  how  long  had  it  been  burning  ? 

how  long  has  it  been  burning  ?        has  it  been  burning  long  ? 
how  long  did  it  burn  ?  will  it  burn  long  ? 

13.  Rewrite,  translating  the  English  words  into  French: 

1.  II  a  une  femme  (loving). 

2.  II  (is  crossing)  la  rue. 

3.  Tout  en  (crossing)  la  rue,  elle  (fell). 

4.  Nous  (entered)  la  chambre. 

5.  Les  chaussures  que  nous  avons  (sold). 

6.  II  aura  (sold)  les  chaussures. 

7.  En  (selling)  des  bijoux,  elles  (became)  riches. 

8.  Une  femme  (obliging)  a  (given)  les  choses  que  j'ai  (saw). 

9.  Quand  nous  (arrived),  nous  avons  (found)  notre  tante. 

10.  En  (inspiring)  ses  enfants  avec  ces  (inspiring)  mots,  la  (in- 
spired) femme  (inspired)  des  amis  que  son  mari  n'avait  pas  (inspired). 


176  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

B.  Translate  into  French 

i.  I  have  been  living  at  home  with  my  father  and  mother  for 
ten  years.  2.  If  he  studies  well,  the  teacher  will  speak  of  his  work 
to  his  father.  3.  My  sister  has  been  at  school  for  three  weeks,  and 
she  is  very  happy  with  her  friends.  4.  She  had  been  visiting  here 
two  weeks  when  she  died.  5.  There  are  some  beautiful  leaves  on 
the  table;  they  fell  from  the  old  tree  in  the  yard.  6.  We  shall 
have  money  enough  when  we  sell  the  house.  7.  When  he  had  fin- 
ished his  lesson,  he  closed  the  book.  8.  I  had  not  seen  the  horses 
which  you  had  sold.  9.  Where  did  you  buy  the  playthings  which 
you  brought  to  the  children  ?  1  o.  If  his  parents  had  not  come,  he 
would  have  gone  to  his  uncle's.  11.  There's  John's  youngest 
sister;  are  not  her  black  eyes  beautiful?  12.  My  sisters  arrived 
from  Europe  yesterday  and  brought  some  pretty  things  to  my 
mother.  13.  I  have  been  hot  and  thirsty  for  an  hour,  and  now  I 
am  also  sleepy.  14.  My  father  thinks  that  old  lawyers  are  oftener 
right  than  wrong.  15.  If  you  had  no  pencil,  I  should  be  ashamed 
of  you.  16.  Children,  study  more  and  you  will  speak  French  well 
when  you  are  in  France.  17.  When  my  aunt  went  to  town,  she 
would  remain  for  hours  in  a  store.  18.  How  long  have  the  birds 
been  singing  in  the  old  tree?  For  more  than  an  hour.  19.  Were 
the  children  afraid  of  the  animals  which  they  saw  in  the  park  ? 
20.  He  reads  a  great  deal,  even  while  waiting  for  the  street  car. 

Proverbes 

En  forgeant  on  devient  forgeron. 
Loin  des  yeux,  loin  du  cceur. 
A  chaque  jour  suffit  sa  peine. 
Qui  donne  aux  pauvres  prete  a  Dieu. 
9  II  n'y  a  pire  eau  que  l'eau  qui  dort. 

Les  petits  ruisseaux  font  les  grandes  rivieres. 
Tout  ce  qui  brille  n'est  pas  or. 


INTERROGATION  177 

LESSON   TWENTY-SIX 

INTERROGATION 

163.  Direct  Questions  with  Pronoun  Subjects.  When  the 
subject  is  a  personal  pronoun,  a  sentence  is  made  interroga- 
tive by  inverting  the  subject  and  the  verb  (the  auxiliary  in 
a  compound  tense),  and  connecting  them  by  a  hyphen,  as 
already  explained  in  Sec.  87. 

Do  you  sing  ?  Chantez-vous  ? 

Have  you  sung  ?  Avez-vous  chante  ? 

Has  she  sung  ?  A-t-elle  chante  ? 

164.  Est-ce  que.  If,  however,  the  subject  is  in  the  first 
person  singular,  this  inversion  usually  does  not  take  place, 
but  est-ce  que,  is  it  that,  is  prefixed  to  the  affirmative  order. 
Do  I  sing  ?  Est-ce  que  je  cha?ite  ? 

Note  i.  The  following  tenses  illustrate  the  application  of  the 
principles  above  to  the  conjugation  of  a  simple  and  a  compound  tense: 

Present  Indicative  of  chanter,  Interrogatively 
est-ce  que  je  chante?  do  I  sing?  am  I  singing? 
chantes-tu  ?  dost  thou  sing  ?  art  thou  singing  ? 
chante-t-il  ?  does  he  sing  ?  is  he  singing  ? 
chantons-nous  ?  do  we  sing  ?  are  we  singing  ? 
chantez-vous  ?  do  you  sing  ?  are  you  singing  ? 
chantent-ils  ?  do  they  sing  ?  are  they  singing  ? 

Pluperfect  Indicative  of  chanter,  Interrogatively 
est-ce  que  j'avais  chante?  had  I  sung?  had  I  been  singing? 
avais-tu  chante  ?  hadst  thou  sung  ?  etc. 
avait-il  chante  ?  had  he  sung? 
avions-nous  chante  ?  had  we  sung? 
aviez-vous  chante?  had  you  sung? 
avaient-ils  chante  ?  had  they  sung  ? 


178  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Note  2.  Certain  monosyllabic  forms  of  the  first  person  singular  of 
the  present  indicative  are  regularly  inverted  in  questions.  Prominent 
among  these  are  j'ai  and  je  suis.    Thus,  in  conjugation  : 

Present  Indicative  of  etre,  Interrogatively 

suis-je  ?  am  I  ? 
es-tu  ?  art  thou  ? 
etc.         etc. 

Past  Indefinite  of  chanter,  Interrogatively 

ai-je  chante?  have  I  sitng?  did  I  sing? 

as-tu  chante  ?  hast  thou  sung?  didst  thou  sing? 

etc.  etc. 

165.  Direct  Questions  with  Noun  Subjects.  When  the 
subject  is  a  noun,  a  sentence  is  made  interrogative 

a.  By  placing  the  subject  first  and  repeating  it  by  the 
proper  form  of  the  personal  pronoun  after  the  verb,  as 
explained  in  Sec.  90. 

Is  the  overcoat  beautiful  ?  Le pardessus  est-il  beau  ? 

Is  the  carriage  new  ?  La  voiture  est-elle  neuve  ? 

b.  By  prefixing  est-ce  que  to  the  declarative  order. 
Is  the  sky  blue  ?  Est-ce  que  le  del  est  bleu  ? 

Note.   The  construction  with  est-ce  que  is  especially  used,  with  either 
a  noun  or  a  pronoun  subject,  when  the  question  involves  surprise. 
Isn't  he  here  ?  Est-ce  qu'il  n 'est pas  ici  ? 

166.  Questions  introduced  by  Interrogative  Words,  such 
as  quand,  ou,  combien,  take  the  inverted  order  if  the  subject 
is  a  personal  pronoun  ;  if  the  subject  is  a  noun,  they  take  the 
inverted  order  or  the  order  explained  in  Sec.  165,  a. 

Where  is  he?  Oil  est-il? 

{Ou  est  mon  pere  ? 
Mon  pere  ou  est-il  ? 
Oil  mon  pere  est-il  ? 


INTERROGATION  179 

How  long  does  he  work  ?  Combien  de  temps  travaille-t-il  1 

f  Combien  coute  le  livre  ? 

How  much  does  the  book  cost  ?  i  Le  livre  combien  coiite-t-il  1 

[  Combien  le  livre  coiite-t-il  1 

When  did  he  start  ?  Quand  est-il  parti  1 

xiu,      a  a  u    ^  -^     (Votrefrere  quand  est-il  parti? 

V\  hen  did  your  brother  start  ?    <   _        .     J *     s 

[  Quand  votre  frere  est-il  parti  ? 

167.  N'est-ce  pas.  Any  question  to  which  the  answer 
yes  is  expected  may  be  asked  by  adding  n'est-ce  pas,  is  it 
not  so,  to  the  affirmative  statement. 

I  am  rich,  am  I  not  ?  Je  suis  riche,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

Are  they  not  rich  ?  lis  sont  riches,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

He  talks  well,  does  he  not  ?  II parte  bien,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 
You  will  listen,  won't  you  ?  Vous  kouterez,  n'est-ce  pas 7 

VOCABULARY 

annoncer,  to  announce  le  domestique,  the  servant 

apporter,  to  bring  le  gant,  the  glove 

k  bientot,    will   see   you   again  merci,  thank  you 

soon  oter,  to  take  off 

bonjour,  good  morning  j'ouvre,  I  open 

la  carte,  the  (visiting)  card  il  ouvre,  he  opens 

ce  (/.  cette),  this,  that  le  pardessus,  the  overcoat 

chez   lui  (elle),  at  his  (her)  la  peinture,  the  painting 

home  la  province,  the  province(s) 

comment  allez-vous  ?  how  are  au  revoir,  good-by 

you  ?  sonner,  to  ring  (a  bell) 

couter,  to  cost  trois,  three 

je  dois,  I  must  la  visite,  the  call 

Present  Indicative  of  aller,  to  go,  to  be  (in  health) 

je  vais  nous  allons 

tu  vas  vous  allez 

il  va  ils  vont 


180  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

D  .-  EXERCISE 

i.  Conjugate  interrogatively  the  present  indicative  of 
entendre ;  future  perfect  of  finir ;  pluperfect  of  aller ;  imper- 
fect subjunctive  of  choisir ;  past  indefinite  of  tomber ;  past 
definite  of  couter. 

2.  Make  interrogative  — 

je  sonne  j'ai  regarde 

votre  pere  etait  venu  vos  amis  ont  achete  une  maison 

elle  serait  entree  mon  chien  est  blanc 

les  oiseaux  chantent  sa  soeur  n'est  pas  belle 

les  gar^ons  entreront  les  enfants  auraient  etudie 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

when  did  the  child  fall  ?  why  do  birds  sing  ? 

she  will  sing,  won't  she  ?  where  are  the  men  ? 

how  much  did  they  sell  ?  will  John  enter  ? 

are  the  boys  good  ?  she  is  here,  isn't  she  ? 

didn't  he  come  ?  had  she  started  ? 

4.  Give  the  full  tense  of  — 

quand  suis-je  parti? 
est-ce  que  j'aurai  trouve  ? 
pourquoi  avais-je  vendu  ? 
est-ce  que  je  depensais  tout  ? 

Model  XjNE  Visite 

Je  sonne  a  la  porte  de  Monsieur  Leblanc.  Le  domestique 
ouvre  et  j'entre  dans  la  maison.  «  Monsieur  Leblanc  est-il  chez  lui  ? 
—  Oui,  Monsieur  Leblanc  est  chez  lui.  Qui  annoncerai-je,  s'il  vous 
plait?   — Voici  ma  carte. »   J'ote  mon  chapeau,  mes  gants  et  mon 


INTERROGATION  181 

pardessus.  Monsieur  Leblanc  entre  bientot  dans  le  salon.  «  Bon- 
jour,  Henri ;  comment  allez-vous  ?  —  Je  vais  tres  bien,  merci,  et 
vous  ?  —  Bien,  merci.  Quand  etes-vous  arrive  de  Paris  ?  —  Je  suis 
arrive  hier.  —  Et  votre  mere  est-elle  revenue  aussi  ?  —  Non ;  elle 
n'est  pas  encore  revenue.  —  A-t-elle  quitte  Paris  ?  —  Oui,  et  elle 
est  allee  a  Londres.  —  Quand  quittera-t-elle  cette  ville  ?  —  Aussi- 
tot  que  sa  sceur  sera  revenue.  — Votre  voyage  a-t-il  ete  agre- 
able  ?  —  Oui,  merci,  tres  agreable.  —  Combien  de  temps  etes-vous 
reste  en  France?  — Trois  mois.  — Vous  avez  visite  Paris  et  la 
province,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  —  Oui,  je  suis  alle  en  Touraine.  J'ai 
achete'  de  beaux  tableaux.  —  Est-ce  que  les  tableaux  sont  chers 
en  France?  — Oui,  ils  sont  aussi  chers  qu'ici.  Voila  deux  pein- 
tures  que  j'ai  apportees.  —  Combien  coute  la  plus  grande  des 
deux  ?  —  Elle  est  moins  chere  que  l'autre.  Voila  ma  voiture.  Au 
revoir.    —  A  bientot.  » 

Theme 

Yesterday  I  (/.)  went  to  Mrs.  Leblanc's.  On  arriving  I  rang 
the  bell.  The  servant  who  opens  the  door  is  very  kind.  On 
entering  I  asked,  M  Is  Mrs.  Leblanc  at  home  ?  "  and  I  gave  my 
card  to  the  servant.  I  entered  the  parlor.  M  Did  you  wait  a  long 
time?"    "  No,  Mrs.  Leblanc  arrived  soon  after." 

"  Good  morning,  Mrs.  Lenoir.  How  are  you  ?  How  long 
have  you  been  back  from  France?  Did  your  husband  come 
back  with  you  ? "  "  No,  my  husband  remained  in  Paris,  where 
he  has  still  some  business."  "  Is  his  mother  there  also  ? "  w  Yes, 
she  is  not  well,  but  as  soon  as  she  is  (Sec.  137)  better,  she  will 
set  out  to  visit  the  provinces  with  her  son  if  he  has  finished  his 
business."  "You  liked  your  trip,  didn't  you?"  "Very  much, 
thank  you ;  I  found  France  very  beautiful.  But  I  must  leave. 
Is  not  my  carriage  at  the  door  ? "  w  Yes,  it  has  been  there  a  few 
minutes  "  (see  general  vocabulary).  M  Good-by,  madam ;  my  visit 
has  been  very  pleasant." 


1 82  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Oral 


i.  Quand  le  domestique  ouvre-t-il  la  porte  ?  2.  Que  demandez- 
vous  au 1  domestique  ?  3.  Pourquoi  donnez-vous  votre  carte  au 
domestique?  4.  Dans  quelle  salle  entrez-vous?  5.  Entrez-vous 
la  avec  votre  pardessus  ?  6.  Est-ce  que  vous  attendez  longtemps 
M.  Leblanc  ?  7.  Depuis  quand  M.  X  est-il  arrive  de  Paris  ?  8.  Sa 
mere  est-elle  revenue  aussi  ?  9.  Pourquoi  ?  10.  Combien  de  temps 
M.  X  a-t-il  ete  parti  {gone)  ?  11.  A-t-il  visite  seulement  la  capitale  ? 
12.  Le  cocher  n'attend-il  pas  M.  X  a  la  porte?  13.  Comment 
M.  X  quitte-t-il  M.  Leblanc?  14.  Otez-vous  votre  chapeau  en 
entrant  k  l'ecole  ?    15.  Comment  votre  ami  va-t-il  aujourd'hui  ? 

Resume 

1.  Did  you  see  the  visiting  card  which  he  brought?  2.  Who  is 
ringing  the  bell  ?  Mr.  Leblanc,  who  desires  to  come  in.  3.  Good 
morning,  Mr.  Leblanc,  is  your  daughter  at  home  ?  4.  The  woman 
said,  "  How  are  you  ? "  when  she  entered  the  room.  5.  How  long 
did  your  sisters  remain  in  England  last  year  ?  6.  Where  did  your 
brother  buy  the  gloves  which  he  was  wearing  this  morning? 
7.  Come  in,  sir,  and  take  off  your  overcoat,  please.  8.  When  did 
your  aunt  and  uncle  start  for  England  ?  9.  Peter,  you  are  speaking 
to  your  neighbor  again,  are  you  not  ?  1  o.  Is  the  gentleman  at  home  ? 
I  thought  that  he  had  gone  to  town.  1 1 .  The  birds  have  been  singing 
for  a  long  time,  have  they  not  ?  1 2.  Stay  to  dinner,  Mr.  Leblanc,  if  you 
desire.  13.  No,  thank  you,  I  am  waiting  for  my  carriage.  14.  Has 
not  Miss  Riou  returned  yet?  15.  Did  I  speak  French  in  Paris? 
Certainly,  everybody  speaks  French  there.  16.  How  much  did 
the  shoes  cost  which  you  are  wearing?  17.  Were  automobiles  as 
dear  in  Europe  as  in  America  during  the  war  ?  18.  When  the  boys 
went  out,  they  said,  "Good-by,  see  you2  tomorrow."  19.  Are  you 
better  today?  I  am  better,  thank  you.  How  is  your  family? 
20.  You  will  sell  this  painting  which  you  bought,  won't  you  ? 

1  To  ask  a  person,  demander  h  une  personne.  2  Compare  a  bientSt. 


NEGATION  183 

LESSON   TWENTY-SEVEN 

NEGATION 

168.  Negatives  with  a  verb  are  expressed  in  French  by 
two  words.  The  first  of  these  is  ne,  which  always  precedes 
the  verb.  The  second  word  differs  to  express  different  nega- 
tive ideas.    The  commonest  of  these  negative  expressions  are 

ne  .  .  .  pas,  not  ne  .  .  .  guere,  scarcely 

ne  .  .  .  point,  not  at  all  ne  .  .  .  rien,  nothing 

ne  .  .  .  plus,  no  more,  no  longer  ne  .  .  .  personne,  nobody 

ne  .  .  .  jamais,  never  ne  .  .  .  que,  only 

I  was  not  speaking.  Je  neparlais  pas. 

He  never  speaks.  77  ne  parte  jamais. 

Has  he  nothing  ?  N'a-t-il  rien  1 

He  has  only  four  pencils.  II  n'a  que  quatre  crayons. 

Note  i  .   Point,  plus,  etc.  are  not  accompanied  by  pas,  but  replace  it. 
Note  2.    When  two  of  these  negative  expressions  occur  together; 
one  of  them  corresponds  to  an  affirmative  word  in  English. 

Elle  ne  visite  jamais  personne.  She  never  visits  anybody. 

II  n'a  plus  rien.  He  no  longer  has  anything. 

Note  3.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  use  of  the  negative 
in  the  conjugation  of  simple  tenses : 

Present  Indicative  of  chanter,  Negatively 
je  ne  chante  pas,  I  am  not  singing,  I  do  not  sing 
tu  ne  chantes  pas,  thoti  art  not  singing,  etc. 
il  ne  chante  pas,  he  is  not  singing,  etc. 
etc. 

Present  Indicative  of  chanter,  Negative-Interrogatively 

est-ce  que  je  ne  chante  pas  ?  am  I  not  singing?  etc. 
ne  chantes-tu  pas?  art  thou  not  singing?  etc. 
ne  chante-t-il  pas  ?  is  he  not  singing  ?  etc. 
etc. 


1 84  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

169.  Negatives  without  Verbs.  In  a  negative  expression 
in  which  the  verb  is  omitted  the  ne  also  is  omitted,  and 
the  second  part  of  the  negative  alone  is  used. 

No  more  pencils.  Plus  de  crayons. 

When  will  he  be  here  ?    Never.        Quand  sera-t-il  id  ?   Jamais, 

Note.  Ne  .  .  .  que  is  used  only  with  a  verb.  Elsewhere  only  is 
expressed  by  seulement. 

170.  Position  of  Negatives.  In  compound  tenses  the 
second  part  of  the  negative  is  placed  between  the  auxiliary 
and  the  past  participle.  Personne,  however,  takes  the  posi- 
tion of  the  corresponding  English  word,  and  que  immediately 
precedes  the  word  whose  meaning  it  restricts. 

He  has  not  been  here.  77  n'a  pas  tie  id. 

He  has  heard  nobody.  77  n'a  entendu  personne. 

He  sold  yesterday  only  a  few  II  n'a  vendu  hier  que  quelques 
pencils.  crayons. 

Note.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  application  of  this 
principle  to  the  conjugation  of  perfect  tenses: 

Pluperfect  Indicative  of  chanter,  Negatively 

je  n'avais  pas  chante,  I  had  not  sung. 
tu  n'avais  pas  chante,  thou  hadst  not  sung 
il  n'avait  pas  chante,  he  had  not  sung 
etc. 

Pluperfect  Indicative  of  chanter,  Negative-Interrogatively 
est-ce  que  je  n'avais  pas  chante  ?  had  I  not  sung? 
n'avais-tu  pas  chante  ?  hadst  thou  not  sung? 
n'avait-il  pas  chante  ?  had  he  not  sung  ? 
etc. 

171.  Neither  .  .  .  nor  is  expressed 

a.  With  two  verbs  in  simple  tenses  by  ne  before  the  first 
verb  and  ni  ne  before  the  second. 
She  neither  speaks  nor  hears.  Elle  ne  parle  ni  rientend. 


NEGATION  185 

b.  In  other  situations  by  ne  before  the  main  verb  and  ni 
before  each  of  the  words  affected. 

He  has  neither  the  pencil  nor  //  n'a  ni  le  crayon  ni  la  plume. 

the  pen. 

Neither  the  boys  nor  the  girls  are  Ni  les  gar  cons  ni  les  filles  ne  so  fit 

here.  %ici. 

He  has  neither  bought  nor  sold.  //  n*a  ni  achete  ni  vendu. 

Note.  After  ni  neither  de  nor  the  article  is  used  in  the  partitive  sense. 

U  n'a  ni  crayons  ni  plumes.  He   has    neither   {any)  pencils   nor 

(any)  pens. 

VOCABULARY 

l'automne   [o-ton]   m.,  the            Thiverp-veir]  ;«.,  the  winter 

autumn,  fall  la  n&essite\  the  necessity 

cesser,  to  cease  la  neige,  the  snow 

le  champ,  the  field  la  nuit,  the  night 

deserter,  to  desert  par,  through,  by 

durer,  to  last  le  parfum,  the  perfume 

l'6te*  m.,  the  summer  partout,  everywhere 

le  fermier,  the  farmer  le  printemps,  the  spring 

la  fin,  the  end  reverdir,  to  grow  green  again 

les  gens  m.,  the  people  la  saison,  the  season 

la  glace,  the  ice  le  voyage,  the  journey 

au  printemps,  in  (the)  spring 

en  £te*  (automne,  hiver),  in  (the)  summer  (fall,  winter) 

Note  i.    Additional  new  words  will  be  found  in  the  list  of  negatives 
in  Sec.  168. 

Note  2.    Names  of  the  seasons  take  the  definite  article  except  after  en. 

Present  Indicative  of  vouloir,  to  wish,  want 
je  veux  nous  voulons 

tu  veux  vous  voulez 

il  veut  ils  veulent 


1 86  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Drill  EXERCISE 

1 .  Give  the  imperfect  of  punir,  neg. ;  past  indefinite  of 
entrer,  neg.-int. ;  past  anterior  of  rendre,  neg.-int. ;  imperfect 
subjunctive  of  Studier,  neg. ;  pluperfect  of  §tre,  neg. 

2.  Express  in  French  — 

a.  he  has  not  he  gives  nothing 
he  has  not  fallen  he  gives  to  nobody 
he  has  never  studied  he  has  given  nothing 
he  will  study  no  more  he  has  only  one  brother 

b.  have  you  never  ?  have  you  saved  nothing  ? 
had  he  never  seen  ?  have  you  found  only  one  ? 
shall  you  work  no  longer  ?  did  he  see  nobody  ? 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

she  has  worked  well  he   punishes   neither  the  good 

she  does  not  sing  at  all  nor  the  bad 

in  the  spring  there  is  no  longer  he  sells  neither  bread  nor  meat 

any  snow  in  winter 

we  don't  want  to  go  the  summer  has  been  hot 

I  neither  give  nor  sell  winter  is  the  cold  season 

4.  Supply  the  French  for  the  words  in  parentheses : 
J'ai  (never)  vu  votre  pere.    II  vient  ici  (no  more).    II  (never) 

veut  (anything).  II  travaille  (not  at  all).  Va-t-il  (no  longer)  a  la 
campagne  ?  A-t-il  ete'  (only)  a  Paris  ?  (Nobody)  veut  rester  en 
ville.  Ici  je  vois  (only)  quelques  enfants.  lis  (scarcely)  etudient. 
lis  (neither)  lisent  (nor)  e'crivent.  Quand  parleront-ils  f rancais  ? 
(Never).    Sont-ils  (never)  alles  a  l'ecole  ? 

Model  LES  Quatre  Saisons 

II  y  a  quatre  saisons  dans  Fannee  et  chaque  saison  dure  trois 
mois.  Au  printemps  nous  n'avons  guere  de  neige,  et  les  nuits  ne 
sont  plus  si  longues  qu'en  hiver.    Nous  ne  portons  plus  de  lourds 


NEGATION  187 

vetements.  Les  champs  et  les  bois  reverdissent.  II  y  a  des  gens 
qui  trouvent  le  printemps  la  plus  belle  de  toutes  les  saisons.  En 
ete  les  jours  sont  longs  et  chauds,  et  les  nuits  ne  sont  jamais 
froides.  Nous  avons  souvent  chaud  et  soif.  Les  gens  riches 
desertent  la  ville  pour  aller  a  la  campagne  ou  au  bord  de  la  mer. 
La,  ni  les  jours  ni  les  nuits  ne  sont  aussi  chauds  qu'en  ville.  Le 
travail  des  fermiers  ne  cesse  qu'avec  la  nuit.  L'ete  est  aussi  la 
saison  des  vacances.  II  n'y  a  alors  personne  a  l'ecole.  Personne 
n'est  au  tableau.  Nous  n'e'tudions  ni  ne  re'citons.  Les  enfants  ne 
veulent  que  jouer.  Nous  sommes  maintenant  en  automne,  la 
saison  des  fruits.  II  y  aura  plus  de  pommes  que  l'annee  derniere. 
Les  fleurs  sont  encore  belles,  mais  elles  n'ont  plus  leur  parfum. 
Les  enfants  n'aiment  point  la  fin  des  vacances.  En  hiver  il  y  a 
de  la  neige  partout.  Plus  de  fleurs  dans  les  jardins.  Les  gens  ne 
quittent  la  maison  que  par  necessite.  Comme  j'ai  toujours  froid, 
je  n'aime  point  l'hiver.  Je  n'aime  ni  la  neige  ni  la  glace.  Est-ce 
que  je  demeurerai  dans  les  pays  froids  ?   Jamais  1 

Theme 

There  are  only  four  seasons  in  the  year.  The  pupils  like 
summer  better  than  the  other  seasons  because  they  do  not  study 
at  all.  Then  nobody  gives  any  lessons.  Neither  the  old  nor  the 
young  remain  in  town.  Many  visit  the  country.  Next  year  I  shall 
desert  the  city  for  the  seashore,  where  I  have  already  been.  In 
autumn  there  are  more  fruits  than  flowers.  Apples  are  never  so 
good  as  now.  However,  the  apples  which  are  in  that  basket  are 
scarcely  ripe.  My  father,  who  has  only  two  weeks  of  vacation,  is 
at  his  farm.  The  days  are  still  beautiful,  but  they  are  no  more 
so  long  as  in  summer.  My  cousin  will  not  like  winter  here.  Does 
he  never  want  to  come  here  ?  No,  never.  We  did  not  have  any- 
body here  last  winter.  When  it  is  (we  are  in  the)  spring,  there 
will  no  longer  be  any  snow  or  ice.  Many  people  like  that  season 
better  than  the  others. 


1 88  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Oral 

i.  Combien  de  saisons  y  a-t-il  ?  2.  Combien  de  temps  dure 
chaque  saison?  3.  Quand  les  nuits  sont-elles  plus  longues  que  les 
jours  ?  4.  Dans  quelle  saison  sommes-nous  ?  5.  Y  a-t-il  beaucoup 
de  neige  au  printemps  ?  6.  Les  champs  sont-ils  encore  blancs  au 
printemps  ?  7.  Quelle  est  la  plus  belle  des  saisons  ?  8.  Dans  quelle 
saison  n'avez-vous  jamais  froid  ?  9.  Au  bord  de  la  mer,  les  jours  et 
les  nuits  sont-ils  aussi  chauds  qu'en  ville  ?  1  o.  Les  enf ants  veulent-ils 
reciter  pendant  les  vacances  ?  1 1 .  Y  a-t-il  beaucoup  de  personnes 
au  bord  de  la  mer  en  hiver  ?  1 2.  Y  a-t-il  encore  des  fleurs  en  hiver  ? 
13.  Dans  quelle  saison  n'y  a-t-il  ni  neige  ni  glace  ? 

Resume 

1.  There  are  not  as  many  days  in  autumn  as  in  summer.  2.  In 
the  winter  pupils  go  to  school  every  day  and  work  never  ceases. 
3.  There  was  no  wheat  at  all  in  our  country  last  year.  4.  Are  the 
nights  ever  longer  than  the  days  in  summer?  5.  Children  prefer 
summer  because  teachers  give  no  lessons  then.  6.  The  English 
army  found  nothing  in  the  city  when  it  arrived.  7.  The  countries 
which  she  visited  have  no  longer  any  castles.  8.  During  the  season 
of  snow(s)  there  are  neither  flowers  nor  leaves  in  the  garden. 
9.  The  grass  in  the  meadow  is  no  longer  green  and  it  is  every- 
where dry.  10.  Now  students  want  neither  to  play  nor  to  sing  in 
the  yard  of  the  school.  11.  Neither  horses  nor  men  like  to  work 
in  the  fields  during  the  winter.  12.  Spring  is  the  season  of  birds 
and  flowers,  and  you  will  now  find  nobody  at  home.  13.  When  will 
the  students  finish  the  lesson  ?  Never.  1 4.  No  more  apples  on  the 
trees  !  No  water  in  the  river  !  15.  He  wishes  neither  to  give  nor  to 
sell  bread  to  the  poor.  1 6.  In  the  spring  we  have  scarcely  any  snow 
in  the  city.  17.  Neither  old  nor  young  wish  to  remain  in  town  during 
the  summer.  18.  John  does  not  want  to  write  anything  in  his  note- 
book today,  does  he?  19.  The  days  are  no  longer  so  cold  as  for- 
merly.   20.  Animals  no  longer  find  anything  to  (a)  eat  in  the  forest. 


, 

!  a/ ■■■2k. 

41* ', 

LA  COTE  D'AZUR- 


©  Underwood  &  Underwood 

MONACO 


La  France  a  la  bonne  fortune  d'etre  baignee  au  nord  et  au  sud  par  la  mer, 
ce  qui  attire  les  gens  pendant  la  belle  saison.  La  cote  du  midi,  appelee 
Riviera  ou  Cote  d'Azur,  est  aussi  attrayante  l'hiver  que  l'ete.  C'est  un  veri- 
table paradis  terrestre.  Le  bleu  de  la  mer  et  du  ciel  laisse  au  visiteur  une 
impression  inoubliable  et  fait  de  cette  cote  le  rendez-vous,  en  hiver,  de 
l'aristocratie  du  monde  entier.  Sur  cette  cote  se  trouve  l'etrange  petite 
principaute  de  Monaco  qui,  quoique  n'ayant  que  huit  milles  carres  de  su- 
perficie  et  une  population  de  quelques  milliers  d'habitants,  forme  encore 
un  etat  independant  gouverne  par  un  prince  absolu.  La  principaute  fait 
saillie  dans  la  Mediterranee  et  est  enclavee  dans  le  departement  des 
Alpes-Maritimes.  Elle  contient  Monte-Carlo  connu  surtout  a  cause  de 
ses  maisons  de  jeu 


iqo  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

REVIEW 

(Lessons  Twenty-Six  and  Twenty-Seven) 
A.  General  Drill 

1.  Give  the  synopsis  of  entrer,  compound  (perfect)  tenses, 
neg.-int. ;  finir,  simple  tenses,  int. ;  tendre,  compound  tenses,  int. 

2.  Give  the  — 

pres.  subj.  of  couter,  neg.  pluperf.  subj.  of  tomber,  neg. 

fut.  of  perdre,  int.  past  indef.  of  avoir,  neg.-int. 

past  def.  of  vendre,  neg.-int.  past  indef.  of  batir,  int. 

past  ant.  of  acheter,  neg.  cond.  perf .  of  arriver,  neg.-int. 

3.  Give  the  present  indicative  negative  of  the  verbs  mean- 
ing to  go,  to  wish,  to  read,  to  write,  to  have,  \  to  sell. 

4.  Make  interrogative  — 

il  a  achete  un  habit  il  n'aime  pas  ses  amis 

il  n'a  pas  achete  un  habit  j'entends  les  oiseaux 

votre  pere  a  achete  un  habit  je  suis  entre  dans  le  restaurant 

votre  pere  n'a  pas  achete  un  je  n'entends  pas  les  oiseaux 

habit  votre  pere  aime  ses  enfants 

il  aime  ses  amis  votre  pere  n'aime  pas  ses  enfants 

5.  Translate  into  French  — 

when  do  you  work  ?  when  did  you  stay  here  ? 

when  does  your  friend  work  ?         when  did  your  friend  stay  here  ? 

6.  Give  a  French  sentence  containing  est-ce  que;  n'est-ce  pas. 

7.  Modify  (a)  le  garcon  entend,  (b)  les  garcons  ont  entendu, 
by  adding  the  following  negatives  :  never,  nothing,  no  longer, 
scarcely,  not  at  all,  nobody. 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XXVI,  XXVII  191 

8.  Translate  into  French  — 

they  finished  only  one  lesson  he    has    neither    brothers    nor 
they  finished  yesterday  only  one  sisters 

lesson  no  more  snow  ! 

he  has  neither  seen  nor  heard  are  you  going  to  go  ? 

he  is  neither  working  nor  playing  in  the  street  car 

he  loves  neither  his  father  nor  in  the  window 

his  mother  no,  sir,  thank  you 

B.  Translate  into  French 

1.  I  saw  nobody  and  I  found  nothing.  2.  Has  he  sent  any  play- 
things to  the  boys  ?  3.  There  are  only  a  few  red  flowers  in  your 
garden,  but  you  have  many  white  •  flowers.  4.  His  nephews  are 
rich,  are  they  not  ?  They  have  many  jewels  and  beautiful  carriages. 
5.  Tomorrow  I  shall  pass  the  day  in  the  country  if  the  snow  does 
not  fall.  6.  Does  your  friend  stay  long  ?  No,  she  will  stay  only  a 
week.  7.  Who  carried  any  red  apples  to  the  grocer's  ?  Nobody. 
8.  Nobody  is  hungry,  but  everybody  prefers  to  eat  now.  9.  We 
sell  neither  bread  nor  meat.  10.  Was  I  not  talking  about  our 
country's  flag  ?  11.  Did  not  the  teacher's  daughter  enter  the  class- 
room an  hour  ago?  12.  I  shall  neither  lose  nor  sell  the  books 
which  you  have  chosen.  13.  There  is  snow  in  summer  there,  is 
there  not?  14.  Had  you  never  met  that  merchant  in  the  post 
office?  15.  If  you  had  never  entered  the  store,  you  would  not 
have  seen  the  new  overcoats.  16.  We  no  longer  have  anything  in 
our  room.  17.  Never  shall  1 1  visit  France  and  the  provinces  again. 
18.  Good-by,  I  am  going  to  live  in  England  this  winter.  19.  On 
starting  for  the  seashore  I  shall  visit  only  my  best  friends. 
20.  How  long  will  the  snow  which  has  fallen  remain? 

1  See  Sec.  328,  b. 


192 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


LESSON  TWENTY-EIGHT 


CONJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS 

172.  Personal  Pronouns  are  divided  into  two  classes,  con- 
junctive and  disjunctive. 

Conjunctive  pronouns  are  used  as  subject,  direct  object, 
and  indirect  object  of  a  verb  expressed.  In  all  other  cases 
the  personal  pronoun  has  the  disjunctive  form. 

Note.  By  the  indirect  object  is  meant  the  object  before  which  in 
English  the  preposition  to  (or  for)  is  expressed  or  understood :  as,  / 
gave  it  to  him  (indir.  obj.);  I  give  him  (indir.  obj.)  the  book. 

173.  List  of  Conjunctives.  Conjunctive  pronouns  have 
distinct  forms  for  subject,  direct  object,  and  indirect  object. 
The  forms  are  as  follows  : 


Sing.  < 


ist  Per. 
2d  Per. 


PL. 


[3d  Per.  ^ 


r  ist  Per. 
\  2d  Per. 

3d  Per.  j  , 


m. 


Direct 

Indirect 

Subject 

Object 

Object 

je,  / 

me,  me 

me,  to  me 

tu,  thou 

te,  thee 

te,  to  thee 

il,  he,  it 

le,  him,  it 

lui,  to  him 

elle,  she,  it 

la,  her,  it 

lui,  to  her 

nous,  we 

nous,  us 

nous,  to  us 

vous,  you 

vous,  you 

vous,  to  you 

dles}^ 

X\i]tkem 

leur"] 
•          >to  them 

Note  i  .  Of  the  two  forms  for  the  object  pronoun  it,  the  gender  of 
the  word  to  which  the  it  refers  determines  the  choice.  Compare  Sec.  8 1 . 
Where  is  the   ribbon  ?    I  want  to       Oil  est  le  ruban  ?  Je  veux  le  regarder. 

look  at  it. 
Where  is  the  silk?   I  am  going  to       Oicestlasoie?  Jevais vous lamontrer. 

show  it  to  you. 

Note  2.    Le,  la,  me,  and  te  elide  before  a  vowel  or  mute  h. 
II  m'aime.  He  loves  me. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS         193 

Note  3.   De  and  a  do  not  contract  before  le  and  les  when  the  latter 
are  pronouns. 
II  aime  a  le  montrer.  He  loves  to  show  it. 

174.  Position  of  Conjunctives.  Conjunctive  object  pro- 
nouns directly  precede  the  verb  of  which  they  are  the  object, 
except  in  the  affirmative  imperative,  where  they  follow. 
When  the  objects  thus  follow  the  verb,  they  are  connected 
with  it  by  a  hyphen,  and  me  and  te  become  moi  and  toi. 

II  nous  aime.  He  loves  us. 

Je  lui  ai  donne  un  livre.  /  have  given  him  (her)  a  book. 

Le  trouvera-t-il  ?  Will  he  find  it  ? 

II  ne  l'aime  pas.  He  does  not  like  it. 

Entendez-le.  Hear  him. 

Regardez-moi.  Look  at  me. 

Ne  les  portez  pas.  Do  not  carry  them. 

Me  voici.  Here  I  am. 

lis  veulent  me  voir.  They  want  to  see  me. 

Note.  Observe  that  these  pronouns  precede  the  auxiliary  in  a  com- 
pound tense,  that  they  also  precede  in  questions,  and  that  they  follow  ne. 
In  the  last  illustration  me  is  the  object  of  voir,  not  of  veulent.  Voila  and 
voici,  like  verbs,  are  preceded  by  object  pronouns. 

175.  Two  Conjunctives.  When  two  conjunctive  pronouns 
are  objects  of  the  same  verb,  the  one  in  the  third  person  is 
placed  nearer  the  verb.  If  both  are  third  person,  le,  la,  les 
precede  lui,  leur ;  it  happens  that  they  are  then  arranged  in 
alphabetical  order. 

II  me  le  montre.  He  shows  it  to  me. 

Montrez-le-moi.  Show  it  to  me. 

Ne  nous  le  montrez  pas.  Do  not  show  it  to  us. 

II  le  leur  donne.  He  gives  it  to  them. 

Donnez-le-leur.  Give  it  to  them. 

Ne  les  lui  donnez  pas.  Don't  give  them  to  him  {her). 

Le  lui  donne-t-il  ?  Is  he  giving  it  to  him  (her)  ? 


194 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Note.    The  following  table  presents,  in  a  form  for  memorizing,  all 
possible  combinations : 

rle  fie  -le  "]  -le 

me-j  la  nous-<  la  -la    >>-moi  -la    }■ 

lies  lies  -lesJ  -les. 


rle 

rle 

-le  1 

-le  1 

te   ■ 

la 

vous  <  la 

-la 

►-toi 

-la 

►  -vous 

le   - 

lies 
1 

lies 

lei 

la    >■  leur 
les  J 

-les  J 
-le  1 

-les  J 
-le  1 

la 

Mui 

-la 

►  -lui 

-la 

►  -leur 

les . 

1 

-les  J 

-les  J 

176.  Pleonastic  Use.  In  order  to  avoid  repetition,  the 
conjunctive  object  pronoun  is  often  used  to  represent  a 
preceding  word  or  phrase.  If  the  conjunctive  object  stands 
for  a  definite  noun  or  pronoun,  it  agrees  in  number  and 
gender.  If  it  stands  for  an  adjective  or  a  whole  phrase  or 
clause,  it  is  always  le. 


Etes-vous  Phomme  ?  Je  le  suis. 
Etes-vous  sa  mere  ?  Je  la  suis. 
Etes-vous  heureux  ?  Je  le  suis. 
Le  vendra-t-il  ?  Je  le  pense. 


Are  you  the  man  t  I  am  (he). 
Are  you  his  mother?  I  am  (she). 
Are  you  happy  ?  I  am  (it). 
Will  he  sell  it?  I thi?ik  so  (it). 


VOCABULARY 


bon  marchg,  cheap 
la  caisse,  the  cash  window 
le  caissier,  the  cashier 
ensuite,  then,  afterwards 
envelopper,  to  wrap  up 
l'Stoffe/,  the  piece  of  goods 
les  6toffes,  the  goods 
la  fille  de  magasin,  the  clerk 
le  franc,  the  franc  (coin,  par 
value  about  twenty  cents) 
garnir  (de),  to  trim  (with) 


le  magasin  de  nouveaut£s,   the 
department  store 

la  modiste,  the  milliner 
passer,  to  pass,  go  by 
payer,  to  pay  (for)  (Note  i) 
pris  (past part.),  taken 
quel !  (/.  -lie)  what !  what  a ! 

le  rayon,  the  department,  counter 
reporter,  to  take  (carry)  back 

le  ruban,  the  ribbon 

la  soie,  the  silk 


CONJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS         195 

a  mon  gout,  to  my  taste 

je  vous  prie,  please  (I  beg  of  you) 

voulez-vous  ?  are  you  willing  ?  will  you  ?  (Note  2) 

entrer  chez  la  modiste,  to  enter  the  milliner's 

combien  le  vend-il  ?  at  how  much  does  he  sell  it  ? 

Note  i.  After  payer,  the  thing  paid  for  is  the  direct  object ;  the  per- 
son paid,  the  indirect.  I  paid  her  for  the  dress  (paid  the  dress  to  her),  je 
lui  ai  paye  la  robe.  But  also,  I  paid  her  the  money,  je  lui  ai  paye'  Pargent. 

Note  2.  Vouloir,  in  the  sense  of  to  be  willing,  must  be  distin- 
guished from  the  future. 

Are  you  willing  to  stay  ?  (Will  you  stay  ?)  Voulez-vous  rester  I 

Are  you  going  to  stay?  (Shall  you  stay  ?)  Resterez-vous  ? 

Compare  English  shall  and  will. 

Present  Indicative  of  dire,  to  say,  tell 
je  dis  nous  disons 

tu  dis  vous  dites 

il  dit  ils  disent 

Present  Participle        Past  Participle  Imperative 

disant  dit  dis,  disons,  dites 

Drin  EXERCISE 

1 .  Give  the  present  indicative  of  dire,  neg. ;  of  dire,  neg.- 
int. ;  the  future  perfect  of  dire. 

2.  Supply  the  French  for  the  words  in  parentheses,  placing 
them  in  the  correct  position  : 

Une  dame  demande  a  (her)  modiste  de  montrer  (her)  quelques 
chapeaux.  La  modiste  montre  (them  to  her)  et  dit :  «  Ne  trouvez- 
vous  pas  (them)  a  (your)  gout  ?  —  Oui,  mais  ces  autres  chapeaux, 
pourquoi  ne  montrez-vous  pas  (them  to  me)?  Montrez  (them  to 
me).  »  La  modiste  dit :  «  Je  vendrai  (them  to  you)  bon  marche.  » 
La  modiste  enveloppe  (them  for  her),  et  la  dame  paye  (her  for  them). 


196  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

3.  Express  in  French  — 

she  gives  it  tell  it  to  us 

she  gives  him  a  franc  do  not  tell  me 

she  gives  it  to  him  do  not  tell  it  to  her 

she  has  given  it  to  him  tell  it  to  him 

she  did  not  give  it  to  them  he  gives  them  the  books 

does  he  carry  it  back  ?  he  gives  them  to  them 
has  he  not  carried  them  back  ?        he  gives  them  to  us 

tell  me  he  gave  them  to  us 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

I  want  it  he  sells  them  cheap 

I  do  not  want  them  give  them  to  me,  please  (two 

where  is  the  pen  ?    I  have  it  ways) 

my  daughter,  do  you  love  us  ?         she  thinks  so 

she  wants  to  hear  me  are  you  sick  ?   I  am 

he  will  show  it  to  us  are  you  the  milliner  ?    I  am  not 

my  friend,  you  are  tall  I  will  pay  him 

had  he  not  given  it  to  us  ?  I  will  pay  for  them 

my  son,  stay  here  I  will  pay  her  for  them 

have  you  the  book  ?    I  want  it        what  a  good  store ! 

have    you    the    notebooks  ?     I      will  you  look  at  me  ? 

brought  them  shall  you  look  at  me  ? 

have  you  seen  her  ?  she  entered  the  milliner's 

Model  Dans  les  Magasins 

Ce  matin  nous  sommes  parties  de  bonne  heure  faire  nos 
emplettes.  Ma  cousine  nous  a  accompagnees  pour  nous  montrer 
les  beaux  magasins.  Comme  une  voiture  passait,  nous  l'avons 
prise.  Nous  sommes  d'abord  entrees  chez  la  modiste.  Elle  nous 
a  montre  plusieurs  chapeaux,  mais  nous  ne  les  avons  pas  trouves 
a  notre  gout.  Ma  cousine  cependant  a  achete  un  chapeau  garni 
de  fleurs  et  de  rubans  que  la  modiste  lui  avait  montre  ensuite, 


CONJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS         197 

mais  elle  ne  l'aime  plus.  Elle  le  lui  reportera  demain.  Nous 
sommes  allees  ensuite  dans  un  magasin  de  nouveautes.  En  entrant 
ma  mere  dit  a  une  fille  de  magasin :  «  Etes-vous  la  fille  qui  m'a 
vendu  des  e'toffes  hier  ? »  Elle  a  repondu :  «  Oui,  madame,  je  la 
suis.   — Montrez-moi,  je  vous  prie,  le  rayon  des  e'toffes  de  soie. 

—  Le  voila,  a  droite.  Vous  le  trouverez  facilement.  — Quelles 
belles  etoff  es ! »  La  fille  de  magasin  les  leur  montre  en  disant : 
«  Regardez  cette  etoffe.  Examinez-la.  Ne  la  trouvez-vous  pas  tres 
belle  ?  Je  vous  la  vendrai  bon  marche. »  En  regardant  une  autre 
etoffe  ma  mere  a  dit :  «  Combien  nous  la  vendrez-vous  ?  —  Dix 
francs.  — Tresbien.  Enveloppez-la-moi.  Voici  l'argent.  — Voulez- 
vous  payer  a  la  caisse,  s'il  vous  plait,  madame  ?   Voila  le  caissier. 

—  Marie,  voici  l'argent.  Donne-le-lui. »  Marie  le  lui  a  donnd  et 
nous  sommes  sorties. 

Theme 

I  entered  a  department  store  yesterday  and  I  asked  a  store 
clerk :  M  Where  is  the  silk-goods  department  ? "  She  showed  it 
to  me.  And  what  beautiful  goods !  I  like  to  examine  them  all. 
The  (store)  clerk  shows  the  customers  the  goods.  When  the 
customers  have  chosen  the  goods  that  they  want,  she  wraps  them 
up  for  them,  saying  to  them,  "  Will  you  pay  at  the  cash  window, 
if  you  please  ? "  But  I  want  to  go  to  the  milliner's  now.  There 
she  is  opposite  this  store.  M  Here  I  am,  madam."  li  Show  me 
a  few  hats,  please."  "  Here  is  a  beautiful  hat  trimmed  with  ribbon 
and  flowers.  How  do  you  like  it  ? "  "I  do  not  find  it  to  my  taste." 
"  Is  it  too  cheap  ?  "  "I  think  so ;  where  are  the  winter  hats  (hats 
of  winter)  ? "  M  Here  they  are.  I  want  to  show  them  to  you." 
The  milliner  gives  them  to  me  and  I  choose  at  last  a  very  wide 
hat,  which  I  shall  take  back  if  I  do  not  like  it  any  more  on  arriving 
home.  The  milliner  accompanies  me  to  the  door.  M  There 's  a 
carriage  (which  is)  passing.  Do  you  want  it  ? "  "  Please."  I 
shall  arrive  home  early. 


198  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Oral 

i.  Quand  etes-vous  parties  faire  vos  emplettes  ?  2.  Etes-vous 
allees  seules  en  ville  ?  3.  Pourquoi  vous  a-t-elle  accompagne'es  ? 
4.  Comment  etes-vous  allees  en  ville?  5.  Chez  qui  etes-vous 
entrees?  6.  Que  (what)  vous  a  montre  la  modiste?  7.  Les  avez- 
vous  trouves  a  votre  gout  ?  8.  Votre  cousine  a-t-elle  achete  un 
chapeau  ?  9.  L'aime-t-elle  encore  ?  1  o.  Reportera-t-elle  le  chapeau 
chez  la  modiste  ?  1 1.  Ou  etes-vous  allees  ensuite  ?  1 2.  A  qui  votre 
mere  a-t-elle  parle  ?  13.  La  fllle  de  magasin  aime-t-elle  a  montrer 
les  etoffes  aux  clients  ?  1 4.  Aussitot  que  votre  mere  eut  choisi  une 
etoffe,  qu'a-t-elle  dit  a  la  nlle  de  magasin  ?  15.  Les  etoffes  de  soie 
sont-elles  bon  marche  ? 

Resume 

1.  My  brother  had  a  large  red  apple,  but  he  gave  it  to  me. 
2.  Will  you  sell  me  the  new  dress  which  you  bought  ?  3.  Where  is 
the  cash  window  ?  Show  it  to  me,  please.  4.  The  milliner  has 
many  beautiful  hats,  but  we  do  not  want  to  buy  them.  5.  I  shall 
pay  him  for  the  meat  if  he  brings  it  tomorrow.  6.  What  a  kind 
teacher!  He  never  gives  us  long  lessons.  7.  My  father  bought 
some  oranges  yesterday  and  gave  them  to  me.  8.  Are  teachers 
rich  ?  They  are  not.  9.  Do  you  not  say  so  too  ?  10.  My  parents  say 
that  they  do  not  want  to  give  it  to  him.  11.  His  father  says  that  he 
will  not  give  his  son  any  more  money.  1 2 .  My  sister  did  not  pay 
me  for  the  silk  that  I  bought  her  in  town.  13.  Did  the  shoes  which 
he  bought  her  cost  only  ten  francs  ?  1 4.  Do  you  know  the  mer- 
chant's name?  No,  sir,  he  did  not  tell  (it  to)  me.  15.  They  want 
to  sell  him  the  horses  which  they  bought ;  look  at  them.  1 6.  When 
you  buy  things  at  the  grocer's,  always  pay  him  for  them.  17.  If  my 
friend  had  found  any  flowers  in  the  woods,  he  would  have  brought 
them  to  me.  18.  Here  I  am ;  have  you  been  waiting  for  me  long? 
19.  Show  them  my  jewels,  but  do  not  give  them  to  them.  20.  Is 
the  house  that  he  has  bought  old  ?   I  do  not  think  so. 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS         199 
LESSON  TWENTY-NINE 

DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS 

177.  The  Disjunctive  Personal  Pronouns  are 

Singular  Plural 

First  Person  moi  nous 

Second  Person  toi  vous 

Third  Person  \  , 

\j.        elle  elles 

178.  Uses  of  the  Disjunctive.  The  general  use  of  the 
disjunctive  pronouns  has  already  been  defined  in  Sec.  172. 
They  are  employed  in  every  case  where  a  personal  pronoun 
is  needed  except  when  such  pronoun  is  the  subject,  direct 
object,  or  indirect  object  of  a  verb  expressed.  The  most 
frequent  occasions  for  their  use  are 

a.  As  the  object  of  prepositions. 

for  me,  pour  moi  behind  him,  derriere  lui 

b.  As  the  predicate  nominative  after  forms  of  etre. 

it  is  I,  Jest  moi  it  is  you,  Jest  vous 

it  is  he,  Jest  lui  it  is  she,  Jest  elle 

Note.  //,  in  sentences  like  the  above,  when  it  is  the  subject  of  Stre 
followed  by  a  noun  or  pronoun,  is  ce  (c'  before  a  vowel). 

c.  In  shortened  expressions  in  which  the  verb  is  omitted. 
He  is  more  active  than  they  (are).    //  est  plus  adif  qu'eux. 

d.  When  the  subject  or  object  (direct  or  indirect)  of  a 
verb  consists  of  two  pronouns  or  a  noun  and  a  pronoun. 
The  two  words  are  often  summed  up,  especially  when  they 
are  of  different  persons,  by  the  proper  conjunctive  pronoun. 


200  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

He  and  I  spoke  also.  Lui  et  moi,    nous  avons  parte 

aussi. 
He  and  she  spoke.  Lui  et  elle  ont  parlk. 

Henry  and  I  both  spoke.  Henri  et  moi,  nous  avons  parlk 

tons  les  deux. 
I  heard  thee  and  him.  Je  vous  ai  entendus,  toi  et  lui. 

I  gave  it  to  her  and  to  them.  Je  Vai  donne  a  elle  et  a  eux. 

179.  Intensive  Pronouns.  The  intensive  pronouns  are 
formed  by  adding  meme  (//.  memes),  even,  sarne,  to  the  dis- 
junctive pronouns.    Thus  : 

lui-meme,  himself  eux-memes,  themselves 

Je  l'ai  vendu  moi-meme.  /  sold  it  myself. 

VOCABULARY 

asseyez-vous,  sit  down,  seat  mais  oui,  yes  indeed 

yourself  messieurs,  gentlemen 

bien  entendu,  of  course  pres  de,  near  (to) 

boire,  to  drink  promis  {past  part.)  de,  prom- 

le  cigare,  the  cigar  ised  to 

fumer,  to  smoke  •     sans,  without 

fumer  la  pipe,  to  smoke  a  pipe  la  santS,  the  health 

heureux  (de),  happy  (to)  sur  moi,  about  (on)  me 

inviter  (a),  to  invite  (to)  voir,  to  see 

tous  (toutes)  les  deux,  both 

demander  a  quelqu'un  de,  to  ask  somebody  to 

Note.    Observe  the  construction  with  demander  : 

I  ask  him  for  it  (ask  it  to  him),/<?  le  lui  demande 
I  ask  him  for  the  book,/*?  lui  demande  le  livre 
I  ask  him  to  com&,je  lui  demande  de  venir 

Present  Indicative  of  venir,  to  come 
je  viens  nous  venons 

tu  viens  vous  venez 

il  vient  ils  viennent 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  201 


Drill 


EXERCISE 


i.  Continue  through  all  the  forms  of  the  pronouns  in 
heavy  type  — 

elle  est  partie  avant  moi  (toi,  etc.) 
il  est  plus  grand  que  moi 


2.  Express  in  French  — 

I  hear  him 
I  gave  him  a  cigar 
I  was  near  him" 
he  himself  is  here 

3.  Translate  into  French 

it  was  she 

he  and  she  are  here 

he  heard  me  himself 

did  he  not  lead  them  ? 

with  her 

more  happy  than  I 

it  will  be  he 

they  came  themselves 

I  saw  you  and  him 


her  father 
I  hear  her 
I  told  her 
she  is  coming  herself 


he  has  started 

in  order  to  hear  them 

you  and  I  will  find  them 

in  front  of  her 

she  asked  them  to  write 

sit  down,  please 

they   invited   me    to    see 

(Sec.  173,  Note  3) 
she  promised  to  see  him 


him 


4.  Supply  the  French  for  the  words  in  parentheses : 

Voulez-vous  donner  (me)  cinquante  francs  ?  Us  ne  sont  pas 
pour  (me)  mais  pour  (her)  et  pour  (them).  (It  is  she)  qui  a 
demande  (me  for  them).  Comme  je  n'avais  pas  (them)  sur  (me), 
j'ai  dit  (her)  d'attendre  et  que  je  demanderais  (you)  de  donner 
(them  to  me).  Je  donne  (them  to  you)  volontiers,  (to  you),  mais 
pas  (to  her),  et  je  dirais  bien  (her  so  myself).  Je  n'inviterai  pas 
(her)  (to)  aller  avec  (me)  ou  (to)  etre  pres  de  (me). 


202  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Model  tjne  Autre  Visite 

Aujourd'hui  j 'attends  une  visite.  Deux  de  mes  amis  m'ont 
promis  de  venir  chez  moi.  lis  sont  partis  de  chez  eux  il  y  a  deux 
mois,  et  ne  sont  revenus  que  la  semaine  derniere.  Je  les  ai  invites 
a  venir  me  voir  et  ils  seront  bientot  ici.  Les  voila  a  la  porte !  Ce 
sont  eux.  Mais  ils  ne  sont  pas  seuls.  N'est-ce  pas  Jean  avec  eux  ? 
Mais  oui.  «  Mes  amis,  je  suis  heureux  de  vous  voir.  —  J'ai  demande 
a  Jean  de  venir  avec  nous.  Nous  ne  sommes  pas  venus  sans  lui. 
—  Vous  avez  bien  fait  (done).  Asseyez-vous  la;  vous,  Charles, 
devant  moi,  et  Henri  a  cote  de  vous ;  Jean,  ici  pres  de  moi.  Je 
vais  vous  chercher  des  cigares.  Je  n'ai  rien  sur  moi.  Les  voici. 
Moi,  je  ne  fume  jamais  de  cigares,  mais  la  pipe.  Qui  veut  boire  une 
bonne  tasse  de  cafe  ?  —  Nous  tous,  bien  entendu.  —  Marie,  apporte 
des  tasses.  Moi,  j'apporterai  le  cafe'.  Jean,  qui  est  plus  grand  que 
nous,  aura  la  plus  grande  tasse.    Messieurs,  a  votre  bonne  sante. » 

Theme 

Yesterday  I  had  two  friends  at  my  house.  I  did  not  wait  for 
them  long  because  they  had  promised  to  come  early.  I  was  happy  to 
see  them.  It  is  (sont)  they  who  were  in  Europe  for  three  months. 
They  had  invited  me  to  go  with  them  and  I  have  been  wrong 
to  (de)  stay  here.  John,  Peter,  and  I  have  often  traveled  together. 
When  they  entered  the  parlor,  I  said  to  them,  "  Sit  down,"  and  I 
gave  them  some  cigars  that  I  had  about  me.  I  smoked  my  pipe. 
I  spoke  with  them  of  many  things.  Peter  likes  coffee,  and  Mary 
brought  some  very  large  cups  for  him,  and  for  us  too,  of  course. 
We  like  coffee  almost  as  much  as  he.  On  giving  them  their  cups, 
I  said,  "  To  your  good  health."  Peter  remained  at  my  house  an 
hour  and  then  he  went  home.  John  and  I  remained  yet  a  while 
(un  moment).  He  spoke  of  his  business ;  so  did  I  (I  too).  I  still 
had  a  cigar  about  me,  and  I  gave  it  to  him.  Then  he  went  out, 
but  without  me.  I  did  not  go  out  with  him.  My  wife  and  I  said  to 
him,  "  Good-by,  will  see  you  again  soon." 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS         203 

Oral 

1.  Qui  a  promis  de  venir  vous  voir?  2.  Quand  sont-ils  partis  de 
chez  eux  pour  1' Europe  ?  3.  Combien  de  temps  sont-ils  restes  en 
Europe  ?  4.  Depuis  quand  sont-ils  chez  eux  ?  5.  Qui  avez-vous 
invite'  a  venir  vous  voir?  6.  Sont-ce  (is  it)  eux  a  la  porte?  7.  Pour- 
quoi  Jean  est-il  venu  aussi  ?  8.  Aviez-vous  des  cigares  sur  vous 
quand  vos  amis  sont  arrives?  9.  Fumez-vous  ?  10.  Pour  qui 
Marie  a-t-elle  apporte'  des  tasses  ?  11.  N'a-t-elle  apporte'  que 
des  tasses  ?  12.  Qu 'avez-vous  dit  en  donnant  du  cafe  a  vos  amis  ? 
13.  Qui  est  a  cote  de  vous  en  classe  ?  14.  Le  tableau  est-il  derriere 
moi?    15.  Montrez-le-moi. 

Resume 

1.  Where  are  John's  sisters?  He  came  without  them.  2.  Are 
the  apples  which  you  found  for  me  or  for  him  ?  3.  It  was  he,  was 
it  not  ?  He  is  younger  than  I.  4.  Both  Henry  and  she  have  gone 
to  the  city.  5.  Punish  her  yourself  if  you  wish,  but  do  not  punish 
him.  6.  When  the  French  soldiers  came  to  the  city,  they  found 
the  German  army  in  front  of  them.  7.  First  John  and  I  started ; 
then  my  father  and  mother  came.  8.  You  and  Mary  arrived  home 
without  us,  didn't  you  ?  9.  We  found  you  and  them  behind  the 
house.  10.  Stay  near  me,  my  son,  if  you  are  afraid  of  dogs.  1 1.  I 
am  happy  to  see  you  and  Peter  this  morning.  12.  Many  men  died 
in  France  for  you  and  me.  13.  Jane,  here  are  newspapers  on  the 
table  ;  carry  them  to  your  father  yourself.  1 4.  The  general's  army 
came  with  him  from  Paris  yesterday,  and  he  is  going  now  to 
Orleans.  15.  Mr.  Lebon  brought  some  cigars  which  he  bought 
in  Paris.  16.  My  friend  is  coming  tomorrow,  and  she  will  stay 
for  a  week.  17.  Her  parents  say  that  they  are  going  to  the 
seashore  without  her.  18.  I  am  going  to  ask  him  to  read  it  to 
the  class  himself.  19.  Miss  Riou,  did  she  invite  you  to  accompany 
her  to  Europe?  20.  He  promised  it  to  the  boy  when  he  should 
ask  for  it. 


204  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

LESSON   THIRTY 

Y  AND  EN 

180.  The  Pronoun  Y  is  used  to  take  the  place  of  the 
preposition  a  (sometimes  en  and  dans)  and  an  object  pro- 
noun when  the  pronoun  refers  to  a  thing  (rarely  when  it 
refers  to  a  person).  This  occurs  with  all  the  various  mean- 
ings of  a,  to,  at,  in,  etc.    Thus  : 

a.  When  a  means  to. 

Repondez-vous  a  la  lettre  ?    J'y      Are  you  replying  to  the  letter  ? 
reponds.  I  am  replying  to  it. 

b.  When  a  means  at. 

J'etais   a    Paris;    mon    pere   y      I  was  at  Paris ;  my  father  lives 
demeure.  there  (at  it). 

c.  When  a  means  in. 

Etes-vous  a  l'ecole?   J'y  suis.  Are you  in  the  school ?  I  am  there 

(in  it). 
Note.    Observe  that  y  often  translates  there.    When  there  is  em- 
phatic, la  must  be  used ;  otherwise  y. 

I  am  here,  but  he  is  there.  Je  suis  ici,  mats  il  est  Id. 

I  was  at  home  and  he  was  there  too.      fetais  &  la  maison  et  il  y  itait  aussi. 

181.  The  Pronoun  En  is  used  to  take  the  place  of  the 
preposition  de  and  an  object  pronoun  when  the  pronoun 
refers  to  a  thing  (rarely  when  it  refers  to  a  person).  This 
occurs  with  all  the  various  meanings  of  de,  of  (including  the 
partitive  use),  from,  with,  etc.    Thus  : 

a.  When  de  means  of  (not  partitive). 

Voilk  le  livre ;  il  en  a  parle.  There  is  the  book ;  he  has  spoken 

of  it 


Y  AND  EN 


205 


Voila  mes  bijoux  ;  elle  en  parle. 

Avez-vous  mon  livre  ?    J 'en  ai 
besoin. 

b.  When  de  is  partitive. 
Avez-vous  de  Pargent  ?   J'en  ai. 

En  a-t-il  ? 
II  n'en  a  pas. 

Combien  de  livres   avez-vous  ? 
J'en  ai  deux. 

c.  When  de  means  from. 

Est-il  parti  de  la  maison  de  son 
ami  ?    II  en  est  venu  hier. 


There  are  my  jewels ;  she  speaks 

of  them. 
Have  you  my  book  ?    I  need  it 

(have  need  of  it). 


Have  you  any  money  ?   I  have 

some  (of  it). 
Has  he  any  (of  it)  ? 
He  has  none  (of  it). 
How  many  books  have  you  ?   I 

have  two  (of  them). 


Has  he  started  from  his  friend's 
house?    He  came  from  there 


(it)  yesterday. 

182.  Y  and  En  in  Verbal  Idioms.  Occasions  for  the  use 
of  y  and  en  are  found  after  certain  verbs  that  are  followed 
by  de  or  a.  Such  constructions  are  often  at  variance  with* 
the  English  idiom. 

Among  these  verbs  are 

jouir  de,  to  enjoy 

remplir  de,  to  fill  with 

remercier  de,  to  thank  for 

penser  a,  to  think  about,  of  (fix  the  mind  on) 

penser  de,  to  think  about,  of  (have  an  opinion  of) 

J'aime    le    cafe  ;    remplissez-en      /  like  coffee ;  fill  my  cup  with  it 

ma  tasse. 
Je  vous  en  remercie.  I  thank  you  for  it. 

J'aiune  longue  lecon  ;  j'y  pense.      I  have   a   long  lesson;    I  am 

thinking  about  it. 
Qu'en  pensez-vous  ?  What  do  you  think  about  it? 


206  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

183.  Position  of  Y  and  En.  Y  and  en  are  really  conjunc- 
tive object  pronouns,  and  precede  or  follow  the  verb  accord- 
ing to  the  principle  laid  down  in  Sec.  1 74  for  such  pronouns. 
If  used  with  other  object  pronouns,  y  and  en  follow.  If 
they  are  used  together,  y  precedes  en. 

Je  les  y  porterai.  I  shall  carry  them  there. 

Je  leur  en  apporterai.  I  shall  bring  them  some  (of  it). 

II  y  en  a  ici.  There  is  some  here. 

Vendez-en.  Sell  some. 

Note  i.  Before  y  and  en,  contrary  to  Sec.  174,  we  have  m'  and  t' 
instead  of  moi  and  toi. 

Donnez-m'en.  Give  me  some. 

Note  2.  The  rules  for  the  order  of  the  ordinary  elements  of  a  sen- 
tence may  be  summarized  thus  : 


subject 

ne 

me 

te 

se 

nous 

vous 

le 
la 
les 

lui 
leur 

y 

en 

verb 

or 

aux. 

pas 

adv. 

past 
part. 

Je  ne  le  lui  ai  pas  encore  donne. 

II  ne  nous  en  avait  pas  encore  donne. 


VOCABULARY 

l'addition/,  the  bill  penser,  to  think  (Sec.  182) 

de  bon  app&it,  with  a  good  ap-  placer,  to  place 

petite  le  poisson,  the  fish 

le  fromage,  the  cheese  le  pourboire,  the  tip 
le  garcon,  the  waiter,  boy  recu  (past part.),  received 

garder,  to  keep  remercier  (de),  to  thank  (for) 

jouir  (de),  to  enjoy  remplir  (de),  to  fill  (with) 

la  lettre,  the  letter  le  rosbif,  the  roast  beef 

le  menu,  the  menu  la  soupe,  the  soup 


Y  AND  EN 


207 


Present  Indicative  of  prendre,  to  take 
je  prends  nous  prenons 

tu  prends  vous  prenez 

il  prend  ils  prennent 


Drill 

1.  Translate  into  French - 

have  you  any  pens  ? 

I  have  enough  (of  them) 

I  have  ten 

give  me  two 

give  me  some 

he  was  thinking  of  me 

I  was  speaking  of  him 

give  her  some . 

do  not  give  him  any 

there  are  some 

I  shall  be  there 

you  have  some  letters,  reply  to 

them 
he  has  two  brothers,  I  have  one 


EXERCISE 


bring  the  fruit  here,  not  there 

he  is  going  to  her 

is  there  none  ? 

I  give  some  to  him 

he  carried  them  there 

look  for  some 

bring  me  some 

do  not  bring  me  any 

I  will  fill  the  bottle  with  it 

there  was  some 

there  was  some  there 

I  replied  to  him 

I  thank  you  for  it 

I  enjoy  summer 


2.  Answer  the  following,  using  en  or  y  in  each  reply : 


A-t-elle  des  robes  ? 
Pensez-vous  a  la  neige  ? 
Avons-nous  peur  des  chiens  ? 
Pourquoi  aimez-vous  votre  ville  ? 
Repondez-vous  a  mes  lettres  ? 


Chantait-elle  chez  elle  ? 
Demeurait-il  a  Londres  ? 
Combien  d'yeux  avez-vous  ? 
Sont-elles  parties  du  chateau  ? 
Jouent-ils  a  la  campagne  ? 


Inflect  through  the  tenses  — 
il  y  en  a 

n'y  en  a-t-il  pas  ? 
il  n'y  en  a  pas. 


208  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

4.  Supply  y,  en,  or  1&,  as  the  meaning  requires  : 

Ce  restaurant,  que  pensez-vous  ?   £tes-vous  jamais 

venu  ?    Je  viens  souvent.    Void  une  table ;    mettons-nous 

Oil  est  le  menu?    — —  voila  un.    II  etait  ,  sous 

l'assiette.    Donnez  me un.    Voila  du  potage ;  prenez 

Remplissez votre  assiette.    Moi,  je  ne veux  pas.    Ne  me 

donnez  pas.    Et  la  salade  ?   Je pense. 

Model  Au  Restaurant 

Je  dine  au  restaurant  avec  mon  ami  quand  lui  et  moi  n'avons 
pas  le  temps  de  retourner  chez  nous.  II  y  en  a  un  pres  d'ici. 
«  Entrons-y.  —  J 'en  suis  bien  content  parce  que  j'ai  faim.  —  Cette 
table  est  trop  petite.  —  En  voila  une  plus  grande  pres  de  la 
fenetre.  Allons-y.  —  Garcon,  donnez-moi  le  menu. »  Le  garcon 
nous  le  donne.  «  Le  voici,  messieurs. »  Nous  le  lisons.  Le  garcon 
nous  apporte  des  assiettes,  des  verres,  des  cuillers,  des  fourchettes 
et  des  couteaux,  qu'il  place  devant  nous  sur  la  table.  II  y  place 
aussi  des  serviettes.     « Qui  est  ce  monsieur  en  face  de  nous  ? 

—  Monsieur  Lenoir.  II  est  alle  a  Paris  cette  anne'e.  Son  pere  y 
demeure.  —  Depuis  quand  est-il  revenu  d'Europe  ?  —  II  en  est 
revenu  le  mois  dernier.    Voici  le  menu.    —  Choisissez  vous-meme. 

—  De  la  soupe  ?  qu'en  pensez-vous  ?  II  n'y  a  que  du  rosbif  et  du 
veau.  —  Du  rosbif  pour  moi.  En  voulez-vous  aussi  ?  —  Avec  plaisir. 

—  Garcon,  un  peu  de  poisson,  du  rosbif  et  des  pommes  de  terre.  Y 
a-t-il  de  la  salade  ?  - —  Oui,  monsieur,  il  y  en  a.  —  Apportez-nous-en 
alors.  —  Et  le  dessert,  Charles  ?  —  J'y  pense.  Nous  en  voulons  un 
peu,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Le  fromage  est-il  sur  le  menu  ?  Ah !  oui,  il  y 
est.  —  Garcon,  n'en  apportez  que  pour  monsieur.  —  Et  le  cafe  noir  ? 

—  Surement.  — J'ai  dine  de  bon  appetit.  Garcon,  l'addition.  — 
Charles,  j'ai  de  l'argent.  En  avez-vous  ?  —  Oui,  mais  je  n'en  aurai 
peut-etre  pas  assez.  —  En  voici.  —  Non,  gardez  votre  argent.  Je 
n'en  ai  pas  besoin.  J 'en  ai  assez.  Donnerons-nous  un  pourboire 
au  garcon  ?   —  Oui,  donnons-lui-en  un. » 


Y  AND  EN  209 


GRAND  RESTAURANT  LEBLOND 

Service  a  la  carte  a  toute  heure 

Dejeuners  et  diners  Dejeuners  et  diners 

a  2fr.  jo  a  jfr.  50 

Potage  ou  hors-d'oeuvre  Potage  ou  hors-d'oeuvre 

Deux  plats  au  choix  Deux  plats  au  choix 

Legume  ou  poisson  Deux  legumes  ou  poisson 

Salade  ou  dessert  Salade  et  dessert 

£  bouteille  de  vin  £  bouteille  de  vin 

Pain  a  discretion 

MENU  DU  JOUR 

Potages 

Consomme  de  volaille  Puree  de  haricots  aux  croutons 

Hors-d'oeuvre 
Huitres  d'Ostende  en  coquille  Saucisson  de  Lyon  Celeri 

Poisson 
Maquereau  frais  a  la  maitre  d'hotel  Homard  mayonnaise 

Entries 

Bceuf,  sauce  tomate     Navarin  de  mouton      Pigeon  aux  petits  pois 

CEufs  a  la  coque  Omelette  aux  champignons 

Rdtis 

Veau  aux  carottes        Bceuf  braise  a  la  jardiniere        Rosbif  au  jus 

Poulet,  pommes  nouvelles 

Legumes 

Pommes  de  terre  en  robe  de  chambre       Choux-fleurs,  sauce  blanche 

Tomates  farcies 

Salade 

Laitue,  sauce  mayonnaise        Chicoree  frisee        Tomates  au  persil 

Dessert 
Creme  fouettee  aux  fruits  Compote  de  pommes 

Boissons 
Vin  Biere  (voir  liste)  Cafe  The 


210  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Theme 

"  Where  is  there  a  good  restaurant  ?  I  am  hungry."  M  There 
are  some  everywhere.  There  is  one.  I  have  been  dining  there 
for  a  long  time.  Let  us  go  in.  Here  is  a  table."  "  Is  there  not 
a  smaller  one  ? "  "  Oh !  yes.  There 's  one  near  the  window. 
We  shall  like  that  place  better.  Let  us  go  there.  Where  is  the 
menu  ? "  "  There  {emphatic)  are  several  of  them.  Give  me  one, 
please.  WTe  are  going  to  dine  well.  Don't  you  want  a  little  soup  ? 
There  is  your  plate.  Pass  it  to  me."  ■*  Don't  give  me  too  much 
of  it,  please.  But  I  have  no  spoon.  Oh !  yes,  here  is  one  beside 
my  fork.  This  roastbeef  is  very  good/  What  do  you  think  of  it  ?  " 
"  Very  good."  "  Do  you  want  some  more  ? "  M  No,  thank  you, 
I  do  not  want  any  more,  I  have  enough.  I  should  like  some 
tea.  Is  there  any  green  (tea)  ? "  w  Yes,  there  is.  Waiter,  bring 
us  some."  "  I  like  tea.  Fill  my  cup  with  it."  w  What  do  you 
think  of  this  green  tea?  There  is  cheese.  Do  you  want  any?" 
"If  you  please."  "Waiter,  cheese  and  the  coffee."  "Do  you 
give  the  waiters  tips  here?"  "No,  I  never  give  them  any.  I  have 
dined  with  a  good  appetite.  Let  us  return  home.  Do  you  still 
live  in  Thiers  Street  (la  rue  Thiers)  ? "  "  Why  (mais)  yes,  I  still 
live  there.    I  have  been  there  for  ten  years." 

Oral 

i.  Dinez-vous  toujours  chez  vous  ?  2.  Entrez-vous  souvent  dans 
un  restaurant  ?  3.  Que  demandez-vous  au  garcon  ?  4.  Quels  sont 
les  choses  que  le  garcon  place  sur  la  table?  5.  Ou  les  place-t-il? 
6.  Nommez  deux  sortes  de  viande.  7.  Qu'aimez-vous  le  mieux  ? 
8.  Comment  les  Francais  finissent-ils  leur  diner  ?  9.  Que  demandez- 
vous  au  garcon  apres  le  diner  ?  1  o.  Que  lui  donnez-vous  ?  1 1 .  Dinez- 
vous  gendralement  de  bon  appe'tit?  12.  Pensez-vous  a  vos  lecons 
quand  vous  etes  chez  vous  ?  13.  Que  pensez-vous  de  cette  lecon  ? 
14.  Avez-vous  de  l'argent  sur  vous?  15.  Re'pondez-vous  a  toutes 
les  questions  du  maitre  ? 


POSSESSIVES  211 

Resume 

i .  Have  you  any  good  fruit  ?  Yes,  I  have  some.  2.  Give  me  some, 
but  do  not  give  him  any.  3.  If  you  have  any  fresh  water,  give  me 
a  glass  of  it.  4.  Don't  give  me  any  flowers ;  I  have  enough,  keep 
some  for  Mary.  5.  Your  letter  arrived  last  night  and  I  answered  it 
this  morning.  6.  I  thought  of  you  often  when  you  were  studying 
in  Europe.  7.  If  you  wish  coffee,  the  waiter  will  fill  your  cup  with  it. 
8.  Are  you  enjoying  your  wealth  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  have  been  enjoying 
it  for  a  long  time.  9.  If  my  son  does  not  take  any,  I  will  take  some 
myself.  10.  I  want  to  thank  my  father  for  the  oranges  that  he 
bought  me.  1 1 .  He  says  that  he  has  only  a  little  meat,  and  that  he 
will  not  sell  any  to  his  customers.  12.  When  I  go  into  a  restaurant, 
I  always  take  some  fish  if  there  is  any.  13.  Boy,  bring  me  a  menu, 
please.  Yes,  sir,  here  is  one.  1 4.  If  you  have  no  good  wood  at 
home,  I  will  bring  you  some  there.  15.  If  you  have  too  many 
horses,  sell  me  one.  16.  His  father  is  coming  to  see  him,  but  he  is 
not  going  to  give  him  any  money.  17.  If  you  need  hats  when  you 
come  to  town,  I  will  show  you  some.  18.  If  there  are  no  automo- 
biles in  your  city,  do  not  ask  me  to  go  there.  19.  What  beautiful 
horses!  What  do  you  think  of  them?  20.  How  many  cousins  do 
you  have  ?    I  have  two,  and  my  sister,  of  course,  has  as  many. 


LESSON  THIRTY-ONE 

POSSESSIVES 

184.  Possessive  Adjectives  and  Pronouns.  In  French,  as 
in  English,  there  are  both  adjectives  and  pronouns  used 
to  denote  possession.  Possessive  adjectives  are  used  to 
limit  an  expressed  noun;  possessive  pronouns  are  used  to 
take  the  place  of  a  noun  that  is. omitted.    Thus: 

my  (adj.)  book  the  book  is  mine  (flron.) 


212  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

185.  The  Possessive  Adjectives  are 

Singular  Plural 

M. 
(First  Person      mon 
Sing.  J  Second  Person    ton 


F. 

M.   AND   F. 

ma 

mes 

my 

ta 

tes 

thy 

sa 

ses 

his,  her,  its 

notre 

nos 

our 

votre 

vos 

your 

leur 

leurs 

their 

I  Third  Person  son 

(First  Person  notre 

Pl.     J  Second  Person  votre 

\Third  Person  leur 

Note.  The  distinction  between  ton  and  votre  corresponds  to  that 
between  tu  and  vous.    See  Sec.  142. 

186.  Possessive  Repeated.  A  possessive  adjective  modi- 
fying more  than  one  noun  is  repeated  before  each. 

my  coat  and  vest,  mon  habit  et  mon  gilet 

187.  Possessive  before  Vowels.  The  feminine  forms  ma, 
ta,  sa  cannot  stand  before  a  vowel  or  mute  h ;  the  forms 
mon,  ton,  son  are  used  instead. 

mon  ecole,  my  school 

188.  Article  for  Possessive.  The  definite  article  is  com- 
monly used  in  French,  instead  of  a  possessive  adjective, 
with  predicate  nouns  denoting  the  parts  of  the  body  or 
something  closely  connected  with  it.  When  the  meaning 
would  not  be  clear,  an  indirect  object  pronoun  referring  to 
the  owner  is  used  in  addition  to  the  article. 

He  is  closing  his  eyes.  Ilferme  lesyeux. 

He  lost  his  left  arm.  77  a  perdu  le  bras  gauche. 

The  dog  bit  his  arm.  Le  chien  lui  a  mordu  le  bras. 

He  lost  his  life.  II  a  perdu  la  vie. 

(With)  his  hand  in  his  pocket,      La  main  dans  lapoche,  il  y  etait 
he  sat  there.  assis. 


POSSESSIVES 


213 


Note.    A  similar  construction,  in  which  the  definite  article  is  used 
after  avoir  in  describing  parts  of  the  body,  is  illustrated  by  the  following: 

She  has  a  small  hand.  Elle  a  la  main  petite. 

You  have  blue  eyes.  Vous  avez  les  yeux  bleus. 

189.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  are 


Singular 

Plural 

M. 

F. 

M. 

F. 

f  1.  le  mien 

la  mienne 

les  miens 

les  miennes 

mine 

Sing.  J  2.  le  tien 

la  tienne 

les  tiens 

les  tiennes 

thine 

[3.  le  sien 

la  sienne 

les  siens 

les  siennes 

his,  hers 

f  1.  le  notre 

la  notre 

les  notres 

les  notres 

ours 

Pl.     J  2.  le  votre 

la  votre 

les  votres 

les  votres 

yours 

[3.  le  leur 

la  leur 

les  leurs 

les  leurs 

theirs 

His  book  and  mine. 

Son  livre  et  le  mien. 

Your  house  is  red, 

his  is  white. 

Votre  maison  est  rouge^ 
est  blanche. 

la  sienne 

190.  Ownership.    After  the  verb  etre,  ownership  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  preposition  a  with  a  disjunctive  pronoun. 
The  cow  is  mine  (belongs  to  me).      La  vache  est  a  moi. 

Note.  The  distinction  between  the  use  of  a  with  the  disjunctive  and 
that  of  the  possessive  to  express  possession  is  important.  The  former 
expresses  simple  ownership ;  the  latter  distinguishes  one  from  another. 
For  example,  with  the  question  whose  cow  is  it  ?  the  answer,  the  cow 
is  mine,  is  la  vache  est  a  moi.  V/hen  the  question  is  which  cow  is 
mine  ?  the  answer,  the  red  cow  is  mine,  is  la  vache  rouge  est  la  mienne. 

191.  Agreement  of  Possessives.  Note  that  the  possessives 
agree  with  the  thing  possessed  and  not  with  the  possessor. 

Son  jardin  may  be  translated  her  gardai  as  well  as  his  garden, 
son,  not  sa,  being  used  because  jardin  is  masculine;  while  to  trans- 
late his  pen,  we  must  say  sa  plume  because  plume  is  feminine. 
Also,  mon  livre  et  le  sien,  my  book  and  hers ;  not  la  sienne,  because 
livre  is  masculine. 


214 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


VOCABULARY 


le  bal,  the  ball 

le  bas,  the  stocking 

le  bouton,  the  button 

le  chapelier,  the  hatter 

la  chaussette,  the  sock 

la  chemise,  the  shirt 

le  costume,  the  suit 

la  couturiere,  the  dressmaker 

la  cravate,  the  necktie 

la  dentelle,  the  lace 

double*  de,  lined  with 
le  faux-col,  the  collar 
le  feutre,  the  felt 
le  gilet,  the  vest 

Phabit  m.,  the  dress  coat 
la  jaquette,  the  coat  (woman's) 


la  jupe,  the  skirt 
la  laine,  the  wool 
la  manche,  the  sleeve 
la  manchette,  the  cuff 
le  manteau,  the  cloak 

meme,  same 
le  mouchoir,  the  handkerchief 
de  la  nuit,  the  night  long 
le  pantalon,  the  trousers 

perdre,  to  lose 
la  poche,  the  pocke 

recommencer,  to  begin  again 
le  tailleur,  the  tailor 
la  tete,  the  head 
la  toile,  the  linen 
le  veston,  the  coat 


le  costume  de  ville,  the  street  suit 


Present  Indicative  of  mettre,  to  put,  put  on 


je  mets 
tu  mets 
il  met 


nous  mettons 
vous  mettez 
ils  mettent 


Note.  En  is  used  to  express  material :  a  silk  skirt,  une  jupe  en  soie ; 
the  skirt  is  (of)  silk,  la  jupe  est  en  soie.    De  sometimes  replaces  en. 


Drin  EXERCISE 

i .  Prefix  to  the  nouns  below  the  proper  forms  for  (a)  his, 
(b)  our,  (c)  their,  (d)  her: 

mere  bras  amies 

dcole  yeux  cheveux 


POSSESSiVES  21$ 

2.  Insert  in  the  blanks  below  the  proper  form  for 
{a)  yours,  {b)  hers,  (c)  theirs,  (d)  his,  (e)  ours : 

mes  livres  et ma  plume  et 

mes  plumes  et mon  cheval  et 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

thy  school  your  mother 

your  sisters  did  he  lose  his  life  ? 

this  dog  is  mine  the   black   horse   is   mine,   the 

he  has  black  hair  white  horse  is  yours 

their  father  and  mother  his  mother 

my  house  is  black,  his  is  white       her  father 

your  best  pupils  their  fathers 

close  your  book  his  friend  and  ours 

do  not  close  your  eyes  our  friends 

4.  Continue  the  following  through  all  the  forms  of  the 
pronouns  in  heavy  type : 

j'ai  perdu  la  mienne  (la  tienne,  etc.) 

j'aime  mon  (ton,  etc.)  pere 

les  miennes  sont  utiles 

ce  lit  est  meilleur  que  le  mien 

je  mets  un  chapeau  de  feutre 

Model  LES  Vetements 

Je  suis  alle  chez  mon  tailleur  chercher  le  costume  qu'il  m'a  fait. 
Le  veston  de  mon  costume  a  deux  boutons.  II  est  double.  J'ai  un 
gilet  que  je  porte  quand  je  n'ai  pas  assez  chaud.  II  n'a  pas  de 
manches.  Mon  pantalon  n'est  pas  si  large  que  le  votre.  J'ai 
un  mouchoir  dans  la  poche  de  mon  pantalon.  Mon  mouchoir,  mon 
faux-col  et  les  manchettes  de  ma  chemise  sont  en  toile.  Votre 
faux-col  est  plus  haut  que  le  mien.  Que  pensez-vous  de  ma 
cravate  ?   La  mienne  est  plus  sombre  que  la  votre,  mais  je  l'aime 


2i6  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

mieux.  Le  chapeau  que  j'ai  sur  la  tete  est  en  feutre.  J 'en  porte 
toujours  un  en  feutre  en  hiver.  Je  l'ai  achete  chez  le  meme 
chapelier  ou  mon  frere  a  achete  le  sien.  Mon  frere  va  au  bal  ce 
soir,  et  il  ne  fermera  pas  les  yeux  de  la  nuit.  II  prepare  son  habit. 
Le  pardessus  qui  est  sur  ce  fauteuil  est  a  lui.  Le  mien  est  a  cote 
du  sien  sur  la  chaise  avec  les  chaussettes  que  j'ai  achete'es  ce 
matin.  Ma  sceur,  qui  va  au  bal  avec  lui,  a  une  robe  de  soie  garnie 
de  dentelle.  La  couturiere  qui  la  lui  a  faite  lui  a  aussi  fait  son 
dernier  costume  de  ville.  La  jupe  et  la  jaquette  de  son  costume 
sont  en  laine.  Ce  chapeau  n'est  pas  a  elle.  II  est  a  ma  mere.  Le 
sien  est  encore  plus  beau.  Dans  son  sac  a  cote  de  son  manteau 
double  de  soie  sont  les  bas  et  les  gants  qu'elle  portera  ce  soir. 

Theme 

In  winter  we  wear  thicker  clothes  than  in  summer,  and  if  we  go 
into  the  street  we  wear  an  overcoat.  Mine  is  very  heavy.  The 
suit  which  I  am  wearing  is  of  a  dark  color.  My  tailor,  who  made  it, 
also  made  one  for  my  brother.  His  is  not  finished  yet.  It  will  be 
finished  when  his  school  begins  again.  My  coat  has  short  sleeves. 
I  haven't  long  arms.  They  are  not  so  long  as  yours.  Your  coat  is 
lined  and  has  three  buttons.  Mine  has  only  two.  I  have  a  vest,  but 
I  never  wear  it.  My  trousers  are  of  the  same  goods  as  yours,  but 
mine  are  not  so  wide.  This  handkerchief  is  mine.  It  is  of  linen  like 
my  collar  and  the  cuffs  of  my  shirt.  Yours  is  of  silk.  It  is  prettier 
than  mine.  When  I  go  to  the  ball,  I  wear  a  dress  coat.  My  sister 
went  down  town  with  your  mother  this  morning.  She  bought  socks 
for  me,  and  a  silk  dress  trimmed  with  lace  for  herself  (elle-meme). 
That  street  dress  there  is  hers.  Her  dressmaker  made  her  the  skirt 
and  the  coat.    Her  woolen  cloak  lined  with  silk  is  on  the  chair. 

Oral 

i.  Qui  vous  a  fait  votre  costume?  2.  Combien  de  boutons  a 
votre  veston  ?  3.  Portez-vous  un  gilet  ?  4.  Mon  pantalon  est  gris. 
De  quelle  couleur  est  le  votre?    5.  Ou  est  mon  mouchoir?    6.  La 


POSSESSIVES 


217 


chemise  du  maitre  est- 
elle  en  soie  ?  7.  Votre 
faux-col  est-il  plus  haut 
que  le  mien  ?  8.  Votre 
robe  est-elle  moins 
longue  que  la  mienne  ? 
9.  Que  pensez-vous  de 
ma  cravate  ?  1  o.  Quel 
chapeau  portez-vous  en 
hiver?  11.  Ou  avez- 
vous  achete  votre  cha- 
peau? 12.  Portez-vous 
un  habit  quand  vous 
allez  dans  les  maga- 
sins?  13.  Quelle  sorte 
de  robe  votre  sceur 
porte-t-elle      au     bal  ? 

14.  Le  tailleur  a-t-il 
fait  votre  costume  de 
ville,  mademoiselle  X  ? 

15.  Ce  livre  est-il  a 
vous  ? 

Resume 

1.  My  sister  is  a 
teacher;  she  closed  her 
school  a  week  ago. 
2.  Your  cousin  is  not 
studious,  but  her  father 
never  wants  to  punish 
her.  3.  John  gave  me 
this  necktie ;  where  is 
yours?    It   is   on   the 


TYPE  DE   BRETON 

La  Bretagne,  province  du  nord-ouest  de  la 
France,  fait  saillie  dans  l'ocean  Atlantique. 
La  race  bretonne  retient  ses  habitudes  tradi- 
tionnelles  de  penser,  de  vivre  et  de  s'habiller 
plus  religieusement  que  toute  autre  partie  de 
la  France.  «  FJeve  sur  une  terre  ingrate  qui 
produit  a  peine  ce  dont  il  a  besoin  pour  se 
nourrir,  habitue  sur  mer  a  affronter  le  danger, 
le  Breton  vit  dans  la  pauvrete,  dans  la  crainte 
et  dans  la  pensee  de  la  mort.  II  n'a  que  deux 
moyens  pour  echapper  a  la  dure  realite  :  la 
religion  et  le  monde  de  l'imagination.  Aussi 
voyons-nous  que  cette  population  qui  est  la 
plus  pauvre  de  la  France  est  en  meme  temps  la 
plus  religieuse  et  l'une  des  mieux  douees  pour 
la  poesie.  La  Bretagne  a  ete  de  tous  les  temps 
la  terre  des  legendes.  »    (F.  Le  Bourgeois) 


21 8  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

table.  4.  My  arms  are  short,  but  they  are  longer  than  yours. 
5.  Both  Charles  and  I  have  new  socks ;  his  are  white  but  mine 
are  black.  6.  There  are  two  dresses  in  the  room ;  the  green  one 
is  mine  and  the  blue  one  is  my  mother's.  7.  Peter  has  woolen 
shirts,  but  he  always  wears  a  silk  one  in  summer.  8.  My  automo- 
bile, yours,  and  his  are  in  front  of  my  house.  9.  The  hat  which  my 
brother  has  in  his  hand  is  felt,  but  his  son  has  a  woolen  one. 
10.  A  friend  has  invited  him  to  the  ball,  and  he  will  not  close  his 
eyes  the  night  long.  11.  His  aunt  has  already  returned  from 
France,  but  mine  arrives  from  there  tomorrow.  12.  My  teacher 
and  his  wife  went  to  Europe  last  week  and  will  remain  there  a 
year.  13.  My  two  brothers  went  to  (the)  war,  and  one  of  them  lost 
his  life  in  it.  14.  John  is  putting  on  his  dress  coat  and  is  going 
down  town  to  see  his  friend.  15.  Gentlemen,  take  off  your  over- 
coats and  stay  an  hour  with  us.  16.  We  are  putting  on  our  cuffs 
and  soon  we  shall  be  ready.  17.  When  I  put  money  in  my  pocket, 
I  always  lose  a  little  during  the  day.  18.  This  hat  is  his,  but  mine 
is  beside  yours  on  the  table.  19.  Is  this  pen  hers?  It  is  neither 
hers  nor  yours  ;  it  is  mine.  20.  Neither  my  cuffs  nor  my  new  shirt 
are  here ;  I  do  not  want  to  go  to  the  ball. 

Jeux  d'Esprit 

Cinq  voyelles,  une  consonne, 

En  franc,ais  composent  mon  ncm  ; 

Et  je  porte  sur  ma  personne 

De  quoi  l'ecrire  sans  crayon.  (Oiseau.) 

Si  mon  premier  est  precieux, 
Mon  dernier  habite  les  cieux, 
Et  mon  tout  est  delicieux.  (Or-ange.)  - 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XXVIII-XXXI  219 

REVIEW 

(Lessons  Twenty-Eight  to  Thirty-One) 
A.  General  Drill 

1.  Give  the  list  of  (a)  conjunctive  direct  object  pronouns; 
(b)  conjunctive  indirect  object  pronouns  ;  (c)  disjunctive  pro- 
nouns ;  (d)  intensive  pronouns. 

2.  Give  the  rule  for  the  position  of  conjunctive  object 
pronouns  (a)  with  reference  to  the  verb ;  (b)  with  reference 
to  each  other. 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

have  you  fallen,  my  son  ?  sell  it  to  him 

have  you  fallen,  my  friend  ?  do  not  sell  it  to  him 

have  you  fallen,  my  friends  ?  he  sold  them  to  them 

he  is  punishing  them  he  did  not  sell  them  to  me 

he  is  selling  them  a  horse  if  you  have  the  newspaper,  bring 

will  they  like  it  ?  it  with  you 

do  not  sell  them  are  you  his  sister  ?  I  am  not 

they  did  not  see  her  will  he  punish  them  ?  I  think  so 

sell  it  to  me  is  she  pretty  ?  he  thinks  so 

do  not  sell  it  to  me  do  they  not  want  me  ? 

will  you  sell  it  to  me  ?  will  you  give  them  to  me  ? 

will  he  sell  it  to  me  ?  shall  you  give  it  to  her  ? 

4.  Give  four  French  sentences,  illustrating  as  many  uses 
of  disjunctive  pronouns. 

5.  Translate  into  French  — 

I  shall  visit  him  I  saw  you  and  them 

I  shall  visit  with  him  she  found  it  herself 

he  started  without  me  before  tomorrow 

it  is  I  before  the  palace 


220  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

it  was  not  he  near  the  garden 

he  is  taller  than  I  I  shall  ask  the  tailor  for  it 

she  and  I  entered  the  room  I  asked  her  for  it 

6.  Explain  the  exact  nature  of  en  and  of  y. 

7.  Translate  into  French  — 

there  is  my  farm  I  have  some  chairs 

are  you  going  there  ?  have  you  any  ? 

were  you  speaking  of  it  ?  has  he  none  ? 

were  you  not  thinking  of  it  ?  how  many  do  you  want  ? 

there  's  my  uncle  fill  the  cart  with  them 

were  you  speaking  of  him  ?  there  are  some  books  there 

are  you  going  to  him  ?  bring  some,  bring  the  best 

will  you  give  it  to  him  ?  carry  some  to  them  there 

8.  Give  a  complete  list  (a)  of  possessive  adjectives;  (b)  of 
possessive  pronouns. 

9.  Give  French  sentences  containing  la  leur ;  les  siennes ; 
les  votres  ;  notre  ;  notre. 

10.  Translate  into  French  — 

his  house  his  book  and  theirs 

her  father'  thy  father  and  brother 

my  school  he  will  save  her  life 

your  best  friend  I  closed  my  eyes 

the  book  is  mine  they  have  black  eyes 

this  book  is  mine  you  have  a  long  arm 

1 1 .  Supply  the  French  for  the  words  in  parentheses : 
(My)  tailleur,  (who)  demeure  pres  de  (my)  ecole,  a  fait  (me)  un 

costume.  (My)  veston  a  plus  de  poches  que  (yours),  mais  (mine) 
sont  plus  petites.  II  a  fait  (it  for  me)  cOmme  j'avais  demande 
(him  to).  Charles  a  un  neuf  (one).  (His)  est  different  de  (mine). 
(John's)  costumes  sont  differents  aussi.  (His)  sceur  a  perdu  (her) 
vie.    II  aimait  (her)  et  a  donne  (her)  (her)  beaux  bijoux. 


DEMONSTRATIVES  22 1 


B.  Translate  into  French 


i.  Give  it  to  me,  but  do  not  give  any  to  him.  2.  He  and  I 
studied  our  lesson  two  hours  this  morning.  3.  If  you  had  found 
the  watch  which  I  had  lost,  I  should  have  been  very  happy. 
4.  Did  you  send  any  money  to  my  niece's  friend  ?  5.  If  they  had 
any,  they  would  give  me  a  little.  6.  I  heard  you  and  John  in  the 
garden  when  I  entered.  7.  If  you  have  too  many  dogs,  give  me 
one.  8.  I  am  going  to  him,  but  I  am  not  going  to  give  much  to 
him.  9.  When  you  arrive  at  the  city  and  need  some  good  fruit,  I 
will  bring  you  some.  10.  Is  the  sea  always  blue  there?  I  do  not 
think  so.  11.  He  gave  her  the  silk  which  I  sold  him.  12.  They 
bought  it  for  us,  but  we  gave  it  back  to  them.  13.  I  used  to  have  only 
a  few  good  friends  in  France,  but  now  I  have  many.  14.  Bring  it 
back  to  me  when  you  have  finished  it.  15.  Their  horses,  his,  and 
yours  too,  all  used  to  be  mine.  16.  That  fruit  is  good,  but  it  is  not 
mine ;  it  is  theirs.  17.  I  am  thinking  about  my  new  hat;  what  do 
you  think  of  it?    18.  She  had  on  her  head  some  red  leaves. 


LESSON  THIRTY-TWO 

DEMONSTRATIVES 

192.  Demonstratives  Defined.  Words  used  closely  to 
define  or  point  out  an  object,  such  as  this  and  these  in 
English,  are  called  demonstratives.  There  are  two  kinds 
of  demonstratives,  adjectives  and  pronouns.  The  former 
are  used  with  a  noun  expressed ;  the  latter  to  take  the 
place  of  a  noun  omitted. 

193.  The  Demonstrative  Adjectives  are 

Singular  Plural 

Masculine         ce  (cet  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute)#  ces 

Feminine  cette  ces 


222  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

ce  gant,  this  (or  that)  glove  ces  gants,  these  (or  those)  gloves 

cet  habit,  this  (or  that)  coat  ces  habits,  these  (or  those)  coats 

cette  plume,  this  (or  that)  pen         ces  plumes,  these  (or  tfrose)  /£#.$• 

194.  Suffixes  ci  and  /a.  Special  emphasis  upon  the 
demonstrative  adjective  is  expressed  by  the  adverbs  ci,  here, 
and  la,  there,  placed  after  the  modified  noun  and  connected 
with  it  by  a  hyphen.  Such  emphasis  is  especially  involved 
in  contrasts.  This  usage  serves  to  distinguish  this  from  that 
when  such  distinction  is  necessary. 

Cet  homme-ci  est  grand,  mais  ces      This  man  is  tall,  but  those  boys 
garcons-la  ne  sont  pas  grands.  are  not  tall. 

195.  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are 

Singular  Plural 

Masculine         celui,  this,  that  ,       ceux,  these,  those 

Feminine  celle,  this,  that  celles,  these,  those 

196.  Uses  of  Demonstrative  Pronouns.  Demonstrative 
pronouns,  used,  as  stated  above,  without  a  noun,  are  always 
followed  by  some  defining  construction.    This  may  be 

a.  A  possessive  phrase  introduced  by  de. 

ma  serviette  et  celle  de  Marie  my  napkin  and  Mary's  (that  of 

Mary) 

b.  A  relative  clause.  In  this  use  the  demonstrative  pro- 
nouns not  only  represent  the  English  demonstratives,  that, 
the  one,  those,  etc.,  but  also  the  English  third  personal  pro- 
nouns, he,  him,  she,  her,  they,  a  conjunctive  pronoun  never 
being  used  as  the  antecedent  of  a  relative. 

Ma  plume  est  bonne,  mais  celle      My  pen  is  good,  but  that  {the  one) 

que  vous  avez  est  meilleure.  which  you  have  is  better. 

Celui  qui  est  riche  est  heureux.       He  (the  one)  who  is  rich  is  happy. 


DEMONSTRATIVES  223 

Ceux  qui  sont  beaux  ne   sont      Those  (the  ones)  who  are  beauti- 
es toujours  bons.  ful  are  not  always  good. 
J'aime  celle  que  vous  punissez.        /  love  her  (the  one)  whom  you 

are  punishing. 

c.  The  suffixes  -ci  and  -la,  forming  celui-ci  {this,  this  one), 
celui-la  {that,  that  one),  etc. 

Cette  maison-ci  est  bonne,  mais  This  house  is  good,  but  that  {one) 

celle-la  est  meilleure.  is  better. 

Voici  deux  chambres  ;    celle-ci  Here  are  two  rooms ;  this  one  is 

est  grande,  celle-la  est  petite.  large,  that  one  is  small. 

Note.  When  referring  to  a  preceding  word,  celui-la  is  often  to  be 
translated  the  former;  celui-ci,  the  latter. 

Jean  et  Marie  sont  ici ;  celui-la  est      John  and  Mary  are  here;  the  former 
riche,  celle-ci  est  pauvre.  is  rich,  the  latter  is  poor. 

197.  Ceci  and  cela  (ca  colloquially)  are  employed  as  neuter 
pronouns  to  express  this  and  that  when  used  to  refer  to 
something  clearly  understood  but  not  definitely  mentioned. 

I  heard  that.  fat  entendu  cela. 

Give  me  this.  Donnez-moi  ceci. 

198.  Ce  as  Representative  Subject.  The  neuter  pronoun 
ce  is  used  as  the  subject  of  etre  to  replace  the  personal 
pronouns  il,  ils,  elle,  elles,  and  the  demonstrative  pronouns, 
when  etre  is  followed  by  a  noun,  a  pronoun,  or  a  superlative 
adjective. 

It  (this)  is  a  handkerchief.  C'est  un  mouchoir. 

She  is  my  sister.  C'est  ma  seeur. 

It  is  I.  C'est  moi. 

It  (this)  is  the  most  beautiful  C'est  la  plus  belle  etoffe. 
cloth. 


224  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

But  when  other  constructions  follow  etre,  the  personal 
pronouns  are  used. 

She  is  rich.  Elle  est  riche. 

Where  is  the  book?  It  is  Henry's.      Oil  est  le  livre  ?  U  est  a  Henri. 

Note.  In  this  construction  the  verb  always  agrees  with  ce  in  the 
third  person  singular  except  when  the  predicate  is  in  the  third  person 
plural,  in  which  case  the  verb  itself  is  usually  in  the  third  person  plural. 

It  is  he.  C'est  lui. 

It  is  we.  C'est  nous. 

It  is  they.  Ce  sont  eux. 

These  are  my  brothers.  Ce  sont  mes  freres. 

VOCABULARY 

l'amabilite*  /,  the  kindness  en  haut,  upstairs 

en  bas,  downstairs  la  lumiere,  the  light 

la  bibliotheque,  the  library  naturel  (/  -lie),  natural 

confortable,  comfortable  le  rayon,  the  shelf 

couteux,  expensive  nous  recevons,  we  receive 

electrique,  electric  au  rez-de-chauss6e,     on     the 

l'£tage  m.,  the  floor,  story  ground  floor 

en  face,  opposite  la  salle  de  bain,  the  bathroom 
trois  fois  par  (or  le)  jour,  three  times  a  day 

Present  Indicative  of  voir,  to  see  (past  participle,  vu) 

je  vois  nous  voyons 

tu  vois  vous  voyez 

il  voit  ils  voient 

-.   .„  EXERCISE 

Drill 

i .  Prefix  the  proper  form  of  the  demonstrative  adj  ective  to — 

vie  tete  souliers 

homme  livre  ecoles 


DEMONSTRATIVES  225 

2.  Translate  into  French  — 

this  glove  did  he  say  that  ? 

that  glove  my   pens  and  the  ones  which 

my  glove  and  John's  you  have 

my  glove  and  his  our  dresses  and  Mary's 

this  is  good,  that  is  poor  she  who  is  here 

a  book  better  than  my  mother's  the  ones  which  you  want 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

it  is  his  he  is  one  of  my  friends 

it  is  a  library  he  is  a  good  boy 

it  is  new  she  is  our  sister 

it  is  a  new  coat  it  is  I 

they  are  old  it  is  they 

they  are  pupils  it  is  good 

it  is  John's  it  is  better 

this  is  John's  it  is  the  best 

4.  Continue  c'est  moi  through  the  forms  of  the  disjunctive. 

5 .  Supply  the  French  for  the  words  in  parentheses : 
J'aime  (this)  maison  mieux  que  (that).    Entendez-vous  (that)? 

(It)  est  une  maison  blanche.  (It)  est  neuve.  (It)  est  (the  one  that) 
vous  voyez  (there).  (There  are)  beaucoup  de  fenetres  en  haut. 
(Those)  fenetres  sont  plus  hautes  que  (these).  Je  parle  de  (those) 
qui  sont  ouvertes.  Ma  tante,  (yours)  et  (John's)  demeurent  (there). 
(There  they  are).   (They  are)  de  cheres  femmes. 


Model 


Ma  Maison 


Je  demeure  dans  cette  maison-la.  C'est  celle  de  mon  pere.  tile 
n'est  pas  grande,  mais  elle  est  confortable.  C'est  une  maison  de 
deux  etages.  Entrons-y.  Elle  a  huit  pieces.  Celles-ci  sont:  le 
salon,  la  bibliotheque,  la  salle  a  manger  et  la  cuisine  au 
rez-de-chaussee.    En  haut,  il  y  a  quatre  chambres  a  coucher  et 


226  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

aussi  une  salle  de  bain.  C'est  au  salon  que  nous  recevons  nos 
amis.  Dans  notre  bibliotheque  il  y  a  beaucoup  de  livres  francais. 
Je  suis  entre  dans  celle  de  mon  maitre  d'ecole ;  il  en  a  beaucoup 
aussi.  Je  passe  beaucoup  de  temps  dans  la  bibliotheque.  Dans 
cette  piece  il  y  a  un  pupitre,  celui  de  mon  pere.  Les  livres  qui 
sont  dans  cette  piece  ne  sont  pas  tous  a  lui ;  ceux  qui  sont  sur  les 
rayons  a  gauche  sont  a  moi,  ceux-la  a  mon  pere.  C'est  dans  la 
salle  a  manger  que  nous  allons  trois  fois  par  jour.  Nous  avons 
de  la  lumiere  electrique  dans  notre  maison.  Dans  celle  que  nous 
habitions  il  y  a  deux  ans  il  y  avait  le  gaz.  Cette  chambre-ci  est  la 
mienne,  et  celle-la  a  droite  est  celle  de  ma  sceur.  Elle  est  plus 
gaie  que  la  mienne.  Celle  qui  est  la  devant  vous  est  celle  que 
mes  parents  ont  choisie  pour  eux-memes.  Cela  est  naturel.  C'est 
la  plus  grande.  C'est  Ik,  en  face,  qu'est  la  salle  de  bain.  «  Tout 
ceci  est  tres  bien.    Je  vous  remercie  de  votre  amabilite. » 

Theme 

That  house  opposite  ours  is  my  rich  neighbor's.  It  is  he  who  is 
in  the  garden.  He  has  other  houses.  That  one  beside  his  is  also 
his.  It  is  not  so  pretty  as  the  other,  but  it  is  as  comfortable  (as 
that).  It  is  (c'est)  there  that  my  friend,  Mr.  Leroux,  lives.  Those 
windows  on  the  right  of  the  door  on  the  ground  floor  are  those  of 
his  parlor.  Behind  that  tree  is  the  library.  The  shelves  are  filled 
with  books.  Many  of  those  that  he  has  are  French.  That  man 
likes  French.  It  is  he  who  gave  me  that  one  that  I  showed  you 
this  morning.    It  is  an  interesting  book.    It  is  very  expensive.    My 

SALON  DE  ROUSSEAU -LES  CHARMETTES.  Le  salon  est  la  chambre 
de  la  maison  ou  Phote  recoit  ses  visiteurs.  Le  mobilier  modeste  represente 
dans  la  gravure  d'a  cote  est  peut-etre  typique  de  celui  d'une  maison  fran- 
caise  ordinaire.  Le  salon  que  nous  voyons  ici  est  celui  d'une  maison  en 
Savoie,  connue  sous  le  nom  des  Charmettes,  et  occupee  pendant  huit  ans 
par  Jean-Jacques  Rousseau,  penseur  et  ecrivain  francais,  dont  les  idees 
originales  furent  le  point  de  depart  d'importants  changements  en  litterature, 
en  politique  et  en  pedagogic 


228  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

friend  has  a  very  fine  dining-room.  I  dined  there  twice  last  week. 
He  has  a  good  cook.  The  kitchen  is  larger  than  ours.  Upstairs 
there  are  sleeping  rooms.  There  is  electric  light  in  all  those  rooms. 
That  window7,  on  the  left,  is  that  of  the  bathroom.  If  I  were  as 
rich  as  my  friend,  I  too  would  have  a  house  like  that  one.  That 
is  sure. 

Oral1 

i.  Demeurez-vous  dans  la  maison  de  votre  camarade  qui  est  a 
votre  gauche?  2.  Combien  d'etages  a  votre  maison?  3.  Celle 
de  votre  tante  en  a-t-elle  deux  ?  4.  Quelles1  sont  les  pieces  du 
rez-de-chausse'e  ?  5.  Dans  quelle  piece  recevons-nous  nos  amis? 
6.  Quelles  chambres  y  a-t-il  en  haut  chez  vous  ?  7.  Qu'y  a-t-il  dans 
votre  bibliotheque  ?  8.  Avez-vous  visite'  celle  de  votre  maitre  ? 
9.  Avez-vous  plus  de  livres  anglais  que  de  livres  francais  ?  10.  Ces 
livres-ci  sont-ils  a  vous  ?  11.  Vos  livres  sont-ils  sur  le  pupitre  de 
votre  voisin  ?  12.  Combien  de  fois  par  semaine  etes-vous  a  l'e'cole  ? 
13.  Y  a-t-il  le  gaz  chez  vous?  14.  Ces  fen£tres-ci  sont-elles' plus 
petites  que  celles  de  votre  maison?   15.  Cette  lecon  est-elle  facile  ? 

Resume 

1.  These  collars  and  cuffs  are  mine  ;  where  are  yours  ?  2.  I  am 
putting  on  my  blue  silk  dress ;  it  is  prettier  than  Mary's.  3.  He 
is  taking  these  shoes  because  they  are  cheap ;  those  are  more 
expensive.  4.  John  used  to  wear  all  kinds  of  hats,  but  now,  he 
wears  only  felt  (ones).  5.  While  speaking  of  this  house  he  was 
looking  at  his  neighbor's.  6.  The  new  horses  which  my  father 
gave  me  are  in  the  stable;  these  are  my  mother's.  7.  Our  house 
in  the  country  is  low,  but  the  one  in  town  is  of  three  stories. 
8.  My  sister's  children  are  studious,  but  mine  are  more  attentive 
in  class.  9.  Show  me  this,  but  do  not  show  my  sister  that.  10.  My 
friend  says  that  there  is  a  bathroom  on  every  floor  of  this  house. 

1  Use  pronouns  in  the  replies  when  possible  hereafter. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  229 

11.  These  are  the  pens  which  I  found;  they  are  John's,  are  they 
not?  12.  Do  you  see  this  beautiful  forest?  It  is  the  largest  in  the 
country.  13.  This  man  used  to  have  more  money  and  often 
filled  his  son's  pockets  with  it.  14.  Peter,  do  you  see  the  apples? 
These  are  all  John's ;  those  are  mine.  15.  It  is  not  my  sister  who 
arrived,  but  his ;  she  is  upstairs.  16.  Who  is  downstairs  ?  It  is  I ; 
do  not  be  afraid.  17.  His  uncle  and  aunt  came  from  different 
countries;  the  former  is  French,  but  the  latter  is  English. 
18.  What  do  you  think  of  his  gloves?  They  are  good,  but  the 
ones  that  I  have  cost  more.  1 9.  Those  who  are  rich  are  not  always 
the  happiest  20.  Are  you  going  to  see  his  pictures  today?  Yes, 
and  also  those  which  you  brought 


LESSON  THIRTY-THREE  q 

RELATIVE   PRONOUNS 

199.  The  Common  English  Relatives,  who,  whom,  which, 
and  that,  are  expressed  in  French  by  qui,  que,  or  lequel, 
according  to  the  following  tabular  arrangement : 


>  (persons,  animals,  and  things) 


Subject  of  a  verb 
Object  of  a  verb 

Object  of  a  preposition  1  ?       ,  .         '  .  ■  - .   ■  * 

L  lequel  (persons,  animals,  and  things) 

my  friend  who  is  here  mon  ami  qui  est  id 

the  man  whom  I  love  Vhomme  quefaime 

the  man  for  whom  I  work  Vhomme  pour  qui  (or  lequel)  je 

travaille 

the  pencil  which  is  here  le  crayon  qui  est  id 

the  pen  which  I  lost  .        la  plume  que  fai  perdue 

the  book  in  which  I  study  le  livre  dans  lequel  f  etudie 

the  picture  that  I  find  le  tableau  que  je  trouve 


230  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

200.  Lequel  is  formed  by  the  union  of  the  definite  article 
le  and  the  adjective  quel.  It  therefore  varies  to  agree  in 
number  and  gender  with  its  antecedent.  Its  forms  are 
lequel,  laquelle,  lesquels,  lesquelles. 

la  chaise  devant  laquelle  je  suis      the  chair  before  which  I  am 
les  salles  dans  lesquelles  j'ai  ete      the  rooms  in  which  I  have  been 

Note  i.  All  relatives  except  lequel  are  invariable  in  respect  to 
number  and  gender. 

Note  2.  The  le  of  lequel  contracts  with  a  preceding  de  or  a  in  con- 
formity with  the  rules  laid  down  in  Sec.  77,  forming  duquel,  desquelles, 
auquel,  auxquels,  etc. 

le  cMteau  duquel  nous  parlions,  the  castle  of  which  we  were  speaking 

201.  Lequel  with  Ambiguous  Antecedent.  The  variable 
lequel  is  often  used,  instead  of  the  invariable  qui  and  que,  in 
order  to  show  more  clearly  in  ambiguous  cases  which  word 
is  the  antecedent. 

the  wife  of  the  doctor  who  is      la  femme  du  medecin  lequel  (or 

here  qui)  est  id 

the  doctor's  wife,  who  is  here         la  femme  du  medecin,  laquelle  est 

id 

202.  Relative  Never  Omitted.  The  relative  must  never 
be  omitted  in  French,  though  it  often  is  omitted  in  English. 

the  carpet  (which)  I  sold  le  tapis  que  j'ai  vendu 

the  boy  (who  is)  with  you  le  garcon  qui  est  avec  vous 

VOCABULARY 

ancien  (/.  -nne),  old,  former  la  couronne,  the  wreath 
l'artiste  m.,  the  artist  l'Sdifice  m.,  the  building 

au  centre  de,  in  the  center  of  KEgypte/.,  Egypt 

contemporain,  contemporary,  exprimer,  to  express 

modern  le  guide,  the  guide,  guidebook 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 


231 


l'hotel  (m.)  de  ville,  city  hall 
huit,  eight 

lequel  ?  which  (one)  ? 
le  libraire,  the  bookseller 

loin,  far 
le  monument,  the  monument 
le  musee,  the  museum 
l'obelisque  m.,  the  obelisk 
Toeuvrey!,  the  work 
la  paix,  the  peace 
le  palais,  the  palace 
la  partie,  the  part 


le  patriote,  the  patriot 

la  perte,  the  loss 

la  photographie,  the  photograph 

la  place,  the  square 
poser,  to  place 
public  (f.  publique),  public 
renfermer,  to  contain 

la  rive,  the  shore,  bank 

la  signature,  the  signature,  sign- 
ing 

la  statue,  the  statue 

le  tre*sor,  the  treasure 


Present  Indicative  of  faire,  to  do,  7nake  (past  participle,  fait) 
je  fais  nous  faisons 


tu  fais 
il  fait 


vous  faites 
ils  font 


7-)    •/»  EXERCISE 

i.  Supply  in  the  following  blanks  the  proper  relative  word : 

la  chaise vous  avez  la  montagne  sur je  suis 

les  chaises  sont  dans  la  le  patriote  de nous  parlions 

chambre  l'avocat  a vous  parliez 

la  chaise est  devant  la  table  la  sceur  du  garcon est  ici 

2.  Write  French  sentences  containing  respectively  each 
of  the  following  words  or  phrases 

lequel 


qui 


que 


laquelle  auxquels 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 


desquelles 


the  tailor  who  makes  coats 
the  tailor  whom  I  saw 


the  palace  of  which  I  speak 
the  man  of  whom  I  am  thinking 


232  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

the  tailor  for  whom  he  works  the  mountains  to  which  he  is 

the  statue  which  is  in  the  park  going 

the  statue  which  they  admire  my    uncle's     house    which    is 

the  statue  in  front  of  which  she  opposite 


is  standing  which  house  is  yours 


4.  Give  the  present  indicative  of  faire,  neg.-int. ;  past 
anterior  of  faire. 

5.  Continue  — 

la  ville  que  j'aime  (tu  aimes,  etc.) 
la  fille  que  j'ai  vue 

Model  a  TRAvERS  Paris 

Me  voici  a  Paris  depuis  hier,  et  aujourd'hui  mon  ami,  qui  a  deja 
visite  cette  ville,  m'accompagne  pour  me  montrer  les  monuments 
et  les  edifices  interessants  que  Paris  renferme.  Le  libraire  dans  le 
magasin  de  qui  je  suis  alle  hier  avait  un  tres  bon  guide  de  Paris. 
Je  l'ai  achete  et  je  l'ai  lu  hier  soir.  «  Quelle  partie  de  Paris  me 
montrez-vous  d'abord  ?  —  Nous  visiterons  un  peu  les  deux  rives 
de  la  Seine,  qui  traverse  la  ville.  Allons  d'abord  sur  la  rive  droite. 
Nous  voici  devant  l'Hotel  de  ville.  —  Oh  !  le  bel  edifice  !  —  Mais 
voici  le  Louvre.  C'est  dans  cet  edifice,  qui  e'tait  l'ancien  palais  des 
rois  de  France,  que  sont  les  ceuvres  des  artistes  anciens.  Sur 
l'autre  rive  est  le  musee  du  Luxembourg.  —  Quel  musee  est  le  plus 
grand  ?  —  Celui  du  Louvre.  C'est  dans  celui  du  Luxembourg  que 
sont  les  tresors  des  artistes  contemporains.  Ce  musee  est  dans  le 
jardin  public  qui  porte  le  meme  nom.  Auquel  de  ces  musees 
aimeriez-vous  mieux  aller  un  jour?  — Au  Louvre.  — Ce  jardin 
que  nous  traversons  est  celui  des  Tuileries.  Ah  !  voici  la  place  de 
la  Concorde.  Les  huit  statues  qui  sont  autour  de  la  place  repre- 
sented les  grandes  villes  de  France.  Celle-la  est  celle  de  Strasbourg. 
—  Laquelle  ?  —  Celle  que  regarde  cette  dame  en  blanc.  Avant  la 
signature  de  la  paix  elle  etait  couverte  de  couronnes  que  des 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  233 

patriotes  posaient  la  pour  exprimer  les  regrets  que  leur  inspirait  la 
perte  de  cette  ville.  Get  obelisque  qui  est  au  centre  de  la  place  et 
que  vous  regardez  etait  autrefois  en  £gypte.» 

Theme 

"  You  who  have  already  visited  Paris,  do  you  want  to  accom- 
pany me  today  ?  "  "  With  pleasure."  "  To  what  interesting  point 
do  you  want  to  go  ? "  "  Paris  contains  many  of  them.  The  Place 
de  la  Concorde  is  not  far  from  here.  Let  us  go  there.  I  saw  the 
picture  of  it  at  the  bookseller's.  In  his  store  there  were  many 
people  who  were  buying  guidebooks  of  Paris.  Oh !  the  beautiful 
square !  It  is  this  square  which  is  the  most  beautiful  in  Paris,  is 
it  not  ? "  "  Yes,  and  also  the  largest."  M  But  what  is  that  statue 
which  those  people  are  looking  at  ? "  M  It  is  the  statue  which 
represents  the  city  of  Strasburg.  Before  the  signing  of  peace,  the 
loss  of  Strasburg  used  to  inspire  in  (a)  patriots  regrets  which  they 
expressed  by  laying  wreaths  on  the  statue  of  the  city.  It  now 
belongs  to  France."  M  What  do  those  other  statues  represent  ? " 
"  They  represent  the  great  cities  of  France,  and  there  are  eight  of 
them.  That  monument  beside  which  that  lady  is,1  is  an  obelisk.  It 
was  formerly  in  Egypt.  There's  the  garden  of  the  Tuileries,  which 
we  shall  cross  to  go  to  the  Louvre.  The  Parisians  have  made  of 
the  palace  of  the  Louvre  a  museum,  which  many  strangers  visit. 
The  works  that  it  contains  are  those  of  ancient  artists.  Those 
of  the  modern  are  in  the  Luxemburg  on  the  other  bank  of  the 
river.  The  building  I  shall  show  you  after  that  of  the  Louvre  is 
the  beautiful  Hotel  de  Ville." 

Oral 

1.  Depuis  quand  etes-vous  a  Paris?  2.  Visiterez-vous  seul  la 
capitale  ?  3.  Oil  avez-vous  trouve'  un  guide  ?  4.  Qu'en  avez-vous 
fait  ?    5.  Quel  fleuve  traverse  Paris  ?    6.  Quel  est  le  fleuve  sur  la 

1  See  Sec.  328,  c. 


o  o 

CO  CD 

CU  co 

O  3 

rt  o 

cu  rt 

3  q 


-  £ 


«       .a 

bo       o 


*  S  « 

^  a,  c 

3     O     CU 

-a  £  .2 
be 
W 


2.-S  -  ^£ 


cu    1) 
bo  « 

CO     "3 

>CU 
> 


bO   cu 

>    2 

-cu    ~ 

c 

CO   * 

o 

1)      <4H 

T3 

T3     O 

CU 

4  S 

C 

rt 

ss> 

03 

«  .2  ""' 

.s 

C   9   c 

c 

a 
S3 

> 

§3* 

g 

'C 

O-'rt    TJ 

d 

"  w  s 

'rt     co 

<u 

CO   *0 

— H 

this 
Use 
ulev 

E 

s  > 

*«J 

bo  o 

a 

3 

w  m 

U 

51 

-cu 

73      *     CO 


x:  -c  t; 

3 


CU     co    <     O 

9    cu    a   P 


{CO* 


CU 

.c 

C  -cu    -^ 

.2  U  *~ 

Hi 

eo  ^  co 
£  ii    bo 

^  m  r? 
3  .3 

71    cu    cu 

e  -5  -~ 
T  m  2 

*^  -^  o 
.e  m  +, 

fe  3  ^ 
p  O  « 
CU    >-)     >, 

<"    S    o    °«  '3 

CO  -rt  V     - 


&  co  H 


o 
->   c 

"I     S     «     3    n° 

2J     T3       flPH 

5   e   e   c   c   c  *S 

O     O     O     O     O     O     CU 

________ 


.s 
e 

I* 

cu 

o 


w  ;*  ^  2  §  cu  $ 

^  CO  £  bDJ  P 

cu  cu  V  O    7  §  -g 

3  c  cu  2  .S  P  5 


CU 

H 


•s.3  si 


^    C    cu 

8 'IS 

3     >     2 

3  ^   « 

»       4J     fit 

T»   3 


•3M 
co   « 


CU      CU 

2  O 


PL,    <CU 

3     cu 


~3    3  *bV£  <°    <3  - 


-   £   £ 

pq"  u  Q"  W  ^  6  W  H-T  ^  «  4  S"       ^  O" 


o 

CU     £ 

3 
bo-cu 


U3   ^3 

3       ^  >^ 

cu         ^    cu 


co   ^       -    3 

CU       >       CO       JjjQ 


-  —  CU  J3 

cu    cu  r*j 

co    +J  V  -^ 

CO    <0  -M  5J 

rt   h- •  C  *C 

^  ?  -a  *" 

CO  e 


c 

O    cu 

3  "°  s  2 

cr  -s  .2  <£ 

3     bO 


236  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

rive  duquel  est  le  Louvre  ?  7.  Sur  quelle  rive  de  la  Seine  est 
l'Hotel  de  ville  ?  8.  Le  Louvre  a-t-il  toujours  ete  un  musee? 
9.  Quelles  oeuvres  sont  dans  ce  muse'e  ?  10.  Lequel  est  le  plus 
grand,  le  Louvre  ou  le  Luxembourg?  11.  Oil  est  le  Luxem- 
bourg ?  12.  Dans  lequel  sont  les  oeuvres  des  contemporains  ? 
13.  Quelle  est  la  statue  la  plus  interessante  de  la  place  de  la 
Concorde?    14.  Pourquoi  ?    15.  Decrivez  la  place  de  la  Concorde. 

Resume 

1.  Did  you  see  the  woman  who  arrived  from  France  this 
morning  ?  2.  Here  are  the  books  which  I  bought  at  a  bookseller's 
near  the  square.  3.  The  statue  before  which  she  is  standing  is 
that  of  the  peasant  maid  of  Domremy.  4.  The  work  of  which 
you  are  speaking  used  to  be  the  emperor's.  5.  He  is  the  man  to 
whom  I  gave  the  photograph.  6.  The  museum  (into)  which  we 
are  entering  is  the  best  in  France.  7.  Will  you  accompany  her 
to  show  her  the  most  interesting  things  in  the  city  ?  8.  What  do 
you  think  of  the  obelisk  ?  It  is  the  one  the  French  brought  from 
a  foreign  country.  9.  He  is  speaking  to  me  of  the  journey  around 
the  world  he  is  making.  1  o.  The  palace  to  which  I  went  is  on  the 
right  bank  of  the  Seine.  11.  This  is  the  bookseller  to  whom  I  was 
speaking  yesterday.  12.  They  are  showing  him  the  photographs 
they  bought.  13.  Have  you  seen  the  house  in  which  Joan  used  to 
live  ?  1 4.  Are  you  doing  nothing  at  all  today  ?  I  am  examining 
the  books  I  read  yesterday.  15.  Have  you  visited  the  museum  in 
which  there  are  so  many  beautiful  statues?  16.  Did  you  see  the 
teacher's  daughter,  who  arrived  this  morning?  17.  When  you  saw 
me  an  hour  ago,  the  man  with  me  was  my  brother.  18.  Foreigners 
want  to  see  the  treasures  which  are  in  the  palace.  19.  It  is  the 
wreath  which  the  patriot  placed  on  the  statue.  20.  I  bought  at 
the  bookseller's  a  guidebook  of  Paris,  without  which  I  never  leave 
the  hotel. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  237 

LESSON  THIRTY-FOUR 

RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  (Continued) 

203.  Dont.  Instead  of  de  (in  all  its  meanings)  and  an 
object  relative,  dont  is  very  generally  used. 

l'e'glise  dont  (or  de  laquelle)  je  the  church  of  which  I  speak 

parle 

les  pommes  dont  (or  desquelles)  the  apples  with  which  he  filled  the 

il  a  rempli  la  corbeille  basket 

204.  Whose.  The  English  relative  whose  is  equivalent 
to  of  whom  or  of  which.  It  is  expressed,  therefore,  either 
by  dont,  or  by  de  with  qui  or  lequel.  The  noun  modified  by 
whose  takes  the  definite  article,  and  if  it  is  the  object  of  a 
verb  it  must  follow  the  verb. 

the  man  whose  son  (of  whom  Fhomme  dont  (or  de  qui)  le  fils 

the  son)  is  here  est  id 

the  man  whose  son  I  punished  Fhomme  dont  (or  de  qui)  j'ai 

(of  whom  I  punished  the  son)  puni  lefils 

Note.    For  a  case  where  dont  may  not  be  used,  see  Sec.  321,  b. 

205.  Ou  as  a  Relative.  The  adverb  ou  is  often  used  in 
cases  in  which  a  preposition  with  an  object  relative  in 
English  is  equivalent  to  where  or  when. 

the    house    at    which    (where)      la  maison  ou  elle  est 

she  is 
the  day  on   which  (when)   he     le  jour  ou  il  est  parti 

started 
the  parlor  in  which  (where)  I      le  salon  oufetais 

was 


238  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

206.  What.  The  English  relative  what  is  equivalent  to 
that  which.  In  French  there  is  no  one  word  for  this  con- 
struction, both  parts  being  expressed.    Thus  : 

Subject  of  a  verb  ce  qui 

Object  of  a  verb  ce  que 

Object  of  a  preposition     ce  .  .  .  quoi 

I  am  selling  what  (that  which)     Je  vends  ce  qui  est  id. 

is  here. 
I  am  selling  what  (that  which)     Je  vends  ce  quefai. 

I  have. 
He  gave  me  what  I  was  think-      //  m?a  donne  ce  a  quoi  je  pensais. 

ing  of  (that  of  which  I  was 

thinking) 

Note.  In  phrases  in  which  the  relative  ce  .  .  .  quoi  is  used  with  the 
preposition  de,  the  de  quoi  becomes  dont  in  accordance  with  Sec.  203. 

You  have  done  that  of  which  I  was  Vous  avezfait  ce  dont  je  parlais. 

speaking. 

I  will  give  you  what  you  need  (that  Je  vous  donnerai  ce  dont  vous  avez 

of  which  you  have  need).  besoin. 

207.  Summary  of  Relatives.  The  following  table  contains 
concisely  the  gist  of  the  statements  above : 

who  (that)  =  qui 

7       /„    a       f  que,  object  of  a  verb 
whom  (that)  =  \      . '      r         , 

v       /       Lqui,  object  of  a  preposition 

f  qui,  subject  of  a  verb 
which  (that)  =  <  que,  object  of  a  verb 

[lequel,  object  of  a  preposition 

whose  (of  whom,  of  which)  =  dont 

what— that  which  [qui,  subject  of  a  verb 

that  =  ce,  which  =  <:  que,  object  of  a  verb 

[quoi,  object  of  a  preposition 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  239 

VOCABULARY 

l'acteur  m.,  the  actor  louer,  to  praise 

Tare  m.,  the  arch  magnifique,  magnificent 

la  beautS,  the  beauty  la  memoire,  the  memory 
le  bout,  the  end  monter,  to  go  up  (upstairs), 

la  cathgdrale,  the  cathedral  climb 

classique,  classical  le  president,  the  president 
le  dome,  the  dome  principalement,  mainly 

en  effet,  in  fact  le  repertoire,  the  repertory 

Y6glisef.,  the  church  la  rgpublique,  the  republic 
entier  (/  -ere),  entire  superbe,  superb 

eriger,  to  erect  le  theatre,  the  theater 
l'escalier  m.,  the  stairs,  the       le  tombeau,  the  tomb 

staircase  le  triomphe,  the  triumph 

f rapper,  to  strike  la  victoire,  the  victory 

le  haut,  the  top  la  vue,  the  view 

Present  Indicative  of  savoir,  to  know 
je  sais  nous  savons 

tu  sais  vous  savez 

il  sait  ils  savent 

Drill  EXERCISE 

1.  Write  French  sentences  containing  respectively  each 
of  the  following  words  or  phrases  : 

ce  que  dont  011  ce  a  quoi 

ce  qui  ce  dont  duquel  que 

2.  Supply  in  the   following   blanks  the  proper  relative 
word  or  phrase : 

j'ai  entendu il  a  dit  il  vendra est  a  lui 

je  ne  sais  pas a  fait  le  bruit  la  ville elle  demeure 

je  ne  sais  pas a vous  donnez-moi  tout vous  avez 

pensez  le  gar^on j'ai  vu  le  frere 


240  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

the  artist  of  whom  I  spoke  the  countries  she  visited 

he  will  sell  what  he  makes  give  back  what  is  in  your  pocket 

the  man  he  saw  I  saw  what  I  had  spoken  of 

all  he  bought  the    victory    of    which    I    was 

the  avenues  of  which  we  spoke  thinking 

the  teacher  whose  pupils  I  saw  what  is  mine  is  yours 

the   teacher   whose   pupils   are  the  actor's  wife,  who  praised  the 

good  theater 

4.  Continue  — 

(a)  je  sais  ce  que  je  veux 

(p)  je  ne  sais  pas  ce  qui  m'a  frappe 

Model  A  TRAVERS  pARIS  (Suite) 

Non  loin  du  Louvre  est  la  Comedie  francaise  dont  les  Frangais 
sont  si  fiers.  Les  acteurs  de  ce  theatre,  lesquels  tout  le  monde 
admire,  jouent  principalement  le  repertoire  classique.  Cette  avenue 
ou  nous  sommes  maintenant  est  l'avenue  de  l'Opera,  au  bout  de 
laquelle  est  le  the'atre  le  plus  beau  du  monde.  Ce  qui  frappe 
surtout  les  etrangers,  c'est  son  superbe  escalier.  A  notre  gauche 
nous  avons  l'eglise  de  la  Madeleine,  dont  vous  avez  deja  vu  une 
photographic  Nous  voici  bientot  dans  les  Champs-filysees,  la  ma- 
gnifique  avenue  ou  demeure  le  president  de  la  republique,  et  au 
bout  de  laquelle  est  l'Arc  de  Triomphe  de  l'fitoile.  Le  voila.  Je  sais 
(ce)  a  quoi  vous  pensez.  Vous  pensez  aux  victoires  de  Napoleon  a  la 
memoire  desquelles  il  a  ete'  erige.  Du  haut  de  ce  monument,  vous 
avez  une  vue  superbe.  Montons-y.  En  effet  la  vue  que  nous  avons 
d'ici  est  surement  belle.  Oh !  Voila  la  tour  Eiffel  et,  derriere,  les 
Invalides.  C'est  la,  sous  le  dome,  qu'est  le  tombeau  de  Napoleon. 
Demain  nous  visiterons  les  autres  e'difices  de  la  rive  gauche  de  la 
Seine.  Ce  que  j'aimerais  a  visiter  aussi  un  jour,  c'est  Versailles,  et 
aussi  Reims,  dont  le  monde  entier  admire  la  cathedrale. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  241 

Theme 

Tomorrow  we  shall  be  in  Versailles  to  see  there  the  treasures 
the  beauty  of  which  you  have  so  often  praised.  It  is  (/est)  what  I 
have  been  desiring  to  do  for  a  long  time.  Another  day  I  shall  visit 
also  Rheims,  whose  cathedral  used  to  be  so  beautiful.  But  today 
we  visit  what  we  have  not  seen  on  the  right  bank  of  the  Seine. 
Here  is  the  Arch  of  Triumph,  erected  to  the  memory  of  Napoleon. 
It  is  a  magnificent  arch,  from  the  top  of  which  (Sec.  321,  b)  you 
will  have  a  superb  view  of  Paris.  What  you  are  looking  at,  there, 
is  the  Hotel  des  Invalides,  under  whose  dome  is  the  tomb  of 
Napoleon,  of  whom  we  were  speaking  a  moment  ago.  That 
beautiful  avenue  in  front  of  you  is  that  of  the  Champs-filyse'es,  at 
the  end  of  which  is  the  Place  de  la  Concorde.  Is  it  not  on  {dans) 
that  avenue  that  the  president  lives  (Sec.  328)  ?  Yes,  it  is  what  I  told 
you  the  other  day.  At  the  left  of  the  Place  de  la  Concorde  is  the 
Madeleine  Church,  that  one  of  which  I  was  speaking  yesterday. 
Farther  (on)  is  the  Opera,  in  the  avenue  which  bears  the  same 
name.  What  is  certain  is  (/est)  that  it  is  the  most  beautiful  theater 
in  the  world.  What  foreigners  speak  of  most  is  its  great  staircase. 
All  I  saw  or  all  of  which  you  spoke  to  me  is  surely  very  interesting. 

Oral 

1.  De  quoi  les  Parisiens  sont-ils  fiers  ?  2.  Quel  repertoire  jouent 
les  acteurs  de  ce  theatre  ?  3.  Oil  est  l'Ope'ra  ?  4.  Que  pensent  les 
etrangers  du  grand  escalier?  5.  Avez-vous  jamais  vu  une  photo- 
graphic de  la  Madeleine  ?  6.  Y  en  a-t-il  une  dans  ce  livre  ?  7.  Que 
savez-vous  de  Tavenue  des  Champs- £lysees  ?  8.  Pourquoi  l'Arc 
de  Triomphe  a-t-il  ete  erige  ?    9.  Que  savez-vous  des  Invalides  ? 

10.  Du  haut  de  quel  monument  la  vue  de  Paris  est-elle  belle? 

1 1.  Au  bout  de  quelle  avenue  est  la  place  de  la  Concorde  ?  12.  De 
quoi  avez-vous  besoin  pour  ecrire  ?  13.  Est-ce  mon  livre  que  vous 
avez  ?  14.  Tqus  les  livres  que  vous  avez  sont-ils  a  vous?  15.  A 
qui  est-ce  qui  est  sur  le  bureau  devant  le  tableau  ? 


242  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Resume 

i.  This  is  the  cathedral  of  which  I  was  speaking  to  you.    2.  The 
public  buildings  with  which  the  city  is  filled  are  very  beautiful. 

3.  The  man  whose  son  is  now  president  is  standing  behind  me. 

4.  At  the  end  of  that  street  is  the  church,  the  doors  of  which  are 
very  magnificent.    5.  Here  is  the  boy  whose  uncle  I  saw  in  Europe. 

6.  The  merchant  with  whom  I  am  going  to  France  is  very  rich. 

7.  A  rich  Englishman  bought  the  palace  which  we  entered  last 
week.  8.  Many  foreigners  visit  the  village  where  Joan  used  to 
live.  9.  Do  you  know  the  day  when  he  arrived  from  England? 
10.  The  theatre  in  which  we  heard  that  actor  is  one  of  the  most 
beautiful  in  the  world.  1 1.  Show  me  what  you  have  in  your  pocket. 
12.  What  is  in  his  house  is  mine,  and  I  shall  sell  it.  13.  My  father 
gave  me  what  he  had  bought  in  town.  1 4.  Tell  her  what  you  were 
thinking  of  when  she  entered.  15.  First  give  me  what  I  need  ;  then 
I  will  leave  the  house.     16.  Does  he  know  what  I  think  of  the 


LA  PLACE  DE  L'ETOILE.  La  place  de  l'£toile,  heureusement  situee  au 
sommet  d'une  legere  eminence,  est  ainsi  nominee  a  cause  des  douze 
avenues  imposantes  qui  en  rayonnent.  Au  centre  est  le  colossal  Arc  de 
Triomphe,  construit  d'apres  les  arcs  romains  mais  les  surpassant  tant  en 
magnitude  qu'en  grandeur  architecturale.  II  commemore  les  victoires 
de  Napoleon.  Commence  par  lui,  en  1806,  apres  Austerlitz,  il  ne  fut 
termine  qu'en  1836.  Sous  l'Arc  ne  peuvent  passer  que  les  armees  triom- 
phales,  et  l'amertume  d'avoir  vu  faire  cela  par  les  Allemands  a  la  fin  de 
la  guerre  de  1870  a  ete  compensee  par  le  passage  des  forces  victorieuses 
de  la  France  et  de  ses  allies  apres  la  guerre  recente.  Dans  la  photographie, 
les  avenues  dont  les  extremites  jointes  passeraient  sous  la  plus  grande 
ouverture  de  l'Arc  sont,  a  gauche,  l'avenue  des  Champs-Elysees,  qui 
conduit  a  la  place  de  la  Concorde,  et  a  droite  celle  de  la  Grande  Armee. 
Les  deux  a  angle  droit  de  celles-ci  et,  pour  ainsi  dire,  formant  la  continua- 
tion des  plus  longues  dimensions  de  l'Arc,  sont  au  premier  plan  l'avenue 
de  Wagram,  et  a  l'arriere-plan,  a  gauche,  l'avenue  Kleber.  Celle  bordee 
d'une  double  rangee  d'arbres  et  laquelle  se  voit  le  mieux  de  toutes  dans  la 
photo  est  l'avenue  du  Bois  de  Boulogne,  conduisant  a  ce  fameux  pare, 
promenade  favorite  de  la  societe  parisienne.  L'avenue  plus  etroite,  remon- 
tant vers  le  haut  de  la  photographie,  est  l'avenue  Victor  Hugo. 


244  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

victory?  17.  Americans  enjoy  the  view  from  the  top  of  the  dome 
of  the  cathedral  near  the  square.  18.  Will  you  tell  me  what  you 
are  looking  at  in  that  window?  19.  These  are  the  French  books 
I  want;  will  you  sell  me  all  you  have  of  them  ?  20.  My  father's 
sister  who  left  yesterday  is  going  to  Canada. 


LESSON  THIRTY-FIVE 

INTERROGATIVES 

208.  Who  and    Whom,  as   Interrogative    Pronouns,   are 

expressed  by  qui. 

Who  is  doing  that  ?  Qui  fait  cela  ? 

Who  is  this  man  ?  Qui  est  cet  homme  ? 

Whom  did  you  find  ?  Qui  avez-vous  trouve  ? 

Of  whom  are  you  speaking  ?  De  qui parlez-vous  ? 

Note.    Whom  in  sentences  of  the  type  below,  in  which  it  is  without 
an  antecedent,  is  an  interrogative  pronoun  used  in  an  indirect  question. 
Use,  therefore,  the  interrogative  qui  and  not  the  object  relative  que. 
He  is  asking  whom  you  want.  77  demande  qui  vous  votdez. 

209.  Whosey  as  an  Interrogative  Pronoun,  is  expressed 
by  a  qui  when  it  denotes  possession,  by  de  qui  when  it 
denotes  relationship. 

Whose  book  is  this  (to  whom  is      A  qui  est  ce  livre  ? 

this  book)  ? 
Whose  husband  is  he  (of  whom      De  qui  est-il  le  mart  ? 

is  he  the  husband)  ? 
Whose  son  is  that  boy  ?  De  qui  ce  garcon  est-il  lejils  ? 

210.  What,  as  an  Interrogative  Adjective,  is  expressed 
by  quel,  quelle  (/.),  plural  quels,  quelles  (/.). 

What  man  ?  Quel  homme  ? 

What  women  ?  Quelles  femmes  ? 


INTERROGATIVES  245 

Note  i  .    This  is  true  even  when  the  noun  that  what  modifies  does 
not  immediately  follow  it,  and  it  is  thus  apparently  a  pronoun. 

What  (color)  is  the  color  of  this        Quelle  est  la  couleur  de  cette  maison  ? 
house  ? 

Note  2.    Quel  has  the  meaning  what  a  in  exclamatory  sentences. 
Quel  soldat !  What  a  soldier! 

211.   What,  as  an  Interrogative  Pronoun,  is   expressed 
variously,  as  shown  in  the  following  table  : 

Subject  of  a  verb,  qu'est-ce  qui 
Object  of  a  verb, 


} 

Object  of  a  preposition,  quoi 


.que 
Predicate  nominative, 


What  is  growing  there  ?  Qu'est-ce  qui  pons se  la  1 

What  is  your  father  doing  ?  Que  fa it  voire  perel 

What  will  death  be  ?  Que  sera  la  mort  1 

Of  what  are  you  speaking  ?  De  quoi parlez-vous  ? 

212.   Which  is  expressed  — 

a.  When  an  interrogative  adjective,  by  the  proper  form 
of  quel. 

Which  book  ?  Quel  livre  ? 

Which  houses  ?  Quelles  maisons  ? 

b.  When  an  interrogative  pronoun,  by  the  proper  form 
of  lequel. 

Which  (man)  is  your  uncle  ?  Lequel  est  votre  onele  1 

Do  you  love  your  niece  ?  Which  Aimez-vous  votre  niece  ?  La- 
one  ?  quelle  ? 

Which  (pupil)  of  your  pupils  is  Lequel    de    vos    Sieves    est    le 

the  best  ?  meilleur  ? 

Which  (pupils)  of  your  pupils  Lesquels  de  vos  eleves  sont  les 

are  the  best  ?  meilleurs  1 


246  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

213.  Summary  of  Interrogatives.  The  following  table 
contains  concisely  the  gist  of  the  statements  above: 

who  —  qui 
whom  =  qui 

^={,que\adjective 

[lequel,  pronoun 

C  qu'est-ce  qui,  subject  of  verb 

I  que,  object  of  verb 
what  =  i        \     '      ■    £ 

quoi,  object  of  preposition 

^quel,  adjective 

fa  qui,  to  denote  ownership 

~~  [de  qui,  to  denote  relationship 

Note.  Other  composite  forms,  similar  to  qu'est-ce  qui  above,  are 
often  substituted  for  various  interrogative  pronouns;  for  example, 
qu'est-ce  que,  what,  as  object  of  a  verb.    See  Sec.  323. 


VOCABULARY 

l'attaque/,  the  attack  l'elan  m.,  the  dash,  enthusiasm 

Australien    (/    -nne),    Aus-  esperer,  to  hope 

tralian  juillet,  July 

l'auteur  m.,  the  author  la  mort,  death 

avoir  lieu,  to  take  place  prendre  part  a,  to  take  part  in 

la  bataille,  the  battle  rencontrer,    to    meet,    come 

la  cause,  the  cause,  reason  across 

commander,  to  command,  order  la  response,  the  answer 

le  cdte\  the  side  seVere,  severe,  rigorous 

le  drapeau,  the  flag  la  tuerie,  the  slaughter 

Present  Indicative  of  pouvoir,  to  be  able,  can 

je  puis,  peux  nous  pouvons 

tu  peux  vous  pouvez 

il  peut  ils  peuvent 


INTERROGATIVES  247 

lj.f/  EXERCISE 

i.  Give  English  sentences  containing  — 

who  (re/.)  which  (re/.)  what  (int.pron.) 

who  (int.)  which  (int.pron.)  what  (int.  adj.) 

whom  (re/.)  which  (int.  adj.)  whose  (re/.) 

whom  (int.)  what  (re/.)  whose  (int.) 

Translate  these  English  sentences  into  French. 

2.  Give  French  sentences  containing  respectively  each  of 
the  following  interrogatives : 

quels  de  qui  laquelle 

que  quoi  a  qui 

qu'est-ce  qui  oil  est-ce  que 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

whom  do  you  want  ?  what  a  boy  ! 

what  have  you  ?  who  are  they  ? 

to  whom  are  you  singing  ?  whose  horse  is  this  ? 

whose  son  are  you  ?  what  are  you  making  ? 

what  is  under  the  tree  ?  which  is  your  niece  ? 

which  pen  have  you  ?  what  is  he  thinking  of  ? 

what  is  the  color  of  the  sky  ?  what  is  this  ? 

what  makes  the  snow  ?  what  battle  is  this  ? 

4.  Supply  the  French  for  the  words  in  parentheses  : 

(Which)  livre  est  k  vous  ?  Je  veux  (the  one  which)  vous  avez, 
et  aussi  celui  (in  which)  elle  lit.  (Whose)  plume  est  (this)  ?  (Where) 
est  l'eleve  (whose  pen)  j'aime  ?  (Which)  de  ces  plumes  est  (yours)? 
Pour  (whom)  l'avez-vous  apportee  ?  (Whom)  avez-vous  vu  ?  (What) 
avez-vous  vu ?  Savez-vous  (what)  j'ai  vu ?  (What)  vue  admirez-vous ? 
(Who)  a  vu  l'epicier?  (What  a)  homme!  De  (what)  parle-t-il?  II  a 
deux  magasins ;  (of  which)  pense-t-il  ?  (What)  est  en  face  du  magasin  ? 


248  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Model  Cantigny  » 

Qui  e'tait  avec  vous  ce  matin  ?   —  C'etait  mon  neveu  Charles. 

—  De  qui  est-il  le  fils  ?  —  De  ma  soeur  Marie.  —  Et  de  quoi 
parliez-vous  quand  je  vous  ai  rencontres?  — II  me  parlait  de 
Cantigny,  oil  il  etait  entre  un  jour.    — Qu'est-ce   qu'il   a   dit? 

—  Que  c'etait  la  qu'avait  eu  lieu  une  des  premieres  batailles  oil  les 
Americains  ont  pris  part.  C 'e'tait  en  juillet  de  la  derniere  annee  de 
la  grande  guerre.  —  Quelles  armees  des  Allies  y  avait-il  dans 
la*  bataille  ?    —  II   y  avait   des  Americains   et  des  Australiens. 

—  Lequel  de  nos  generaux  commandait?   — Le  general  Bullard. 

—  Lesquels  des  soldats  furent  les  plus  braves  ?  —  La  re'ponse  est 
difficile.  lis  e'taient  tous  braves,  mais  les  notres  ont  e'te  superbes. 
Quels  soldats!  Avec  quel  elan  ils  sont  alles  a  Fattaque!  Quels 
sont  ceux  qui  auraient  fait  mieux  ?  Les  Allie's  e'taient  fiers  d'eux. 
Mais  a  quoi  pensez-vous  ?  —  Je  pense  au  grand  nombre  de 
ceux  que  la  mort  a  emportes.  C'etait  pour  une  bonne  cause, 
mais  quelle  tuerie !  Que  sera  la  punition  des  auteurs  de  cette 
guerre  ?   —  Severe,  esperons-le. 

Theme 

"  What  are  you  doing  ? "  "I  am  looking  at  a  photograph."  "  Of 
whom  ? "  "Of  soldiers."  "  From  what  country  ? "  "  From  the 
United  States.  Do  you  want  to  see  it  ?  Here  it  is."  M  Why,  it 
is  a  photograph  of  American  soldiers  in  France !  Whose  is  it  ? " 
M  It  is  mine."  "  It  is  very  interesting.  What  men  !  In  what  place 
are  they  ? "  M  They  are  in  Cantigny,  where  they  entered  with 
much  dash."  "  What  other  soldiers  were  there  with  them  ?  "  M  The 
Australians."  "Which  army  lost  the  greater  number  of  men?" 
M  Which  one  ?  It  is  difficult  to  (a)  say.  Death  carried  away  many 
on  both  {des  deux)  sides."  "Who  commanded  our  soldiers?  Was 
it  not  General  Bullard  ? "  "  Yes,  it  was  he.  My  nephew  was  one 
of  his  officers."  "  Whose  son  is  your  nephew  ?  "  "  My  youngest 
1  See  Frontispiece. 


INTERROGATIVES  249 

sister's.  It  was  she  who  was  with  me  the  other  day."  "  What 
were  you  speaking  of  when  I  met  you  ?  "  M  We  were  speaking  of 
her  son  and  of  the  war."  M  What  did  she  think  of  the  authors  of 
the  war  ? "  "  She  hoped  that  their  punishment  would  be  severe 
and  that  there  would  never  again  be  a  slaughter  like  that  one." 

Oral 

1.  Qu'est-ce  qui  est  sur  la  table  devant  vous  ?  2.  Quel  livre  est 
le  votre  ?  3.  Lequel  est  votre  grammaire  ?  4.  A  qui  est  cette 
grammaire  ?  5.  De  quoi  parlons-nous  en  classe?  6.  A  quoi  pensez- 
vous  maintenant  ?  7.  A  qui  pensez-vous  le  plus  sou  vent  ?  8.  Lequel 
de  vos  parents  est  le  plus  grand  ?  9.  Lequel  est  le  plus  vieux  ? 
10.  De  qui  etes-vous  le  fils?  11.  A  qui  re'citez-vous  la  lecon? 
12.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  avez  la?  13.  Quelle  est  la  couleur  de  votre 
livre?  14.  Lequel  est  le  plus  difficile,  l'anglais  ou  le  francais? 
15.  De  quel  village  parlons-nous  dans  la  lecon? 

Resume 

1.  Who  is  making  so  much  noise  in  the  classroom  ?  2.  Who  is  the 
girl  who  entered  with  my  mother?  3.  Whom  did  you  see  in  town 
yesterday  ?  4.  To  whom  did  you  give  the  pens  you  bought  ?  5.  The 
teacher  asks  me  whom  I  want  to  see.  6.  Can  you  tell  me  whose 
French  books  these  are?  7.  Do  you  know  whose  niece  this  girl  is? 
8.  Whose  sister  is  that  attractive  woman  ?  9.  What  do  you  do  when 
you  have  a  vacation  ?  1  o.  What  are  these  two  Frenchmen  doing  in 
the  United  States  ?  11.  Which  was  the  greatest  battle  in  the  war? 
1 2.  What  were  the  generals'  names  of  whom  you  spoke  ?  13.  Which 
officers  did  you  meet  in  France  ?  14.  Which  statues  do  you  hope 
to  see  in  Paris  ?  15.  What  was  the  answer  that  he  gave  ?  I  don't 
know  what  he  said.  16.  What  can  you  tell  me  of  this  magnifi- 
cent attack  ?  Which  one  ?  17.  Which  of  the  armies  were  the  best  ? 
18.  What  do  the  Americans  think  of  what  has  taken  place  in 
Europe?  19.  Which  soldiers  took  part  in  the  battle  of  Cantigny? 
20.  Of  what  were  they  thinking  when  they  entered  the  city  ?  • 


250  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

REVIEW 

(Lessons  Thirty-two  to  Thirty-five) 

A.  General  Drill 

i.  Give  the  list  of  (a)  demonstrative  adjectives,  (b)  de- 
monstrative pronouns. 

2.  When  and  how  are  the  particles  ci  and  la  added  (a)  to 
demonstrative  adjectives  ?  (b)  to  demonstrative  pronouns  ? 

3.  Give  French  sentences  containing  — 

cet  celle  ceux  ceci 

celle-ci  cela  celle-la  ces 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

it  is  I  the  former  and  the  latter 

it  is  mine  this  is  a  new  book  ;  that  is  very  clear 

it  is  good  my  work  and  my  brother's 

it  is  better  my  pen  and  the  one  which  she  wants 

it  is  the  best  he  who  had  arrived 

it  is  they  I  told  you  that 

it  was  we  yours  is  smaller  than  Mary's 

that  was  my  mother        mine  is  the  smallest 

5.  Give  the  list  of  the  relative  pronouns,  and  illustrate 
each  in  a  French  sentence. 

6.  Give  the  French  for  — 

who  (re/.)  which  (re/.)  what  (int.  adj.) 

who  (int.)  which  (int.  firon.)  what  (int.  pron.) 

whom  (re/.)  which  (int.  adj.)  whose  (re/.) 

whom  (int.)  what  (re/.)  whose  (int.) 

7.  Give  a  French  sentence  containing  each  of  the  words 
in  6, 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XXXII-XXXV 


251 


8.  Give  French  sentences  containing  — 
dont  auxquels  duquel 
ou                            cela                                   quels 

ou  quoi  ce  .  .  .  dont 

9.  Translate  into  French  — 


the  man  who  is  here 
the  friend  whom  I  love 
I  want  what  is  here 
the  room  in  which  I  was 
I  want  what  I  have 
the  child  I  want  is  here 


she  loves  all  that  is  beautiful 

I  hear  him  whom  I  am  seeking 

the  man  with  whom  I  live 

the  man  whose  son  is  here 

the  merchant  whose  horse  I  bought 

they  who  are  poor  are  often  happy 


10.  Translate  into  French 


what  was  here  ? 
what  was  it  ? 
whose  pencil  is  it  ? 
whose  daughter   is 

pretty  girl? 
who  is  here  ? 
whom  do  you  hear  ? 
what  do  you  hear  ? 


with  whom  is  he  ? 
of  whom  is  he  thinking  ? 
what  were  your  friends  doing  ? 
that         which  son  is  it  ? 
what  a  big  tree  ! 
which  of  your  eyes  ? 
what  is  the  lesson  ? 
what  is  he  doing  ? 

1 1 .  Replace   the   words   in   parentheses   by   the   correct 
French  words  : 

1 .  (What)  belles  rues  ! 

2.  (Which)  gants  sont  (yours)  ? 

3.  (This)  plume,  (hers,)  et  (my  sister's). 

4.  (It)  est  lui  (who)  a  fait  (that). 

5.  (Which)  de  vos  amies  a  (these)  fleurs  ? 

6.  (She)  est  la  dame  a  (whom)  j'ai  parle. 

7.  Je  sais  (that)  (that)  livre  est  (the  one)  (that)  (that)  homme  veut. 

8.  (What)  peut  lui  donner  (what)  il  veut  ? 

9.  (There  are)  des  chaises  (there),  dans  (their)  chambre. 


252  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

B.  Translate  into  French 

i.  What  was  growing  there  in  their  aunt's  garden?  2.  What 
was  there  in  the  field  where  he  and  your  brother  were  playing 
yesterday  ?  3.  This  man  has  black  eyes,  that  one  has  blue. 
4.  Whose  house  is  this  ?  It  is  the  oldest  in  the  country  and  its 
windows  are  very  low.  5.  Which  is  the  little  girl  for  whom  he 
made  those  new  shoes?  6.  Whom  did  you  see  in  the  carriage 
in  which  we  came  ?  7.  My  friend's  cousin,  who  has  been  traveling 
in  France  for  many  months,  gave  me  this  statue.  8.  I  shall  never 
ask  him  what  he  is  thinking  about.  9.  I  should  have  heard  that 
myself,  if  she  had  not  spoken  of  it.  10.  Which  cathedral  was  it  of 
which  he  praised  the  dome  so  much  ?  1 1 .  Of  whom  was  that  boy's 
aunt  who  was  here  speaking?  12.  Did  you  praise  the  wreath  she 
brought  me?  Which  one?  13.  This  artist  whose  works  the 
French  love  so  much  lived  in  Rheims.  1 4.  They  see  this  light,  but 
they  do  not  see  that.  15.  Charles,  do  you  know  the  museum  in 
which  these  statues  are?  16.  They  who  have  long  vacations  are 
happy.    17.  Who  has  lost  his  necktie  and  collar?    Is  it  you,  sir? 

18.  He  who  takes  wine  often,  white  or  red,  will  have  a  red  nose. 

19.  I  know  that  that  handkerchief  that  is  there  is  hers.    20.  Give 
her  her  guidebook  which  she  lost.    Where  is  yours  ? 

Affiches  —  Avis  au  Public 


ENTREE  SORTIE 

DEFENSE  D'AFFICHER  DEFENSE  DE  FUMER 

MAISON  A  VENDRE  VENTE  DE  SOLDES 

APPARTEMENTS  MEUBLE"S  A  LOUER 

LIVRES  NEUFS  ET  D'OCCASION 

COSTUMES  ET  VETEMENTS  SUR  MESURE 

PRIERE  DE  NE  PAS  DONNER  DE  POURBOIRE 

ON  N'ENTRE  PAS  AVEC  LES  CHIENS 


NUMERALS  —  CARDINALS 


253 


LESSON   THIRTY-SIX 


NUMERALS  -  CARDINALS 

214.  Cardinal  Numbers.    The  following  examples  will  be 
sufficient  to  illustrate  the  formation  of  all  cardinal  numbers  : 


1 ,  un  (f .  une) 

21,  wag*  *tf  «« 

81,  quatre-vingt-un 

2,  deux 

22,  vingt-deux 

82,  quatre-vingt-deux 

3,  trots 

23,  vingt-trois 

83,  quatre-vingt-trois 

4,  quatre 

30,  /razte 

90,  quatre-vingt-dix 

5,  cinq 

31,  /razte  <?/  #/z 

9 1 ,  quatre-vingt-onze 

6,  six 

32,  trente-deux 

92,  quatre-vingt-douze 

7,  sept 

40,  quarante 

97,  quatre-vingt-dix-sept 

8,  huit 

50,  cinquante 

IOO,  <T£#/ 

9,  neuf 

60,  soixante 

101,  d?«/  #« 

10,  dix 

70,  soixante-dix 

125,  *#/*/  vingt-cinq 

1 1 ,  onze 

71,  soixante  et  onze 

200,  dfew.*:  r^/j- 

12,  douze 

72,  soixante-douze 

205,  dtez/.*  art/  «*«^ 

13,  treize 

73,  soixante-treize 

1000,  »m7/<? 

14,  quatorze 

74,  soixante-quatorze 

1 0 1 5 ,  fti&fe  quinze 

15,  quinze 

75,  soixante-quinze 

1400,  #«//<?  quatre  cents  or 

16,  seize 

76,  soixante-seize 

quatorze  cents 

17,  dix-sept 

77,  soixante-dix-sept 

2000,  */<?##  /#*//<? 

18,  dix-huit 

78,  soixante-dix-huit 

4235,  quatre  mille  deux  cent 

19,  dix-neuf 

79,  soixante-dix-neuf 

trente-cinq 

20,  &Mg? 

80,  quatre-vingts 

1,000,000,  ««  million 

215.  Peculiarities  in  Numerals.  Observe  in  the  fore- 
going list  that 

a.  Numbers  less  than  0;^  htmdred  formed  of  more  than 
one  word  always  have  a  connective.  In  twenty-one,  thirty- 
one,  forty-one,  fifty-one,  sixty-one,  and  seventy-one  it  is  et ; 
elsewhere  it  is  a  hyphen.   Numbers  greater  than  0;^  hundred 


254  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

have  no  connective  other  than  the  one  required  between  the 
tens  and  units. 

b.  Vingt  and  cent  are  made  plural  when  multiplied,  if  no 
number  follows. 

c.  Cent  and  mille  are  used  without  the  indefinite  article. 

d.  The  numbers  are  invariable  for  gender,  except  un. 

Note.  Un  million,  and  un  milliard,  a  billion,  take  de  before  a 
following  noun. 

216.  Pronunciation  of  Numerals.    Note  that 

a.  The  final  consonant  of  cinq,  six,  sept,  huit,  neuf,  and 
dix  is  sounded  when  counting  or  at  the  end  of  a  phrase, 
final  x  being  sounded  like  s.  Before  a  word  beginning  with 
a  vowel  sound  the  regular  rules  of  linking  prevail.  Before 
a  word  beginning  with  a  consonant  these  final  letters 
are  silent. 

b.  There  is  no  elision  before  huit  and  onze. 

General  Note.  From  this  point  no  lesson  vocabularies  are  given ; 
the  general  vocabulary  on  pages  457-533  must  be  consulted.  How- 
ever, idiomatic  forms  and  phrases  that  will  be  met  in  the  English- 
French  parts  of  the  exercises  will  be  given  from  time  to  time. 

_   .„  EXERCISE 

Drill 

1.  Count  from  i  to  no.    Count  backward  from  20  to  1. 

2.  Express  in  French  — 

82  780  1400  397  3677 

121  71  59  483  5°5 

3.  Give  in  French  — 

(a)  The  multiplication  table  of  five  (cinq  fois  un  font  cinq,  cinq 
fois  deux  font  dix,  etc.)  ;  the  table  of  three ;  of  seven ;  of  eight. 

(b)  The  division  table  of  six  (six  divise*  par  six  fait  un,  etc.). 


NUMERALS - 

-CARDINALS                     255 

4.  Fill  the  blanks  : 

dix  et  huit  font 

quarante    et    un    et    vingt-six 

quinze  moins  trois  font 

font 

cinq  fois  douze  font 

cent  trente  moins  quatre-vingts 

quarante-deux    divise    par 

six 

font 

fait 

vingt  fois  vingt  font 

Model  LE  pAys  de  France 

La  France  a  une  superficie  de  cinq  cent  trente-six  mille  quatre 
cent  huit  kilometres  carres,  et  sa  population  est  d'environ  trente- 
neuf  millions  d'habitants.  Sa  plus  grande  longueur,  du  nord  au 
sud,  est  de  neuf  cent  soixante-quinze  kilometres ;  sa  plus  grande 
largeur  est  de  huit  cent  quatre-vingt-huit.  Paris,  qui  en  est  la 
capitale,  avait  recemment  deux  millions  huit  cent  quatre-vingt-huit 
mille  cent  dix  habitants.  Avant  la  Revolution  de  dix-sept  cent 
quatre-vingt-neuf ,  la  France  e'tait  divisee  en  provinces  telles  que  la 
Normandie,  la  Bretagne,  la  Champagne,  etc.,  tandis  que  main  tenant 
elle  est  divisee  en  quatre-vingt-sept  departements,  divises  eux- 
memes  en  trois  cent  soixante-deux  arrondissements,  deux  mille 
huit  cent  quatre-vingt-dix-neuf  cantons,  et  trente-six  mille  cent 
soixante-dix  communes.1  Le  preset  administre  le  departement,  le 
sous-prefet  l'arrondissement,  et  les  maires  les  communes.  Le  pou- 
voir  legislatif  est  place  entre  les  mains  du  senat  et  de  la  chambre 
des  deputes.  II  y  a  six  cents  deputes,  elus  pour  quatre  ans  par 
tous  les  citoyens  de  vingt  et  un  ans,  et  trois  cents  senateurs,  elus 
pour  neuf  ans  par  les  deputes  et  d'autres  delegues.  Le  pouvoir 
executif  est  exerce  par  le  president  de  la  republique  et  ses  mi- 
nistres  au  nombre  de  douze.  Le  president  est  elu  pour  sept  ans 
par  la  chambre  et  le  senat  re'unis  en  congres.  Les  colonies  de  la 
France  sont  importantes.  Leur  superficie  est  d'environ  quatre 
millions  de  milles  carres;  leur  population  quarante-cinq  millions. 

1  L' Alsace  et  la  Lorraine,  de  nouveau  francaises  depuis  191 8,  non 
comprises. 


256  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Theme 

France,  whose  area  is  about  204,20c1  square  miles,  has,  since 
the  war,  a  little  more  than  forty  million  inhabitants.  Alsace  and 
Lorraine,  which  were  German  after  the  war  of  187 1,  are  again 
French.  They  have  an  area  of  14,518  square  kilometers,  and  a 
population  of  1,820,400.  Of  their  four  important  cities,  the  largest 
is  Strasburg.  With  Strasburg  there  are  thirteen  cities  in  France 
which  have  more  than  100,000  inhabitants.  All  the  departments 
are  almost  of  the  same  size,  but  there  are  some  which  are  more 
populous  than  others.  Thus  the  department  of  (le)  Pas-de-Calais  has 
1,068,200  inhabitants,  while  that  of  (la)  Vendee  has  only  438,500. 
France  has  not  always  been  divided  into  departments.  Formerly 
it  was  divided  into  thirty-three  provinces,  some  larger  than  others. 

Oral 

1 .  Quelle  est  la  superflcie  de  la  France  en  kilometres  carres  ? 
2.  Et  en  milles  carres  ?  3.  Combien  y  a-t-il  d 'habitants  en  France  ? 

4.  Quelle  est  la  plus  grande  longueur  du  pays  ?  5 .  La  population 
de  Paris  est-elle  moins  grande  que  celle  de  Boston  ?  6.  Quelle  est 
celle  de  New  York  ?  7.  La  France  a-t-elle  to uj ours  ete  divise'e  en 
departements  ?  8.  Combien  y  a-t-il  de  departements  ?  9.  En  quoi 
sont-ils  eux-memes  divises?  10.  Qui  administre  le  de'partement  ? 
l'arrondissement ?  la  commune?  11.  Combien  y  a-t-il*  de  deputes 
et  de  se'nateurs?  12.  Par  qui  est  exerce'  le  pouvoir  executif? 
13.  Qui  est  le  president  actuel  ?  14.  La  France  a-t-elle  des  colonies  ? 
15.  Combien  de  lecons  avons-nous  de'ja  e'tudiees  ? 

Resume 

1.  154,  281,  800,  555.  2.  1521,  2999,  21,371.  3.  What  part 
of   1000  is   100?    4.  A  year  has  twelve  months  or  365   days. 

5.  Every  four  years  it  has,  however,  366.  6.  In  the  United  States 
there  are  forty-eight  states,  the  largest  of  which  is  Texas.    7.  We 

1  All  numbers  in  this  lesson  should  be  written  out. 


LA  FRANCE 


l'Allemagne,  Germany 

PAngleterre,  England 

la  Belgique,  Belgium 

la  Bourgogne,  Burgundy 

la  Bretagne,  Brittany 

l'Espagne,  Spain 

la  Flandre,  Flanders 

la  Gascogne,  Gascony 

l'ltalie,  Italy 

la  Manche,  the  English  Channel 

Lyon,  Lyons 


Marseille,  Marseilles 

la  Normandie,  Normandy 

Pocean     Atlantique,    the    Atlantic 

Ocean 
le    pas   de    Calais,   the    Straits    of 

Dover 
la  Picardie,  Picardy 
Reims,  Rheims 
le  Rhin,  the  Rhine 
la  Savoie,  Savoy 
la  Suisse,  Switzerland 


258  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

have  now  had  thirty-six  lessons;  how  many  more  will  there  be? 

8.  The  grammar  that  you  were  studying  last  year  had  480  pages. 

9.  That  of  my  friend  has  only  329.  10.  But  we  hope  that  the  new 
one  will  not  have  more  than  300.  11.  The  little  village  in  which 
I  live  has  scarcely  2000  inhabitants.  12.  But  the  city  in  which  I 
was  staying  has  almost  125  times  as  many.  13.  In  my  library 
there  are  about  2500  books.  14.  Whom  did  the  French  elect 
president  ?  Was  he  a  general  or  a  senator  ?  15.  The  United  States 
has  an  area  of  3,026,789  square  miles.  16.  The  thirteen  colonies 
had  less  than  4,000,000  inhabitants.  17.  The  area  of  the  French 
colonies  is  21  times  that  of  France  in  Europe.  18.  What  makes 
the  citizens  of  France  so  proud  of  their  country  ?  19.  Washington, 
the  capital  of  the  United  States,  had  331,069  inhabitants  when  I 
was  living  there.  20.  Of  what  was  the  deputy  speaking  when  you 
entered  the  Chamber  ? 


LESSON  THIRTY-SEVEN 

NUMERALS  -  ORDINALS 

217.  Ordinal  Numbers.    Ordinals  are  formed  from  car- 
dinals by  adding  teme,  omitting  final  e  if  there  is  one. 

troisieme,  third  quatrieme,  fourth 

vingt  et  unieme,  twenty-first 

The  exceptions  to  this  rule  are 

premier,  premiere  (/.),  first 

second,  seconde  (f),  second  (in  a  series  of  two) 

deuxieme,  second  (in  a  series  of  more  than  two) 

cinquieme  (u  inserted),  fifth 

neuvieme  (/changed  to  v),  ninth 

quatre-vingtieme  (s  omitted),  eightieth 


NUMERALS  —  ORDINALS  259 

Note.    The  abbreviated  forms  of  the  ordinals  are 

premier,  i«  dixieme,  ioe 

premiere,  i*ra  centieme,  iooe 

deuxieme,  2«  etc. 

218.  Fractional   Parts  with   denominators   greater   than 
four  are  expressed  by  ordinals. 

one  fifth,  un  cinquieme  three  eighths,  trots  huitiemes 

The  following  are  the  other  fractional  parts : 

one  half,  un  demi  one  third,  un  tiers 

one  fourth,  un  quart 

Note.   When  demi  precedes  the  noun,  it  is  connected  by  a  hyphen 
and  is  invariable ;  when  it  follows  the  noun,  it  is  variable. 

une  demi-heure,  half  an  hour 

une  heure  et  demie,  one  hour  and  a  half 

219.  Units  of  Measure.    Observe  that 

a.  In  expressing  the  price  of  a  thing,  the  definite  article 
is  used  before  the  noun  denoting  the  unit  of  measure. 

This   cloth  cost   five  francs   a      Ce   drap   cofde   cinq  francs   le 

meter.  metre. 

I    sell   eggs    at   four  francs  a     Je  vends  les  ceufs  quatre  francs  la 

dozen.  douzaifie. 

But  observe 

The   French  sell  cloth  by  the      Les  Francais  vendent  le  drap  au 
meter.  metre. 

b.  Par  (or  sometimes  le)  is  used  before  a  unit  of  time. 

He  earns  ten  francs  a  day.  77  gagne  dix  francs  par  (or  le) 

jour. 
He  sings  twice  (two  times)  a      II  chante  deux  fois  par  semaine. 
week. 


260 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


c.  The  size  of  an  object  is  expressed  as  follows : 

Cette  table   a   deux    metres  de 


This  table  is  two  meters  long. 


How  long  is  this  table  ? 


longueur  (or  long). 
Cette  table  est  longue  de  deux 

metres. 
(  Combien  de  longueur  a  cette  table  ? 
J  Quelle  longueur  a  cette  table  ? 
[De  quelle  longueur  est  cette  table  ? 


meilleur  marchg,  cheaper 
le  franc,  the  franc,  the  unit  of  the 
French    monetary    system 
(par   value    about   twenty 
cents) 


IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND   PHRASES 
le  centime,    the 


centime,     one 
hundredth  of  a  franc 
de  plus  en  plus,  more  and  more 
pour  dix  francs,   ten  francs' 
worth 


Drill  EXERCISE  . 

1.  Give  the  ordinals  from  1st  to  noth. 

2.  Fill  the  blanks  : 

le  tiers  de  vingt-sept  est deux    cinquiemes    et    sept    di- 

le    huitieme    de    cent    quatre  xiemes  font  

est  le  demi  d'un  onzieme  est 

les  trois  cinquiemes  de  quinze  six  fois  trois  septiemes  font 

sont  deux  fois  dix  francs  cinquante 

les  deux  tiers  de  trois  quarts  font  

sont  centimes  font  un  franc. 


3.  Express  in  French  — 
the  ninth  class 
a  half  century 
a  century  and  a  half 
my  first  pair  of  shoes 


the  second  volume 
the  twenty-first  year 
the  eightieth 
the  eighty-first 


NUMERALS  —  ORDINALS  261 

4.  Express  in  French  — 

two  francs  a  meter  to  earn  a  hundred  francs  a  week 

three  francs  a  dozen  he  sells  cheese  by  the  kilo 

twice  a  day  four  times  a  year 

Model  Au  Marche 

Je  suis  allee  en  ville  faire  mes  emplettes,  et  voici  mon  filet  plein 
des  choses  que  j'ai  achetees.  Tout  etait  horriblement  cher.  Le 
franc,  a  cause  de  la  guerre,  a  perdu  conside'rablement  de  sa  valeur. 
Et  mon  pauvre  mari,  qui  ne  gagne  que  vingt-cinq  francs  par  jour ! 
C'est  la  quinzieme  anne'e  qu'il  travaille  Ik.  Enfin !  Je  suis  entree 
d'abord  chez  le  tailleur  pour  m'acheter  du  drap.  Ce  drap,  qu'il 
vend  au  metre,  est  tres  joli,  c'est  vrai,  mais  le  prix  est  joli  aussi ; 
quinze  francs  le  metre  1  Et  encore  c'etait  le  drap  le  meilleur  marche 
qu'il  avait.  Ce  morceau  que  j'ai  apporte  a  trois  metres  de  long 
et  j'en  aurai  assez.  C'est  juste  ce  dont  j'ai  besoin.  Je  suis  passee 
chez  l'epicier.  J'y  ai  pris  deux  livres  de  beurre  a  trois  francs  la 
livre,  six  francs ;  une  livre  et  demie  de  fromage,  un  franc  cinquante ; 
pour  cinq  francs  de  sucre,  le  sucre  coute  de  plus  en  plus  cher ;  un 
paquet  de  sel,  vingt  centimes  ;  une  douzaine  et  demie  d'ceufs  a  deux 
francs  cinquante  la  douzaine,  trois  francs  soixante-quinze.  Cela  fait, 
en  tout,  seize  francs  quarante-cinq  que  je  lui  ai  payes.  Les  legumes 
etaient  assez  bon  marche,  mais  je  n'en  avais  pas  besoin.  Dans  une 
demi-heure  mon  mari  sera  de  retour.  Je  lui  ai  rapporte*  de  la 
bibliotheque  le  troisieme  volume  des  «  Miserables  » ,  car  il  a  deja 
fini  les  deux  tiers  du  precedent. 

Theme 

With  the  7800  francs  that  my  husband  earns  a  year  we  have 
not  much  money  left  at  the  end  of  the  year.  It  is  the  first  year 
that  we  have  been  (are)  in-  this  house,  and  we  give  a  quarter  of 
what  he  earns  to  the  landlord.    Living  is  dearer  and  dearer.    The 


262  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

same  cloth  which  used  to  cost  me  10  francs  now  costs  about  18 
francs  a  meter,  and  as  I  need  three  or  four  yards  for  a  dress,  that 
makes  from  54  to  72  francs.  The  last  shoes  I  bought  last  month 
cost  me  2  5  francs  a  pair.  The  grocer,  who  came  half  an  hour  ago, 
brought  me  butter  at  two  francs  fifty  a  pound,  eggs  at  one  franc 
seventy-five  a  dozen,  wine  at  two  francs  a  liter,  and  other  things 
still.  I  gave  him  twenty  francs,  and  all  the  change  he  gave  me 
back  was  three  francs  sixty  for  what  would  have  cost  me  formerly 
one  third  (de)  less  than  what  I  paid.  Let  us  hope  that  everything 
will  be  cheaper  soon,  or  what  we  earn  a  year  will  never  be  enough 
to  live  on  (pour  vivre). 

Oral 

1.  Ou  votre  mere  est-elle  allee  aujourd'hui  et  pourquoi  ?  2.  A-t-elle 
trouve  les  choses  bon  marche  ?  3.  Combien  gagne  votre  pere  ? 
4.  Chez  qui  votre  mere  est-elle  d'abord  entree  ?  5.  Comment  le 
tailleur  vend-il  son  drap  ?  6.  Quelle  longueur  a  le  morceau  de  drap 
que  votre  mere  a  achete?  7.  Ou  est-elle  passee  ensuite  ?  8.  Qu'y 
a-t-elle  achete  ?  9.  A-t-elle  trouve  le  sucre  meilleur  marche  ?  10.  A 
combien  etaient  les  ceufs  ?  11.  Quel  est  le  nume'ro  de  votre  lecon  ? 
12.  Combien  de  lecons  de  francais  avez-vous  par  semaine  ?  13.  La 
legon  finira-t-elle  dans  une  demi-heure  ?  1 4.  Quelle  longueur  a  le 
pupitre  de  votre  maitre  ?  15.  Est-ce  le  troisieme  jour  de  la  semaine 
aujourd'hui  ? 

Resume 

1.  The  first  month  of  this  year  has  31  days,  but  the  second  has 
only  28.  2.  Who  knows  the  name  of  the  twenty-first  day  of  this 
month?  3.  Do  you  need  any  cheese  today?  Yes,  I  want  two 
pounds.  4.  The  merchant  sold  me  two  dozen  (of)  eggs  at 
five  francs  a  dozen.  5.  How  much  did  these  shoes  cost?  Only 
twenty-five  francs  a  pair.  6.  Are  there  not  more  than  100  centimes 
in  a  franc  ?   7.  Which  is  the  ninth  month  of  the  year  ?  8.  Merchants 


NUMERALS  IN  EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME  ETC.     263 

sell  butter  by  the  pound  and  cloth  by  the  meter.   9.  £  and  f  make 

1  J.  10.  I  paid  25  centimes  a  kilogram  for  the  potatoes  I  bought. 
11.  The  merchant  of  {chez)  whom  she  was  buying  groceries  asked 

2  francs  25  a  pound  for  sugar.  12.  Which  is  the  general  whose 
soldiers  took  the  city  yesterday*?  13.  My  father  used  to  earn  $40  a 
month,  but  he  earns  more  now.  1 4.  He  asked  me  of  (chez)  whom  I 
had  bought  the  jewels  which  he  had  seen.  15.  Which  of  the  ladies 
was  the  one  to  whom  you  sold  80  meters  of  that  cloth?  16.  Of 
what  are  you  thinking?  Do  not  ask  me  of  what  I  am  thinking. 
17.  £  of  §  is  ^.  18.  Can  you  tell  me  what  is  the  ninth  part  of  27  ? 
19.  When  he  came  to  see  me  this  morning  he  stayed  two  hours 
and  a  half.  20.  Do  you  know  the  number  of  the  first  house  on  (of) 
this  street  ? 


LESSON  THIRTY-EIGHT 

NUMERALS  IN  EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME  ETC. 

220.  Years  in  Dates,  when  above  1000,  may  be  expressed 
in  two  ways.  Thus,  1920  may  be  either  mil  neuf  cent  vingt 
or  dix-neuf  cent  vingt,  the  latter  being  on  the  whole  the 
more  common  usage.  Mil,  rather  than  mille,  is  the  form 
generally  used  for  one  thousand  in  4ates. 

Note  i.   In  before  the  number  of  a  year  is  en. 

He  was  born  in  1815.   77  naquit  (past  def.)  en  mil  huit  cent  quinze. 

She  died  in  1856.  Elle  mourut  (past  def.)  en  dix-huit  cent  cinquante-six. 

I  was  born  in  1905.      Je  suis  ni{e)  en  dix-neuf  cent  cinq. 

The  year  192 1.  Van  dix-neuf  cent  vingt  et  un. 

Note  2.  When  a  person  is  no  longer  living,  the  French  generally 
use  the  past  definite  (or  the  past  indefinite  in  familiar  style)  to  express 
was  bom,  etc.  When  a  person  is  still  living,  the  past  indefinite  is 
ordinarily  used. 


264 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


221.  The  Names  of  the  Months,  written  without  capitals 


January 

Janvier 

July 

juillet 

February 

fevrier 

August 

aout 

March 

mars 

September 

septembre 

April 

avril 

October 

octobre 

May 

mat 

November 

novembre 

June 

juin 

December 

decembre 

Note.   In  before  names  of  months  is  en. 

222.  The  Days  of  the  Week,  written  without  capitals : 
Monday  lundi  Thursday  jeudi 


Tuesday 

mardi 

Friday 

vendredi 

Wednesday 

mercredi 

Saturday 

samedi 

Sunday 

dimanche 

223.  In  Dates  the  cardinals  are  used  except  for  the  first, 
the  masculine  definite  article  always  preceding.  No  prepo- 
sition is  used  in  connection  with  them. 

November  8th  le  huit  novembre 

the  twenty-fifth  of  December  le  vingt-cinq  decembre 

the  first  of  March  le  premier  mars 

on  the  fourth  of  July  le  quatre  juillet 

224.  Time  of  Day.  In  expressing  the  time  of  day,  heure, 
hour,  is  used  for  o  clock.  Time  past  the  hour  is  expressed  by 
the  number  for  the  hour  and  et ;  time  previous  to  the  hour, 
by  the  number  for  the  hour  and  moins.  The  et  is  usually 
omitted  before  minutes. 


one  o'clock 

two  o'clock 

half  past  three 

(a)  quarter  past  five 

(a)  quarter  of  ten 

five  minutes  past  eleven 


une  heure 

deux  heures 

trois  heures  et  demie 

cinq  heures  et  (or  un)  quart 

dix  heures  moins  le  (or  un)  quart 

onze  heures  cinq  (minutes) 


NUMERALS  IN  EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME  ETC.     265 

six  minutes  of  eight  huit  heures  moins  six  (minutes) 

9  a.m.  neuf  heures  du  matin 

9  p.m.  neuf  heures  du  soir 

What  time  is  it  ?  Quelle  heure  est-il  ? 

It  is  a  quarter  past  six.  //  est  six  heures  et  quart. 

I  shall  start  at  four.  Je  partirai  a  quatre  heures. 

Note.    Twelve  o'clock  is  never  expressed  by  douze  heures,  noon 
being  midi,  midnight  minuit. 

half  past  twelve  (p.m.),  midi  et  demi 

225.  Age  of  Persons.    In  expressing  a  person's  age,  avoir 
is  used  and  not  etre. 

How   old   are   you  (what   age      Quel  dge  avez-vous  ? 

have  you)? 
I  am  thirty  years  old  (I  have     faitrenteans. 

thirty  years). 
She  is  six.  Elle  a  six  ans. 

Note.   She  is  six  years  old  may  also  be  expressed  elle  est  agee  de 
six  ans. 

226.  In  Titles  of  Sovereigns  the  cardinals  are  used  except 
for  first,  in  which  case  the  ordinals  are  used. 

Louis  I  Louis  premier  (Ler) 

Louis  II  Louis  deux  (LL) 

Henry  IV  Henri  quatre  (LV) 

Louis  XV  of  France  Louis  quinze  (XV)  de  France 

Note.    Observe  that  the  definite  article  is  omitted  with  names  of 
countries  used  in  connection  with  a  sovereign. 

IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 

il  y  a,  ago  etre  a  l'heure,  to  be  on  time 

huit  jours,  a  week  d'aujourd'hui  en  huit,  a  week 

il  y  a  huit  jours,  a  week  ago  from  today 


266 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


yj.j7  EXERCISE 

i.  Express  in  French  the  dates  — 


March  2,  1872 
July  4,  1840 
August  1,  1 180 
December  26,  1533 

2.  Express  in  French  — 

it  is  nine  o'clock 
half  past  eight 
quarter  past  seven 
quarter  of  six 
ten  minutes  after  five 
twenty  minutes  of  four 

3.  Translate  into  French  - 
our  school  finishes  in  June 

we  go  home  Fridays 

the  second  of  May 

my  chum  was  born  in  1905 

Lincoln  was  born  on  February 

12,  1809 
William  II  of  England 
a  century  and  a  half 
we  remain  at  home  Saturdays 


January  13,  1771 

the  date  of  your  birth 

the  date  of  today 

George  Washington's  birthday 


3.47  A.M. 

2.o8  P.M. 

half  past  twelve  (two  ways,  a.  m. 

and  p.  m.) 
we  dine  at  seven 
we  dine  at  noon 


the  first  of  April 

in  December 

in  the  book 

in  the  city 

in  1898 

Louis  XI 

the  fifth  day 

the  second  president 

he  came  (on)  Tuesday 


Model  tjne  LEg0N  d'Histoire 

Cinq  jours  de  la  semaine  nous  sommes  en  classe,  mais  le  samedi 
nous  n'y  allons  pas.  Le  lundi,  par  exemple,  nous  dejeunons  de 
bonne  heure,  a  sept  heures  et  demie,  pour  etre  a  l'heure  a  l'ecole, 
car  les  legons  commencent  a  huit  heures  et  demie.  Elles  durent 
jusqu'a  midi.  De  midi  a  une  heure  nous  sommes  chez  nous.  A 
une  heure  nous  retournons  a  l'ecole,  ou  nous  restons  jusqu'a  quatre 


NUMERALS  IN  EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME  ETC.     267 

heures  et  demie.  Le  soir  nous  etudions  nos  lecons.  Ainsi  pour 
demain,  mercredi,  nous  avons  une  lecon  d'histoire.  Hier,  lundi,  le 
maitre  nous  a  donne  une  idee  de  l'histoire  de  France  de  Louis  XIV 
a  nos  jours.  Louis  XIV  naquit  le  16  septembre  1638,  et  mourut 
le  premier  septembre  17 15.  II  n'avait  que  cinq  ans  quand  il  devint 
roi,  et  son  regne  a  dure  soixante-douze  ans,  presque  trois  quarts 
de  siecle.  Sous  le  regne  de  Louis  XVI  eclata  la  Revolution,  qui  a 
dure  presque  six  ans.  Apres  la  Revolution  le  general  Bonaparte, 
ne  le  15  aout  1769,  est  devenu  le  maitre  de  la  France  a  Page  de 
trente  ans.  II  fut  couronne  empereur,  en  1804,  sous  le  nom  de 
Napoleon  Ier.  II  mourut  en  182 1  a  l'age  de  cinquante  et  un  ans. 
La  France  est  devenue  republique  pour  la  premiere  fois  en  1792, 
mais  elle  l'a  e^e  en  nom  seulement.  La  deuxieme  republique  a 
dure  moins  de  cinq  ans.  Sous  Napoleon  III  dclata  la  guerre  entre 
la  France  et  l'Allemagne,  qui  dura  du  15  juillet  1870  au  28  Janvier 
187 1.  Enfin  la  France  est  devenue  republique  pour  la  troisieme 
fois,  et  Test  encore.  D'aujourd'hui  en  huit  ce  sera  le  quatorze 
juillet,  la  fete  nationale.  Ce  sera  aussi  mon  anniversaire  de  naissance. 
J'aurai  seize  ans. 

Theme 

Today  (it)  is  Thursday,  the  first  of  June.  A  week  ago  it  was 
my  birthday.  I  was  born  May  26,  1904.  I  am  now  fifteen  years 
old.  My  brother  is  only  twelve.  My  sister  would  be  seventeen  if 
she  were  still  living.  She  died  eight  years  ago.  A  week  from  today 
will  be  my  brother's  birthday.  It  is  a  quarter  of  twelve,  and  in  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  we  shall  dine.  We  dine  generally  between 
twelve  and  half  past  twelve.  This  afternoon  we  have  a  history 
lesson,  the  reign  of  Louis  XVI.  He  was  born  on  the  23d  of 
August,  1754,  and  became  king  at  the  age  of  twenty.  It  was 
under  his  reign  that  the  Revolution  of  1789  broke  out.  He  was  be- 
headed on  January  21,1 793.  In  a  month  we  shall  be  having  a  vaca- 
tion. We  do  not  go  to  school  in  July  or  August.    But  what  time  is 


268  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

it  ?  Twenty  minutes  past  twelve,  and  dinner  is  not  yet  ready !   Shall 
I  be  at  school  on  time  ?   I  have  only  three  quarters  of  an  hour. 

Oral 

i.  Quel  jour  de  la  semaine  est-ce  aujourd'hui  ?  2.  Quel  jour  de 
la  semaine  etait-ce  hier  ?  3.  Quel  jour  de  la  semaine  sera-ce  demain  ? 
4.  Quelle  date  est-ce  aujourd'hui  ?  5.  fitait-ce  le  douze  hier  ?  6.  Quels 
sont  les  mois  du  printemps  ?  7 .  En  quel  mois  est  votre  anniversaire  ? 
8.  Quel  age  avez-vous  ?  9.  Quand  etes-vous  ne  ?  10.  Quel  age  a 
votre  pere?  11.  Combien  d'heures  y  a-t-il  dans  un  jour?  12.  Quelle 
heure  est-il  maintenant?  13.  Sous  le  regne  de  qui  eclata  la  Revo- 
lution francaise,  et  en  quelle  annee?  14.  A  quel  age  mourut  Napo- 
leon Ier  ?    15.  Depuis  quand  la  France  est-elle  une  republique  ? 

QUATRE  PERSONNAGES  DE  L'HISTOIRE  DE  FRANCE.  Louis  XIV  (ne 
en  1638,  roi  en  1643,  mort  en  17 15)  est  une  des  figures  les  plus  grandes  de 
la  longue  liste  de  rois  de  France.  Pendant  son  long  regne,  sa  cour  brillante 
fut  un  centre  de  litterature,  de  politique  et  de  culture,  et  lui-meme  fut 
rincarnation  de  la  phrase  souvent  a  lui  attribute  :  «  L'fitat,  c'est  moi.» 

Louis  XVI  succeda,  en  1774,  a  son  grand-pere  Louis  XV,  qui  lui-meme 
av'ait  succede  a  Louis  XIV.  Durant  le  regne  de  Louis  XV,  les  institutions 
politiques  et  autres,  fondees  sur  le  faux  idealisme  du  temps  de  Louis  XIV, 
se  desintegrerent  graduellement  et  surement.  La  catastrophe  etait  reservee 
au  faible  mais  bien  intentionne  Louis  XVI,  dont  le  regne  se  termina  avec 
sa  propre  execution  sur  l'echafaud  au  milieu  des  exces  de  la  Revolution 
francaise. 

Marie-Antoinette,  princesse  autrichienne,  la  belle  et  gracieuse  femme 
de  Louis  XVI,  devint  de  bonne  heure  impopulaire  a  cause  de  son  extra- 
vagance irreflechie  et  de  son  manque  de  sympathie  envers  le  peuple.  Son 
influence  funeste  precipita  la  chute  du  roi,  qu'elle  partagea  .  .  .  car  elle  fut 
guillotinee  neuf  mois  apres. 

La  Fayette,  brillant  et  liberal  Francais,  de  sang  noble,  vint  en  Amerique 
a  l'age  de  vingt  ans  et  servit  effectivement  avec  Washington  pendant  la 
Revolution  americaine.  Rentre  en  France,  ses  sympathies,  quoique  libe- 
rales,  n'etaient  pas  extremes,  et  il  ne  joua  pas  dans  la  Revolution  le  role 
important  qu'on  attendait  de  lui.  Dans  la  recente  guerre,  son  nom  a  souvent 
ete  mentionne  en  parlant  de  l'amitie  traditionnelle  des  deux  republiques. 


LOUIS  QUATORZE 


LA  FAYETTE 


MARIE-ANTOINETTE  LOUIS  SEIZE 

QUATRE   PERSONNAGES  DE   L'HISTOIRE   DE  FRANCE 


2/0  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Resume 

i.  My  brother  was  born  on  the  ioth  of  August,  1858.  2.  This 
bookseller  used  to  enter  his  store  every  morning  at  7.50.  3.  What 
part  of  28  is  7  ?  One  fourth,  is  it  not?  4.  In  France,  Monday  is 
the  first  day  of  the  week  and  Sunday  the  last.  5.  The  reign  of 
William  I,  one  of  the  greatest  kings  of  England,  lasted  from  1066 
to  1087.  6.  There  are  thirty  minutes  in  a  half  hour,  and  ninety 
minutes  make  an  hour  and  a  half.  7.  Your  sister  arrived  at 
12.15  p.m.  yesterday,  did  she  not?  8.  Will  you  tell  me  what 
time  it  is  (what  is  the  time),  please?  9.  It  is  now  quarter  of 
five;  he  is  coming  early.  10.  His  aunt  died  in  1899,  in  her 
eightieth  year.    11.  My  father  was  69  years  old  when  he  died. 

12.  Of  what  were  you  speaking  to  John?    Of  the  age  of  his  son. 

13.  How  old  is  the  youngest  of  your  children?  He  was  ten 
January  1  st.   1 4.  Can  you  tell  me  how  old  the  president  is  (Sec.  328)? 

15.  The  teacher  asked  us  who  the  oldest  boy  in  school  is  (Sec.  328). 

16.  Neither  my  brother  nor  my  sister  is  the  tallest  in  the  family; 
it  is  I.  17.  The  21st  of  June  is  generally  the  longest  day  of  the 
year.    18.  He  is  reading  French  to  a  child  only  six  years  old. 

19.  We  intend  to  leave  the  city  Friday  at  12.15.  a.  m.  if  all  goes  well. 

20.  It  is  now  1.30  ;  do  you  know  at  what  time  dinner  will  be  ready  ? 

REVIEW 

(Lessons  Thirty-six  to  Thirty-eight) 
A.  General  Drill 

1.  Count  up  to  21.  Pronounce  the  numbers  up  to  21  in 
connection  with  ami(s) ;  in  connection  with  maison(s) ;  in  con- 
nection with  hibou(x). 

2.  When  are  connectives  used  to  join  the  words  of  which 
a  numeral  is  composed  ?  What  connectives  are  used  ?  When 
are  numerals  pluralized  ? 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XXXVI-XXXVIII  271 

3.  Count  from  80  to  102. 

4.  Give  the  ordinals  up  to  twenty-second. 

5.  Give  the  names  of  the  months  ;  the  names  of  the  days 
of  the  week. 

6.  Give  French  sentences  containing  respectively  — 

demie  tiers  mil  midi 

cents  en  {prep.)  age  metre 

seconde  en  (pron.)  nee  francs 

7.  Express  in  French  — 

1 58 1  on  the  second  of  September 

it  is  10.20  o'clock  Henry  VIII  of  England 

it  is  12.03  P-M-  Peter  the  First 

it  was  2.15  f,  §>¥ 

is  it  7.55  ?  a  billion  francs 

how  old  is  he  ?  more  than  ten 

he  is  thirty-one  she  was  born  in  1887 

eggs  cost  a  franc  a  dozen  she  died  in  1903 

sugar  is  sold  by  the  pound  he  sings  Sundays 

he  came  twice  a  week  I  shall  arrive  on  Thursday 

this  room  is  ten  meters  long  they  came  in  October 

how  long  is  this  street  ?  last  July 

Aug.  11,  1906  the  year  1899 

8.  Replace  the  parentheses  by  French  words  : 

1.  II  a  (a)  femme,  (one)  fils,  mais  pas  (any)  filles. 

2.  Quarante  (one)  ou  quarante  (two). 

3.  (Fifteen)  jours,  (sixteen)  heures,  et  (seventeen)  minutes. 

4.  lis  ont  vendu  leur  (first)  maison  juillet  (first). 

5.  J'en  finirai  un  (fifth)  mars  (fifth). 

6.  (A  half)  heure  n'est  pas  si  longue  qu'une  heure  et  (a  half). 

7.  Nous  etions  (on)  le  bateau  (on)  le  quatre  juillet. 

8.  Les  (four)  eleves  sont  venus  a  (four)  hier. 


272  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

9.  (How  old)  a  la  (old)  dame  ? 

10.  II  a  demande  «  quelle  (time)  est-il »  dix  (times)  ou  peut-etre 
dix  (times)  dix. 

B.  Translate  into  French 

1 .  How  many  pupils  have  you  in  your  school  ?  I  have  less  than 
two  hundred  in  mine.  2.  Last  Friday,  December  21st,  was  the 
shortest  day  in  the  year.  3.  How  many  pounds  of  butter  have 
you  ?  I  have  more  than  seventeen.  4.  There  are  fifty-two  weeks 
and  one  or  two  days  in  a  year.  5.  There  are  three  months  in 
summer,  June,  July,  and  August ;  June,  the  shortest,  is  the  most 
beautiful  month  in  the  year.  6.  One  third  of  three  fourths  is  seven 
eighths  of  what  number  ?  7.  My  cousin  is  twenty-seven  years  old. 
He  was  born  on  October  29,  1894.  8.  A  hundred  years  ago,  in 
18 1 4,  France  was  attacked  by  many  enemies.  9.  They  left  for 
Paris  in  1903,  when  their  little  daughter  was  only  five  years  old. 
10.  We  went  to  Domremy  on  the  twelfth  of  September,  n,  He 
goes  out  every  day  at  10  a.m.  12.  Moliere  was  born  in  Paris  two 
hundred  and  ninety-nine  years  ago.  13.  In  19 16  there  were  more 
than  four  million  men  in  the  French  army.  1 4.  These  oranges  are 
dear.  They  cost  three  francs  a  dozen.  15.  I  shall  not  arrive  there 
early,  but  I  shall  be  on  time.  16.  George  V  is  now  king  of  Eng- 
land. His  father  was  Edward  VII.  17.  Eighty-one  divided  by 
twenty-seven  is  three.  18.  A  billion  is  a  thousand  times  a  million. 
19.  He  will  return  at  12.30  p.m.  20.  What  letters  are  in  the 
twentieth  word  and  what  in  the  twenty-first? 

Proverbes 
A  chaque  jour  sa  tache. 
Tel  qui  rit  vendredi,  dimanche  pleurera. 
Une  hirondelle  ne  fait  pas  le  printemps. 

Ne  remettez  pas  au  lendemain  ce  que  vous  pouvez  faire  la  veille. 
Pierre  qui  roule  n'amasse  pas  mousse. 
Quand  le  chat  n'y  est,  les  souris  dansent. 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS  273 

LESSON   THIRTY-NINE 

REFLEXIVE   VERBS 

• 

227.  A  Reflexive  Verb,  or  pronominal  verb,  is  one  which 
has  for  its  object  a  personal  pronoun  referring  to  the  same 
person  or  thing  as  the  subject :  he  cuts  himself. 

228.  Reflexive  Pronouns.  The  object  pronouns  used 
with  reflexive  verbs  are  called  reflexive  pronouns.  They  are 

Singular  Plural 

First  Person        me,  myself  nous,  ourselves 

Second  Person      te,  thyself  vous,  yourselves  (yourself) 

C  himself 

Third  Person       se-j  herself  se,  themselves 

{itself 

229.  The  Position  of  Reflexive  Pronouns  is  the  same  as 
that  of  conjunctive  object  pronouns  (Sees.  174,  175).  Se, 
however,  precedes  all  other  object  pronouns. 

II  se  lave.  He  washes  himself. 

Vous  ne  vous  habillez  pas.  You  do  not  dress  yourself. 

II  se  le  chante.  He  is  singing  it  to  himself 

230.  Auxiliary  with  Reflexives.  The  auxiliary  used  in 
conjugating  reflexive  verbs  is  always  etre.  When  the  reflexive 
pronoun  is  the  direct  object  of  the  verb,  the  past  participle 
agrees  with  it.  When  the  pronoun  is  the  indirect  object, 
the  participle  is  invariable. 

Elle  s'est  couple.  She  has  cut  herself. 

Elle  s'est  casse*  le  bras.  She  has    broken    her   arm    (to 

herself  has  broken  the  arm). 
Nous  ne  nous  y  etions  pas  perdus.       We  had  not  lost  ourselves  there. 


274 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


231 .  Synopsis  of  a  Reflexive.  The  synopsis,  together  with 
the  present  indicative  in  full,  of  se  trahir,  to  betray  ones  self,  is 

Simple  Tenses 

Infinitive  se  trahir,  to  betray  one's  self 

Pres.  Part.  se  trahissant,  betraying  one's  self 

Pres.  Ind.  je  me  trahis,  I  betray  myself 

tu  te  trahis,  thou  betrayest  thyself 

il  se  trahit,  he  betrays  himself 

nous  nous  trahissons,  we  betray  ourselves 

vous  vous  trahissez,  jy^w  betray  yourselves  {yourself) 

ils  se  trahissent,  they  betray  themselves 

je  me  trahissais,  /  was  betraying  myself 

je  me  trahis,  I  betrayed  myself 

je  me  trahirai,  I  shall  betray  myself 

je  me  trahirais,  I  should  betray  myself 

trahis-toi,  betray  thyself 

je  me  trahisse 

je  me  trahisse 

Perfect  Tenses 
s'etre  trahi,  to  have  betrayed  one's  self 
s'etant  trahi,  having  betrayed  one's  self 
je  me  suis  trahi,  /  have  betrayed  myself 
tu  t'es  trahi  etc. 

il  s'est  trahi 

nous  nous  sommes  trahis 
vous  vous  etes  trahi(s) 
ils  se  sont  trahis 
Pluperf.  Ind.      je  m'etais  trahi,  I  had  betrayed  myself 
Past  Ant.  je  me  fus  trahi,  I  had  betrayed  myself 

Fut.  Perf.  je  me  serai  trahi,  I  shall  have  betrayed  myself 

Cond.  Perf.         je  me  serais  trahi,  I  should  have  betrayed  myself 
Perf.  Subj.  je  me  sois  trahi 

Pluperf.  Subj.    je  me  fusse  trahi 


Imperfect 
Past  Definite 
Future 
Conditional 
Imperative 
Pres.  Subj. 
Imp.  Subj. 


Perf.  Inf. 
Perf.  Part. 
Past  Indef. 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS  275 

Note.  A  reflexive  pronoun  used  as  the  object  of  a  dependent  infini- 
tive takes  the  person  and  number  of  the  subject  of  the  governing  verb. 

We  do  not  wish  to  hurry.  Nous  ne  voulons  pas  nous  dipicher. 

232.  Interrogative  and  Negative  Forms.  The  rules  given 
already  for  the  formation  of  negative  and  interrogative 
conjugations  apply  without  change  to  reflexives.  The  fol- 
lowing examples  are  sufficient  to  illustrate  : 

Present  Indicative  Pluperfect  Indicative 

Interrogative  • 

est-ce  que  je  me  trahis  ?  est-ce  que  je  m'e'tais  trahi  ? 

te  trahis-tu  ?  t'etais-tu  trahi  ? 

se  trahit-il  ?  s'e'tait-il  trahi  ? 

etc.  »  etc. 

Negative 

je  ne  me  trahis  pas  je  ne  m'etais  pas  trahi 

tu  ne  te  trahis  pas  tu  ne  t'etais  pas  trahi 

il  ne  se  trahit  pas  il  ne  s'etait  pas  trahi 

etc.  etc. 

Negative-Interrogative 

est-ce  que  je  ne  me  trahis  pas  ?      est-ce   que   je   ne   m'e'tais   pas 

trahi  ? 
ne  te  trahis-tu  pas  ?  ne  t'etais-tu  pas  trahi  ? 

ne  se  trahit-il  pas  ?  ne  s'e'tait-il  pas  trahi  ? 

etc.  etc. 

233.  Reflexives  and  Intensives  must  be  carefully  dis- 
tinguished. The  latter  were  introduced  in  Sec.  179.  A  re- 
flexive is  always  an  object  and  refers  to  the  subject ;  an 
intensive  emphasizes  an  expressed  noun  or  pronoun.  The 
following  illustrations  show  the  distinction  : 


276 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


He  loves  himself  (ref.) 
He  did  it  himself  (inten.) 
They  burned  Joan  herself  (inten.) 

234.  Reflexive  and  Simple  Verbs 


//  s'aime. 

II  Pa  fait  lui-mime. 

lis  bruVerent  Jeanne  elle-meme. 

Careful  attention  must 


be  given  to  the  difference  in  use  and  meaning  between  a 
simple  active  verb  and  its  reflexive. 

arreter,  to  stop  (a  thing,  a  per-      s'arreter,  to  stop  (one's  self) 

son) 
coucher,  to  put  (a  person)  to  bed 


approcher,    to   bring  (a  thing) 
near 

235.  Idiomatic  Reflexives. 


se  coucher,  to  put  (one's  self)  to 

bed,  go  to  bed . 
s'approcher  de,  to   bring  one's 

self  near,  approach 

A  French  reflexive  verb  is 


often  equivalent  to  an  English  int/ansitive  verb  or  verbal 
phrase.    Among  these  are 


s'amuser,  to  have  a  good  time 

se  coiffer,  to  fix  one's  hair 

se    depecher    (de),    to    hurry, 

hasten  (to) 
s'habiller,  to  dress  (one's  self) 

See  also  Sec.  234. 


se  lever,  to  arise,  get  up 
se  peigner,  to  comb  one's  hair 
se  promener,  to  take  a  walk 
se  re'veiller,  to  waken 
se  trouver,  to  be 


Drill 


EXERCISE 


i.  Give  the  full  conjugation  of  trahir  in  the  simple  tenses. 
2.  Give  the  — 


past  definite  of  se  coucher 
conditional  of  s'arreter,  neg. 
past   indefinite   of    se   trouver, 

int. 
present  of  se  laver,  neg. -int. 
imperfect  of  se  perdre 


present  subjunctive  of  se  trahir, 

neg. 
imperative  of  se  coucher 
past  anterior  of  se  louer,  neg.-int. 
synopsis  of  se  rendre 
imperative  of  se  coiffer,  neg. 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS 


277 


3.  Express  in  French  — 
he  had  found 

he  had  found  himself 

she  has  found  herself 

he  punishes  himself 

he  punished  his  children  himself 

we  were  stopping 

hurry 

let  us  hurry 

shall  I  show  myself  ? 

4.  Express  in  French  — 
he  stopped  the  horse 

he  stopped  near  me 

he  put  the  child  to  bed 

he  went  to  bed 

he  brings  the  child  near  the  door 

he  approaches  the  door 


did  he  love  himself  ? 
did  he  not  love  himself  ? 
we  shall  find  ourselves 
we  shall  find  it  ourselves 
we  found  ourselves 
had  she  betrayed  herself  ? 
he  is  talking  to  himself 
he  said  it  to  himself 
he  himself  said  it 


he  arises 

he  raises  the  bag 

she  is  having  a  good  time 

she  wakens  early 

take  a  walk 

hasten  to  start 


5.  Continue  — 

je  m'approche  de  la  foret 
je  ne  me  punis  pas 
je  lave  les  fen£tres  moi-meme 
ne  me  suis-je  pas  deja  couche  ? 


Model  La  Journee 

Quand  je  me  reveille  le  matin  a  sept  heures,  je  me  frotte  les 
yeux.  Puis  je  m'approche  du  lit  de  mon  frere  et  le  reveille  aussi. 
II  se  leve  (Sec.  248)  bien  vite  et  nous  allons  dans  la  salle  de  bain 
pour  nous  laver  les  mains  et  la  figure  avec  de  l'eau  et  du  savon. 
Nous  nous  brossons  les  dents  avec  notre  brosse  a  dents.  Ensuite 
nous  nous  brossons  les  cheveux  avec  la  brosse  a  cheveux  et  nous 
prenons  le  peigne,  avec  lequel  nous  nous  peignons.    Lorsque  nous 


278  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

nous  sommes  coiffes,  nous  nous  depechons  de  nous  habiller,  et  en 
une  demi-heure  nous  sommes  prets.  A  sept  heures  et  demie  nous 
nous  trouvons  dans  la  salle  a  manger,  ou  nous  trouvons  nos  parents 
qui  nous  attendent.  Quand  nous  avons  fini,  nous  allons  alors  a 
Pecole.  Le  soir  apres  le  souper,  quand  nous  avons  e'tudie  les 
lecons  que  le  maitre  nous  a  donnees  pour  le  lendemain,  nous  nous 
couchons.  Hier  c'etait  dimanche.  Nous  nous  sommes  leves  tard, 
et  dans  l'apres-midi  nous  nous  sommes  promenes  avec  nos  parents. 
Nous  nous  sommes  arrete's  une  heure  chez  des  amis  de  mon  pere. 
Nous  nous  sommes  bien  amuse's. 

Theme 

This  morning  I  awoke  late.  It  was  already  half  past  seven  when 
I  got  up.  I  went  at  once  to  the  bathroom  to  wash  my  hands  and 
face.  My  brother  was  (se  trouver)  there,  and  had  already  washed. 
"Let  us  hurry,"  said  he  to  me  (Sec.  328,  a),  "or  we  shall  not  be  on 
time  at  school."  While  I  was  washing  my  face,  he  took  the  comb 
and  the  brush  to  fix  his  hair.  As  1  could  not  find  my  toothbrush, 
I  did  not  clean  my  teeth.  I  dressed  in  ten  minutes,  and  at  ten 
minutes  of  eight  I  found  myself  in  the  dining-room,  where  the 
others  were  waiting  for  me.  M  You  will  not  go  to  bed  so  late  any 
more,"  said  my  father  to  me.  M  Hurry  and  (to)  eat,  you  and  your 
brother,  and  do  not  stop  on  the  way  to  {pour)  school."  We  arrived 
on  time,  but  we  surely  should  have  arrived  late  if  we  had  played  a 
minute  or  two  on  the  way. 

Oral 

1.  Qui  vous  reveille  le  matin?  2.  Vous  levez-vous1  de  bonne 
heure  ou  tard  ?  3.  A  quelle  heure  vous  etes-vous  reveille  dimanche 
dernier?  4.  Pourquoi  allez-vous  dans  la  salle  de  bain?  5.  Avec 
quoi  vous  lavez-vous  ?  6.  De  quoi  avez-vous  besoin  pour  vous 
brosser  les  dents?    7.  Que  faites-vous  avec  le  peigne?    8.  Que 

1  The  reply,  je  me  leve,  has  the  accent  (Sec.  248). 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS  279 

faites-vous  quand  vous  vous  etes  lave  et  coiffe  ?  9.  Ou  se  trouve 
la  salle  a  manger  ?    10.  Quel  jour  de  la  semaine  vous  amusez-vous  ? 

11.  Vous  etes-vous   promene   dans  le   pare   dimanche  •  dernier  ? 

12.  Combien  de  personnes  y  a-t-il  dans  votre  f amille  ?  13.  Com- 
ment trouvez-vous  le  f rancais  ?    1 4.  Vous  amusez-vous  en  classe  ? 

15.  Vous  trompez-vous  souvent  quand  vous  recitez? 

Resume 

1.  He  betrays  himself  when  he  says  that.  2.  They  dressed 
themselves  and  went  to  the  ball.  3.  The  army  is  rapidly  approach- 
ing the  city.  4.  They  went  to  bed  at  six  o'clock,  but  they  are  still 
sleepy.  5.  He  cannot  brush  his  teeth  because  he  has  no  tooth- 
brush. 6.  He  used  to  get  up  at  6.15  every  morning.  7.  My  sister 
put  her  children  to  bed  at  12.15  A-M-  8-  Children  like  neither  to 
wash  their  faces  nor  to  comb  their  hair.  9.  The  doctor's  wife,  who 
came  this  morning,  will  stay  here  a  week.  10.  We  were  taking  a 
walk  when  we  met  you  and  your  sister.  11.  We  can  never  find 
what  we  need  in  this  store.  12.  They  have  with  them  the  books 
they  bought  for  themselves.  13.  It  is  7.45  ;  wake  up  quickly, 
breakfast  is  ready.  14.  At  what  time  do  you  intend  to  go  to  bed 
this  evening  ?    15.  Which  of  the  boys  will  stop  at  the  store  for  me  ? 

16.  This  man  never  betrays  himself;  will  he  betray  his  friend? 

17.  The  little  girl  fell  from  the  tree  and  broke  her  arm.  18.  Hurry, 
we  have  been  waiting  for  you  a  long  time.  19. 'Are  you  not 
stopping  her  ?  Surely  you  are  not  afraid  of  our  dog,  20.  Had  they 
dressed  when  the  bell  rang  ? 

Proverbes 

Qui  s'excuse,  s'accuse. 

Au  dela  des  Alpes  se  trouve  ITtalie. 

A  qui  se  leve  matin,  Dieu  prete  la  main. 


28o 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


LESSON   FORTY 


PASSIVE  VOICE 

236.  The  Passive  Voice  of  transitive  verbs  is  formed  in 
French  by  combining  the  past  participle  with  the  auxiliary 
6tre.    Thus,  the  synopsis  of  the  passive  of  sauver,  to  save,  is 

Simple  Tenses 


Infinitive 

£tre  sauve 

to  be  saved 

Pres.  Part. 

e^ant  sauve 

being  saved 

Pres.  Ind. 

je  suis  sauve 

I  am  saved 

Imperfect 

j'etais  sauve 

I  was  being  saved 

Past  Definite 

je  fus  sauve 

I  was  saved 

Future 

je  serai  sauve 

I  shall  be  saved 

Conditional 

je  serais  sauve 

I  should  be  saved 

Imperative 

sois  sauve 

be  saved 

Pres.  Subj. 

je  sois  sauve 

Imp.  'Subj. 

je  fusse  sauve 

Perfect  Tenses 

Perf.  Inf. 

avoir  ete  sauve 

to  have  been  saved 

Perf.  Part. 

ayant  ete  sauve 

having  been  saved 

Past  Indefinite 

j'ai  ete  sauve 

J I  have  been  saved 
\  I  was  saved 

Pluperf.  Ind. 

j'avais  ete  sauve 

J  had  been  saved 

Past.  Ant. 

j'eus  ete  sauve 

I  had  been  saved 

Fut.  Perf. 

j'aurai  ete  sauve 

I  shall  have  been  saved 

Cond.  Perf. 

j'aurais  ete  sauve 

I  should  have  been  saved 

Perf.  Subj. 

j'aie  ete  sauve 

Pluperf.  Subj. 

j'eusse  ete  sauve 

237.  Agreement  in  Passive.  In  the  passive  voice  the 
past  participle  must  agree  with  the  subject,  Stre  being  the 
auxiliary  (see  Sec.  160). 


PASSIVE  VOICE 


281 


Elle  est  perdue, 
lis  ont  e'te  trouvgs. 


She  is  lost. 

They  have  been  found. 


238.  The  Tenses  in  the  Passive  have  the  same  distinc- 
tions as  in  the  active. 

TT  ,  [  II  a  ete  sauve  (Sec.  1  x  <:)• 

He  was  saved.  «  -_  *  ,     v  O0J 

y  II  Jut  sauve. 

He  would  be  saved.  //  serait  sauve.      *• 

He  would  have  been  saved.  II  aurait  ete  sauve. 

239.  The  Interrogative  and  Negative  Forms  of  the  passive 
voice  are  made  according  to  the  rules  that  apply  to  perfect 
tenses.    The  following  examples  are  sufficient  to  illustrate : 


Imperfect  Indicative 
Passive 


Pluperfect  Indicative 
Passive 


est-ce  que  j'etais  sauve  ? 
etais-tu  sauve  ? 
etait-il  sauvd  ? 
e'tions-nous  sauves  ? 
etc. 

je  n'etais  pas  sauve 
tu  n'etais  pas  sauve 
il  n'e'tait  pas  sauve 
nous  n'etions  pas  sauves 
etc. 


Interrogative 

est-ce  que  j'avais  e'te  sauve? 
avais-tu  ete  sauve  ? 
avait-il  e'te  sauve  ? 
avions-nous  ete  sauve's  ? 
etc. 

Negative 

je  n'avais  pas  ete  sauve 
tu  n'avais  pas  ete  sauve 
il  n'avait  pas  ete  sauve 
nous  n'avions  pas  ete  sauves 
etc. 


Negative-Interrogative 


est-ce  que  je  n'etais  pas  sauve  ? 
n'etais-tu  pas  sauve  ? 
n'etait-il  pas  sauve  ? 
n'e'tions-nous  pas  sauves  ? 
etc. 


est-ce  que  j e  n'avais  pas  ete  sauve  ? 
n 'avais-tu  pas  ete  sauve  ? 
n'avait-il  pas  ete  sauve  ? 
n'avions  nous  pas  ete  sauves  ? 
etc. 


282  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

240.  Agent  after  Passives.  The  agent  or  instrument  after 
a  passive  verb  is  expressed 

a.  By  par  when  the  verb  denotes  a  specific  action. 
He  was  bitten  by  the  dog.  II  a  ete  mordu  par  le  chien. 

b.  By  de  when  the  verb  denotes  an  emotion  or  an  habitual 
action  or  state. 

He  is  loved  by  his  friends.  II  est  aime  de  ses  amis. 

IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 

car,  for  (conj.)  d^pendre  de,  to  depend  upon 

pour,  for  {prep.)  eMter  de  (+  inf.),  to  avoid 

a  regard  de,  with  regard  to  rendre  responsable  de,  to  hold  re- 
en  gtat  de,  in  a  state  of,  under  sponsible  for 

d£fendre  a  ...  de,  to  forbid  ...  to  servir  de,  to  serve  for  (as) 

Drill  EXERCISE 

1.  Give  the  full  passive  conjugation  of  punir  (a)  in  the 
simple  tenses,  (b)  in  the  compound  (perfect)  tenses. 

2.  Give  the  — 

present  passive  of  choisir,  neg.  pluperfect   subjunctive   passive 

imperfect  passive  of  donner,  int.  of  aimer 

future  passive  of  trouver,  neg.-  conditional  perfect  of  se  vendre, 

int.  neg. 

past  anterior  active  of  se  trouver,  imperative  passive  of  sauver 

int.  present  subjunctive  passive  of 

future  passive  of  entendre  punir,  neg. -int. 

3.  Express  in  French  — 

he  saves  she  saved  they  will  find 

he  is  saved  she  was  saved  they  will  be  found 

he  has  saved  she  had  saved  they  will  have  found 

he  has  been  saved  she  has  been  saved  they  will  have  been  found 


PASSIVE  VOICE  283 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

the  desk  was  broken  by  the  boys      the  suit  was  made  by  the  tailor 
the  general  was  loved  by  his     it  is  forbidden  to  enter 
soldiers  I  shall  be  held  responsible 

5 .  Supply  the  French  for  the  ^ords  in  parentheses : 

Je  (was)  chez  moi  hier.  Je  (was  hungry),  et  apres  que  la  lecon 
(was  finished),  je  (was  reading)  en  attendant  le  diner.  Ma  soeur 
(was)  huit  ans  (old)  quand  elle  (was)  mordue  (by)  un  chien.  Nous 
avons  envoye  chercher  un  medecin,  et  sa  vie  (was  saved). 

Model  tjne  Proclamation  Allemande 

Pendant  la  grande  guerre  des  proclamations  furent  africhees  par 
les  Allemands  dans  les  villes  qu'ils  avaient  prises.  Le  8  septembre 
19 1 4,  le  commandant  Mager  donna  l'ordre  d'afficher  a  Soissons 
celle  dont  la  photographie  est  a  la  page  285.  Cette  photographie 
nous  sert  de  modele.    Traduisons  la  proclamation. 

Theme 

The  German  invasion  of  France  took  place  in  August,  19 14. 
Each  time  that  a  city  was  taken,  proclamations  were  posted  on  the 
walls  of  the  public  buildings  of  the  city.  In  the  proclamation  which 
is  found  in  this  lesson  it  was  said  that  after  eight  o'clock  in  the 
evening  it  was  forbidden  to  the  inhabitants  of  Soissons  to  move 
about  in  the  streets  of  the  city.  This  proclamation  was  signed  by 
Commander  Mager,  who  represented  the  German  military  authority. 
The  proclamation  added  that  any  person  would  be  immediately 
imprisoned  if  he  was  found  in  the  streets  after  that  hour  without 
a  special  authorization.  When  the  enemy  entered  a  city,  the  inhab- 
itants had  {devaient)  to  avoid  any  threat  or  hostile  act  with  regard 
to  the  enemy's  troops.  This  is  what  was  recalled  to  the  inhabitants 
of  Soissons.  The  children  were  (devaient)  to  be  kept  at  their 
parents'.    If  the  latter  did  not  avoid  letting  them  wander  about, 


284  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

they  would  be  made  responsible  for  the  misdeeds  which  might  be 
(have  beenj  committed  by  their  children.  The  parents  did  not  let 
their  children  wander  about,  for  the  latter  would  have  been  held 
under  arrest  if  they  had  been  met  wandering  about  in  the  streets. 

Oral 

i.  Par  ordre  de  qui  la  proclamation  a-t-elle  ete  affichee  ?  2.  Pour 
qui  la  proclamation  a-t-elle  ete  affichee  ?  3.  Ou  a-t-elle  ete  affichee? 

4.  Apres  quelle  heure  etait-il  defendu  de  circuler  dans  les  rues? 

5.  Que  devaient  avoir  les  habitants  pour  circuler  dans  les  rues  apres 
huit  heures  ?  6.  Si  vous  etes  trouve  dans  la  rue  apres  huit  heures 
ce  soir,  serez-vous  incarcere  ?  7.  Que  devaient  eviter  les  habitants 
de  Soissons  ?  8.  De  quoi  dependait  la  se'curite  ?  9.  Oil  les  enfants 
doivent-ils  etre  garde's  pendant  une  invasion  ?  1  o.  Que  doivent 
eviter  les  parents  ?  1 1 .  De  quoi  sont-ils  rendus  responsables  ? 
i2.*N'etes-vous  pas  prevenu  que  vous  serez  puni  si  vous  n'etudiez 
pas  votre  lecon?  13.  Est-il  de'fendu  de  parler  anglais  en  classe? 
14.  Etes-vous  rendu  responsable  de  vos  actes  a  Fecole  ?  15.  Seriez- 
vous  puni  si  vous  n'arriviez  pas  a  l'heure  ? 

Resume 

1.  My  little  sister  is  lost ;  have  you  seen  her  ?  2.  The  table  was 
finished  when  I  arrived.  3.  The  boys  had  not  been  found  this 
morning  when  the  teacher  left.  4.  The  man  was  attacked  by  the 
dog,  was  he  not  ?  5.  These  books  were  not  given  to  you  but  to 
me.  6.  These  big  red  apples  had  been  given  the  children  by  their 
parents.  7.  Were  these  the  jewels  which  were  bought  by  your 
aunt  ?  8.  When  will  the  lesson  be  finished  ?  9.  If  I  had  not  arrived, 
my  house  would  not  have  been  saved.  10.  The  city  of  Soissons 
was  taken  by  the  Germans  in  19 14.  11.  He  was  stopped  at  the 
door  by  the  men.  12.  It  is  forbidden  to  leave  the  city.  13.  It  was 
forbidden  to  move  about  in  the  streets.  14.  Nobody  was  seen  in  the 
streets  after  eight  o'clock  during  the  German  invasion.  15.  Every- 
body in  the  city  is  kept  under  arrest.   1 6.  Many  people  were  punished 


VILLI  DE  SOISSONS 


S  Septerabre  1944. 

La  population  de  Soissons  est  prevenue  que,  par  ordre  de 
I'Aulorile  mililaire  allemande,  il  est  expressement  defend  u  de 
circuler  dans  les  rues  de  la  Ville  apres  huil  heures  da  soir.  Toute 
personoe  trouvee  dans  Jes  rues  apres  huil  heures  du  soir,  saos 
aulorisation  speciale  du  Commandant  des  troupes  allemandes,  sera 
immediatement  incarceree. 

II  esl  rappele dune  facoo  expresse  que  (a  population  de  la  Ville 
doit  eviler  d'uoe  facon  absolue  loute  menace,  violence  ouacle  hostile 
a  legard  des  Aulorites  el  des  troupes  allemandes.  La  securile  el  la 
vie  des  auteurs  de  ces  acles  en  depend. 

Les  parents  doivenl  garder  leurs  enfanls  chez  eux,  eviter  de  les 
laisser  vagabonder  Les  parents  seront  rendus  responsables  de  tous 
les  mefaits,  delils  el  contraventions  commis  par  leurs  enfanls.  Si 
ceux-ci  sont  rencontres  errant  ou  vagaboodaot  dans  les  rues,  ils 
seront  maintcnus  en  elat  d'arrestation  jusqu'a  ce  que  les  parents 
viennent  les  reclamer. 


Le  Comite  de  Secours.        a 

Oberleutentml. 


286  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

in  Soissons  by  the  Germans.  17.  The  parents  would  be  held 
responsible  for  their  children.  18.  Were  you  seized  by  the  officer 
when  you  were  walking  ?  19.  Joan  of  Arc  was  burned  by  the  Eng- 
lish, May  30,  1 43 1.    20.  She  was  much  loved  by  all  her  soldiers. 

LESSON   FORTY-ONE 

SPECIAL  USES  OF  THE  PASSIVE  AND  THE  REFLEXIVE 

241.  The  English  Passive.  The  passive  voice  is  used  less 
freely  in  French  than  in  English.  In  English  it  has  two  uses  : 
first,  to  denote  an  action  that  is  in  progress,  as  the  windows 
were  being  closed  when  I  approached,  or  windows  are  closed 
(habitually)  when  it  begins  to  rain ;  second,  to  denote  a 
completed  action  or  a  state,  as  the  windows  were  closed  by  the 
time  I  arrived,  or  windows  are  {kept)  closed  in  winter.  The 
second  of  these  alone  may  be  represented  in  French  by  the 
passive  form  of  the  verb. 

The  boy  is  found.  Le  garcon  est  trouvi. 

The  lesson  was  finished.  La  lecon  itaitfinie. 

This  castle  is  well  known  (state).       Ce  chateau  est  bien  connu. 

Note.  A  test  for  the  second  of  the  types  above  is  that  when  such 
expressions,  denoting  action,  are  transposed  into  the  active  form,  they 
call  for  a  perfect  (or  pluperfect)  tense.  The  first  two  sentences  above 
thus  become,  respectively,  they  have  found  the  boy,  they  had  finished 
the  lesson.  On  the  other  hand,  when  being  can  be  prefixed  to  the  English 
verb,  it  marks  the  first  type,  where  the  French  passive  is  impossible. 

242.  French  Substitutes  for  the  Passive.  The  first  construc- 
tion of  §  241  —  when  an  action  is  actually  being  performed, 
either  at  a  definite  time  or  habitually  —  is  expressed 

a.  By  the  reflexive.  This  is  found  especially  in  expres- 
sions denoting  that  the  action  spoken  of  is  permanent. 


SPECIAL  USES  OF  PASSIVE  AND  REFLEXIVE      287 

French  is  spoken  in  Brussels.  Lefrancais  se  parte  a  Bruxelles. 

Many  verbs  are  conjugated  with     Bien  des  verbes  se  conjuguent  avec 
etre.  etre. 

b.  By  the  use  of  the  indefinite  pronoun  on  (one,  we,  you, 
they)  and  the  third  person  singular  of  the  active  verb.  In 
such  expressions  the  subject  in  English  becomes  the  direct 
object  in  French. 

Wood  is  sold  (one  sells  wood).  On  vend  du  bois. 

French  is  spoken  here.  Ici  on  parte  /ran  fats. 

She  was  often  punished.  On  la  punissait  souvent. 

The  book  will  be  given  to  the  boy.  On  donnera  le  livre  au  gar  eon. 

c.  By  a  transposition  to  the  active  voice,  the  agent  being 
made  the  subject. 

The  house  was  being  built  by      Monfrere  batissait  la  maison. 
my  brother. 

243.  On  as  Indefinite  Subject.  On  is  also  used  for  an 
indefinite  subject. 

On  parle.  Somebody  speaks. 

Onnetravaille  pas  les  dimanches.  People  do  not  work  Sundays. 

On  ne  fume  pas  ici.  No  smoking  here. 

Fume-t-on  ici  ?  Do  they  smoke  here  ? 

Note  i.  In  the  matter  of  position  on  is  treated  as  a  personal  pronoun. 

Note  2.  On  frequently  becomes  l'on  when  preceded  by  et,  si,  oil,  ou, 

or  que ;  seldom,  however,  when  a  word  closely  following  begins  with  1. 

Elle  ne  restera  pas  si  l'on   fume      She  will  not  stay  if  there  is  smoking 
dans  votre  chambre.  in  your  room. 

Note  3.  Since  on  is  always  grammatically  of  the  third  person,  the 
corresponding  possessive  adjective  is  son;  the  corresponding  reflexive 


On  aime  ses  amis.  We  love  our  friends. 

On  peut  se  passer  de  cafe.  You  {people)  can  do  without  coffee. 


288 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 


accrocher  a,  to  hang  on 
assister  a,  to  be  present  at,  attend 


les  meubles  m.,  the  furniture 
se  passer  de,  to  do  without 


Tj..?  EXERCISE 

1 .  Give  the  present  indicative  passive  of  punir ;  the  present 
indicative  active  of  se  couper. 

2.  Give  the  synopsis  of  se  rendre  in  the  active ;  in  the 
passive. 

3.  Express  in  French  — 
he  found  a  flower 
he  had  found  a  flower 
the  flowers  were  found 
flowers  are  'found  in  gardens 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 
somebody  is  singing 
birds  are  found  in  forests 
the  rich  attend  the  theater  often 
English  is  spoken  here 
the  chair  was  broken  by  your 

brother 
do  you  like  my  furniture  ? 
no  playing  in  this  room 
the  windows  are  closed  at  six 

o'clock 
were  they  closed  when  you  came 

in? 

Model 


you  found  my  flowers 
you  (they)  put  flowers  in  vases 
these  flowers  were  found  by  him 
(two  ways) 

you  cannot   live   in   one  room 

always 
we  love  our  friends  (two  ways) 
we  love  John 
people  flatter  their  friends 
the  house  was   sold   while   he 

stayed  there 
horses  are  sold  there 
she  is  loved  by  all 
no  passing  here 
he  will  not  stay  if  they  smoke 

there 


Les  Chateaux 

Les  chateaux  de  France  sont  connus  de  beaucoup  de  monde. 
Quelques-uns  furent  construits  par  des  rois  et  d'autres  par  des  sei- 
gneurs. Leur  architecture  est  beaucoup  admiree,  et  les  decorations 


SPECIAL  USES  OF  PASSIVE  AND  REFLEXIVE      289 

de  l'inte'rieur  furent  concues  par  des  artistes  de  grand  merite. 
Les  environs  du  pays  011  s'elevent  ces  chateaux  sont  generalement 
tres  jolis.  On  ne  peut  pas  visiter  tous  ces  chateaux,  mais  quelques- 
uns  sont  ouverts  au  public.  Les  visiteurs  peuvent  ainsi  voir  les 
reliques  et  les  meubles  anciens  qui  s'y  trouvent,  ainsi  que  les 
tableaux  et  tapisseries  qui  sont  accroches  aux  murs.  On  ne  trouve 
pas  facilement  le  sujet  de  ces  tableaux  dans  les  musees,  parce  que 
les  scenes  qui  y  sont  repre'sente'es  sont  souvent  un  incident  de  la 
vie  de  ces  seigneurs.  L'un  des  plus  beaux  de  ces  chateaux  est 
celui  de  Chenonceaux.  II  a  l'air  d'etre  construit  au  milieu  du 
fleuve,  et  Ton  ne  se  trompe  pas,  car  il  Test.  II  a  ete  construit  sous 
Francois  Ier,  qui  le  donna  a  Diane  de  Poitiers.  II  fut  occupe  aussi 
par  Catherine  de  Medicis.  Le  chateau  a  ete  achete  recemment 
par  un  riche  industriel  francos.  Un  autre  chateau  de  la  Renais- 
sance se  trouve  au  milieu  de  la  plus  belle  foret  de  la  France.  C'est 
celui  de  Chambord,  qui  fut  bati  aussi  par  Francois  Ier.  En  entrant 
par  une  porte  qui  ne  s'ouvrait  qu'aux  rois,  on  trouve  dans  une  des 
salles  des  reliques  du  comte  de  Chambord,  lequel,  autrefois,  etait 
conside're  comme  roi  legitime  par  les  royalistes.  C'est  dans  une 
des  salles  du  chateau  que  Moliere  donna  des  representations  aux- 
quelles  assista  Louis  XIV. 

Theme 

In1  the  center  of  France  are  found  some  of  the  superb  build- 
ings of  the  Renaissance.  Their  beauty  is  spoken  of  throughout 
(in)  the  entire  world.  They  were  built  centuries  ago.  There  the 
kings  enjoyed  themselves  a  part  of  the  year  among  the  pretty 
gardens  which  were  to  be  found  all  around  these  castles.  One  of 
these  castles  whose  architecture  is  much  admired  is  that  of 
Chambord,  which  Francis  the  First  built.  It  was  occupied  under 
Napoleon  the  Third  by  the  count  of  Chambord,  whom  the  royalists 
considered  as  the  legitimate  king.    In2  one  of  the  rooms  of  this 

1  It  is  in  the  center  of  France  that  ...  2  It  is  in  one  .  .  .  that  .  .  . 


290  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

castle  Louis  the  Fourteenth  was  present  at  several  performances 
which  were  given  by  Moliere.  One  of  these  castles  also  is  erected 
in  the  village  of  Chenonceaux.  It  was  given  to  Diane  de  Poitiers 
by  Francis  the  First,  for  whom  it  had  been  built.  A  rich  French 
manufacturer  is  the  owner  of  it  now.  He  is  enjoying  himself  in 
the  same  parlors  which  were  opened  formerly  only  to  the  kings 
and  the  lords,  and  where  are  still  found  relics  and  old  furniture. 
The  life  of  the  visitors  of  today  is  quite  different  from  that  of  the 
persons  who  are  represented  in  the  pictures  or  on  the  tapestries 
hung  on  the  walls. 

Oral 

i.  Ou  le  francais  se  parle-t-il  ?  2.  Parle-t-on  francais  chez  vous  ? 
3.  Chez  qui  vend-on  des  livres  ?  4.  Parle-t-on  francais  chez  votre 
libraire?  5.  Travaille-t-on  le  dimanche?  6.  Fume-t-on  a  l'eglise? 
7.  Peut-on  se  passer  longtemps  de  manger?  8.  De  qui  le  maitre 
est-il  obei  ?  9.  Ne  vous  trompez-vous  pas  souvent  en  classe  ? 
10.  L'encrier  se  casserait-il  s'il  tombait?  11.  Quand  l'ecole  sera- 
t-elle  fermee?  12.  Par  qui  fut  bati  le  chateau  de  Chambord  ? 
13.  Le  musee  est-il  ouvert  au  public  le  dimanche?  14.  Avec  quel 
verbe  auxiliaire  se  conjugue  le  verbe  a//erl  15.  Parle-t-on  francais 
au  Canada? 

Resume 

1.  The  little  girl  was  found  by  her  mother.  2.  All  these  castles 
were  burned  in  the  fifteenth  century.  3.  It  is  forbidden  to  smoke 
in  this  room.  4.  They  were  speaking  of  their  friends  when  I 
entered.  5.  Shall  you  attend  the  ball  which  will  be  given  Janu- 
ary 6th?  6.  Beautiful  palaces  are  seen  everywhere  in  Europe. 
7.  Is  there  much  smoking  in  the  cities  of  France  ?  8.  More  verbs 
are  conjugated  with  avoir  than  with  etre.  9.  Fresh  water  can 
always  be  found  in  this  garden.  10.  At  what  time  are  these 
museums  closed  to  the  public?     11.  French  is  still  spoken  in 


ESCALIER  AU  CHATEAU  DE  CHAMBORD 


Nous  avons  parle  des  chateaux  de  France  a  la  page  288.  Un  de  ces  chateaux 
fameux  est  celui  de  Chambord.  C'est  le  plus  beau  monument  de  la  Renais- 
sance en  France.  Son  exterieur  se  distingue  par  son  systeme  de  tours.  A 
l'interieur,  entre  autres  choses,  il  y  a  un  escalier  unique  quant  a  sa  con- 
struction. C'est  un  double  escalier  en  spirale,  les  deux  parties  s'entre- 
croisant  de  telle  facon  que  deux  personnes  peuvent  l'une  monter  et  l'autre 
descendre  en  meme  temps  sans  se  rencontrer 


292  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

several  cities  of  the  United  States.  12.  Can  all  these  palaces  be 
visited  Saturday  evenings?  13.  Do  you  like  to  see  the  old  furni- 
ture which  is  found  in  these  stores  ?  1 4.  The  sad  fate  of  Joan  of 
Arc  is  well  known  by  almost  everybody  in  this  country.  15.  There 
is  singing  here  Wednesdays  at  8.30  p.m.  16.  If  you  cannot  walk, 
why  are  you  getting  up?  17.  He  said  that  Napoleon  I  was  born 
in  1768,  but  he  was  mistaken.  18.  Bring  the  chairs  near  this 
table,  but  do  not  approach  me.  19.  He  asked  me  how  old 
Henry  II  was  when  he  died.  20.  This  castle  was  built  by 
Francis  I ;  that  one  by  Louis  XIV. 


REVIEW 

Lessons  Thirty-nine  to  Forty-one 
A.  General  Drill 

1 .  Give  the  list  of  reflexive  pronouns.  State  their  position 
in  respect  to  the  verb  and  to  other  pronouns. 

2.  Give  French  sentences  containing  the  translation  of 
himself  and  herself  (a)  as  a  reflexive  pronoun ;  (b)  as  an 
intensive  pronoun. 

3.  When  may  passive  sentences  in  English  be  translated 
by  the  passive  in  French  ?  Illustrate  by  sentences  the  French 
substitutes  for  the  passive  voice. 

4.  Name  and  illustrate  three  different  uses  of  etre  as  an 
auxiliary. 

5 .  Give  French  sentences,  equivalents  of  the  passive  voice 
in  English,  containing  se,  on,  sont,  de  (by),  par,  a  6te\ 

6.  Give  the  synopsis  of  se  couper  in  simple  tenses  ;  se  couper 
in  perfect  tenses  ;  perdre  in  simple  tenses  of  the  passive  voice  ; 
perdre  in  perfect  tenses  of  the  passive  voice. 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XXXIX-XLI  293 

7.  Give  affirmatively,  negatively,  interrogatively,  negative- 
interrogatively,  the  cond.  of  se  mordre  ;  the  pluperf .  of  s'arreter  ; 
the  past  def .  pass,  of  trouver ;  the  past  indef .  pass,  of  faire. 

8.  Translate  into  French  — 

does  he  forget  himself  ?  I  hurt  his  head 

look  at  yourself,  John  were  you  hurt  by  the  carriage  ? 

she  is  mistaken  she  was  carried  to  her  room 

she  had  broken  her  arm  many  lessons  are  forgotten 

they  love  themselves  no  crossing  here 

we  stopped  somebody  is  knocking 

we  stopped  the  cow  people  love  their  friends 

I  don't  want  to  go  to  bed  she  arose  early 

wait  for  me  I  cannot  do  without  it 

are  you  well  ?  he  forbade  me  to  enter 

she  was  satisfied  with  it  I  shall  be  present  (there) 

9.  Rewrite  the  following,  using  (a)  the  past  definite; 
(b)  the  future : 

elle  s'arrete  devant  la  maison 

ses  freres  se  levent 

on  leur  de'fend  de  sortir 

la  lecon  est  finie 

les  eleves  se  trouvent  dans  la  cour 

les  fenetres  sont  ferme'es 

les  portes  se  ferment 

B.  Translate  into  French 

1.  Books  have  been  made  in  this  street  many  years.  2.  You  are 
mistaken ;  William  II  of  England  was  killed  in  an  English  forest. 
3.  I  shall  carry  away  what  he  gives  me,  and  I  shall  be  satisfied 
with  it.  4.  When  he  fell  he  hurt  his  arm  and  lost  his  watch. 
5.  Many  houses  are  built  of  wood.  6.  In  this  castle  one  sees  many 
old  pictures.    7.  France  was  invaded  by  many  enemies.    8.  I  found 


294  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

that  he  was  wounded.  9.  He  was  wounded  while  he  was  crossing 
the  river.  10.  The  letters  are  well  written;  they  were  finished 
while  he  was  at  school.  1 1.  Many  crimes  were  committed  by  their 
army.  1 2 .  Would  they  not  be  warned  if  the  proclamation  had  been 
posted?  13.  People  cannot  visit  those  castles;  they  have  not  yet 
been  opened.    14.  Let  us  all  hasten  to  dress  and  go  to  walk. 


LESSON   FORTY-TWO 

ORTHOGRAPHIC    CHANGES    IN   THE   FIRST   CONJUGATION 

244.  Orthographic  Changes.  Certain  verb  stems  of  the 
first  conjugation  undergo  modification  when  the  endings  are 
added,  in  order  to  prevent  violation  of  fundamental  laws  of 
spelling. 

Note.  The  full  conjugation  of  these  verbs  is  given  on  pages  438-439. 

245.  Verbs  ending  in  cer  take  a  cedilla  under  the  c 
wherever  a  or  0  follows.  This  is  in  order  to  keep  the  soft 
sound  of  the  c  of  the  infinitive  throughout  all  forms. 

Nous    commencons    {inf.    com-  We  commence. 

mencer). 
Je  plafais  (inf.  placer).  I  was  placing. 

246.  Verbs  ending  in  ger  take  an  e  after  the  g  wherever 
a  or  0  follows.  This  is  in  order  to  keep  the  soft  sound  of 
the  g  of  the  infinitive  throughout  all  forms. 

Nous  partageons  (inf.  partager).  We  share. 

Je  mangeais  (inf.  manger).  /  was  eating. 

247.  Verbs  ending  in  oyer  and  uyer  change  y  to  i  before 
mute  e.  Verbs  ending  in  ayer  may  or  may  not  undergo 
this  change.    Verbs  in  eyer  do  not  change. 


ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES  IN  CONJUGATION     295 

J'appuie  (inf.  appuyer).  I  lean. 

lis  emploient  (inf.  employer).  They  employ. 

1  pafera*  }  ^  paye^*  He  wiU pay  ^or^' 

Note.  Such  a  mute  e  occurs  in  the  endings  e,  es,  ent,  and  in  the  er 
of  the  future  and  conditional. 

248.  Verbs  in  e  +  consonant  +  er.  Verbs  having  in  the 
next  to  the  last  syllable  of  the  infinitive  an  unaccented  e 
followed  by  a  single  consonant  take  a  grave  accent  over  this 
e  before  a  syllable  containing  mute  e.  This  is  in  order  that 
the  word  may  not  have  two  mute  syllables  in  succession,  a 
combination  that  French  seeks  to  avoid. 

The  following  forms  of  lever,  to  raise,  serve  as  illustrations : 


f  je  leve 

nous  levons 

Pres. 

Ind. 

\  tu  leves 

vous  levez 

[fl  leve 

ils  levent 

Fut. 

je  leverai 

COND 

Imv. 

je  leverais 
leve 

f  levons 
\  levez 

f  je  leve 

nous  levions 

Pres. 

Subj. 

\  tu  leves 

vous  leviez 

il  leve 

ils  levent 

Note.  Instead  of  taking  the  grave  accent  over  the  e,  verbs  in  eler 
and  eter  double  the  1  or  t  before  mute  e.  However,  acheter,  to  buy, 
geler,  to  freeze,  and  a  few  rare  verbs  do  not  double  the  consonant,  but 
follow  the  rule. 

J'appelle  {inf.  appeler).  I  call. 

Ils  jetteront  {inf.  jeter).  They  will  thrcnv. 

II  achate  {inf.  acheter).  He  buys. 

249.  Verbs  in  e  +  consonant(s)  +  er.  Verbs  having  an  € 
in  the  next  to  the  last  syllable  of  the  infinitive  change  this 


296  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

6  to  e  before  a  syllable  containing  mute  e  except  before  er  in 
the  future  and  conditional. 

Je  cede  (inf.  ceder).  I  yield. 

II  regne  (inf.  regner).  He  reigns. 

Je  oSderai.  I  shall  yield. 

Note.    Verbs  in  which  the  e*  is  not  separated  from  the  ending  er  by 
a  consonant  retain  the  6  throughout. 

II  cr6e  (inf.  creer).  He  creates. 

SPECIAL  VERBS  AND  PHRASES 

amener,  to  bring,  take  (a  per-  envoyer  chercher,  to  send  for 

son)  esp£rer,  to  hope 

s'appeler,  to  be  named  partager,  to  share 

apporter,  to  bring  (a  thing)  pr£ferer,  to  prefer 

avancer,  to  put  forward  au  revoir,  good-by 

s'effrayer,  to  be  frightened  par  ici,  this  way 

enlever,  to  take  off  (away)  avoir  mal  a  la  tete,  to  have  the 
ennuyer,  to  tire  headache 

s'ennuyer,  to  be  lonesome  tater  le  pouls,  to  feel  the  pulse 
je  m'appelle,  etc.,  my  name  is 


*x   •«*  EXERCISE 

1.  Give  the  full  conjugation  of  marcher  in  the  simple 
active  tenses. 

2.  Select  the  forms  of  the  following  verbs  that  undergo 
the  orthographic  changes  which  are  mentioned  in  this  lesson, 
and  tell  what  the  change  is  in  each  case : 

placer  ennuyer  amener  preferer  partager 

3.  Give  the  (a)  present  indicative  first  plural  of  — 
avancer  manger  appeler  placer 


ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES  IN  CONJUGATION     297 
(b)  Present  indicative  first  singular  of  — 


payer                  jeter 
amener                penser 
regner                acheter 

geler 

placer 

envoyer 

appeler 

creer 

ennuyer 

)  Future  first  singular  of  — 

lever                    employer 
ceder                  partager 

payer 
creer 

appeler 
couter 

4.  Give  the  — 

synopsis  of  partager 
synopsis  of  aboyer 
synopsis  of  c&ler 
past  definite  of  placer 
present  subjunctive  of  acheter 

5.  Write  in  French  — 

what  is  his  name  ? 
will  you  get  up  early  ? 
they  used  to  eat  late 
he  is  paying  for  the  medicine 
would  not  the  king  yield  ? 
they  are  bringing  some  wood 
he  will  bring  her  with  him 
was  the  boy's  name  John  ? 


present  indicative  of  employer 
present  subjunctive  of  se  lever 
conditional  of  appeler 
imperfect  of  manger 
present  subjunctive  of  payer 


let  us  share  our  money 
I  paid  for  the  books 
send  for  the  book 
I  paid  him  for  the  fruit 
I  paid  him  for  them 
I  have  a  headache 
I  sent  for  him 
near  the  castle 


6.  Write  the  sentences  below,  using  the  correct  verb  form, 
(a)  in  the  present  tense ;  {b)  in  the  future  tense,  wherever 
possible ;  (c)  replacing  je  by  nous,  by  il : 

Je  me  (lever)  tard.  Je  (etre)  malade.  Je  (employer)  un  medecin. 
II  (s'appeler)  le  Dr  Lebon.  Je  le  (payer)  bien.  Si  je  (s'ennuyer), 
on  (amener)  mes  amis,  et  nous  (manger)  ensemble. 


298  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Model  Les  Malades 

Quand  on  est  malade,  on  appelle  un  medecin.  Les  medecins 
sont  tres  occupes,  surtout  quand  les  maladies  qui  regnent  sont 
nombreuses.  lis  cedent  gene'ralement  s'ils  sont  appeles  pour  des 
cas  graves.  Les  gens  s'effraient  trop  facilement  cependant.  Quand 
il  arrive,  le  medecin  enleve  son  chapeau,  ses  gants  et  son  manteau. 
II  s'approche  du  lit  du  malade,  de  qui  il  tate  le  pouls  et  a  qui  il 
demande  de  lui  montrer  la  langue.  II  y  jette  un  coup  d'ceil.  II 
demande  ensuite  au  malade  ce  qu'il  a,  s'il  a  mal  a  la  tete,  a  la 
gorge,  s'il  a  des  douleurs,  des  maux  d'estomac,  des  eblouissements, 
et  quand  ils  ont  commence  ;  s'il  a  bon  appe'tit,  et  ce  qu'il  mange.  II 
appuie  son  oreille  sur  la  poitrine  et  sur  le  dos  du  malade  si  celui-ci 
a  un  rhume.  Alors  il  prescrit  de  la  medecine,  que  Ton  envoie 
chercher  chez  le  pharmacien.  Le  docteur  se  leve  et  dit  qu'il 
espere  que  le  malade  se  portera  mieux  bientot.  On  le  paie  ge'ne- 
ralement  une  fois  par  an.  Quand  le  pharmacien  a  envoye  la  pres- 
cription, nous  plagons  la  me'decine  sur  une  table  que  nous  avancons 
pres  du  lit.  Si  le  malade  s'ennuie,  nous  lui  amenons  des  amis,  ou, 
s'il  le  prefere,  nous  lui  achetons  des  revues  et  il  emploie  ainsi  son 
temps  agreablement. 

Theme 

"  Good  morning,  (M.  le)  doctor."  "  How  do  you  do,  sir  ?  What 
brings  you  here  ? "  "I  have  not  been  well  at  all  for  a  few  days. 
I  am  not  easily  frightened,  but  I  prefer  to  ask  you  what  the  matter 
is  with  me."  "  You  are  right ;  however,  there  are  many  people 
who  call  me  for  nothing.  Take  off  your  coat.  Approach  nearer. 
I  am  going  to  feel  your  pulse.  Very  well.  Show  me  your  tongue 
now.  I  will  glance  at  it.  Do  you  have  headaches  ?  "  "I  have  had 
dizzy  spells.  I  have  no  appetite.  Formerly  I  used  to  eat  much 
more."  "  Well,  you  have  only  a  cold ;  I  am  going  to  prescribe 
medicine  for  you.  Buy  it  at  Mr.  Gerard's.  He  is  a  good  drug- 
gist.   I  buy  everything  at  his  store.    Go  to  bed  early  and  get  up 


ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES  IN  CONJUGATION     299 

late.  Walk  a  little,  but  if  it  freezes  too  much,  stay  at  home.  If 
you  hope  to  be  better,  yield  to  my  advice."  M  I  shall  do  so,  and 
I  shall  use  my  time  as  you  ask  me  to  (me  it)."  "  How  is  your 
friend  who  had  broken  his  leg  ?  "  "  He  is  better,  thank  you.  He 
is  lonesome  at  home,  but  he  still  leans  on  the  furniture  to  walk. 
I  am  not  paying  you  today,  doctor.  I  shall  pay  you  when  I  bring 
my  friend.    Good-by,  and  thank  you." 

Oral 

1.  Que  fait-on  quand  on  est  malade?  2.  Les  gens  qui  appellent 
le  docteur  souvent  sont-ils  toujours  malades  ?  3.  Que  fait  le  mede- 
cin  en  arrivant  pres  du  malade?  4.  Avez-vous  souvent  mal  a  la 
tete?  5.  Mangeons-nous  bien  quand  nous  sommes  malades? 
6.  Quand  avez-vous  meilleur  appetit,  le  matin  ou  le  soir?  7.  Dans 
quelle  saison  a-t-on  facilement  un  rhume  ?  8.  Que  present  le  doc- 
teur et  chez  qui  les  envoyez-vous  chercher  ?  9.  Quand  paie-t-on  le 
medecin?  10.  Les  medicaments  vous  effraient-ils  ?  11.  Cedez-vous 
toujours  aux  conseils  de  vos  parents?  12.  Gardez-vous  votre 
manteau  en  classe  ?  13.  Esperez-vous  employer  votre  temps 
agreablement  dimanche  prochain  ?  1 4.  Ne  vous  ennuyez-vous  pas 
quelquefois  ?    15.  A  quelle  heure  vous  levez-vous  ? 

Resume 

1 .  Everybody  likes  this  cloth ;  let  us  place  some  in  the  window. 
2.  At  what  hour  of  the  morning  does  he  get  up  generally  ?  3.  Is 
your  father's  name  Henry  or  John?  4.  Teachers  used  to  begin 
their  work  at  nine  o'clock  in  (of)  the  morning.  5.  If  he  asks  him 
for  the  money,  will  he  pay  him  today  ?  6.  I  am  buying  a  hundred 
pounds  of  sugar  at  a  franc  a  pound.  7.  I  should  throw  the  papers 
into  the  street  if  they  were  mine.  8.  God  created  all  there  is  in 
the  world.  9.  We  are  hungry;  let  us  eat  all  there  is  on  the 
table.  10.  Don't  lean  your  head  on  the  table;  go  to  bed  if  you 
are  sick.  1 1.  If  your  throat  is  sore,  I  shall  call  the  doctor.  12.  Will 
you  employ  me  ?  I  am  sure  I  can  earn  twenty  francs  a  day.   13.  As 


300  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

soon  as  the  boy  arrives,  I  will  bring  him  to  you.  14.  Where  is 
the  medicine  which  you  bought  for  yourself  at  the  druggist's? 
15.  Louis  XIV  had  been  reigning  for  seventy-two  years  when  he 
died.  16.  John,  have  you  washed  your  face  this  morning?  17.  I 
hope  the  tailor  will  clean  my  dress  coat  today  ;  I  need  it.  18.  My 
aunt  is  taking  a  walk  now,  but  will  soon  be  back.  19.  Are  many 
large  trees  still  to  be  found  in  this  old  forest  ?  20.  Let  us  divide 
the  nuts  which  were  given  us  by  your  father. 


LESSON   FORTY-THREE 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  ER 

250.  Irregular  Verbs.  There  are  in  French  many  verbs 
which  are  not  inflected  exactly  like  the  model  of  any  one  of  the 
three  conjugations.  These  are  called  irregular  verbs.  The 
great  majority  of  their  forms,  however,  may  be  made  by  know- 
ing their  principal  parts  and  applying  the  rules  by  which  regu- 
lar verbs  are  conjugated.  The  rules  by  which  simple  tenses 
are  formed  are  repeated  here  with  some  further  observations. 

251.  Rules  of  Verb  Formation,  a.  The  principal  parts 
are  the  infinitive,  present  participle,  past  participle,  first 
person  singular  of  the  present  indicative,  first  person 
singular  of  the  past  definite. 

b.  The  first  person  singular  of  the  present  indicative  ends 
in  e,  s,  or  x.  The  corresponding  sets  of  endings  for  the  three 
singular  forms  of  this  tense  are,  reading  vertically, 


e 

s 

X 

es 

8 

X 

e 

t 

t 

Note.    If  c,  d,  or  t  precedes  s  in  the  first  person  singular  of  the 
present  indicative,  no  t  is  added  to  the  third  person  singular. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  ER  301 

c.  The  plural  of  the  present  indicative  is  formed  by 
dropping  the  ending  ant  of  the  present  participle  and  adding 
ons,  ez,  ent. 

d.  The  imperfect  is  formed  by  dropping  the  ending  ant  of 
the  present  participle  and  adding  ais,  ais,  ait,  ions,  iez,  aient. 

e.  The  first  person  singular  of  the  past  definite  ends  in 
ai,  is,  or  us.  The  other  five  forms  of  the  tense  are  made 
by  changing 

ai  to  as,  a,  ames,  ates,  erent  (first  conjugation) 

is  to  is,  it,  imes,  ites,  irent  (second  and  third  conjugations) 

us  to  us,  ut,  umes,  utes,  urent  (many  irregular  verbs) 

/.  The  future  tense  is  regularly  formed  by  adding  ai,  as,  a, 
ons,  ez,  ont  to  the  infinitive.  When  the  infinitive  ends  in 
mute  e,  this  e  must  be  dropped  before  the  endings  are  added. 

g.  The  conditional  is  regularly  formed  by  adding  ais,  ais,  ait, 
ions,  iez,  aient  to  the  infinitive.  When  the  infinitive  ends  in 
mute  e,  this  e  must  be  dropped  before  the  endings  are  added. 

Note.  If  the  future  is  irregular,  the  conditional  is  always  similarly 
irregular. 

h.  The  imperative  is  the  same  as  the  first  person  singular 
and  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the.  present 
indicative. 

i.  The  present  subjunctive  is  formed  by  dropping  the 
ending  ant  of  the  present  participle  and  adding  e,  es,  e,  ions, 
iez,  ent. 

Note.  Certain  irregular  present  subjunctives  are  as  if  formed  from 
the  third  plural  of  the  present  indicative  by  dropping  the  nt. 

/.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  dropping  the 
final  letter  of  the  first  person  singular  of  the  past  definite 
and  adding  sse,  sses,  At,  ssions,  ssiez,  ssent. 


302  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

252.  Certain  Modifications  of  the  Stem  of  irregular  verbs 
are  so  uniform  that  familiarity  with  the  situations  that 
occasion  them  is  useful. 

a.  Y  changes  to  i  before  a  mute  e. 

b.  When  the  stem  of  the  first  person  plural  of  the  present 
indicative  differs  from  that  of  the  singular,  the  third  person 
plural  generally  reverts  to  a  form  similar  to  the  singular. 

c.  A  similar  correspondence  of  the  third  plural  and  the 
singular  is  apt  to  be  found  in  irregular  present  subjunctives. 

d.  Stems  ending  in  a  single  consonant  preceded  by  a 
mute  e  often  double  the  consonant  before  a  mute  e  ending. 

e.  Sometimes  the  stems  of  d  modify  the  stem  vowel  also. 
/.  Stems  ending  in  1  are  apt  to  develop  a  liquid  sound 

before  mute  e. 

253.  Irregular  Forms.  In  this  and  the  succeeding  lessons 
on  irregular  verbs  are  given  the  tenses  that  involve  any  form 
not  made  in  accordance  with  the  rules  of  Sec.  251.  Tenses 
not  given  are  regular  in  all  respects. 

Note  i.  The  only  tenses  that  ever  offer  any  irregularity  after  the 
first  person  is  known  are  present  tenses,  that  is,  the  present  indicative 
and  subjunctive,  and  the  imperative.  The  past  definite  of  venir  and 
tenir  are  apparent  exceptions. 

Note  2.  Observe  particularly  that  if  the  first  form  of  the  future  has 
an  irregular  stem,  the  irregularity  prevails  not  only  through  the  future 
but  through  the  conditional  also. 

Note  3.  The  full  inflection  of  regular  verbs  will  be  found  on 
pages  432-433- 

254.  Compound  Verbs.  Verbs  formed  by  combining  a 
preposition  or  other  prefix  to  a  verb  stem  usually  follow  in 
conjugation  the  peculiarities  of  the  main  verb :  thus  devenir, 
to  become,  from  venir;  renvoyer  (re-envoyer),  to  send  back, 
from  envoyer. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  ER  303 

255.  Envoyer,  to  send,  envoyant,  envoys,  envoie,  envoyai. 

Pres.  Ind.     j 'envoie  nous  envoyons 

tu  envoies  vous  envoyez 

il  envoie  ils  envoient 

Fut.  j'enverrai 

Pres.  Subj.    j 'envoie  nous  envoyions 

tu  envoies  vous  envoyiez 

il  envoie  ils  envoient 

Note.    See  Sec.  252,  a. 

256.  Aller,  to  go,  allant,  alle",  vais,  allai. 


Pres.  Ind. 

je  vais 

nous  allons 

tu  vas 

vous  allez 

il  va 

ils  vont 

Fut. 

j'irai 

Imv. 

va 

allons 
allez 

Pres.  Subj. 

j'aille 

nous  allions 

tu  ailles 

vous  alliez 

il  aille 

ils  aillent 

Note.   All  verbs  ending  in  er  except  envoyer  and  aller  are  regular. 

257.  Idioms  with  Aller,  Aller  in  the  sense  of  going  to  is 
often  used  before  an  infinitive  to  express  an  immediate 
future.  Aller  governs  a  following  infinitive  directly,  that  is, 
without  requiring  a  preposition. 

I  am  going  to  send  (I  shall  send).  Je  vais  envoyer. 

I  was  going  to  send.  fallais  envoyer. 

I  am  going  to  hear  him.  Je  vais  V entendre. 

I  will  go  (and)  speak  to  him.  J'irai  lui parler. 

Note.   The  use  of  aller  in  salutations  has  been  met  in  Lesson  26. 

How  are  you  ?  Comment  allez-vous  ? 

I  am  very  well.  Je  vais  trh  bien. 


304 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 
IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 


aller,  to  go ;  be  (of  health)  ;  suit, 
be  becoming,  fit  well 

cela  va  sans  dire,  that  goes  with- 
out saying 

s'en  aller,  to  go  away 


les  affaires/,  the  business 
la  journe*e,  the  day  (when  dura- 
tion or  content  is  implied) 
en  outre,  besides 
pas  du  tout,  not  at  all 


Drill 


EXERCISE 


i .  Form  all  the  simple  tenses  of  the  verb  whose  principal 
parts  are  vaincre,  vainquant,  vaincu,  vaincs,  vainquis. 


2.  Give  the  — 

synopsis  of  aller 
synopsis  of  s'en  aller 
past  definite  of  aller,  int. 
present  subjunctive  of  envoyer 
past  anterior  of  s'en  aller 

3.  Write  in  French  — 

he  is  going  to  send 
he  is  going  to  the  city 
he  is  going  away 
he  is  going  to  bed 
send  me  something 
go  away 
do  not  go  away 
she  went  away  alone 
go  and  speak  to  him 
somebody  will  go 
did  she  not  go  away  ? 
he  will  send  for  me 


present  subjunctive  of  s'en  aller, 

neg. 
imperfect    subjunctive    of    s'en 

aller,  neg.-int. 
imperative  of  s'en  aller 


I  shall  go  for  the  children 

yesterday 

last  night 

it  goes  without  saying 

he  is  well 

his  health  is  good 

it  is  not  good  at  all 

would  he  not  go  ? 

they  are  sending 

a  good  watch 

how  are  you  ? 

how  is  she  ? 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  ER  305 

4.  Write  the  paragraph  below,  using  correct  verb  forms, 
(a)  in  the  present,  (b)  past,  (c)  future : 

Quand  on  me  (envoyer)  chercher,  j'y  (aller).  Je  (s'en  aller) 
sou  vent.    II  (aller)  partir  de  bonne  heure.    lis  (arriver)  tard. 

Model  Le  TheAtre 

Tiens,  bonjour,  mon  ami ;  votre  chapeau  neuf  vous  va  tres  bien. 
Comment  va  la  sante  ?  —  Je  vais  mieux  que  la  semaine  derniere, 
merci.  —  Et  les  affaires  ?  —  Elles  vont  mal,  mais  elles  iront 
bientot  beaucoup  mieux.  —  Cela  vous  irait-il  d'aller  au  theatre  ou 
a  l'opera  ce  soir  ?  —  Avec  grand  plaisir.  —  Jean,  apporte-moi  le 
journal  du  matin ;  je  veux  voir  les  annonces  des  theatres.  —  Une 
tragedie  ne  me  va  pas  du  tout.  Je  suis  alle  en  voir  une  avant-hier. 
—  J'y  serais  alle  avec  vous  si  vous  m'aviez  envoye  #un  message 
quelconque.  —  J'allais  le  faire,  mais  je  ne  pensais  pas  que  vous 
e'tiez  libre.  — Allons  a  la  Comedie-Francaise.  On  y  joue  une 
piece  de  Moliere.  — Allons-y.  — Je  vais  envoyer  chercher  des 
billets,  deux  fauteuils  d'orchestre.  —  A  quelle  heure  le  rideau  se 
leve-t-il  ?  —  A  huit  heures.  —  Et  les  acteurs  sont  bons  ?  —  Cela 
va  sans  dire;  les  meilleurs  du  pays.  — Allons  chercher  nos 
billets  nous-memes.  Si  ma  montre  va  bien,  il  est  deja  dix  heures, 
et  les  places  vont  etre  bientot  prises.  —  Allons,  depechons-nous. 
Apres  la  representation  nous  irons  au  cafe  de  la  Paix.  — Tres 
bonne  idee.  Allons-nous-en.  Jean,  si  mon  pere  envoie  chercher  la 
lettre  dont  il  m'a  parle',  dis-lui  que  je  la  lui  enverrai  en  rentrant. 

Theme 

Day  before  yesterday  my  cousin  (/.)  sent  me  a  letter,  asking 
me  if  it  (cela)  would  suit  me  to  (de)  go  and  see  a  play  with  her 
at  the  Comedie  Franchise.  That  suited  me  perfectly,  be  sure  of  it. 
We  went  and  we  enjoyed  ourselves  very  much.  My  cousin  had  a 
beautiful  dress  which  became  her  very  well.    The  orchestra  seats 


306  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

that  they  had  given  us  were  well  situated.  She  had  gone  to  get 
the  tickets  herself,  because  when  they  send  them  to  her  the  seats 
do  not  always  suit  her.  It  goes  without  saying  that  the  performance 
was  very  good.  With  such  good  actors  it  is  natural.  If  they  are 
still  giving  that  play  next  week,  I  shall  send  for  some  tickets  in 
order  to  take  my  friend  John  to  it.  He  likes  the  theater,  but  he  has 
not  been  for  several  weeks  because  his  business  is  not  going  well 
at  all.  Besides,  he  Qui,  sec.  3 1 7 ,  b)  is  not  well.  He  was  much  healthier 
a  year  ago.  I  should  go  to  see  him  if  I  were  free.  I  went  to  his 
home  a  few  days  ago.  I  had  seen  in  the  paper  an  advertisement 
of  the  Come'die  Francaise,  and  they  were  going  to  give  a  play  of 
Rostand,  but  on  arriving  at  his  house  I  found  that  he  had  gone 
away  for  the  day. 

Oral 

1.  Ou  allez-vous  le  dimanche  ?  2.  Iriez-vous  si  vous  n'alliez  pas 
bien  ?  3.  Allez-vous  mieux  qu'il  y  a  un  an  ?  4.  Cela  vous  irait-il 
d'aller  au  theatre  ce  soir  ?  5.  Y  etes-vous  alle  la  semaine  derniere  ? 
6.  Qu'allez-vous  faire  ce  soir?  7.  Geleriez-vous  si  vous  alliez  a 
l'ecole  sans  manteau  en  hiver?  8.  A  quelle  heure  vous  en  allez- 
vous  chez  vous  ?  9.  Vous  en  iriez-vous  si  la  lecon  etait  finie  ? 
10.  Ne  va-t-il  pas  sans  dire  que  cette  lecon  est  difficile  ?  11.  Avez- 
vous  envoye  une  lettre  hier?  12.  Le  maitre  envoie-t-il  les  eleves 
au  tableau  pour  reciter  ?  13.  Y  en  a-t-il  envoye  ce  matin  ?  14.  Qui 
envoyez-vous  chercher  quand  vous  n'allez  pas  bien?  15.  L'en- 
verriez-vous  chercher  si  vous  n'aviez  qu'un  rhume  ? 


L'OPERA:  LE  GRAND  ESCALIER.  L'Opera,  qui  fut  treize  ans  a  cons- 
truire  (1861-1874),  est  un  des  theatres  les  plus  fameux  du  monde.  Son 
exterieur  est  on  ne  peut  plus  imposant,  mais  l'interieur  est  encore  plus 
renomme.  Le  Grand  Escalier,  represente  ici,  et  le  Foyer  ou  les  spectateurs 
se  rendent  pendant  les  longs  entr'actes,  n'ont  pas  d'egaux.  Le  gouverne- 
ment  considere  le  travail  de  l'Opera  comme  etant  une  partie  de  Peducation 
du  peuple  et  lui  accorde  une  subvention  annuelle. 


L'OP^RA:  LE  GRAND  ESCALIER 


308  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Resume 

i.  Is  your  brother  at  home  ?  I  am  sending  him  a  letter.  2.  He 
hopes  to  go  to  the  theater  this  evening  if  all  goes  well.  3.  When 
is  he  going  away  ?  He  hopes  to  leave  before  ten  o'clock  tomorrow 
morning.  4.  My  brother  was  going  to  send  for  her  when  she 
entered  the  room.  5.  Are  you  hungry  ?  Let  us  go  to  the  restaurant 
and  eat  something.  6.  Our  friends  went  away  a  week  ago 
Thursday.  7.  He  is  buying  a  gold  watch;  the  one  he  has  does 
not  suit  him.  8.  Which  of  the  senators  is  going  to  speak  Monday 
evening?  9.  If  my  son  does  not  come  home  soon,  I  shall  send 
him  two  hundred  francs.  10.  Children,  you  are  making  too  much 
noise;  go  away  at  once.  11.  Of  what  are  you  thinking?  Of  the 
price  of  hats  and  shoes.  12.  He  is  taking  his  sister  to  the  ball 
this  evening.  13.  If  our  mother  had  not  gone  away,  we  should  have 
stayed  in  town.    1 4.  Get  up  quickly  !   We  are  going  to  the  country. 

15.  Where, is  John's  grammar?    I  am  going  to  send  it  to  him. 

16.  If  I  had  money  enough,  I  should  go  to  the  seashore.  17.  We 
never  find  what  we  need  in  this  store  ;  let  us  go  home.  18.  He  will 
call  you  when  they  start  if  he  is  not  too  sleepy.  19.  Are  you  going 
to  the  theater?  What  is  being  played  there?  20.  Tragedies  are 
often  seen  there ;  one  of  them  is  being  played  there  now. 


LESSON   FORTY-FOUR 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  IR 

258.  Partir,  to  start,  partant,  parti,  pars,  partis. 
Similarly  dormir,   to  sleep  ;  mentir,   to  lie ;  sentir,   to  feel, 

smell ;  servir,  to  serve  ;  sortir,  to  go  out ;  se  repentir,  to  repent. 

259.  Courir,  to  run,  courant,  couru,  cours,  courus. 

Fut.     je  courrai 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  IR  309 

260.  Ouvrir,  to  open,  ouvrant,  ouvert,  ouvre,  ouvris. 
Similarly  couvrir,  to  cover ;  offrir,  to  offer ;  souffrir,  to  suffer. 

261.  Venir,  to  come,  venant,  venu,  viens,  vins. 


Pres. 

Ind. 

je  viens 

nous  venons 

tu  viens 

vous  venez 

il  vient 

ils  viennent 

Past. 

Def. 

je  vins 

nous  vinmes 

tu  vins 

vous  vintes 

il  vint 

ils  vinrent 

Fut. 

je  viendrai 

Pres. 

SUBJ. 

je  vienne 

nous  venions 

tu  viennes 

vous  veniez 

il  vienne 

ils  viennent 

Note.   See  Sec.  252,  b,  c,  d,  e. 
Similarly  tenir,  to  hold. 

262.  Venir  de  with  an  infinitive  signifies  to  have  just. 

Je  viens  de  partir.  /  have  just  started  (am  coming 

from  starting). 

Je  venais  de  partir.  /  had  just  started  (was  coming 

from  starting). 
Note.    Venir  is  also  followed  by  the  infinitive  directiy. 

Venez  acheter  des  livres.  Come  to  buy  (and  buy)  some  books. 

II  est  venu  l'acheter.  He  came  to  buy  (and  bought)  it. 

263.  Mourir,  to  die,  mourant,  mort,  meurs,  mourns. 

Pres.  Ind.      je  meurs  nous  mourons 

tu  meurs  vous  mourez 

il  meurt  ils  meurent 

Fut.  je  mourrai 

Pres.  Subj.     je  meure  nous  mourions 

tu  meures  vous  mouriez 

il  meure  ils  meurent 
Note.    See  Sec.  252,  b,  c. 


3io 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


COMPOUND  VERBS  —  IDIOMATIC  FORMS 


a  peine,  scarcely 
appartenir,  to  belong 
apres  que,  after  (conj.) 
devenir,  to  become 
s'endormir,  to  go  to  sleep 
se  repentir  de,  to  repent  of 


se  sentir  bien,  to  feel  well 

se  servir  de,  to  use  (serve  one's 

self  with) 
tenir  a,  to  insist  upon,  be  eager 

to 
y  compris,  including 


jl    *»f  EXERCISE 

i.  Give  the  — 
synopsis  of  tenir 
synopsis  of  mourir 
present  indicative  of  mentir 
past  definite  of  tenir 
present  subjunctive  of  offrir 

2.  Translate  into  French  — 

we  have  suffered 


present  indicative  of  servir 
conditional  of  mourir 
imperfect  subjunctive  of  mourir 
present  indicative  of  se  repentir 
past  indefinite  of  s'ouvrir 


he  sleeps 
she  would  run 
they  come 

3.  Give  the  — 

pres.  ind.  3d  sing,  of  sentir 
pres.  subj.  2d  plu.  of  courir 
past  participle  of  offrir 

4.  Translate  into  French 
he  has  just  died 

he  had  just  died 
he  is  going  to  die 
it  belonged  to  us 
they  are  becoming  old 
does  he  use  his  carriage  ? 


you  will  die 
you  came 


I  am  covering 
thou  dost  lie 
she  has  gone  out 


pres.  subj.  3d  sing,  of  venir 
pres.  ind.  3d  plu.  of  mourir 
past  def.  2d  plu.  of  venir 

I  used  my  two  hands 

he  used  to  repent  of  it 

they  insist  on  running 

come  and  eat 

do  you  repent  of  your  vices  ? 

go  to  sleep 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  IR  311 

5.  Replace  in  this  paragraph  je  in  turn  by  il,  nous,  elles, 
making  all  necessary  changes  : 

Je  viens  de  me  lever.  Je  me  repens  de  m'etre  endormi.  Je  dors 
toujours  mal.  J'ouvrirai  la  porte.  Je  tiens  a  m'en  aller.  Je  vais 
partir  bientot.    Je  me  sers  du  cheval  blanc.    Je  meurs  de  faim. 

Model  Mon  Frere  revient  de  France 

Mon  frere  Georges  vient  d'arriver  de  France,  d'011  il  e'tait  parti 
il  y  a  onze  jours.  II  ne  se  sent  pas  tres  bien.  II  ne  dort  pas  assez. 
II  souffre  de  la  grippe.  Malgre  cela  il  ne  se  repent  pas  de  son 
voyage.  II  a  bien  employe  son  temps,  et  s'il  a  couru  pour  ainsi  dire 
par  toute  la  France,  y  compris  la  Bretagne,  ses  visites  lui  ont  offert 
l'occasion  de  voir  de  belles  choses.  En  deux  mois  il  a  couvert  beau- 
coup  de  terrain,  et  il  ne  ment  pas  quand  il  dit  qu'il  a  vu  presque 
tout.  II  tient  k  retourner  en  France  aussitot  que  possible.  Je 
ne  sortirai  pas  dimanche  prochain  parce  qu'il  viendra  probable- 
ment  me  voir.  Je  sors  rarement  le  dimanche  soir.  II  aura  beau- 
coup  de  choses  a.  me  dire.  Je  viens  de  relire  quelques-unes  de  ses 
lettres.  J 'en  ai  encore  une  ouverte  sur  la  table,  dans  laquelle  il  se 
sert  de  termes  eloquents  pour  decrire  ce  qu'il  a  vu.  II  parle  aussi 
d'un  de  ses  amis  qui  est  mort  en  France.  Cet  ami  venait  a  peine 
d'arriver  pour  parler  d'affaires  qu'on  lui  avait  offertes.  II  sortait 
souvent  sans  manteau,  et  un  jour  comme  il  n'etait  pas  assez  couvert, 
il  a  attrape  un  rhume.  Cela  sert  a  montrer  qu'on  ne  peut  jamais 
se  repentir  d'etre  trop  prudent.  % 

Theme 

I  rarely  go  out  before  nine  o'clock.  I  slept  badly  last  (this) 
night ;  I  was  not  feeling  very  well.  I  have  suffered  and  do  suffer 
a  little  yet  from  the  grippe.  I  fell  asleep  a  few  minutes  after 
the  clock  had  struck  two  (o'clock).  I  opened  my  eyes  early,  and 
as  breakfast  is  served  early  at  my  house,  I  went  down  to  the 


312 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


i  Underwood  &  Underwood 

LE  PONT  ALEXANDRE  III 

Les  ponts  de  Paris  ne  manquent  pas  d'attirer 
l'attention  des  voyageurs.  Le  pont  Alexan- 
dre III,  le  plus  nouveau  des  trente  et  un 
ponts  qui  ont  ete  jet^s  sur  la  Seine,  est  fait 
d\me  seule  arche  d'environ  cent  vingt  metres. 
II  est  orne  de  groupes  allegoriques  qui  en 
embellissent  les  quatre  coins.  II  fut  construit 
pour  l'Exposition  de  1900  et  est  ainsi  nomme 
en  souvenir  de  l'empereur  de  Russie  qui 
fit  avec  la  France  un  traite  d'alliance  lequel 
durait  encore  en  1914.  Beau  en  meme  temps 
qu'utile,  ce  pont  reunit  les  Champs-filysees 
aux  Invalides 


dining-room,  where  I 
found  a  letter  from  my 
brother,  which  had  just 
arrived.  I  opened  it 
at  once.  He  will  come 
back  from  France  in  a 
month.  He  has  just 
left  Paris,  where  he 
had  gone  to  see  one 
of  his  friends  who  was 
suffering  from  a  seri- 
ous sickness  and  who 
died  recently.  My 
brother  had  been  eager 
to  see  him,  for  he  liked 
him  very  much.  In  this 
country  they  used  to 
go  out  always  together. 
My  brother  has  cov- 
ered much  ground  since 
he  has  been  in  France. 
He  chases  (courir)  from 
one  end  of  the  country 
to  the  other,  and  one 
feels  in  his  letters  that 
he  does  not  regret  his 
travels.  When  he  dies, 
he  will  have  seen  many 
things.  I  am  eager  to 
see  all  that  myself. 
The  opportunity  will 
come  for  me  perhaps 
some  (un)  day. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  IR  313 

Oral 

1.  Quand  partez-vous  de  chez  vous  pour  l'ecole?  2.  Est-ce  que 
je  pars  de  l'ecole  avant  ou  apres  que  les  eleves  sont  partis? 
3.  Courez-vous  si  vous  etes  en  retard  pour  l'ecole  ?  4.  Courriez- 
vous  si  vous  e'tiez  en  retard  ?  5.  A  quelle  heure  avez-vous  ouvert 
les  yeux  ce  matin  ?  6.  A  quelle  page  ouvrez-vous  votre  livre  pour 
la  lecon  d'aujourd'hui ?  7.  M'offririez-vous  une  chaise  si  j'allais 
vous  voir  ?  8.  Vous  a-t-on  offert  une  place  au  the'atre  pour  ce  soir  ? 
9.  Viendriez-vous  ici  si  vous  ne  vous  sentiez  pas  bien  ?  10.  Qui 
enverriez-vous  chercher?  11.  Qu'est-ce  que  je  viens  de  vous  de- 
mander?  12.  Veniez-vous  de  chez  vous  quand  vous  etes  arrive  ici 
ce  matin  ?  13.  Viendriez-vous  me  voir  si  j'e'tais  malade?  14.  Tenez- 
vous  a  rester  ici  pendant  les  vacances?  15.  De  quoi  vous 
servez-vous  pour  ecrire? 

Resume 

1 .  Does  he  not  start  for  France  at  9. 1 5  this  morning  ?  2 .  I  always 
sleep  late  mornings,  especially  Sundays.  3.  The  soldiers  have  just 
arrived  from  France,  where  they  have  been  two  years.  4.  When 
they  need  hats,  they  will  come  and  buy  them  at  my  store.  5.  While 
running  to  school  he  fell  and  broke  his  leg.  6.  John  has  just  taken 
my  book,  and  I  am  using  his.  7.  Do  you  know  the  name  of  the 
grammar  his  class  used  last  year  ?  8.  My  father  is  suffering  from 
the  grippe ;  have  you  ever  suffered  from  it  ?  9.  The  houses  which 
we  have  just  bought  were  built  a  hundred  years  ago.  10.  Many 
people  die  from  accidents  every  year  in  large  cities.  11.  Children 
are  never  eager  to  get  up  early  mornings.  12.  George  Washington 
was  president  for  eight  years,  and  died  Dec.  14,  1799.  13.  Have 
you  ever  used  the  book  of  which  I  was  speaking  to  you  ?  1 4.  Don't 
be  afraid ;  he  will  not  die  from  his  cold  if  he  is  prudent.  15.  The 
friend  whom  I  met  in  Canada  is  coming  to  visit  me  on  the  9th  of 
August.  16.  Tomorrow  evening  I  will  come  and  describe  to  you 
what  I  saw  in  Europe.    17.  The  clock  had  just  struck  three  when 


314  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

she  started.  18.  We  have  just  closed  the  window;  now  we  are 
going  to  bed.  19.  If  he  is  not  too  sieepy,  he  will  run  to  the  fire. 
20.  When  he  lies,  he  always  repents  of  it. 


REVIEW 

Lessons  Forty-two  to  Forty-four 
A.  General  Drill 

1.  Name  all  forms  in  which  verbs  in  cer  and  ger  undergo 
orthographic  change. 

2.  Name  the  mute  endings  found  in  the  first  conjugation. 

3.  What  change  occurs  in  conjugating  verbs  ending  in  yer? 
Where  does  it  occur  ?  How  does  it  depend  on  the  preceding 
vowel  ? 

4 .  How  does  the  inflection  of  verbs  having  i  in  the  last  syllable 
but  one  differ  from  that  of  verbs  having  e  in  that  position  ? 

5.  What  verbs  ending  in  ler  and  ter  are  exceptional  in 
conjugation  ? 

6.  Name  verbs  that  illustrate  respectively  Sec.  251,  g, 
Note;  252,  #;  b\  c;  d\  e. 

7.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  partir,  sortir,  tenir,  ouvrir. 

8.  Give  the  synopsis  of  aller,  envoyer,  s'appeler,  courir,  venir, 
mourir. 

9.  Give  the  — 

pres.  subj.  of  aller  pres.  subj.  of  mener 

imv.  of  aller  pres.  ind.  of  tenir 

imp.  of  manger  pret.  of  venir 

pres.  subj.  of  renvoyer  cond.  of  espe*rer 

pres.  ind.  of  s'en  aller,  int.  pres.  subj.  of  mourir 

pres.  ind.  of  payer  pres.  ind.  of  mourir 

pres.  ind.  of  mentir  imv.  of  s'appeler 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XLII-XLIV-  315 

10.  What  verbs  are  inflected  like  partir  ?  ouvrir  ? 

1 1 .  Translate  into  French  — 

he  was  going  to  send  it  the  boat  used  to  belong  to  me 

they  were  going  to  send  it  back  bring  me  the  book 

do  you  like  to  go  to  bed  early  ?  bring  him  with  you 

his  name  is  John  does  he  get  up  early  ? 

he  has  just  offered  it  he  is  coming  to  visit  me  early 

you  had  just  eaten  I  went  for  my  chum 

come  and  pay  us  for  these  books  send  for  me 

she  had  gone  away  I  shall  never  pardon  them 

let  us  go  away  she  asked  me  for  the  flowers 

I  have  used  the  boat  they  insist  on  stopping 

12.  (a)  Insert  the  correct  verb  forms  in  the  paragraph 
below  ;  (b)  change  hier  to  demain  and  rewrite  ;  (c)  change  ma 
sceur  to  nous  and  rewrite  : 

Hier  ma  sceur  (partir)  pour  la  ville.  Elle  (se  lever)  a  six  heures. 
Elle  n'avait  pas  bien  (dormir).  Elle  (s'habiller)  vite,  et  (manger) 
peu.  En  (sortir)  elle  est  (tomber),  mais  elle  (tenir)  a  (partir). 
(Arriver)  a  la  ville,  elle  (employer)  une  modiste,  qu'elle  (payer) 
tout  de  suite.  Celle-ci  (s'appeler)  Mme  Lapaille.  Elle  (venir)  de 
(arriver)  de  Paris.    Alors  ma  sceur  (s'en  aller). 

B.  Translate  into  French 

1 .  There 's  the  school  to  which  he  used  to  send  his  children 
years  ago.    2.  We  are  poor,  but  we  are  satisfied  with  what  we  have. 

3.  My  friend  went  away  at  half  past  four,  as  soon  as  she  had  arisen. 

4.  What  is  your  name,  my  little  girl  ?    What  a  pretty  hat  you  have  ! 

5.  These  men  have  no  money ;  we  just  gave  them  some  bread  and 
meat.  6.  You  will  not  get  up  early  if  you  go  to  bed  so  late,  my 
son.  7.  As  soon  as  I  call,  send  him  to  me.  8.  I  am  going  to  start 
today  at  a  quarter  of  five,  if  all  goes  well.  9.  Let  us  not  forget  that 
God  has  given  us  all  that  we  have.    1  o.  Many  dogs  that  bark  bite 


316  ■       ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

also,  but  not  all.  n.  He  has  employed  two  of  his  clerks  for  more 
than  (de)  eleven  years;  he  cannot  do  without  them.  12.  If  you 
bring  it  to  me  this  evening  or  tomorrow  morning,  I  shall  be  at 
home,  and  I  will  pay  you  for  it.  13.  He  has  hurt  himself  and  has 
sent  for  a  doctor.  Which,  the  old  one  or  the  young  one  ?  14.  My 
father  had  formerly  the  most  beautiful  black  hair,  but  it  has  be- 
come white  now.  15.  Will  he  not  use  the  gifts  which  somebody 
has  given  him  ? 

LESSON   FORTY-FIVE 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  OIR 

264.  Devoir,  to  owe,  devant,  du  (/.  due),  dois,  dus. 

Pres.  Ind.     je  dois  nous  devons 

tu  dois  vous  devez 

il  doit  ils  doivent 

Fut.  je  devrai 

Pres.  Subj.    je  doive  nous  devions 

tu  doives  vous  deviez 

il  doive  ils  doivent 

Note.    See  Sec.  252,  £>,  c. 

265.  Devoir  is  used 

a.  To  express  obligation  from  the  standpoint  of  duty. 
If  a  general  principle  is  involved,  the  present  is  always 
used ;  if  a  particular  instance,  the  conditional  is  more 
commonly  found. 

People  ought  to  (should)  go  to  On  doit se  coucher  de  bonne  heure. 

bed  early. 

He  ought  to  go  to  bed  now.  II  devrait  se  coucher  maintenant. 

He  ought  not  to  have  remained.  II  n 'await pas  du  rester. 

b.  To  express  a  probability  which  is  inferred  from  known 
circumstances. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN   OIR  317 

It  is  very  late  ;    you  must  be  7/  est  tres  tard;  vous  devez  avoir 

sleepy.  sommeil. 

You  must  have  wept  when  you  Vous  avez  du  pleurer  quand  vous 

heard  that  avez  entendu  cela. 

c.  To  express  what  is  to  be  done  in  accordance  with 
some  destiny  or  plan. 

I  am  to  start  tomorrow.  Je  dots  partir  demain. 

I  was  to  start  yesterday.  Je  devais  partir  hier. 

266.  Recevoir,  to  receive \  recevant,  recu,  recois,  recus. 

Pres.  Ind.     je  recois  nous  recevons 

tu  recois  vous  recevez 

il  recoit  ils  recoivent 

Fut.  je  recevrai 

Pres.  Subj.   je  recoive  nous  recevions 

tu  recoives  vous  receviez 

il  recoive  .  ils  recoivent 

Note  i  .  Before  0  and  u  the  c  takes  a  cedilla.  Also  see  Sec.  252,  b,  c. 
All  verbs  ending  in  cevoir  are  similarly  conjugated. 

Note  2.  Verbs  like  recevoir,  including  devoir,  are  sometimes  classi- 
fied as  a  distinct  conjugation. 

267.  Pouvoir,  to  be  able,  can,  pouvant,  pu,  peux  (puis),  pus. 

Pres.  Ind.     je  peux  (puis)  nous  pouvons 

tu  peux  vous  pouvez 

il  peut  ils  peuvent 

Fut.  je  pourrai 

Imv.  (wanting) 

Pres.  Subj.   je  puisse  nous  puissions 

tu  puisses  vous  puissiez 

il  puisse  ils  puissent 

Note.    See  Sec.  252,  b. 


318  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

268.  Savoir,  to  know,  sachant,  su,  sais,  sus. 


Pres. 

Ind. 

je  sais 
tu  sais 
il  sait 

Imp. 

je  savais 

Fut. 

je  saurai 

Imv. 

sache 

nous  savons 
vous  savez 
ils  savent 


sachons 
sachez 


Note  i.  When  can  in  English  signifies  mental  ability  in  the  sense 
of  know  how  to,  it  is  rendered  in  French  by  savoir,  followed  by  an 
infinitive  directly. 

Je  sais  parler  fra^ais.  I  can  (know  how  to)  speak  French. 

Je  suis  malade  et  je  ne  puis  I  am  sick  and  I  cannot  (am  not  able 

parler.  to)  speak. 

Note  2.  With  pouvoir  and  savoir  the  pas  of  the  negative  ne  . .  .  pas 
is  often  omitted.    See  Sec.  330. 

269.  Voir,  to  see,  voyant,  vu,  vois,  vis. 

Pres.  Ind.     je  vois  nous  voyons 

tu  vois  vous  voyez 

il  voit  ils  voient 

Fut.  je  verrai 

Pres.  Subj.    je  voie  nous  voyions 

tu  voies  vous  voyiez 

il  voie  ils  voient 

Note.    See  Sec.  252,  a. 

COMPOUND  VERBS  —  IDIOMATIC  FORMS 

apercevoir,  to  perceive  la  boite  aux  lettres,  the  letter  box 

a  temps,  on  time  le  bureau  de  poste,  the  post  office 

la-bas,  over  there,  yonder  mettre  a  la  poste,  to  post 

revenir,  to  come  back  faire   recommander,  to   have 

le  jour  de  Pan,  New  Year's  registered 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN   OIR 


319 


EXERCISE 


Drill 

1.  Give  the  — 
synopsis  of  savoir 
synopsis  of  recevoir 
imperfect  subjunctive  of  aper- 

cevoir 

2.  Translate  into  French  — 


present  indicative  of  devoir 
present  indicative  of  pouvoir 
present  subjunctive  of  savoir 
present  subjunctive  of  revoir 

he  will  be  able 


they  would  know  know 

they  see  thou  shalt  owe 

I  receive  they  are  perceiving 

3.  Give  the  — 
pres.  subj.  3d  sing,  of  devoir 
past  def.  3d  sing,  of  recevoir 
pres.  subj.  2d  plu.  of  pouvoir 
imperative  of  pouvoir 

4.  Translate  into  French - 
he  owes  a  hundred  francs 
we  ought  to  speak  well 
he  ought  to  speak  well  now 
he  ought  to  have  spoken  better 
he  must  speak 
he  is  to  speak 
he  was  to  speak 
he  can  speak 

5 .  Insert  in  the  parentheses  the  correct  verb  forms  (a)  in 
the  present  tense ;  {b)  in  the  imperfect ;  (c)  in  the  future : 

Je  (savoir)  e'crire.  Je  (pouvoir)  ecrire  sur  ce  papier-ci.  Je 
(recevoir)  bien  des  lettres.  J 'en  (voir)  une.  Elle  (devoir)  etre  de 
Jean.  Je  (aller)  a  la  poste.  Je  (acheter)  des  timbres.  Le  courrier 
(partir)  bientot. 


you  can 

we  were  knowing 


past  def.  1  st  plu.  of  voir 
past  participle  of  devoir 
imperative  of  voir 
pres.  ind.  3d  plu.  of  savoir 

he  is  sleepy  and  he  can't  speak 

he  is  going  to  speak 

he  has  just  spoken 

New  Year's 

he  can  come  back 

he  could  come  back 

he  should  come  back 

he  will  come  back 


320  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Model  La  Poste 

Je  viens  d'ecrire  des  lettres  et  des  cartes  postales  a  mes  amis 
qui  demeurent  en  France.  Elles  doivent  partir  bientot.  Elles 
devraient  (ought)  meme  deja  etre  parties  ou  mes  amis  ne  les 
recevront  pas  a  temps  pour  le  jour  de  Fan.  Je  n'aurais  pas  du 
attendre  si  longtemps.  J 'en  recois  beaucoup,  et  j'en  recevrais 
encore  plus  si  je  pouvais  m'habituer  a  y  repondre  tout  de  suite 
apres  qu'elles  ont  ete  lues.  Je  vais  mettre  dans  les  enveloppes  les 
lettres  que  vous  voyez  la.  Je  n'ai  pas  de  timbres.  Je  n'en  ai  pas 
achete  hier  et  je  m'en  repens  aujourd'hui.  Si  je  savais  ou  il  y  en 
a  dans  la  maison,  je  m'en  servirais.  Voyons  si  Marie  est  la.  «  Y 
a-t-il  des  timbres  de  cinq  sous  ici  ?  —  Pourquoi  de  cinq  sous  ?  — 
Parce  qu'on  doit  mettre  un  timbre  de  cinq  sous  sur  les  lettres  et 
de  deux  sous  sur  les  cartes  pour  les  pays  etrangers.  —  Je  n'en  ai 
que  deux.  —  Eh  bien !  J'irai  moi-meme  mettre  mes  lettres  a  la 
poste  parce  qu'il  y  en  a  une  que  je  vais  faire  recommander.  Le 
courrier  part  a  cinq  heures,  je  pourrai  arriver  a  temps.  Vois-tu  mes 
gants  dans  le  salon  ?  —  Non,  je  ne  peux  pas  les  trouver.  —  Non  ? 
Ah !  les  voici.  Viens  avec  moi.  Heureusement  (que)  le  bureau  de 
poste  n'est  pas  loin,  autrement  nous  ne  pourrions  y  arriver  avant 
cinq  heures.  Nous  y  voici.  J'ai  mes  timbres  que  j'ai  achetes  au 
guichet.  Ou  y  a-t-il  une  boite  aux  lettres  ?  Ah  1  en  voici  une..  II 
est  quatre  heures  et  demie.    Le  courrier  n'est  pas  encore  parti. » 

Theme 

"Ah!  Here  is  the  postman,  who  has  just  put  some  letters 
in  our  letter  box.  We  receive  the  mail  three  times  a  day.  Here  is 
an  envelope  with  a  five-cent  stamp.  It  must  come  from  France. 
It  is  from  my  friend  Charles,  from  whom  I  received  another  letter 
two  weeks  ago.  Let  us  see  what  he  has  to  say.  He  does  not 
know  whether  he  will  be  able  to  come  back  in  (avant)  two  months. 
He  will,  however,  come  back  in  time  for  New  Year's.  I  see  that 
he  is  enjoying  himself.    I  am  going  to  write  him  a  long  letter, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN   OIR  321 

which  I  shall  afterward  go  to  mail.  I  shall  thus  be  able  to  buy 
some  postal  cards  ;  I  have  n't  any  more.  I  have  also  another  letter 
which  I  am  to  have  registered.  I  ought  to  have  sent -it  sooner,  but 
my  father  will  receive  it  on  time.  It  is  money  I  owe  him.  He  will 
receive  it  with  pleasure,  for  I  have  been  owing  it  to  him  for  a  long 
time.  Let  us  go  to  the  post  office.  There  is  the  stamp  window. 
If  we  only  knew  where  the  clerk  is,  we  could  ask  him  for  what 
we  want.  There  he  is.  Six  five-cent  stamps  and  a  two-cent  one, 
please.  Could  I  ask  you  where  the  box  is ? "  "Do  you  not  see 
it  over  there  near  that  door,  sir }"    "I  see  it,  thank  you." 

Oral 

1.  Savez-vous  bien  cette  lecon?  2.  La  sauriez-vous  si  vous  ne 
Paviez  pas  etudie'e?  3.  Combien  de  temps  devez-vous  l'etudier 
pour  la  savoir  ?  4.  Devez-vous  de  l'argent  a  quelqu'un  ?  5.  Payeriez- 
vous  votre  tailleur  si  vous  lui  en  deviez?  6.  Me  recevriez-vous 
si  je  venais  vous  voir?  7.  Avez-vous  recu  une  lettre  ce  matin? 
8.  Combien  de  fois  par  jour  voyez-vous  le  facteur  ?  9.  Recevez- 
vous  du  courrier  le  dimanche  ?    1  o.  Me  verrez-vous  ici  dimanche  ? 

1 1.  Que  doit-on  faire  quand  on  a  une  lettre  importante  a  envoyer  ? 

12.  Pouvez-vous  aller  d'ici  au  bureau  de  poste  en  cinq  minutes? 

13.  A  quelle  heure  auriez-vous  du  partir  de  chez  vous  pour  arriver 
ici  a  sept  heures  et  demie?  14.  Devons-nous  quitter  la  classe 
bientot?    1 5 .  Savez-vous  chanter  ? 

Resume 

1.  My  brother  is  to  start  for  Europe  next  Friday.  2.  The  ball 
was  to  take  place  in  this  room.  3.  Children  ought  to  get  up  early 
to  be  well.  4.  My  mother  is  sick  and  I  ought  not  to  stay  longer. 
5.  You  ought  to  have  gone  to  the  post  office  before  7.30.  6.  We 
should  use  all  that  we  have  for  our  friends.  7.  Are  you  to  see  him 
tomorrow  at  11. 15  a. m.  ?  8.  I  cannot  come  down  now;  I  am 
dressing.  9.  I  ought  to  know  how  to  speak  French  soon.  10.  He 
will  not  be  able  to  go  to  the  theater  if  his  dress  suit  does  not 


322  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

come.  ii.  You  have  eaten  nothing  today;  you  must  be  hungry. 
12.  People  ought  not  to  be  ashamed  of  what  they  do.  13.  Will 
you  send  me.  the  photographs  as  soon  as  they  come  ?  1 4.  He  can 
work,  but  he  cannot  build  a  house.  15.  There  is  the  man  of  whom 
I  was  just  speaking.  16.  I  receive  some  letters,  but  I  should  re- 
ceive more  if  I  answered  them.  17.  I  have  no  stamps ;  I  ought  to 
go  to  the  office  and  buy  some.  18.  He  hopes  that  I  shall  see  him 
in  two  weeks.  19.  Do  you  know  how  many  times  a  day  the  post- 
man comes  ?    20.  Please  pay  what  you  owe  when  you  go  to  town. 


LESSON   FORTY-SIX 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  OIR 

270.  Valoir,  to  be  worth,  valant,  valu,  vaux,  valus. 
Pres.  Ind.     je  vaux  nous  valons 

tu  vaux  vous  valez 

il  vaut  ils  valent 

Fut.  je  vaudrai 

Pres.  Subj.   je  vaille  nous  valions 

tu  vailles  vous  valiez 

il  vaille  ils  vaillent 
Note.    See  Sec.  252,/i 

271.  Vouloir,  to  wish,  want,  voulant,  voulu,  veux,  voulus. 


Pres. 

Ind. 

je  veux 

nous  voulons 

tu  veux 

vous  voulez 

il  veut 

ils  veulent 

Fut. 

je  voudrai 

Imv. 

veuille  (veux) 

veuillons  (voulons) 
veuillez  (voulez) 

Pres. 

Subj. 

je  veuille 

nous  voulions 

tu  veuilles 

vous  vouliez 

il  veuille 

ils  veuillent 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  OIR  323 

Note  i.  See  Sec.  252,  b,  c,f. 

Note  2.  The  forms  of  the  imperative  inclosed  in  parentheses  are 

rarely  used.  Its  other  forms  have  ordinarily  the  meaning  please,  be  good 
enough  to. 

Veuillez  me  le  donner.  Please  give  it  to  me. 

Note  3.  Will  you  have  in  the  sense  of  do  you  wish  is  translated 
by  vouloir. 

Will  you  have  some  bread  ?  Voulez-vons  du  pain  ? 

272.  Asseoir,  to  seat,  asseyant,  assis,  assieds,  assis. 

Fut.  j'assierai  (asseyerai) 

Note.   Y  does  not  change  to  i  before  mute  e. 

273.  Falloir,  to  be  necessary,  (pres.  part,  wanting),  fallu, 
il  faut,  il  faUut. 

Imp.  il  fallait 

Fut.  il  faudra 

Pres.  Subj.    il  faille 

Note  i.    See  Sec.  252,/ 

Note  2.  Falloir  is  an  impersonal  verb ;  that  is,  it  is  found  only  in 
the  third  person  singular. 

274.  Falloir  is  followed  by  the  subjunctive  (Sec.  303)  when 
there  is  any  emphasis  on  the  person  concerned,  as  always  when 
this  person  is  expressed  by  a  noun  and  often  when  it  is  ex- 
pressed by  a  pronoun.  It  is  followed  by  the  infinitive  in  gen- 
eral statements,  and  also  sometimes  with  unemphatic  pronouns. 
II  faut  que  Jean  parte  {subj.).  It  is   necessary  that  John  start 

{John  must  start). 
II  faut  qu'ils  partent  {subj.).  They  must  start. 

II  faut  partir  a  temps.  It  is  necessary  to  start  on  time. 

II  me  faut  partir  a  six  heures.         /  must  start  at  six  o'clock. 
Ilfaudraquenouspartions(.fz^'.).      We  shall  have  to  start. 
II  a  fallu  le  payer.  We  had  {it  was  necessary)  to  pay 

for  it. 


324 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Note  i  .  Falloir  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  devoir.  Falloir 
denotes  obligation  from  the  standpoint  of  necessity ;  devoir,  from  the 
standpoint  of  duty. 

You  ought  to  (must)  obey  God.  Vous  devez  obeir  a  Dieu. 

The  law  must  be  obeyed.  Ilfaut  obeir  a  la  loi. 

You  must  start  early.  H  vous  faut partir  de  bonne  heure. 

Note  2.    Falloir  is  translated  need  when  a  noun  directly  follows. 
He  needs  another  (one  more)  pencil.       H  lui  faut  encore  ten  crayon. 
I  need  another  (a  different)  horse.         II  me  faut  tin  autre  cheval. 
My  father  needs  a  coat.  Ilfaut  un  habit  a  mon  pere. 


IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 


borgne,  blind  in  one  eye 
de  nouveau,  again 
ob&r  a,  to  obey 
voler  a,  to  steal  from 
s'asseoir,  to  sit  down 
valoir  mieux,  to  be  better 


vouloir  bien,  to  be  willing 
vouloir  dire,  to  mean 
vouloir  rire,  to  joke 
en  vouloir  a,  to  have  a  grudge 

against 
etre  en  vente,  to  be  on  sale 


Drill 

1.  Give  the  — 
synopsis  of  vouloir 
synopsis  of  s'asseoir 
present  indicative  of  valoir 
present  subjunctive  of  vouloir 

2.  Locate  — 

faudra  voudrait 

vaudras  je  m'assis 

3.  Give  the  — 
imv.  2d  sing,  of  vouloir 
conditional  3d  plu.  of  asseoir 
pres.  subj.  3d  sing,  of  falloir 
imp.  subj.  3d  plu.  of  s'asseoir 


EXERCISE 


present  indicative  of  asseoir 
present  subjunctive  of  s'asseoir 
present  subjunctive  of  valoir 
conditional  of  falloir 


vaille 
asseyons 


valions 
valut 


imp.  1st  plu.  of  valoir 
pres.  subj.  1st  plu.  of  vouloir 
pres.  ind.  3d  plu.  of  vouloir 
pres.  ind.  3d  plu.  of  valoir 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN   OIR  325 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

it  is  worth  ten  francs  you  ought  to  run  now 

it  is  better  to  work  you  had  to  run 

he  wants  to  work  you  will  have  to  run 

he  is  willing  to  work  he  needs  another  cup 

I  mean  your  brother  shall  you  buy  a  cup  ? 
I  have  a  grudge  against  your         will  you  bring  a  cup  ? 

brother      •  will  you  have  a  cup  of  tea  ? 
he  has  a  grudge  against  them         please  stay 

he  was  seated  it  belongs  to  her 

he  was  sitting  down  he  obeys  the  teacher 

you  must  run  he  stole  the  horse 

you  have  run  he  stole  it  from  him 

your  friend  must  run  you  are  joking 

Model  .     Le  Cheval  Vole 

On  avait  vole'  a  un  paysan  un  cheval,  qui  valait  deux  cents  francs. 
Comme  il  en  voulait  un  autre,  il  lui  fallut  se  rendre  a  une  foire 
pour  l'acheter.  Pendant  qu'il  parcourait  le  champ  de  foire,  il  vit 
enfin  son  cheval  vole  parmi  ceux  qui  etaient  en  vente.  «  Ce  cheval 
est  a  moi » ,  dit-il  a  l'homme  qui  etait  assis  pres  du  cheval  pour  le 
garden  «  On  me  Fa  vole  il  y  a  trois  jours.  — Vous  voulez  rire», 
repondit  Fautre,  « je  Fai  depuis  trois  ans.  —  Impossible  » ,  repondit 
le  paysan  en  placant  tout  a  coup  les  mains  sur  les  deux  yeux  du 
cheval.  « Voyons,  de  quel  oeil  est-il  borgne  ? »  La  dispute  com- 
mencait  a  attirer  une  foule  assez  grande,  et  le  voleur  devait 
repondre  sans  hesitation.  «  De  Foeil  gauche  » ,  dit-il.  Le  paysan 
ota  sa  main  et  cet  oeil  gauche  e'tait  clair  et  brillant.  «  Oh !  je  me 
suis  trompe  » ,  re'pondit  Fautre  tout  de  suite ;  « je  voulais  dire  de 
Foeil  droit.  — Vous  mentez.  II  vaudrait  mieux  vous  taire.  Le 
cheval  n'est  borgne  ni  de  Foeil  droit  ni  de  Foeil  gauche  » ,  dit  alors 
le  paysan,  otant  Fautre  main.    «I1  est  evident  que  vous  6tes  un 


326 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


voleur.  II  faut  que  vous 
me  rendiez  mon  cheval,  et 
que  vous  alliez  avec  moi 
devant  un  magistrate 

Theme 

Several   years   ago   a 

man  stole  a  horse  from  a 

• 

peasant.  The  latter,  who 
wanted  another  one,  for 
he  needed  it  to  work  in 
the  (aux)  fields,  looked 
for  it  a  long  time,  and  one 
day  when  (que)  he  had 
just  arrived  at  a  fair,  he 
found  the  horse  they  had 
stolen  from  him.  The 
horse  was  on  sale,  and 
the  man  who  had  it  said 
it  was  worth  much  money. 
The  peasant  went  and  got 
a  magistrate,  and  the  two 
approached  the  animal. 
"  It  is  my  horse,"  said  the 
peasant,  "and  the  man 
who  is  seated  there  is  the 
thief."  The  other  replied 
immediately,  when  he  saw 
the  magistrate,  "  This 
horse  is  mine,  and  it  has 
belonged  to  me  for  three 
years."  "  Let  us  see,"  continued  the  peasant,  and  he  covered  both 
eyes  of  the  horse.    "  The  horse  is  blind  in  one  eye ;  which  is  it, 


LA  FOIRE  A  BESTIAUX 

Tres  pittoresques  ces  foires  a  bestiaux, 
principalement  en  province.  Les  paysans 
se  rendent,  a  une  date  donnee,  sur  une  des 
places  du  village  ou  de  la  ville,  oil  les  ache- 
teurs  peuvent  apprecier,  par  comparaison, 
les  qualites  des  bestiaux  a  vendre.  Ces 
maquignons  et  fermiers,  en  blouse  bleue,  qui 
leurvient  generalement  aux  genoux,  ont  un 
langage  quelquefois  bien  amusant  a  ecouter, 
surtout  lorsque  l'acheteur  ne  peut  se  decider 
d'une  facon  ou  d'une  autre.  La  discussion 
se  continue  souvent  au  plus  proche  cabaret, 
oil,  sous  l'esprit  de  camaraderie  que  cree  la 
chaleur  du  vin,  le  fermier  espere  conclure 
le  marche  avec  son  client  recalcitrant 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  OIR  327 

the  left  one  (that  of  left)  or  the  right  one  ? "  M  The  left,"  said  the 
other,  without  hesitation.  "You  are  mistaken,"  replied  the  peasant. 
"I  meant  the  right,"  said  the  man,  who  already  knew  by  the  glances 
they  were  casting  on  him  that  he  could  not  lie  much  longer.  "  You 
must  guess  again,"  replied  the  peasant,  and  he  showed  both  eyes 
of  the  horse,  which  were  clear  and  brilliant.  It  was  evident  that 
the  man  had  stolen  the  horse  and  that  it  belonged  to  the  peasant. 

Oral 

1.  Combien  vaut  ce  livre?  2.  Vaut-il  mieux  mettre  un  manteau 
quand  il  fait  froid  ?  3.  L'or  vaudrait-il  autant  s'il  y  en  avait  beau- 
coup?  4.  Combien  valait  ce  cheval  vole?  5.  Voulez-vous  savoir 
quand  est  mort  Napole'on  ?  6.  Voudriez-vous  aller  au  theatre  si 
je  vous  y  invitais?  7.  Veuillez  me  donner  votre  livre.  8.  Que 
dites-vous  a  une  personne  pour  savoir  si  elle  a  besoin  de  pain  ? 
9.  Mangez-vous  debout?  10.  A  quelle  heure  vous  etes-vous  assis 
en  classe  ce  matin  ?  11.  Que  vous  f aut-il  f aire  pour  savoir  vos 
lecons?  12.  Que  f aut-il  pour  s'asseoir?  13.  Les  soldats  doivent-ils 
obeir  k  leurs  chefs?  14.  En  voulez-vous  a  votre  maitre  quand  il 
dit  que  vous  ne  savez  pas  votre  lecon?  15.  A  qui  un  e'leve  en 
veut-il  souvent  ? 

Resume 

1.  It  is  necessary  to  send  for  the  doctor  this  morning.  2.  Sit 
down,  if  you  will ;  I  prefer  to  sit  down  myself.  3.  I  need  another 
napkin ;  bring  me  one.  4.  I  am  willing  to  go  and  eat  my  breakfast 
at  once.  5.  I  did  not  know  what  you  meant  when  you  spoke. 
6.  My  sister  came  in  when  we  were  sitting  around  the  fire.  7.  You 
must  be  hungry;  it  will  be  better  to  eat  a  good  dinner  than  a 
luncheon.  8.  We  need  another  spoon  and  a  large  cup.  9.  The 
ladies  seated  themselves  in  the  parlor  after  supper.  10.  I  have  a 
grudge  against  the  merchant  who  sold  me  this  cloth.  11.  Will 
your  mother  need  more  than  seven  dozen  eggs  ?    12.  Will  you  sell 


328  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

the  tablecloth  that  you  bought?  13.  It  is  not  necessary  for  us  to 
become  rich.  14.  They  had  to  ask  him  for  some  money,  but  they 
did  not  wish  to  do  it.  15.  Here  are  the  stamps  which  I  bought 
for  myself;  will  you  have  some?  16.  I  do  not  know  what  you 
need;  do  you  want  what  we  have  ?  17.  Soldiers  must  always  obey 
their  officers.  18.  I  will  not  sit  down;  I  have  to  be  in  town  before 
eight  o'clock.  19.  The  boy  says  that  he  has  to  go  for  the  doctor. 
20.  Please  give  me  the  papers  of  which  I  was  speaking. 


LESSON   FORTY-SEVEN 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  RE 

275.  Naitre,  to  be  bom,  naissant,  n6,  nais,  naquis. 

Pres.  Ind.      je  nais  nous  naissons 

tu  nais  vous  naissez 

il  halt  ils  naissent 

Fut.  je  naitrai 

Note.   The  stem  syllable  has  ai  before  t. 

276.  Connaitre,  to  know,  connaissant,  connu,  connais,  connus. 

Pres.  Ind.      je  connais  nous  connaissons 

tu  connais  vous  connaissez 

il  connait  ils  connaissent 

Note  i.   The  stem  syllable  has  ai  before  t. 

Note  2.    Connaitre,  to  know  a  person  ;  savoir,  to  know  a  fact. 

Similarly  paraitre,  to  appear. 

277.  Mettre,  to  put,  mettant,  mis,  mets,  mis. 

278.  Craindre,    to  fear,    craignant,    craint,    crains,    craignis. 
Similarly  all  verbs  ending  in  aindre,  eindre,  oindre. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  RE  329 

279.  Prendre,  to  take,  prenant,  pris,  prends,  pris. 
Pres.  Ind.      je  prends  nous  prenons 

tu  prends  vous  prenez 

il  prend  ils  prennent 

Pres.  Subj.     je  prenne  nous  prenions 

tu  prennes  vous  preniez 

il  prenne  ils  prennent 
Note.    See  Sec.  252,  d. 

280.  Dire,  to  say,  tell,  disant,  dit,  dis,  dis. 
Pres.  Ind.       je  dis  nous  disons 

tu  dis  vous  dites 

il  dit  ils  disent 

Note.    Compounds  of  dire  are  regular  in  the  second  person  plural 
of  the  present  indicative,  except  redire,  to  say  again. 

281.  £crire,  to  write,  Scrivant,  6crit,  6cris,  £crivis. 

282.  Lire,  to  read,  lisant,  lu,  lis,  lus. 

COMPOUND  VERBS  —  IDIOMATIC  FORMS 

admettre,  to  admit  de  vue,  by  sight 

atteindre,  to  reach  pendant  que,  while 

peindre,  to  paint  se  mettre  a,  to  begin 

comprendre,  to  understand  se  moquer  de,  to  make  sport  of 

apprendre,  to  learn  entendre  parler,  to  hear  tell 

enseigner,  to  teach  aux  d^pens  de,  at  the  expense  of 

Drin  EXERCISE 

i.  Give  the  — 

synopsis  of  prendre  present  subjunctive  of  ecrire 

synopsis  of  atteindre  imperfect  subjunctive  of  lire 

present  indicative  of  paraitre  present  indicative  of  mettre 

past  definite  of  craindre  present  indicative  of  naitre 

present  indicative  of  dire  present  subjunctive  of  prendre 


330  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

2.  Translate  into  French  — 


he  knows  me 
she  puts 
fear  not 
they  are  taking 
you  say 

3.  Give  the  — 

pres.  subj.  3d  plu.  of  craindre 
pres.  subj.  1st  plu.  of  prendre 
past  def.  2d  plu.  of  dire 
pres.  subj.  2d  sing,  of  £crire 

4.  Translate  into  French 

the  king  was  born  there 

I  was  born  here 

I  know  you 

take  the  horse  from  the  barn 

we  begin  to  fear 

we  began  to  read 

do  you  understand  this  ? 


we  say 

I  was  writing 

he  had  written 

are  you  reading  ? 

does  he  know  what  you  say  ? 


imp.  2d  plu.  of  naitre 
imp.  subj.  3d  sing,  of  admettre 
pres.    subj.    3d    sing,    of    com- 
prendre 


he  is  learning  the  verbs 
he  will  teach  them 
say  that  to  her 
tell  him  that 
you  appear  sick 
during  the  day 
while  the  day  lasts 


5.  Write,  inserting  correct  verb  forms,  (a)  in  the  present 
tense ;  also,  except  in  the  case  of  infinitives  and  participles, 
(b)  in  the  past  indefinite,  and  (c)  in  the  conditional : 

II  nous  (falloir)  (ecrire)  nos  exercices.  Nous  (savoir)  (lire)  le 
fran'cais.  Nous  (lire)  une  histoire.  En  (lire)  on  (apprendre)  (lire). 
Nous  (vouloir)  (finir)  cette  histoire  aujourd'hui.  II  (valoir)  mieux 
bien  (travailler).  Nous  (craindre)  le  maitre,  que  nous  (connaitre) 
bien.  II  (paraitre)  nous  en  (vouloir).  Nous  lui  (obe'ir)  toujours. 
Ne  le  (dire)  vous  pas  ? 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  RE  331 

Model  Complet 

Les  omnibus  et  les  tramways  a  Paris  n'admettent  qu'un  nombre 
fixe  de  voyageurs.  Quand  la  limite  est  atteinte,  le  conducteur  met 
a  la  portiere  une  pancarte  sur  laquelle  est  ecrit  le  mot  Complet. 
Ce  mot  veut  dire  que  Ton  n'admettra  personne.  Un  voyageur 
americain  qui  ne  connaissait  pas  cette  coutume  dit  un  jour  a  un 
de  ses  amis,  au  commencement  de  son  sejour  h  Paris :  «  Que  veut 
done  dire  ce  mot  Complet  que  je  vois  si  souvent  sur  les  omnibus  ? 
—  Comment,  dit  Pautre,  qui  vit  l'occasion  de  s'amuser  aux  depens 
de  son  ami,  comment,  vous  ne  Pavez  pas  encore  visite  ?  —  Visite 
quoi  ?  —  Mais,  Complet !  C'est  un  endroit  charmant ;  il  vous  faut 
voir  cela,  mon  cher. »  L'Americain  se  mit  a  suivre  quelques  jours 
chaque  omnibus  qui  portait  ce  mot,  mais  le  conducteur  ne  l'admettait 
jamais.  Enfin  il  lui  fallut  quitter  Paris,  et  il  n'a  point  vu  « Complet*. 

Theme 

A  friend  of  mine,  who  was  born  like  me  in  Boston,  has  heard 
tell  of  an  American  who  was  visiting  Paris  and  who  did  not  know 
French  very  well.  He  could  not  understand  what  the  word 
M  Complet "  meant,  which  he  often  saw  on  the  omnibuses  of  the 
city.  One  day  he  said  to  a  gentleman  whom  he  knew  by  sight: 
w  Where  is  '  Complet '  ?  Please  tell  (it  to)  me  at  once.  It  must  be 
a  charming  place  because  so  many  tramcars  go  there."  M  What!  " 
replied  the  gentleman,  M  have  you  not  been  there  yet  ?  "  "I  have 
wanted  to  go  there  many  times,  but  the  conductor  would  not 
admit  me,"  said  the  American,  sadly.  "  Visit  it  while  you  are  in 
Paris,"  continued  the  gentleman.  "All  the  Americans  visit  it. 
Take  an  omnibus  or  a  tramcar  on  which  is  written  the  word 
1  Complet,'  and  you  will  easily  find  the  place."  All  that  the  gentle- 
man had  said  appeared  true  to  him,  and  he  began  to  follow  each 
omnibus  and  each  tramcar  which  led,  as  he  thought,  to  that  famous 
place.  At  last  he  saw  that  the  gentleman  had  made  fun  of  him 
and  he  left  the  city ;  but  he  had  not  seen  "  Complet." 


332  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Oral 

i.  Quand  etes-vous  ne  ?  2.  Me  connaissiez-vous  il  y  a  trois 
ans?  3.  Connaissez-vous  le  president  de  vue?  4.  Savez-vous  com- 
ment il  s'appelle  ?  5.  Cette  lecon  vous  parait-elle  facile  ?  6.  Savez- 
vous  peindre?  7.  Quels  habits  mettriez-vous  si  nous  etions  en 
hiver  ?  8.  A  quelle  heure  vous  mettez-vous  a  etudier  ?  9.  Craignez- 
vous  les  punitions?  10.  Comprenez-vous  tout  ce  que  je  dis? 
11.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  appreniez  la  semaine  derniere  ?  12.  Quels 
verbes  venez-vous  d'apprendre  ?  13.  Que-  dis-je  quand  on  me 
donne  quelque  chose?  14.  Que  dit-on  quand  on  rencontre  une 
personne  que  Ton  connait?  15.  £crivez-vous  tout  le  francais  que 
vous  lisez? 

Risume 

1.  When  he  begins  to  read,  the  boys  make  fun  of  him.  2.  Which 
teacher  taught  him  French  grammar  ?  3.  Has  the  little  girl  learned 
the  names  of  all  the  kings  of  England  yet  ?  4.  I  know  your  father ; 
he  has  just  entered  the  house.  5.  He  wished  to  take  all  that  was 
given  him.  6.  They  have  gone  away ;  let  us  eat  all  the  fruit  on 
the  table.  7.  Put  on  your  coat  if  you  are  cold;  do  not  close  the 
doors.  8.  Marie  Antoinette  was  born  November  2,  1755,  and  died 
October  16,  1793.  9.  Does  he  fear  the  man  who  gives  him  all  the 
money  he  needs  ?  10.  Please  sit  down  ;  I  want  to  show  you  what 
he  wrote  me.  11.  Did  you  put  any  oranges  on  the  table?  Yes,  I 
put  some  there.    12.  If  I  knew  how  to  speak  French  well  enough, 


LES  OMNIBUS  PARISIENS.  Le  systeme  de  transportation  de  Paris  etait 
jusque  dans  ces  dernieres  annees  compose  principalement  d'omnibus  a 
chevaux,  suivant  des  trajets  r^guliers  et  ne  s'arretant  qu'aux  stations 
designees.  Le  conducteur  ne  laissait  monter  qu'un  certain  nombre  de 
personnes,  et  lorsque  le  nombre  de  celles  qui  desiraient  monter  excedait 
celui  des  places  vides,  il  ne  les  admettait  que  dans  l'ordre  numerique  des 
billets  qu'elles  avaient  prises.  L'autobus  a  maintenant  remplace  en  grande 
partie  les  anciens  vehicules. 


334  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

I  would  take  some  friends  to  Paris  next  summer.  13.  Have  you 
read  all  the  letters  that  she  wrote  you  ?  1 4.  I  will  call  you  if  you 
will  tell  me  at  what  time  you  wish  to  get  up.  15.  My  friend  needs 
more  money  in  order  to  go  to  Europe.  16.  As  soon  as  they  had 
seated  themselves,* the  teacher  entered.  17.  Did  they  take  all  the 
apples  he  gave  me  ?  18.  He  says  that  he  shall  have  to  start  before 
noon  in  order  to  arrive  in  time.  19.  What  does  this  word  mean? 
Ask  him  who  knows  (it).  20.  The  American  began  to  follow  the 
omnibuses. 


LESSON   FORTY-EIGHT 

IRREGULAR  VERBS   IN  RE 

283.  Suivre,  to  follow,  suivant,  suivi,  suis,  suivis. 

284.  Vivre,  to  live,  vivant,  v6cu,  vis,  v&us. 
Note.   Vivre,  to  live,  exist ;  demeurer,  to  live  in,  dwell. 

285.  Plaire,  to  please,  plaisant,  plu,  plais,  plus. 

Pres.  Ind.     je  plais  nous  plaisons 

tu  plais  vous  plaisez 

il  plait  ils  plaisent 

286.  Taire,  to  be  silent  about,  taisant,  tu,  tais,  tus. 

287.  Boire,  to  drink,  buvant,  bu,  bois,  bus. 
Pres.  Ind.     je  bois  nous  buvons 

tu  bois  vous  buvez 

il  boit  ils  boivent 

Pres.  Subj.    je  boive  nous  buvions 

tu  boives  vous  buviez 

il  boive  ils  boivent 

Note.    See  Sec.  252,  b,  c. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  RE  335 

288.  Croire,  to  believe,  think ,  croyant,  cru,  crois,  crus. 

Pres.  Ind.     je  crois  nous  croyons 

tu  crois  vous  croyez 

il  croit  ils  croient 

Pres.  Subj.   je  croie  nous  croyions 

tu  croies  vous  croyiez 

il  croie  ils  croient 

Note  i.    See  Sec.  252,  a. 

Note  2.    Observe  the  following  idiomatic  use  of  the  infinitive  after 
croire  and  other  verbs  of  believing,  etc. : 

Je  crois  etre  ici.  I  think  I  am  here. 

Je  crois  l'avoir  vu.  /  think  I  have  seen  him. 

But  when  the  subject  changes,  the  infinitive  is  not  used. 

Je  crois  que  Jean  est  ici.  /  think  John  is  here. 

Je  crois  que  Jean  l'a  vu.  I  think  John  has  seen  him. 

289.  Conduire,  to  lead,  conduisant,  conduit,  conduis,  conduisis. 
Similarly  all  verbs  ending  in  uire  except  luire,  to  shine, 

and  nuire,   to  injure,  which  differ  only  in  having  as  past 
participles  lui  and  nui. 

COMPOUND  VERBS  —  IDIOMATIC  FORMS 

a  demain,  good-by  till  tomorrow     prevenir,  to  warn,  notify 
suivant(e),  following  convenir  a,  to  suit 

sous  peu,  shortly,  before  long         plaire  a,  to  please 
une  heure  de  l'apres-midi,  one  in     se  tirer  d'affaire,  to  get  along 
the  afternoon     .  se  taire,  to  be  silent 

prendre  (se  donner)  la  peine  de,  to  take  the  trouble  to 

Drill  •  EXERCISE 

I.  Give  the —     , 
synopsis  of  croire  present  indicative  of  plaire 

synopsis  of  vivre  present  subjunctive  of  croire 


336  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

present  indicative  of  suivre  imperfect  subjunctive  of  conduire 

past  definite  of  vivre  past  definite  of  se  taire 

present  indicative  of  boire  principal  parts  of  nuire 

2.  Translate  into  French  — 

she  would  think  she  pleases 

you  are  following  they  believe 

follow  I  had  led 

he  lives  I  had  been  led 

3.  Give  the  — 

pres.  ind.  1st  sing,  of  suivre  past  def.  3d  sing,  of  voir 

pres.  ind.  1st  sing,  of  etre  pres.  subj.  2d  sing,  of  plaire 

pres.  ind.  3d  sing,  of  vivre  past  participle  feminine  of  croire 

imp.  subj.  3d  sing,  of  conduire  pres.  subj.  3d  plu.  of  luire 

4.  Translate  into  French  — 

he  still  lives  the  following  week 

he  lives  here  they  were  silent 

does  she  please  your  father  ?  it  suits  my  friend 

I  think  he  is  sick  he  will  take  the  trouble  to  come 

I  think  I  am  sick  I  shall  get  along 

5.  Write,  inserting  correct  verb  forms,  (a)  in  the  present 
tense ;  {b)  in  the  imperfect ;  (c)  replacing  ils  by  je : 

lis  (croire)  que  le  voleur  (demeurer)  la,  mais  ils  se  (taire). 
Ils  le  (suivre)  depuis  deux  jours.  Ils  (esperer)  le  surprendre.  Ils  le 
(conduire)  devant  le  juge,  qui  le  (mettre)  en  prison.  Les  voleurs 
(boire)  du  vin  quand  cela  leur  (plaire).  Ne  le  (croire)  vous  pas  ? 
Oui,  il  (falloir)  le  croire. 

model  LA  Visite  au  Professeur     * 

Pardon,  mademoiselle,  est-ce  ici  que  demeure  M.  Marechal  ? 

—  Veuillez  vous  donner  la  peine  d'entrer.    Qui  dois-je  annoncer  ? 

—  Je  m'appelle  Leroux.     Je  viens  voir  M.   Mare'chal  pour  des 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  RE  337 

le9ons.  —  Je  crois  qu'il  est  chez  lui.  Asseyez-vous  dans  le  salon, 
s'il  vous  plait.  Je  vais  le  prevenir.  —  Bonjour,  madame,  qu'est-ce 
qui  me  vaut  le  plaisir  de  votre  visite  ?  —  Je  suis  venue  vous 
demander  si  vous  pourriez  me  donner  quelques  lecons  de  francais. 
Je  voudrais  surtout  converser,  car  je  sais  assez  bien  la  grammaire 
et  je  lis  facilement.  J'espere  aller  en  France  dans  trois  mois,  et  , 
comme  je  crois  y  rester  quelque  temps,  je  tiens  a  pouvoir  me  servir 
de  la  langue  aussitot  que  j'arriverai.  J'ai  suivi  des  cours,  mais  la 
methode  des  professeurs  ne  me  plaisait  pas.  La  methode  que 
vous  employez  me  plaira,  et  si  vous  croyez  etre  libre  une  heure 
par  jour,  cela  me  plairait  beaucoup.  — Je  crois  pouvoir  vous 
donner  une  lecon  par  jour,  et  si  vous  suivez  mes  conseils,  vous 
saurez  vous  tirer  d'affaire  sous  peu,  car  vous  parlez  deja  assez 
couramment.  Avez-vous  jamais  vecu  en  France?  — Mon  pere 
m'y  a  conduite  quand  j'etais  petite.  II  m'a  fallu  aller  a  l'ecole 
pendant  six  mois,  mais  comme  je  comprenais  tres  peu,  je  me  taisais 
quand  j'aurais  du  repondre,  et  par  consequent  je  ne  parle  pas 
aussi  couramment  que  je  devrais  le  faire.  —  Eh  bien,  si  cela  vous 
convient,  nous  commencerons  lundi  prochain  a  dix  heures,  et  les 
jours  suivants  a  une  heure  de  l'apres-midi.  Le  prix  est  de  dix 
francs  par  lecon.    —  Tres  bien,  monsieur.    A  lundi  prochain. 

Theme 

This  morning  I  went  to  my  new  French  teacher's.  His  name  is 
Marechal  and  he  is  French.  He  gave  me  my  lesson  at  ten  o'clock, 
but  tomorrow  and  the  following  days  I  shall  go  to  see  him  at  half 
past  two  in  the  afternoon.  He  asks  ten  francs  a  lesson.  He 
pleased  me  much,  and  if  I  am  to  believe  him,  I  shall  speak  fluently 
soon.  What  pleases  me  is  the  method  that  he  uses.  I  follow  his 
advice,  and  through  {par)  the  conversation,  which  he  leads  skillfully, 
we  live  for  (during)  an  hour  as  if  we  were  in  France.  I  read  a 
little.  I  also  wrote  a  page  from  a  book,  which  I  translated  after- 
wards into  English.    Believe  me  please  (if  you  will),  I  did  not  use  a 


338  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

word  of  English.  As  I  hope  to  go  to  France  next  year,  I  shall  use 
the  language  as  much  as  possible.  If  I  knew  grammar  better,  I 
should  learn  still  more  quickly.  He  warned  me  that  I  should  have 
(falloir)  to  study  it  hard.  I  shall  take  that  trouble,  be  sure  of  it, 
for  I  am  eager  to  converse  in  that  language,  which  I  like  so 
much.    I  want  to  speak  like  my  friend  George. 

Oral 

i..  Ou  demeurez-vous  ?  2.  Y  demeurez-vous  depuis  longtemps? 
3.  Les  Gaulois  vivaient-ils  dans  des  villes  ?  4.  Combien  de  temps 
vecut  George  Washington  ?  5.  Comment  invitez-vous  une  personne 
a  s'asseoir  ?  6.  Suiviez-vous  des  cours  de  francais  l'annee  derniere  ? 
7.  Combien  de  lecons  avez-vous  par  jour?  8.  Vous  tireriez-vous 
d'affaire  en  France  si  vous  ne  parliez  pas  la  langue  ?  9.  Cela  vous 
conviendrait-il  si  Ton  vous  invitait  a  aller  au  theatre  ce  soir? 
10.  Suivez-vous  bien  votre  maitre  quand  il  lit  a  haute  voix  en 
classe  ?  11.  Qu'avez-vous  bu  a  votre  dejeuner  ce  matin? 
12.  Boiriez-vous  si  vous  aviez  soif  ?  13.  Croyez-vous  tout  ce  que 
vous  lisez  dans  les  journaux  ?  14.  Que  font  les  eleves  qui  ne 
savent  pas  repondre  ?  15.  Combien  de  phrases  avez-vous  traduites 
aujourd'hui  ? 

Resume 

1.  Finally  he  enters  the  house  and  his  friend  follows  him. 
2.  I  do  not  want  to  live  if  he  has  to  die.  3.  He  is  hoping  to  be 
able  to  converse  in  French  soon.  4.  He  thinks  that  his  new  teacher 
will  please  him.  5.  It  is  necessary  to  know  how  to  talk  French  to 
get  along  in  Paris.  6.  John  is  in  Paris  and  he  believes  that  he  shall 
stay  there  a  year.  7.  Sit  down,  please;  I  shall  be  back  before 
long.  8.  He  thinks  he  saw  her  starting  from  the  city  early  yester- 
day morning.  9.  I  am  not  drinking  wine  now ;  the  doctor  says  I 
must  drink  only  water.  10.  I  do  not  understand  why  the  French 
language  appears  so  difficult.  11.  The  army  is  approaching  the 
city;  who  will  follow  it?    12.  He  has  been  studying  German  for 


FAIRE  AND  ITS  CONSTRUCTION  339 

some  time  and  thinks  he  can  speak  it.  13.  I  get  up  early  in  order 
to  arrive  at  the  office  on  time.  14.  We  are  eager  to  know  foreign 
languages  in  order  to  travel  in  Europe.  1 5.  He  has  just  come  to  ask 
me  to  go  for  the  doctor.  16.  Shall  we  go  to  bed  now  ?  Not  at  all ; 
I  am  not  sleepy.  17.  The  method  which  he  is  employing  pleases 
me  much.  18.  Which  book  ought  I  to  use?  I  do  not  know; 
choose  for  yourself.  19.  Be  silent ;  I  want  to  hear  what  he  is  say- 
ing.   20.  This  road  leads  to  the  village  in  which  he  used  to  live. 


LESSON   FORTY-NINE 

FAIRE  AND  ITS  CONSTRUCTION 

290.  Faire,  to  make,  do,  faisant,  fait,  fais,  fis. 

Pres.  Ind.     je  fais  nous  faisons 

tu  fais  vous  faites 

il  fait  ils  font 

Fut.  je  ferai 

Pres.  Subj.    je  fasse 

291.  Faire  Causative.  Faire,  in  the  sense  of  to  make 
(have)  a  person  do  a  thing  or  to  have  a  thing  done,  governs 
an  infinitive.    This  infinitive  follows  the  faire  directly. 

I  make  them  study.  Je  les  fais  etudier. 

I  am  having  a  house  built.  Je  fais  bdtir  tine  maison. 

Note.    Faire   and  the   dependent  infinitive   are  separated  by  the 
negative  pas,  and  in  the  affirmative  imperative  by  an  object  pronoun. 
I  shall  not  make  him  read.  Je  ne  le  ferai  pas  lire. 

Have  him  come.  Faites-le  venir. 

292.  Objects  with  Causative  faire.  This  construction 
involves  two  objects,  the  person  who  is  made  to  act  and  the 
thing  upon  which  the  action  is  performed. 


340 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


a.  If  only  one  of  these  objects  is  expressed,  its  construc- 
tion is  that  of  a  direct  object,  and  thus,  when  a  pronoun,  it 
precedes  the  faire. 


I  am  having  him  write  (causing 

him  to  write). 
I  am  having  my  friend  write. 
I  shall  have  it  sold  (cause  some 

one  to  sell  it). 
I  am  having  a  letter  written. 
I  had  a  coat  made. 


Je  lefais  krire. 

Jefais  krire  mon  ami. 
Je  le  (ld)ferai  vendre. 


Jefais  krire  une  lettre. 
J'ai  fait  faire  un  habit. 

b.  If  both  objects  are  expressed,  the  person  made  to  act 
becomes  an  indirect  object.  If  it  is  a  pronoun,  the  special 
form  for  the  indirect  object  is  available ;  if  a  noun,  the 
preposition  a  is  employed. 


I  am  having  him  read  the  book. 

I  am  having  him  read  it. 

I  am  having  my  pupils  write 

the  exercises. 
I  am  having  my  pupils  write  thenl. 
Have  him  write  them. 


Je  luifais  lire  le  livre. 

Je  le  luifais  lire. 

fefais  krire  les  exercices  a  mes 

eleves. 
Je  lesfais  krire  a  mes  eleves. 
Faites-les-lui  krire. 


Note.  Par  is  often  used  in  this  construction,  instead  of  a,  especially 
to  avoid  a  possible  ambiguity.  Thus,  je  fais  Scrire  une  lettre  a  mon  fils 
might  be  understood  /  am  having  a  letter  written  to  my  son,  as  well  as  / 
am  having  my  son  write  a  letter.  Hence,  to  express  the  latter  without 
question,  we  say  je  fais  Scrire  une  lettre  par  mon  fils,  which  order  sug- 
gests the  English  passive  form,  I  am  having  a  letter  written  by  my  son. 

293.  Construction  with  laisser,  etc.  Laisser,  to  let,  en- 
tendre, and  voir  likewise  govern  object  infinitives  in  connec- 
tion with  one  or  two  objects.  The  construction  is  similar 
to  that  with  faire. 

I  heard  him  speak.  Je  Vai  entendu  parler. 

I  saw  him  do  it.  Je  le  lui  ai  vu  faire. 


FAIRE  AND  ITS  CONSTRUCTION  341 

Note  i.    With  these  verbs  a  pronoun  object  of  the  person  may  be 
either  direct  or  indirect  when  the  other  object  is  a  noun. 
I  shall  let  him  read  the  book.  Je  lui  (le)  laisserai  lire  le  livre. 

Note  2.    An  infinitive  after  entendre  and  voir  often  represents  an 
English  present  participle. 

I  see  him  running.  Je  le  vois  courir. 

I  heard  him  coming  in.  Je  Vai  entendu  entrer. 

294.  Expressions  of  the  Weather  contain  many  idioms 
with  faire.    Among  these  are 

It  is  fine  weather.  77  fait  beau  {temps). 

It  is  hot.  II  fait  chaud. 

It  is  cold.  Ilfaitfroid. 

It  is  windy.  II  fait  du  vent. 

It  is  mild.  II  fait  doux. 

It  is  lightning.  II  fait  des  kclairs. 

It  is  thundering.  II  fait  du  tonnerre. 

It  is  cool.  II  fait  frais. 

IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 

aller,  to  fit  (of  clothes)  se  souvenir  de,  to  remember 

se  faire,  to  take  place  se  mettre  au  beau,  to  bfecome  fine 

la  pluie  tombe  a  verse,  it  pours 

n^n  EXERCISE 

1.  (a)  Give  the  synopsis  of  faire,  of  voir,  of  entendre. 
(b)  Give  the  — 

present  indicative  of  faire         conditional  of  faire 
present  subjunctive  of  faire      present  subjunctive  of  voir 

2.  Express  in  French  — 

(a)  I  shall  have  him  study  I  shall  have  the  pupil  read  it 

I  shall  make  her  study  I  shall  have  her  read  the  lesson 


342  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

I  shall  have  the  boy  study  I  shall  have  the  lesson  read  to 
I  shall  have  the  lesson  read  the  pupils 

I  shall  not  have  it  written  I  shall  have  the  pupils  read  the 
I  shall  have  him  read  it  lesson 

(b)  I  saw  him  •  I  heard  the  book  read  to  the 
I  saw  him  read  teacher 

I  saw  him  read  the  book  I  heard  the  book  read  by  the 
I  heard  the  book  read  teacher 

I  heard  the  teacher  read  the  I  heard  you  talking 

book  have  her  read  it 

(c)  it  is  cold  it  was  fine  weather  it  thundered 
I  am  cold                      it  will  be  hot                     it  was  cool 
the  room  is  cold           it  lightens                          the  day  is  cool 

3.  Supply  the  French  for  the  words  in  parentheses : 

II  (will  have  me)  vendre  la  maison  que  je  (have  just  had  built). 
Je  (had  him  sell)  la  maison  qu'il  (had).  lis  (had  made  him  sell) 
l'habit  qu'il  (had  had  made).  J'allais  (to  sell  it).  Je  (made  him 
buy)  le  chateau.  II  (will  let  me)  entrer.  (Let's  enter).  (Let's  let 
him)  dire  ce  qu'il  (made  them  make).    Une  paix  (is  being  made). 

Model  Les  Saisons 

C'est  au  mois  de  mai  que  le  printemps  est  le  plus  beau.  La 
nature  qui  dormait  redevient  gaie.  Les  jours  s'allongent.  Le  temps 
se  met  au  beau.  II  fait  doux.  On  ne  craint  plus  le  froid.  Nous  ne 
remettrons  plus  avant  l'hiver  les  lourds  vetements  que  nos  parents 
nous  ont  fait  oter.  Les  oiseaux  reviennent  des  pays  chauds.  On 
les  entend  chanter  partout.  On  les  voit  batir  leur  nid.  C'est  la 
saison  011  Ton  seme.  Peu  a  peu  nous  nous  approchons  de  la  saison 
chaude.  Alors  le  soleil  se  leve  de  tres  bonne  heure.  Les  chauds 
rayons  du  soleil  font  murir  les  bles  et  les  fruits.  La  moisson  se 
fait  en  cette  saison.    Les  paysans  se  rendent  aux  foires  avec  les 


m 

% 

HiiB^^Jk                 ^trf? 

I 

f  flfl 

JLJQmJIflinv 

'■? 

ii^^^  ^SE^^P^'i -1 

pFWh 

UNE  FOIRE  A  CHINON 

Une  ou  deux  fois  par  semaine,  selon  les  localities,  les  fermiers  et  fermieres 
se  rendent  sur  la  place  du  marche  avec  tout  ce  qu'ils  ont  a  vendre.  Tres 
pittoresques  ces  marches  en  plein  air  ou,  selon  les  saisons,  on  trouve  des 
amoncellements  de  fruits  et  de  legumes  frais  de  toutes  sortes.  Chaque 
marchand  dispose  autour  de  lui,  a  ses  pieds  ou  sur  des  caisses,  les  mar- 
chandises  qu'il  a  apportees  dans  des  paniers  ou  dans  des  corbeilles.  Rien 
ne  se  vend  a  prix  fixe.  Les  citadines  marchandent  sans  relache,  ce  qui 
donne  lieu  h  des  reparties  de  la  part  des  paysans,  lesquelles  ne  manquent 
pas  d'attrait.  Au  printemps  et  en  ete,  le  marche  aux  fleurs  a  lieu  aussi  en 
plein  air,  en  general  simultanement  avec  le  marche  ordinaire.  Une  ou 
deux  fois  par  mois,  le  marche  aux  legumes  donne  place  a  la  foire  a  bestiaux. 
Dans  son  cadre  de  maisons  attrayantes,  la  place  du  marche  offre  alors  un 
aspect  plus  rural  encore  ou  le.malin  paysan  se  mesure  avec  l'acheteur 

credule 


344  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

produits  de  leurs  terres.  L'ete  dernier  il  a  fait  tres  chaud.  Nous 
avons  souffert  beaucoup  de  la  chaleur.  Les  gens  boivent  beaucoup 
en  e'te,  car  la  chaleur  est  accablante.  C'est  la  saison  des  orages.  Le 
ciel  se  couvre  de  nuages.  On  les  voit  s'amonceler.  Tout  a  coup 
le  tonnerre  gronde.  11  fait  des  e'clairs,  et  des  gouttes  de  pluie  se 
mettent  a  tomber.  Les  gens  ouvrent  leur  parapluie  ou  se  mettent 
a  l'abri.  II  fait  encore  plus  de  tonnerre;  et  la  pluie  tombe  a,  verse. 
Mais  bientot  le  soleil  se  montre  de  nouveau,  et  le  temps  se  remet 
au  beau.  En  automne  il  fait  frais  matin  et  soir,  et  quelquefois  il 
y  a  du  brouillard  et  les  jours  se  font  courts.  Mais  voila  l'hiver. 
Le  vent  est  piquant.  On  a  froid  si  Ton  n'est  pas  bien  couvert.  II 
gele  tres  souvent.  Pour  l'hiver  prochain  je  me  suis  fait  faire  un 
bon  manteau  par  mon  tailleur.  II  n'allait  pas  tres  bien  d'abord. 
Je  le  lui  ai  fait  voir.  Le  tailleur  me  l'a  fait  essayer,  et  maintenant 
qu'il  Pa  arrange'  il  me  plait. 

Theme 

It  is  now  spring.  The  weather  has  become  fine  very  rapidly. 
Today  it  has  been  very  mild.  Last  week,  however,  the  wind  was 
still  biting.  But  the  cold  that  we  feared  so  much  last  month  does 
not  frighten  us  any  more.  The  beautiful  weather  has  made  me 
take  off  the  big  overcoat  that  I  had  had  made  in  November.  Nature 
is  not  sleeping  any  longer.  It  has  become  gay  again.  The  birds 
which  had  gone  away  where  it  is  warmer  have  come  back,  and 
from  my  window  I  hear  them  singing.  Soon  summer  will  come. 
The  sun  will  rise  still  earlier,  and  its  burning  rays  will  ripen  the 
wheat,  which  the  farmer  will  carry  to  the  mill  to  have  flour  made 
of  it.  I  suffer  a  little  from  the  heat,  and  that  is  why  I  hope  that 
it  will  not  be  too  warm  this  year.  I  remember  a  thunderstorm 
which  took  place  last  year.  There  has,  I  believe,  never  been  seen 
so  much  lightning  or  (nor)  rain.  It  poured  for  two  hours.  Yesterday 
morning,  as  the  children  were  going  away  to  school,  I  did  not 
want  to  let  them  go  (depart)  when  I  saw  the  rain  falling. 


FAIRE  AND  ITS  CONSTRUCTION  345 

Oral 

1.  Quand  les  jours  s'allongent-ils  ?  2.  Quand  le  temps  se  remet-il 
au  beau  ?  3.  Craignez-vous  le  froid  ?  4.  Ou  vont  les  oiseaux  quand 
il  fait  froid?  5.  Les  entendez-vous  chanter  en  hiver?  6.  Dans 
quelle  saison  seme-t-on?  7.  Le  soleil  se  leve-t-il  tard  maintenant? 
8.  Qu'est-ce  qui  fait  murir  les  bles  ?  9.  La  moisson  se  fait-elle  en 
mai?  10.  Pourquoi  porte-t-on  le  ble  au  moulin?  n.  Decrivez  un 
orage.  12.  Dans  quelle  saison  les  jours  se  font-ils  courts  ?  13.  Que 
vous  fait  faire  votre  tailleur  pour  savoir  si  votre  manteau  vous  va  ? 
1 4.  Vous  etes-vous  fait  faire  un  manteau  l'hiver  dernier  ? 

Resume 

1.  The  teacher  is  having  him  read  the  lesson  aloud  before  the 
class.  2.  They  were  having  a  new  house  built  when  I  saw  them 
last  year.  3.  He  ought  to  study,  but  his  parents  cannot  make  him 
do  it.  4.  I  would  have  William  write  his  French  exercise  if  I  could. 
5.  Beautiful  things  are  to  be  seen  everywhere  in  Paris;  I  shall 
show  you  many  of  them  next  week.  6.  I  need  a  new  hat,  and 
I  must  have  another  pair  of  shoes.  7.  My  mother  has  never  had 
your  daughter  make  her  a  dress.  8.  My  friend  is  trying  to  write 
a  French  letter,  but  he  does  not  know  how  to  do  it  well.  9.  John 
has  a  new  French  book,  but  he  never  lets  his  sister  read  it.  1  o.  My 
father  is  suffering  from  a  cold;  have  the  doctor  come  at  once. 
11.  It  is  generally  cold  in  the  winter  and  people  want  to  stay  in 
the  house.  12.  It  is  fine  today,  and  I  am  going  to  town  to  shop. 
13.  When  I  see  him  enter  the  house,  I  will  inform  you.  14.  If  you 
study  too  late,  it  will  hurt  your  eyes.  15.  My  father  has  just  come 
in ;  he  will  let  you  take  his  umbrella.  1 6.  Do  you  know  Senator  X  ? 
I  hope  to  hear  him  speak  soon.  17.  Wheat  begins  to  ripen  in  June 
in  our  country.  18.  The  sky  is  covered  with  clouds  and  rain  is 
already  falling.  19.  The  sun  rises  early  now,  and  its  rays  are 
making  the  leaves  grow  little  by  little.  20.  We  used  to  use  the 
book  on  the  table  when  I  was  going  to  school. 


346 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


REVIEW 

Lessons  Forty-five  to  Forty-nine 
A.  General  Drill 


i.  Give  the  principal  parts  of 


voir 
valoir 
asseoir 
naitre 


paraitre 

ecnre 

mettre 

life 

prendre 

suivre 

dire 

vivre 

nopsis  of  — 

vouloir 

peindre 

falloir 

faire 

plaire 
conduire 
nuire 
boire 


devoir 
savoir 

3.  Give  the  present  indicative  of  — 

apercevoir  valoir  naitre 

savoir  asseoir  connaitre 

4.  Give  the  present  subjunctive  of  — 

devoir  valoir  s'asseoir 

pouvbir  vouloir  prendre 

5.  Give  the  imperative  of  — 

savoir  vouloir 

6.  Give  the  — 

fut.  of  revoir  pret.  of  plaire 

cond.  of  asseoir  imp.  subj.  of  naitre 

imp.  of  savoir  imp.  subj.  of  valoir 

pret.  of  suivre  pres.  subj.  of  boire 

7.  What  verbs  are  conjugated  like  — 

recevoir  craindre  conduire 


croire 
etre 


dire 
plaire 

faire 
croire 

prendre 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  XLV-XLIX 


347 


8.  Locate  — 

sait  vais 

soit  vaut 

vit  (two  places)  veut 

vois  craint 


croit  fut 

suis  (two  places)  devenait 

fit  devinait 

fut  devait 


9.  Give  the  past  participle  and  the  first  person  singular 
past  definite  of  — 

devoir                      mettre  faire                       lire 

savoir                       craindre  dire                          conduire 

voir                           prendre  ecrire                      luire 

10.  Write  French  sentences  containing  respectively  some 
form  of  — 


devoir                       pouvoir 

connaitre                entendre  dire 

falloir                       savoir 

entendre                 s'asseoir 

1 1 .  Translate  into  French  - 

I  can  read 

it  will  be  hot 

I  can  run  as  fast  as  he 

it  was  cold 

I  could  write  a  year  ago 

this  season  is  cold 

the  sun  shines,  it  must  be  warm 

are  you  cold  ? 

they  must  follow  him 

I  hear  him  talking 

John  must  follow  him 

I  saw  him  fall 

I  had  to  follow  him 

he  was  to  write  that 

will  you  have  some  water  ? 

she  obeys  hef  mother 

I  knew  my  lesson 

I  need  another  plate  (two  ways) 

I  knew  your  aunt 

it  is  better  to  run  away 

I  am  having  a  house  built 

tell  me  that 

I  had  him  build  a  house 

he  took  a  pencil  from  his  pocket 

I  shall  not  have  my  brother  build 

he  let  us  come 

a  house 

let  us  sing  (two  ways) 

I  had  him  build  it 

I  think  I  see  the  moon 

I  shall  have  her  make  it 

I  think  you  can  see  the  stars 

343  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

B.  Translate  into  French 

i.  I  shall  send  my  brothers  all  the  money  I  can  when  they  go 
away.  2.  We  ought  to  do  all  we  can  for  others  in  this  life.  3.  If 
one  wishes  to  be  happy,  he  must  obey  God's  laws.  4.  We  had 
just  arrived  when  it  began  to  snow.  5.  They  were  to  come  before 
eight  o'clock,  but  they  have  not  yet  arrived.  6.  I  know  the  man 
well,  but  I  do  not  know  where  he  lives.  7.  You  must  run  to  the 
store  and  buy  me  some  silk.  8.  Sit  down  to  the  table  at  once; 
you  must  be  hungry.  9.  I  heard  him  say  that  he  wishes  to  use 
these  knives.  10.  The  lawyer  whom  you  used  to  know  is  a  brother 
of  mine.  11.  In  what  part  of  the  forest  did  you  lose  your  dog? 
I  think  I  saw  him  yesterday  evening.  12.  We  both  need  a  hat; 
do  they  sell  them  here?  13.  The  priest  has  been  writing  a  long 
time,  and  he  will  write  several  hours  yet.  14.  Do  you  know  what 
I  mean  ?    15.  I  shall  tell  him  to  have  her  do  it  to-day. 


LESSON   FIFTY 

DEPENDENT  INFINITIVES 

295.  Prepositions  with  Infinitives.  An  infinitive  depend- 
ent upon  another  verb  may  or  may  not  be  connected  with  it 
by  a  preposition.  This  is  determined  by  the  governing  verb. 
The  usage  with  .each  verb  must  be  learned.  It  may  be 
found  by  observing  French  texts  or  by  consulting  a  lexicon. 

a.  The  following  verbs,  among  many  others,  generally 
govern  the  infinitive  directly  : 

aimer  mieux,  to  prefer  to  espSrer,  to  hope  to 

aller,  to  go  to  (and)  faire,  to  make,  cause  to 

compter,  to  intend  to  falloir,  to  be  necessary  to 

de*sirer,  to  desire  to  oser,  to  dare  to 

devoir,  to  be  to,  ought  to  pouvoir,  to  be  able  to 


DEPENDENT  INFINITIVES 


349 


savoir,  to  know  how  to  venir,  to  come  to  (and) 

valoir  mieux,  to  be  better  to  vouloir,  to  wish  to 

Je  desire  aller  chez  moi.  /  desire  to  go  home. 

b.  The  following  verbs,  among  many  others,  generally 
require  de  before  a  dependent  infinitive  : 


cesser  de,  to  cease  to 

commander  de,  to  command  to 

craindre  de,  to  fear  to 

d£fendre  de,  to  forbid  to 

demander  de,  to  ask  to 

se  d£pecher  de,  to  hasten  to 

dire  de,  to  tell  to 

empecher  de,  to  prevent  from 

Je  crains  d'aller  avec  lui. 
Je  lui  dirai  d'aller  a  Paris. 


essayer  de,  to  try  to 

finir  de,  to  finish 

ne*gliger  de,  to  neglect  to 

oublier  de,  to  forget  to 

permettre  de,  to  permit  to 

promettre  de,  to  promise  to 

refuser  de,  to  refuse  to 

venir  de,  to  have  just 

I  fear  to  go  with  him. 

I  shall  tell  him  to  go  to  Paris. 


Note.    Finir  par,  when  it  is  followed  by  an  infinitive,  is  translated 
finally,  at  last. 

Nous  finirons  par  le  croire.  We  shall  finally  believe  it. 

c.  The  following  verbs,   among  many  others,   generally 
require  a  before  a  dependent  infinitive  : 


aider  a,  to  help  to 
aimer  a,  to  like  to 
apprendre  a,  to  learn  to 
s'attendre  a,  to  expect  to 
commencer  a,  to  begin  to 
consentir  a,  to  consent  to 

II  a  consenti  a  venir. 
II  a  renonce*  a  venir. 


d&ider  a,  to  persuade  to 
enseigner  a,  to  teach  to 
inviter  a,  to  i?ivite  to 
se  mettre  a,  to  begin  to 
renoncer  a,  to  give  up 
r^ussir  a,  to  succeed  in 

He  consented  to  come. 
He  gave  up  coming. 


296.  Infinitives  of  Purpose.  When  a  dependent  infinitive 
denotes  purpose,  it  must  be  preceded  by  pour,  in  order  to,  to. 
One  must  eat  to  live.  Ilfaut  manger  pour  vivre. 


350  •      ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

297.  Infinitive  for  Finite  Verbs.  When  the  subject  of  an 
English  subordinate  clause  is  the  same  as  the  subject  of 
the  principal  clause,  an  infinitive  generally  replaces  the 
finite  construction  in  the  subordinate  clause. 

I  hope  that  I  am  better.  fespere  alter  mieux. 

I  hope  that  he  is  better.  fespere  qu'il  va  mieux. 

298.  Verbal  Nouns.  When  a  verb  is  used  as  a  noun  in 
French,  the  infinitive  is  the  form  employed  except  after  the 
preposition  en,  when  the  present  participle  is  used.  In  this 
use  it  often  represents  an  English  present  participle. 

To  travel  (traveling)  is  pleasant.  Voyager  (/)est  agreable. 

I  love  to  read  (reading).  faime  a  lire. 

He  entered  without  speaking.  77  est  entre  sans  parler. 

He    departed    after    speaking  II  est  parti  apres  avoir  parle. 
(having  spoken). 

But  after  en  : 

He  entered  while  speaking.  77  est  entri  en  parlant. 

299.  Negative  Infinitives.  When  an  infinitive  is  made 
negative,  both  negative  words  generally  precede  the  infinitive. 

He  prefers  not  to  come.  77  aime  mieux  ne  pas  venir. 

I  fear  I  shall  never  see  her.  Je  crains  de  ne  jamais  la  voir. 


IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 
les  honoraires  ni.,  the  fee  aller  chercher,  to  go  for 

faire  une  question,  to  ask  a  question 
faire  de  son  mieux,  to  do  one's  best 
tenir  sa  promesse,  to  keep  one's  promise 
d£fendre  a  quelqu'un  de,  to  forbid  some  one  to 


DEPENDENT  INFINITIVES 


351 


EXERCISE 


Drill 

1.  Express  in  French  — 
to  dare  to  lie 

to  go  to  speak 

to  go  in  order  to  speak 

to  fear  to  lie 

to  be  able  to  read 

to  try  to  run 

to  teach  to  write 

to  begin  to  study 

2.  Express  in  French  — 

to  cease  to  speak 
to  cease  speaking, 
to  love  to  read 
to  love  reading 
while  traveling 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 
I  forbid  her  to  come 

will  you  permit  them  to  follow  ? 
she  had  just  arrived 
he  taught  me  not  to  lie 


to  learn  to  read 
to  consent  to  come 
to  come  and  (to)  see 
in  order  to  help 
to  know  how  to  cure 
to  neglect  to  study 
to  want  to  go 
to  be  able  to  read 


by  working 
without  stopping 
before  eating 
being  silent  is  telling 
to  be  silent  is  to  tell 


he  will  succeed  in  paying  for  it 

he  will  finally  pay  for  it 

he  finally  fell 

shall  you  keep  your  promise  ? 


4.  Fill  the  blanks  with  the  proper  preposition  (or  other 
word),  when  one  is  required  : 


j'aime* lire 

je  sais lire 

je lu  la  lettre 

je  viens la  lire 

il  me  faut la  lire 

lisant  j'ai  appris lire 

il  vaut  mieux la  lire 


je   n'ai  renonce  le 

lire 

j'ai  fini le  lire 

j'aime  mieux  ne le  lire 

je  veux le  lire 

je  lui  dirai le  lire 

je  vais le  lire 


352  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

apres lu  la  lettre,  je  lui  ai  j'espere il  le  lira 

defendu la  lire  je  l'ai  entendu lire 

j'ai  reussi la  lire  la  lettre  a lue 

je  commencerai lire  le  livre  je  devrais lire 

M0del  Nl    GUERI   NI    TUE 

Un  homme  qui  demeurait  au  Canada  desirait  voir  guerir  sa 
femme,  qui  etait  tres  malade.  Elle  ne  pouvait  plus  faire  la  moindre 
besogne,  et  elle  avait  meme  cesse  de  sortir  depuis  longtemps.  Les 
medecins  de  son  pays  ne  pouvaient  la  guerir,  et  son  mari  fink  par 
croire  qu'il  valait  mieux  la  conduire  aux  fitats-Unis.  II  e'tait  oblige' 
de  quitter  ses  affaires,  mais  comme  il  craignait  de  perdre  sa  femme, 
il  se  depecha  de  partir  avec  elle.  En  arrivant  a  destination  il  alia 
chercher  le  medecin  qu'on  venait  de  lui  indiquer.  II  lui  demanda 
de  bien  examiner  la  pauvre  femme.  Le  medecin  se  mit  a  interroger 
et  a  examiner  la  malade,  mais  tout  en  causant  il  laisse  pressentir 
la  crainte  de  ne  pas  etre  convenablement  remunere  de  ses  soins. 
«  J'ai  cinq  cents  francs,  dit  le  mari ;  je  promets  de  vous  les  donner 
si  vous  la  guerissez,  et  si  vous  la  tuez  vous  pouvez  vous  attendre 
a  les  recevoir  de  meme. »  Le  medecin  esperait  bien  reussir  a 
sauver  la  malade.  II  fit  de  son  mieux,  mais  la  femme  finit  par 
mourir.  Plus  tard  il  demanda  ses  honoraires.  «  Vous  avez  fini  de 
soigner  ma  femme.  Je  de'sire  tenir  ma  promesse.  Mais  permettez- 
moi,  d'abord,  de  vous  faire  deux  questions :  Avez-vous  tue*  ma 
femme  ?  —  Tue  !  Comment  tue  !  Assurement  non.  —  Tant 
mieux.  L'avez-vous  guerie  ?  —  Non,  helas !  —  Eh  bien,  vous  venez 
d'admettre  ce  que  je  voulais  vous  faire  dire,  et  je  renonce  a  vous 
payer. »   Apres  avoir  entendu  cela  le  medecin  sortit  sans  repondre. 

Theme 

You  ask  me  to  tell  you  an  anecdote.  Here  is  one  which  is 
worth  the  trouble  of  being  heard.  When  you  have  a  doctor  who 
cannot  cure  you,  you  try  to  find  another  one.    A  woman  had 


DEPENDENT  INFINITIVES  353 

neglected  to  care  for  herself  and  she  finally  fell  sick.  Her  hus- 
band had  a  doctor  come.  The  latter  promised  to  cure  her,  but  he 
did  not  succeed  in  doing  it.  The  husband,  who  feared  he  should 
lose  his  wife,  went  without  hesitating  to  get  another  doctor,  who 
hastened  to  come  to  examine  the  sick  woman.  On  arriving,  the 
doctor  began  to  talk  with  the  patient  in  order  to  know  what  the 
matter  was  with  her.  However,  even  while  he  was  talking, 
the  fear  which  he  allowed  to  be  seen  that  he  would  not  be 
properly  paid,  caused  the  husband  to  say  that  he  had  enough 
money.  He  persuaded  the  doctor  to  care  for  the  sick  one  by 
promising  to  give  him  two  hundred  and  fifty  francs  if  he  cured 
her  and  even  if  he  killed  her.  The  doctor  expected  indeed  to 
save  the  patient,  and  the  husband  hoped  to  see  her  up  (debout) 
soon.  After  doing  his  best  the  doctor  did  not  prevent  the  woman 
from  dying.  When  he  came  to  ask  for  his  fee,  the  husband,  who 
wished  to  keep  his  promise,  permitted  himself  to  ask  him  if  he 
had  killed  his  patient.  The  doctor  hastened  to  say,  "  Why,  no ; 
assuredly  not."  w  Then,  you  must  have  cured  her."  M  Alas  !  no." 
"  You  see  well  that  I  owe  you  nothing." 

Oral 

1.  Saurez-vous  parler  francais  dans  un  an  ?  2.  Allez-vous  faire 
un  voyage  cette  annee  ?  3.  Ne  craignez-vous  pas  d'oublier  les 
propositions  qui  suivent  les  verbes  ?  4.  Qui  vous  enseigne  a  lire  et 
a  ecrire  le  francos  ?  5.  Que  vaut-il  mieux  faire,  vivre  pour  manger 
ou  manger  pour  vivre  ?  6.  Que  vous  faut-il  faire  pour  savoir  votre 
lecon?  7.  A  quelle  heure  devez-vous  vous  lever  pour  arriver  ici 
a  l'heure  ?  8.  Qui  fait-on  venir  quand  on  est  malade  ?  9.  Votre 
maitre  vous  permet-il  de  parler  anglais  en  classe?  10.  Qu'est-ce 
que  je  viens  de  demander  ?  1 1.  Quand  avez-vous  fini  de  dejeuner 
ce  matin  ?  12.  Oublieriez-vous  de  vous  reveiller  si  on  ne  vous 
appelait  pas  le  matin?  13.  Reussiriez-vous  a  repondre  h.  mes 
questions  sans  avoir  etudie  votre  lecon  ?    14.  Etes-vous  entre  ici 


354  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

sans  oter  votre  chapeau  ?   15.  Que  demanderiez-vous  a  votre  maitre 
de  faire  si  vous  ne  compreniez  pas  la  lecon  ? 

Resume 

1.  My  friend  hopes  that  he  can  come  and  visit  me  next  week. 
2.  It  is  better  to  know  how  to  speak  French  before  traveling  in 
France.  3.  My  son  is  trying  to  write  a  French  letter ;  who  will 
help  him  do  it  ?  4.  If  it  is  fair  tomorrow,  I  expect  to  invite  my 
friend  to  go  to  town  with  me.  5.  The  doctor  persuaded  me  to 
give  up  smoking  because  it  was  hurting  me.  6.  By  reading,  chil- 
dren learn  to  read  without  knowing  it.  7.  After  paying  the  bill  we 
went  out  of  the  store  to  find  our  automobile.  8.  If  you  tell  me  to 
do  it  often  enough,  I  expect  I  shall  finally  do  it.  9.  We  must  eat 
to  live,  but  we  ought  not  to  live  to  eat.  10.  It  is  beginning  to  rain  ; 
I  think  I  prefer  not  to  go  out  tonight.  1 1 .  When  I  was  in  town, 
I  thought  I  saw  you  going  into  the  church.  12.  To  write  French 
without  studying  it  is  not  easy.  13.  Will  you  promise  me  never  to 
do  it  again  if  I  give  you  a  thousand  francs  ?  1 4.  He  had  scarcely  fin- 
ished writing  his  French  exercises  when  (gue)  the  bell  rang.  1 5 .  He 
asked  me  to  teach  him  to  read  French,  and  I  consented  to  do  it. 
16.  Children  like  to  eat  apples  in  school  if  teachers  will  let  them 
do  it.  17.  Our  teacher  told  us  that  he  was  expecting  to  use  your 
grammar  next  year.  18.  The  men  have  just  refused  to  work  any 
longer  because  they  have  not  been  paid.  19.  He  did  not  know 
that  the  generals  had  forbidden  the 'soldiers  to  go  to  England. 
20.  We  had  the  doctor  come,  but  he  did  not  succeed  in  saving 
our  mother's  life. 

Proverbes 

II  f aut  battre  le  fer  quand  il  est  chaud. 
Si  jeunesse  savait,  si  vieillesse  pouvait. 
Pas  de  nouvelles,  bonnes  nouvelles. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD  355 

LESSON   FIFTY-ONE 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD 

300.  Subjunctive  and  Indicative.  The  fundamental  dis- 
tinction between  the  indicative  and  the  subjunctive  is  that 
the  former  is  used  to  express  a  certainty,  the  latter  an 
uncertainty  or  an  idea  that  lies  in  the  mind  as  possible  or 
impossible,  desirable  or  undesirable,  etc. 

With  one  apparent  exception  the  subjunctive  is  used  only 
in  subordinate  clauses. 

301.  Optative  Subjunctive.  The  present  subjunctive 
(rarely  the  imperfect)  is  used  in  principal  clauses  to  ex- 
press a  wish  or  a  command.  It  is  then  usually  introduced 
by  que,  and  is  called  the  optative  or  hortatory  subjunctive. 
Among  other  uses  it  supplements  the  imperative  in  the 
forms  that  the  latter  lacks.  It  is  today  met  most  frequently 
in  conventional  expressions. 

Qu'il  vienne.  Let  him  come. 

Vive  le  roi I  (Long)  live  the  king  ! 

Sauve  qui  peut  {that  is,  qu'il  se  Every  one  for  himself  (let  him 
sauve  qui  peut).  save  himself  who  can). 

Note.    This  construction  is  in  reality  a  subordinate  clause  following 
a  verb  of  wishing  understood.    See  Sec.  304,  b. 
(Je  veux)  qu'il  vienne.  (/  wish)  that  he  may  come. 

302.  Sequence  of  Tenses.  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive 
in  a  subordinate  clause  is  determined  by  the  verb  in  the 
principal  clause.  If  the  principal  verb  is  present  or  future, 
a  following  subjunctive  is  put  in  the  present  tense ;  if  the 
principal  verb  is  a  past  tense  or  the  conditional,  a  following 
subjunctive  is  put  in  the  imperfect  tense. 


356  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Note  i.  This  rule  applies  to  compound  tenses  in  a  subordinate 
clause  if  the  auxiliary  alone  be  considered  the  verb,  the  full  resulting 
forms  being  respectively  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

Note  2.  In  ordinary  discourse  the  present  (or  perfect)  subjunctive 
is  often  used  where  the  rule  above  requires  the  imperfect  (or  pluperfect) 
subjunctive. 

303.  Subjunctive  after  Impersonate.  The  subjunctive  is 
used  in  subject  clauses  after  most  impersonal  verbs  that  do 
not  denote  certainty.  The  most  common  impersonals  that 
require  the  subjunctive  are 

il  faut,  it  is  necessary  il  convient,  it  is  suitable,  fitting 

il  semble,  it  seems  il  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better 

il  importe,  it  is  important  il  est  possible,  it  is  possible 

It  is  necessary  that  the  doctor      77  faut  que  le  medecin  vienne. 

come  (the  doctor  must  come). 
It  was  not  possible  for  John  to      II  rfetait  pas  possible  que  Jean 

come  (that  John  should  come).  vint. 

Note  i  .   When  used  with  an  indirect  object  in  positive  assertion,  il 
semble  takes  the  indicative. 
It  seems  to  me  that  you  are  wrong.      77  me  semble  que  vcus  avez  tort. 

Note  2.  When  the  subject  of  the  verb  following  falloir  is  a  pronoun, 
an  infinitive  often  replaces  the  subjunctive  clause.  The  pronoun  is  made 
the  indirect  object  of  falloir.    Compare  Sec.  274. 

f  77  luifaut  s'en  alter. 
Hemust*°-  {/tfautqu'ils'enaille. 

His  friend  must  go.  II faut  que  son  ami  s'en  aille. 

IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 

d'avance,  in  advance  faire  une  malle,  to  pack  a  trunk 

des  ennuis  m.,  trouble  fermer  a  clef,  to  lock  (close  with 
chemin  (m.)  de  fer,  railroad  a  key) 

indicateur  (m.)  de  chemin  de  fer,  munir  de,  to  furnish  with 

railroad  time-table  se  procurer,  to  procure,  get  (for 
avoir  1' intention  de,  to  intend  to         one's  self) 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD  357 

2)n*//  EXERCISE 

1.  Inflect  falloir  in  full. 

2.  Express  in  French  the  words  in  parentheses: 

(a)  il  faut  que  l'homme  (come)       je  savais  qu'il  (would  come) 

il  est  sur  que  l'homme  (will     il  vaut  mieux  qu'il  (should  come) 
come)  il  est  possible  qu'il  (may  come) 

je  sais  qu'il  (will  come)  je  voudrais  qu'il  (would  come) 

(b)  il  faut  que  Jean  (read)  il  fallait  qu'il  (should  have  fur- 
il  fallait  que  Jean  (should  nished) 

read)  il  a  convenu  que  mon  ami  (should 

il  faudra  que  Jean  (read)  consult  me) 

3.  Express  in  French  — 

may  we  live  long  John  must  pack  the  trunk 

it  seems  that  he  is  here  it  is  necessary  to  avoid  colds 

it  seems  to  me  that  he  is  wrong  I  intend  not  to  be  useless 

long  live  France  let  them  do  it 

let  him  talk  God  be  praised 

you  must  pack  the  trunk  to  get  along  without  money 

4.  Insert  the  correct  forms  of  the  verbs  in  parentheses. 
Then  change  faut  to  fallait,  and  insert  the  proper  verb  forms. 

II  faut  que  mon  pere  (aller)  a  Paris.  II  me  faut  y  (aller)  aussi. 
II  faut  que  mon  pere  (prendre)  un  billet.  II  faut  qu'il  (faire)  ses 
preparatifs.  II  faut  que  les  voyageurs  se  (munir)  de  passeports. 
II  faut  qu'un  voyageur  (etre)  sur  qu'il  (avoir)  assez  d'argent.  II  faut 
qu'on  (ecrire)  a  ses  amis. 

Model  Preparatifs  de  Voyage 

Si  vous  avez  l'intention  de  voyager  en  pays  etrangers,  il  faut 
d'abord  que  vous  fassiez  vos  preparatifs.  II  importe  que  vous 
consultiez  les  guides  et  les  indicateurs  de  chemins  de  fer,  et  si 


358  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

vous  n'etes  pas  renseigne  sur  le  pays  que  vous  comptez  visiter, 
il  vaut  mieux  que  vous  demandiez  des  renseignements  a  ceux  de 
vos  amis  qui  les  connaissent.  Si  vous  vous  munissez  d'un  passeport, 
il  est  possible  que  vous  vous  evitiez  beaucoup  d'ennuis.  II  est  a 
propos  aussi  que  vous  vous  procuriez  de  l'argent  des  pays  que  vous 
etes  sur  le  point  de  parcourir.  Pour  cela  il  faut  aller  chez  un 
changeur.  Quand  vous  saurez  la  date  de  votre  depart,  il  faudra 
que  vous  fassiez  vos  malles,  dans  lesquelles  vous  n'oublierez  pas 
de  mettre  les  vetements  necessaires,  votre  linge  et  vos  articles  de 
toilette.  II  faut  que  vous  soyez  sur  que  votre  malle  ferme  a  clef. 
II  est  prudent  que  vous  ne  fassiez  votre  valise  qu'a  la  derniere 
minute,  car  on  oublie  toujours  de  mettre  dans  sa  malle  certaines 
choses  qu'on  aurait  du  y  mettre.  Que  ne  puissions-nous  (if  we 
could  only)  nous  passer  de  bagages  !  II  faudrait  que  nous  eussions 
besoin  de  moins  de  choses  pour  cela. 

Theme 

I  must  go  to  France  in  a  week,  and  it  is  time  that  I  make  my 
preparations.  I  have  been  to  the  money  changer's.  If  one  wishes 
to  avoid  trouble,  it  is  better  to  procure  French  money  here.  The 
first  time  that  I  went  to  France  I  had  been  told  that  it  would  be 
preferable  for  me,  before  my  departure,  to  go  and  see  a  friend  of 
mine  who  knew  the  country  well,  to  obtain  as  much  information 
as  possible  on  what  it  is  necessary  for  one  to  do  in  order  to  get  along. 
"It  is  fitting  that  you  should  provide  yourself  with  a  passport," 

PAUILLAC  — LA  GARE.  En  route  pour  Bordeaux,  un  grand  nombre  de 
soldats  americains,  en  remontant  la  Gironde,  ont  vu  la  petite  ville  de  Pauillac, 
dont  nous  voyons  ici  la  gare.  A  cote  se  trouve  la  gare  de  marchandises. 
Sur  le  quai,  parmi  les  voyageurs,  a  cote  de  l'homme  au  chapeau  de  paille, 
on  peut  y  voir  le  chef  de  gare.  II  demeure  generalement  au-dessus  des 
bureaux.  La  ligne  de  chemin  de  fer  qui  dessert  Pauillac  est  une  ligne 
secondaire  de  peu  d'importance.  Sur  les  grandes  lignes,  les  trains  sont 
mfis  par  des  locomotives,  lesquelles,  si  elles  ne  sont  pas  aussi  grandes  que 
les  locomotives  americaines,  sont  cependant  du  meme  type. 


360  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

he  said  to  me  (Sec.  328,  a);  "otherwise  it  is  possible  that  you  may 
have  trouble.  If  you  intend  to  visit  Europe  some  day,  as  I  did  (comme 
mot),  it  will  be  important  that  you  should  buy  guidebooks,  to  be 
posted  in  advance  on  the  countries  that  you  are  going  to  visit." 
I  got  myself  a  time-table  this  morning.  It  seems  preferable  that  I 
should  take  the  train  for  New  York  next  Friday  at  five  o'clock. 
I  shall  pack  my  trunk  in  three  or  four  days,  and  it  will  be  better 
for  me  to  put  in  it  all  that  I  shall  need  except  the  most  necessary 
things,  which  must  go  in  my  valise.  That  is  why  it  is  more  prudent, 
it  seems  to  me,  to  lock  one's  trunk  only  at  the  last  minute.  It  may 
be  that  I  shall  not  be  back  before  the  month  of  March,  but  it 
would  perhaps  be  better  for  me  to  come  back  sooner. 

Oral 

1.  Quand  fait-on  des  preparatifs  de  voyage  ?  2.  Que  faut-il  que 
vous  consultiez  ?  3.  Que  faites-vous  si  vous  ne  connaissez  pas  le 
pays  que  vous  allez  visiter  ?  4.  De  quoi  vaut-il  mieux  se  munir  ? 
5.  Qu'eviterez-vous  si  vous  vous  en  munissez  ?  6.  Chez  qui  vous 
procurez-vous  de  l'argent  francais  ?  7.  Que  dit-on  pour  indiquer 
que  nous  placons  dans  la  malle  tout  ce  qu'il  nous  faut  pour  le 
voyage  ?   8.  Serait-il  preferable  que  nous  nous  passions1  de  bagages  ? 

9.  Semble-t-il  inutile  que  je  rdpete  tant  de  fois  la  meme  chose? 

10.  Ne  vaut-il  pas  mieux  que  vous  <£tudiiez  les  verbes  un  peu  plus  ? 

11.  Convient-il  que  vous  arriviez  ici  a  l'heure  ou  en  retard  ?  12.  Ne 
vaudrait-il  pas  mieux  pour  vous  qu'il  fit  chaud  toute  l'annee  ?  13.  Les 
Francais  disaient :  «  yive  le  roi !  »  Que  dites-vous  quand  les  vacances 
sont  arrivees  ?  1 4.  Est-il  possible  que  vous  ayez  des  visites  ce  soir  ? 
15.  Serait-il  possible  que  vous  eussiez  un  rhume  s'il  faisait  froid  ? 

Resume 

1.  It  is  necessary  for  you  to  learn  tomorrow's  French  lesson 
better  if  you  expect  to  get  along  in  France.  2.  Rain  is  beginning 
to  fall;  we  shall  have  to  give  up  going  to  the  ball.    3.  The  army 

1  See  Sec.  302,  Note  2. 


OBJECT  AND  ADJECTIVE  CLAUSES  361 

must  finish  eating  quickly  if  it  expects  to  arrive  in  time.  4.  Formerly 
when  the  king  died  they  would  say :  "  The  king  is  dead.  Long 
live  the  king  !  "  5.  During  the  great  war  we  often  heard  Americans 
using  the  words,  "  Long  live  France !  "  6.  Let  them  come !  I  have 
no  fear  of  them  or  of  their  friends.  7.  His  mother  had  gone  away, 
and  it  was  not  possible  for  William  to  go  to  school.  8.  It  is 
important  for  you  to  choose  good  vegetables  when  you  go  to 
market.  9.  When  you  have  only  a  little  money,  it  is  better  not 
to  spend  too  much.  10.  It  will  be  better  for  him  not  to  buy  so 
much  if  he  cannot  pay  what  he  owes.  1 1 .  My  mother  is  suffering 
from  the  grippe  ;  the  doctor  must  come  at  once.  12.  People  would 
have  to  take  less  baggage  if  they  desired  to  do  without  trunks. 
13.  You  must  be  sure  that  one  lesson  is  well  understood  before  be- 
ginning another.  1 4.  He  says  that  he  will  be  here,  and  it  is  certain 
that  he  will  come.  15.  It  seems  to  me  that  it  is  beginning  to  be  very 
warm.  16.  It  seems  that  he  could  not  come  because  he  was  starting 
on  a  journey.  17.  Is  it  always  suitable  for  one  to  wear  a  dress  coat 
to  a  ball  ?  18.  He  said  that  it  would  be  necessary  for  us  to  provide 
ourselves  with  guidebooks  before  leaving  the  United  States.  19.  It 
will  not  be  possible  for  him  to  go  to  Europe  with  his  family.  20.  Let 
him  go  out !  We  do  not  wish  to  try  to  make  him  remain. 


LESSON   FIFTY-TWO 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  OBJECT  AND  ADJECTIVE  CLAUSES 

304.  Object  Clauses.    The  subjunctive  is  used  in  object 
clauses 

a.  After  verbs  and   expressions   denoting   emotion,  such 
2&joy,  sorrow,  fear,  surprise,  and  expectation. 
I  am  glad  that  you  have  come.      Jesiiisbienaiseqiievoiissoyezvenu. 
I  did  not  fear  that  he  would  lie.     Je  ne  craignais  pas  qu'il  mentit 
I  am  surprised  that  he  is  coming.    Je  m'etonne  quHl  vienne. 


362  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

b.  After  verbs  and  expressions  of  wishing,  ordering,  per- 
mitting, and  their  opposites. 

I  wish  him  to  come  (that  he  come).  Je  veux  qu  'it  vienne. 

I  wished  him  to  come  (that  he  Je  voulais  quHl  vint. 

might  come). 

The  king  ordered  him  to  come  Le  roi  ordonna  quHl  vint. 

(that  he  should  come). 

I  shall  not  permit  him  to  come  Je  ne  permettrai  pas  quHl  vienne. 

(that  he  come). 

c.  After  verbs  of  thinking  and  believing  when  they  are 
used  negatively  or  interrogatively. 

I  do  not  believe  (that)  he  is  right.     Je  ne  crois  pas  qiiil  ait  raison. 
Do  you  think  (that)  he  is  coming  ?      Croyez-vous  quHl  vienne  t 

When  these  verbs  are  affirmative,  the  indicative  is  used  in  the 
object  clause. 

I  think  he  is  coming.  Je  crois  quHl  vient. 

Note  i.  If  the  speaker  expresses  himself  as  certain  in  his  own  mind 
that  the  matter  referred  to  is  a  fact,  the  indicative  is  used. 

She  does  not  believe  that  her  father      Elle  ne  croit  pas  que  son  pere  est 
is  dead  (but  I  know  he  is).  mort. 

Note  2.  After  verbs  of  knowing  and  saying  the  indicative  may  be 
used  in  nearly  all  cases. 

Did  you  say  that  he  had  come  ?  Avez-vous  dit  quHl  itait  venn  ? 

Note  3.  Verbs  of  doubting  and  denying,  since  in  their  affirmative 
sense  they  amount  respectively  to  interrogative  and  negative  verbs  of  be- 
lieving, likewise  require  the  subjunctive  in  a  following  dependent  clause. 

I  doubt  whether  (that)  he  will  come.      Je  doute  qiSil  vienne. 
I  deny  that  he  is  faithful.  Je  nie  qu'il  soitfidele. 

305.  Pleonastic  ne.  In  the  following  constructions  the 
subjunctive  in  an  object  clause  is  accompanied  by  ne,  which 
is  not  to  be  translated : 


OBJECT  AND  ADJECTIVE  CLAUSES  363 

a.  After   affirmative   verbs    of  fearing   and    equivalent 
expressions. 

I  fear  that  he  will  come.  Je  crains  quHl  ne  vienne. 

I  do  not  fear  that  he  will  come.  Je  ne  crains  pas  qu'il  vie?me. 

I  fear  that  he  will  not  come.  Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne pas. 

I  am  going  away  lest  (for  fear  Je  m'en  vais  de  crainte  qu'il  ne 
that)  he  (will)  come.  vienne. 

b.  After  negative  or  interrogative  verbs  of  doubting  and 
de7tying  and  equivalent  expressions. 

I  do  not  doubt  that  he  will  come.     Je  ne  doute  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne. 

c.  After  empecher,   to  prevent  (which  is  followed   by  the 
subjunctive  in  accordance  with  Sec.  304,  b). 

He  prevented  John  from  coming.      77  a  empeche  que  Jean  ne  vint. 

Note.   Ne  is  also  used  in  a  clause  after  an  affirmative  comparative. 
Sheismorebeautifulthanshethinks.      Elle  est  plus  belle qu'elte  ne  (te)  pense. 

306.  Adjective  Clauses.    The  subjunctive  is  used  in  ad- 
jective clauses  (those  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun) 

a.  When  the  antecedent  is  modified  by  a  superlative  or  a 
word  of  similar  restrictive  meaning,  such  as  seul,  premier,  etc. 

It  is  the  best  book  I  have  read.       Cest  le  meitteur  livre  quej'aie  lu. 
He  is  the   only  man   I   know      Cest  le  seul  homme  que  je  con- 
here.  naisse  id. 

b.  When  the  antecedent  is  something  desired  or  hoped  for. 

Buy  me  a  house  which  is  (may  Achetez-moi  u?ie  maiso?i  qui  soit 

be)  beautiful.  belle. 

I  want  some  fruit  that  is  better  Je   veux  des  Jruits    qui   soient 

than  his.  meilleurs  que  les  siens. 

Note.    When  the  antecedent  is  definite,  the  indicative  is  used. 
He  bought  me  a  house  which  is      Ilm'aacheteunemaisonquiestbelle. 
beautiful. 


3^4 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND   PHRASES 

en  avance,  ahead  of  time  6tre  Men  aise,  to  be  glad 

beaucoup  de  monde,  many  people      monter  en  voiture,  to  get  into  a 
etre  fach6,  be  sorry  carriage 

douter     que,     to     doubt     that      prendre  un  billet,  to  get  a  ticket 
(whether) 

billet  de  premiere  classe,  first-class  ticket 


Drill 


EXERCISE 


i .  Translate  into  French  - 

I  am  sure  he  is  here 
I  fear  he  is  dead 
I  fear  I  am  sick 
I  shall  ask  for  a  ticket 
I  shall  ask  him  to  leave 
I  want  him  to  stay 
I  wanted  to  stay 
I  think  it  is  cold 

2.  Translate  into  French  - 

I  shall  prevent  Mary  from  writing 
she  writes  better  than  I  thought 
it  is  the  best  seat  in  the  theater 
it  is  the  best  seat  I  could  find 
I  took  all  the  tickets  I  could  get 
he  has  a  carriage  that  is  new 
find  me  a  seat  that  is  not  occupied 


I  do  not  think  it  is  cold 

do  you  think  it  is  cold  ? 

I  think  I  am  wrong 

I  know  you  are  wrong 

I  doubt  whether  he  has  arrived 

I  deny  that  he  said  so 

he  permitted  the  child  to  get  up 

he  permitted  himself  to  get  up 


I  want  a  seat  that  is  more  com- 
fortable 

he  has  the  seat  that  is  most 
comfortable 

I  prevented  him  from  falling 

she  is  older  than  I  thought 

she  is  younger  than  I 


3.  Insert  the  correct  forms  of  the  verbs  in  parentheses. 
Then  rewrite,  putting  the  main  verbs  in  a  past  tense. 

Je  veux  qu'il  (venir).    J'ai  peur  qu'il  ne  (£tre)  pas  k  temps.    Je 
ne  crois  pas  qu'il  (avoir)  recu  ma  lettre.    II  lui  faut  (se  depecher). 


OBJECT  AND  ADJECTIVE  CLAUSES  365 

C'est  le  seul  medecin  qui  me  (plaire).  II  empeche  que  ses  malades 
ne  (mourir).  Croirez-vous  .qu'il  me  (faire)  (se  coucher)  ?  Je  doute 
qu'il  (pouvoir)  me  (guerir).    Au  moins,  qu'il  ne  me  (tuer)  pas ! 

Model  Le  Depart 

Le  jour  de  mon  depart  est  arrive.  Je  viens  de  fermer  ma 
malle  a  clef.  Je  suis  content  que  mes  preparatifs  soient  enfin 
finis.  J'aurais  bien  voulu  que  ma  malle  fut  un  peu  plus  grande, 
mais  comme  il  me  semble  que  c'est  la  meilleure  que  j'aie,  je  ne 
regrette  pas  de  l'avoir  employee.  II  faut  que  je  fasse  venir  la 
voiture.  Jean,  dites  au  cocher  qu'il  vienne  me  chercher  a  trois 
heures  et  demie.  Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  soit  occupe  a  cette  heure- 
la.  Quand  il  viendra,  je  doute  qu'il  puisse  porter  la  malle  tout 
seul.  Aidez-le  a  la  mettre  dans  sa  voiture.  Je  suis  fache  que  mon 
ami  n'ait  pu  (Sec.  330)  se  decider  a  m'accompagner.  Ses  affaires 
empechent  qu'il  ne  vienne.  II  craignait  que  nous  ne  restions 
partis  trop  longtemps.  C'est  dommage  que  ses  affaires  le  retien- 
nent  ainsi.  A  l'heure  du  depart  je  monterai  en  voiture.  Je  ne 
crois  pas  qu'il  faille  plus  d'une  demi-heure  pour  aller  a  la  gare.  La, 
je  descendrai  de  voiture  et  j'irai  au  guichet  chercher  mon  billet. 
II  faut  quelquefois  qu'on  attende  son  tour,  mais  je  doute  qu'il  y 
ait  beaucoup  de  monde  qui  voyage  main  tenant.  II  vaudra  mieux, 
je  crois,  que  je  demande  un  billet  de  premiere  classe,  parce  que  je 
veux  une  place  qui  soit  confortable.  Apres  me  l'etre  procure  il 
faudra  que  je  fasse  enregistrer  mes  bagages,  et  si  je  suis  encore 
en  avance,  j'irai  dans  la  salle  d'attente,  ou  je  m'assierai  quelques 
minutes  si  je  pourrai  trouver  un  siege  qui  ne  soit  pas  occupe'. 

Theme 

I  told  John  to  go  and  get  me  the  carriage.  It  will  be  here  at 
a  quarter  past  four.  If  I  have  sent  for  it  at  that  hour,  it  is  because 
I  believe  that  the  coachman  is  not  busy.  When  he  comes,  it 
will  be   necessary  for  John  to  help   him  carry  my  trunk  to  the 


366  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

carriage.  I  feared  that  my  trunk  would  not  be  large  enough, 
and  I  am  very  glad  that  everything  could  go  in  (enter)  it.  I  have 
just  locked  it.  I  am  going  to  leave  alone.  I  had  asked  a  friend 
of  mine  to  come  with  me.  He  hoped  he  would  be  able  to  accom- 
pany me,  and  he  regretted  that  his  business  prevented  him  from 
coming.  I  wish  (should  have  wished)  his  business  permitted  him 
to  take  a  vacation,  for  Henry  is  the  best  friend  that  I  have.  When 
the  hour  of  departure  comes,  one  gets  into  a  carriage  to  go  to 
the  station.  It  is  necessary  to  leave  early  if  one  has  not  bought 
one's  ticket,  because  there  are  often  people  at  the  ticket-window 
who  are  waiting  for  their  turn.  One  must  not  arrive  at  the  station 
at  the  last  minute  if  one  fears  there  will  be  too  many  people. 
"  Did  you  say  you  would  accompany  me  to  the  station  ?  Would 
it  not  be  better  for  me  to  buy  a  first-class  ticket  ? "  "  Yes,  if  you 
fear  there  will  not  be  enough  seats  in  the  second  class,  for  those 
of  (the)  first  class  are  not  the  only  ones  which  are  good."  For  my 
part  (as  for  me)  I  doubt  whether  the  first-class  ones  are  much  more 
comfortable  than  the  second.  When  one  is  ahead  of  time,  one  sits 
down  in  the  waiting-room  if  one  can  find  a  seat  which  is  not 
occupied,  but  only  after  having  procured  one's  ticket  and  after 
having  had  one's  baggage  checked. 

Oral 

i.  Que  fait-on  si  Ton  ne  veut  pas  marcher  jusqu'a  la  gare? 

2.  A  quel  endroit  de  la  gare  allez-vous  chercher   votre   billet? 

3.  Faut-il  qu'on  attende  son  tour  s'il  y  a  du  monde?  4.  Oil 
va-t-on  pour  attendre  l'arrivee  du  train?  5.  Quel  est  le  meilleur 
livre  que  vous  ayez  jamais  lu  ?  6.  Seriez-vous  bien  aise  de  trouver 
un  maitre  qui  puisse  vous  enseigner  le  francais  en  deux  semaines  ? 
7.  Semble-t-il  que  cela  soit  possible?  8.  Croyez-vous  qu'il  fasse 
beau  cet  apres-midi?  9.  Que  faut-il  qu'on  fasse  pour  savoir  sa 
lecon  ?  1  o.  Vos  maitres  permettent-ils  que  vous  parliez  anglais  en 
classe  ?    1 1.  De  crainte  de  quoi  prenez-vous  un  parapluie  ?    12.  La 


OBJECT-  AND  ADJECTIVE  CLAUSES  367 

ville  de  New-York  n'est-elle  pas  la  plus  grande  qui  soit  aux  £tats- 
Unis?  13.  Croyez-vous  qu'il  faille  moins  de  cinq  jours  pour  aller 
de  New- York  a  Paris?  14.  N'ai-je  pas  dit  que  le  subjonctif 
s'employait  apres  vouloir  que?  15.  Votre  maitre  empeche-t-il 
que  vous  ne  parliez  a  vos  voisins  ? 

Resume 

1.  I  wish  that  my  father  would  send  me  some  money.  2.  Are 
you  surprised  that  my  preparations  are  not  yet  finished  ?  3.  May 
she  be  always  happy  and  beloved.  4.  He  did  not  doubt  that  his 
friend  betrayed  him,  but  he  did  not  speak  of  it.  5.  I  know  that 
he  would  send  for  a  carriage  if  I  wanted  one.  6.  Her  sister  has 
the  largest  trunk  I  have  ever  seen.  7.  I  desire  him  to  learn  only 
the  last  two  lessons.  8.  May  God  fill  your  life  with  peace.  9.  I 
do  not  think  he  has  more  books  than  I.  10.  Go  get  us  a  carriage 
that  we  shall  like.  it.  I  fear  that  he  will  not  know  me.  12.  I  re- 
gretted very  much  that  I  did  not  have  my  trunk  checked.  13.  He 
prevented  my  father  from  stopping  for  fear  that  he  would  arrive 
at  the  station  too  late.  14.  She  and  I  doubt  whether  he  knows 
what  he  is  saying.  15.  This  is  the  only  verb  in  the  lesson  that  is 
in  the  (au)  subjunctive.  16.  If  we  must  go  away,  let  us  be  good 
friends.  17.  He  asked  me  how  I  could  do  without  a  first-class 
ticket.  18.  I  shall  not  permit  you  to  stay  in  the  waiting-room  any 
longer.  19.  The  class  must  leam  tomorrow's  lesson  better.  20.  It 
was  not  possible  for  him  to  find  a  seat  that  was  more  comfortable. 


368  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

LESSON   FIFTY-THREE 

THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   IN  ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES 

307.  Adverbial  Clauses.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  the 
following  adverbial  clauses  : 

a.  In  clauses  of  concession  or  proviso.  These  are  intro- 
duced by 

bien  que,  although  sans  que,  without  that 

quoique,  although  suppose*  que,  supposing  that 

pourvu  que,  provided  that  a  moins  que,  unless 

I  did  not  see  him  although  he  Je  neVai  pas  vu  quoiqu'il  fiitici. 

was  here. 

He  will  come  provided  that  it  is  //  viendra  pourvu  qu'il  ne  fasse 

not  cold.  pasfroid. 

Note.  In  a  clause  introduced  by  a  moins  que  the  subjunctive  is 
accompanied  by  ne.    Compare  Sec.  305. 

He  will  come  unless  it  is  cold.  //viendra  a  moins  qu'il  ne  fasse  froid. 

b.  In  clauses  of  doubtful  time.  These  are  introduced  by 
avant  que,  before,  jusqu'a  ce  que,  tintil,  etc. 

I  will  start  before  it  is  cold.  Jepartirai  avant  qu'il  fasse  froid. 

They  will  not  work  until  I  come.      fls  ne  travailleront  pas  jusqu'a 

ce  queje  vienne. 

c.  In  clauses  of  purpose.  These  are  introduced  by  pour 
que  or  afin  que,  in  order  that. 

I  give  you  the  book  in  order     Je  vous  donne  le  livre  afin  que 
that  you  may  read  it.  vous  le  lisiez. 

d.  In  clauses  introduced  by  an  indefinite  relative  pronoun 
or  adjective,  such  as  qui  que,  whoever,  quoi  que  (pron.)  or 
quel  que  (adj.),  whatever. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES     369 

I  will  speak  to  him  whoever  he  Je  lui  parlerai  qui  qu'il  soit. 

may  be. 

I  will  speak  to  him  whatever  he  Je  lui  parlerai  quoi  qu'il  fasse. 

may  do. 

I  will  speak  to  him  whatever  be  Je   lui  parlerai  quelle   que  soit 

his  native  land.  sa  patrie. 

308.  Unreal  Conditions.  In  conditions  contrary  to  fact 
the  subjunctive  (imperfect  or  pluperfect)  may  be  used  in 
either  clause  or  in  both  clauses.  This  use  is  rather  infre- 
quent in  ordinary  style.  Its  most  common  occurrence  is  in 
conditions  expressed  by  an  inversion  and  not  by  si. 

If  he  had  come,  I  should  not  S'/7  fitt  venu,Je  nefusse pas  reste. 

have  stayed. 

Were  he  here,  I  should  be  glad  Fut-it  id,  J' en  serais  bien  aise. 

(of  it). 

309.  Infinitives  and  Subjunctives.  In  the  following  cases 
where  the  rules  of  this  lesson  and  those  of  the  preceding 
require  the  subjunctive,  the  infinitive  is  generally  used 
instead : 

a.  In  most  of  the  constructions  of  Sees.  304  and  307  if 
the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause  is  the  same  as  the  subject 
of  the  main  clause. 

b.  In  the  constructions  of  Sec.  303  if  the  subject  of 
the  dependent  clause  is  the  person  to  whose  standpoint 
the  impersonal  verb  or  expression  refers. 

The  contrast  in  these  constructions  is  shown  in  the 
parallel    columns   below : 

I  must  eat  before  I  start,  it  me      I  must  eat  before  he  starts,  il  me 

faut  manger  avant  de  partir.  faut  manger  avant  quyil  parte. 

I  want  to  read,  je  veux  lire.  I  want  him  to  read,  je  veux  qu'il 

Use. 


370 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


I  came  in  order  to  eat,  je  suis 
venu  {pour)  manger. 

It  is  important  to  him  to  be  here, 
il  ltd  est  importa7it  d'etre  id. 


I  came  that  he  might  eat,  je  suis 
venu  pour  qu'il  mangeat. 

It  is  important  to  him  for  me  to 
be  here,  il  lui  est  impoiiant 
que  je  sois  id. 


Note.  The  infinitive  in  these  cases  is  introduced  (if  by  anything)  by 
a  preposition  and  not  by  a  conjunction.  Observe  the  following  list  of 
conjunctions  and  the  corresponding  prepositions,  their  forms  being  similar 
but  not  identical. 

Conjunction 
(used  with  subjunctive) 


before 

in  order  that  (to) 

until 

without 


avant  que 
pour  que,  ajiu  que 
jusqu'a  ce  que 
sans  que 


Preposition 
(used  with  infinitive) 

avant  de 
pour,  a  fin  de 
jusqifh 


IDIOMATIC  FORMS   AND   PHRASES 

une  feuille  de  papier,  a  sheet  of      coiffer,  to  fix  the  hair 

paper  etre  press£,  to  be  busy 

s'appreter  a,  to  get  ready  to 


D  .„  EXERCISE 

i.  Translate  the  following  expressions  into  French  after 
il  viendra  : 


because  it  is  cold 
although  it  is  cold 
when  it  is  cold 
unless  it  is  cold 
before  it  is  cold 
as  soon  as  it  is  cold 
if  it  is  not  cold 
to  see  if  it  is  cold 


in  order  that  he  may  not  catch 

cold 
provided  that  it  is  cold 
in  spite  of  the  cold 
until  it  is  cold 
where  it  is  cold 
whatever  he  has 
whoever  is  with  him 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES     371 

2.  Translate  into  French  — 

I  will  tell  him,  whoever  he  be  I  ran  in  order  to  escape 

I  will  buy  it,  whatever  it  is  he  would  not  sing  unless  I  sang 

I  will  return,  whatever  be  the  he  ran  as  if  he  were  afraid 
road  had  he  fallen,  I  should  have  fallen 

3.  Translate  into  French  — 

before  the  war  until  noon 

before  the  house  until  he  comes 

before  he  comes  without  a  friend 

before  starting  without  spending 

in  order  to  work  without  his  seeing  me 

in  order  that  he  may  work  unless  he  comes 

4.  Insert  the  correct  verb  forms.  Then  rewrite,  putting 
the  main  verbs  in  a  past  tense. 

II  ira  quoiqu'il  ne  le  (vouloir)  pas.    II  restera  si  nous  le  (vouloir). 

II  dinera  ici  pourvu  que  nous  le  (recevoir)  bien.  II  aura  peur  de 
(arriver)  tard.  II  aura  peur  que  nous  (arriver)  tard.  II  nous 
visitera  avant  que  je  (s'en  aller).  II  viendra  parce  qu'il  (vouloir)  nous 
(voir).  II  restera  pour  que  ses  amis  le  (voir).  II  parlera  jusqu'a  ce 
que  nous  (avoir)  sommeil. 

Model  Hugo  et  le  Coiffeur 

Quelquefois,  e'crit  le  journaliste,  je  rencontrais  M.  Victor  Hugo 
chez  le  coiffeur  Brassier.  Un  jour  je  dis  a  Brassier :  «  Eh  bien ! 
l'ouvrage  va-t-il?  — Parfaitement,  monsieur.  Qa  va  trop  bien 
meme.  A  moins  que  nous  ne  nous  de'pechions,  je  ne  sais  pas 
comment  mes  garcons  et  moi  nous  nous  tirerons  d'affaire  aujour- 
d'hui.  Voici  une  liste  de  trente  dames  qu'il  faut  que  nous  coiffions. 
Quoi  qu'il  arrive,  elles  devront  etre  coiffees  avant  que  six  heures 
aient  sonne. »  Quelques  jours  apres  je  revins  chez  Brassier.  «  Et 
vos  trente  dames  de  l'autre  jour  ?    —  II  ne  m'a  pas  ete  possible 


372  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

d'en  coiffer  plus  de  la  moitie.  Et  cela  a  cause  de  M.  Victor  Hugo. 
Quelques  instants  apres  votre  depart,  il  entra  chez  moi,  et  avant 
que  j'eusse  eu  le  temps  de  me  retourner,  il  se  posta  dans  ce 
fauteuil  pour  que  je  lui  fasse  la  barbe.  Je  m'appretais  a  le  raser, 
lorsque  lui,  d'un  geste  brusque,  m'abaissa  mon  bras  et  me  dit 
d'attendre.  II  prit  un  crayon  de  sa  poche  et  fouilla  dans  celles  de 
son  habit  sans  y  trouver  ce  qu'il  cherchait.  Enfin  il  vit  une  feuille 
de  papier  sur  cette  commode,  s'en  saisit  et  se  mit  a  ecrire.  Moi, 
bien  que  je  fusse  presse,  j'attendais  qu'il  eut  fini.  Apres  avoir 
attendu  longtemps  je  me  hasardai  a  lui  dire  que  j'etais  presse,  mais 
lui,  l'esprit  occupe',  se  leva  et  s'en  alia  sans  se  faire  raser.  Mes- 
sieurs, dis-je  a  mes  garcons,  il  faut  que  vous  vous  rendiez  aux 
adresses  que  je  vais  vous  donner.  Nous  cherchames  la  liste  sans 
que  personne  put  la  trouver.  C'etait  ma  liste  que  Hugo  avait 
emportee.  —  Allons,  mon  brave  Brassier.  "  Calmez-vous.  Suppo- 
sons  que  ce  morceau  de  papier  ne  se  f  (it  pas  trouve  la  pour  que  le 
poete  put  y  inscrire  le  resultat  de  son  inspiration,  la  poesie  francaise 
y  aurait  perdu  de  fort  beaux  vers.  Vous  avez  6te  ce  jour-la  le 
collaborates  de  M.  Victor  Hugo. » 

Theme 

Mr.  Brassier,  (a)  hairdresser,  was  one  day  the  collaborator  of 
Victor  Hugo  without  the  latter's  suspecting  it,  and  that  because  of  a 
piece  of  paper  which,  if  it  had  not  been  found  there,  would  have 
prevented  the  poet  from  writing  the  result  of  his  inspiration.  This 
inspiration,  however,  cost  (to)  Brassier  the  loss  of  about  fifteen 
customers.  This  is  how :  Let  us  suppose  that  we  are  at  the  hair- 
dresser's. Mr.  Hugo  comes  in  (there)  to  have  the  hairdresser  shave 
him.  Without  anybody's  inviting  him  to  sit  down  in  front  of  the 
bureau,  he  sits  down  in  an  armchair  and  waits  until  the  hair- 
dresser is  ready.  Although  the  latter  is  very  busy,  he  approaches 
the  armchair  and  gets  ready  to  shave  the  poet.  Before  the  hair- 
dresser is  able  to  set  to  work,  Hugo  takes  out  a  pencil  from  his 


VICTOR  HUGO 

Victor  Hugo,  genie  litteraire  de  premier  ordre,  qui  naquit  a  Besancon  en 
1802  et  mourut  a  Paris  en  1885,  se  fit  remarquer  comme  romancier,  drama- 
turge, poete  lyrique,  critique,  et  aussi  comme  satiriste  politique.  II  devint 
extremement  populaire  parmi  le  peuple,  pour  l'avoir  compris  et  chante 
ses  tristesses  et  ses  joies.  II  devint,  pour  ainsi  dire,  le  champion  du  genre 
humain.  Quoique  les  critiques  trouvent  beaucoup  de  d^fauts  dans  son 
ceuvre,  il  fut  en  Europe  un  des  grands  ecrivains  du  dix-neuvieme  siecle. 
II  est  connu  des  Americans  surtout  par  son  roman  Les  Misirables 


374  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

pocket.  Then  he  searches  in  those  of  his  coat  in  order  to  find 
there  what  he  needs.  The  hairdresser  waits  until  he  has  finished. 
Hugo,  not  finding  what  he  is  looking  for,  takes  a  sheet  of  paper 
which  he  sees  on  the  bureau  and  begins  to  write.  "  Unless  he 
finishes  soon,"  says  the  barber  to  himself,  "  I  shall  never  fix  the  hair 
of  all  my  customers."  At  last  he  ventures  to  say  to  Hugo  that  he 
is  in  a  hurry.  The  latter,  his  mind  occupied,  goes  out  then  before 
being  shaved.  After  the  poet's  departure,  Brassier  looks  for  the 
list  of  addresses  of  his  customers,  but  without  finding  it.  Mr.  Hugo 
had  taken  it  with  him. 

Oral 

i.  Pouvez-vous  repeter  l'anecdote  bien  qu'elle  soit  un  peu 
longue  ?  2.  Les  eleves  peuvent-ils  savoir  leur  lecon  a  moins 
d'etudier  beaucoup  ?  3.  A  quelle  condition  la  sauront-ils  ?  (Pourvu 
que  .  .  .)  4.  Suppose  qu'on  vous  invite  a  aller  en  France  cet  ete, 
accepteriez-vous  ?  5.  Vous  laisserait-on  voyager  sans  que  vous 
eussiez  votre  billet  ?  6.  Ne  viendriez-vous  pas  ici  demain  a  moins 
que  vous  ne  fussiez  malade  ?  7.  Venez-vous  a  l'ecole  avant  que  vos 
parents  vous  aient  donne  votre  dejeuner  ?  8.  Jusqu'a  quand  resterez- 
vous  ici?  9.  Allez-vous  dehors  quelque  temps  qu'il  fasse?  10.  Ne 
craignez-vous  pas  d'avoir  froid  si  vous  sortez  sans  etre  assez 
couvert  ?  1 1 .  A  quelle  heure  partez-vous  de  chez  vous  afin  d'arriver 
ici  a  l'heure  ?  12.  fitudierez-vous  le  francais  jusqu'a  ce  que  vous  le 
parliez  bien?  13.  Commencons-nous  les  exercices  avant  que  le 
maitre  ait  explique  la  lecon  ?  14.  Aviez-vous  deja  etudie  le  francais 
avant  de  venir  ici?  15.  Etes-vous  bien  aise  d'avoir  fini  cette 
derniere  lecon  ? 

Resume 

1.  The   pupils  will  work  until  they  finish  the  whole   lesson. 

2.  What  poet  is  not  forgotten  although  he  died  many  years  ago  ? 

3.  I  ought  to  go  to  town,  but  shall  not  go  unless  it  is  fine.  4.  Had 
Hugo  not  taken  the  list,  the  barber  would  have  been  able  to  keep 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  L-LIII  375 

all  his  promises.  5.  This  is  the  best  grammar  that  I  have  ever 
used,  isn't  it  ?  6.  He  has  just  come  in,  but  he  must  go  out  again 
at  once.  7.  Whoever  they  may  be,  I  shall  not  let  them  enter  the 
town.  8.  We  do  not  expect  to  go  to  the  hairdresser's  unless 
it  is  fine.  9.  They  hope  to  go  to  the  theater  tonight  provided 
they  have  money  enough.  10.  My  father  refused  to  let  me  go  out 
although  I  had  finished  writing  my  exercises.  11.  His  mother 
would  never  permit  the  teacher  to  punish  him  whatever  he  might 
do.  12.  He  tried  to  write  a  poem  without  the  barber's  knowing  it. 
13.  We  are  anxious  to  arrive  home  before  it  is  too  cold.  14.  It  is 
necessary  for  him  to  study  his  lesson  before  going  to  class. 
15.  My  parents  are  not  to  return  from  their  vacation  until  snow 
falls.  16.  Were  days  longer,  it  would  be  possible  for  me  to 
do  more.    17.  He  is  afraid  I  am  sick,  and  I  am  afraid  he  is  sick. 

18.  Hadst   thou   been   here,   my  brother  would  not  have  died. 

19.  Whoever  he  be,  I  will  speak  to  him  in  French.  20.  I  fear 
that  there  are  some  pupils  here  who  cannot  yet  write  (the) 
French  easily. 


REVIEW 

(Lessons  Fifty  to  Fifty-three) 
A.  General  Drill 

1 .  Name  five  verbs  that  govern  an  infinitive  directly ; 
five  that  require  de ;  five  that  require  a. 

2.  What  form  of  the  verb  is  used  as  the  object  of  a 
preposition  ?    Illustrate. 

3.  Give  French  sentences  containing  respectively  (a)  a 
present  participle  without  agreement ;  (b)  a  present  participle 
which  agrees  ;  (c)  a  past  participle  without  agreement ;  (d)  a 
past  participle  which  agrees. 


376 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


4.  Give  sentences  containing  an  infinitive '  preceded  by 
pour ;  a ;  sans ;  de ;  apres ;  d' ;  pas ;  par ;  fais ;  vais ;  vois ;  vous ;  en. 

5.  When  is  the  subjunctive  used  in  a  principal  clause? 
Illustrate. 

6.  Give  the  first  person  singular  of  the  present  subjunc- 
tive of  aller,  etre,  finir,  craindre,  croire,  avoir,  faire,  prendre, 
vouloir,   mener,  tenir,   savoir,   sauver,  dire,  devoir,  vendre. 

7.  How  is  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive  in  a  subordinate 
clause  determined  ? 

8.  What  is  an  impersonal  verb  ?  What  construction 
follows  ? 

9.  Give  four  impersonal  verbs  or  phrases. 

10.  When  is  the  subjunctive  used  in  relative  clauses? 
Illustrate. 

1 1 .  What  is  the  construction  after  although  ?  unless  ? 
until  ?  in  order  that  ?  in  order  to  ?  becatise  ?  Illustrate 
each. 

12.  Give  the  cases  where  ne  is  used  and  not  translated. 

13.  Give  French  sentences  containing  — 

tout  en  avant  jusqu'a  pendant  que 

pour  avant  de  quand  a  moins  que 

pour  que  avant  que  lorsque  mette 

car  devant  pendant  fit 


14.  Complete  these  sentences  : 

je  suis  bien  aise  que  vous il  avait  peur  que  je 

je  suis  bien  aise  de 

je    ne    doutais    pas    que    les 

fruits 

je  veux  qu'il 

il  fallait  que  mon  ami  — — 
je  sais  que  la  maison 


c'est  un  plus  grand  pays  que 
c'est  le  plus  grand  pays  que 

il  m'aime  bien  que 

s'il  fait  beau 

je  le  veux,  quoi  que 

je  jouais  tandis  que  vous  - 


REVIEW,  LESSONS  L-LIII  377 

15.  Translate  into  French  — 

I  forbid  him  to  come  I  shall  finally  remain 

I  shall  prevent  him  from  coming  I  gave  up  remaining 

I  think  he  will  do  it  he  told  me  to  remain 

I  thought  he  would  do  it  can  you  not  remain  ? 

do  you  think  he  will  do  it  ?  I  think  I  know  her 

I  started  before  it  snowed  I  think  he  knows  her 

I  shall  start  before  it  snows  I  shall  not  try  to  fall 

I  wish  to  remain  I  shall  try  not  to  fall 

I  fear  to  remain  may  it  be  warm 

I  like  to  remain  when  shall  we  finish  this  lesson  ? 

I  came  in  order  to  remain  we  should  finish  the  book 

B.  Translate  into  French 

1.  I  fear  that  he  will  never  learn  to  read  and  write.  2.  I  shall  not 
go  down  until  it  ceases  to  rain.  3.  While  she  was  running  to  school, 
she  almost  fell  in  the  street.  4.  Buy  me  an  umbrella  that  is  more 
useful  than  this  one.  5.  Let  us  stay  in  the  country,  where  we  are 
this  summer.  6.  My  brother  must  have  a  new  coat  made. before 
his  best  friend  comes.  7.  France  is  more  beautiful  than  I  thought. 
8.  Would  you  like  this  English  grammar  ?  It  is  the  best  that  I  have 
ever  used.  9.  They  came  to  France  in  order  to  see  her,  but  she  had 
already  started  for  the  seashore.  10.  He  prefers  to  write  nothing 
while  he  is  in  the  country.  1 1.  Let  us  hope  it  will  be  fine  when  we 
start  for  Europe.  12.  I  feared  that  he  would  not  introduce  her  to 
me,  although  I  asked  him  to.  13.  My  father  has  given  my  sister 
many  books,  and  I  should  have  given  her  some  too  if  she  had  asked 
me  for  them.  14.  I  did  not  make  him  go  out,  but  I  permitted  him 
to  remain  where  he  was.  15.  If  he  must  go  away,  let  him  go  away, 
and  may  God  be  with  him.  16.  Try  to  prevent  him  from  coming, 
if  you  can.  17.  They  fear  you  may  all  believe  it.  18.  I  was  told 
that  you  wanted  some  one  to  come.  19.  Did  you  fear  we  would 
never  finish  the  book  ?    20.  Long  live  the  French  language  ! 


378  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

LESSON   FIFTY-FOUR 

SUPPLEMENTARY  -  INFLECTION 

310.  Supplementary  Lessons.  Certain  matters  which  prop- 
erly fall  within  the  province  of  elementary  French,  but 
which  have  not  been  included  in  the  preceding  sections, 
are  now  presented  in  three  supplementary  lessons. 

311.  Irregular  Plurals.  Supplementary  to  Sees.  76,  93, 
and  96. 

a.  The  following  nouns  ending  in  al  form  their  plural 
by  adding  s : 

bal,  ball  carnaval,  carnival         narval,  narwhal 

cal,  callosity  chacal,  jackal  regal,  feast 

b.  The  following  nouns  ending  in  ail  form  their  plural 
by  adding  s  : 

detail,  detail  eventa.il,  fan  portail,  portal 

e'pouvantail,  bugbear        gouvernail,  rudder        serail,  seraglio 

c.  The  plurals  of  words  ending  in  au,  eu,  and  ou  may  be  sum- 
marized as  follows  :  nouns  and  adjectives  in  au,  nouns  in  eu, 
and  seven  nouns  (Sec.  93)  in  ou  form  the  plural  by  adding  x. 

Note.    A  few  unusual  irregular  plurals  are  grouped  on  page  428. 

312.  Irregular  Feminines.    Supplementary  to  Sec.  103. 
c.  For  the  feminine  of  adjectives  ending  in  e,  f,  and  x, 

see  Sec.  103,  a,  b,  c. 

&.  Adjectives  ending  in  eur  in  the  masculine  usually 
change  eur  to  euse  ;  but  majeur,  major,  mineur,  minor,  meilleur, 
better,  and  all  adjectives  in  erieur  form  their  feminine  by 
adding  e.  Examples:  flatteur,/*.  fl&tteusQ,  flattering ;  exterieur. 
f.  extSrieure,  outer. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  —  INFLECTION 


379 


c.  Adjectives  ending  in  er  in  the  masculine  terminate  in 
the  feminine  in  ere ;  a  few  in  et  (namely,  complet,  complete ; 
concret,  concrete,  discret,  discreet,  inquiet,  anxious,  replet,  fat, 
secret,  secret)  terminate  in  the  feminine  in  ete.  The  addition 
of  the  grave  accent  is  in  order  to  comply  with  the  rule  of 
French  euphony  by  which  a  word  may  not  end  in  two  mute 
syllables.    Examples  :  cher,  f.  chere  ;  complet,  f.  complete. 

d.  Many  adjectives  ending  in  a  single  consonant  preceded 
by  a  vowel  double  the  final  consonant  on  the  addition  of  the 
mute  e.  The  following,  and  some  others  of  similar  termination, 
fall  under  this  rule  : 

e*pais,  thick 
gentil,  pretty 
gras,fat 
gros,  big 
italien,  Italian 
moyen,  middle 

e.  The  following  unclassified  list  of  adjectives  presents 
special  irregularities : 


ancien,  aficient 
bas,  low 
bon,  good 
cadet,  younger 
chretien,  Christian 
cruel,  cruel 


net,  clear 
nul,  no 

pareil,  similar 
sot,  foolish 
sujet,  subject 
vermeil,  vermilion 


Masculine 

Feminine 

aigu 

aigue. 

sharp 

ambigu 

ambigue 

ambiguous 

beau,  bel 

belle 

beautiful 

blanc 

blanche 

white 

bref 

breve 

short 

caduc 

caduque 

infirm 

coi 

coite 

quiet 

doux 

douce 

sweet 

expres 

expresse 

express 

faux 

fausse 

false 

*     favori 

favorite 

favorite 

fou,  fol 

folle 

crazy 

38o 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Masculine 

Feminine 

frais 

fraiche 

fresh 

franc 

franche 

frank 

grec 

grecque 

Greek 

jumeau 

jumelle 

twin 

long 

longue 

long 

malin 

maligne 

sly 

mou,  mol 

molle 

soft 

nouveau,  nouvel 

nouvelle 

new 

public 

publique 

public 

roux 

rousse 

red 

sec 

seche 

dry 

tiers 

tierce 

third 

traitre 

traitresse 

treacherous 

turc 

turque 

Turkish 

vieux,  vieil 

vieille 

old 

313.  Additional     Irregular    Verbs.      Supplementary    to 
Lessons  Forty-Three  to  Forty-Nine. 

a,  AcquSrir,  to  acquire,  acqu^rant,  acquis,  acquiers,  acquis. 


Pres.  Ind.     j 'acquiers 
tu  acquiers 
il  acquiert 
Fut.  j'acquerrai    ' 

Pres.  Subj.    j'acquiere 

tu  acquieres 
il  acquiere 


nous  acquerons 
vous  acquerez 
ils  acquierent 

nous  acquerions 
vous  acqueriez 
ils  acquierent 


Similarly,  compounds  of  querir. 

b.  Assaillir,  to  assail,  assaillant,  assailli,  assaille,  assaillis. 
Similarly,  tressaillir,  to  be  startled. 
C.   Bouillir,  to  boil,  bouillant,  bouilli,  bous,  bouillis. 
d.  Cueillir,  to  gather,  cueillant,  cueilli,  cueille,  cueillis. 
Fut.   je  cueillerai,  not  je  cueillirai. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  —  INFLECTION      38 1 

e.  Faillir,  to  fail,  faillant,  failli,  faux,  faillis. 

Note.    Many  forms  of  this  verb  are  not  in  use. 

/.  Fuir,  to  flee,  fuyant,  fui,  fuis,  fuis. 
g.  Hair,  to  hate,  haissant,  hai,  hais,  hais. 

Note.    There  is  no  diaeresis  in  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative 
or  imperative. 

'  h,  Vetir,  to  clothe,  vetant,  vetu,  vets,  vetis. 
1.  Mouvoir,  to  move,  mouvant,  mu  (/.  mue),  meus,  mus. 

Fut.  je  mouvrai 

Pres.  Subj.   je  meuve  nous  mouvions 

tu  meuves  vous  mouviez 

il  meuve  ils  meuvent 

Note.   There  is  no  accent  in  the  past  participle  of  compounds  of 
mouvoir. 

/.  Pleuvoir,  to  rain,  pleuvant,  plu,  il  pleut,  il  plut. 

Fut.  il  pleuvra 

Note.   Pleuvoir  is  an  impersonal  verb. 

k.  Pourvoir,  to  provide,  pourvoyant,  pourvu,  pourvois,  pourvus. 

/.  Battre,  to  beat,  battant,  battu,  bats,  battis. 

m.  Conclure,  to  conclude,  concluant,  conclu,  conclus,  conclus. 

n,  Coudre,  to  sew,  cousant,  cousu,  couds,  cousis. 

0.  Croitre,  to  grow,  croissant,  cru  (/.  crue),  crois,  crus. 

p.  Maudire,  to  curse,  maudissant,  maudit,  maudis,  maudis. 

q.  Moudre,  to  grind,  moulant,  moulu,  mouds,  moulus. 

r.  Resoudre,  to  resolve,  solve,  resolvant,  r6solu,  r6sous,  r^solus. 

5.  Rire,  to  laugh,  riant,  ri,  ris,  ris. 

t,  Sumre,  to  be  sufficient,  suffisant,  sum,  sufBs,  suffis. 

1/.  Vaincre,    to   conquer,    defeat,  vainquant,  vaincu,  vaincs, 
vainquis. 


382  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

IDIOMATIC  FORMS  AND  PHRASES 

combattre,  to  fight  se  r^soudre  a,  to  be  resolved  to 

s'Smouvoir  de,  to  be  stirred  by       (se)  rire  de,  to  laugh  at 

j'ai  failli  partir,  I  nearly  started  (failed  to  start) 
je  faillis  tomber,  I  almost  fell  (came  near  falling) 

EXERCISE 

i.  My  favorite  sister  was  suddenly  assailed  by  some  soldiers. 

2.  A  dog  barked  and  the  Italian  woman  was  very  much  startled. 

3.  Girls  carry  fans  to  balls.  4.  The  twin  sisters  have  been  gather- 
ing flowers  for  half  an  hour.  5.  The  armies  of  today  are  clothed 
better  than  the  ancient  (ones).  6.  I,  at  least,  will  not  flee.  7.  They 
often  give  feasts  to  the  Turkish  women  in  the  seraglios.  8.  She 
is  discreet  and  works  well  and  will  acquire  much  money.  9.  The 
water  is  boiling;  now  we  will  drink  some  tea.  10.  Those  who 
are  treacherous  always  hate  their  friends.  11.  I  am  glad  it  is 
raining  now,  because  everything  is  extremely  dry.  12.  When  we 
are  hungry  again,  who  will  provide  us  with  good  things  ?  13.  The 
whole  country  has  been  stirred  by  this  complete  victory.  14.  The 
English  will  learn  the  details  of  the  battle.  15.  The  peaches  on 
the  trees  are  growing  every  day.  16.  She  was  sewing  secretly 
to  make  a  present  for  her  husband.  17.  The  Turkish  army  does 
not  fight  better  than  the  Greek.  18.  Go  away  and  be  resolved  to 
become  a  man.  19.  They  are  to  fight  tomorrow;  will  they  defeat 
the  Italians  ?  20.  They  will  conclude  peace  this  evening,  and  this 
city  will  no  longer  be  subject  to  the  king.  21.  The  sailors  were 
cursing  because  the  vessels  had  lost  their  rudders.  22.  That  sly 
girl  is  laughing  at  me  now.  23.  Are  not  two  carnivals  a  year  too 
many  ?  24.  He  almost  fell  at  the  outer  door.  25.  He  was  grind- 
ing the  wheat  in  order  to  make  fresh  bread.  26.  Their  sharp 
voices  made  me  flee  into  my  quiet  room.  27.  Your  younger  sister 
heard  what  I  said ;  that  is  sufficient. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  —  ARTICLES,  PRONOUNS     383 

LESSON   FIFTY-FIVE 

SUPPLEMENTARY  -  ARTICLES,  PRONOUNS 

314.  Apposition.  The  definite  and  indefinite  articles  are 
omitted  before  nouns  used  in  apposition  merely  to  add,  in  pass- 
ing, an  incidental  fact  or  a  causal  relation.   Compare  Sec.  121. 

Paris,  the  capital  of  France,  Paris,  capitate  de  la  Frafice 
the  Seine,  a  river  of  France,  la  Seine,  fleuve  de  la  France 
(Being)  a  soldier,  he  loves  war.    Soldat,  il  aime  la  guerre. 

However,  if  the  function  of  the  appositive  is  to  distinguish 
or  define,  the  article  is  used. 
My  best  friend,  John's  brother,      Mon  meilleur  ami,  le  frere  de 

is  here.  Jean,  est  ici. 

315.  Article  with  Names  of  Relatives.  The  definite 
article  is  used  in  familiar  style  when  one  speaks  of  his 
relatives.    Compare  Sec.  120,  a. 

Uncle  Peter  is  here.  L'oncle  Pierre  est  ici. 

316.  Partitive  Idioms.    Supplementary  to  Sec.  116. 

a.  After  bien,  much,  many,  and  la  plupart,  {the)  most,  the 
partitive  construction  (de  with  the  article)  is  used  before  a 
dependent  noun,  rather  than  de  alone,  which  is  the  usage 
after  the  other  adverbs  of  quantity  (Sec.  113). 

bien  des  hommes,  many  men 

la  plupart  des  hommes,  most  men 

b.  When  a  succession  of  nouns  used  partitively  becomes 
a  mere  list  or  enumeration,  the  partitive  sign  (de  with  the 
article)  is  omitted. 

We  have  here  bread,  meat,  apples,      Nous   avons    ici  pain,    viande, 
wine.  pommes,  vin. 


384  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

c.  Quelque,  some  (or  a)  little,  some  (or  a)  few,  expresses  a 
more  limited  quantity  than  de. 

quelque  argent,  some  (or  a)  little  money 
de  V  argent,  some  money 
quelques  pommes,  some  (or  a)  few  apples 
des  pommes,  some  apples 

317.  Disjunctive  Pronouns.  Further  uses  of  the  disjunc- 
tives, not  mentioned  in  Sec.  178,  are 

a.  With  a  to  express  an  indirect  object  accompanying  a 
direct  object  pronoun  other  than  le,  la,  les. 

He  will  introduce  me  to  him.  //  me  presentera  a  lui. 

He  will  introduce  you  to  us.  //  vous  presentera  a  nous. 

But, 

He  will  introduce  her  to  them.        //  la  leur  presentera. 

b.  Together  with  a  conjunctive  subject  or  object  pronoun 
for  emphasis. 

I  am  here.  »     Moi,  je  suis  ici. 

Henry  insulted  me.  Henri  m'a  insulte,  moi. 

He  is  here.  Lui  est  ici. 

Observe  that  the  disjunctive  subject  lui  may  stand  alone 
without  a  conjunctive  form. 

318.  En  with  Possessive  Force.  En  is  regularly  used  for 
its  (or  their)  when  the  word  modified  by  its  is  a  direct 
object  or  is  the  subject  or  predicate  of  etre. 

Vosvilles  sont  belles;  j'en  aime  Your  cities  are  beautiful;  I  like 
les  jolis  jardins.  their  pretty  gardens 

J'aime  Paris;  les  rues  en  sont  I  love  Paris;  its  streets  (the 
belles.  streets  of  it)  are  beautiful 


SUPPLEMENTARY  —  ARTICLES,  PRONOUNS     385 

319.  Of  mine,  etc.   Phrases  like  of  mine,  of  yours,  etc.  are 
expressed  in  French  in  two  ways,  depending  on  the  thought. 
A  friend  of  mine  told  me  so.  Un  de  mes  amis  me  Va  dit. 
John  is  a  friend  of  mine.                 Jean  est  mon  ami. 

320.  His  and  Her,  Whenever,  to  avoid  ambiguity,  it  is 
necessary  to  distinguish  between  his  and  her,  recourse  is  had 
to  the  disjunctive. 

his  garden,  son  jar  din  a  lui 
her  garden,  sonjardin  a  elle 

321.  Lequel  is  the  relative  that  must  be  used 

a.  As  the  object  of  the  prepositions  entre,  between,  and 
parmi,  among,  even  if  they  refer  to  persons. 

my  friends,  among  whom  I  count  you,  mes  amis,  parmi  lesquels  je 
vous  compte 

b,  As  the  object  of  de,  instead  of  dont,  to  express  whose 
when  the  modified  noun  is  itself  the  object  of  a  preposition, 
the  man  to  whose  son  I  speak,  Vhomme  aufils  duquel  je  parte 

322.  Ou  after  Prepositions.  D'ou,  from  where,  whence, 
from   which,   and  par  ou,   through  which,  are   often  used 

instead  of  duquel,  par  lequel,  etc. 

la  maison  d'ou  ils  sont  venus,  the  house  whence  they  came 

la  ville  par  ou  nous  sommes  venus,  the  city  through  which  we  have  come 

D'ou  venez-vous  ?    Where  do  you  come  from  ? 

323.  Compound  Interrogative  Pronouns.  Instead  of  the 
simple  forms  qui,  que,  quoi,  interrogative  phrases  of  the  type 
of  qu'est-ce  qui  in  Sec.  211  are  very  frequently  used.  These 
phrases  consist  of  est-ce  preceded  by  an  interrogative  pronoun 
and  followed  by  a  relative.  In  determining  the  proper  form 
of  these,  the  regular  rules  of  Lessons  Thirty-Three  and 
Thirty-Five  apply. 


386 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


The  phrase  qu'est-ce  qui  in  the  French  for  what  is  grow- 
ing there  (Sec.  211)  means  in  full  what  is  it  that.  What, 
being  an  interrogative  pronoun  in  the  predicate  nominative, 
becomes  que  (qu')  ;  that,  being  a  subject  relative,  becomes  qui. 

The  predicate  nominatives  who  and  what  are  usually  still 
further  developed,  as  shown  below,  an  extra  que  introducing 
the  real  subject. 


Who  is  doing  that?    (Who  is  it 

that  is  doing  that  ?) 
Who  is  this  man  ?    (Who  is  it 

that  it  is,  namely,  this  man  ?) 
Whom  did  you  find  ?    (Who  is 

it  that  you  found  ?) 
Of   whom    are   you    speaking? 

(Of  whom  is  it  that  you  are 

speaking  ?) 
What  is  this  thing  ?    (What  is  it 

that  it  is,  namely,  this  thing  ?) 
What  is  that  ?    (What  is  it  that 

it  is,  namely,  that  ?) 
What  is  your  father  doing  ?  (What 

is  it  that  your  father  is  doing  ?) 
Of  what  are  you  speaking  ?   (Of 

what  is  it  that  you  are  speak- 
ing ?) 


Qui  est-ce  qui  fait  cela  ? 

Qui    est-ce    que    c'est    que    cet 

homme  ? 
Qui  est-ce  que  vous  avez  trouve  ? 

De  qui  est-ce  que  vous  parlez  ? 


Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  cette  chose  f 
Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  cela  ? 
Qu'est-ce  que  voire  p  ere  fait  ? 
De  quoi  est-ce  que  vous  parlez  ? 


324.  Soi,  ones  self,  itself,  is  a  sort  of  disjunctive  reflex- 
ive of  the  third  person,  rarely  used  except  after  prepositions 
in  general  statements. 
On  ne  doit  pas  penser  a  soi.  One  ought  not  to  think  of  himself. 

But  in  a  specific  case  the  intensive  form  is  used. 
Jean  ne  doit  pas  penser  a  lui-     fohn  ought  ?iot  to  thi?ik  of  him- 

meme.  self. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  — ARTICLES,  PRONOUNS     387 

325.  Reciprocal  Pronouns.  The  plural  reflexive  pronouns 
are  often  used  to  denote  reciprocal  action.  To  distinguish 
this  from  the  reflexive  use,  l'un  Pautre,  the  one  the  other,  in 
the  case  of  two  persons,  or  les  uns  les  autres,  the  ones  the 
others,  in  the  case  of  more  than  two,  is  often  added. 

We  love  each  other.  Nous  nous  aimons. 

They  (two)  love  each  other.  77s  s'aiment  l'un  I'autre. 

They  (several)  flatter  one  another.  J7s  seflattent  les  uns  les  autres. 

They  (two)  are  giving  presents  Us  se  donnent  des  cadeaux  l'un 
to  each  other.  a  I'autre. 

IDIOMATIC  WORDS  AND  PHRASES 

ne  .  .  .  aucun(e),  no  one,  no  ma  propre  plume,  my  own  pen 

un  autre,  another,  a  different  nous  autres  soldats,  we  soldiers 

encore  un,  another,  one  more  de  quoi  manger,  something  to  eat 

que  f  aire  ?  what 's  to  be  done  ? 

il  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi,  it 's  not  worth  mentioning 

a  l'heure  qu'il  est,  at  the  present  time 

EXERCISE 

1.  His  brother,  an  English  soldier,  is  here.  2.  Most  cities  are 
on  large  rivers.  3.  He  has  some  watches  and  a  few  jewels.  4.  John 
insulted  him  ;  what 's  to  be  done  ?  5.  This  little  child  is  a  brother 
of  his.  6.  Of  whose  brother  are  you  speaking  ?  7.  The  painter,  of 
whose  picture  I  am  talking,  has  just  died.  8.  Let  us  praise  each 
other,  but  let  us  not  praise  ourselves.  9.  No  teacher  can  teach  his 
own  children.  10.  London,  the  capital  of  England,  is  the  largest 
city  in  the  world.  1 1.  Uncle  William,  who  lives  near  us,  was  intro- 
duced to  you.  12.  If  you  speak  to  him,  he  will  introduce  you  to 
me.  13.  I  have  only  a  few  pieces  of  it;  give  me  another.  14.  All 
these  children  love  one  another.  15.  Have  you  been  in  the  city 
long  ?   Do  you  like  its  stores  ?    16.  What  is  that  ?   Didn't  you  hear 


388  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

it?  17.  She  was  traveling  among  the  Greeks.  18.  Of  what  did 
the  poet  write  ?  Of  what  country?  19.  Does  she  sew  all  the  time  ? 
That  is  another  story.  20.  My  own  friend,  your  younger  cousin, 
said  so  (it).  21.  Will  you  not  introduce  me  to  her?  22.  Is  there 
a  friend  here?  Yes,  he  is  here.  23.  The  house  is  pretty,  but  its 
windows  are  very  small.  24.  Were  not  he  and  she  in  his  garden  ? 
25.  I  too  had  just  left  the  city  from  which  he  came.  26.  Who  is  it 
that  you  saw  in  the  Greek  city?  27.  One  ought  not  to  love  him- 
self more  than  others.  28.  Don't  thank  us ;  it 's  not  worth  men- 
tioning. 29.  At  the  present  time  he  has  most  of  the  money.  30.  We 
pupils  cannot  learn  everything.  3 1 .  Every  one  works  for  himself. 
32.  A  neighbor  of  his  provided  him  with  what  he  needed,  meat, 
potatoes,  bread,  milk,  and  sugar.  ^^.  Another  man  would  have 
paid  her  another  franc  for  her  flowers.  34.  What  are  the  two  rivers 
between  which  this  city  is  built?  35.  Who  are  these  children? 
Where  did  they  all  come  from  ? 

LESSON   FIFTY-SIX 

SUPPLEMENTARY  -  WORD  ORDER,  ETC. 

326.  Position  of  Adjectives.  Specific  preliminary  direc- 
tions for  the  position  of  descriptive  adjectives  were  given 
in  Sees.  99,  100.  Some  insight  into  the  underlying  prin- 
ciples is  now  desirable. 

a.  Adjectives  that  distinguish  an  object  from  others  of  its 
group  (or  a  subgroup  from  a  larger  group)  follow  the  noun. 

Adjectives  that  add  a  quality  which  the  judgment  or 
emotion  of  the  speaker  leads  him  to  mention  tend  to  precede. 

un  cheval  blanc,  a  white  horse  (not  black) 
la  blanche  neige,  the  white  snow  (which  I  admire) 
la  ville  anglaise,  an  English  city  (tells  its  nationality) 
Pillustre  Hugo,  the  famous  Hugo  (as  men  esteem  him) 


SUPPLEMENTARY  — WORD  ORDER,  ETC.      389 

b.  Adjectives  whose  meaning  regularly  brings  them  after 
the  noun  include  (1)  those  denoting  color,  shape,  and 
other  physical  conditions ;  (2)  those  denoting  nationality 
or  party. 

une  robe  noire,  a  black  dress 
la  table  ronde,  the  round  table 
le  parti  liberal,  the  Liberal  party 

c.  Adjectives  of  participial  derivation,  especially  past  parti- 
ciples, are  apt  to  have  a  force  that  causes  them  to  follow. 

une  fenetre  ouverte,  an  open  window 
des  e'toiles  filantes,  shooting  stars 

d.  Certain  adjectives  of  everyday  use  have  come  to  pre- 
cede even  when  they  distinguish.  A  list  is  given  in  Sec.  100. 

e.  Adjectives  used  figuratively  imply  a  judgment  or  opinion 
and  therefore  regularly  precede. 

un  noir  caractere,  a  black  character 

f.  Certain  adjectives  differ  considerably  in  meaning  as 
they  precede  or  follow.    Among  these  are 


Before  its  Noun 

After  its  Noun 

brave 

worthy,  good 

brave 

cher 

dear  (beloved) 

dear  (costly) 

dernier 

the  last  (of  a  series) 

last  (just  passed) 

grand 

great 

tall 

honn£te 

honest 

polite 

mechant 

poor 

wicked 

nouveau 

additional 

newly' made 

pauvre 

poor  (pitiable) 

needy 

petit 

small,  short 

petty,  mean 

propre 

own 

clean 

seul 

only 

alone 

triste 

poor  sort  of 

sad 

390  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

g.  Considerations  of  euphony,  emphasis,  and  other  influ- 
ences cause  usages  at  variance  with  the  principles  men- 
tioned above.  In  particular,  long  adjectives  and  those 
modified  by  long  adverbs  or  phrases  follow. 

un  enfant  extremement  joli,  an  extremely  pretty  child 
un  fils  digne  de  son  pere,  a  son  worthy  of  his  father 

The  whole  matter  of  the  position  of  adjectives  is  very 
idiomatic.    Observation  of  French  usage  is  the  surest  guide. 

327.  Position  of  Adverbs.    Exceptions  to  Sec.  no. 

a.  The  adverbs  hier,  aujourd'hui,  demain,  ici,  la,  and  partout 
never  come  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  past  participle. 

II  est  venu  hier.  He  came  yesterday. 

b.  Short,  simple  adverbs  that  modify  an  infinitive  are  apt 
to  precede  it. 

Je  n'ose  trop  parler.  I  dare  not  speak  too  much. 

c.  For  rhetorical  effect  an  adverb  that  modifies  the  verb 
is  sometimes  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence. 
Partout.il  y  avait  des  soldats.  Everywhere  there  were  soldiers. 

d.  The  negatives  rien  and  personne,  being  originally  nouns, 
may  be  used  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence.  In  this  case  they 
stand  first  in  their  clause,  the  ne  having  its  normal  position. 
Personne  n'est  ici.  Nobody  is  here. 

328.  Subject  after  Verb.  In  addition  to  the  interrogative 
construction,  the  subject  follows  the  verb 

a.  Regularly  with  verbs  of  saying  when  the  quotation  or 
a  part  of  it  precedes. 

"I  see  you,"  said  the  mother.  aje  te  vois  »,  dit  la  mere. 

M  Come  here,"  said  he,  "  and  sit      aVenez  ici»,  dit-il,  net  asseyez- 
down."  vous.% 


SUPPLEMENTARY  — WORD  ORDER,  ETC.      391 

Note.  In  parenthetical  constructions  like  the  above  the  past  definite 
is  generally  used,  rather  than  the  past  indefinite. 

b.  Often  when  an  adverb  or  other  part  of  the  predicate 
precedes  for  rhetorical  effect. 

Soon  the  son  too  arrived.  Bientbt  arriva  lefils  aussi. 

Scarcely  had  she  entered.  A  peine  fut-elle  entree. 

c.  Often  when  a  relative  is  the  object  of  its  clause. 

the  book  that  my  younger  brother  was  reading,  le  livre  que  lisait 

mon  frere  cadet 
I  will  do  all  that  a  brave  man  can  do.  Jeferaitout  ce  que  peut  f aire 

un  homme  brave. 

d.  In  the  object  clause  in  indirect  questions  when  the 
subject  of  the  clause  is  a  noun  (not  a  pronoun),  especially 
when  this  subject  has  a  long  modifier. 

I  don't  know  where  the  man     Je  ne  sais  pas  ou  est  Vhomme  qui 
who  lives  here  is.  demeure  id. 

329.  Tout  as  Adverb.  Tout  is  often  used  as  an  adverb  in  the 
sense  of  quite,  all.  It  then  agrees  with  a  following  feminine 
adjective  beginning  with  a  consonant,  but  not  with  a  mascu- 
line adjective  or  a  feminine  one  beginning  with  a  vowel. 

Elles  etaient  toutes  rouges.  They  were  quite  red  (blushing). 

Les  gar^ons  sont  tout  pales.  The  boys  are  quite  (alt)  pale. 

Sa  femme  est  tout  aimable.  His  wife  is  very  (quite)  kind. 

330.  Omission  of  Negative  pas.  After  the  verbs  cesser, 
to  cease,  oser,  to  dare,  pouvoir,  to  be  able,  and  savoir,  to 
know,  the  pas  of  the  negative  not  is  very  frequently  omitted. 
Je  n'ose  parler.  I  dare  not  speak. 

331.  Que  for  Other  Conjunctions.  Que  is  very  generally  used 
to  avoid  repetition  of  a  conjunction.  The  subjunctive  is 
required  when  que  replaces  si,  if. 


392  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Quand  vous  arriverez  et  que  vous      When  you  come  and  (when  you) 

lui  parlerez.  speak  to  him. 

Si  vous  en  voulez  et  que  j'en  aie.      If  you    want  some   and   if  I 

have  any. 

332.  Si  meaning  yes.  After  an  expressed  or  implied 
negation  si  is  used  for  yes. 

You  didn't  say  so?   Yes,  I  did      Vous  nePavez  pas  difi  Si,jeVai 

(say  so).  dit. 

He  isn't  coming  ?   Yes,  indeed.      77  ne  vient  pas  ?   Mais  si. 

333.  Historical  Present.  In  animated  narration  in  French, 
as  in  English,  the  present  is  often  used  instead  of  a  past  tense. 

II  faisait  froid.    Le  paysan  met      ft  was  cold.   The  peasant  puts  on 
son  habit;  il  sort  au  plus  vite.         his  coat ;  he  goes  out  as  quickly 

as  he  can. 

334.  A,  Dans,  En.  Among  the  numerous  idiomatic  dis- 
tinctions in  the  use  of  prepositions,  those  between  a,  to,  at, 
in,  dans,  into,  and  en,  in,  present  some  difficulty. 

A  denotes  position  at ;  dans,  position  inside  of ;  while  en 
forms  with  its  object  an  expression  equivalent  to  an  adverb. 

Jean  tient  un  livre  a  la  main.  fohn  holds  a  book  in  his  hand. 

Jean  est  dans  sa  chambre.  John  is  in  his  room. 

II  les  vend  en  gros.  He  sells  them  wholesale  (in  great 

quantities). 

335.  Compound  Nouns.  Nouns  are  frequently  combined 
by  the  use  of  de  and  a. 

a.  De  is  used  when  the  second  noun  expresses  the  material, 
place  of  origin,  or  contents  of  the  first. 

une  fourchette  d'argent,  a  silver  fork 
le  fromage  de  Suisse,  Swiss  cheese 
un  ver  de  terre,  an  earthworm 
un  verre  de  vin,  a  glass  of  wine 


SUPPLEMENTARY  — WORD  ORDER,  ETC.      393 

Material  is  often,  perhaps  more  commonly,  expressed  by  en. 
une  montre  en  or,  a  gold  watch 

b.  A  is  used  when  the  second  noun  denotes  the  purpose, 
use,  or  means  of  motion  of  the  first. 

un  verre  a  rin,  a  wineglass 

un  couteau  a  papier,  a  paper-knife 

un  bateau  a  vapeur,  a  steamboat 

EXERCISE 

1.  The  poor  ought  not  to  buy  the  dearest  meats.  2.  He  is  the 
only  man  who  dares  not  laugh  at  us.  3.  The  two  sad  little  girls 
were  alone  under  the  blue  sky.  4.  I  almost  forgot  what  my  friend, 
who  had  just  returned  from  Switzerland,  told  me.  5.  He  is  a 
polite  boy,  a  son  worthy  of  his  honest  father.  6.  Among  the 
famous  cities  through  which  he  traveled,  the  Turkish  capital 
pleased  him  best.  7.  I  cannot  praise  the  Christian  emperor  too 
much.  8.  Who  is  the  tall  man  who  has  a  long  nose  ?  9.  If  you 
have  many,  and  will  sell  them  at  wholesale,  I  shall  buy  some. 
10.  The  wicked  king  had  a  shining  gold  crown  on  his  head,  a 
spear  in  his  right  hand.  11.  Let  us  use  the  silver  cup  for  a 
teacup.  12.  The  faithful  Joan  could  not  save  her  beloved  France. 
13.  Who  is  it  that  saw  the  last  shooting  star  last  night?  14.  The 
cook  had  an  extremely  pretty  daughter.  15.  M  Do  you  want,"  he 
asked,  M  your  own  fork  or  my  clean  knife  ? "  1 6.  Most  poets 
prefer  not  to  live  in  a  large  city.  17.  They  have  often  visited 
the  battlefield  where  many  poor  soldiers  fell.  18.  The  stolen 
cloth  was  found  on  the  steamboat.  19.  He  could  not  introduce 
you  to  me  in  all  that  crowd.  20.  Hardly  had  he  the  wineglass 
in  his  hand  when  his  host  brought  a  gold  cup.  21.  Uncle 
John  and  two  twin  cousins  of  mine  were  in  the  dining-room. 
22.  When  my  father  was  in  business,  the  last  man  that  he  hired 
was  a  poor  sort  of  workman.    23.  Cursing  each  other  furiously, 


394  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

the  sailors  quickly  fled.  24.  I  tell  her  not  to  go  further;  every- 
where wounded  soldiers  are  dying.  25.  He  came  yesterday,  but 
nobody  was  here  to  receive  him.  26.  Never 'will  I  introduce  you  to 
the  Italian  girl  of  whose  black  eyes  you  wrote  me.  27.  The  good 
priest  lived  in  a  white  house ;  he  loved  to  see  the  white  snow. 
28.  He  can't  read  the  Greek  language?  Yes,  he  can.  29.  She 
was  all  pale ;  the  girls  all  pitied  her.  30.  M  You  cannot  yet  write 
French  well,"  said  the  teacher.    w  Yes,  indeed,  I  can,"  I  replied. 

MODELES    DE    CORRESPONDANCE 

Salutations  : 

Mon  cher  ami  Ma  chere  amie 

Cher  monsieur  Chere  Madame  X 

Phrases  de  commencement  de  lettres  : 

Je  m'empresse  de  repondre  a  votre  lettre  du  5  courant. 
J'ai  ete  bien  heureux  de  recevoir  de  vos  nouvelles. 
Je  prends  la  liberte  de  vous  faire  savoir  que  .  .  . 

Phrases  defin  de  lettres  : 

Bien  a  vous.  Votre  bien  sincere 

Je  vous  serre  cordialement  la  main. 

Recevez,  monsieur,  l'assurance  de  ma  consideration  distinguee. 
Veuillez  agreer,  madame,  Fexpression  de  mes  sentiments  les 
plus  devoues. 

Instructions : 

Aux  soins  de  .  .  . 

Priere  de  faire  suivre. 

Poste  restante. 

Repondre  par  retour  du  courrier. 


SENTENCES  FOR  GENERAL  REVIEW 

The  pupil  will  not  have  all  the  material  required  for  these  sentences 
until  he  has  completed  the  lessons. 

i.  I  must  be  in  Boston  tomorrow  at  noon.  2.  You  are  right. 
I  didn't  come  for  fear  that  it  would  rain.  3.  She  does  not  believe 
that  her  mother  has  come.  4.  I  fear  that  you  will  stay  longer 
than  they  want  you.  5.  She  loves  flowers  so  much,  and  these  are 
the  most  beautiful  I  have  ever  seen.  6.  As  soon  as  I  had  gone  to 
bed,  it  began  to  rain.  7.  How  long  did  you  stay  at  your  aunt's? 
I  didn't  know  that  she  had  come  home.  8.  Did  you  and  he  wait 
for  me  long  ?  I  did  not  want  to  come  too  early.  9.  When  will 
your  brother  begin  to  grind  that  wheat?  10.  We  ought  not  to 
tell  all  we  know.  n.  Have  you  not  done  all  you  can  for  the  poor 
of  the  city?  12.  I  was  replying  to  his  letter  when  you  came  in 
and  spoke  to  me.  13.  Do  you  think  that  what  you  have  done 
pleases  him  ?  No,  I  don't  think  so.  1 4.  The  old  horse  used  often 
to  be  beaten  to  make  him  work.  15.  Give  me  back  my  pen  when 
you  find  yours,  for  I  need  mine  very  often.  16.  When  I  was 
young,  I  knew  how  to  speak  French,  but  now  I  have  forgotten 
how  (it).  17.  I  have  only  a  few  pictures,  but  a  friend  of  mine 
has  his  house  full.  18.  You  will  have  to  come.  A  dog  has  bitten 
my  hand  and  I  can  scarcely  write.  19.  It  has  snowed  for  several 
days,  but  I  see  now  a  little  blue  sky  and  I  hope  it  will  soon  be 
clear.  20.  We  cannot  get  along  without  eating  and  drinking  if  we 
wish  to  live. 

21.  We  have  resolved  not  to  start  until  it  is  fine.  22.  He  needs 
some  money  at  once ;  it  will  be  better  to  come  to  him  while  he 
stays  at  my  house.    23.  I  am  going  to  tell  you  something  which, 

395 


396  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

I  hope,  will  make  you  very  happy.  24.  I  arose  early  and  went  to 
have  my  watch  cleaned.  25.  Wood  is  more  useful  than  gold  or 
silver,  but  it  is  not  worth  so  much.  26.  Nobody  can  prevent  my 
father  from  saying  what  he  thinks.  27.  The  table  before  which 
you  were  seated  used  to  belong  to  my  father  many  years  ago. 
28.  When  the  sun  rises,  we  will  try  to  finish  the  work  which  we 
began  last  evening.  29.  The  snow  has  closed  both  the  road  to 
(of)  the  city  and  that  to  the  mountains.  30.  I  saw  a  friend  of 
yours  on  the  steamboat,  but  she  did  not  speak  to  me.  31.  During 
the  war  of  1861  each  army  lost  more  than  500,000  men.  32.  It 
was  the  wife  of  the  doctor  whom  you  know  who  sent  me  this 
book.  33.  If  you  are  afraid,  close  your  eyes  and  give  me  your 
hand.  34.  He  stayed  several  years  at  my  house,  but  I  never 
knew  whose  son  he  was.  35.  While  I  was  at  the  window,  I  saw 
her  approach  the  door.  36.  I  was  mistaken  ;  it  was  not  my  keys, 
but  my  father's,  which  I  had  lost.  37.  They  say  that  you  let  your 
sick  father  remain  alone.  What  were  you  thinking  of?  38.  We 
ought  to  love  those  who  hate  us,  and  give  to  those  who  injure  us. 

39.  What  a  beautiful  red  flower  !    Have  you  many  in  your  garden  ? 

40.  I  have  lived  in  this  room  for  a  long  time,  and  I  love  it  more 
than  one  would  think. 

41.  I  have  just  seen  him,  but  I  did  not  know  how  to  tell  him 
what  I  wanted.    42.  This  man  lost  more  money  than  that  one  had. 

43.  He  who  has  money  ought  to  be  willing  to  pay  what  he  owes. 

44.  They  are  to  eat  at  our  house  tomorrow  if  they  don't  have  to 
go  to  the  city  early.  45.  Nobody  will  know  what  I  was  think- 
ing of  when  you  entered  my  poor  room.  46.  I  heard  that  you 
had  brought  many  things  with  you,  and  I  came  to  see  what  you 
bought  at  Paris.  47.  Don't  try  to  do  more  than  you  can,  but  do 
well  what  you  do.  48.  He  reads  only  Sundays,  and  cannot  read 
the  tenth  part  of  the  books  that  are  given  him.  49.  Everybody 
ought  to  use  all  that  God  has  given  him,  in  order  to  be  useful. 
50.  When  you  need  anything,  ask  me  for  it.    51.  I  will  hurry  as 


SENTENCES  FOR  GENERAL  REVIEW  397 

much  as  I  can,  but  I  fear  I  shall  arrive  there  too  late.  52.  "  The 
king  is  dead ;  long  live  the  king,"  they  began  to  exclaim.  53.  When 
winter  comes,  all  the  leaves  will  die  and  the  trees  will  no  longer 
be  beautiful.  54.  I  wish  that  I  might  see  my  father  again.  55.  If 
you  find  us  a  book  that  we  like,  we  will  get  up  early  to  read  it. 
56.  He  is  leading  such  a  life  that  it  would  be  better  for  him  to 
die.  57.  We  gather  apples  in  autumn  and  keep  many  until  spring 
comes.  58.  It  was  not  possible  to  learn  what  his  name  is.  59.  I 
am  glad  that  you  have  found  my  pencil ;  I  feared  it  would  never 
be  seen.  60.  He  was  not  willing  to  come  at  all,  for  he  was  afraid 
it  would  be  cold. 

61.  I  shall  not  go  away  unless  it  be  necessary.  62.  Bring  me 
some  wood  that  is  cut  easily,  and  I  will  make  you  a  boat.  63.  We 
came  here  to  buy  some  presents,  but  each  of  us  is  too  tired. 
64.  Provided  he  can  start  this  evening,  he  will  be  with  you 
tomorrow  morning.  65.  The  victory  would  have  been  ours  before 
night  had  fallen,  if  all  the  generals  had  not  been  killed.  66.  Did 
he  not  almost  freeze  before  he  finished  his  work  ?  67.  Whatever 
you  do,  remember  that  you  are  a  Frenchman.  68.  Eat  a  good 
breakfast  before  starting,  and  you  will  not  be  cold.  69.  The  sol- 
diers ought  to  cover  their  fires  and  go  to  bed  early  this  evening. 
70.  Although  I  pity  him,  I  cannot  give  him  any  money,  for  I  have 
none.  71.  When  I  finish  reading  these  books,  I  will  send  them  to 
you.  72.  Where  are  the  oxen  and  the  sheep  that  belong  to  me? 
Try  to  find  them.  73.  I  shall  never  be  able  to  persuade  him  to 
cease  smoking.  74.  As  for  me,  I  am  resolved  to  do  it,  and  no- 
body can  prevent  me.  75.  She  is  to  go  to  see  him,  although  he 
refused  to  let  her  enter.  76.  Peaches  grow  in  every  country  where 
the  winters  are  not  too  cold  and  the  summers  too  hot  and  dry. 
77.  Let  him  take  what  he  wants ;  there  will  be  enough  for  me.  78. 1 
shall  obey  my  father,  although  I  expect  never  to  see  him  again. 

79.  I  will  have  him  make  the  table  if  he  can  do  it  better  than  I. 

80.  Do  you  wish  coffee  every  morning  while  you  live  at  my  house? 


MOLlfeRE 

Le  tricentenaire  de  Moliere,  acteur,  directeur  et  dramaturge,  est  tombe  le 
15  Janvier  1922.  On  a  honore  sa  memoire  dans  les  theatres  de  France, 
surtout  a  la  Comedie  francaise  (appelee  Maison  de  Moliere),  et  aussi  en 
Amerique.  II  est  reconnu  comme  etant  le  plus  grand  auteur  comique  de 
tous  les  temps  et  de  tous  les  pays.  Parmi  ses  pieces  les  mieux  connues 
sont  VAvare,  Le  Bourgeois  gentilhomme  et  Le  Malade  itnaginaire.  Moliere 
a  ete  le  peintre  de  la  nature  humaine.  La  plupart  de  ses  personnages 
sont  devenus  des  types  imperissables.  Nul  n'a  enrichi  la  langue  d'autant 
de  vers,  de  mots  et  de  locutions  devenues  proverbes.  Apres  sa  mort,  son 
buste  fut  place  dans  la  salle  de  l'Academie  francaise  avec  cette  inscription  : 
a  Rien  ne  manque  a  sa  gloire ;  il  manquait  a  la  notre  » 


APPENDIX 

I.    DRILL  SENTENCES  FROM  COLLEGE  PAPERS 

The  following  sentences  are  selected  from  college  entrance  examina- 
tion papers  given  within  the  last  few  years  in  this  country. 

The  Partitive  Construction 

i.  There  are  easy  words  and  difficult  ones.  2.  There  were 
many  books  on  the  table.  3.  Some  bread  but  not  much  meat.  4. 1 
have  no  friends  in  this  city,  but  I  have  some  in  America.  5.  Do 
you  want  some  coffee  ?  No,  I  do  not  want  any.  That  is  fortunate, 
for  there  isn't  any.  6.  How  many  letters  have  you  received  today  ? 
We  have  received  three.  7.  He  never  has  any  pens ;  he  takes  ours. 
8.  The  old  soldier  tells  the  children  long  stories  of  the  war.  9.  If 
you  have  plenty  of  books,  give  him  some  and  give  them  some  too, 
but  do  not  give  her  any.  1  o.  Have  you  any  friends  in  that  town  ? 
Yes,  I  have  many  there,  n.  You  gave  me  some  bread,  but  did 
you  give  her  any  ?  12.  He  has  several  hats,  many  books,  a  dozen 
cravats,  and  little  money.  13.  How  many  books  have  you  there? 
We  have  more  than  ten.  1 4.  How  many  brothers  have  you  ?  I 
have  three.  15.  She  asked  me  to  give  her  some  money,  but  I  told 
her  I  had  none.  16.  We  have  meat,  potatoes,  and  good  bread,  but 
we  have  neither  butter  nor  milk.  17.  He  has  much  money,  and  he 
gives  some  to  these  poor  people.  18.  Where  can  I  buy  some  fine 
red  apples  ?  I  am  told  there  aren't  any  more.  19.  How  many  pens 
have  you  ?  Give  me  some.  I  have  none.  Well,  here  are  some  good 
pens.  20.  Do  you  say  that  you  have  some  fine  horses?  No,  I 
haven't  any  horses,  but  I  know  a  man  who  has  some.  21.  WTe 
shall  give  them  some  meat,  some  good  bread,  and  some  fresh  water. 

399 


400  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

22.  I  am  going  to  ask  him  for  some  money.   I  have  not  any  books. 

23.  Have  you  any  paper  ?  If  you  have  enough,  will  you  not  give 
me  some?  24.  We  have  pencils,  but  we  have  brought  no  pens. 
Will  you  lend  me  one?  25.  There  is  no  smoke  without  (a)  fire. 
26.  It  is  true  he  has  none,  but  he  has  money  and  can  easily  buy 
some.  27.  He  had  no  pens  either,  but  he  had  some  good  pencils. 
28.  I  bought  some  French  books  yesterday.  29.  We  had  a  great 
deal  of  snow  last  winter,  didn't  we  ?  30.  There  we  found  some 
friends  whom  we  had  known  for  a  long  time. 

Agreement  of  the  Past  Participle 

1.  Have  you  received  the  letter  which  I  wrote  to  you  yesterday  ? 
2.  The  books  which  I  have  read  are  very  interesting.  3.  She  has 
gone  to  the  address  which  you  had  given  to  her.  4.  She  saw  them 
at  the  market  this  morning.  5.  Has  he  read  the  letter  that  she 
has  written  him  ?  6.  Our  sisters  have  gone  away ;  they  will  be  at 
home  on  Thursday.  7.  The  lady  you  saw  at  your  aunt's  yesterday 
has  come  here  too.  8.  Give  me  back  the  four  letters  which  I  gave 
you  yesterday.  9.  All  the  flowers  that  we  had  planted  had  per- 
ished. 10.  They  were  sorry  that  their  friends  had  departed. 
1 1.  Didn't  you  bring  the  books  I  saw  last  evening  ?  12.  Here  are 
two  letters  I  have  received  this  morning.  13.  She  has  cut  her 
finger.  14.  Mary  and  John  have  arrived.  15.  Did  she  remember 
what  I  told  her  ?  1 6.  We  didn't  see  them  at  the  theater  last  evening. 
17.  Why  did  she  go  downstairs  a  few  minutes  ago?  18.  He  is 
reminding  me  of  the  French  lessons  that  he  has  given  me. 
19.  That's  the  window  he  broke  this  afternoon.  20.  I  do  not 
believe  that  they  have  arrived. 

Negation  and  Interrogation 

1.  I  have  never  traveled  in  Europe.  2.  He  has  neither  friends 
nor  money.  3.  He  has  so  many  friends  there  that  I  think  he  will 
not  stay  here  much  longer.    4.  There  is  never  anybody  at  your 


APPENDIX  401 

house.  5.  Are  not  horses  useful  animals  ?  6.  Nobody  has  found 
her.  7.  She  has  seen  nobody.  8.  Nothing  has  been  done.  9.  I 
told  it  only  to  my  father.  10.  Don't  do  that  now.  11.  Where  did 
you  see  all  those  boys?     12.   Is  the  Italian  language  difficult? 

13.  We  shall  speak  to  you  no  more.  14.  Did  he  not  speak  to  you 
of  me?  15.  Nobody  has  been  forgotten.  16.  I  do  not  speak  Eng- 
lish; I  have  said  nothing.  17.  He  is  no  longer  my  friend. 
18.  Who  is  there?  Nobody.  19.  Nothing  that  he  says  is  true;  I 
have  never  said  it  20.  Whom  have  you  seen  today  ?  I  have  seen 
no  one  and  I  have  done  nothing  at  all. 

Personal  Pronouns 

1.  Take  it  to  him,  if  you  please.  2.  I  will  give  it  to  him  when 
I  see  him  this  evening.  3.  When  will  he  give  it  to  you  ?  4.  This 
pen  is  not  very  good ;  do  not  give  it  to  him,  give  it  to  me.  5.  I 
have  seen  many  of  them  there.  6.  He  will  give  it  to  me.  7.  Where 
are  the  letters  ?  Have  you  given  them  to  her  ?  8.  I  have  given 
her  all  that  you  gave  me.  9.  He  does  not  send  it  to  you.  1  o.  I 
have  brought  them  to  you.  1 1.  Has  he  sent  her  to  them  ?  12.  Give 
them  some.   Do  not  give  them  any.    13.  She  has  put  herself  there. 

14.  I  have  introduced  myself  to  you.  15.  You  have  introduced 
yourself  to  her.  16.  I  gave  her  a  book.  They  did  not  give  her  a 
book.  17.  Give  it  to  me ;  don't  give  it  to  him.  18.  He  and  I  are 
going  to  see  them  there.  19.  Introduce  them  to  him;  she  has 
introduced  herself  to  me.  20.  I  have  spoken  of  it  to  her  and  to 
them.  21.  He  is  taller  than  I,  but  I  am  stronger  than  he. 
22.  Give  one  of  them  to  your  brother,  but  do  not  give  him  more 
than  one.  23.  Look  at  me;  look  at  him.  24.  Do  not  give  it  to 
us ;  give  it  to  them.  25.  I  will  speak  to  her  about  it  if  you  want 
me  to.  26.  I  shall  have  a  new  hat;  my  mother  has  promised  it 
to  me.  27.  Will  you  not  give  me  this  apple  ?  28.  You  and  he  were 
there,  were  you  not  ?  29.  Give  me  the  grammar  you  promised  me 
and  of  which  I  spoke  to  you  yesterday ;  I  will  return  it  to  you. 


402  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

30.  If  you  do  not  (do  it),  I  shall  oblige  you  to  give  it  to  him.  31.  I 
will  give  it  to  you  if  I  do  not  need  it  myself.  32.  Have  you  given 
the  toys  to  the  children  ?  Yes,  I  have  given  them  to  them.  33.  You 
have  given  them  to  him  as  well  as  to  me,  and  he  follows  you. 
34.  Do  not  send  them  to  us.  35.  I  love  you  and  I  will  show  it  to 
you.  36.  That  book  is  very  instructive ;  lend  it  to  me.  Will  you 
not  lend  it  to  her?  37.  I  speak  of  these  books,  not  of  that  one 
there ;  John  gave  them  to  me.  38.  Give  it  to  me  in  spite  of  him. 
39.  While  I  was  out,  she  came  in.  40.  Can  he  send  it  to  her  ?  Yes, 
he  can.  41.  They  haven't  given  him  any.  42.  Give  her  some 
money.  No,  don't  give  her  any.  43.  Here  are  some  apples ;  look 
at  them,  but  don't  eat  any.  44.  We  shall  never  give  them  to  him. 
45.  She  is  not  going,  nor  I  either.  46.  He  gave  it  to  her  himself. 
47.  It  was  John  who  introduced  me  to  you.  48.  Do  not  speak  to 
me  of  him.  49.  She  has  hurt  her  hand.  50.  Do  not  send  it  to  him 
today ;  he  is  not  at  home. 

POSSESSIVES   AND    DEMONSTRATIVES 

i.  This  book  is  mine,  but  that  is  my  sister's.  2.  Your  city  is  large 
and  beautiful;  our  village  is  small  and  pretty.  3.  This  picture  is 
handsome ;  I  do  not  like  that  one.  4.  There  are  some  books  on 
the  table;  the  red  ones  are  his,  the  blue  ones  are  yours.  5.  This 
morning  I  washed  my  hands.  6.  These  are  serious  orders.  Give 
them  to  her,  but  do  not  give  them  to  me.  7.  Yes,  she  is  pretty  and 
happy ;  indeed,  she  is  the  best  of  the  family.  8.  My  house  is  pret- 
tier than  his,  but  his  is  larger  than  mine.  9.  Is  this  table  yours  or 
mine?  10.  My  house  is  larger  than  yours,  but  yours  is  finer  than 
mine.  11.  This  wine  is  cool,  but  this  water  is  not  cool.  12.  I  like 
this  one  better  than  that  one.    13.  My  house  is  larger  than  yours. 

14.  Paul's    letters    and   William's;    Paul    and    William's   letters. 

15.  Give  her  this  book  and  those  of  the  teacher,  they  are  more 
interesting  than  hers  ;  they  are  good  French  books.  16.  Is  it  your 
aunt  who  lives  there?    17.  His  exercises  are  good,  but  hers  are 


APPENDIX  403 

always  better.  18.  These  apples  are  better  than  those,  but  I  have 
some  which  are  best  of  all.  19.  Is  this  pen  yours?  No,  sir,  it  is 
his.  There  is  mine  on  the  table.  20.  They  have  black  hair  and 
blue  eyes.  21.  She  has  cut  her  hand.  22.  Is  that  book  yours  or 
your  brother's  ?  23.  To  whom  does  this  hat  belong  ?  It  belongs  to 
my  brother.  24.  Is  this  your  book,  or  is  it  hers?  25.  That  man 
has  spent  his  fortune  and  that  of  his  wife.  26.  Your  house  is  small, 
but  ours  is  smaller  still.    27.  Here  is  my  book;    there  is  theirs. 

28.  His  house  is  already  finished ;  they  have  not  yet  begun  hers. 

29.  We  have  lost  our  horse,  but  we  have  my  brother's.  30.  It  is 
not  a  good  pen;  I  cannot  use  it.  31.  His  house  is  near  mine; 
where  is  yours  ?  32.  These  buildings  are  taller  than  those.  33.  My 
book  and  hers  are  on  the  table.  34.  I  am  going  to  see  her  and  her 
sister;  I  shall  give  her  this.  35.  These  roses  are  white,  but  those 
which  are  on  the  table  are  red.  36.  My  dress  and  my  mother's  were 
bought  in  Paris  last  summer.  37.  Don't  give  me  this  book;  give 
me  that  one.  38.  Uncle's  house  is  not  so  large  as  the  one  we  saw 
the  other  day.  39.  He  is  my  best  friend;  don't  you  think  so? 
40.  A  friend  of  mine  told  me  he  would  come  to  see  me  at  five  o'clock. 

Relatives  and  Interrogatives 

1 .  What  is  that  large  building  on  (de)  the  other  side  of  the  street  ? 
2.  Which  of  these  gentlemen  is  the  one  who  was  at  your  house  last 
night  ?  3.  I  know  what  amuses  you.  4.  Of  what  are  you  thinking  ? 
5.  To  which  one  of  his  children  did  he  leave  the  principal  part  of 
his  fortune  ?  6.  I  saw  him  who  was  with  you  day  before  yesterday. 
7.  Whom  have  you  seen  ?  Nobody.  8.  What  have  you  seen  ?  I  have 
seen  nothing.  9.  Which  of  the  two  shall  I  give  you  ?  10.  It  was  he 
who  told  me  that.  1 1.  Here  is  the  man  of  whom  we  were  speaking. 
12.  Which  one  of  these  young  girls  is  your  sister  ?  13.  Who  is  the 
gentleman  of  whom  you  spoke  ?  14.  What  do  you  see  ?  We  do  not 
see  anything.  15.  What  have  you  done?  Whom  have  you  seen? 
16.  Which  book  do  you  prefer,  this  one  or  that  one?    17.  Where 


404  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

did  you  find  the  book  which  you  are  reading?  18.  What  is  the 
project  of  which  you  were  talking?  19.  We  have  not  yet  received 
what  we  have  been  promised.  20.  Of  which  table  are  you  speaking  ? 
21.  Did  you  see  what  he  had?  22.  What  have  you  told  her? 
23.  What  is  that?  Is  it  mine  or  yours?  24.  What  pleases  you? 
25.  What  is  the  boy  doing?  26.  Do  you  know  what  that  is? 
27.  Do  you  know  of  whom  she  is  speaking  ?  28.  The  lady  of  whom 
we  are  speaking  is  the  one  who  came  here  for  you  last  night. 

29.  What  have  they  read?    I  know  what  they  are  reading  now, 

30.  Who  has  come  ?  Whom  have  you  seen  ?  31.  What  is  happen- 
ing ?  Tell  me  what  has  happened.  32.  Who  is  it  ?  It  is  I.  33.  She 
who  plays  does  not  always  dance  well.  34.  I  want  to  know  of  what 
you  are  thinking.  35.  What  pleases  me  does  not  please  everybody. 
36.  You  do  not  know  what  you  are  talking  about.  37.  I  know  the 
man  whose  son  is  your  friend.  38.  Is  the  book  in  which  you  are 
reading  interesting  ?  39.  The  person  of  whom  I  spoke  has  come ; 
all  she  said  was  reasonable.  40.  Take  a  book.  Which  one  do  you 
prefer?  41.  What  is  her  name?  What  is  your  name?  What  a 
pretty  name !  42.  To  which  of  the  children  did  he  give  the  cake  ? 
43.  This  is  the  house  of  which  you  have  spoken.  44.  The  persons 
you  are  speaking  of  have  not  arrived.  45.  I  looked  for  the  house 
in  which  he  lived,  but  I  had  forgotten  on  (in)  which  of  the  streets 
it  was.  46.  With  whom  did  you  go  to  school  ?  47.  I  saw  the  lady 
to  whose  son  you  gave  money.  48.  There's  a  man  whose  son  I 
know.  49.  Is  the  church  of  which  you  have  spoken  near  your 
home?  50.  What  fell  then?  I  don't  know  what  fell.  51.  Who 
spoke  to  you  and  what  did  he  say  to  you?  52.  Who  is  the  man 
who  just  entered  the  room  ?  It  is  the  painter  of  whom  I  was 
speaking.  53.  Have  you  seen  the  picture  by  which  he  became  so 
famous?  54.  What  amuses  them  does  not  amuse  me.  55.  Every- 
body likes  a  child  whose  face  is  always  clean.  56.  What  is  not  clear 
is  not  French.  57.  Who  opened  the  door?  Whom  did  you  see 
(the)  first  ?    58.  What  was  on  the  table  ? 


APPENDIX  405 

Numbers 

1.  How  many  young  persons  are  there  here?  Eighty-one,  I 
believe,  or  ninety-one.  2.  It  was  June  fourth,  1898.  3.  Charles 
XII,  king  of  Sweden,  was  born  on  the  27th  of  June,  1682.  4.  He 
lost  his  mother  in  his  eleventh  year  and  was  barely  fifteen  years 
old  when  his  father  died.  5.  That  tree  is  thirty  feet  high.  6.  In 
1877,  on  the  third  of  July,  this  old  city  of  Louis  XIV  had  253,796 
inhabitants.  7.  In  half  an  hour  we  shall  have  been  here  an  hour 
and  a  half.  8.  At  what  o'clock  did  your  mother  go  out  ?  9.  Gam- 
betta  was  born  April  3,  1838,  and  died  on  December  31, 
1882.  10.  At  what  time  did  she  arrive?  At  half-past  twelve. 
11.  What  time  is  it?  It  is  already  eleven  o'clock.  12.  Corneille 
was  born  at  Rouen  the  6th  of  June,  1606.  13.  How  old  is  that 
little  child  ?  14.  How  many  men  did  you  see  in  the  street  ?  I  saw 
987.  15.  The  fifteenth  of  July,  1876.  16.  It  is  a  quarter  past  two ; 
no,  it  is  a  quarter  to  three.  17.  Were  you  in  Paris  the  thirteenth  of 
last  month?  .18.  What  day  of  the  month  is  (have  we)  today? 
19.  Today  is  the  seventh  of  August.  20.  How  wide  is  this  room  ? 
It  is  ten  feet  wide.  21.  Eggs  cost  a  franc  a  dozen.  22.  Sugar  is 
sold  by  the  pound.  23.  He  came  twice  a  week.  24.  This  room  is 
ten  meters  long.  25.  If  I  am  ill  tomorrow,  I  shall  go  to  bed  at  six 
o'clock.  26.  Daudet  was  born  at  Nimes  on  the  thirteenth  of  May, 
1840  ;  he  died  in  1897.  27.  At  what  time  does  the  train  start  for 
Paris  ?  At  ten  minutes  of  eight.  28.  He  has  been  living  there  since 
August  21,  189 1.  29.  A  hundred  years  ago,  in  18 14,  France  was 
invaded  by  many  enemies.  30.  The  armistice  which  ended  the 
"  Great  War  "  was  signed  November  11,  19 18. 

Verb  Idioms 

1.  Are  your  brothers  in  the  garden  ?  No,  they  are  reading  in  the 
parlor.  2.  How  long  have  you  lived  in  France  ?  3.  What  do  you 
call  this  child  ?    He  is  called  Paul.    4.  Come !  Let  us  hurry.    Do 


406  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

not  give  it  to  him.  5 .  If  it  were  not  so  hot,  I  should  go  out.  6.  Here 
is  the  letter  I  have  just  received  from  them.  7.  Did  you  read  the 
newspapers  every  day  when  you  were  in  the  country  ?  8.  If  I  were 
you,  I  wouldn't  do  that.  9.  When  you  go  home,  tell  your  brother  I 
should  like  to  see  him.  10.  We  are  not  going  for  a  drive ;  we  prefer 
to  go  for  a  walk.  1 1.  WThen  it  rains,  the  grass  grows  everywhere  ; 
we  must  run  and  get  umbrellas.  12.  It  is  easy  to  read  French.  It 
is  not  easy  to  speak  it.  13.  He  is  hungry;  let  him  eat.  14.  It  is 
the  land  I  used  to  love.  15.  You  are  right  and  I  am  wrong.  16.  I 
am  going  out ;  I  go  to  see  the  man  every  week.  1 7.  The  two  cousins 
loved  each  other  when  they  lived  in  this  city,  but  they  have  not 
written  to  each  other  for  years.  18.  They  have  just  decided  this 
matter.  1 9 .  Do  you  know  that  gentleman  ?  20.  Let  us  speak  French. 
2 1 .  I  have  not  yet  read  the  paper,  but  I  am  going  to  read  it  immedi- 
ately. 22.  You  will  have  left  the  city  before  midnight.  23.  They 
have  been  in  Paris  since  Wednesday.  2  4.  How  long  did  your  sisters 
stay  in  Paris  ?  25.  Are  you  enjoying  yourself  ?  26.  An  old  woman 
came  to  see  me.  27.  I  see  that  the  window  is  open.  Have  it  closed. 
28.  I  should  set  out  tomorrow  if  I  were  rich  enough.  29.  As  soon 
as  you  are  there  and  have  time,  will  you  go  and  see  my  brother  ? 
30.  We  have  been  told  that  our  friends  were  deceived.  31.  We  had 
been  in  Paris  several  months  when  our  friends  arrived.  32.  When 
you  have  completed  your  exercises,  I  will  correct  them  for  you. 
33.  How  long  have  you  been  living  in  America  ?  34.  While  I  was 
at  church,  my  brother  was  taking  a  walk  on  the  mountain.  35.  WThen 
it  is  fine  weather,  we  shall  go  to  France.  36.  She  likes  French  better 
than  German.  37.  We  had  just  read  your  letter  when  you  entered 
the  house.  38.  Go  and  study  your  lesson.  39.  They  have  just  arrived; 
I  saw  them  running.  40.  If  we  wished  to  do  it,  we  could.  41.  We 
make  them  do  their  work.  42.  We  ought  to  have  done  so.  43.  I 
shall  make  him  do  what  I  wish  him  to  do.  44.  The  whole  book  was 
torn  by  the  children.  Why  didn't  you  take  it  away  from  them  ?  45. 1 
must  go  out  whether  it  rains  or  not.    46.  The  children  went  to  bed 


APPENDIX  407 

at  eight  o'clock  and  they  will  get  up  at  six.  47.  I  intended  to  start 
on  the  first  of  January,  but  I  had  to  wait  until  the  third.  48.  I  had 
just  heard  the  news  when  your  letter  came.  49.  If  I  am  not  mistaken, 
you  are  very  sleepy.  50.  Did  they  not  fall  asleep  as  soon  as  they  went 
to  bed?  51.  He  ought  to  have  arrived  there  last  week.  52.  After 
having  walked  two  hours,  we  sat  down.  53.  Make  her  sing.  Make 
her  sing  this  song.  54.  How  warm  it  is  I  Are  you  warm  ?  55.  After 
looking  at  the  books  he  bought  them.  56.  I  went  and  saw  him  and 
had  him  make  me  a  coat.  57.  She  ought  to  have  gone  to  see  them 
yesterday.  58.  I  am  cold ;  the  water  is  cold  too ;  it  is  cold  today. 
59.  Don't  you  need  your  hat  when  it  is  cold  ?  60.  Are  you  going 
to  have  a  house  built  this  year  ? 

The  Subjunctive  Mood 

1.  He  is  the  richest  man  I  know.  2.  I  am  afraid  you  will  succeed. 
3.  Do  you  think  I  am  right  ?  4.  There  are  two  apples  which  she  has 
bought.  5.  Whatever  men  may  do,  they  cannot  escape  death.  6.  I 
am  afraid  my  father  is  not  well  enough  to  go  with  us.  7.  I  doubt 
whether  he  will  be  able  to  come.  8.  I  have  told  him  nothing  which 
could  deceive  him.  9.  Whatever  she  says,  do  not  answer.  10.  I 
never  hear  from  my  aunt  unless  I  write  to  her.  1 1.  I  do  not  think 
she  was  here  ten  days  ago.  1 2.  I  am  not  afraid  of  him,  though  he  is 
older  than  I.  13.  Do  you  think  it  will  be  cold  tomorrow  ?  14.  How 
many  books  have  you  read  since  you  have  been  here?  15.  I  am 
afraid  he  will  find  the  horse  when  he  arrives.  1 6.  Everybody  desires 
that  the  war  may  soon  be  finished.  17.  She  was  glad  that  her  father 
had  come.  18.  At  what  time  do  you  think  he  will  come  ?  19.  I  think 
he  will  not  come  before  eight  or  nine.  20.  We  wished  that  he  might 
come.  21.  It  is  not  possible  for  us  to  be  at  your  house  on  Saturday 
next.  22.  We  regret  that  you  have  not  received  our  letter.  23.  You 
must  work  until  I  am  ready.  2  4.  I  fear  that  he  cannot,  will  not,  or 
does  not  know  how  to  do  it.  25.  I  do  not  doubt  that  he  too  has  the 
courage  to  (de)  do  the  same  thing.  26.  He  has  not  a  single  friend  who 


408  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

is  true  to  him.  27.  She  was  sorry  you  had  left  before  she  came. 
28.  Those  he  brought  us  are  the  finest  I  ever  saw.  29.  Do  you  wish 
to  go  yourself  or  do  you  wish  us  to  go  ?  30.  I  doubt  whether  he  will 
be  willing  to  give  it  to  you.  31.  It  is  possible  that  it  may  rain,  but 
I  do  not  think  it  will.  32.  We  fear  we  may  not  be  forgiven  this 
time.  33.  I  am  sure  that  you  could  not  have  written  your  exercise 
in  half  an  hour.  34.  I  regret  that  you  have  not  received  your  letter 
in  time.  35.  However  rich  they  may  be,  they  cannot  lend  you  all 
the  money  you  need.  36.  Although  he  is  only  twenty  years  old,  he 
is  a  captain  in  the  army.  37.  Give  me  your  hand  and  let  us  be 
friends.  38.  I  fear  that  it  is  neither  mine  nor  yours.  39.  It  is  the 
finest  thing  one  can  see.  40.  The  crowd  was  so  great  that  they 
could  hardly  cross  the  street.  41.  Do  you  think  it  will  be  colder 
tomorrow  than  it  has  been  today  ?  42.  He  is  looking  for  some  one 
who  knows  him.  43.  When  you  enter  the  dining-room,  you  will  see 
your  friend  in  front  of  the  window.  44.  I  do  not  want  to  tell  you 
what  I  have  just  done.  45.  He  ate  very  little  although  he  was 
hungry.  46.  Tell  them  what  happened  on  the  24th  of  February. 
47.  Whoever  he  is,  have  him  come  in.  48.  He  wants  me  to  cut  the 
grass  in  the  yard.  49.  That's  the  finest  thing  I  have  ever  seen. 
50.  I  want  a  servant  who  will  always  be  polite. 

General 

1.  Do  you  study  your  lessons  in  the  morning  i  I  do  every  day. 
2.  These  apples  are  mine ;  those  are  yours.  Which  do  you  like 
better  ?  3.  Henry  d'Albret  was  the  grandfather  of  Henry  the  Fourth 
of  France.  4.  This  old  house  is  the  priest's  ;  you  must  visit  it  with  me. 
5.  We  are  going  to  have  some  friends  at  dinner  this  evening.  6.  I 
have  bought  some  trees  and  I  have  set  them  out.  7.  Where  are  the 
six  roses  I  bought  this  morning  ?  8.  Here  are  four  of  them  ;  I  gave 
two  of  them  to  your  sister.  9.  She  was  sewing  when  we  came. 
10.  Tell  him  so  if  you  wish  to ;  he  will  not  believe  it.  11.  Mr.  White 
is  the  richest  man  in  our  city.    1 2.  What  is  the  matter  with  that  boy 


APPENDIX  409 

this  morning?  13.  Are  they  not  all  good  friends?  Some  are,  but 
others  are  not.  1 4.  Do  you  not  hear  the  noise  in  the  street  ?  It  is 
the  soldiers  who  have  just  arrived.   1 5.  Do  you  not  know  any  stories  ? 

16.  If  he  could  search  three  days,  he  would  not  find  his  friends. 

17.  There  are  few  old  books  in  our  house  now,  but  there  were  many 
a  year  ago.  18.  The  man  who  was  looking  at  the  horse  in  the  street 
was  near  the  window.  19.  Victor  Hugo,  the  greatest  French  poet  of 
the  last  century,  was  born  in  France  in  1802.  20.  Of  what  were  you 
thinking  when  I  spoke  to  you  of  the  books  that  you  had  lost? 

21.  That  young  girl  is  intelligent;    she  has  beautiful  blue  eyes. 

22.  Will  you  come  with  me  into  the  garden  ?  23.  The  population  of 
France  is  larger  than  that  of  Italy,  but  not  so  large  as  that  of  the 
United  States.  24. 1  see  a  book  on  the  table ;  whose  is  it  ?  It  is  your 
brother's.    25.  We  were  going  to  leave  the  house  when  he  arrived. 

26.  I  shall  buy  that  picture  for  them.  27.  These  are  the  books 
which  were  given  me.  28.  He  has  not  seen  so  much  of  it  as  I. 
29.  He  is  an  American,  and  Americans  like  to  travel.  30.  Since  my 
arrival  in  Paris  I  have  been  so  busy  that  I  have-not  found  time  to 
make  any  calls.  31.  As  soon  as  I  have  read  the  books  which  you 
sent  last  week,  I  will  return  them  to  you  in  order  that  you  may  lend 
them  to  other  friends.  32.  When  we  finish  our  lessons,  we  go  into 
the  orchard  and  eat  ripe  apples.  ^^.  Have  you  told  them  that  we 
cannot  see  one  another  ?  34.  How  many  times  have  you  been  to  the 
city  this  week  ?  35.  Your  brother  brought  us  some  roses  this  morn- 
ing, and  he  would  have  brought  some  to  them  if  they  had  asked  him 
for  any.  36.  Are  you  always  at  home  on  Sunday,  or  do  you  go  away  ? 
37.  Have  the  kindness  to  bring  me  my  hat.  38.  I  show  it  to  you,  but 
he  shows  it  to  them.  39.  That  does  not  please  him.  40.  It  is  a  good 
picture,  in  which  one  sees  blue  sky,  green  water,  and  some  pretty 
ships.  41.  If  you  have  books  and  if  you  have  no  friends,  come  to 
me  and  speak  to  me  of  it,  but  do  not  speak  to  them.  42.  They  have 
been  obliged  to  go  to  her  brother's.  43.  Do  you  know  which  of  the 
horses  your  father  sold  yesterday  ?  44.  The  man  of  whom  you  speak 


410  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

is  my  friend.  45.  Have  you  told  them  that  I  am  here  ?  46.  The 
weather  is  fine,  but  I  wish  it  were  not  so  hot.  47.  They  have  no 
more  money,  and  so  they  must  stay  at  home.  48.  I  promised  him  to 
do  it,  and  I  must  do  it.  49.  I  liked  that  book  so  well  that  I  had  my 
pupils  read  it.  50.  There  are  several  steamboats  on  the  blue  waters 
of  the  sea. 

51.  They  say  that  this  little  child  speaks  English  as  well  as 
French.  52.  His  name  and  his  father's  are  better  known  than  mine. 
53.  If  I  were  in  good  health,  I  should  often  go  to  Europe  and  I  should 
always  spend  a  few  months  in  Paris.  5  4.  We  shall  set  out  for  London 
on  the  twenty-first  of  June.  55.  Good  day,  sir.  Good  evening,  madam. 

56.  How  long  have  you  been  here  ?    I  have  been  here  three  weeks. 

57.  How  old  are  you?  I  am  older  than  my  brother.  58.  Your 
brother  has  your  pencils,  but  I  have  some  paper  and  pens.  59.  The 
coats  are  for  sale,  but  not  the  dresses  ;  the  latter  are  new,  the  former 
old.  60.  What  are  you  looking  at  ?  I  am  looking  at  these  flowers. 
61.  I  asked  her  for  the  salt,  but  her  friend  gave  me  bread.  62.  If  I 
had  a  great  deal  of  money,  I  should  go  to  Europe.  63.  We  cannot 
find  them  where  you  left  them,  although  we  have  searched  for  them. 

64.  Mary  is  the  youngest  of  all  the  children,  but  she  is  not  the  best. 

65.  Must  you  go  away  at  once  ?  66.  If  she  had  written  me,  I  should 
have  answered  her  letter.  67.  It  is  easy  to  do  that,  for  it  has  already 
been  done.  68.  Do  you  think  he  is  richer  than  the  king  ?  69.  The 
gentleman  for  whose  house  I  offered  so  much  has  bought  another. 
70.  The  water  which  you  see  had  risen  from  the  earth  to  the  sky, 
whence  it  has  just  fallen  again.  71.  This  is  indeed  the  best  grammar 
I  know.  72.  His  mother  was  born  in  France.  73.  The  man  of  whom 
you  speak  has  just  gone  out.  74.  Do  you  wish  us  to  go  there  for 
him  or  do  you  wish  him  to  go  himself  ?  75.  The  two  men  are  older 
than  their  sister. 

76.  Do  not  deceive  yourself  by  thinking  that  your  rich  brother 
is  the  only  man  who  knows  it.  77.  Which  of  these  comedies  have 
you  read  ?  78.  The  reign  of  Louis  the  Fourteenth  is  the  longest  reign 


APPENDIX  411 

in  the  history  of  France.  79.  Why  have  you  not  liked  each  other  ? 
80.  The  man  of  whom  you  spoke  is  my  brother.  81.  We  should  like 
the  best  there  is ;  that  is  the  least  you  can  do.  82.  Perhaps  you  had 
not  been  told  so.  Well,  it 's  true  and  I'm  glad  of  it.  83.  Do  not  speak 
to  me  until  you  can  speak  to  me  in  French  or  German.  84.  Your 
brother  must  not  go  before  I  return.  85.  Francis  the  First  was 
twenty  years  of  age  when  he  began  to  reign.  86.  You  must  finish 
this  letter,  not  that  one.  87.  Your  sister  was  one  of  my  best  pupils. 
88.  Which  of  those  young  girls  is  her  niece  ?  The  one  to  whom  you 
were  speaking  just  now.  89.  If  you  have  some  of  those  books,  and 
if  you  have  plenty,  give  him  some  and  give  them  some  too,  but  do 
not  give  her  any.  90.  I  am  very  hungry ;  will  you  please  give  me 
some  bread,  some  water,  and  some  apples  ?  91.  Have  your  friends 
gone  away  ?  Yes,  but  they  will  return  Monday.  92.  One  cannot  do 
without  money ;  it  is  useful  everywhere.  93.  What  have  you  done 
with  the  books  which  you  have  read  ?  John  asked  me  for  them  and 
I  gave  them  to  him.  94.  Here  is  my  uncle's  son  of  whom  you  have 
just  spoken  to  me.  95.  The  eleventh  of  September,  1698.  96.  This  is 
a  book  which  is  interesting.  9  7 .  Who  wants  this  pretty  flower  ?  Give 
it  to  me,  but  do  not  give  it  to  them.  98.  He  has  some  money,  but  he 
would  like  to  have  more.  99.  I  think  I  can  do  it.  100.  The  soldiers 
who  were  entering  the  town  knocked  at  the  first  door  they  saw. 
1 01.  What  were  you  doing  here  when  I  came  in  an  hour  ago  ? 

102.  Nobody  is  hungry,  but  everybody  would  prefer  to  eat  now 
because  it  is  half-past  six  and  one  ought  to  eat  and  drink  something. 

103.  She  held  in  her  hand  a  small  white  flower  and  some  large  red 
leaves.  1 04.  Who  told  you  that  we  were  going  away  next  Monday  ? 
He  ?  105.  I  got  up  this  morning  with  a  headache.  106.  What  are 
you  looking  f or  ?  I  am  looking  for  a  man  to  help  me  in  my  business. 
107.  If  he  had  never  been  idle,  he  would  not  be  poor  now.  1 08.  The 
republic  is  loved  and  praised  by  everybody.  109.  If  you  come  to 
see  me,  do  not  come  too  late.  no.  Have  they  already  read  the  new 
French  novel  ?   Lend  it  to  them  when  you  have  finished  it.    Let  him 


412  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

see  it  also.  1 1 1.  My  brother  has  told  me  the  precise  hour  at  which 
he  was  at  the  tailor's.  112.  You  and  John  have  been  walking  here 
for  an  hour  and  a  half.  113.  Do  not  give  them  to  them.  114.  Have 
you  found  any  metals  in  those  mountains  ?  We  have  found  very 
little  iron  there.  115.  If  they  should  come  alone,  I  could  not  help 
seeing  them.  116.  We  have  just  written  a  long  letter.  117.  I  fear 
that  he  cannot  do  all  that  he  wishes  for  us  and  for  the  others  whom 
he  has  known.  118.  He  took  off  his  hat  when  he  came  into  the  room. 
119.  Should  you  have  gone  to  bed  so  soon  if  I  had  come  ?  120.  He 
says  he  gave  it  to  her.  121.  If  that  letter  is  longer  than  this,  give  it 
to  me  to  read.  1 2  2.  I  was  yesterday  asking  myself  whether  we  might 
hope  to  see  him  before  autumn.  123.  If  he  has  no  money,  I  will  lend 
him  all  he  needs.  124.  When  my  friend  spends  the  evening  with  us, 
we  always  read  one  of  his  stories.  125.  I  wish  you  to  finish  that 
exercise  at  once. 

126.  I  shall  go  to  France  and  England  in  two  months,  and  I 
shall  remain  in  Paris  twelve  days.  127.  Do  you  often  hear  from  your 
cousin's  children  ?  128.  John,  with  his  brother,  started  on  the  prin- 
cipal road  in  order  to  arrive  home  easily  before  seven  o'clock. 
129.  We  had  not  forgotten  how  much  we  used  to  enjoy  ourselves 
when  we  were  children.  130.  My  brother  and  sister  have  gone  away ; 
they  will  not  be  back  until  Wednesday  next.  131.  Few  boys  play 
the  piano ;  most  girls  play  it.  132.  The  man  whom  you  see  there  is 
one  of  my  friends.  133.  Who  has  my  pen  ?  Did  I  not  give  it  to 
you?  No,  sir,  you  gave  it  to  them.  134.  We  think  of  them  and 
often  speak  of  them.  135.  Those  are  the  gentlemen  of  whom  we 
were  speaking  yesterday.  136.  Does  he  think  that  we  always  tell 
him  what  we  are  going  to  do  ?  He  is  mistaken.  137.  There  were 
many  people  in  town  last  night.  138.  I  knew  that  man  ten  years 
ago.  139.  What  a  beautiful  woman  I  saw  this  morning !  Who  was 
she  ?  140.  Give  me  this  book.  I  will  give  it  to  you.  141.  She  can 
hardly  be  found  by  those  who  do  not  know  her.  1 42.  Gold  and  silver 
are  products  of  the  earth.    1 43.  When  you  went  to  the  house,  we 


APPENDIX  413 

remained  here.  1 44.  Kindly  read  this  for  me ;  it  is  very  easy. 
145.  They  go  to  see  him  to  carry  him  flowers  and  books.  146.  I 
saw  many  of  them  in  France.  147.  This  gentleman  is  a  Frenchman 
from  the  south  of  France.  1 48.  What  prevents  him,  then,  from  going 
to  Europe  if  he  pleases  and  when  he  pleases  ?  149.  There  is  much 
difference  between  the  customs  of  the  French  and  ours.  150.  I  have 
left  all  our  books  at  school. 

151.  Whom  do  you  desire  to  see  ?  Is  it  I  or  my  brother  ?  It  is 
you  whom  I  desire  to  see.  152.  The  man  who  is  speaking  is  my 
friend.  153.  This  is  my  youngest  brother ;  but  perhaps  you  already 
know  him.  154.  You  have  excellent  pens  and  very  good  paper; 
give  me  some,  if  you  please.  155.  Today  they  are  visiting  their 
friends ;  tomorrow  they  will  have  left  for  France,  from  whence  they 
will  go  to  England.  156.  I  will  write  him  a  letter  and  you  can  send 
it  to  him  on  arriving  at  Boston.  157.  Are  you  hungry  ?  No,  but  I 
am  quite  thirsty.  1 58.  I  fear  he  will  come  too  early.  159.  It  seems 
to  me  that  you  are  never  at  home.  160.  If  it  were  not  so  cold,  it 
would  rain.  161.  He  has  been  in  Paris  several  months,  has  he  not  ? 
162.  Let  us  not  take  a  walk;  it  is  two  o'clock  and  we  shall  dine 
soon.  163.  Try  to  prevent  him  from  coming.  164.  My  friend,  you 
must  study  all  these  verbs.  165.  This  apple  is  bad;  don't  give 
it  to  him.  166.  If  he  is  at  home,  he  will  receive  it  at  five  o'clock. 
167.  Are  there  any  good  pens  with  which  I  can  write?  No,  sir,  I 
have  none.  168.  People  say  that  they  love  one  another.  169.  WThen 
one  seeks  truth,  one  finds  it.  1 70.  I  intend  to  go  to  the  country  if  it 
is  hot.  171.1  have  bought  some  flowers  to  decorate  the  table  because 
we  are  going  to  have  some  friends  to  dinner  this  evening.  172.  I 
neither  hope  nor  fear.  1 73.  If  you  love  me,  show  it  to  me  by  coming 
to  see  me  often.  174.  If  it  rains  tomorrow,  we  shall  not  go  until  it 
stops  raining.  175.  Neither  he  nor  I  could  read  the  newspapers 
which  they  sent  us. 

176.  Did  your  friend  come  to  tell  you  the  news  I  had  just  told  him  ? 
177. 1  doubt  he  has  the  courage.    178.  My  brother  has  just  arrived. 


414  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

179.  I  am  ashamed  of  your  conduct.  180.  I  will  send  another  letter, 
for  I  said  nothing  of  our  departure  in  the  one  I  sent  him  yesterday. 
181. 1  will  give  them  to  them,  for  they  are  hungry.  182.  If  you  wish 
to  study,  I  shall  lend  you  some  books.  183.  He  spoke  very  loud, 
which  made  us  smile,  didn't  it  ?  184.  When  I  see  her,T  shall  speak 
to  her  about  it.  185.  My  good  old  uncle  has  very  interesting  books 
in  his  little  brown  house.  186.  I  went  to  bed  at  eleven  o'clock. 
187.  She  has  just  arrived  from  London.  188.  They  arose  at  twenty 
minutes  after  six.  189.  Are  these  the  children  to  whose  father  I 
have  written  ?  190.  If  she  had  brought  me  cherries,  I  should  have 
eaten  them.  191.  These  histories  are  longer  and  less  interesting  than 
those  novels.  192.  I  went  to  New  York  yesterday.  193.  Where  is 
the  old  lady  whom  I  have  seen  with  you  ?  She  has  gone  to  France 
also.  194.  Are  they  not  French?  They  are,  and  I  am  very  glad 
they  are  not  English.  195.  The  Alps  are  the  highest  mountains  in 
Europe.  196.  I  have  introduced  her  to  you.  197.  I  shall  not  give 
it  to  you ;  I  shall  give  it  to  this  boy.  198.  Tell  it  to  him  now  if  he 
is  not  asleep ;  but  if  he  is,  do  not  tell  it  to  any  one.  199.  I  wish  I 
had  one  of  the  English  novels  I  saw  on  your  writing  table  some  time 
ago.   200.  Why  don't  you  go  and  see  him  ?   Have  you  thought  of  it  ? 

Questions  Personnelles 

Repondez  en  francais  aux  questions  suivantes  par  des  phrases 
completes,  en  ecrivant  les  nombres  en  toutes  lettres : 

1.  Depuis  combien  d'annees  etudiez-vous  le  francais? 

2.  Pourquoi  etudiez-vous  le  francais  ? 

3.  Que  faut-il  faire  pour  apprendre  une  langue? 

4.  Quels  livres  avez-vous  lus  cette  annee  ? 

5.  Quel  livre  de  frangais  avez-vous  etudie  ? 

6.  Quelle  e'tude  pre'ferez-vous  et  pourquoi  ? 

7.  Dans  quel  pays  et  a  quelle  date  etes-vous  ne'  ? 

8.  Quelle  est  la  date  de  cet  examen  ? 


APPENDIX  415 

II.    MATERIAL  FOR  PHONETIC  PRACTICE 
1.  Test  Questions  on  Sounds 
These  are  taken  largely  from  college  admission  examinations. 

1.  What  are  the  most  striking  characteristics  of  French  pro- 
nunciation ? 

2.  What  are  the  four  nasal  sounds?  What  combinations  of 
letters  may  represent  each?  Give  words  containing  each  of  the 
four  nasal  sounds. 

3.  In  what  positions  are  il  and  ill  liquid?  Give  words  con- 
taining each  when  liquid  and  also  when  not. 

4.  Give  words  containing  mute  e,  soft  c,  hard  c,  soft  g,  hard  g, 
initial  h  aspirate,  initial  h  not  aspirate,  8  sounded  like  z,  final  8 
sounded,  final  e  sounded,  final  e  not  sounded,  t  sounded  like  8. 

5.  How  are  e,  au,  oi,  gn,  ais  pronounced  ? 

6.  Explain  how  u,  eu,  au,  en,  in  are  pronounced. 

7.  Lesquels  des  six  mots  suivants  ont  une  voyelle  ou  syllabe 
qui  se  prononce  comme  u  dans  du  ? 

eu  eut  bleu  heureuse  but  bout 

8.  In  which  of  the  following  words  is  1  (or  11)  sounded  as  in 
the  French  word  il? 

lafille  la  vieille  le  village  gentil 

la  ville  lefils  tranquille  mille 

9.  What  are  the  nearest  English  equivalents  of  the  sounds  au, 
ou  in  bout,  eu  in  heure,  oi  in  voix  ? 

10.  Represent,  by  the  use  of  e*  and  e  where  possible,  the  proper 
sound  of  ai  in  mauvais,  mat,  and  travail,  and  of  e  in  complet, 
chanter,  fer,  nez. 

11.  Tell  how  parlai  differs  in  sound  from  parlais ;  how  saute  is 
distinguished  from  sotte ;  how  neuf  is  pronounced  in  the  phrases 
neuf  garcons,  neuf  hommes ,  f  en  ai  neuf. 


41 6  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

12.  Indicate  by  phonetic  characters,  or  otherwise,  the  pronun- 
ciation of  — 

a.  ville,  veille,  travail,  Jits,  bien,  ne,  nez,  loin,  sceur,  leur. 

b.  chaise,  cuisine,  premiere,  fille,  quarante,  chez. 

c.  patrie,  vous  avez,  gagnaient,  dava?itage,  mort,  Us  partent. 

13.  Compare  in  respect  to  pronunciation  (using  the  interna- 
tional phonetic  notation,  if  possible)  the  letters  in  heavy  type  in 
each  of  the  following  groups : 

a.  ceder,  cede-,  bon,  bonne;  corde,  cote;  cher,  chercher;  chaise, 
chasse. 

b.  appeler,  age ;  etait,  etre ;  notre,  le  nbtre. 

c.  mz,fer,  venir. 

14.  Indicate,,  by  underscoring,  the  silent  letters  in  the  following 
words  and  phrases :  aimer,  amer,  cerf,  estomac,  sec ;  les  fils,  les 
hommes,  elles  viennent ;  il  est,  Us  etaient  venus  ;  bout,  heure,  escalier ; 
tout  a  coup. 

15.  Indicate  the  silent  letters  in  the  phrase  «  77  en  est  temps 
encore »,  me  disaient-elles,  supposing  the  phrase  to  be  read  aloud 
or  spoken. 

16.  Indicate  the  silent  letters  in  Nous  sommes  partis  de  chez  eux 
le  quatre  juillet  mil  neuf  cent  quinze. 

17.  Copy  the  following  sentence,  and  cross  out  the  silent  con- 
sonants, underline  the  nasal  vowels,  and-  indicate  by  h  the  sounds 
of  the  open  e :  C'est  bien  peu,  meme  en  province ;  a  Paris,  ce  n'est 
presque  rien,  surtout  quand,  comme  moi,  on  a  une  fille  de  dix- 
huit  ans. 

18.  Copy  the  Model  on  page  97  as  far  as  ttrangers  (line  6). 

a.  Indicate  by  e,  e,  9  respectively  all  sounds  of  6  (closed  e), 
6  (open  e),  and  e  mute. 

b.  Indicate  all  nasal  sounds,  stating  which  nasal  each  is. 

c.  Mark  all  silent  letters. 


APPENDIX  417 

19.  Copiez  les  six  premieres  phrases  du  modele  a  la  page  105 
(commencant  par  Ma  mere  descend  et  finissant  par  du  sel)  et 
indiquez  — 

a.  Tous  les  cas  de  liaison  qu'on  ferait  en  lisant  ces  phrases  a 
haute  voix. 

b.  Toutes  les  consonnes  qu'on  ne  prononcerait  pas. 

20.  Dans  les  phrases  suivantes  effacez  toutes  les  lettres  qu'on 
ne  prononce  pas  en  lisant  les  phrases,  et  soulignez  toutes  les 
voyelles  qui  ont  un  son  nasal : 

a.  II  est  alle  en  haut  pour  trouver  la  clef. 

b.  Les  huit petits  en/ants  donnaient  a  manger  aux  animaux  dans 
les  champs. 

c.  Void  mesjils,  Us  sont  tous  tres  gentils. 

21.  Indicate  the  pronunciation  of  the  French  cardinal  numbers 
from  1  to  20.  Explain  the  three  ways  in  which  six  and  dix  are 
pronounced,  and  give  a  phrase  containing  each. 

22.  What  is  the  cedilla?  Where  does  it  occur  and  what  effect 
has  it  on  pronunciation  ?    Give  three  examples. 

23.  Explain  the  aspirate  h  and  its  effect  on  pronunciation.  Give 
two  words  in  which  initial  h  is  aspirate ;  two  words  in  which  it  is 
not  aspirate. 

24.  Explain  the  term  liaison  (or  linking).  Give  five  phrases  of 
two  or  three  words  each,  illustrating  liaison. 

25.  Indicate  the  liaisons  that  should  be  made  in  reading  aloud 
the  following :  de  temps  en  temps  ;  onze  heures  et  demie ;  cher  cousin 
et  ami ;  mats  oui ;  on  est  a  Paris  en  un  rien  de  temps. 

26.  State  the  main  principles  of  dividing  French  words  into 
syllables.  Copy  the  first  five  lines  of  the  Model  on  page  112, 
dividing  all  the  words  into  syllables  by  vertical  lines. 

27.  How  does  the  rule  for  dividing  a  French  word  into  syllables 
help  to  determine  when  an  initial  vowel  is  nasal  and  when  it  is 
not?    Illustrate  by  inutile  and  indiscutable. 


41 8  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

28.  Copy  the  following  words  and  divide  them  into  syllables: 
ennemi,  americaifi,  emmener,  combien,  i?ioui,  ho?iteux. 

29.  Divide  into  syllables  the  first  stanza  of  the  Marseillaise,  on 
page  425. 

30.  Write  in  phonetic  notation  the  first  five  lines  of  the  Model 
on  page  127;  also  of  other  Models. 

2.  Transcription  of  Models,  Lessons  I-XII 

In  the  following  transcriptions,  division  between  the  words  as  units 
is  entirely  disregarded.  Groups  of  syllables  that  are  normally  pro- 
nounced together  without  pause  (breath  groups)  are  connected  by 
hyphens.  These  groups  are  made  gradually  longer,  to  be  adapted  to 
the  pupil's  increasing  rapidity  in  reading.  A  single  space  is  left  between 
breath  groups ;  a  double  space  where  longer  pauses  occur,  as  at  the 
end  of  sentences. 

I.  yn-fa-mi:j 

oe-gar-s5  e-yn-fi:j  s5-ta-vek-6e-nDm  e-yn-fam  b-gar-s5  el-fre:r  dla- 
fi:j  b-gar-s5  a-yn-soe:r  la-fhj  a-6Mre:r  b-gar-s5  el-fre:r  dla-soe:r  la- 
fi:j  el-gar-s5  5-d0-pa-rd  bm-e-la-fam  s5-le-pa-rd  le-pa-ra  5-d0-zd-fd 
le-zd-fd-dbm  e-dla-fam  s5-b-gar-s5  e-la-fi:j  le-zd-fd  5-tce-pe:r  e-yn- 
me:r  la-me:r  e-la-fam-dbm  bm  a-yn-fam  la  fam-dbm  e-la-me:r 
dla-fi:j  b-fre:r-dla-fi:j  e-to-si  ld-fd  dla-me:r  b-ma-ri-dla-me:r  el-pe:r 
b-pe:r-e-la-me:r  s5-le-d0-pa-rd  u-el-pe:r  b-pe:r-e-ta-vek-la-me:r  u-s5- 
le-zd-fd  le-zd-fd  so-ta-vek-le-pa-rd  ki-s5-le-zd-fd  b-gar-s5  e-la-flij 
s5-le-zd-fd    ki-s5-le-pa-rd 

II.  ma-fa-mi :j 

dd-zyn-fa-mi:j  b-fis  e-la-fi:j  s5-le-zd-fd  dy-pe:r  e-dla-me:r  b-fis 
e-je:r  o-pe:r  e-a-la-me:r  o-si  b-fis  e-Je:r  o-d0-pa-rd  le-pa-rd  s5-b- 
pe:r  e-la-me:r  la-me:r  e-la-fam-dy-pe:r  b-pe:r  e-la-me:r  s5-le-pa-rd 
de-zd-fd  dd-ma-fa-mi:j  me-pa-rd  5-d0-fi:j  e-ce-fis  m5-pe:r  a-yn-fam 
sa-fam  e-ma-me:r  m5-pe:r  el-ma-ri  do-ma-meir  m5-pe:r  e-ma-me:r 
so-me-pa-rd      me-sce:r  ma-ri-e-bert  s5-le-fi:j  d9-me-pa-rd      m5-pe:r 


APPENDIX  419 

a-yn-sce:r  ma-td:t  e-la-soe:r  da-mo-peir  ma-td:t  a-ce-ma-ri  s5-ma-ri 
e-m5-n5:kl  le-zd-fd  d9-m5-n5:kl  s5-me-ku-ze  m5-ku-ze-3d  e-Je:r-o-fre:r 
d9-m5-n5:kl 

III.  ma-sal-d9-kla:s 

33-sqi-za-le-kol  a-vek-m5-fre:r  nu-som-zi-si  nu-som  dd-la-sal-do- 
kla:s  el-a-d0-port  e-kat-fa-ne:tr  la-fo-toe:j  el-by-ro  do-vd-la-ta-blo  so 
pur-la-meitr-de-kol  le-bd  e-le-py-pitr  pur-le-ze-le:v  dla-kla:s  le-li:vr 
e-le-kre-j5  dy-me:tr  s5-syrl-by-ro  se-plym  s5-to-si  syr-s5-by-ro  le-ka-je 
de-ze-le:v  s5-syr-le-py-pitr  ta-me:tr  e-to-ta-blo  de-rje:r-s5-by-ro  yn-e- 
le:v  ed-vdl-by-ro  dy-me:tr  d0-de-ze-le:v  s5-tof-ne:tr  u-s5-vo-li:vr  il-s5 
syrl-py-pitr  d^-m5-fre:r   u-s5-vo-plym    el-s5  syr-m5-py-pitr 

IV.  yn-sal-d9-kla:s 

ta-me:tr  e-ta-vek-se-ze-le:v  dd-la-kla:s  il-ne-pa-za-si  il-ed-bu  da-vd- 
se-ze-le:v  il-a-yn-re:gl  sul-bra  ce-ne-le:v  e-to-ta-blo  b-me:tr  m5:tr- 
yn-kart-d9-frd:s  a-le-le:v  d0-ze-le:v  s5-ta-si  da-vdl-ta-blo  il-z5-tde- 
port-plym  e-de-ka-je  ld:kr  e-dd-ld-kri-e  nu-som-za-si  39-don-yn-plym 
a-oe-ne-le:v  il-a-ce-port-plym  39-ne-pa-m5-ka-je  il-ne-pa-zi-si  vwa-si- 
ce-ka-je  a-ve-vu-zde-kre-j5  39-ne-pa-tru-ve  m5-kre-j5  me^e-a-por-te 
ma-plym  el-e-dd-m5-py-pitr  a-pre-lal-s5  la-kbj-son  le-ze-le:v  v5-dd- 
la-ku:r   u-e-la-ku:r   el-e-de-rje:r-le-kDl   nun-som-pa-dd-la-kuir 

V.  la-fa-mi:j  a-la-me-z5 

eit-vu-za-le-kol  o-3ur-dqi  n5  nun-som-pa-za-le-kol  nu-som-za-la- 
me-z5  vo-pa-rd  s5-til-a-vek-vu  wi  il-s5-to-si  a-la-me-z5  u-s5-til  il-s5< 
dd-ma-Jd:br  vwa-si-ma-Jd:br  a-tel-yn-tabl  wi  el-a-yn-tabl  d0-je:z 
e-oe-fo-toe:j  3e-o-si-6e-by-ro  dd-ma-Jd:br  e:t-vud-bu  da-vd-votr-by-ro 
n5  39-sqi-za-si  dd-m5-fo-toe:j  votr-grd-pe:r  e-til-dd-la-me-zo  n5  il-e- 
ta-si  ddl-3ar-de  a-vek-m5-ku-ze-3d  votr-ku-ze  e-til-ld-fdd-vo-tr5:kl  wi 
e-il-e-to-si  tan-v0  d3-m5-pe:r  votr-ku-ze  na-til-pa-zyn-u-d0-sce:r  il-a- 
d0-soe:r  ki-s5-le-nje:s-d9-m5-pe:r  no-s5-tel-pa  dd-la-ku:r  ki-e-de-rjeir- 
la-me-z5    ma-ri-e-dd-la-ku:r  me-sa-soe:r  e-ti-si  a-vek-sa-grd-me:r 


420  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

VI.  Ial-s5 

na-ve-vu-pa  votr-li:vr-cta-fra-se  wi  m9-sj0  il-e-syr-m5-py-pitr  b- 
me:tr  don-yn-b-s5d-gra-me:r  o-ze-le:v  il-li-le-re:gl  e-il-e-kri  le-zeg- 
zdpl-o-ta-blo  a-vek-ce-mor-sod-kre  il-m5:tr  le-zeg-zdpl  o-ze-le:v  3e- 
kri-dd-mo-ka-je  a-vek-ma-plym  nu-ze-kri-v5-le-fra:z  ki-s5-syr-b-ta-blo 
m5-fre:r  ne-kri-pa-le-zeg-zdpl  il-a-sa-gra-me:r  me-zil-na-pa-za-por-te 
s5-ka-je  m5:tre-mwa-lal-s5  lal-s5  e-tel-di-fi-sil  n5  el-e-fa-sil  a-pre- 
lal-s5d-gra-me:r  nu-za-v5  lal-s5-dlek-ty:r  le-ze-le:v  ne-kriv-pa  b- 
me:tr  lid-va-le-ze-le:v  nu-li-z5-za-prel-me:tr  e-nu-ze-kri-v5  le-zeg-zer-sis 
a-la-me-z5 

VII.  la-park 

33-sqi-dal-park  a-vek-len-v0d-m5-pe:r  b-park  e-td-fas<b-ma-me-z5 
le-zwa-zo  fd:t-dd-le-zarbr  ddl-bwa  il-ja-d0-i-bu  b-i-bu  e-tde-nwa-zo 
vwa-la-de-nDm  ki-li-se-3ur-no  syrl-bd  a-ko-te-dbm  il-ja-yn-bon  e-le-fis- 
dbm  de-de-fis  e-syr-le3-nu  dy-m3-sj0  le-zj0-dld-fd  s5-gri  s5-ja-po 
e-de-rje:r-b-bd  syr-le-ka-ju-dla-le  le-311-311  e-le-md-to-de-zd-fd  s5-dd- 
le-bra-dla-bon  ekbn-o-zd-fd  le-nwa-ze-le-ga-to  ki-s5-dd-s5-sak  dd-la- 
le-pur-le-Jvo  il-ja  de-nom-e-sS-Jval 

VIII.  Ia-me-z5 

3d-e-dr3-tu:r  a-la-me-zo  s5-n5:kl  a-yn-grd:d-me-z5  pars-kil-a-yn- 
grd:d-fa-mi:j  b-sa-15  e-tre-30-li  il-a-d0-grd:d-e-ot-fa-ne:tr  le-15-ri-do- 
def-ne:tr  s5-tre-bo  vwa-si-yn-pa-tit-tabl  el-e-r5:d  de-ta-blo  ra-pre- 
sd:t-de-3ar-de  b-sjel-dy-ta-blo  e-tre-bl0  il-ja-d0-jar-md-zd-fd  ddl-ta-blo 
l3-gar-s5-ed-bu  e-311-a-vek-de-gro-jje  lap-tit-fi:j  e-ta-si:z-syr-lerb  lerb- 
e-tre-ve:rt  le-zar-bre-le-foe:j  s5-ve:r-o-si  b-3ar-de  e-pled-30-li-floe:r  b- 
sa-b  ne-pa-la-soel-pjes-dla-me-z5  il-ja-o-si  yn-sal-a-md-ge  e-yn-kiji-zin 
le-Jd:br-a-ku-Je  s5p-tit  me-ge  la-ku-zin-d9-3d  a-a-pDr-te  de-va :z-d9-floe:r 

IX.  a-la-kd-paji 

o-3ur-dqi  3d-e-ta-la-kd-pari  tul-pe-i-e-td-floe:r  s5-na-mi-a-yn-grd:d- 
ferm    dd-zde-3D-lip-ti-vi-la:3     il-ja-d0-z3m-Je-s5-na-mi    ce-vj0-e-(£-3oen 


APPENDIX  421 

l9-3oen  e-frd-se  ta-frd-se  ne-pa-zi-si  il-e-met-nd-dd-le-bwa  ls-Jme  se- 
pa:r-la-ferm-dla-fD-re  nu-zad-mi-r5-su-vd  le-bo-zarbr  ki-5-tce-foe-ja:3 
dce-ve:r-tre-td:dr  tul-m5:d-ad-mir-yn-tel-fD-re  le-zarbr-frqi-tje  na-pus- 
pa-dd-le-bwa  il-pus-ddl-ver-je  ddl-ver-3e  il-ja-ce-sri-zje  de-gro-nwa-je 
ply-zjoe:r-pD-mje  e-ce-pwa-rje  tut-le-sri:z  s5-ru:3  el-z5-tce-b5-gu  kd- 
tel-s5-my:r  el-z5-toe-mD-ve-gu  kd-tel-s5-ve:rt  le-nwa-dd-ma-poj"  s5-le- 
nwa-dy-nwa-je  ki-ed-vd-vu   le-gro-zarbr-dy-ver-3e  s5-tre-vj0 

X.  a-la-ferm 

Ia-ferm-d3m-sj0-l9-bld  l9-b5-na-mid-3d  e-tyn-bel-me-z5-bld:j"  el-e- 
noe:v  dd-la-ku:r  ki-e-l5:g-e-lar3  s3-le-grd:d-ze-tabl  pur-le-gro:s-vaJ 
e-le-ze-ky-ri  pur-le-bo-Jvo-dla-ferm  a-ko-te-dy-ver-3e  l3-gro-Jval-nwa:r- 
d3m-sj0-l9-bld  e-ddl-pre  u-lerb-e-te-pe:s  Iap-tit-fi:j-d3m-sj0-ta-bld  e-sul- 
foe-ja:3-e-pe  dy-vje:j-ar:br-dla-ku:r  el-li-ta-ot-vwa  ta-nu-vo-li:vr-da-na- 
tol-frd:s  e-el-e-toe-r0:z  lap-tit  a-siz-syr-yn-Je:z-bas  a-yn-vwa-tre-dus 
e-e-la-mid-tul-m5:d  s5-pe:r-e-vj0-e-gro  me-zil-e-tre-zak-tif  sa-me:r-ne- 
pa-tre-vje:j  e-el-e-tak-ti:v-osi   il-s5-toe-r0 

XI.  le-d0-ka-ma-rad-de-kDl 

3e-d0-ka-ma-rad  3d-e-Jarl  3dd-moe:r-a-pa-ri  la-ply-bel-vil-dy-m5:d 
Jarld-moe:r-dd-zyn-vil-ply-grd:d  me-mwe-bel  3d-e-riJ  se-pa-rd-5-tyn- 
grd:d-me-z5  Jarl-ne-pa-si-riJ-k9-3d  sa-me-z5  e-mwe-grd:d  el-es-pd- 
dd-to-si-bel  el-ne-pa-si-vje:j  3d-e-ply-za-3ek-j'arl  il-e-grd  e-n>byst 
Jarl-e-to-si-grd  me-mwe-fD:r  il-e-bje-nel-ve  po-li  e-tu-3u:r-ze-mabl  3d 
o-k5-tre:r  e-mal-el-ve  il-ne-pa-si-a-gre-abl-ka-so-ka-ma-rad  e-e-mwe- 
po-li  d-kla:s  il-€-pa-re-s0  Jarl-e-ply-sty-dj0  3d-e-na-ty-rel-md-mwe- 
za-vd-se  pars-kil-ne-pa-si-a-td-tif-d-kla :  s  il-es-pd-dd-tosi-e-te-li-3dk-Jarl 
Jarl-el-me-joe:r-de-d0  e-m5-ply-je:r-a-mi  3d-ne-pas-pd-dd  ta-pir-de-gar- 
s5d-s5-na:3 

XII.  le-rij  e-le-po:vr 

•  dd-tu-le-pe-i  il-ja-3e-ne-ral-md  bo-kud-po:vr-e-p0-driJ"  le-po:vr-5-p0- 
dar-3d  le-rij-5-bo-ku-dar-3d  le-riJ-5-ply-dar-3d-kle-po:vr  le-po:vr-5 
mwe-dar-3d-kle-rij    le-po:vr-n5-pa-za-se-dar-3d     il-pd:s  kelk-fwa-kle- 


422 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


rij-o-tro-dar-gd  da-me-zo  ed-bo-veit-md  il-s5-3a-lu-de-rij  le-po:vr 
5-si>va-to-ta-da-mi-kle-riJ  me-zil-n5-pa-tdd-ple-zi:r  le-po:vr  s5-su-vd- 
to-si-oe-r0-kle-rij  il-n9-s5-pa-spd-dd-si-fje:r  le-fam-de-rij  5-bo-kud-bo- 
bi-3u-ed-bel-rob  le-zd-fd-de-po:vr  S-mwed-gu^u-kle-zd-fd-de-riJ  le-rij 
don-bo-kud-ju^u-e-dotr-Joiz  op-ti-zd-fd  de-po:vr  pd-dd-la-grd:d-ge:r 
le-rij-e-le-po:vr  5-dD-ne-tre-3e-ne-roez-md  o-sol-da  e-o-si-a-la-krwa-ru:^ 
na-ty-rel-md  le-rij-o-do-ne-ply-kle-poivr  lep-ti-z5-do-ne-mwe-kloe:r-pa- 
rd  d-frd:s  le-rij-5-bo-kud-Ja-to  vwa-si  syr-la-pa:3-d9-drwat  ce-de-grd- 
Ja-to   k5-bjed-tu:r-a-til   e-til-ply-bo-kle-me-zod-votr-pe-i 


3.  Classroom  and  Conversational  Phrases 

[b5-3u:r       Good  morning,  everybody. 


Bon  jour,  tout  le  monde 

tul-m5:d] 
II  est  temps  de  commencer.  [il-e-tci 

d9-ko-ma-se] 
Est-ce  que  tout  le  monde  est  ici? 

[es-ka-tul-m5:d  e-ti-si] 
II  ne  manque  personne,  je  crois. 

[il-n9-ma:k-per-sDn  39-krwa] 
C'est  juste;  toute  la  classe  est  a 

l'heure  ce  matin.  [se-3yst  tut-la- 

kla:s-e-ta-loe:r  s9-ma-te] 
Ouvrez   (fermez)   vos    livres,    s'il 

vous  plait.  [u-vre(fer-me)-vo-li:vr 

sil-vu-ple] 
Quelle  est  la  lecon  pour  aujour- 

d'hui?  Quelle  page?  [kel-e-lal-so 

pu:r-o-3ur-dqi   kel  pa:3] 
Nous    sommes   reste's   hier  a  la 

page  douze.    [nu-SDm-res-te-i-e:r 

a-la-pa:3-duz] 
Combien    de    lignes    lisons-nous? 

[k5-bjed-lip  li-z5-nu] 
Jusqu'au  bas  de  la  page  de  droite, 

n'est-ce-pas  ?  [3ys-ko-bad-la-pa:3- 

d9-drwat  nes-pa] 


//  is  time  to  begin. 

Is  everybody  present  ? 

Nobody  is  missing,  I  think. 

That  \?  right,  the  whole  class  is 
on  tune  this  morning. 

Open  {close)  your  books,  if  you 
please. 

What  is  the  lesson  for  today  ? 
What  page  ? 

We  stopped  yesterday  at  page  12. 

How  many  lines  do  we  read? 

To   the  foot   of  the   right-hand 
page,  don't  we  f 


APPENDIX 


423 


Y  a-t-il  des  questions  sur  la  lecon 

du    jour?     [i-a-til-de-kes-tj5  syr- 

lal-s3-dy-3u:r] 
Oui,  monsieur;  il  y  a  une  chose 

qui    m'intrigue.    [wim-sjo   il-ja- 

yn-jo:s  ki-me-tri:g] 
Veuillez  eclaircir  ce  point  pour  nous. 

[vce-je-e-kler-si:r  sa-pwe-pu:r-nu] 
Levez-vous,  maintenant,  et  pronon- 

cez  le  modele.    [ta-ve-vu-met-na 

e-pro-nD-sel-mo-del] 
Continuez  ;  traduisez-le  en  anglais. 

[k5-ti-nqe   tra-dqi-ze-ta  a-na-gle] 
Comprenez-vous   tous    les    mots? 

[k5-pr3-ne-vu  tu-le-mo] 
ficoutez,  et  re'pe'tez-les  apres  moi. 

[e-ku-te  e-re-pe-te-le  a-pre-mwa] 
Pardon ;  vous  lisez  trop  vite ;   je 

ne  puis  vous  suivre.  [par-d5  vu- 

li-ze-trD-vit   33n-pqi  vu-sqi:vr] 
Eh  bien,  je  vais  le  relire ;  et  cette 

fois  plus  lentement.  [e-bje  33-vel- 

ra-liir  e-set-fwa  ply-la:t-ma] 
C'est  assez ;  asseyez-vous.  [se-ta-se 

a-se-je-vu] 
Allez    au    tableau    et    e*crivez    le 

resume,     [a-le-zo-ta-blo   e-e-kri- 

vel-re-zy-me] 
Faites  attention  aux  accents,   [fet- 

za-ta-sj5  o-zak-sa] 
N'y  a-t-il  pas  encore  quelque  chose 

a     corriger  ?     [nja-til-pa-zd-ko:r 

kelk-^o:z-a-ko-ri-3e] 
Cela  suffit;  c'est  tres  bien.    [sla- 

sy-fi   se-tre-bje]. 
Ramassez  les  devoirs  et  mettez-les 

sur  le  bureau.  [ra-ma-se-led-vwa:r 

e-me-te-le  syrl-by-ro] 


Are  there  any  questions  on  the 
lesson  of  the  day  f 

Yes,  sir;  there  is  one  thing  that 
puzzles  me. 

Please  clear  up  this  point  for  us. 

Rise,   now,    and  pronounce    the 
Model. 

Go  on;  translate  it  into  English. 

Do  you  understand  all  the  words  ? 

Listen  and  repeat  them  after  me. 

Pardon,  you  read  too  fast ;    I 
cannot  follow  you. 

Very  well,  I  will  read  it  again, 
and  this  time  more  slowly. 

That  \r  enough;  sit  down. 

Go  to  the  board  and  write  the 
Rdsumi. 

Pay  attention  to  the  accents. 

Isn't  there  something  else  to  cor- 
rect ? 

That  is  sufficient;  it  \r  very  good. 

Pick  up  the  papers  and  put  them 
on  the  desk. 


424 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Enfin  lisez  votre  exercice  k  haute 

voix.  [a-fe  li-ze-votr-eg-zer-sis  a- 

ot-vwa] 
Vous  faites  des  progres  sensibles. 

[vu-fet  de-pro-gre-sa-sibl] 
Prenez   la   lecon    prochaine  pour 

demain.     [pra-ne    lal-s5  pro-jen 

purrd-me] 
fitudiez  -bien  la  grammaire.    [e-ty- 

dje-bje  la-gra-me:r] 
ficrivez  les  verbes.  [e-kri-ve-le-verb] 
Nous  servons-nous  d'un  crayon? 

[nu-ser-v5-nu  doe-kr£-j5] 
Comme  vous  voulez.  Qa.  m'est  e*gal. 

[kom-vu-vu-le   sa-me-te-gal] 
La  classe  est  finie.  [la-kla:s-e-fl-ni] 


Finally,  read  your  exercise  aloud. 


You  are  making  noticeable  Prog- 
ress. 

Take  the  next  lesson  for  to- 
morrow. 

Study  the  gra?nmar  well. 

Write  the  verbs. 
Shall  we  use  a  pencil  ? 

As  you  wish;  it  V  the  same  to 

me. 
The  class  is  dismissed. 


Bonsoir,  monsieur  (madame,  Made- 
moiselle Amiel).  [b5-swa:r  ma-sjo 
(ma-dam,  mad-mwa-zel-a-mjel)] 

Comment  vous  portez-vous?  [ko- 
ma-vu-por-te-vu] 

Je  me  parte  bien,  merci ;  et  vous  ? 
[33m-port-bje  mer-si   e-vu] 

Permettez-moi  de  vous  debarrasser 
de  votre  pardessus.  [per-me-te- 
mwa  da-vu-de-ba-ra-se  ds-votr- 
pard-sy] 

Vous  etes  bien  aimable,  mais  j'ai 
peur  de  vous  ddranger.  [vu-ze:t- 
bj£-ne-ma:bl  me-je-poe:r  da-vu-de- 
ra-3e] 

Pas  du  tout;  ne  vous  genez  pas. 
[pa-dy-tu    n3-vu-3e-ne-pa] 

Permettez-moi  de  vous  presenter 
a  mon  ami.  [per-me-te-mwa  da- 
vu-pre-za-te  a-mo-na-mi] 


Good  evening,  sir  (madam,  Miss 
Amiel). 

How  do  you  do  ? 

I  am  well,  thank  you  ;  and  you  ? 

Allow  me  to  take  your  overcoat. 


You   are   very  kind,   but  I  am 
afraid  it  will  trouble  you. 


Not   at  all;    make  yourself  at 

ho7ne. 
Allow  ?ne  to  introduce  you  to  my 

friend. 


APPENDIX 


425 


Avec  plaisir ;  charme  de  f aire  votre 

connaissance.  [a-vek-ple-zi:r  jar- 

med-fe:r-VDtr-ko-ne-sa:s] 
Plait-il  ?  Je  n'ai  pas  compris.  [pie- 
til   33-ne-pa-k5-pri] 
Parlez-vous   f  rancais  ?     [par-le-vu- 

fra-se] 
Un  peu  seulement ;  je  suis  anglais. 

[oe-po  soel-ma   39-sqi-za-c(le] 
Je  vous  demande  pardon.  [33-vud- 

ma:d-par-d5] 
Ce  n'est  rien  ;  il  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi. 

[sne-rje  il-nja-pad-kwa] 
II  est  tard  ;  il  me  faut  partir.   [il-e- 

ta:r   il-m3-fo-par-ti:r] 
Mes  compliments  a  madame  votre 

mere.    [me-k5-pli-ma  a-ma-dam- 

votr-me:r] 
Bien   des   choses   de   ma   part  a 

votre  frere.    [bje-de-jo:z  da-ma- 

pa:r  a-votr-fre:r] 
Au  revoir;  a  demain  matin,    [or- 

vwa:r  ad-mg-ma-te] 


With  pleasure;  delighted  to  ?nake 
your  acquaintance. 

Pardon.    I  didn't  understand. 

Do  you  speak  French  ? 

Only  a  little ;  I  am  English. 

I  beg  your  pardon. 

That  '.$■  nothing;  don't  mention  it. 

It  is  late  ;  I  must  go. 

Give  my  regards  to  your  mother. 

My  best  wishes  to  your  brother. 

Good-by ;  see  you  tomorrow  morn- 
ing. 


4.  LA  MARSEILLAISE 

Allons,  enfants  de  la  patrie, 
Le  jour  de  gloire  est  arrive  ! 
Contre  nous  de  la  tyrannie 
L'etendard  sanglant  est  leve. 
Entendez-vous  dans  les  campagnes 
Mugir  ces  feroces  soldats  ? 
lis  viennent  jusque  dans  nos  bras 
figorger  nos  flls,  nos  compagnes ! 
Aux  armes,  citoyens  !  formez  vos  bataillons ! 
Marchons !    Marchons ! 
Qu'un  sang  impur  abreuve  nos  sillons  ! 


426  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

Amour  sacre  de  la  patrie, 
Conduis,  soutiens  nos  bras  vengeurs  ! 
Liberte  !    Liberte  cherie  ! 
Combats  avec  tes  def enseurs ! 
Sous  nos  drapeaux,  que  la  victoire 
Accoure  a  nos  males  accents  ! 
Que  tes  ennemis  expirants 
Voient  ton  triomphe,  et  notre  gloire ! 
Aux  armes  {etc.,  repeated  from  first  stanza) 

Rouget  de  Lisle 

la-mar-se-je:z 

a-15-za-fa  da-la-pa-tri-a 
l3-3u:r-d3-glwa:r  e-ta-ri-ve 
k5-tr3-nu  d3-la-ti-ra-ni-3 
le-td-da:  r-sa-gla-te-ta-ve 
a-ta-de-vu  da-le-ka-pa-ns 
my-giir  se-fe-ro-sa-sol-da 
il-vje-na  3ys-k3-da-no-bra 
e-gor-3e-no-fis  no-k5-pa-p9 
o-zar-m9  si-twa-je   for-me  vo-ba-ta-j5 
mar-j5    mar-jo 
kce-sa-ke-py:r  a-brce:-vo-no-si-j5 

a-mu :  r-sa-kre  do-la-pa-tri-9 
k5-dqi  su-tje  no-bra- va-3ce:r 
li-ber-te   li-ber-te-Je-ri-9 
k5-ba-za-vek-te-de-fa-sce:r 
su-no-dra-po  ko-la-vik-twa-ra 
a-ku:r  a-no-ma-b-zak-sa 
ko-te-ze-no-mi-zek-spi-ra 
vwa-t5-tri-5:f  e-no-tro-glwai-ra 
o-zar-ma  (etc.) 


ROUGET  DE  LISLE 

L'hymne  connu  sous  le  nom  de  Marseillaise  fut  ecrit,  paroles  et  musique, 
en  1792,  par  Rouget  de  Lisle,  officier  du  genie  a  Strasbourg.  La  musique 
et  les  paroles  entrainantes  de  cet  hymne,  d'abord  appele  Chant  de  guerre 
de  Parmee  du  Rhin,  en  firent  le  cri  de  ralliement  des  revolutionnaires 
francais  et,  chante  a  Paris  par  un  regiment  de  Marseille  a  l'attaque  sur  les 
Tuileries,  prit  desormais  le  nom  de  Marseillaise.  Depuis  lors,  non  seule- 
ment  les  Francais  mais  d'autres  peuples  y  ont  trouve  l'expression  de 
leurs  penchants  pour  la  liberte.  Pendant  la  derniere  guerre,  l'hymne  est 
devenu  bien  familier  aux  Americains  et  les  a  enthousiasmes  a  un  point 
inconnu  jusqu'alors 


428  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

III.  GENDER  OF  NOUNS 

No  rules  can  be  given  to  determine  the  gender  of  all  French 
nouns.  While  it  must  be  understood  that  there  are  exceptions  to 
each  of  them,  the  following  rules  cover  the  great  majority  of  cases  : 

A.  Gender  determined  by  derivation.    See  Sec.  71,  Note  2. 

B.  Gender  determined  by  meaning. 

1.  Nouns  are  usually  masculine  that  are  the  names  of 

(a)  Males  (human  and  animal). 

(b)  Trees,  shrubs,  and  metals. 

(c)  Seasons,  months,  days,  and  the  points  of  the  compass. 

Infinitives  and  other  parts  of  speech  when  used  as  nouns  are 
masculine. 

2.  Nouns  are  usually  feminine  that  are  the  names  of 

{a)  Females  (human  and  animal). 

(p)  Fruits  and  flowers. 

(c)  Countries,  cities,  and  rivers,  ending  in  mute  e. 

C.  Gender  determined  by  ending.    See  Sec.  7 1 ,  Note  1 . 
When  the  gender  is  not  determined  by  the  meaning,  the  fol- 
lowing rules  and  exceptions  hold  very  generally : 

1.  Nouns  are  masculine  when  they  do  not  end  in  mute  e. 

Exceptions.  Nouns  ending  in  ion,  son,  te\  and  tie\  and  abstract 
nouns  in  eur,  are  feminine. 

2.  Nouns  are  feminine  when  they  end  in  mute  e  (especially  if 
preceded  by  a  double  consonant  or  a  vowel). 

Exceptions.  Nouns  ending  in  acle,  age,  asme,  isme,  ege,  erne,  tere, 
are  masculine. 

D.  Gender  of  compound  nouns. 

The  gender  of  compound  nouns  is  determined  as  follows : 
1.   If  they  consist  of  two  nouns,  they  have  the  gender  of  the 
first  part.    Ex.,  le  chou-fleur,  the  cauliflower. 


APPENDIX  429 

2.  If  they  consist  of  a  noun  and  another  part  of  speech,  they 
have  the  gender  of  the  noun,  except  compounds  of  a  noun  and  a 
verb,  which  are  always  masculine.  Ex.,  le  sous-sol,  the  basement; 
le  porte-manteau,  the  portmanteau. 

3.  If  they  consist  of  two  words  of  which  neither  is  a  noun, 
they  are  masculine.    Ex.,  le  passe-partout,  the  master-key. 

IV.  PLURAL  OF  NOUNS 
The  plural  of  nouns  has  been  treated  in  Sees.  76  and  93. 

A.  The  following  nouns  present  special  irregularities : 

aieul     |aieuls  grandfathers 

\  a'ieux  ancestors 

Detail .     bestiaux  cattle 

ciel       /  C*e*S  artificial  skies,  climates 

Lcieux  skies,  heavens 
..       J  ceils  (in  compound  words) 

lyeux  eyes 

travail  I travails  <#«'*/  rePorts 

\  travaux  works 

B.  The  plural  of  compound  nouns  is  formed  as  follows : 

1.  If  they  consist  of  two  nouns,  or  a  noun  and  an  adjective, 
both  parts  take  the  plural  form.  Ex.,  le  chou-fleur,  the  cauliflower  \ 
pi.  choux-fleurs. 

2.  If  they  consist  of  two  nouns  separated  by  a  preposition,  the 
first  noun  alone  takes  the  plural  form.  Ex.,  l'arc-en-ciel,  the  rain- 
bow ;  pi.  arcs-en-ciel. 

3.  If  they  consist  of  a  noun  and  some  other  part  of  speech,  not 
an  adjective,  the  noun  alone  takes  the  plural  form.  Ex.,  le  sous- 
sol,  the  basement ;  pi.  sous-sols. 

Note.  Most  compound  nouns  formed  by  joining  a  shortened  form 
of  a  verb  with  a  following  noun  that  is  the  object  of  the  verb  may  be 
used  in  the  plural  without  change.  Ex.,  le  coupe-tete,  the  headsman ; 
pi.  coupe-tete  or  coupe-tetes. 


430  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

4.  If  they  consist  of  two  words,  neither  of  which  is  a  noun, 
the  plural  is  like  the  singular.  Ex.,  le  passe-partout,  the  master- 
key  ;  pi.  passe-partout. 

V.  FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS 
The  formation  of  adverbs  has  been  treated  in  Sec.  109. 

A.  When  the  masculine  of  an  adjective  ends  in  a  vowel,  the 
corresponding  adverb  is  formed  by  adding  ment  to  the  masculine. 
Ex.,  joli,  pretty ;  joliment,  prettily. 

B.  When  the  masculine  of  an  adjective  ends  in  a  consonant, 
the  corresponding  adverb  is  formed  by  adding  ment  to  the  femi- 
nine.   Ex.,  doux,  sweet  \  doucement,  sweetly. 

C.  The  following  irregularities  must  be  noted : 

1.  Some  adjectives  change  a  mute  e  to  e*  on  the  addition  of 
the  ending  ment.  The  more  common  of  these  are  aveugle,  com- 
mode, commun,  conforme,  confus,  6norme,  obscur,  precis,  profond, 
uniforme.    Ex.,  aveugle,  blind  \  aveugl£ment,  blindly. 

2.  When  the  masculine  of  an  adjective  ends  in  ant  or  ent,  these 
endings  are  changed  to  am  and  em  respectively  before  the  addi- 
tion of  ment.    Ex.,  m&hant,  wicked;  m&hamment,  wickedly. 

3.  Adjectives  having  two  forms  in  the  masculine  singular  form 
the  adverb  by  adding  ment  to  the  feminine.  Ex.,  fou,  mad; 
follement,  madly. 

4.  The  following  special  irregularities  deserve  notice : 

Adjective  Adverb 

bref  brievement 

gentil  gentiment 

impuni  impune'ment 

traitre  traitreusement 


APPENDIX 


43r 


•fans 

«  s 

to     to 

8  8 

(0 

c 
o 

"co 

4->       CO 

<rt     rt 

N 
S 

73 

a 

C 

S 

CO 

9 

to 

co 

.22 

CO 

c/3 

73 

n 

c 
.2 

*co 

<fcS  .22 

— 
e 

CO 
CO 

to 

co     to 

.22  .22 

CO 

C 

.2 

*CO 
—        CO 

N 
CO 

a 

C 
CO 
CO 

.22 

Tans 

co 

C 

V  -2 

CO       CO 

.22  .22 

M 

co 

•4-* 

c 

•SHH<£ 

4>      S 

CO 

2 

•  .2 

M 

#cu 

g 

cu 

1 

9 

CO 
C/3 

CO 
CO 
CO 

4)     $ 

CO 

9 
a)  .2 

•4-» 

c 

CO 

CO 

•awi 

C 

o 

4) 

3 
0 

N 
CO 

a 

CO 

■ 

a 

CO 

§ 

M 

co 

ivnoix 

-IdNCQ 

to     CO 

•3  -a 

co    a> 

CO 

■M        C 

CS     .«ji 

v    <o 

N 

• 

B 

ki 

.22 

"3 

CO 

re   .i-i 
.55    -J3 

4>> 

c 

CO 

'? 

1- 

co     to 

're  "c3 

co 
re  .2 

N 

C 

JO 

£ 

anaxaj 

cjJ     rt 
CO    co 

CO 

a 

CJ     o 

CO 

co 

9 

co 

*c3 

co 

a 

CO 

C 

rt   9 

0 

4-> 

c 
o 

•a  a 

co 

C 
re     O 

0) 

4-> 

c 
9 

•ana 

co 

I 

co 

-4-» 

co 

CO 

■ 

C 

CO 
CO 

CO 

c 

xsv<i 

M       CO 

rt     re 

§ 

re   <rt 

ol 

,1) 

.22 

.« 

■JJ  J 

U 

CO 

CO        CO 

*,   6 

4} 

1 

CO 

C 

iDHH 

.22 

re 

+*    c 

N 

0) 

-MHdWI 

CO 

c 

01 

"?  •? 

* 

d 

to 

a 

N 

CO 

22    22 
're  "re 

(4 

aJ     re 

•«  .« 

1) 

rt 

CO 

■A 

.22  .22 

Jj 

.22 

re  .2 

.- 

re 

CO 

c 

a 

XKHSHHcJ 

o 

S 

f 

•        f 

to 

4>      CO 

a 

V    o 

N 

c 

CO 

eg 

■a 

CO 

4J         CO 

CO 

a 

co 

a 

co     co 

1     o 

N 
CO 

CO 

•AHVrf 

-D 

0 

J-SVJ 

AHVJ 

c 

•saaj 

d 

re 

co 
■9 

■«-> 

a 

re 

HAIi 

u 

CO 

-INIJNJ 

co 

NOIXVO 

-nlN03 

h-l 

(-1 

432 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


VII.    REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS 


Rules  for  Formation 

Prin.  Parts 

The  Prin.  Parts  are  : 
Infinitive 
Present  Participle 
Past  Participle 
ist  Sing,  of  Pres.  Ind. 
i  st  Sing,  of  Past  Def. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Endings  of  Sing. : 

ess 
es                        s                         s 
e                          t                         - 

The  PI.  is  formed  by  omitting  the  ending  ant  of  the  Pres.  Part, 
and  adding  ons,  ez,  ent. 

Imperfect 
(Des.  Past) 

Omit  the  ending  ant  of  the  Pres.  Part,  and  add  ais,  ais,  ait, 
ions,  iez,  aient. 

Past  Def. 
{Narr.  Past) 
{Perfect) 

Endings : 

ai                             is                            is 
as                          is                          is 
a                          it                         it 
ames                    imes                    imes 
ates                      ites                      ites 
erent                     ifent                     irent 

Future 

Add  to  the  Inf.  (omitting  a  final  e) 
ai,  as,  a,  ons,  ez,  ont. 

Conditional 

Add  to  the  Inf.  (omitting  a  final  e) 
ais,  ais,  ait,  ions,  iez,  aient. 

Imperative 

Same  as  the  Pres.  Ind.  rst  Sing,  and  ist  and  2d  PI. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Omit  the  ending  ant  of  the  Pres.  Part,  and  add  e,  es,  e,  ions, 
iez,  ent. 

Imp.  Subj. 
{Past  Subj.) 

Omit  the  last  letter  of  the  ist  Sing.  Past.  Def.  and  add  sse,  sses, 
*t,  ssions,  ssiez,  ssent. 

APPENDIX 


433 


REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS 


ist  Conjugation 

ad  Conjugation 

3d  Conjugation 

parler 

finir 

vendre 

parlant 

finissant 

vendant 

parte" 

fini 

vendu 

je  parte 

je  finis 

je  vends 

je  parlai 

je  finis 

je  vendis 

je  parte 

je  finis 

je  vends 

tu  paries 

tu  finis 

tu  vends 

il  parle 

il  finit 

il  vend 

nous  parions 

nous  finissons 

nous  vendons 

vous  parle  z 

vous  finissez 

vous  vendez 

ils  parlent 

ils  finissent 

ils  vendent 

je  parlais 

je  finissais 

je  vendais 

tu  parlais 

tu  finissais 

tu  vendais 

il  parlait 

il  finissait 

il  vendait 

nous  parlions 

nous  finissions 

nous  vendions 

vous  parliez 

vous  finissiez 

vous  vendiez 

ils  parlaient 

Us  finissaient 

ils  vendaient 

je  parlai 

je  finis 

je  vendis 

tu  parlas 

tu  finis 

tu  vendis 

il  parla 

il  finit 

il  vendit 

nous  parlames 

nous  finimes 

nous  vendime's 

vous  parlates 

vous  finites 

vous  vendites 

ils  parlerent 

ils  finirent 

ils  vendirent 

je  parlerai 

je  finirai 

je  vendrai 

tu  parleras 

tu  finiras 

tu  vendras 

il  pariera 

il  finira 

il  vendra 

nous  parlerons 

nous  finirons 

nous  vendrons 

vous  parlerez 

vous  finirez 

vous  vendrez 

ils  parleront 

ils  finiront 

ils  vendront 

je  parlerais 

je  finirais 

je  vendrais 

tu  parlerais 

tu  finirais 

tu  vendrais 

il  parlerait 

il  finir&it 

il  vendrait 

nous  parlerions 

nous  finirions 

nous  vendrions 

vous  parleriez 

vous  finiriez 

vous  vendriez 

ils  parleraient 

ils  finiraient 

Us  vendraient 

parle 

finis 

vends 

parions 

finissons 

vendons 

parlez 

finissez 

vendez 

je  parte 

je  finisse 

je  vende 

tu  paries 

tu  finisses 

tu  vendes 

il  parte 

il  finisse 

U  vende 

nous  parlions 

nous  finissions 

nous  vendions 

vous  parliez 

vous  finissiez 

vous  vendiez 

ils  parlent 

ils  finissent 

ils  vendent 

je  parlasse 

je  finisse 

je  vendisse 

tu  parlasse  S 

tu  finisses 

tu  vendisses 

il  parlat 

il  finit 

il  vendit 

nous  parlassions 

nous  finissions 

nous  vendissions 

vous  parlassiez 

vous  finissiez 

vous  vendissiez 

ils  parlassent 

ils  finissent 

Us  vendissent 

434  ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


COMPOUND  TENSES 


I.  Perfect  Tenses.  The  perfect  tenses  of  a  verb  are  formed 
by  prefixing  to  its  past  participle  the  various  simple  tenses  of 
avoir,  "  to  have  "  (sometimes  etre,  "  to  be  ").  Avoir  and  etre, 
when  thus  used  in  the  formation  of  compound  tenses,  are 
called  auxiliaries.  Their  conjugation,  which  is  irregular,  is 
given  on  the  opposite  page.  The  perfect  conjugation  with 
both  auxiliaries,  together  with  the  tense-names,  is  given  in  full 
on  page  436. 

Note.  —  Eire,  instead  of  avoir,  is  used  as  the  auxiliary  in 
forming  the  perfect  tenses  of  the  following  intransitive  verbs 
denoting  motion  or  change  of  condition:  aller,  fiartir,  sortir, 
venir,  devenir,  revenir,  arriver,  entrer,  rester,  tomber,  naitre, 
mourir  (rarely  of  a  few  others)  ;  also  of  reflexive  verbs. 

II.  Passive  Voice.  The  passive  voice  of  a  verb  is  formed  by 
prefixing  to  its  past  participle  the  various  tenses,  simple  and 
perfect,  of  the  auxiliary  etre,  "to  be."  The  passive  conjuga- 
tion is  given  in  full  on  page  437. 

III.  Agreement  of  Past  Participle.  When  etre  is  the  auxil- 
iary, whether  in  the  perfect  or  in  the  passive  conjugation,  the 
past  participle  varies  like  an  adjective  to  agree  with  the  sub- 
ject in  number  and  gender.  It  then  adds  s  in  the  masculine 
plural,-  e  in  the  feminine  singular,  and  es  in  the  feminine 
plural. 

Note  i.  Past  participles  ending  in  s  are  alike  in  masculine 
singular  and  plural. 

Note  2.  In  ordinary  conjugation  it  may  be  assumed  that  the 
subject  pronouns  are  masculine.  In  the  plural,  however,  atten- 
tion must  always  (when  etre  is  the  auxiliary)  be  paid  to  the 
agreement  of  the  past  participle. 


APPENDIX 


435 


CONJl 


ION  OF  AUXILIARIES 


r 

avoir 

atre 

Prin.  Parts         \ 

ayant 
eu 

etant 

m 

fr1 

je  suis 

m 

j  eus 

je  fus 

7 

j'ai 
tu  as 

je  suis 
tu  es 

Pres.  Ind. 

ila 

il  est 

nous  avons 

nous  sommes 

vous  avez 

vous  etes 

P       :■ 

ils  ont 

ils  sont 

j'avais 

j'^tais 

tu  avais 

tu  etais 

Imperfect 

il  avait 
nous  avions 

il  etait 
nous  etions 

vous  aviez 

vous  ^tiez 

ils  avaient 

ils  etaient 

j'eus 

jefus 

tu  eus 

tu  fus 

Past  Def. 

il  eut 
nous  eumes 

ilfut 
nous  fumes 

vous  eutes 

vous  futes 

ils  eurent 

ils  furent 

j'aurai 

je  serai 

tu  auras 

tu  seras 

Future 

il  aura 

il  sera 

nous  aurons 

nous  serons 

vous  aurez 

vous  serez 

ik  auront 

ils  seront 

j'aurais 

je  serais 

tu  aurais 

tu  serais 

il  aurait 

il  serait 

Conditional 

nous  aurions 

nous  serions 

vous  auriez 

vous  seriez 

ils  auraient 

ils  seraient 

aie        • 

sois 

Imperative 

ayons 

soyons 

ayez               , 

soyez 

j'aie 

je  sois 

tu  aies 

tu  sois 

Pres.  Suij. 

il  ait 

il  soit 

nous  ayons 

nous  soyons 

vous  ayez 

vous  soyez 

ils  aient 

ils  soient 

j'eusse 

je  fusse 

tu  eusses 

tu  fusses 

Imp.  Subj. 

ileut 

ilfut 

nous  eussions 

nous  f ussions 

vous  eussiez 

vous  fussiez 

ils  eussent 

ils  f  ussent 

436 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


PERFECT  TENSES 


With  avoir 

With  etre 

Prin.  Parts 
The  first  two  are  called 
respectively  Perf.  Inf. 
and  Perf.  Part. 

avoir  sauve" 
ayant  sauve" 

j'ai  sauve* 
j'eus  sauve* 

etre  alle" 
etant  alle" 

je  suis  alle" 
]e  fus  alle" 

Past  Indef. 
(Per/.  Ind.) 
Pres.  Ind.  of  auxiliary  + 
Past  Part. 

j'ai  sauve" 
tu  as  sauve* 
il  a  sauve" 
nous  avons  sauve" 
vous  avez  sauve" 
ils  ont  sauve 

je  suis  alle" 

tu  es  alle 

il  est  alle" 

nous  sommes  altes 

vous  etes  allds 

ils  sont  alles 

Plufierf  Ind. 
Imperfect  of  auxiliary  + 
Past  Part. 

j'avais  sauve" 
tu  avais  sauve 
il  avait  sauve" 
nous  avions  sauve" 
vous  aviez  sauve" 
ils  avaient  sauve" 

j'^tais  alle" 
tu  &ais  alle" 
il  &ait  alle" 
nous  ^tions  alles 
vous  &iez  alles 
ils  etaient  alles 

Past  A  nterior 
Past  Def.  of  auxiliary  + 
Past  Part. 

j'eus  sauve" 
tu  eus  sauve* 
il  eut  sauve" 
nous  eflmes  sauve" 
vous  elites  sauve" 
ils  eurent  sauve" 

je  fus  alle" 
tu  fus  alle" 
il  fut  all* 
nous  fumes  altes 
vous  fGtes  all^s 
ils  furent  alles 

Put.  Perf. 
Fut.  of  auxiliary  +  Past 
Part. 

j'aurai  sauve 
tu  auras  sauve" 
il  aura  sauve" 
nous  aurons  sauve" 
vous  aurez  sauve" 
ils  auront  sauve" 

je  serai  alle" 
tu  seras  alle" 
il  sera  alle" 
nous  serons  allds 
vous  serez  altes 
ils  seront  all£s 

Cond.  Perf. 
Cond.  of  auxiliary  +  Past 
Part. 

j'aurais  sauve" 
tu  aurais  sauve" 
il  aurait  sauve" 
nous  aurions  sauve" 
vous  auriez  sauve" 
ils  auraient  sauve" 

je  serais  alle" 
tu  serais  alle" 
il  serait  alle" 
nous  serions  altes 
vous  seriez  all£s 
ils  seraient  all£s 

Imperative 

.    wanting 

wanting 

Perf  Subj. 
Pres.  Subj.  of  auxiliary 
+  Past  Part. 

j'aie  sauve" 
tu  aies  sauve* 
il  ait  sauve" 
nous  ayons  sauve" 
vous  ayez  sauve" 
ils  aient  sauve 

je  sois  alle" 

tu  sois  alle" 

il  soit  alle" 

nous  soyons  allls 

vous  soyez  allds 

ils  soient  alles 

Pluperf.  Subj. 
Imp.   Subj.  of  auxiliary 
+  Past  Part. 

j'eusse  sauve" 
tu  eusses  sauve" 
il  eut  sauve" 
nous  eussions  sauve" 
vous  eussiez  sauve" 
ils  eussent  sauve 

je  fusse  alle" 
tu  fusses  alle" 
il  f  ut  all* 

nous  fussions  alles 
vous  f ussiez  alles 
ils  f  ussent  alles 

APPExNDIX 


437 


PASSIVE  VOICE 


Simple  Tenses 

Perfect  Tenses 

Prin.  Paris 

e'tre  sauve* 
eUnt  sauve" 

je  suis  sauve" 
je  fus  sauve 

Prin.  Parts 

avoir  6t6  sauve 
ayant  ete  sauve" 

j'ai  &e"  sauve" 
j'eus  6t6  sauve* 

Pres.  Ind. 

je  suis  sauve" 

tu  es  sauve 

il  est  sauve 

nous  sommes  sauves 

vous  etes  sauves 

ils  sont  sauves 

Past  Indef. 

j'ai  iti  sauv£ 

tu  as  &e"  sauve" 

il  a  6t6  sauve" 

nous  avons  e^e"  sauves 

vous  avez  ete  sauves 

ils  ont  ete  sauves 

Imperfect 

j'e"tais  sauv£ 

tu  etais  sauve 
il  ^tait  sauv^ 
nous  etions  sauves 
vous  &iez  sauves 
ils  etaient  sauves 

Pluperf.Ind. 

j'avais  4te  sauve" 
tu  avais  6te  sauve" 
il  avait  ete  sauve 
nous  avions  ete  sauves 
vous  aviez  iti  sauves 
ils  avaient  it6  sauves 

Past  Def 

je  fus  sauve" 

tu  fus  sauve 

il  fut  sauve 

nous  f  times  sauves 

vous  f Cites  sauves 

ils  f urent  sauves 

Past 
A  nterior 

j'eus  6li  sauve" 
tu  eus  &l€  sauve" 

il  eut  ete"  sauve 
nous  eumes  ete  sauves 
vous  eutes  6t6  sauves 
ils  eurent  £t£  sauves 

Future 

je  serai  sauve" 

tu  seras  sauve 
il  sera  sauve" 
nous  serons  sauves 
vous  serez  sauves 
ils  seront  sauves 

Fut.  Per/. 

j'aurai  ete  sauve" 
tu  auras  e"te"  sauve 
il  aura  ete  sauve 
nous  aurons  ete  sauves 
vous  aurez  6t6  sauves 
ils  auront  ete  sauves 

Conditional 

je  serais  sauve" 
tu  serais  sauve 
il  serait  sauve 
nous  serions  sauves 
vous  seriez  sauves 
ils  seraient  sauves 

Cond.  Per/. 

j'aurais  e"te"  sauve" 
tu  aurais  ete  sauve 
il  aurait  6t&  sauve" 
nous  aurions  ete"  sauves 
vous  auriez  6t6  sauves 
ils  auraient  iti  sauves 

Imperative 

sois  sauve" 
soyons  sauves 
soyez  sauves 

Imperative 

wanting 

Pres.  Subj. 

je  sois  sauve" 

tu  sois  sauve 

il  soit  sauve 

nous  soyons  sauves 

vous  soyez  sauves 

ils  soient  sauves 

Per/.  Subj. 

j'aie  6ti  sauve" 
tu  aies  ete  sauve 
il  ait  ete  sauve 
nous  ayons  6te  sauves 
vous  ayez  6t6  sauves 
ils  aient  ili  sauves 

Imp.  Subj. 

je  fusse  sauve" 

tu  fusses  sauve" 

il  fut  sauve 

nous  fussions  sauves 

vous  f ussiez  sauves 

ils  f  ussent  sauves 

Pluperf. 
Subj. 

j'eusse  ete"  sauve" 

tu  eusses  ete  sauve" 

il  eut  ete  sauve 

nous  eussions  ete  sauves 

vous  eussiez  ete  sauves 

ils  eussent  ete  sauves 

438 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


ORTHOGRAPHIC   IRREGULARITIES  OF  THE  FIRST 
CONJUGATION 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Def . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Placer 

place 

placais 

placai 

to  place 

places 

placais 

etc. 

placant 

place 

placait 

placerent  (3d  PL) 

place" 

placons 

placions 

place 

placez 

placiez 

placasse 

placai 

placent 

placaient 

etc. 

Manger 

mange 

mangeais 

mangeai 

to  eat 

manges 

mangeais 

etc. 

mangeant 

mange 

mangeait 

mangerent  (3d  PI.) 

mange" 

mangeons 

mangions 

mange 

mangez 

mangiez 

mangeasse 

mangeai 

mangent 

mangeaient 

etc. 

Nettoyer 
to  clean 

nettoie 

nettoyais 

nettoyai 

nettoies 

etc. 

etc. 

nettoyant 

nettoie 

nettoye" 

nettoyons 

nettoyasse 

nettoie 

nettoyez 

etc. 

nettoyai 

nettoient 

Payer 

paie 

payais 

payai 

to  pay 

paies 

etc. 

etc. 

payant 

paie 

pay<5 

payons 

payasse 

paie 

payez 

etc. 

payai 

paient 

Mener 

mene 

menais 

menai 

to  lead 

menes 

etc. 

etc. 

menant     * 

mene 

mene" 

menons 

menasse 

mene 

menez 

etc. 

menai    . 

menent 

Appeler 

appelle 

appelais 

appelai 

to  caN 

appelles 

etc. 

etc. 

appelant 

appelle 

appele 

appelons 

appelasse 

appelle 

appelez 

etc. 

appelai 

appellent 

Jeter 

jette 

jetais 

jetai 

to  throw 

jettes 

etc. 

etc. 

ietant 

jette 

jete" 

jetons 

jetasse 

]ette 

letez 

etc. 

jetai 

jettent 

Cdder 

cede 

oklais 

ce"dai 

to  yield 

cedes 

etc 

etc. 

c£dant 

cede 

c€d6 

cedons 

ce"dasse 

cede 

cidez 

etc. 

c^dai 

cedent 

APPENDIX 


439 


ORTHOGRAPHIC   IRREGULARITIES   OF  THE  FIRST 
CONJUGATION 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

placerai 

place 

Placer  is  a  model  of  verbs  ending  in 

etc. 

place 

etc. 

cer,  in  which  C  takes  a  cedilla 
before  a  and  0,  to  show  that  it 

placerais 

placons 

remains  soft. 

etc. 

placez 

mangerai 

mange 

Manger  is  a  model  of  verbs  ending 

»    etc. 

mange 

etc. 

in  ger,  in  which  e  is  added  before 
a  and  0,  to  show  that  the  g  remains 

mangerais 

mangeons 

soft. 

etc. 

mangez 

nettoierai 

nettoie 

Similarly  all  verbs  ending  in  oyer 

etc. 

nettoie 

nettoies 

and  uyer  change  y  to  i  before  an 
ending  or  a  syllable  whose  vowel 

nettoie 

nettoierais 

nettoyons 

nettoyions 

is  a  mute  e. 

etc. 

nettoyez 

nettoyiez 
nettoient 

paierai 

paie 

Similarly  all  verbs  ending  in  ayer 

etc. 

paie 

paies 

generally  change  y  to  i  before  an 

paie 

ending  or  a  syllable  whose  vowel  is 
a  mute  e.     Sometimes,  especially 

paierais 

payons 

payions 

etc. 

payez 

payiez 

in  older  French,  the  y  is  retained 

paient 

throughout. 

menerai 

mene 

Similarly  all  verbs  ending  in  e-con- 

etc. 

mene 

menes 

sonant-er  (except  those  ending  in 
eler  and  eter)  change  e  to  e  before 

mene 

menerais 

menons 

menions 

an   ending   or  a   syllable  whose 

etc. 

menez 

meniez 
menent 

vowel  is  a  mute  e. 

appellerai 

appelle 

Similarly  most  verbs  ending  in  eler 

etc. 

appelle 

appellts 

double  the  1  before  an  ending  or  a 

appelle 

syllable  whose  vowel  is  a  mute  e. 

appellerais 

appelons 

appelions 

Geler,  modeler,  and  peler  (which 

etc. 

appelez 

appeliez 

are  conjugated  like    mener)  are 

appellent 

the  commonest  exceptions. 

jetterai 

jette 

Similarly  most  verbs  ending  in  eter 

etc. 

jette 

jettes 

double  the  t  before  an  ending  or 

jette 
jetions 

a  syllable  whose  vowel  is  a  mute 

jetterais 

jetons 

e.    Acheter  (which  is  conjugated 

etc. 

jetez 

letiez 

like  mener)  is  the  commonest  ex- 

]ettent 

ception. 

ce"derai 

cede 

cede 

Similarly  all  verbs  ending  in  e-con- 

etc. 

cedes 

sonant  (or  consonants)-er,  change 

cede 

6  to  e  before  an   ending  whose 

ce*derais 

c^dons 

c^dions 

vowel  is  a  mute  e.     No  change 

etc. 

cedez 

cediez 
cedent 

occurs  here  in  Fut.  and  Cond. 

440 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


VIII.  IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Def . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Aller 

vais 

allai  s 

allai 

to  go 

vas 

etc. 

etc. 

allant 

va 

alle- 

allons 

allasse 

vais 

allez 

etc. 

allai 

vont 

Envoyer 

envoie 

envoyais 

envoyai 

to  send 

envoies 

etc. 

etc. 

envoyant 

envoie 

envoye- 

envoyons 

envoyasse 

envoie 

envoyez 

etc. 

envoyai 

envoient 

Acquerir 

acquiers 

acqudrais 

acquis 

to  acquire 

acquiers 

etc. 

etc. 

acqueVant 

acquiert 

acquis 

acquerons 

acquisse 

acquiers 

acque"rez 

etc. 

acquis 

acquierent 

Assaillir 

assaille 

assaillais 

assaillis 

to  assail 

assailles 

etc. 

etc. 

assaillant 

assaille 

• 

assailli 

assaillons 

assaillisse 

assaille 

assaillez 

etc. 

assaillis 

assaillent 

Bouillir 

bous 

bouillais 

bouillis 

to  boil 

bous 

etc. 

etc. 

bouillant 

bout 

bouilli 

bouillons 

bouillisse 

bous 

bouillez 

etc. 

bouillis 

bouillent 

Courir 

cours 

courais 

courus 

to  run 

cours 

etc. 

etc. 

courant 

court 

couru 

courons 

courusse 

cours 

courez 

etc. 

courus 

courent 

Cueillir 

cueille 

cueillais 

cueillis 

to  gather 
cueillant 

cueilles 

etc. 

etc. 

cueille 

cueilli 

cueillons 

cueillisse 

cueille 

cueillez 

etc. 

cueillis 

cueillent 

Dormir 

dors 

dormais 

dormis 

to  sleep 

dors 

etc. 

etc. 

dormant 

dort 

dormi 

dormons 

dormisse 

dors 

dormez 

etc. 

dormis 

dorment 

APPENDIX 


441 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

irai 
etc. 

irais 
etc. 

va 

allons 
allez 

aille 

ailles 

aille 

allions 

alliez 

aillent 

Forms  its    perfect 
tenses  with  etre. 

enverrai 
etc. 

enverrais 
etc. 

envoie 

envoyons 
envoyez 

envoie 

envoies 

envoie 

envoyions 

envoyiez 

envoient 

Similarly  renvoyer. 

acquerrai 
etc. 

acquerrais 
etc. 

acquiers 

acquerons 
acquerez 

acquiere 

acquieres 

acquiere 

acquerions 

acqueriez 

acquierent 

Similarly  all  verbs 
ending  in  quenr . 

assaillirai 
etc. 

assaillirais 
etc. 

assaille 

assaillons 
assaillez 

assaille 
etc. 

Similarly  tressaillir. 

bouillirai 
etc. 

bouillirais 
etc. 

bous 

bouillons 
bouillez 

bouille 
etc. 

courrai 
etc. 

courrais 
etc. 

cours 

courons 
courez 

coure 
etc. 

Similarly  parcourir 
and    other  com- 
pounds. 

cueillerai 
etc. 

cueillerais 
etc. 

cueille 

cueillons 
cueillez 

cueille 
etc. 

Similarly  recueillir 
and  accueillir . 

dormirai 
etc. 

dormiraia 
etc. 

dors 

dormons 
dormez 

dorme 
etc. 

Similarly  endormir 
and   other   com- 
pounds. 

442 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Def . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Faillir 

to  fail 
faillant 
failli 
faux 
faillis 

faux 

faux 

faut 

faillons 

faillez 

faillent 

faillais 
etc. 

faillis 
etc. 

faillisse 
etc. 

Fuir 

to  flee 
fuyant 
fui 
fuis 
fuis 

fuis 

fuis 

fuit 

fuyons 

fuyez 

fuient 

fuyais 
etc. 

fuis 
etc. 

fuisse 
etc. 

Hair 

to  hate 
hafesant 
hai 
hais 
hais 

hais 

hais 

hait 

haissons 

hai'ssez 

haissent 

hai'ssais 
etc. 

hais 
etc. 

hai'sse 
etc. 

Mourir 
to  die 
mourant 
mort 
meurs 
mourus 

meurs 

meurs 

meurt 

mourons 

mourez 

meurent 

mourais 
etc. 

mourus 
etc. 

mourusse 
etc. 

Offrir 

to  offer 
off  rant 
offert 
offre 
offris 

offre 

offres 

offre 

offrons 

offrez 

offrent 

offrais 
etc. 

offris 
etc. 

offrisse 
etc. 

Ouvrir 

to  open 
ouvrant 
ouvert 
ouvre 
ouvris 

ouvre 

ouvres 

ouvre 

ouvrons 

ouvrez 

ouvrent 

ouvrais 
etc. 

ouvris 
etc. 

ouvrisse 
etc. 

Partir 

to  start 
partant 
parti 
pars 
partis 

pars 

pars 

part 

partons 

partez 

partent 

partais 
etc. 

partis 
etc. 

partisse 
etc. 

Sentir 

to  feel 
sentant 
senti 
sens 
sentis 

sens 

sens 

sent 

sentons 

sentez 

sentent 

sentais 
etc. 

sentis 
etc. 

sentisse  s . 
etc.: 

APPENDIX 


443 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

faudrai 
etc. 

faudrais 
etc. 

wanting 

faille 
etc. 

There  is  also  found  a  Fut. 
faillirai,  etc.,  and  a  sim- 
ilar Cond.  Many  forms  of 
this  verb  are  no  longer  in 
use. 

fuirai 
etc. 

fuirais 
etc. 

fuis 

fuyons 
fuyez 

fuie 

fuies 

fuie 

fuyions 

fuyiez 

fuient 

Similarly  s'enfuir. 

hairai 
etc. 

hairais 
etc. 

hais 

haissons 
haissez 

haisse 
etc. 

On  account  of  the  diaeresis 
the  circumflex  accent  is 
omitted  in  all  forms. 

mourrai 
etc. 

mourrais 
etc. 

meurs 

mourons 
mourez 

meure 

meures 

meure 

mourions 

mouriez 

meurent 

Forms  its  perfect  tenses  with 
Stre. 

offrirai 
etc. 

offrirais 
etc. 

offre 

offrons 
offrez 

offre 
etc. 

Similarly  souffrir. 

ouvrirai 
etc. 

ouvrirais 
etc. 

ouvre 

ouvrons 
ouvrez 

ouvre 
etc. 

Similarly  COUvrir,  and  com- 
pounds. 

partirai 
etc. 

partirais 
etc. 

pars 

partons 
partez 

parte 
etc. 

Similarly  fits  compounds 
except  repartir.  Partir 
forms  its  perfect  tenses 
with  §tre. 

sentirai 
etc. 

sentirais 
etc. 

sens 

sentons 
sentez 

sente 
etc. 

Similarly  mentir .  se  repen- 
tir,  and  compounds. 

444 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Def . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Servir 

sers 

servais 

servis 

to  serve 

sers 

etc. 

etc. 

servant 

sert 

servi 

servons 

servisse 

sers 

servez 

etc. 

servis 

servent 

Sortir 

sors 

sortais 

sortis 

to  go  out 

sors 

etc. 

etc. 

sortant 

sort 

sorti 

sortons 

sortisse 

sors 

sortez 

etc. 

sortis 

sortent 

Tenir 

tiens 

tenais 

tins  (see  Remarks) 

to  hold 

tiens 

etc. 

etc. 

tenant 

tient 

tenu 

tenons 

tinsse 

tiens 

tenez 

etc. 

tins 

tiennent 

Venir 

viens 

venais 

vins  (see  Remarks) 

to  come 

viens 

etc. 

etc. 

venant 

vient 

venu 

venons 

vinsse 

viens 

venez 

etc. 

vins 

viennent 

VStir 

vSts 

vetais 

vetis 

to  clothe 

vSts 

etc. 

etc. 

vetant 

vet 

v&u 

vStons 

vgtisse 

vSts 

vetez 

etc. 

vStis 

v6tent 

Asseoir 

assieds 

asseyais 

assis 

to  seat 

assieds 

etc. 

etc. 

asseyant 

assied 

assis 

asseyons 

assisse 

assieds 

asseyez 

etc. 

assis 

asseyent 

Avoir 

ai 

avais 

eus 

to  have 

as 

etc. 

etc. 

ayant 

a 

eu 

avons 

eusse 

ai 

avez 

etc. 

eus 

ont 

Devoir 

dois 

devais 

dus 

to  owe 

dois 

etc. 

etc. 

devant 

doit 

da 

devons 

dusse 

dois 

devez 

etc. 

dus 

doivent 

APPENDIX 


445 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

servirai 
etc. 

servirais 
etc. 

sers 

servons 
servez 

serve 
etc. 

Similarly  desservir. 

sortirai 
etc. 

sortirais 
etc. 

sors 

sortons 
sortez 

sorte 
etc. 

Similarly  ressortir,  to  go 
out  again.  Both  form 
their  perfect  tenses  with 
Stre. 

tiendrai 
etc. 

tiendrais 
etc. 

tiens 

tenons 
tenez 

tienne 

tiennes 

tienne 

tenions 

teniez 

tiennent 

Past  Def.  tins,  tins,  tint, 
tinmes,  tintes.  tinrent. 
Similarly  its  compounds. 

viendrai 
etc. 

viendrais 
etc. 

viens 

venons 
venez 

vienne 
viennes 
•     vienne 
venions 
veniez 
viennent 

Past  Def.  vins,  vins,  vint, 
vinmes,  vintes.  vinrent. 
Similarly  its  compounds. 
Venir  forms  its  perfect 
tenses  with  etre. 

vetirai 
etc. 

vetirais 
etc. 

vets 

vetons 
vetez 

vete 
etc. 

Similarly  its  compounds. 

assierai 
etc. 

assierais 
etc. 

assieds 

asseyons 
asseyez 

asseye 
etc. 

Other  forms  are  often  found, 
especially  Pres.  Part, 
assoyant,  and  derived 
forms  accordingly.  Sim- 
ilarly seoir  and  its  com- 
pounds. 

aurai 
etc. 

aurais 
etc. 

aie 

ayons 
ayez 

aie 

aies 

ait 

ayons 

ayez 

aient 

Similarly  ravoir.    Avoir  is 

conjugated  in  full  on  page 
435. 

devrai 
etc. 

devrais 
etc. 

dois 

devons 
devez 

doive 

doives 

doive 

devions 

deviez 

doivent 

Past  Part.  f.  due.  Sim- 
ilarly  rede  voir. 

446 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Def . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Falloir 

to  be  necessary 



il  faut 

il  fallait 

il  fallut 

fallu 

il  faut 

il  fallut 

il  fallflt 

Mouvoir 

meus 

mouvais 

mus 

to  move 

meus 

etc. 

etc. 

mouvant 

meut 

mu 

mouvons 

musse 

meus 

mouvez 

etc. 

mus 

meuvent 

Pleuvoir 

to  rain 

pleuvant 

il  pleut 

il  pleuvait 

il  plut 

plu 
il  pleut 

il  plut 

il  plflt 

Pourvoir 

pourvois 

pourvoyais 

pourvus 

to  provide 

pourvois 

etc. 

etc. 

pourvoyant 

pourvoit 

* 

pourvu 

pourvoyons 

pourvusse 

pourvois 

pourvoyez 

etc. 

pourvus 

pourvoient 

Pouvoir 

peux  (puis) 

pouvais 

pus 

to  be  able 

peux 

etc. 

etc. 

pouvant 

peut 

pU        /        •  X 

pouvons 

pusse 

peux  (puis) 

pouvez 

etc. 

pus 

peuvent 

Recevoir 

recois 

recevais 

regus 

to  receive 

recois 

etc. 

etc. 

recevant 

recoit 

recu 

recevons 

recusse 

recois 

recevez 

etc. 

regus 

recoivent 

Savoir 

sais 

savais 

sus 

to  know 

sais 

etc. 

etc. 

sachant 

sais 

su 

savons 

susse 

sais 

savez 

etc. 

sus 

savent 

Valoir 

vaux 

valais 

valus 

to  be  worth 

vaux 

etc. 

etc. 

valant 

vaut 

valu 

valons 

valusse 

vaux 

valez 

etc 

valus 

valent 

APPENDIX 


447 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

il  faudra 
il  faudrait 

wanting 

il  faille 

An  impersonal  verb. 

mouvrai 
etc. 

mouvrais 
etc. 

meus 

mouvons 
mouvez 

meuve 

meuves 

meuve 

mouvions 

mouviez 

meuvent 

Past  Part.  f.  mue.  Simi- 
larly its  compounds,  ex- 
cept that  in  these  the 
Past  Part,  lacks  circum- 
flex accent. 

il  pleuvra 
il  pleuvrait 

wanting 

il  pleuve 

An  impersonal  verb. 

pourvoirai 
etc. 

pourvoirais 
etc. 

pourvois 

pourvoyons 
pourvoyez 

pourvoie 

pourvoies 

pourvoie 

pourvoyions 

pourvoyiez 

pourvoient 

pourrai 
etc. 

pourrais 
etc. 

wanting 

puisse 

puisses 

puisse 

puissions 

puissiez 

puissent 

recevrai 
etc. 

recevrais 
etc. 

recois 

recevons 
recevez 

recoive 

recoives 

recoive 

recevions 

receviez 

recoivent 

Similarly  all  compounds  of 
-cevoir. 

saurai 
etc. 

saurais 
etc. 

sache 

sachons 
sachez 

sache 

saches 

sache 

sachions 

sachiez 

sachent 

vaudrai 
etc. 

vaudrais 
etc. 

vaux 

valons 
valez 

vaille 

vailles 

vaille 

valions 

valiez 

vaillent 

Similarly  its  compounds  ex- 
cept prevaloir,  which  has 
in  Pres.  Subj.  private, 
etc. 

448 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Dei . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Voir 

vois 

voyais 

vis 

to  see 

vois 

etc. 

etc. 

voyant 

voit 

vu 

voyons 

visse 

vois 

voyez 

etc 

vis 

voient 

Vouloir 

veux 

voulais 

voulus 

to  wish 

veux 

etc. 

etc. 

voulant 

veut 

voulu 

voulons 

voulusse 

veux 

voulez 

etc. 

voulus 

veulent 

Battre 

bats 

battais 

battis 

to  beat 

bats 

etc. 

etc. 

battant 

bat 

battu 

battons 

battisse 

bats 

battez 

etc. 

battis 

battent 

Boire 

bois 

buvais 

bus 

to  drink 

bois 

etc. 

etc. 

buvant 

boit 

bu 

buvons 

busse 

bois 

buvez 

etc. 

bus 

boivent 

Conclure 

conclus 

concluais 

conclus 

to  conclude 

conclus 

etc. 

etc. 

concluant 

conclut 

conclu 

concluons 

conclusse 

conclus 

concluez 

etc. 

conclus 

concluent 

Conduire 

conduis 

conduisais 

conduisis 

to  lead 

conduis 

etc. 

etc. 

conduisant 

conduit 

conduit 

conduisons 

conduisisse 

conduis 

conduisez 

etc. 

conduisis 

conduisent 

Connaitre 

connais 

connaissais 

connus 

to  know 

connais 

etc. 

etc. 

connaissant 

connait 

connu 

connaissons 

connusse 

connais 

connaissez 

etc. 

connus 

connaissent 

Coudre 

couds 

cousais 

cousis 

to  sew 

couds 

etc. 

etc. 

cousant 

coud 

cousu 

cousons 

cousisse 

couds 

cousez 

etc. 

cousis 

cousent 

APPENDIX 


449 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

verrai 
etc. 

verrais 
etc. 

vois 

voyons 
voyez 

voie 

voies 

voie 

voyions 

voyiez 

voient 

Similarly  entrevoir  and  re- 
voir. 

voudrai 
etc. 

voudrais 
etc. 

veux 

voulons 
voulez 

veuille 

veuilles 

veuille 

voulions 

vouliez 

veuillent 

A     second    form     for    the 

Imv.  is  veuille,  veui lions, 
veuillez. 

battrai 
etc. 

battrais 
etc. 

bats 

battons 
battez 

batte 
etc. 

Similarly  abattre  and  other 
compounds. 

boirai 
etc. 

boirais 
etc. 

bois 

buvons 
buvez 

boive 

boives 

boive 

buvions 

buviez 

boivent 

Similarly  its  compounds. 

conclurai 
etc. 

conclurais 
etc. 

conclus 

concluons 
concluez 

conclue 
etc. 

conduirai 
etc. 

conduirais 
etc. 

conduis 

conduisons 
conduisez 

conduise 
etc. 

Similarly  all  verbs  endinp  in 
uire  except  luire,  reluire, 
and  nuire. 

connaitrai 
etc. 

connaitrais 
etc. 

connais 

connaissons 
connaissez 

connaisse 
etc. 

Similarly  paraitre,  paitre, 
and  compounds. 

coudrai 
etc. 

coudrais 
etc. 

couds 

cousons 
cousez 

couse 
etc. 

Similarly  its  compounds. 

45Q 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Def . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Craindre 

crains 

craignais 

craignis 

to  fear 

crains 

etc. 

etc. 

craignant 

craint 

craim 

craignons 

craignisse 

crains 

craignez 

etc. 

craignis 

craignent 

Croire 

crois 

croyais 

crus 

to  believe 

crois 

etc. 

etc. 

croyant 

croit 

era 

croyons 

crusse 

crois 

croyez 

etc. 

crus 

croient 

Croitre 

crois 

croissais 

crus 

to  grow 

crois 

etc. 

etc. 

croissant 

croit 

cru 

croissons 

crusse 

crois 

croissez 

etc. 

crus 

croissent 

Dire 

dis 

disais 

dis 

to  say 

dis 

etc. 

etc. 

disant 

dit 

dit 

disons 

disse 

dis 

dites 

etc. 

dis 

disent 

ficrire 

ecris 

.  dcrivais 

&rivis 

to  write 

ecris 

etc. 

etc. 

£crivant 

(krit 

<fcrit 

^crivons 

dcrivisse 

^cris 

<krivez 

etc. 

dcrivis 

(fcrivent 

fetre 

suis 

<kais 

fus 

to  be 

es 

etc. 

etc. 

&ant 

est 

6ti 

sommes 

fusse 

suis 

etes 

etc. 

fus 

sont 

Faire 

fais 

faisais 

fis 

to  make 

fais 

etc. 

etc. 

faisant 

fait 

fait 

faisons 

fisse 

fais 

faites 

.     etc. 

fis 

font 

Joindre 

joins 

joignais 

joignis 

to  join 

joins 

etc. 

etc. 

joignant 

joint 

joint 

joignons 

joignisse 

joins 

joignez 

etc. 

joignis 

joignent 

APPENDIX 


451 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

craindrai 
etc. 

craindrais 
etc. 

crains 

craignons 
craignez 

craigne 
etc. 

Similarly  all  verbs  ending  in 
aindre. 

croirai 
etc. 

croirais 
etc. 

crois 

croyons 
croyez 

croie 

croies 

croie 

croyions 

croyiez 

croient 

croitrai 
etc. 

croitrais 
etc. 

crois 

croissons 
croissez 

croisse 
etc. 

Past  Part,  f .  crue. 

dirai 
etc. 

dirais 
etc. 

dis 

disons 
dites 

dise 
etc. 

Similarly  redire.  Other 
compounds  of  dire  have 
-disez  in  the  2d  pi.  ©f  the 
Pres.  Ind.  and  Imv.  For 
maudire  see  page  452. 

ecrirai 
etc. 

ecrirais 
etc. 

ecris 

^crivons 
£crivez 

ecrive 
etc. 

Similarly  decrire  and  all 
other  verbs  ending  in 
crire. 

serai 
etc. 

serais 
etc. 

sois 

soyons 
soyez 

sois 

sois 

soit 

soyons 

soyez 

soient 

Conjugated  in  full  on  page 
435- 

ferai 
etc. 

ferais 
etc. 

fais 

faisons 
faites 

fasse 
etc. 

Similarly  satisfaire  and 
other  compounds. 

joindrai 
etc. 

joindrais 
etc. 

joins 

joignons 
]oignez 

joigne 
etc. 

Similarly  all  verbs  ending  in 
oindre. 

452 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Def . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Lire 

lis 

lisais 

lus 

to  read 

lis 

etc. 

etc. 

lisant 

lit 

lu 

lisons 

lusse 

lis 

lisez 

etc. 

lus 

lisent 

Luire 

luis 

luisais 

wanting 

to  shine 

luis 

etc. 

luisant 

luit 

lui 
luis 

luisons 

luisez 

luisent 

wanting 

Maudire 

maudis 

maudissais 

maudis 

to  curse 

maudis 

etc. 

etc. 

maudissant 

maudit 

maudit 

maudissons 

maudisse 

maudis 

maudissez 

etc. 

maudis 

maudissent 

Mettre 

mets 

mettais 

mis 

to  put 

mets 

etc. 

etc. 

mettant 

met 

mis 

mettons 

misse 

mets 

mettez 

etc. 

mis 

mettent 

Moudre 

mouds 

moulais 

moulus 

to  grind 

mouds 

etc. 

etc. 

moulant 

moud 

moulu 

moulons 

moulusse 

mouds 

moulez 

etc. 

moulus 

moulent 

Naitre 

nais 

naissais 

naquis 

to  be  born 

nais 

etc. 

etc. 

naissant 

nait 

n6 

naissons 

naquisse 

nais 

naissez 

etc. 

naquis 

naissent 

Peindre 

peins 

peignais 

peignis 

to  paint 

peins 

etc. 

etc. 

peignant 

peint 

peint 

peignons 

peignisse 

peins 

peignez 

etc. 

peignis 

peignent 

/ 

Plaire 

plais 

plaisais 

plus 

to  please 

plais 

etc. 

etc. 

plaisant   • 

plait 

plu 

plaisons 

plusse 

plais 

plaisez 

etc 

plus 

plaisent 

APPENDIX 


453 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

lirai 
etc. 

lirais 
etc. 

lis 

lisons 
lisez 

lise 
etc. 

Similarly  its  compounds. 

luirai 
etc. 

luirais 
etc. 

luis 

luisons 
luisez 

luise 
etc. 

Similarly  reluire  and  nuire. 
The  latter  however  has 
Preterit  nuisis,  etc. 

maudirai 
etc. 

maudirais 
etc. 

maudis 

maudissons 
maudissez 

maudisse 
etc. 

mettrai 
etc. 

mettrais 
etc. 

mets 

mettons 
mettez 

mette 
etc. 

Similarly  commettre  and 
other  compounds. 

moudrai 
etc. 

moudrais 
etc. 

mouds 

moulons 
moulez 

moule 
etc. 

Similarly  its  compounds. 

naitrai 
etc. 

naitrais 
etc. 

nais 

naissons 
naissez 

naisse 
etc. 

Similarly  renaitre.  Both 
form  their  perfect  tenses 
with  e"tre. 

peindrai 
etc. 

peindrais 
etc. 

peins 

peignons 
peignez 

peigne 
etc. 

Similarly  all  verbs  ending 
in  eindre. 

plairai 
etc. 

plairais 
etc. 

plais 

plaisons 
plaisez 

plaise 
etc. 

Similarly  its  compounds. 

454 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Prin.  Parts 

Pres.  Ind. 

Imperfect 

Past  Def . 
Imp.  Subj. 

Prendre 

prends 

prenais 

pris 

to  take 

prends 

etc. 

etc, 

prenant 

prend 

pris 

prenons 

prisse 

prends 

prenez 

etc. 

pris 

prennent 

Rdsoudre 

resous 

r^solvais 

resolus 

to  resolve 

resous 

etc. 

etc. 

rdsolvant 

resout 

r^solu 

resolvons 

r^solusse 

resous 

r^solvez 

etc. 

resolus 

resolvent 

Rire 

ris 

riais 

ris 

to  laugh 

ris 

etc. 

etc. 

riant 

rit 

ri 

rions 

risse 

ris 

riez 

etc. 

ris 

rient 

Suivre 

suis 

suivais 

suivis 

to  follow 

suis 

etc. 

etc. 

suivant 

suit 

suivi 

suivons 

suivisse 

suis 

suivez 

etc. 

suivis 

suivent 

Suffire 

suffis 

suffisais 

suffis 

to  be  sufficient 

suffis 

etc. 

etc. 

suffisant 

suffit 

gtlffi 

suffisons 

suffisse 

suffis 

suffisez 

etc. 

suffis 

suffisent 

Taire 

tais 

taisais 

tus 

to  be  silent 

tais 

etc. 

etc. 

taisant 

tait 

tu 

taisons 

tusse 

tais 

taisez 

etc. 

tus 

taisent 

Vaincre 

vaincs 

vainquais 

vainquis 

to  conquer 

vaincs 

etc. 

etc. 

vainquant 

vainc 

vaincu 

vainquons 

vainquisse 

vaincs 

vainquez 

etc. 

vainquis 

vainquent 

Vivre 

vis 

vivais 

ve*cus 

to  live 

vis  *" 

etc. 

etc. 

vivant 

vit 

v^cu 

vivons   - 

ve"cusse 

vis 

vivez 

etc.      - 

vecus 

viyent 

APPENDIX 


455 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Future 
Conditional 

Imperative 

Pres.  Subj. 

Remarks 

prendrai 
etc. 

prendrais 
etc. 

prends 

prenons 
prenez 

prenne 

prennes 

prenne 

prenions 

preniez 

prennent 

Similarly    apprendre    and 
other  compounds. 

rdsoudrai 
etc. 

r^soudrais 
etc. 

rdsous 

r^solvons 
resolvez 

resolve 
etc. 

rirai 
etc. 

rirais 
etc. 

ris 

rions 
riez 

rie 
etc. 

Similarly  sourire. 

suivrai 
etc. 

suivrais 
etc. 

suis 

suivons 
suivez 

suive 
etc. 

Similarly  poursuivre. 

suffirai 
etc. 

suffirais 
etc. 

suffis 

suffisons 
suffisez 

suffise 
etc. 

tairai 
etc. 

tairais 
etc. 

tais 

taisons 
taisez 

taise 
etc. 

vaincrai 
etc. 

vaincrais 
etc. 

vaincs 

vainquons 
vainquez 

vainque 
etc. 

Similarly  convaincre. 

vivrai 
etc. 

vivrais 
etc. 

vis 

vivons 
vivez 

vive 
etc. 

Similarly  its  compounds. 

COLONNE  DE  JUILLET 

Elle  se  dresse  sur  Pemplacement  de  la  Bastille,  ancienne  prison  d'litat, 

prise  par  le  peuple  le  14  juillet  (1789).    Cette  date  est  devenue  celle  de  la 

fete  nationale 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


This  vocabulary  is  designed  to  cover  only  the  words  and  forms  of 
words  actually  used  in  the  French  portions  of  this  book.  Peculiarities 
of  inflection  of  the  words  included  are  in  general  added. 

The  plural  form  is  given  of  all  nouns  and  adjectives  whose  plural  is 
different  from  the  singular  and  not  formed  by  adding  s.  The  feminine 
form  is  given  of  all  adjectives  whose  feminine  is  different  from  the  mascu- 
line and  not  formed  by  adding  e.  The  principal  parts  of  the  irregular  verbs 
are  given.  Moreover  there  are  inserted  in  the  proper  alphabetical  places 
those  irregular  forms  of  verbs  and  other  words  whose  initial  letters 
separate  them  from  the  basal  word.  Isolated  forms  used  in  the  earlier 
lessons  in  advance  of  their  full  inflection  are  included  also.  Irregular 
pronunciations  are  indicated  by  phonetic  spelling. 

The  mark  <*>  means  repetition  of  the  word  in  black  type  at  the  head  of 
the  paragraph ;  e^e  under  droit  means  droite. 


a,  fires,  avoir,  has ;  il  y  ~,  there  is 

(are),  ago 
a,  to,  at,  in,  into,  on,  with ;    with 

measures,  by ;    <*>  la  (mode  de), 

in  the  style  of 
abaisser,  draw  down 
abord :  d'~,  at  first 
aboyer,  bark 
abreuver,  water,  soak 
abreuvoir  m.,  watering  trough 
abri   m.,   shelter;    a   !'«*,    under 

shelter;  se  mettre  a  l'~,  take 

shelter 
absent,  absent 
absolu,  absolute 
absolutisme  m.,  absolutism 
acad^mie^,  academy 
accablant,  oppressive 


accent  w.,  accent ;  word,  strain 

accentuation/,  accentuation 

accepter,  accept 

accident  m.,  accident 

accompagner,  accompany 

accorder,  grant 

accoure,j£ra-.  subj.  accourir,  hasten 

accrocher  (a),  hang  (on) 

accuser,  accuse 

achetS,  bought 

acheter,  buy 

acheteur  m.,  buyer 

achever,  finish 

acque*rir   (acquerant,    acquis,    ac- 

quiers,  acquis),  acquire 
acte  m.,  act 

acteur  m.  (f.  actrice),  actor 
actif  (/  -ve),  active 


457 


458 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


addition/,  bill 

admettre  (admettant,  admis,  ad- 

mets,  admis),  admit 
administrer,  administer 
admirer,  admire 
adorer,  worship 
adresse/i,  address 
adversaire  m.,  adversary 
aeroplane  m.,  aeroplane 
affaire  /.,  trouble,  matter;  se  tirer 

d'cv>,  get  along ;  parler  d'^s,  talk 

business 
affaire\  busy 
affecter,  take  on,  assume 
affiche/,  poster,  bill 
afficher,  post  (bills) 
affronter,  face 
afin  :  ~  de,  in  order  to ;  «o  que,  in 

order  that 
age  «*.,  age ;  quel  03  avez-vous  ? 

how  old  are  you  ? 
age\  aged,  old ;  etre  03  de,  be  .  .  .  old 
agrSable,  pleasant 
agreablement,  agreeably 
agrSer,  accept 
ah!  ah! 

ai,  pres.  avoir,  have 
aide /I,  aid,  assistance ;  venir  en  ~ 

a,  come   to   the  assistance   of, 

assist 
aider,  help 

aie,  aient,  pres.  subj.  avoir  (to  have) 
aigu  {f.  aigue),  sharp 
aile/,  wing 

aille,  pres.  subj.  aller  (to  go) 
aimable,  kind 
aimer  (a),  love,  like  (to) ;  ~  mieux, 

prefer 


ainsi,  thus;  e»  que,  as  well  as; 
pour  ~  dire,  so  to  speak 

air  m.,  air;  avoir  Pcv>  (de),  seem, 
appear  (to),  look ;  en  plein  ~,  in 
the  open  air 

aise,  glad ;  bien  ~,  glad 

ait,  pres.  subj.  avoir  (to  have) 

Al£sia_/^,  a  town  in  ancient  Gaul 

allS,  past  part,  aller,  gone 

allee/,  path 

Allemagne/,  Germany 

allemand  adj.,  German 

allemand  m*t  German  (the  lan- 
guage) 

aller  (allant,  alle\  vais,  allai),  go; 
be  (of  health);  fit  (of  clothes), 
become,  suit ;  s'en  e*,  go  away ; 
cv)  chercher,  go  for 

alliance/!,  alliance 

allie"  m.,  ally 

allonger,  lengthen ;  s'c*>,  grow 
longer  , 

allons  1  why  !  come ! 

alors,  then  ;  ~  que,  when 

Alpes///.,  Alps 

Alsace  f.,  a  province  in  northeast 
France 

alsacien  (f.  -nne),  Alsatian 

amabilitS/i,  kindness 

ambigu  (f.  ambigue),  ambiguous 

ambitieux  (f.  -se),  ambitious 

amenager,  arrange 

amener,  bring  (a  person) 

amer  [a-me:r]  {/.  -ere),  bitter 

americain,  American 

AmSrique/,  America 

amertume/,  bitterness 

ami  m.  {/.  amie),  friend 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


459 


amiti^/,  friendship 

amonceler,  heap  up ;  s'~,  gather 

amoncellement  m.,  pile,  heap 

amour  m.,  love 

ample,  generous,  full 

amusant,  funny,  amusing 

amusement  nt.,  amusement 

amuser,  amuse ;  s'<*>(de),  enjoy,  be 
amused  (at),  have  a  good  time 

an  m.,  year;  jour  de  l'~,  New 
Year's  Day ;  avoir  dix  ~s,  be 
ten  years  old 

ancetre  m.,  ancestor 

ancien  (f-nne),  ancient,  old,  former 

anecdote  f,  anecdote 

Angelus  [a-3e-lys]  m.,  angelus  (a 
religious  service) ;  bell  announc- 
ing the  service 

anglais  adj.,  English 

anglais  m.,  English  (the  language) 

Anglais  m.,  Englishman 

angle  m.,  angle,  corner ;  a  <»  droit 
de,  at  right  angles  to 

Angleterre/i,  England 

animal  m.  (pi.  -aux),  animal 

animg  (de),  inspired  (with) 

annee/!,  year ;  l'~  passed,  last  year 

anniversaire  *•.,  birthday,  anni- 
versary 

annoncej^,  advertisement 

annoncer,  announce 

annuel  (f  -lie),  annual 

aout  [u]  m.,  August 

apercevoir  (apercevant,  apercu, 
apercois,  apercus),  perceive ;  s'~ 
de,  perceive,  notice 

apparent,  apparent 

appartement  m.,  apartment 


appartenir  (appartenant,  appar- 
tenu,  appartiens,  appartins),  be- 
long 

appeler  (appell-  before  a  utute 
syllable),  call;  s'<~,  be  named; 
comment  vous  appelez-vous  ? 
what  is  your  name? 

app€tit  m.,  appetite;  de  bon  ~, 
with  a  good  appetite 

apporte\  brought 

apporter,  bring  (a  thing) 

apprecier,  value  correctly,  appre- 
ciate 

apprendre  (apprenant,  appris,  ap- 
prends,  appris),  learn 

appreter,  prepare  (tr);  s'~,  pre- 
pare (intr.) 

approcher,  bring  nearer;  &>™  de, 
approach 

appuyer  (appui-  before  a  mute 
syllable),  lean,  bear  on 

apres,  after ;  d'~>,  according  to ;  ~> 
que,  after 

apres-midi  in.,  afternoon,  p.m. 

arbre  «.,  tree 

arc  in.,  arch 

arched,  arch 

archeveche"  m.,  archbishop's  resi- 
dence 

architecte  m.,  architect 

architectural  (pi.  -aux),  architec- 
tural 

architecture/!,  architecture 

ardemment,  fervently 

ardent,  ardent,  burning 

arenesy^  pi.,  arena,  amphitheater, 
"  stadium,"  "  bowl  " 

argent  in.,  money ;  silver 


460 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


Argonne  /,   a   forest   region   in 

France  where  Americans  fought 

in  1918 
aristocratic/!,  aristocracy 
arme/i,  arm,  weapon 
armee/,  army 
armistice  ».,  armistice 
armoire/i,  closet 
arranger,  fix,  arrange 
arrestation/,  arrest 
arreter,  stop  (tr.) ;  s'cv>,  stop  (intr.) 
arriere-plan  7n.,  background 
arrivee/i,  arrival 
arriver,  arrive,  happen 
arrondissement    m.\     arrondisse- 

ment    (division    of    a    French 

department) 
art  m.,  art 

artere/^,  thoroughfare,  artery 
article  m.,  article,  thing 
artillerie/,  artillery 
artiste  m.  andf.,  artist 
as,  fires,  avoir,  have,  hast 
aspect  m.,  appearance 
assaillir   (assaillant,  assailli,  as- 

saille,  assaillis),  assail 
assemble /.,  assembly,  society 
asseoir  (asseyant,   assis,  assieds, 

assis),  seat ;  s'e*>,  sit  down  ;  etre 

assis,  be  seated;  asseyez-vous, 

sit  down 
assez  (de),  enough ;  quite,  rather 
assierai,  fut.  asseoir  (to  seat) 
assiette/,  plate 
assis,  fiast  fiart.  asseoir,  seated, 

sitting 
assister  (a),  be  present  at,  attend 
assurance/,  assurance 


assur^ment,  certainly 

Atlantique,  Atiantic 

attaque/,  attack 

attaquer,  attack 

atteindre  (atteignant,  atteint,  at- 

teins,  atteignis),  reach 
attendre,  wait  (for),  expect,  await; 

s'~  a,  expect 
attendrir,  move  (in  feelings) 
attente  /,    waiting;    salle    d'~, 

waiting-room 
attentif  {/.  -ve),  attentive 
attention/,  attention 
attirer,  attract 
attrait  m.,  charm,  interest 
attraper,  catch 
attrayant,  attractive 
attribue\  attributed 
au,  contraction  ofhle 
aucun  {/.  -e),   any  one,  no  one; 

ne  .  .  .  ~,  no  one,  no 
auditeur  m,%  hearer 
aujourd'hui,  today;  d'~  en  huit, 

a  week  from  today 
auquel,  contraction  ofk  lequel 
aur-,  fut.,  cond.  avoir  (to  have) 
aussi,  also,  too  ;  as,  so ;  ~  .  .  .  que, 

as  ...  as 
aussitot  que,  as  soon  as 
Austerlitz    [os-ter-litz]    «.,     the 

place  where  Napoleon  conquered 

Austria 
australien  (/  -nne),  Australian 
autant  (de),  as  much,  as  many 
auteur  m.,  author 
autobus  [o-to-bys]  m.,  autobus 
automne  [o-ton]  m.,  autumn ;    en 

«x>,  in  (the)  autumn 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


461 


automobile  m.  andf.,  automobile 

autorisation/,  authorization 

autorit£/,  authority 

autour  (de),  around 

autre,  other,  different;  nous  «*>s, 
we  (apart  from  others) 

autrefois,  formerly 

autrement,  otherwise 

autrichien  {f  -nne),  Austrian 

aux,  contraction  of  a  les 

auxiliaire,  auxiliary 

auxquels,  contraction  of  a.  lesquels 

avais  (-ait,  etc.),  imp.  avoir,  had 

avance  /,  advance ;  d'<~>,  in  ad- 
vance ;  en  <*>,  ahead  of  time 

avanc^  advanced 

avancer,  advance,  put  forward 

avant,  before  (in  time) ;  <~>  de,  be- 
fore {with  inf.) ;  ~  que,  before 

avantage  m.,  advantage 

avant-hier  [a-va-tje:r],  day  before 
yesterday 

avare  m.,  miser 

avec,  with 

avenue/,  avenue 

avez,  pres.  avoir,  have 

avis  m.,  notice 

avocat  m.,  lawyer 

avoir  (ayant,  eu,  ai,  eus),  have ;  il 
y  a  (avait,  etc.),  there  is  (was, 
etc.) ;  ago ;  since,  for ;  qu'avez- 
vous  ?  what 's  the  matter  with 
you? 

avons,  pres.  avoir,  have 

avril  [a-vril]  m.,  April 

ayant,  pres.  part,  avoir,  having 

ayez,  pres.  subj.  avoir  (to  have) 

azur  m.,  blue,  azure 


bagages  m.  pi.,  baggage,  luggage 

baigner,  bathe 

bain  m.,  bath;  salle  de  ~,  bath- 
room 

bal  m.,  ball  (dance) 

banane/,  banana 

banc  [ba]  m.,  bench,  settee 

barbe/,  beard ;  faire  la  ^,  shave 

bas  adj.  (f  -sse),  low 

bas  m.,  stocking;  bottom,  foot; 
en  cv>,  downstairs 

base/,  base 

bataille/,  battle 

bataillon  m.,  battalion 

bateau  m.  {pi.  -x),  boat;  ~  a 
vapeur,  steamboat 

batiment  «*.,  building 

batir,  build 

battre  (battant,  battu,  bats,  battis), 
beat,  strike;  se  <*>,  fight 

beau  {before  a  vowel  bel ;  /  belle, 
m.  pi.  beaux),  beautiful,  hand- 
some; il  fait  ~  (temps),  it  is  fine 
weather ;  se  mettre  au  <~,  become 
fine  (weather) 

beaucoup  (de),  much,  many 

beaute*  /,  beauty 

bel,  see  beau 

belle,/  of  beau 

benefice  **.,  advantage,  benefit 

Berthe,  Bertha 

Besancon  m.,  a  city  in  eastern 
France 

besogne/,  work,  task 

besoin  m.,  need  {noun);  avoir  ~ 
(de),  be  in  need,  need 

Detail  m.  {pi.  bestiaux),  cattle, 
stock 


462 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


beurre  m.,  butter 

bibliotheque/,  library 

bien,  well ;  much,  many ;  good ;  <*> 

des,  many ;  eh  ~ !   well !  good ! 

<v>  que,  although 
bientot,  soon;  a  ev>,  will  see  you 

again  soon 
biere/,  beer 
bijou  m.  (pi.  -x),  jewel 
billet  m.,  ticket ;  prendre  un  <~>,  get 

a  ticket 
blanc  [bla]  (f.  blanche),  white 
bl6  m.,  wheat 
blesser,  hurt 
bleu,  blue 
blond,  light,  blond 
blouse/,  blouse 
bceuf  m.,  beef;  ox  [.pi.  bo] 
boire  (buvant,  bu,  bois,  bus),  drink 
bois  m.,  wood  ;  de  cv>,  wooden 
Bois  de  Boulogne,  a  famous  park 

in  Paris 
boisson/,  drink 
boite/i,  box ;  cv>  aux  lettres,  letter 

box 
boivent,  pres.  boire,  drink 
bon  (f.  -nne),  good  ;  good-natured, 

pleasant 
Bonaparte,  surname  of  Napoleon 
bonde*  (de),  crowded  (with) 
bonheur  ?n.,  happiness 
bon  jour  m.,  good  morning 
bonne  f.,  maid  (servant) 
bord  m.,  edge,  shore ;  ~  de  la  mer, 

seashore 
border  (de),  border  (with) 
borgne,  blind  in  one  eye 
bouche/i,  mouth 


boucher  m.,  butcher 

bouillir  (bouillant,   bouilli,  bous, 

bouillis),  boil 
boulanger  m.,  baker 
boulevard  w.,  boulevard ;  rampart 
bourgeois,    of   the    middle    class, 

homely 
Bourguignon  in.,  Burgundian 
bourse/,  purse 
bout  jw.,  end 
bouteille/,  bottle 
bouton  m.,  button 
braise\  braised,  panned 
bras  **.,  arm 

brave,  brave ;  good,  worthy  (326,/) 
bravoure/i,  bravery 
bref  (/  breve),  short 
Bretagne/,  Brittany,  a  province 

in  northwest  France 
breton  (f.  -nne),  Breton,  of  Brittany 
Brienne/i,  the  seat  of  a  French 

military  school 
brillant,  brilliant 
briller,  glitter 

brosse/,  brush  ;  ~  a  dents,  tooth- 
brush ;  ~  a  cheveux,  hairbrush 
brosser,  brush 
brouillard  m.,  mist,  fog 
bru/i,  daughter-in-law 
bruit  ».,  noise 
bruler,  burn 
brusque,  quick 
Bruxelles  [bry-sel]/!,  Brussels,  the 

capital  of  Belgium 
bu,  past  part,  boire,  drunk 
buffet  m.,  lunch  counter 
bureau  m.,   desk  (of   a  teacher); 

office ;  03  de  poste,  post  office 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


463 


buste  *«.,  bust 
but  m.,  goal,  aim 

C',  elided  form  ofce  {pron.) 

5a,  that 

cabaret  m.,  inn 

cacher,  hide 

cachot  m.%  cell,  prison 

cadeau  m.  {pi.  -x),  present,  gift 

cadet  (/.  -tte),  younger 

cadre  m.,  frame 

caduc  {/.  -uque),  infirm 

cafe"  ».,  coffee ;  restaurant,  cafd 

cahier  m,,  notebook 

caillou  m.  {pi.  -x),  pebble 

caisse/,  cash  window 

caissier  m.,  cashier 

cal  m.,  callosity 

calmer,  calm 

camarade  m.,  companion,  comrade, 

chum  ;  ~  d'e'cole,  schoolmate 
camaraderie/,  comradeship 
Cambronne,  a  French  marshal 
campagne/1,  country  (apart  from 

city),  country  district ;  a  la  ~,  in 

(to)  the  country 
Canada  m.,  Canada 
Cantigny  m.,  a  French  town  where 

Americans  fought  in  1 9 1 8 
canton  m.,  canton  (division  of  a 

French  arrondissement) 
capitate/.",  capital 
car,  for 

caractere  mn  character 
caracteristique/,  characteristic 
carnaval  m.%  carnival 
carotte/,  carrot 
carre\  square 


carrure/i,  build,  physique 

carte  f,  map  ;  card,  menu ;  ~  de 

visite,  visiting  card 
cas  ///.,  case 
casser,  break  (tr.)\    se  ~,   break 

{intr.) 
catastrophe/!,  catastrophe 
catheMrale/,  cathedral 
cause  f,  cause,  reason ;  a  ~  de, 

because  of 
causer,  talk 
ce  pron.,  he,  she,  it,  they ;    this, 

that,  these,  those ;  ~  que,  what, 

that  which;   ~  qui,  what,  that 

which ;  ~  .  .  .  quoi,  that  which ; 

est-~  que,  is  it  that  ( 1 64) ;  n'est- 

~  pas,  is  it  not  (167) 
ce  adj.  {before  a  vowel  cet ;  f 

cette,  pi.  ces),  this,  that 
ceci,  this 
c6der,  yield 
cela,  that 
celebre,  famous 
celeri  m.t  celery 
celeste,  heavenly 
celle,/  0/celui 

celui,  this,  that,  the  one;  he,  him 
cent,  (a)  hundred 
centime  m . ,  centime  (one  hundredth 

of  a  franc) 
centre  ».,  center ;  au  ~  de,  in  the 

center  of 
cependant,  however,  yet 
cerise/,  cherry 
cerisier  ».,  cherry  tree 
certain,  certain 

ces,  pi.  ofce  {adj.),  these,  those 
Cesar,  Caesar  (the  Roman  general) 


464 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


cesser  (de),  cease  (to) 

cet,  see  ce  (adj.) 

cette,/^  ofce  (adj.) 

ceu.x,pl.  of  celui,  these,  those,  the 
ones ;  they 

chacal  m.,  jackal 

chacun  (f  -e),  each  one 

chaired,  desk 

chaise  f,  chair 

chaleur/!,  heat 

chambre  f,  room ;  <*>  a  coucher, 
bedroom 

champ  m.,  field ;  ~  de  foire,  fair- 
ground 

Champagne  f,  a  province  in  north- 
east France 

champignon  m.,  mushroom 

champion  m.,  champion 

Champs-Ely se'es  7r1.pL,  an  avenue 
in  Paris 

chance  f,  good  luck 

changement  m.,  change 

changeur  m;%  money  changer 

chant  m.,  song 

chanter,  sing 

chapeau  m.  (pi.  -x),  hat 

chapelier  m.,  hatter 

Chapu,  a  modern  French  sculptor 

chaque,  each 

Charles,  Charles 

charmant,  attractive 

charm6,  delighted 

chasser,  expel,  drive  (out) ;  hunt 

chat  m,t  cat 

chateau  m.  (pi.  -x),  castle 

Chateau-Thierry  m.,  a  French 
town  where  Americans  fought 
in  1918 


chaud,   warm,   hot;    avoir  ~,  be 

warm  (hot) ;  il  fait  ~,  it  is  warm 

(hot) 
chauss£e_/l,  roadway,  street 
chaussette/i,  sock 
chaussures  f.  pi.,  shoes,  footwear 
chef  m.%  chief ;  ~  de  gare,  station 

agent 
chemin  m.,  road,  way ;  «v.  de  fer, 

railroad 
chemise/],  shirt 
cher  (f.  -ere),  dear,  beloved  ;  costly 

(326,/) 
chercher,  look  for,  seek,  get ;  aller 

~,  go  for ;  envoyer  ~,  send  for 
ch£ri,  beloved,  dear 
cheval     m.     (pi.     -aux),     horse; 

monter  a  ~,  ride  horseback 
cheveux  m.  pi.,  hair ;  brosse  a  ~, 

hairbrush 
Chez,  at  (to,  in)  the  house  (home, 

store)  of;    «v  moi  (etc.),  at  my 

(etc.)  house 
chicor£e  frise'e/i,  endive 
chien  m.,  dog 
choisir,  choose,  select 
chose /.,  thing;  quelque  <*>,  some- 
thing 
chou  m.  (pi.  -x),  cabbage 
chou-fleur    m.   (pi.   choux-fleurs), 

cauliflower 
chre'tien[kre-tje](/:  -nne),  Christian 
chute/,  fall 
ci,  abbreviation  for  ici  ( 1 94) ;  par- 

~  par-la,  here  and  there 
ciel  m.  (pi.  cieux),  sky 
cigare  m.,  cigar 
cinq  [sek  ;  216,  a],  five 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


465 


cinquante,  fifty 

cinquieme,  fifth 

circuler,  circulate,  go  about 

citadin  m.  (f.  -e),  city  person 

Cit6/!,  the  old  central  part  of  Paris 

citoyen  (f.  -nne),  citizen 

civil  [si-vil],  civil 

clair,  clear 

classe  f.t  class ;   classroom  ;   salle 

de  ~,  classroom 
classique,  classic 

clef  [kle]/,  key  ;  fermer  a  ~,  lock 
clerc  [kle:r]  *».,  clerk 
client  m.  {/.  -e),  customer ;  client 
cloche/,  bell 
cocher  m.,  coachman 
code  m.,  code,  laws 
cceur  m.,  heart 
coi  {/.  coite),  quiet 
coiffer,  dress  the  hair ;  ~  de,  wear 

on  the  head ;   se  ~,  fix  one's  hair 
coiffeur  »».,  hairdresser,  barber 
coiffure/,  headdress 
coin  m.t  corner 
colere/,  anger 
collaborateur  m,t  collaborator 
college  m.,  college 
colonie/i,  colony 
colonnade  f.,  colonnade 
colonne/,  column 
colossal,  colossal 
combat  m,,  contest 
combats,  zmv.  combattre,  fight 
combien    (de),    how    much,    how 

many ;    at   what    price ;     ~  de 

temps,  how  long 
Comgdie  Francaise  f.,  a  famous 

French  theater 


comique,  of  comedy,  comic 
comite"  «.,  committee 
commandant     **.,    commandant, 

commander,  major 
commandement  «*.,  command 
commander,  command,  order 
comme,  like,  as 
commemorer,  commemorate 
commencement  m.,  beginning 
commencer  (a),  begin  (to) 
comment  adv.,  how,  what 
comment  intj.,  what ! 
commercant    m.,    business    man, 

merchant 
commerce  m.,  business 
commis,    past  part,    commettre, 

committed 
commode    f.,    bureau,    chest    cf 

drawers 
commun,  common 
commune  f.,   commune  (division 

of  a  French  canton) 
compagne/i,  wife,  consort 
comparaison/!,  comparison 
compenser,  make  up  for   . 
Compiegne/,  a  city  in  France 
complet  (f.  -ete),  complete,  full 
compliment  »*.,  compliment 
compost,  compound 
composer,  compose,  make  up 
compote  f.,  sauce 
comprendre  (comprenant,  compris, 

comprends,  compris),  understand; 

include 
compris,  past  part,    comprendre, 

understood ;  y  <*>,  including 
compte  [ko:t] m., account;  se  rendre 

~,  have  an  idea,  realize 


466 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


compter  [ko-te],  intend ;  count 

comptoir  [ko-twa:r]  m.,  counter 

comte  m.,  count  (a  title) 

concert  m.,  concert 

concevoir  (concevant,  concu,  con- 
cois,  concus),  conceive 

conclure(concluant,  conclu,  conclus, 
conclus),  conclude 

Concorde/!,  peace ;  place  de  la  Con- 
corde, a  famous  square  in  Paris 

concret  {/.  -ete),  concrete 

concu,  past  part,  concevoir,  con- 
ceived 

condition/],  condition 

conducteur  m.,  conductor 

conduire  (conduisant,  conduit,  con- 
duis,  conduisis),  lead;  take  (a 
person) 

confier,  intrust 

confortable,  comfortable 

congres  m.,  national  assembly, 
congress 

conjugaison/;,  conjugation 

conjuguer,  conjugate 

connais-sance/;,  acquaintance 

connaitre  (connaissant,  connu,  con- 
nais,  connus),  be  acquainted  with, 
know 

connu,  past  part,  connaitre,  known 

conquSrir  (conqufrant,  conquis, 
conquiers,   conquis),  conquer 

conquete/,  conquest 

consacrer,  consecrate,  devote 

conseil  ?/?.,  advice 

consentir  (consentant,  consenti, 
consens,  consentis),  consent 

consequent :  par  «<*,  consequently 

conserver,  preserve 


consideration/!,  esteem 
consid^rer,  consider 
consoler,  comfort 
consomme  m.,  broth 
consonne/;,  consonant 
constance_/\,  constancy 
construction/;,  construction 
construire  (construisant,  construit, 

construis,  construisis),  construct 
consulter,  consult 
contemporain,  contemporary 
content,    glad;    satisfied;    ~    de, 

satisfied  with 
contient,  pres.  contenir,  contains 
continuation/.,  continuation 
continuel  {/.  -lie),  continual 
continuer,  continue  (tr.),  go  on ;  se 

<~>,  continue  (intr.),  be  prolonged 
contraire  m.,  contrary ;  au  ~,  on 

the  contrary 
contravention/;,  violation  (of  law) 
contre,  against 
convenablement,  suitably 
convenir  (a)  (convenant,  convenu, 

conviens,   convins),    be   suitable 

(to),  suit 
converser,  converse 
cooperation/;,  cooperation 
copier,  copy 
coque/;,  shell 
coquille/;,  shell ;  en  ~,  on  the  half 

shell 
corbeille/;,  basket 
cordialement,  heartily 
corps  ///.,  body 

correspondance/;,  correspondence 
corridor  m.,  corridor,  hall 
corriger,  correct 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


467 


Corse  /,  Corsica 

costume  m.,  suit 

cote/,  coast 

cote"  m.,side  ;  a  ~  de,  beside  ;  a  ses 

~s,  at  one's  side;  d'a~,  adjoining 
coucher,  put  to  bed;  se  ~,  go  to 

bed  ;  chambre  a  ~,  bedroom 
coudre    (cousant,     cousu,     couds, 

cousis),  sew 
couleur/,  color 
coup  m.,  stroke,  blow;    ~  d'ceil, 

glance  ;  tout  a  ~,  suddenly 
couper,  cut  (off) 
couple/,  couple,  two 
cour/,  yard,  court 
courage  m.t  courage 
couramment,  fluently 
courant,  current ;  le  ~,  the  present 

month 
courir  (courant,  couru,  cours,  cou- 

rus),  run 
couronne/,  crown 
couronner,  crown 
courrier  m.t  mail 
courriez,  cond.  courir,  would  run 
cours  ;/z.,  course,  schedule;  pi.,  lec- 
tures, lessons 
court,  short 

couru,  past  part,  courir,  run 
cousin  m.  (f.  -e),  cousin 
couteau  m.  (pi.  -x),  knife 
couter,  cost 
couteux  (f.  -se),  costly 
coutume/,  custom 
couturiere  f. ,  dressmaker 
couvert  (de),  covered  (with) 
couvrir  (couvrant,  couvert,  couvre, 

couvris),  cover 


craie/,  chalk 

craindre  (craignant,  craint,  crains, 

craignis),  fear 
crainte/,  fear;  de  ~  que,  for  fear 

that,  lest 
cravate/,  necktie 
crayon  m.,  pencil 
cr&lule,  credulous 
creer,  create 
creme/,  cream 
crever,  burst,  break 
cri  m.%  cry 
crier,  cry,  shout 
crise/,  crisis 
critique  m.t  critic 
critiquer,  criticize 
croire  (croyant,   cru,   crois,   crus), 

believe,  think 
croitre  (croissant,  cru,  crois,  crus), 

grow 
croix/,  cross 

crouton  m.,  fried  bread  crumbs 
croyance/,  belief 
croyez,  pres.  croire,  believe 
cruel  (/  -He),  cruel 
cruellement,  cruelly 
cueillir  (cueillant,  cueilli,  cueille, 

cueillis),  collect 
cuiller  [kqi-je:r]  /,  spoon 
cuisine/,  kitchen 
cuisinier  m.  (/  -ere),  cook 
cultivable,  arable,  cleared 
cultiver,  cultivate 
culture/,  culture 

d\  elided  form  of&e 
dame/,  lady 
danger  m.,  danger 


468 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


dangereux  (f  -se),  dangerous 

dans,  in,  into,  among 

danser,  dance 

date/,  date 

davantage,  more 

de,  of,  from,  with ;  after  superla- 
tives, in ;  partitive,  some,  any, 
a ;  with  inf.,  to,  by ;  followed 
by  a  numeral,  than  ;  ~  la  (P),  of 
(in)  the;  some,  any;  ne  .  .  .  pas 
~>,  not  any,  no,  not  a 

d£barrasser,  relieve 

debout,  standing 

d&embre  m.,  December 

decider  (a),  persuade  (to) ;  se  ~  (a), 
decide  (to) 

decoration/!,  decoration 

d^corer,  decorate 

decrire  (d£crivant,  d&rit,  decris, 
d£crivis),  describe 

decrivez,  describe 

defaut  m.,  defect 

defendre  (a  quelqu'un  de),  forbid 
(somebody  to) 

defense  f,  defense ;  prohibition  ; 
~  d'afficher,  post  no  bills ;  ~  de 
fumer,  no  smoking 

dgfenseur  m.,  defender 

d^fier,  defy 

degre*  m.,  degree 

dehors,  outdoors 

d£ja,  already ;  meme  ~,  before  this 

dejeuner,  lunch,  breakfast 

dej'euner  m.,  breakfast,  luncheon 

dela,  beyond  ;  au  <~  de,  beyond 

del^gue*  m.,  delegate 

delicieux  (/  -se),  delicious 

delit  m.,    misdemeanor 


demain,  tomorrow ;  a  ~,  good-by 

till  tomorrow 
demander,  ask,  ask  for ;  ~  a,  ask  of 

(a  person);  ~de  {wit h  inf.),  ask  to 
demeure  verb,  live,  lives 
demeure^,  home,  dwelling 
demeurer,  dwell,  live 
demi,  half  (218) 
de*mocratie  f ,  democracy 
d^molir,  tear  down,  demolish 
d£montrer,  set  forth 
dent  f,  tooth ;  brosse  a  ~s,  tooth- 
brush 
dentelle/,  lace 
depart  m.,  departure ;  point  de  ~, 

starting  point 
departement  m.,  department  (one 

of    the    87   main    divisions    of 

France) 
depecher,  hasten  (tr.) ;  se  ~,  hurry, 

hasten  (intr.) 
d^pendre  (de),  depend  (upon) 
depens  m.  pi.,  expense  ;  aux  ~  de, 

at  the  expense  of 
d£penser,  spend 
depuis,  since,  for;  ~  quand,  how 

long 
depute*  m.,  deputy 
d£ranger,  disturb 
dernier  (f  -ere),  last,  recent  (3  26,  f) 
derriere,  behind 
des,  contraction  of  de  les,  of  (in) 

the ;  some,  any 
des  que,  as  soon  as 
descendre,  go  down,  come  down, 

descend ;  <~  de  voiture,  get  out  of 

a  carriage ;  ~  en  ville,  go  down 

town 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


469 


description  f. ,  description 

deserter,  desert 

d£signe\  appointed,  fixed 

d£sint£grer,  break  up  (tr.) ;  se  <*>, 
break  up  (intr.) 

d£sint£ressement  »*.,  disinterest- 
edness 

d£sirer,  desire 

d^sormais,  henceforth 

desquels,  contraction  of&e  lesquels 

dessert  verb,  clears  off  (a  table) 

dessert  «r.,  dessert 

dessin  m.,  drawing 

destination  /.,  destination ;  a  <~, 
at  one's  destination 

detacher,  detach ;  se  t»,  stand  out 

detail  m.,  detail 

detruit,  past  part,  d6truire,  de- 
stroyed 

deux,  two ;  tous  les  ~,  both 

deuxieme  [do-zjeim],  second 

devait,  devaient,  imp.  devoir 

devant,  before  (in  place),  in  front 
of 

devanture/i,  show  window 

deVelopper,  develop 

devenir  (devenant,  devenu,  deviens, 
devins),  become 

devenu,  past  part,  devenir,  become 

devez,  pres.  devoir 

deviez,  imp.  devoir 

deviner,  guess 

devint,  devinrent,  past  def.  deve- 
nir, became 

devoir  (devant,  du,  dois,  dus),  owe, 
must,  ought ;  be  to  ;  see  265 

devoir  /«.,  exercise 

devourment  //z.,  devotion 


&evr-,fut.,  cond.  devoir 

dictionnaire  **.,  dictionary 

dieu  m.  (pi.  -x),  god ;  mon  Dieu ! 

heavens!  goodness! 
different,  different 
difficile,  difficult 
digne,  worthy 
dimanche  ft*:,  Sunday 
dimension/;,  dimension 
diner,  dine,  eat  dinner ;  ~  en  ville, 

dine  out 
diner  #z.,  dinner 
dire  (disant,  dit,  dis,  dis),  say,  tell ; 

~  a,  tell ;  entendre  ~,  hear  (by 

report) ;  sans  ~5  without  saying ; 

vouloir  ~,  mean 
directeur  m.,  director 
dis,  pres.  ind.,  imv.  dire,  say 
discipline,  disciplined 
discret  (f.  -ete),  discreet 
discretion :    a  ~,  as  much  as  one 

wishes 
discussion/I,  discussion 
disent,  pres.  dire,  say 
disposer,  arrange 
dispute/.,  dispute 
disputer,  dispute  ;  se  e*>,  dispute 
distance/;,  distance 
distinguer,  distinguish 
dit,  pres.  dire,  says  ;  past  def.  dire, 

said 
dit,  past  part,  dire,  said,  told 
dites,  pres.  dire,  say 
divers,  different 
divise*  (en),  divided  (into) 
dix  [dis;   216,  a\  ten 
docteur  in.,  physician,  doctor 
doigt  m.,  finger 


470 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


doit,  pres.  devoir 

doivent,  pres.  devoir 

dome  «.,  dome 

domestique  m.  andf.,  servant 

domination/,  control 

dommage  «.,  harm,  loss ;  c'est  ~, 

it  is  a  pity 
Domremy  m.,  birthplace  of  Joan 

of  Arc 
done,  then 
donne,  give(s) 
donne\  given 
donne-moi,  give  me 
donner,  give;  se  ~  la  peine  (de), 

take  the  trouble  (to) 
donnez-moi,  give  me 
dont,  of  whom,  of  which,  whose 
dormir  (dormant,  dormi,  dors,  dor- 
mis),  sleep 
dos  m.t  back 
double,  double 
double"  (de),  lined  (with) 
douce,/,  oj doux 
doucement,  sweetly,  softly 
doue\  endowed,  gifted 
douleur/,  pain 

doute  m.,  doubt ;  sans  ~,  doubtless 
douter,     doubt;     ~>    que,     doubt 

whether 
doux  {/.  douce),  sweet,  gentle;  il 

fait  <*>,  it  is  mild 
douzaine/,  dozen 
douze,  twelve 
dramaturge  m.,    dramatist,   play 

writer 
drap  ?/z.,  cloth 
drapeau  m.  (pi.  -x),  flag 
dresser,  raise ;  se  <~>,  stand 


droit,  right ;  a  ~>e,  to  (at,  on)  the 
right;  a  angle  ~  de,  at  right 
angles  to ;    de  ~e,  right-hand 

droit  ?n.,  right 

druide  m.,  druid  (a  Gallic  priest) 

du,  contraction  of  He  le,  of  (in)  the ; 
some,  any 

du  (f.  due),  past  part,  devoir 

duel  m.,  duel 

duquel,  contraction  of&e  lequel 

dur,  hard 

durable,  durable 

durer,  last,  be  in  force 

eau/  (pi.  -x),  water 

6blouissement  m.,  dizzy  spell 

£chafaud  m.,  scaffold 

Schapper  (a),  escape  (from) 

Eclair  *».,  flash ;  il  fait  des  <*>s,  it 
lightens 

Sclaircir,  clear  up 

Sclairer  (a),  light  (by) 

£clater,  break  out 

6cole_/!,  school ;  a  l'~,  at  school 

6colier  m.  (f.  -ere),  student,  school- 
boy (-girl) 

£conome,  economical,  thrifty 

Economies///.,  savings 

6conomique,  economic 

£conomiser,  save 

Scouter,  listen  (to) 

Verier :   s'~,  exclaim 

£crire  (Scrivant,  6crit,  6cris,  Scrivis), 
write 

£cris,  pres.  ind.,  imv.  Scrire,  write 

£crit,  pres.  emre,  writes 

6crit,  past  part.  6crire,  written 

6criv-,  pres.,  imv.  ecrire,  write 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


471 


Scrivain  m.,  writer,  author 

gcrivit,  past  def  Scrire,  wrote 

earned,  stable  (for  horses) 

Edifice  m.,  building 

Education/;,  education 

effacer,  erase 

effectivement,  effectively 

effet  m.,  effect ;  en  <~>,  in  fact,  in- 
deed 

effort  m.,  effort 

effrayer  (effrai-  before  a  mute  syl- 
lable), frighten ;  s'cv>,  be  fright- 
ened 

6gal  {pi.  -aux),  equal ;  c'est  <~>,  it 's 
all  the  same 

6gard  m.,  regard;  a  lr«w  de,  with 
regard  to 

£glise/,  church 

egorger,  slaughter,  cut  the  throat  of 

Egypte/,  Egypt 

eh  bien  1  good !  well ! 

elan  m.,  dash,  enthusiasm 

electricite*  f,  electricity 

electrique,  electric 

elevation/!,  elevation,  promotion 

eleve  m.  and  f,  pupil 

eleve\  brought  up,  bred ;  bien  <*>, 
well-bred;  mal  ~,  ill-bred 

elever,  raise ;  .s'<*>,  arise 

elire  (elisant,  elu,  61is,  elus),  elect 

elle,  she,  it;  disj.,  her 

elle-meme,  herself 

elles,  they;  disj.,  them 

elles-memes,  themselves 

eloquent,  eloquent 

elu,  past  part,  elire,  elected 

embellir,  beautify,  adorn 

eminence/!,  elevation 


emouvoir  (emouvant,  emu,  emeus, 
emus),  move  (in  feelings);  s'~ 
de,  be  moved  (stirred)  by 

empecher  (de),  prevent  (from) 

empereur  m.,  emperor 

emplacement  m.t  site 

emplette  f,  purchase ;  faire  ses 
<*>s,  do  one's  shopping 

employer  (emploi-  before  a  mute 
syllable),  employ 

emporter,  carry  away 

empresser :  s'cv.,  hasten 

en  pron.,  of  it  (them),  from  it 
(them),  with  it  (them);  some, 
any ;  <*>  .  .  .  le  (la,  les),  its  (3 1 8) 

en  prep.,  in;  while,  by;  with 
words  denoting  material,  see 
33 5 »  a'i  tout  <*>,  while 

encadrer  (de),  frame  (with) 

enceinte  f,  inclosure 

enclaver,  inclose 

encore,  still,  again,  yet;  ~  un(e), 
another,  one  more ;  ~  une  fois, 
once  more 

encre/,  ink 

encrier  m.,  inkstand 

endormir  (endormant,  endormi,  en- 
dors,  endormis),  put  to  sleep; 
s'os,  go  to  sleep 

endroit  **.,  place,  spot 

enfant  m.  andf,  child 

enfin,  finally,  at  last 

enlever,  take  away  (off) 

ennemi  adj.,  hostile 

ennemi  m.,  enemy 

ennui  m.,  trouble 

ennuyer  (ennui-  before  a  i?iute  syl- 
lable), tire ;  s'<~>,  be  lonesome 


472 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


enregistrer,  check  (baggage) 

enrichir,  enrich 

enseigne/,  sign 

enseignement  m.,  teaching 

enseigner,  teach,  inform 

ensemble,  together 

ensuite,  afterward,  then 

entendre,  hear;  ~  dire,  hear  (by 
report) ;  ~  parler,  hear  tell ;  bien 
entendu,  of  course 

enthousiasmer,  fill  with  enthu- 
siasm 

entier  {/.  -ere),  entire 

entourer,  surround 

entr'acte  «?.,  intermission 

entrainant,  inspiring 

entre,  between,  in,  among 

entrecouper,  intersect 

entre-croiser,  cross 

entree/!,  entrance ;  entree 

entrer,  enter  (intr.);  ~  dans,  enter 
{tr.)      . 

envahir,  invade 

envahisseur  m. ,  invader 

enveloppe/.',  envelope 

envelopper,  wrap  up 

enverrai,  enverriez,yW.,  cond.  en- 
voyer  (to  send) 

envers  prep.,  toward 

envers  m.,  wrong  side ;  a  P~,  up- 
side down 

environ,  about;  d'~,  about 

environs  m.  pi.,  vicinity,  suburbs 

envoyer  (envoyant,  envoy6,  envoie, 
envoyai),  send ;  ~  chercher,  send 
for 

6pais  (f.  -sse),  thick 

Spaule/,  shoulder 


epiceries  f.  pi.,  groceries 

Spicier  m.,  grocer 

epoque/i,  epoch,  period 

£pouvantail  m.,  scarecrow 

Sriger,  erect 

errer,  roam 

escalier  m.,  stairs,  staircase 

espace  m.,  space 

esperer,  hope 

esprit  m.,  mind,  spirit 

essayer,  try,  try  on 

est,  pres.  etre,  is ;  ~-ce  que,  is  it 
that  (165);  n'~-ce  pas,  is  it  not 
(167) 

estomac  [es-to-ma]  M.,  stomach ; 
mal  d'~,  stomach  ache 

et  [e],  and 

Stable/,  stable  (for  cattle) 

£tage  m.,  story  (of  a  house) 

6tais  (-ait,  etc.),  imp.  etre,  was,  were 

etaler,  display 

etant,  pres.  part,  etre,  being 

etat  m.,  state ;  en  ~  de,  in  a  state  of 

Etats-Unis  m.  pi.,  United  States 

etc.,  et  cetera,  and  so  forth 

£te\  past  part,  etre,  been 

et£  m.,  summer ;  en  ~,  in  (the) 
summer 

etendard  m.,  banner 

etes,  pres.  etre,  are 

etions,  imp.  etre,  were 

^toffe^,  piece  of  goods;  pi.,  goods 
(in  general) 

6toile  /.,  star ;  ~  filante,  shooting 
star 

£tonner,  astonish;  s'~,  be  sur- 
prised 

Stouffer,  choke,  stifle 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


473 


Strange,  queer 

Stranger  adj.  (f  -ere),  foreign 

Stranger  m.  (/  -ere),  foreigner 

etre  (6tant,  6t6,  suis,  fus),  be ;  as 
active  auxiliary,  have ;  ~  a,  be- 
long to 

Stroit,  narrow 

Stude/,  study 

Studiant  m.,  student 

Studier,  study 

eu,  past  part,  avoir,  had 

eurent,  past  def.  avoir,  had 

Europe/,  Europe 

euss-  [ys-],  past  subj.  avoir  (to 
have) 

eut  [y],  past  def.  avoir,  had 

eut  [y],  past  subj.  avoir  (to  have) 

eux,  them,  they 

eux-memes,  themselves 

eVSnement  m.,  event 

eventail  m.,  fan 

Evident,  evident 

eViter  (de),  avoid 

exact,  exact 

exactement,  exactly 

examen  m.,  examination 

examiner,  examine 

excSder,  exceed 

excellent,  excellent 

exces  m.,  excess 

excuser,  excuse ;  s'~,  make  excuses 

executif  (/  -ve),  executive 

execution/!,  execution 

exemple  m.,  example,  illustrative 
sentence ;  par  ~,  for  instance 

exercer,  exercise 

exercice  «r.,  exercise,  drill  (military) 

expirer,  die,  expire 


expliquer,  explain 
exposition/,  exposition 
expres  (f.  -esse),  positive 
expressement,  expressly 
expression  f. ,  expression 
exprimer,  express 
extSrieur  m.,  exterior 
extravagance/.,  extravagance 
extreme,  extreme 
extremement,  extremely 
extrSmitS/,  end 

face/,  face,  front ;  <*>  a,  facing,  in 
front  of ;  en  ~  (de),  opposite,  in 
front  (of) 

fache\  sorry 

facile,  easy 

facilement,  easily 

facon  /,  fashion ;  de  telle  ~,  in 
such  a  way ;  d'une  ~,  in  a  fashion 

facteur  m.,  postman 

faible,  feeble 

faille,  pres.  subj.  falloir  (to  be 
necessary) 

faillir  (f aillant,  failli,  faux,  faillis), 
fail ;  with  inf.,  almost,  nearly 

f aim/,  hunger ;  avoir  <*>,  be  hungry 

faire  (faisant,  fait,  fais,  fis),  make, 
do ;  with  inf.,  have,  cause, 
make ;  se  ~,  take  place,  be- 
come :  que  ~  ?  what 's  to  be 
done?  ~  la  classe,  hold  the 
class ;  ~  de  son  mieux,  do  one's 
best 

faisait  [fa-ze],  imp.  faire,  made, 
did 

fait,  pres.  faire,  makes,  does ;  past 
part,  faire,  made,  done 


474 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


fait  in.,  fact,  point,  deed ;  en  <~>,  in 

fact ;    en  ~  de,  for ;    ~  d'armes, 

warlike  exploit 
faites,  pres.  ind.,  imv.  faire,  make 
f alloir  ( ,  f allu,  il  f aut,  il  f allut), 

be  necessary,  be  obliged  to,  must, 

have  to,  need  (274) 
fameux  (f  -se),  famous 
familier  (/  -ere),  familiar 
famille/,  family 
farci,  stuffed 
farine/i,  flour 
fasse,  fassiez,  pres.  subj.  faire  (to 

make) 
fatiguS,  tired 
faudra,  faudrait,  fut.,  cond.  f alloir 

(to  be  necessary) 
fausse,/.'  ofiaMx 
f  aut,  pres.  f  alloir  (to  be  necessary) 
fauteuil  in.,  chair,  armchair ;  seat 

(in  a  theater) 
faux  (f  -sse),  false 
faux-col  m.,  collar 
favori  (/.  -ite),  favorite 
feliciter,  congratulate 
femme  [fam]/,  wife  ;  woman 
fenetre/,  window 
fer  7n.,  iron  ;  chemin  de  ~,  railroad 
ferme  adj.,  hard 
ferme/,  farm,  farmhouse 
fermer,  close,  shut ;  ~  a  clef,  lock 
fermier  m,  (f  -ere),  farmer 
f£roce,  savage 
festin  m.,  feast,  banquet 
fete/".,  feast,  holiday 
feu  in.  (pi.  -x),  fire 
feuillage  in.,  foliage 
feuille/,  leaf,  sheet 


feutre  m.,  felt 

feVrier  m.,  February 

fichu  in.,  neckerchief 

fidele,  faithful,  true 

fier  [fi-e:r]  (-ere),  proud 

figure/!,  face,  figure 

filet  m.,  net  bag 

fille/i,  daughter,  girl ;  ~  de  maga- 

sin,  clerk,  salesgirl 
fils  [fis]  m.,  son 
fin_/i,  end ;  a  la  ~,  at  last 
finir,  finish,  end;    ~  de  +  inf., 

finish ;  ~  par  +  inf.,  finally 
firent,  past  def  faire,  made,  did 
fit,  past  def.  faire,  made,  did 
fit,  past  subj.  faire  (to  make,  do) 
fixe,  fixed,  limited 
flatter,  flatter 

fleur/,  flower ;  en  ~,  in  bloom 
fleurir,  bloom 
fleuve  m.,  river  (large) 
Foch,  commander   of   the   Allied 

armies  at  the  end  of  the  World 

War 
foif,  faith 

foire  f,  fair ;    champ  de  ~,  fair- 
ground 
foisj^,  time;  une  ~,  once  ;  deux~, 

twice ;  encore  une  ~,  once  more 
fol,  see  fou 
folle,/  of  fou 
fonder,  found 
font,  pres.  faire,  make,  do 
fontaine  f,  fountain 
force/,  might ;  force  (troops) ;  de 

toutes  ses  ~s,  with  all  his  might 
for§t  /,  forest 
forger,  forge 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


475 


forgeron  m.,  blacksmith 

forme  f.t  form,  shape 

former,  form 

fors,  except 

fort  adj.,  strong,  loud 

fort  adv.,  very  (much) 

forteresse/,  fortress 

fortifier,  fortify 

fortune/,  fortune 

fou  {before  a  vowel  f ol ;  f.  f olle, 

tn.pl.  fous),  crazy 
fouetter,  whip 
fouiller,  search 
foule  /,  crowd 
fourchette  /,  fork 
foyer  m.,  lobby 

fr.,  abbreviation  for  franc  (noun) 
frais  (f.  fraiche),  fresh,  cool;   il 

fait  <~>,  it  is  cool 
fraise/i,  strawberry 
franc  adj.  (f  franche),  frank 
franc  m.,  franc  (a  French  coin,  par 

value  about  20  cents) 
francais  adj.,  French 
francais  «r.,  French  (the  language); 

livre  de  ~,  French  textbook 
Francais  m.,  Frenchman 
France/!,  France 
franchement,  frankly 
Frangois,  Francis;    ~  I,  king  of 

France  (1 5 1 5-1 547) 
frapper,  knock,  strike 
Fr&teric,  Frederick 
frequenter,  frequent,  visit  often 
frere  m.,  brother 
froid  adj.,  cold 

froid  m.,  cold ;  avoir  ~,  be  cold 
froidement,  coldly 


fromage  m.,  cheese 

front  m.,  front  line 

frotter,  rub 

fruit  m.,  fruit  (of  one  sort);  pi., 
fruit  (collectively) 

fruitier  adj.  (f.  -ere),  fruits-bear- 
ing) 

fruitier  m.,  fruit  dealer 

fuir  (fuyant,  fui,  fuis,  fuis),  flee 

fumtef,  smoke 

fumer,  smoke ;  ~  la  pipe,  smoke 
a  pipe 

funeste,  fatal 

furent,  past  def  etre,  were 

fusse,  past  subj.  etre  (to  be) 

fut,  past  def.  etre,  was 

fut,  past  subj.  etre  (to  be) 

futur  adj.,  future 

futur  m.,  future  (tense) 

gagner,  earn,  gain,  make 

gai  [ge],  cheerful,  merry 

gant  m.,  glove 

garcon    m.,    boy,   waiter;    ~    de 

magasin,  clerk 
garde  f,  guard  (body  of  troops) 
garder,  keep,  guard 
gare/i,  railway  station  ;  chef  de  ~, 

station  agent 
garnir  (de),  trim  (with) 
gateau  m.  {pi.  -x),  cake 
gauche,  left;  a  ~,  to  (at,  on)  the 

left ;  de  ~,  left-hand 
Gaule/,  Gaul 
gaulois  adj.,  Gallic 
Gaulois  m.,  Gaul  (person) 
gaz  [ga:z]  m.,  gas 
geler,  freeze 


476 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


gener,  impede ;  se  ~,  stand  on 
ceremony 

general  m.  (pi.  -aux),  general 

g6ne>alement,  generally 

g£n£reux  (f.  -se),  generous 

g&lie  ».,  genius  ;  engineers 

genou  m.  (pi.  -x),  knee 

genre  m.,  race ;  ~  humain,  mankind 

gens  m.  and/,  pi.,  people 

gentil  [3a-ti]  (f.  -lie),  well-behaved 

gentilhomme  m.  (pi.  gentils- 
.  hommes),  gentleman,  nobleman 

geste  #*.,  gesture 

gilet  m.,  vest 

Gironde/!,  a  broad  river  in  south- 
west France 

glace/!,  ice 

gladiateur  m.,  gladiator 

gloire/!,  glory 

gorge  /.,  throat ;  avoir  mal  a  la  ~, 
have  a  sore  throat 

Goth  m.,  Goth 

gout  m.,  taste 

gouter  m.,  luncheon 

goutte/,  drop 

gouvernail  m.,  rudder 

gouvernement  m.,  government 

gouverner,  govern 

gracieux  (f.  -se),  gracious,  graceful 

graduellement,  gradually 

grammaire /!,  grammar;  lecon  de 
<*>,  grammar  lesson 

grand,  large,  tall  (326,/) 

grandeur/!,  grandeur 

grand'mere/!,  grandmother 

grand-pere  m.,  grandfather 


j-parents    m.  pi.,    grand- 
parents 

grange/,  barn 

gras  (f.  -sse),  fat 

grave,  serious 

graver,  carve 

gravure/!,  picture,  engraving 

grec  (f.  grecque),  Greek 

grippe/!,  influenza 

gris,  gray 

gronder,  roar,  rumble 

gros  (f.  -sse),  big,  stout;    en  ~, 
wholesale 

groupe  m.,  group 

guere,  but  little ;  Be  . . .  «&,  scarcely 

guerir,  cure 

guerre/!,  war 

guichet  m.,  (stamp)  window;   sta- 
tion 

guide  m.,  guidebook,  guide 

guillotiner,  guillotine 

habiller,    dress  (/r.);     s'~,    dress 

(intr.) 
habit  m.,  (dress)  coat 
habitant  711.,  inhabitant 
habitation/!,  residence,  dwelling 
habiter,  inhabit 
habitude/!,  habit 
habituer,  accustom;  s'~,  become 

accustomed 
*haine/!,  hate 
*hair  (hai'ssant,  hai,   hais,   hai's), 

hate 
*halle  /.,   market;    ~  aux  vins, 

wine  market 


An  aspirate  h  (52). 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


477 


*hangar  m.,  shed 

*hardi,  bold 

*  haricot  m.%  bean ;  ~  vert,  string 

bean 
*hasard  m.,  chance 
*hasarder,  risk ;  se  ~  (a),  venture 

(to),  chance  (to) 
*hate/i,  haste 
*hater,  hasten  (tr.)\  se  ~,  hasten 

{intr.) 
*haut,  high,  loud;  loudly;  en  ~, 

upstairs 
*haut  m.t  top 
helas  1  [e-la:s]  alas ! 
*heler,  call,  hail 
Henri,    Henry;     ~   IV,    king    of 

France  ( 1 5  89- 1 6 1  o) 
herbe/,  grass 
hSroique,  heroic 
*heros  m.,  hero 
hesitation/,  hesitation 
hesiter,  hesitate 
heure  /.,  hour ;  o'clock,  time ;  <~>s 

de  loisir,  leisure  time;  de  bonne 

~,  early;   a  P~,  on  time;   V<*> 

qu'il  est,  the  present  time 
heureusement,   happily;    ~  que, 

lucky  that 
heureux  (/   -se),    happy;    ~  de, 

happy  to 
*hibou  m.  {pi.  -x),  owl 
hier  [i-e:r],  yesterday ;  avant-~,  day 

before  yesterday ;    ~  soir,  last 

night,  yesterday  evening 
hirondelle/.,  swallow 
histoire/i,  history,  story 


historien  0*.,  historian 

hiver  [i-ve:r]  m.,  winter ;  en  «*>,  in 

(the)  winter 
*homard  m.t  lobster 
Homere  m.,  Homer,  the  Greek  poet 
homme  m.,  man 
honnete,  honest;  polite  (326,/) 
honneur  m.,  honor 
honoraires  m,  j>/.,  fee 
honorer,  honor 
*honte  /.,   shame;    avoir  <*>,  be 

ashamed 
horloge/,  clock 
horriblement,  horribly 
*hors,  out  (of) 
*hors-d'ceuvre  m.,  side  dish 
hospitalier  (/  -ere),  hospitable 
hostile,  hostile 
hote  m.t  host;  guest 
hotel  «.,  hotel;   ~>  de  ville,  city 

hall ;  Hotel-Dieu,  hospital 
*Hug0   (Victor),   a  great  French 

writer  of  the  last  century 
*huit  [qit ;   216,  a  J,  eight ;  ~  jours, 

a  week 
*huitieme,  eighth 
huitre,/  oyster 
humain,  human 
humble,  humble,  lowly 
hymne  [imn]  m.,  hymn 

ici,  here ;  par  ~,  this  way 
idealisme  m.,  idealism 
idee/,  idea 

ignorance  /.,  ignorance 
il,  he,  it 


An  aspirate  h  (52). 


478 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


He/.,  island 

illustre,  famous 

illustre\  illustrated,  with  pictures 

ils,  they 

imaginaire,  imaginary 

imagination  /,  imagination 

imbecile  m.,  dunce 

imm&liatement,  immediately 

immortel  {/.  -lie),  immortal 

imparfait  m.,  imperfect . 

imperatif  m.,  imperative 

impenssable,  imperishable 

impopulaire,  unpopular 

important,  important 

importer,  be  important 

imposant,  imposing 

impossible,  impossible 

impression/^,  impression 

impur,  impure 

inaptitude/,  inaptitude 

incarc£rer,  imprison 

incarnation  / ,  i  ncarnation 

incident  «*.,  incident 

inconnu,  unknown 

inddpendant,  independent 

indicateur  m.,  guide;  «o  des  che- 
mins  de  fer,  railroad  tjme-table 

indicatif  m.,  indicative 

indiquer,  point  out 

industriel  m.,  manufacturer,  busi- 
ness man 

inevitable,  inevitable 

infinitif  m.,  infinitive 

influence/,  influence 
ingrat,  sterile  (of  soil) 
inoubliable,  never  to  be  forgotten 
inquiet  (/  -ete),  uneasy 
inscription/,  inscription 


inscrire  (inscrivant,  inscrit,  in- 
scris,  inscrivis),  inscribe 

inspiration/,  inspiration 

inspirer  (a),  inspire  (in) 

instant  m.,  moment 

institut  m.,  institute 

instituteur  m.,  teacher 

institution/,  institution 

insulter,  insult 

intelligent,  bright 

intention  /,  intention ;  avoir  l'~ 
(de),  intend  (to) 

intentionne\  intentioned 

interessant,  interesting 

inteneur  m.,  interior;  a  l'~,  with- 
in, inside 

interroger,  question 

intriguer,  puzzle 

inutile,  useless 

invalide,  disabled;  h6tel  des  In- 
valides,  Soldiers'  Home  (at  Paris) 

invasion/,  invasion 

inviter  (a),  invite  (to) 

ir-,fut.,  cond.  aller  (to  go) 

ironique,  ironical 

ironiquement,  ironically 

irr^flgchi,  thoughtless 

Italie/,  Italy 

italien  (/  -nne),  Italian 

itineraire  m.,  itinerary 

j\  elided  form  ofje 

jadis  [3a-dis],  formerly 

jaloux  (/  -se),  jealous 

jamais,  ever,  never ;  a  ~,  forever; 

ne  .  .  .  <*>,  never 
jambe/,  leg 
Janvier  m.7  January 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


479 


Japon  m.,  Japan 

jaquette/i,  (woman's)  coat 

jardin  m.,  garden 

jardiniere :  a  la  ~,  with  vegetables 

jaune,  yellow 

je,  I 

Jean,  John 

Jeanne,  Joan,  Jane ;  ~  d'Arc,  the 

French  heroine 
jeter  (jett-  before  a  mute  syllable), 

throw 
jeu  m.  (pi.  -x),  game,  sport;   ~ 

d'esprit,  riddle;    maison  de  <*>, 

gambling  house 
jeudi  m.,  Thursday 
jeun :  a  ~,  fasting 
jeune,  young 
jeunesse/,  youth 
joie/,  joy 
joindre    (joignant,     joint,     joins, 

joignis),  join  (tr.) ;  se  ~  a,  join 

(intr.) 
joli,  pretty 
joliment,  prettily 
jouer,  play 
jouir  (de),  enjoy 
joujou  m.  (pi.  -x),  plaything 
jour  m.,  day;  un~,  some  day;  huit 

<~s,aweek;  denost*>s,inourday; 

~  de  Pan,  New  Year's  Day 
journal  m.  (pi.  -aux),  newspaper 
journaliste  m.,  journalist 
journeX/1,  day  (with  its  happenings) 
juge  m.,  judge 
juillet  m.,  July 
juin  m.,  June 
Jules,  Julius 
Julie,  Julia 


jumeau  (/  jumelle),  twin 

jupe/,  skirt 

jus  ;//.,  juice,  gravy 

jusque,  up  to,  even ;  jusqu'a,  even 

to,  as  far  as,  until ;    jusqu'a  ce 

que,  until.;    jusqu'alors,  up  to 

that  time 
juste,  just ;  c'est  ~,  that 's  right 
justice  f,  justice ;    rendre  la  «~, 

administer  justice 

kilo  m.,  kilogram  (2.2  pounds) 
kilometre  m.,  kilometer  (.62  miles) 

1',  elided  form  ofle  and  la 

la,/!  ofle :  art.,  the ;  pron.,  her,  it 

la,  there  (1 94);  par-ci  par-~,  here 

and  there 
la-bas,  over  there,  yonder 
labeur  **.,  labor,  toil 
lac  m.,  lake 
laine/i,  wool 
laisser,  let 
lait  m.,  milk 
laitue/i,  lettuce 
langue/i,  language;  tongue 
laquelle,/!  ^/"lequel 
large,  broad,  wide 
largeur/,  width 
laver,  wash 

le  art.  (f  la,  pi.  les),  the 
lepron.  (f  la, pi.  les),  him,  it;  so 
le$onf,  lesson 
lecture  /,  reading ;  lecon  de  ~, 

reading  lesson 
16gende/,  legend 
\6ger  (/  -ere),  light,  slight 
legion/!,  legion 


48o 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


legislatif  (/.  -ve),  legislative 
legitime,  legitimate 
legume  m.,  vegetable 
lendemain  m.,  next  day 
lequel  int.  ftron.  (f.  laquelle,  pi. 

lesquels,  lesquelles);  which 
lequel  rel.  ftron.  (f.  laquelle,  ftl. 

lesquels,  lesquelles),  which,  that, 

who,  whom 
les,  ftl.  ofle,  la  :  art.,  the  ;  ftron., 

them 
lesquels,  ftl.  of  lequel 
lettre  /.,  letter ;  a  la  ~,  literally, 

exactly  ;  boite  aux  ~s,  letter  box ; 

en  toutes  ~s,  in  full 
leur  fters.  ftron.,  to  them,  them 
leur  ftoss.  adj.  {ftl.  -s),  their ;  le  ~ 

ft oss.  ftron.,  theirs 
lever,  raise ;  se  ~,  arise,  get  up 
liberal  (ftl.  -aux),  liberal 
liberty/,  liberty 
libraire  m.,  bookseller 
libre,  free 
lieu  m.  (ftl.  -x),  place;   avoir  ^, 

take  place ;    donner  ~  a,  give 

rise  to 
ligne/i,  line;  pecher  a  la  ~,  fish, 

angle 
limited,  limit 
linge  m.,  linen 
lire  (lisant,  lu,  lis,  lus),  read 
lis,  fires,  ind.,  imv.  lire,  read 
lis  [lis]  m.,  lily 

lisant,  ftres.  ftart.  lire,  reading 
lisons,  lisez,  lisent,  ftres.  lire,  read 
liste/,  list 
lit,  ftres.  lire,  reads 
lit  m.,  bed 


litre  m.,  liter  (about  a  quart) 

litt^raire,  literary 

literature  f. ,  li  terature 

livre  m.,  book 

Xxvxef.,  pound 

locality/,  locality 

locomotive /.,  locomotive 

locution/],  saying 

loif.,  law 

loin,  far 

Loire  /.,  Loire,  a  large  river  in 
central  France 

loisir  m.,  leisure ;  heures  de  ~, 
leisure  time 

Londres  m.,  London 

long  adj.  (f.  longue),  long 

long  m.,  length  ;  le  ~  de,  along,  by 

longtemps,  long,  a  long  time 

longuement,  at  length 

longueur/,  length 

Lorraine  /.,  a  province  in  north- 
east France 

lors,  then ;  ~  de,  at  the  time  of 

lorsque,  when 

lot  m.,  parcel,  lot 

louer,  praise ;  rent 

Louis,  Louis;  ~  XIV,  king  of 
France  (1643-17 15);  ~  XV, 
king  of  France  (1 7 1 5-1 774);  ~ 
XVI,  king  of  France  (1 774— 
1792);  ~-Philippe,  king  of 
France  (1830- 1848) 

lourd,  heavy 

Louvre  m.,  a  famous  museum  in 
Paris 

lu,  ftast  ftart.  lire,  read 

lui,  to  him,  him,  to  her,  her,  to  it; 
disj.,  he,  it 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


481 


lui-m§me,  himself,  itself 

luire  (luisant,  lui,  luis,  luisis),  shine 

lumiere/,  light 

lundi  m.,  Monday 

lune/,  moon 

luxe  «.,  luxury 

Luxembourg  m.,  a  famous  palace 

and  garden  in  Paris 
Lyon    m.,    Lyons,    an    important 

French  city 
lyrique,  lyric 

M.,  abbreviation  for  monsieur 

m',  elided  form,  of  me 

ma,/  of  mon,  my 

MacMahon,  a  French  marshal 

madame  f  {pi.  mesdames),  Mrs., 
madam 

Madeleine/.,  a  church  in  Paris 

mademoiselle  f.  {pi.  mesdemoi- 
selles),  Miss 

magasin  m.,  store ;  fille  de  ~, 
clerk,  salesgirl;  garcon  de  ~, 
clerk ;  ~  de  nouveautSs,  depart- 
ment store 

magistrat  m.,  magistrate 

magnifique,  magnificent 

magnitude/,  size 

mai  m.,  May 

main/,  hand 

maintenant,  now 

maintenu,  past  part,  maintenir, 
held 

maire  m.,  mayor  (administrator  of 
a  French  commune) 

mais  co?ij.,  but 

mais  intj.,  why !  ~  oui  (si) !  yes 
indeed ! 


maison  [me-z5]  /,  house ;  a  la  ~, 
at  home 

maitre  in.,  teacher  (of  a  primary 
school) ;  e*  d'£cole,  schoolmaster ; 
e>»  d' hotel,  steward 

maitresse/,  schoolmistress 

majestueux  (/  -se),  imposing 

majeur,  important,  great 

mal  adv.,  badly,  ill 

mal  m.  {pi.  maux),  evil,  harm, 
pain ;  faire  «•  a,  hurt ;  avoir  ~  a 
la  gorge,  have  a  sore  throat ;  avoir 
<X5  a  la  tete,  have  a  headache ;  ~ 
d'estomac,  stomach  ache    - 

malade  adj.,  sick 

malade  m.  andf,  patient 

maladie/,  disease 

male,  vigorous,  manly 

malgre\  in  spite  of 

malin  (/  maligne),  mischievous, 
sly,  shrewd 

malle/,  trunk ;  faire  une  ~,  pack 
a  trunk 

manche/,  sleeve 

manchette/,  cuff 

manger,  eat;  salle  a  ~,  dining- 
room 

maniere/,  manner 

manque  m.,  lack 

manquer  (de),  fail  (to) 

manteau  m.  {pi.  -x),  cloak 

maquereau  m.  {pi.  -x),  mackerel 

maquignon  m.,  dealer,  jobber 

marchand  m.,  merchant;  <*> ambu- 
lant, pushcart  peddler 

marchander,  bargain,  haggle 

marchandise  /,  merchandise ; 
freight 


482 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


marche"  m.,  market;  bargain;  au 
~,  to  market ;  bon  ~,  cheap ;  ~ 
aux  fleurs,  flower  market 

marcher,  walk,  march 

mardi  m.,  Tuesday 

marecage  m.,  swamp 

marechal  m.,  marshal 

mari  m.,  husband 

Marie,  Mary ;  ^-Antoinette,  wife 
of  Louis  XVI,  an  Austrian  by 
birth 

maritime,  maritime 

mars  [ma:rs]  m.,  March 

Marseillaise  /.',  French  national 
hymn 

Marseille  f,  Marseilles,  a  city  in 
southern  France 

math^maticien  m.,  mathematician 

math£matique/!,  mathematics 

matin  adv.,  early 

matin  m.,  morning,  a.m.;  le  ~, 
in  the  morning,  mornings 

maudire  (maudissant,  maudit, 
maudis,  maudis),  curse 

mauvais  [mo-ve],  bad 

maux,  pi.  ofmal 

mayonnaise,  mayonnaise 

me,  me,  to  me ;  refl.,  myself 

m£chant,  naughty,  wicked,  poor 
(326,/) 

m£decin  m.,  doctor,  physician 

m^decine/,  medicine 

medicament  m.,  medicine 

M^dicis  m.,  Medici,  a  famous  Ital- 
ian family 

M£diterran£e_/;,  Mediterranean 

m£fait  m.,  misdeed 

meilleur,  better ;  le  ~,  (the)  best 


membre  m.,  member 

meme,  same,  self,  even;  en  <*> 
temps,  at  the  same  time ;  ~  de"ja, 
before  this ;  un  ~,  one  and  the 
same  ;  de  <*>,  likewise 

rnkmovref,  memory 

menaced,  threat 

mener,  lead 

mens,  mentez,  pres.  mentir,  lie 

mentionner,  mention 

mentir  (mentant,  menti,  mens, 
mentis),  lie  (tell  a  falsehood) 

menu  m.,  menu,  bill  of  fare 

m£pris  **.,  scorn 

mer/,  sea 

merci,  thank  you 

mercredi  m.,  Wednesday 

mere/],  mother 

m^rite  m,t  merit 

m£riter,  deserve 

mes,  pi.  0/"mon,  my 

mesdames,  pi.  of  madame 

mesdemoiselles,  pi.  of  mademoi- 
selle 

message  m.,  message 

messieurs,//,  0/"  monsieur 

mesure/i,  measure ;  sur  ~,  made 
to  order 

mesurer,  measure 

met,  pres.  mettre,  puts 

m^thode/;,  method 

metre  m.,  meter  (39.37  inches) 

mettre  (mettant,  mis,  mets,  mis), 
put,  put  on,  place  ;  se  ^  a,  begin 
to;  se  ~  au  beau,  become  fine 
(weather) 

meubl6,  furnished 

meubles  m.  pi.,  furniture 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


483 


meurs,  meurt,  pres.  mourir,  die, 

dies 
meutey^,  pack  (of  hounds) 
midi  m.,  noon,  twelve  o'clock 
mien :  le  ~  (f.  la  mienne),  mine 
mieux,  better,  preferable;    le  ~, 
(the)  best;  faire  de  son  ~,  do 
one's  best ;  valoir  ~,  be  better, 
be  preferable 
mil  [mil],  thousand  (in  dates) 
milieu  /«.,  middle ;  au  ~  de,  in  the 
middle  of;   tout  au  ~,  right  in 
the  middle 
militaire,  military 
mille  [mil],  (a)  thousand 
mille  [mil]  m.,  mile 
milliard  [mi-lja:r]  m.,  billion 
millier  [mi-lje]  m.,  thousand 
million  [mi-lj5]  m.,  million 
mineur,  lesser,  smaller 
ministre  m,,  minister 
minuit  m.,  midnight,  twelve  o'clock 
miserable,  miserable,  wretched 
mit,  past  def  mettre,  put 
MUe,  abbreviation  for  mademoi- 
selle 
MM.,  abbreviation  for  messieurs 
Mme,  abbreviation  for  madame 
mobilier  m.,  furnishings,  furniture 
mode  m.,  method  ;  mode,  mood 
mode/;,  fashion,  style 
modele  m.,  model 
moderne,  modern 
modeste,  modest 
modiste  m.  andf,  milliner 
moeurs  [mce:rs]_/^/.,  morals 
moi,  me,  to  me,  I 
moi-meme,  myself 


moindre,  less ;  le  ~,  (the)  least 

moins  (de),  less,  fewer ;  le  ~,  (the) 
least,  fewest ;  au  ~}  at  least ;  a 
~  que,  unless 

mois  m.,  month 

moisson/i,  harvest 

moitte/,  half 

mol,  see  mou 

Moliere  /«.,  a  great  French  drama- 
tist of  the  seventeenth  century 

molle,  fof  mou 

moment  /«.,  moment,  while 

mon  (f  ma,  pi.  mes),  my 

monde  m.,  world,  people ;  tout  le 
<*>,  everybody ;  du  ~,  company 

monnaie/,  change,  money 

monsieur  [ma-sjo]  m.  {pi.  mes- 
sieurs), Mr.,  sir ;  gentleman 

mont  m.,  mount 

montagne/,  mountain 

monter,  climb,  go  up(stairs);  get 
in ;  cv.  a  cheval,  ride  horseback 

montre  verb,  show(s) 

montre/!,  watch 

montrer,  show ;  montrez-moi,  show 
me 

monument  m.,  monument,  object 
of  interest 

moquer :  se  ~  de,  make  fun  of 

morceau  m.  (pi.  -x),  piece ;  selection 

morcellement  m.,  parceling  out, 
subdivision 

mordre,  bite 

mort,  past  part,  mourir,  died,  dead 

mort/,  death 

mortel  (f  -He),  mortal 

mot  m.,  word,  saying 

motif  m.,  motive 


484 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


mou  {before  a  vowel  mol ;  f.  molle, 

m.  pi.  mous),  soft 
mouchoir  m.,  handkerchief 
moudre  (moulant,  moulu,  mouds, 

moulus),  grind 
moulin  m.t  mill 
mourir    (mourant,    mort,    meurs, 

mourus),  die 
mourut,  past  def.  mourir,  died 
mousse/.,  moss 
moustache/,  mustache 
mouton  m.,  mutton 
mouvement    m.,    moving    about, 

movement 
mouvoir  (mouvant,  mu,  meus,  mus), 

move 
moyen    adj.   (f.  -nne),    average, 

middle 
moyen  m.,  means,  way 
mugir,  bellow 
multitude/,  multitude 
munir  (de),  furnish  (with) 
mur  m.,  wall 
mur,  ripe 
murir,  ripen 
musee  m.,  museum 
musicien  m.,  musician 
musique/,  music 

n',  elided  form  ofne 

nager,  swim 

naissance/,  birth 

naitre  (naissant,  n£,  nais,  naquis), 
be  born 

Napoleon,  Napoleon ;  «»'  I  (Bona- 
parte), emperor  of  France  (i  804- 
1814);  ~  HI,  emperor  of  the 
French  (1852-1870) 


nappe/,  tablecloth 

naquit,  past  def  naitre,  was  born 

nasal  {pi.  -aux),  nasal 

natal,  native 

nation/,  nation 

national  {pi.  -aux),  national 

nature/,  nature 

naturel  (/  -He),  natural 

naturellement,  naturally,  of  course 

navarin  m.,  stew,  ragout 

ne,  not;    not  translated,  see  305 

and 307,  a,  Note;  «> .  .  .  pas,  not 
ne*,  past  part,  naitre,  born 
ne*cessaire,  necessary 
n£cessit6/,  necessity 
n£gliger,  neglect 
neige/,  snow 
neiger,  snow 
net  [net]  (/  -tte),  clear 
nettoyer,  clean 

neuf  (/  neuve),  new  (newly  made) 
neuf  (216,  a),  nine 
neuvieme,  ninth 
neveu  m.  {pi.  -x),  nephew 
nez  m.,  nose 
ni,  nor ;  ne  .  .  .  ~  ne,  neither  .  .  . 

nor ;  ne  .  .  .  ~  .  .  .  ~,  neither  .  .  . 

nor ;  see  1 7 1 
nid  m.,  nest 
niece/,  niece 
nier,  deny 

Nimes/,  a  city  in  southern  France 
noble,  noble 
noir,  black 
noix/,  nut 
nom  m.,  name 
nombre  m.,  number 
nombreux  (/  -se),  numerous 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


485 


nommer,  name 

nommez,  name 

non,  no 

nord  /«.,  north 

nord-ouest  [nor-dwest]  m.,  north- 
west 

Normandie/i,  Normandy,  a  prov- 
ince in  northern  France 

nos,  pi.  #/"notre,  our 

notamment,  notably 

notre^w.  adj.  {pi.  nos),  our 

notre  :  le  ~  poss.  pron.,  ours 

Notre-Dame/,  a  cathedral  in  Paris 

nouer,  tie 

nourrir,  feed,  support;  se  ~  de, 
live  upon 

nous,  we,  us,  to  us ;  d/sj.,  us,  we ; 
refl.,  ourselves  ;  ~  tous,  we  all, 
all  of  us 

nous-memes,  ourselves 

nouveau  {before  a  vowel nouvel ;  f. 
nouvelle, m.  pi.  nouveaux),  new, 
different  (326,/);  de  <*>,  again 

nouvel,  see  nouveau 

nouvelle,/  ^/ nouveau 

nouvelles  /.pi.,  news ;  recevoir  de 
vos  ~,  get  news  from  you 

novembre  m.\  November 

noyer  m.,  walnut  tree 

nuage  m.,  cloud 

nuire  (nuisant,  nui,  nuis,  nuisis), 
injure 

nuit  /.,  night ;  de  la  *»,  the  night 
long 

nul  {/.  -He),  no 

numenque,  numerical 

numero  m.,  number 

nymphe/,  nymph 


oasis  [wa-zis]/,  oasis 
ob&r  (a),  obey 
obelisque  m.,  obelisk 
oberleutenant    m.    {a    German- 

Fre?ich  word),  first  lieutenant 
obligeant,  obliging 
obliger,  oblige 
obtenir  (obtenant,  obtenu,  obtiens, 

obtins),  obtain 
occasion/^,  occasion,  chance;  a  la 

moindre  ~,  on  the  least  occasion ; 

d'~,  second-hand 
occidental  {pi.  -aux),  western 
occupy,  busy,  occupied 
occuper,  occupy 
ocean  ///.,  ocean 
octobre  «r.j  October 
odieux  {/.  -se),  odious 
ceil  m.  {pi.  yeux),  eye ;  coup  d'~>, 

glance 
OBuf  m.  {pi.  ceufs  [0]),  egg 
ceuvre/!,  work 

offert,  past  part,  offrir,  offered 
officier  m.t  officer 
offrir  (offrant,  offert,  offre,  offris), 

offer 
oh!  oh! 

oiseau  m.  {pi.  -x),  bird 
omelette/,  omelet 
omnibus  [om-ni-bys]  m.:  ~  a  che- 

vaux,  omnibus  drawn  by  horses 
on,  one,  we,  you,  they  ;  somebody, 

people  (242,  243) ;  l'~,  see  243, 

Note  2 
oncle  m.,  uncle 
ont,  pres.  avoir,  have 
onze,  eleven 
op£ra  m.,  opera,  opera  house 


486 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


orw.,  gold ;  d'~>,  gold,  of  gold 
orage  m.,  storm 
orageux  (f.  -se),  stormy 
orange/,  orange 
orchestre  m.,  orchestra 
ordinaire,  ordinary 
ordinairement,  ordinarily 
ordonner,  order 
ordre  m.,  order ;  donner  P~  (de), 

give  orders  (to) 
oreille/,  ear 

original  (pi.  -aux),  original 
Orleans  m.,  Orleans,  a  city  in  France 
orner  (de),  ornament  (with) 
orthographe  /.,  spelling,  orthog- 
raphy 
os  [ds]  m.  (pi.  os  [o]),  bone 
oser,  dare 
Ostende/,  Ostend,  a  Belgian  town 

on  the  North  Sea 
oter,  take  off 
ou,  or 
oil,  where ;    at  which,  in  which ; 

d'~,  whence,  from  where;  par 

«>,  through  which 
oublier,  forget 
ouest  [west]  m.,  west;    a  l'~,  in 

the  west 
oui,  yes ;  mais  <*> !  yes  indeed ! 
ours  [urs]  ?n.,  bear 
outre :  en  ~,  besides 
ouvert,  past  part,  ouvrir,  opened, 

open 
ouverture/,  opening 
ouvrage  m.,  work 
ouvrir    (ouvrant,    ouvert,    ouvre, 

ouvris),  open 
ovale,  oval 


page/,  page 

paie,  pres.  payer,  pay(s) 

paille/,  straw 

pain  m.,  bread 

paire/,  pair 

paix/,  peace 

palais  m.,  palace 

pale,  pale 

pancarte/,  placard 

panier  m.,  crate,  basket 

pan  talon  m.,  trousers 

papier  m.,  paper 

paquet  m.,  bundle 

par,  through,  by;  with  units  of 

time,  2l\    ev>-ci  ~-la,   here  and 

there  ;  ~  ici,  this  way 
paradis  m.,  paradise 
paragraphe  m.,  paragraph 
paraitre  (paraissant,  paru,  parais, 

parus),  appear 
parapluie  m.,  umbrella 
pare  m,t  park 
parce  que,  because 
parcourir    (parcourant,    parcouru, 

parcours,  parcourus),pass  through 
pardessus  m.,  overcoat 
pardon  m.,  pardon 
pardonner  (a),  pardon 
pareil  (f.  -lie),  like,  similar 
parents  m.  pi.,  parents 
paresseux  (/  -se),  lazy,  idle 
parfaitement,  excellently 
parfum  m.,  perfume 
Paris  m.,  Paris 
parisien  (/  -nne),  Parisian 
parlement  m.,  parliament 
parler,  speak,  talk ;  ~  de,  talk  about, 

speak  of ;  entendre  ~,  hear  tell 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


487 


parmi,  among 

parole/,  word 

pars,  pres.  partir,  start 

parseine"  (de),  dotted  (with) 

part,  pres.  partir,  starts 

part  /.,  part,  share  ;  prendre  ~  a, 
take  part  in ;  de  la  ~  de,  on  the 
part  of  ;  de  ma  ~,  from  me 

partager,  share 

partez,  pres.  partir,  start 

parti,  past  part,  partir,  started 

parti  m.,  party  (political) 

partial,  partial 

participation  /,  participation 

participe  m.,  participle 

particulier  (/  -ere),  private,  pe- 
culiar, particular 

particulierement,  particularly 

partie/,  part;  party,  game 

partir  (partant,  parti,  pars,  partis), 
start,  leave 

partout,  everywhere 

parut,  past  def.  paraitre,  appeared 

parvis  m.y  space  before  a  church 

pas  adv.,  not ;  ne  .  .  .  ~,  not ;  ne 
.  . .  ~  de,  no,  not  any,  not  a ; 
~  du  tout,  by  no  means 

pas  m.,  step  ;  strait 

passage  m.t  passage 

passe"  adj.,  past,  last 

pass6  «.,  past 

passeport  m.,  passport 

passer,  pass,  go  by ;  spend  (time) ; 
se  ~  de,  do  without 

patrie^,  native  land 

patriote  m.,  patriot 

pauvre,  poor;  needy  (326,/) 

pauvret6_/i,  poverty 


Pavie,/,  Pavia,  a  city  in  Italy 
payer  (pai-  before  a  mute  syllable), 

pay,  pay  for 
pays  m.,  country 
pay  sage  m.t  landscape 
paysan  m.  (f.  -nne),  peasant 
peau/  (pi.  -x),  skin 
pechey^,  peach 
peche/,  fishing 

pecher,  fish ;  ~  a  la  ligne,  fish,  angle 
p<§dagogie/,  pedagogy 
peigne  m,t  comb 
peigner,  comb ;  se  ~,  comb  one's 

hair 
peindre   (peignant,    peint,   peins, 

peignis),  paint 
peine  f.,  trouble ;  a  ~,  scarcely ; 

prendre  (se  donner)  la  cv>  (de), 

take  the  trouble  (to) 
peintre  ;;/.,  painter 
peinture/,  painting 
penchant  ///.,  inclination 
pendant,  during,  for ;  ~  que,  while 
pens^e/i,  thought 
penser,  think ;  ~  a,  think  of,  think 

about  (put  the  mind  on) ;  ~  de, 

think  of,  think  about  (have  an 

opinion  of) 
penseur  m.t  thinker 
pension/!,  boarding  house 
perdre,  lose 
pere  m.,  father 
permettre    (permettant,    permis, 

permets,  permis),  permit 
persil  [per-si]  m.t  parsley 
personnage  m.,  personage 
personnel,  person ;  m.,  anybody, 

nobody ;  ne  .  .  .  ««,  nobody 


488 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


personnel  (f.  -lie),  personal 

personnifier,  impersonate 

perte/i,  loss,  casualties 

petit,  little,  small ;  petty  (326,/) 

pgtrir,  knead 

peu  (de),  little,  few  ;  ~  a  ~,  little  by 

little,  gradually ;  sous  <*>,  shortly 
peuple  m.,  people,  tribe 
peupler  (de),  people  (with) 
peur/!,  fear ;  avoir  ~,  be  afraid 
peut,  pres.  pouvoir,  can  ;  on  ne  ~ 

plus,  exceedingly,  extremely 
peut-etre,  perhaps 
peux,  peuvent,  pres.  pouvoir,  can 
pharmacien  m.,  druggist 
photo  f.,  photo,  photograph 
photographie/i,  photograph 
phrase  f.,  sentence,  phrase 
piano  m.,  piano 
piece  f.}  piece ;  room 
pied  m.,  foot 

pedestal  m.  {pi.  -aux),  pedestal 
Pierre,  Peter 
piston  7//.,  pedestrian 
pigeon  m.,  pigeon,  squab 
pipe  f.,  pipe ;  fumer  la  <~>,  smoke 

a  pipe 
piquant,  sharp 
pire,  worse ;  le  <v}  (the)  worst 
pis,  worse ;  le  «»,  (the)  worst 
pittoresque,  picturesque 
place/!,  seat  (in  a  theater);  place, 

space,  room ;  square  (in  a  city) ; 

os  du  parvis,  church  square 
placer,  place 
plaire  (plaisant,  plu,  plais,  plus), 

please  (intr.) ;  ~  a,  please  {tr.) 
plaisir  m.,  pleasure 


plait,  pres.  plaire,  pleases;  s'il 
vous  (te)  plait,  if  you  please; 
~-il  ?  what  did  you  say  ? 

plan  m.,  plan,  ground;  arriere-~, 
background ;  premier  ~,  fore- 
ground 

plat  m.,  dish,  plate;  deux  ~s  au 
choix,  choice  of  two  dishes 

platre  m.,  plaster 

plein,  full 

pleurer,  weep 

pleuvoir  (pleuvant,  plu,  il  pleut,  il 
plut),  rain 

pluie/,  rain 

plume/,  pen 

plupart  f*,  greater  part,  most ;  la 
«*>  (des),  most  (of) ;  pour  la  ~, 
generally 

pluriel  »».,  plural 

plus  (de),  more  (105);  no  more, 
no  longer ;  le  ~,  (the)  most ;  ne 
...  ~,  no  more,  no  longer ;  de 
~  en  <x>,  more  and  more 

plusieurs,  several 

Plutarque  m.,  Plutarch,  a  Greek 
biographer 

plutot,  rather 

poche/,  pocket 

poesie_/i,  poetry 

poete  m.,  poet 

point  adv.,  not  at  all ;  ne  .  .  .  <~>, 
not  at  all 

point  m.,  point,  place  ;  sur  le  *»  de, 
on  the  point  of,  about  to 

poire/,  pear 

poirier  m.,  pear  tree 

pois  *».,  pea:  petits  ~,  green 
peas 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


489 


poisson  m.,  fish 

poitrine/,  chest 

poli,  polite 

politique  adj.,  political 

politique/,  politics 

pomme  /.,  apple;  *a  de  terre,  po- 
tato ;  ~s  nouvelles,  new  potatoes 

pommier  in.,  apple  tree 

pont  in.,  bridge 

populaire,  popular 

population/^,  population 

pore  [po:r]  m.t  pig ;  pork 

portail  in.,  front,  portal 

porte/,  door 

porte-plume  m.,  penholder 

porter,  carry,  bear,  wear ;  se  ~, 
be  (of  health) ;  comment  vous 
portez-vous  ?  how  do  you  do  ? 

portiere  f.,  door  (of  an  omnibus) 

portrait  m.,  portrait 

poser,  put,  place 

position/!,  position 

posse'der,  possess 

possible,  possible 

postal  (pi.  -aux),  postal 

poste/i,  post;  bureau  de  ~,  post 
office ;  mettre  a  la  ~,  post,  mail ; 
~  restante,  general  delivery 

poster,  place,  station,  post 

potage  in.,  soup 

pou  m.  (pi.  -x),  louse 

poulet  »».,  chicken 

pouls  [pu]  m.t  pulse 

pour,  for;  with  inf.,  in  order  to; 
~  que,  in  order  that;  <*>  dix 
francs,  ten  francs1  worth 

pourboire  m.,  tip 

pourquoi,  why 


pourr-,  fut.,  cond.  pouvoir  (to  be 

able) 
pourvoir     (pourvoyant,     pourvu, 

pourvois,  pourvus)  (de),  provide 

(with) 
pourvu  que,  provided  that,  if  only 
pousser,  grow 
pouvoir  (pouvant,  pu,  peux  (puis), 

pus),  be  able,  can 
pouvoir  ;//.,  power 
pre"  m.,  field,  pasture,  meadow 
precedent,  preceding 
precher,  preach 
pr&ieux  (f.  -se),  precious 
pr£cipiter,  hasten 
pr^dicateur  m.,  preacher 
prefecture  (f.)  de  police,   police 

headquarters 
pr^f^rable,  preferable 
pr^f^rer,  prefer 
pr£fet   111.,  prefect  (administrator 

of  a  French  department) 
premier  (f.  -ere),  first;  ~  plan, 

foreground 
prendre  (prenant  pris,  prends,  pris), 

take,  get ;  ~  a,  take  from 
preparatif  in.,  preparation 
prepare,  prepared 
preparer,  prepare 
pres  de,  near 

prescription/,  prescription 
prescrire     (prescrivant,     present, 

prescris,   prescrivis),  prescribe 
present  m.,  present  (time) 
presenter,  introduce 
president  m.,  president 
presque,  almost 
presse,  hurried,  in  a  hurry,  busy 


490 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


pressentir  (pressentant,  pressen- 
ti,  pressens,  pressentis),  foresee, 
guess 

pret  (a),  ready  (to) 

preter,  lend 

pr£tre  m.,  priest 

preVenir  (prevenant,  pre>enu,  pr6- 
viens,  pre>ins),  inform,  tell 

prier,  pray,  beg;  je  vous  prie, 
please  (I  beg  you) 

priere  f.,  prayer ;  ~  de  ne  pas, 
please  not 

primaire,  elementary 

prince  m.,  prince 

princesses,  princess 

principal  (pi.  -aux),  principal 

principalement,  principally,  mainly 

principaut^/i,  principality 

printemps  m.t  spring;  au  ~,  in 
(the)  spring 

pris,  past  part,  prendre,  taken 

prise  f.t  capture 

prison/:,  prison 

prisonnier  m.  (f.  -ere),  prisoner 

prit,  past  def.  prendre,  took 

prix  m.,  price 

probable,  probable 

prochain,  next 

proche,  near 

proclamation/:,  proclamation 

proclamer,  proclaim 

procurer,  procure 

produit,  past  part,  produire,  pro- 
duced 

professeur  m.,  professor 

profond,  deep 

progres,  m.,  progress 

promenade^,  walk 


promener,  walk,  take  for  a  walk ; 

se  ~,  take  a  walk 
promeneur  m.  and/.,  pedestrian 
promesse/:,  promise;  tenir  sa  <~, 

keep  one's  promise 
promettre    (promettant,    promis, 

promets,  promis),   promise;     ~ 

de,  promise  to 
promis,    past   part,    promettre, 

promised 
prononcer,  pronounce ;    se  03,  be 

pronounced 
prononciation/:,  pronunciation 
propos  m.,  purpose;    a  ~,  fitting, 

advisable 
propre,  own;  clean  (326,/) 
proprtetaire  *».,  landlord 
propriety:,  property,  estate 
prouver,  prove 
proverbe  m.,  proverb 
province/:,  province(s) 
proximity/:,  nearness,  proximity 
prudent,  careful 
Prusse/:,  Prussia 
prussien  (f.  -nne),  Prussian 
pu,  past  part,  pouvoir  (to  be  able) 
public  adj.  (f.  publique),  public 
public  m.,  public 
publier,  publish 
puis,  then 

puisse,  puissions,  fares,  subj.  pou- 
voir (to  be  able) 
punir,  punish 
punition/:,  punishment 
pupitre  in.,  desk  (of  the  pupil) 
pur,  pure 
purge/,  soup 
put,  imp.  stibj.  pouvoir  (to  be  able) 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


491 


qu',  elided  form  of  que 

quai  [ke]  m.,  quay,  wharf,  plat- 
form 

quality/,  quality 

quand,  when 

quant  a,  as  for 

quarante,  forty 

quart  m.,  quarter,  fourth 

quartier  m.,  quarter,  section 

quatorze,  fourteen 

quatre,  four 

quatre-vingts,  eighty 

quatrieme,  fourth 

que  int.  pron.,  what;  qu'est-ce  qui, 
what  (323);  qu'est-ce  ~,  what 
(323);  qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que 
cela  ?  what  is  that  ? 

que  rel.pron.,  which,  whom,  that; 
ce  **>,  what,  that  which 

que  conj.,  that,  than,  as ;  with 
subj.,  may,  let;  ne  .  .  .  ~,  only 

quel  (f.  -He),  what,  which,  what  a; 
«v>  que,  whatever 

quelconque,  any  whatever,  of  any 
kind 

quelque,  some  little,  some;  pi., 
a  (some)  few,  some,  several ;  ~ 
chose,  something,  anything ; 
■w  .  .  .  que,  whatever 

quelquefois,  sometimes 

quelqu'un  (/  -e),  somebody,  any- 
body ;  pi.  quelques-uns,  some 

question  yC,  question;  etre  ~,  be 
a  question ;  faire  une  c*>,  ask  a 
question 

questionnef,  question 

qui  int.  pron.,  who,  whom ;  a  <>>, 
whose ;  de  ~,  whose ;  ~  est-ce  <~, 


who  (323);  ~  est-ce  que,  whom, 
who  (323);  <*>  que,  whoever 

qui  rel.  pron.,  who,  whom,  which, 
that ;  ce  ~,  what,  that  which 

quinze,  fifteen 

quitter,  leave 

quoi  int.  pron.,  what 

quoi  rel.pron.,  what;  00  •  >  .  «», 
what,  that  which;  de  <~,  some- 
thing ;  ~  que,  whatever ;  il  n'y 
a  pas  de  <*>,  it 's  not  worth  men- 
tioning 

quoique,  although 

race/!,  race 

raisin  m.,  grape 

raison/,  reason ;  avoir  ~,  be  right 

ralliement  m.t  rallying 

ramasser,  collect 

rangtef,  row 

ranimer,  revive 

rappeler,  recall,  remind  of 

rapporter,  bring  back,  carry  back, 

take  back 
rare,  rare 
rarement,  rarely 
raser,  shave 
rayon   m.,    department,    counter, 

shelf;  ray 
rayonner,  radiate 
reality,  reality 
recalcitrant,  stubborn 
re"cemment,  recently 
recent,  recent 
recevoir    (recevant,    recu,    recois, 

recus),  receive 
reciter,  recite 
reclamer,  claim 


492 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


recois,  regoit,  fires,  recevoir,  re- 
ceive^) 

recommander,  register  (of  mail) 

recommencer,  begin  again 

reconnu,  recognized 

recu,  fiast  fiart.  recevoir,  received 

redevenir  (redevenant,  redevenu, 
redeviens,  redevins),  become 
again 

redire  (redisant,  redit,  redis,  redis), 
say  again 

refuser,  refuse 

r£gal  «*.,  feast,  treat 

regarder,  look,  look  at  (upon) 

regiment  m.,  regiment 

region/!,  region 

regie  /.,  ruler,  rule 

regne  ».,  reign 

r£gner,  reign 

regret  in.,  regret 

regretter,  regret 

r£gulier  (f.  -ere),  regular 

Reims  [re:s]  m.,  Rheims,  a  cathe- 
dral city  in  northern  France 

reined,  queen 

relache  m.,  respite,  rest 

relief  m.,  relief 

religieusement,  religiously 

religieux  (/  -se),  religious 

religion/!,  religion 

relique/,  relic 

relire  (relisant,  relu,  relis,  relus), 
reread 

remarquable,  remarkable 

remarque/i,  remark 

remarquer,  notice ;  se  faire  ~,  at- 
tract notice 

remercier  (de),  thank  (for) 


remettre  (remettant,  remis,  remets, 
remis),  put  again,  put  on  again ; 
postpone  ;  se  ~  au  beau,  become 
fine  again 

remonter,  go  up,  ascend 

remplacer,  replace 

remplir  (de),  fill  (with) 

r£mun£rer  (de),  pay  (for) 

renaissance  /,  rebirth;  Renais- 
sance, the  revival  of  art  and  liter- 
ature in  the  sixteenth  century 

renard  ///.,  fox 

rencontrer,  meet,  come  across  (tr.) ; 
se  ~,  meet  (i?itr.) 

rendez-vous  ?/z.,  meeting  place 

rendre,  give  back,  render;  se  ~, 
surrender ;  se  ~  a,  go  to,  repair 
to  ;  ~  la  justice,  administer  jus- 
tice ;  ~  responsable  (de),  make 
responsible  (for) ;  se  <~  compte, 
have  an  idea,  realize 

renfermer,  contain 

renomine\  renowned 

renoncer  (a),  give  up 

renseignements  m.  fi/.,  informa- 
tion 

renseigner,  inform,  post 

rentrer,  return,  go  back  (into), 
enter  again 

renvoyer  (renvoyant,  renvoyS,  ren- 
voie,  renvoyai),  send  back 

repartie/i,  reply,  retort 

repas  m.,  meal 

repentir  (repentant,  repenti,  repens, 
repentis) :    se  ~>  (de),  repent  (of) 

repertoire  m.,  repertory,  list 

r£p£ter,  repeat 

replet  {/.  -ete),  corpulent 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


493 


replique/,  reply 
r£pondre,  reply  (to),  answer 
r£ponse/;,  reply,  answer 
reporter,  take  (carry)  back 
repos  m.,  rest 

reposer,  rest ;  se  <*>,  rest  (mtr.)i 
repousser,  drive  back,  repulse 
representation/,  performance 
repr^senter,  represent,  perform 
reproduire  (reproduisant,  reproduit, 

reproduis,  reproduisis),  reproduce 
r£publique/;,  republic 
re"server,  reserve 
residence  /.,  residence 
resistance  /.,  resistance 
r£soudre  (r£solvant,  r£solu,  resous, 

resolus),    resolve;    se   ~   a,   be 

resolved  to 
responsable,  responsible;    rendre 

~  de,  make  responsible  for 
ressembler  (a),  resemble 
restante :  poste  ~,  general  delivery 
restaurant  m.,  restaurant 
rester,  remain,  stay 
r£sultat  m,t  result 
retard :  en  ~,  late 
retenir  (retenant,  retenu,  retiens, 

retins),  retain,  keep  back 
retour  m.,  return ;  etre  de  ~,  be 

back 
retourner,    return;    se    ~,    turn 

around 
r£unir,  unite,  join;    se  ~,  meet, 

gather 
r£ussir  (a),  succeed  (in) 
reVeiller,  wake ;  se  ~,  wake  up 
revenir  (revenant,  revenu,  reviens, 

revins),  come  back 


revenu,  past  part,  revenir,  come 

back 
reverdir,  grow  green  again 
revient,  reviennent,  pres.  revenir, 

come(s)  back 
revins,  past  def.  revenir,  came  back 
revoir(revoyant,  revu,  revois,  revis), 

see  again ;  au  ~,  good-by 
revolution/!,  revolution 
reVolutionnaire  m.,  revolutionist 
revue/!,  magazine 
rez-de-chauss£e  ;//.,  ground  floor 
Rhin  m.t  Rhine 
rhume  m.,  cold  (disease) 
riche,  rich 
richement,  richly 
richesses  f.  pi.,  riches,  wealth 
rideau  m.  {pi.  -x),  curtain 
rien,  nothing,  anything ;  ne  .  .  .  ~, 

nothing 
rire  (riant,  ri,  ris,  ris),  laugh ;  se  ~ 

de,  laugh  at 
rive/;,  shore,  bank 
riviere/;,  river  (small) 
robe  /,  dress;   pommes  de  terre 

en  ~  de  chambre,  potatoes  served 

in  their  skins 
robuste,  strong,  sturdy 
roi  w.,  king 
role  m.,  role,  part 
romain  adj.,  Roman 
Romain  m.,  Roman 
roman  «.,  novel 
romancier  m.,  novelist 
Rome/;,  Rome 
rompre,  break 
rond,  round 
rosbif  m.,  roast  beef 


494 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


roti  m.,  roast 

Rouen  m.,  a  city  in  northern  France 

rouge,  red 

rouler,  roll 

route  f.,  highway,  road ;  en  <*>  pour, 

on  the  way  to 
roux  {/.  -sse),  red,  tawny 
royal  {pi.  -aux),  royal 
royaliste  m.,  royalist 
ruban  m.,  ribbon 
rude,  rude,  uncouth 
rue/!,  street 
rugueux  (/.  -se),  rough 
ruisseau  in.  {pi.  -x),  brook 
rural  {pi.  -aux),  rural 
Russie/i,  Russia 

s',  elided  form  ofse  and  si 

sa,/!  of  son,  his,  her,  its 

sac  m.,  bag,  valise 

sacr£,  holy,  sacred 

sais,  sait  [se],pres.  savoir,  know(s) 

saillie/;,  projection ;  faire  ~,  pro- 
ject 

saint  m.  {/.  -e),  saint 

saisir,  seize,  grasp ;  se  ~  de,  take, 
seize 

saison/;,  season 

salade/:,  salad 

salle  f,  room ;  <~  de  classe,  class- 
room ;  ~  a  manger,  dining-room ; 
~  d'attente,  waiting-room 

salon  m.,  parlor 

salutation/!,  salutation 

samedi  «*.,  Saturday 

sang  m.,  blood 

sans,  without  (a,  any);  <~>  que, 
without 


sanUf,  health 

Sarrasin  in.,  Saracen 

satiriste  m.,  satirist 

satisfait  (de),  satisfied  (with) 

sauce/!,  sauce,  dressing 

saucisson  in.,  sausage 

sauf,  except 

saur-,/«/.,  cond.  savoir  (to  know) 

sauver,  save ;  se  ~,  run  away 

sauveur  m.,  savior 

Savoie  f,  Savoy,  a  province  in 
southeast  France 

savoir  (sachant,  su,  sais,  sus), 
know ;  faire  ~,  inform 

savon  m.,  soap 

scene/!,  scene 

science/!,  science 

se,  himself,  herself,  itself,  them- 
selves ;  each  other,  one  another 

stance/!,  sitting,  meeting 

Sevastopol  m.,  a  fortified  seaport 
in  the  Crimea,  Russia 

sec  {/.  seche),  dry 

second  [ss-go],  second 

secondaire  [s9-go-de:r],  secondary 

secours  in.,  safety,  aid 

secret  {/.  -ete),  secret 

sicnritif,  safety 

seigneur  in.,  lord,  noble 

sein  in.,  bosom ;  midst 

Seine/!,  a  river  in  northern  France 

seize,  sixteen 

sSjour  m.,  stay 

sel  m.,  salt 

selon,  according  to 

semaine/;,  week 

sembler,  seem 

semer,  sow 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


495 


se*nat  m.,  senate 

secateur  m.,  senator 

sens  [sa:s]  m.,  sense 

sensible,  noticeable 

sentiment  *r.,  sentiment 

sentir  (sentant,  senti,  sens,  sentis), 

feel,  smell ;  se  ev>,  feel  (of  health) 
separer,  separate 
sept  [set ;  216,  a],  seven 
septembre  m,t  September 
serai,  sera,////,  etre  (to  be) 
s£rail  *f.,  seraglio  • 

serait,  cond.  etre,  would  be 
serez,/w/.  etre,  will  be 
serie/,  series 
seriez,  cond.  etre,  would  be 
seront,/#A  etre,  will  be 
serrer,  press;   ~  la  main,  shake 

hands 
sers,  sert,  fires,  servir,  serve(s) 
servez,  fires,  servir,  serve 
servi,  fiast  fiart.  servir,  served 
service  m.,  service 
serviette/;,  napkin 
servir  (servant,  servi.  sers,  servis), 

serve ;  ~  de,  serve  as ;  se  ~  de, 

use 
ses,  fit.  of  son,  his,  her 
seul,  alone;  only,  (a)  single  one 

(326,/) 
seulement,  only 
severe,  severe 

si  adv.,  so ;  yes ;  ~  . . .  que,  so  ...  as 
si  con/.,  if,  whether 
siecle  m.,  century 
siege  m.,  seat 
sien :  le  <~>  (/  la  sienne),  his,  hers, 

its 


signature/,  signature 

sillon  m.,  furrow 

sillonner,  mark,  streak 

simple,  simple 

simultan£ment,  simultaneously 

sire  m.,  my  lord 

situ.6,  situated 

six  [sis ;  216,  a\  six 

sixieme  [si-zje:m],  sixth 

soci£t6/,  society 

soeur/,  sister 

soi,  one's  self,  itself 

soie/,  silk 

soient,  fires,  subj.  etre  (to  be) 

soif  /,  thirst ;  avoir  ~,  be  thirsty 

soigner,  tend 

soin  711.,  care,  service ;  aux  ~s  de, 

in  care  of 
soir   m.,  evening;    le  ~,  in   the 

evening,  evenings ;  hier  ~,  last 

evening 
soiree/,  evening  (with  its  happen- 
ings) 
Soissons  m.,  a  city  in  northern 

France 
soit,  fires,  subj.  etre  (to  be) 
soixante  [swa-sa:t],  sixty 
soldat  m.,  soldier 
solde  m.,  remnant;    vente  de  ~s, 

clearance  sale 
solde/,  wages 
soleil  m.,  sun 
sombre,  dark,  gloomy 
sommeil  m.,  sleep;  avoir  <~,  be 

sleepy 
sommes,  fires,  etre,  are 
sommet  m.,  summit,  top 
son  (/  sa,  fil.  ses),  his,  her,  its 


496 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


sonne,  rings 

sonner,  ring,  strike  (of  a  clock) 

sont,  fires,  etre,  are 

sorcier  m.  {/.  -ere),  sorcerer 

sors,  sort,  fires,  sortir,  go(es)  out 

sort  m.,  fate 

sortait,  imp.  sortir,  went  out 

sorte  /.,  kind ;  de  ~  que,  so  that ; 

de  toutes  ~s,  of  all  kinds 
sortez,  pres.  sortir,  go  out 
sorti,  past  part,  sortir,  gone  out 
sortie /,  leaving,  dismissal;  exit 
sortir  (sortant,  sorti,  sors,  sortis), 

go  out 
sot  {/.  -tte),  stupid 
sou  m.,  sou  (one  twentieth  of  a 

franc),  cent 
souffrir  (souffrant,  souffert,  souffre, 

souffris),  suffer 
Soulier  m.,  (low)  shoe 
souligner,  underscore 
soupe/,  soup 
souper  m.,  supper 
souris/,  mouse 
sous,  under ;  <*>  peu,  shortly 
sous-pr6fet    m.,    subprefect    (ad- 
ministrator of  a  French  arron- 

dissement) 
soutiens,  imv.  soutenir,  sustain 
souvenir  (souvenant,  souvenu,  sou- 

viens,  souvins),  remember ;  se  ~ 

de,  remember 
souvenir  m.,  memory 
souvent,  often 

soyez,  pres.  subj.  etre  (to  be) 
spacieux  (/  -se),  roomy,  spacious 
sp&ial  (fit.  -aux),  special 
spectacle  m.,  show,  spectacle 


spectateur  m.,  spectator 

spirale/,  spiral ;  en  ~5  winding    • 

station/,  station 

statue/,  statue 

Strasbourg  m.,  Strasburg,  a  city 
in  Alsace 

studieux  (f.  -se),  studious 

style  «*,,  style 

stylo  m.,  fountain  pen 

su,  fiast  fiart.  savoir,  known 

subir,  undergo 

subjonctif  m.,  subjunctive 

subordonng,  subordinate 

substantiel  {/.  -lie),  substantial 

subvention/,  subsidy 

succ£der,  succeed 

successeur  m.,  successor 

sucre  m.,  sugar 

sud  [syd]  m.,  south 

suffire(suffisant,  sutfi,  suffis,  suffis), 
be  sufficient 

suis,  fires,  etre,  am 

suis,  fires,  suivre,  follow 

Suisse/,  Switzerland 

suite  /,  succession,  effect,  con- 
tinuation ;  a  la  ~  de,  after ;  des 
<v>s  de,  because  of,  from  ;  tout  de 
<*>,  immediately,  at  once 

suivant,  following 

suivre  (suivant,  suivi,  suis,  suivis), 
follow ;  ~  un  cours,  take  a 
course  ;   faire  ~,  forward  (mail) 

sujet  adj.  (/  -tte),  subject,  liable 

sujet  m.,  subject;  person 

superbe,  superb 

superficie/,  area 

supposer,  suppose;  suppose*  que, 
supposing  that 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


497 


supreme,  supreme 

sur prep.,  on,  over;  ~  moi,  about 

me 
sur  adj.,  sure 
surement,  surely 
surnaturel  (f.  -lie),  supernatural 
surpasser,  surpass 
surprise^,  surprise 
surtout,  especially 
survivant  m.,  survivor 
syllabe/,  syllable 
symbole  m.,  symbol 
sympathies,  sympathy 
systeme  «.,  arrangement,  system 

t,  see  89,  b,  Note 

t\  elided  form  ofte 

ta,f  of  ton,  your,  thy 

table/,  table 

tableau  m.  (pi.  -x),  blackboard, 
picture ;  au  ~,  on  (at)  the  black- 
board 

tablier  m.,  apron 

tache/,  task 

tactique/,  tactics 

tailleur  in.,  tailor 

taire  (taisant,  tu,  tais,  tus),  say 
nothing  of ;  se  ~,  be  silent 

talent  m.,  ability 

Tamise  f,  Thames  (the  English 
river) 

tandis  que,  while 

tant  (de),  so  much,  so  many ;  ~ 
mieux,  so  much  the  better 

t&n-tef,  aunt 

tapis  m.,  carpet 

tapisserie/,  tapestry 

taquiner,  tease 


tard,  late 

t&ssef,  cup 

tater,  feel 

te,  you,  to  you,  thee,  to  thee ;  refl., 

thyself,  yourself 
tel  (f.  -lie),  such ;  un  <*>,  such  a ; 

~  que,  such  as;  de  ~le  facon, 

in  such  a  way 
temple  m.,  temple 
temps  in.,  time;   weather;   a  <~, 

on  time ;    combien  de  ~,  how 

long ;  de  tous  les  ~,  at  all  times ; 

en  meme  ~,  at  the  same  time 
tendre  verb,  hand  out 
tendre  adj.,  delicate,  tender 
tenir  (tenant,   tenu,   tiens,  tins), 

hold;    ~  a,  insist  on,  be  eager 

to;  ~  sa  promesse,  keep  one's 

promise ;  se  <»  debout,  stand 
terme  m.,  term 
terminer,  finish,  complete 
terrain  in.,  ground 
terref,  land ;  pomme  de  cv>,  potato 
terrestre,  earthly 
tes,  pi.  0/~ton,  your,  thy 
tetef,  head ;  mal  a  la  ~,  headache 
Texas  in.,  Texas 
the*  in.,  tea 

theatre  in.,  theater,  stage 
tiea  :  le  tien  (_/.'  la  tienne),  thine, 

yours 
tiens,  intj.,  well ! 
tiens,  tient,  pres.  tenir,  hold(s) 
tiers  adj.  (f  tierce),  third 
tiers  in.,  third 
timbre  in.,  stamp 
tirer,   draw ;    se  ~  d'affaire,   get 

along 


498 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


toi,  you,  to  you,  thee,  to  thee,  thou 

toile/,  linen 

toilette/,  toilet 

toi-meme,  thyself 

tomate/,  tomato 

tombeau  m.  (pi.  -x),  tomb 

tomber,  fall 

ton  (f.  ta,  pi.  tes),  your,  thy 

tonnerre  in.,  thunder ;  il  fait  du  «*>, 
it  is  thundering 

tort  in.,  wrong ;  avoir  «*>,  be  wrong 

tot,  soon 

toujours,  always,  ever 

tour  in.,  turn 

tour/,  tower 

Touraine/,  a  province  in  central 
France 

tournelle/,  little  tower 

tourner,  turn  (/r.);  se  «>,  turn  (intr.) 

tout  adj.  andpron.  (f.  toute,  7n.pl. 
tous  (60)),  all,  every,  everything, 
any;  ~  le,  the  whole;  tous  les, 
every,  all ;  tous  les  deux,  both ; 
<v.  le  monde,  everybody;  »  ce 
qui  (que),  all  (that) 

tout  adv.,  entirely,  very ;  ~  a 
coup,  suddenly ;  ~  de  suite,  im- 
mediately, at  once ;  <~>  en,  (even) 
while 

tracer,  trace  out 

tradition/,  tradition 

traditionnel  (/  -He),  traditional 

traduire  (traduisant,  traduit,  tra- 
duis,  traduisis),  translate 

trag^die/,  tragedy 

trahir,  betray 

trait  m.,  feature,  trait 

traite*  in.,  treaty 


traitre  (/  -resse),  treacherous 

trajet  m.%  journey,  route 

tramway  m.,  street  car 

transportation/,  transportation 

travail  m.  {pi.  -aux),  work 

travaille\  worked 

travailler,  work 

travers  m.t  width,  breadth ;  a  ~, 
through,  across 

traverser,  cross 

treize,  thirteen 

trente,  thirty 

tres,  very,  very  much 

tr£sor  in.,  treasure 

tribu/,  tribe 

tricentenaire  m.,  tercentenary 

triste,  sad;  poor  sort  of  (326,/) 

tristesse/,  sorrow 

triomphal  (pi.  -aux),  victorious 

triomphe  m.t  triumph 

trois,  three 

troisieme,  third 

tromper,  deceive;  se  <*>,  be  mis- 
taken 

trompette/,  bugle 

tronc  [tro]  m.,  trunk 

trop  (de),  too  much,  too  many ;  too 

trottoir  m.,  sidewalk 

trou  m.,  hole 

troupes/^/.,  forces,  troops 

trouve,  find(s) 

trouve\  found 

trouver,  find ;  se  ~,  be  found,  be 

tu,  you,  thou 

tuer,  kill 

tuerie/,  slaughter 

Tuileries/  pi.,  former  palace  and 
present  park  in  Paris 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


499 


turc  (f.  turque),  Turkish 
type,  /«.,  type 
typique,  typical 
tyrannies,  tyranny 

un  art.  (f.  -e),  a,  an 

un  num.  (f.  -e),  one;  <~  meme, 
one  and  the  same ;  P<*>,  one ;  V<*> 
l'autre  and  les  ~s  les  autres,  see 
325 ;  les  ~s  des  autres,  from 
each  other ;  P~  et  l'autre,  both 

uni,  united 

union/,  union 

unique,  unique 

univers  m.,  universe 

university/!,  university 

user,  wear  out 

utile,  useful 

utiliser,  utilize 

va,  fires,  aller,  goes,  is  going 

vacances  f.  pi.,  vacation ;  etre  en 
~,  be  on  (a)  vacation 

vache/i,  cow 

vagabonder,  wander 

vaincre  (vainquant,  vaincu,  vaincs, 
vainquis),  conquer,  defeat 

vaincu,  past  part,  vaincre,  con- 
quered 

vais,  pres.  aller,  go 

valait,  imp.  valoir,  was  worth 

valise/,  valise 

valoir  (valant,  valu,  vaux,  valus), 
be  worth,  bring;  ~  mieux,  be 
better,  be  preferable 

vapeur  f.,  steam;  bateau  a  ~, 
steamboat 

vas,  pres.  aller,  go 


vase  m.,  vase 

vaudrait,  cond.  valoir,  would  be 

worth 
vaut,  pres.  valoir,  is  worth 
veau  m.  {pi.  -x),  veal 
v£cu,  past  part,  vivre,  lived 
v£cut,  past  def.  vivre,  lived 
v£hicule  ».,  vehicle 
veille/,  the  night  before 
venais,  venait,  imp.  venir,  came 
vendre,  sell ;  a  ~,  for  sale 
vendredi  w.,  Friday 
vengeur  (f.  vengeresse),  avenging 
venir  (venant,  venu,  viens,  vins), 

come;  ~  de  +  inf.,  have  just; 
,     faire  «v>,  send  for  (and  get) ;  en 

~  a,  come  to  the  point  of 
vent  ft*.,  wind ;  il  fait  du  ~,  it  is 

windy 
vente/,  sale ;  en  <*>,  on  sale 
venu,  past  part,  venir,  come 
ver  m.j  worm 
verbe  m.,  verb 

Vercing£torix  m.,  a  Gallic  chief 
Verdun  m.,  a  town  in  France,  he- 
roically defended  in  the  World 

War 
verger  m.,  orchard 
veritable,  real,  true 
vermeil  (f.  -lie),  vermilion 
verre  m.,  glass ;  ~  &  yin,  wineglass 
verrez,  fut.  voir,  will  see 
vers  prep.,  towards,  to 
vers  m.f  verse,  line 
Versailles  m.,  a  city  near  Paris, 

formerly  the  royal  residence 
verse :  a  ~,  in  torrents 
vert  adj.,  green 


5oo 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


vert  m.,  green 

vertu/,  virtue 

veston  m.,  (business)  coat 

v^tements  nt.  pi.,  clothes 

vetir  (vetant,  vetu,   vets,    vetis), 

clothe 
veuillez,  imv.  vouloir,  please,  be 

good  enough  to 
veulent,  pres.  vouloir,  wish 
veux,  veut,  pres.  vouloir,  wish(es) 
viande/i,  meat 
victoire/,  victory 
victorieux  (f  -se),  victorious 
vide,  empty 
vie/!,  life 
vieil,  see  vieux 
vieille,/  of  vieux 
vieillesse/,  old  age 
viendra,    viendriez,   fut.,    cond. 

venir  (to  come) 
vienne,  pres.  subj.  venir  (to  come) 
viens,  pres.  ind.,  imv.  venir,  come 
vient,  pres.  venir,  comes 
vieux   {before  a  vowel  vieil;  f. 

vieille),  old 
vif  (f  vive),  lively,  alive 
vilain,  homely 
village  [vi-la:3]  m.,  village 
ville  [vil]  f,  city ;  a  la  ~,  in  the 

city;  en  ~,  in  (to)  town;  descendre 

en  ~,  go  down  town 
vin  m.,  wine ;  verre  a  ~,  wineglass 
vingt,  twenty 
vint,  past  def  venir,  came 
violence  f,  violence 
visite/,  call,  visit 
visiter,  visit,  call 
visiteur  m.,  visitor,  caller 


vit,  past  def.  voir,  saw 

vit,  pres.  vivre,  live 

vite,  fast,  quickly 

vivre   (vivant,   v&u,    vis,   v6cus), 

live,  exist ;  vive  !  long  live ! 
voici,  here  is  (are),  now  is 
voient,  pres.  voir,  see 
voila,  there  is  (are) ;  see ! 
voir  (voyant,  vu,  vois,  vis),  see; 

faire  ~,  show,  display 
vois,  pres.  voir,  see 
voisin  m.  (f  -e),  neighbor 
voisinage  m.,  neighborhood 
voit,  pres.  voir,  sees 
voiture  f,  carriage ;  descendre  de 

<*>,  get  out  of  a  carriage ;  monter 

en  ~,  get  into  a  carriage 
voix  f,  voice ;  a  haute  ~,  aloud ; 

a  ~  basse,  in  a  low  voice 
volaille^C,  poultry,  fowls 
voler  (a),  steal  (from) 
voleur  m.,  thief 
volonte*/,  will 
volontiers,  willingly 
volume  m.,  volume 
vont,  pres.  aller,  go 
vos,  pi.  of  votre,  your 
votre  poss.  adj.  {pi.  vos),  your 
votre  :  le  ~  poss.  pron.,  yours 
voudrait,  voudriez,  cond.  vouloir, 

would  wish 
vouloir  (voulant,  voulu,  veux,  vou- 

lus),  will,  wish,  want ;  <*>  Men,  be 

willing;  <~>  dire,  mean;  ~  rire, 

joke;  en  ~  k,  have  a  grudge 

against 
vous,  you,  to  you ;  dz'sj.,  you ;  refl., 

yourself,  yourselves 


FRENCH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


501 


vous-meme(s),  yourself,  yourselves      vue  f.,  sight,  view ;  de  ~,  by  sight 
voyage  m.,  journey;  en  ~,  on  a 


journey  * 

voyager,  travel 
voyageur  ?n.  (/.  -se),  traveler 
voyelle/,  vowel 
voyez,  voyons,  pres.  voir,  see 
voyons  intj.,  see  !   come  now  ! 
vrai,  true 

vraisemblablement,  probably 
vu,  past  part,  voir,  seen 


Waterloo  m.,  a  Belgian  town, 
scene  of  Napoleon's  final  de- 
feat 

y,  at  it  (them),  to  it  (them),  in  it 
(them),  there ;  il  ~  a,  there  is 
(are) ;  ago,  since,  for ;  j'~  suis, 
I'm  here 

yeux,  pi.  of  oeil,  eyes 


Parmi  les  monuments  les  plus  importants  et  les  mieux  conserves  qui  nous 

restent   de  la  domination  romaine  (Sec.  1)  il  y  a  les  arenes  de  Nimes. 

Leur  construction  ressemble  beaucoup  aux  arenes  modernes  des  colleges 

des  Etats-Unis 


ENGLISH-FRENCH   VOCABULARY 


The  plural  is  indicated,  in  the  French,  of  all  nouns  and  adjectives 
whose  plural  is  different  from  the  singular  and  not  formed  by  adding  s. 
The  feminine  is  indicated,  in  the  French,  of  all  adjectives  whose  feminine 
is  different  from  the  masculine  and  not  formed  by  adding  e.  Adjectives 
for  which  no  position  is  designated  regularly  follow  the  noun  with  which 
they  are  used.  All  verbs  not  marked  irregular  belong  to  the  regular  con- 
jugations. Section  numbers  appended  to  a  word  indicate  the  section  where 
it  is  explained  or  discussed.  An  asterisk  is  used  before  aspirate  h  ;  see,  for 
example,  *honte  under  ashamed. 


a,  un(e)  ( 1 2  i ) ;  with  units  of  meas- 
ure, le  (219,  a);  with  units  of 
time,  par,  le  (2 1 9,  b) ;  describing 
parts  of  the  body,  le  (188,  Note); 
not  cv>,  ne  .  .  .  pas  de  (1 16,  a) 

able :  be  ~  (to),  pouvoir,  v.  irr. 

about,  on  one^s  person,  sur ;  with 
numerals,  environ  ;  ~  to,  sur  le 
point  de ;  think  ~,  fix  the  miiid 
on,  penser  a. ;  have  an  opinion 
of,  penser  de;  talk  (speak)  ~, 
parler  de 

absent,  absent 

accident,  accident  m. 

accompany,  accompagner 

acquire,  acqueVir,  v.  irr.  (313,  a) 

act,  acte  m. 

active,  actif  (f.  -ve) 

actor,  acteur  m. 

add,  aj  outer 

address,  adresse/ 

admire,  admirer;  I  ~,  etc.,  j'ad- 
mire,  etc.  (91) 


admit,  admettre,  v.  irr.  (2.77) 
advance  verb,  avancer,  stem  irr. 

(245) 
advance  noun  :  in  ~,  d'avance 
advanced,  avance 
advertisement,  annonce/] 
advice,  conseils  m.  pi. 
afraid  :  be  ~,  avoir  peur 
after  prep.,  apres;  conj.,  apres  que 
afternoon,  apres-midi  m. ;  in  the  ~, 

de  l'apres-midi 
afterwards,  ensuite 
again,  encore,  de  nouveau ;  see  ~, 

revoir;  will  see  you  ~  soon,  a 

bientot 
age,  age  m. 
ag0»  il  y  a  (precedes  the  expression 

of  time);  a  week  ~,  il  y  a  une 

semaine 
agreeably,  agrdablement 
ah!  ah! 

ahead  of  time,  en  avance 
air,  air  m. 


502 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


503 


alas !  helas ! 

alive,  vif  (f.  vive) 

all,  tout  (m.pl.  tous),  tous  les  ( 1  o  1 ) ; 

<*>  (that),  tout  ce  qui  (que);  not 
at  ~,  ne  .  .  .  point ;  at  ~,  after 

neg.,  du  tout 
ally,  allie  ;//.  (/.  -e'e) 
almost,    presque;    faillir,    v.   irr. 
alone,  seul 
along,  le  long  de 
aloud,  a  haute  voix 
Alps,  A\pes,  f.  pi. 
already,  deja 
also,  aussi 

although,  quoique,  bien  que  (307,  a) 
always,  toujours 
A.  M.,  du  matin 
am,  suis;   as  auxiliary,  see  125, 

236 
ambiguous,  ambigu  (/  -gue) 
America,  Ame'rique/] 
American,  americain 
among,  parmi 
amuse,  amuser ;  be  ~>d  at,  s'amuser 

de 
amusement,  amusement  in. 
an,  un(e) 

ancient,  ancien  (f.  -nne) 
and,  et 

anecdote,  anecdote/ 
animal,  animal  m.  {pi.  -aux) 
announce,  annoncer, ste?n  irr. (24 5) 
another,  one  more,  encore  un(e); 

a  different,  un(e)  autre;  one  <v>, 

les  un(e)s  les  autres  (325) 
answer  verb,  repondre  (a) 
answer  noun,  rdponse/i 
anterior,  anterieur 


anxious,  inquiet  (/.  -ete) ;  be  ~  to, 

tenir  k 
any  adj.,  du,  de  la,  de  1',  des  (115); 

de(i  16);  pron.,en  (181,  b);  not 

«»,  ne  . .  *  pas  de  (116,  a) 
anybody,  quelqu'un(e) 
anything,  quelque  chose ;  not  <*>, 

ne  .  .  .  rien 
apothecary,  pharmacien  m. 
appear,  paraitre,  v.  irr.  (276) 
appetite,  appetit  m. ;  with  a  good 

~,  de  bon  appetit 
apple,   pomme  f. ;    ~  tree,   pom- 

mier  in. 
appreciate,  appr^cier 
approach,  s'approcher  de 
April,  avril  m. 
architecture,  architecture/ 
are,  sommes,  etes,  sont  (80);  as 

auxiliary,  see  1 25,  236 
area,  superficies 
arise,  se  lever,  stem.  irr.  (248) 
arm,  bras  m. 
armchair,  fauteuil  m. 
armistice,  armistice  ;//. 
army,  armde/ 
around,  autour  de 
arrange,  arranger,  stem  irr.  (246) 
arrest :  under  <*>,  en  etat  d'arresta- 

tion 
arrival,  arrivee/ 
arrive,    arriver  {fierf.    auxiliary 

etre) 
art,   es ;    as  auxiliary,  see   1 25, 

236 
article,  article  m. 
artillery,  artillerie/ 
artist,  artiste  m. 


504 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


as,  que,  comme;  <*>  .  .  .  ~,  aussi 
.  .  .  que ;  ~  much  (many),  autant 
(de);  ~  much  (many)  ~,  autant 
que ;  ~  soon  ~,  aussitot  que,  des 
que ;  ~  for,  quant  a 

ashamed  :  be  ~,  avoir  *honte 

ask  (to),  demander  (de)  (295,  b) ;  ~ 
for,  demander;  ~  a  question, 
faire  une  question  ;  ~  somebody 
(to),  demander  a  quelqu'un  (de) 

asleep :  fall  ~,  s'endormir,  v.  irr. 
(258) 

assail,  assaillir,  v.  irr.  (313,  b) 

assuredly,  assurement 

at,  a ;  with  units  of  price,  see 
219;  ~  all,  du  tout;  «*  the, 
au,  a  la,  a  V,  aux;  <*>  it  (them),  y ; 
~home,  a  la  maison,  chez  moi, 
etc. ;  ew  school,  a  l'ecole ;  ~  the 
house  (home)  of,  chez ;  ~  his 
home,  chez  lui;  ~(to)  the  fruit 
dealer's,  chez  le  fruitier 

attack  verb,  attaquer 

attack  noun,  attaque_/! 

attend,  assister  a 

attentive,  attentif  (f.  -ve) 

attractive,  charmant 

August,  aout  m. 

aunt,  tante_/! 

Australian,  australien  (f  -nne) 

author,  auteur  m. 

authority,  autarke"/! 

authorization,  autorisation/! 

automobile,  automobile  m.  andf. 

autumn,  automne  m. ;  in  (the)  ~, 
en  automne 

avenue,  avenue/! 

avoid,  eViter  (de) 


await,  attendre 

away,  prefix  en-  (em-);  carry  ~, 
emporter;  go  ~,  s'en  aller;  run 
~,  se  sauver;  take  ~  (from), 
enlever  (a) 

back,  prefix  re- ;  be  ~,  etre  de  re- 
tour;  bring  ~,  rapporter;  give 
<~,  rendre ;  send  ~,  renvoyer 

bad,  mauvais  {precedes  noun) 

badly,  mal 

bag,  sac  m. 

baggage,  bagages  7n.  pi. 

baker,  boulanger  m. 

ball,  bal  m. 

banana,  banane_/! 

bank,  rive  f. 

barber,  coiffeur  m. 

barely,  ne  .  .  .  guere 

bark,  aboyer,  stem  irr.  (247) 

barn,  grange/! 

basket,  corbeille/! 

bath,  bain  m.   ' 

bathroom,  salle  de  bain 

battle,  bataille/! 

battlefield,  champ  de  bataille 

be,  etre,  v.  irr.  (156);  se  trouver; 
with  nouns  of  feeling,  avoir 
( 1 49) ;  expressing  dimension , 
avoir  (219,  c)\  of  health,  aller, 
se  porter;  of  weather,  faire  (294) ; 
~  to,  devoir ;  <~  present  at,  assis- 
ter a ;  <*>  back,  etre  de  retour 

bean,  *haricot  in.  •  string  ~,  *hari- 
cot  vert 

bear  verb,  porter 

bear  noun,  ours  m. 

beat,  battre,  v.  irr.  (313,  /) 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


505 


beautiful,  beau  (bel,  f  belle,  m.pl. 

beaux ;  precedes  noun) 
beauty,  beaute/ 
because,    parce    que ;    ~   of,    des 

suites  de,  a  cause  de ;  it  is  ~, 

c'est  que 
become,  devenir,  v.  irr.  (261)  {perf. 

auxiliary  etre);    se   faire ;    of 

dress,  aller ;  ~  again,  redevenir ; 

~  fine,  of  weather,    se  mettre 

au  beau;    ~  fine  again,  se  re- 

mettre  au  beau 
become  past  part ':,  devenu 
becoming :  be  ~,  aller 
bed,    lit  m.\    put  to  ~,  coucher, 

mettre  au  lit ;  go  to  ~,  se  coucher 
bedroom,  chambre  a  coucher 
beef,  bceuf  m. 
been,  6t6 
before  prep.,  hi  place,  devant;  in 

time,  avant;   before  inf.,  avant 

de ;   00  long,  avant  peu ;   conj., 

avant  que 
begin   (to),   commencer  (a),  stem 

irr.  (245  ;  295,  c)',  se  mettre  (a) 

(277;  295,  c)\   ~  again,  recom- 

mencer 
behead,  de'capiter 
behind,  derriere 

believe,  croire,  v.  irr.  (288 ;  304,  c) 
bell,  cloche/i 
belong,  appartenir,  v.  irr.  (261); 

~  to,  etre  a 
beloved,  bien-aime',  cher  (f  -ere) 
bench,  banc  m. 
Bertha,  Berthe 
beside,  a  cote  de 
besides,  en  outre 


best  (the)  adj.,  le  meilleur  {pre- 
cedes noun) ;  adv.,  le  mieux ;  do 
one's  ~,  faire  de  son  mieux 

betray,  trahir 

better  adj.,  meilleur  {precedes 
noun) ;  adv.,  mieux ;  be  ~,  va- 
loir  mieux 

between,  entre 

big,  gros  {f.  -sse;  precedes  noun) 

bill,  addition/! 

billion,  milliard  m. 

bird,  oiseau  ///.  {pi.  -x) 

bite,  mordre 

biting,  piquant 

black,  noir 

blackboard,  tableau  m.  {pi.  -x) 

blind,  aveugle;  ~  in  one  eye, 
borgne 

bloom  verb,  fleurir 

bloom  noun  :  in  ~,  en  fleur 

blue,  bleu 

boat,  bateau  m.  {pi.  -x) 

boil,  bouillir,  v.  irr.  (313,  ^r) 

book,  livre  m. 

bookseller,  libraire  m. 

border  (with),  border  (de) 

born  ne;  be~,  naitre,  v.  irr.{2j$); 
was^estnd,  naquit(220,  Note  2) 

both,  tous  (toutes)  les  deux,  les 
'  deux,  l'un(e)  et  l'autre 

bottle,  bouteille/; 

bought  past  part.,  achete'  • 

boy,  gargon  m. 

brave,  brave 

bread,  pain  m. 

break,  casser ;  »=  out,  eclater 

breakfast,  dejeuner  m. 

brief,  bref  (/.  breve) 


506 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


bright,  intelligent 

brilliant,  brillant 

bring,  a  thing,  apporter ;  a  person, 

amener,  stem  irr.  (248) ;  ~  back, 

rapporter;    ~   near,    approcher 

(de) 
broad,  large 
brother,  frere  m. 
brought,  apporte 
brown,  brun 
brush  verb,  brosser 
brush  noun,  brosse/I 
Brussels,  Bruxelles/  ,. 
build,  batir 

building,  edifice  m.t  batiment  m. 
bureau,  commode,/] 
Burgundian,  Bourguignon  ;//. 
burn,  bruler 

burning  adj.,  ardent,  brulant 
business,  affaires  fpl.,  commerce 

m.\    oa  man,    commergant   m., 

industriel  m. 
busy,  occupe 
but,  mais 

butcher,  boucher  m. 
butter,  beurre  m. 
button,  bouton  m. 
buy,  acheter,  stem  irr.  (248,  Note); 

a  ticket,  prendre 
by,  par,  de  (240,  b);   with  units 

of   measure,    a ;    before   pres. 

part.,  en 

Caesar,  Cesar 
cake,  gateau  m.  {pi.  -x) 
call  verb,  appeler,  stem  irr.  (248, 
Note);    hail,   hdler,   stem   irr. 
call  noun  {visit),  visite/I 


can,  of  physical  ability,  pouvoir, 

v.  irr.  (267);  of  mental  ability, 

savoir,  v.  irr.   (268) 
Canada,  Canada  m. 
cannot,  see  can  and  not 
capital,  capitale/ 
captain,  capitaine  m. 
car,  street,  tramway  m. 
card,  visiting,  carte/! 
care  for,  soigner 
carnival,  carnaval  m. 
carpet,  tapis  m. 
carriage,  voiture/] 
carry,  porter ;  ~  away,  emporter ; 

~  back,  rapporter 
cart,  charrette/1 
cash  window,  caisse/ 
cashier,  caissier  m. 
cast,  jeter,  stem  irr.  (248,  Note) 
castle,  chateau  m.  {pi.  -x) 
cathedral,  cathedrale  m. 
caught  past  part.,  pris 
cause,  cause/! 

cause  to,  faire,  v.  irr.  (290,  291) 
cease  (to),  cesser  (de)(295,  b;  330) 
cent,  sou  m. 
center,  centre  m. ;  in  the  ~  of,  au 

centre  de 
centime,  centime  m. 
century,  siecle  m. 
chair,  chaise/.' 
chalk,  craie/i 
chamber,  chambre/! 
chance  (to),  se  *hasarder  (a) 
change,  monnaie/] 
Charles,  Charles 
charming,  charmant 
chase,  courir,  v.  irr.  (259) 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


507 


cheap,  bon  marche 

check,  enregistrer 

cheerful,  gai 

cheese,  fromage  in. 

cherry,  cerise/] ;  ~  tree,  cerisier  m. 

chief,  chef  m. 

child,  enfant  m.  and/. 

choose,  choisir 

Christian,  chre'tien  (/  -nne) 

chum,  camarade  m. 

church,  eglise/;  at  ~,  a  l'eglise 

cigar,  cigare  m. 

circulate,  circuler 

citizen,  citoyen  m.  (f  -nne) 

city,  viWef;  in  the  ~,  a  la  ville 

class,  classe/!;  in  ~,  en  classe 

classical,  classique 

classroom,  classe  f. 

clean  verb,  nettoyer,  stem  irr.  (247) 

clean  adj.,  propre 

clear,  clair,  net  (f  -tte) 

clearly,  clairement 

clerk,   gargon  (fille)  de  magasin; 

employe*  m. 
client,  client  m. 
cloak,  manteau  m.  (pi.  -x) 
clock,  horloge/i 
close,  fermer 
cloth,  drap  m. 
clothe,  vetir,  v.  irr.  (313,  h) 
clothes,  vetements  m.  pi. 
cloud,  nuage  m. 
coachman,  cocher  m. 
coat,    dress,  habit   m.\    business, 

veston  m. ;  woman's,  jaquette/i 
coffee,  cafe*  m. 
cold  adj.,  froid :    be  ~,  avoir  froid ; 

it  is  ~,  of  weather,  il  fait  froid 


cold    noun,    froid    in. ;     disease, 

rhume  m. 
coldly,  froidement 
collaborator,  collaborates  in. 
collar,  faux-col  m. 
colony,  colonie/ 
color,  covXqmx/. 
comb,  peigne  m. ;  <~  one's  hair,  se 

peigner 
come,  venir,  v.  irr.  (261)  (per/. 

auxiliary   etre);    intj.,  allons ! 

<*>  and,  venir  +  inf. ;  ~  across, 

rencontrer ;  ~  back,  revenir ;  ~ 

down,  descendre ;  ~  in,  entrer 
come  past  part.,  venu  (157);    «*> 

back  past  part.,  revenu 
comes,  is  coming,  vient 
comfortable,  confortable 
command  (to),  commander  (de) 
commander,  commandant  m. 
commence   (to),    commencer    (a), 

stem  irr.  (245  ;   295,  c) 
commit,  commettre,  v.  irr.  (277) 
companion,  camarade  m. 
company,  du  monde 
Compiegne,  Compiegne/! 
complete  verb,  finir 
complete  adj.,  complet  (f  -ete) 
compose,  composer 
comrade,  camarade  m. 
conclude,  conclure,  v.  irr.  (313, 

m.) 
conditional,  conditionnel  in. 
conduct,  conduite/! 
conductor,  conducteur  m. 
conjugate,  conjuguer 
conjugation,  conjugaison/! 
conquer,  conquerir,  v.  irr.  (313,  a) 


508 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


consent  (to),  consentir  (a),  v.  irr. 

(258;  295,0 
consider,  considerer,  stem  irr.  (249) 
contain,  renfermer 
contemporary,  contemporain 
continual,  continuel  (/.  -lie) 
continuation,  suite/ 
continue,  continuer 
contrary :  on  the  ~5  au  contraire 
control,  domination/ 
conversation,  conversation/ 
converse,  converser 
cook,  cuisinier  m.  (/  -ere) 
cool,  frais  {/.  fraiche) ;  be  ~,  faire 

frais 
correct,  corriger,  stem  irr.  (246) 
cost,  couter 
could,    was    able,    pouvais,    etc. ; 

would   be    able,    pourrais,    etc. 
count,  nobleman,  comte  m. 
counter,  comptoir  m. 
country,    division    of   territory, 

pays    m. ;    not   the    city,    cam- 

pagne/ ;  native  land,  patrie/ ; 

in  the  <*>,  a  la  campagne 
courage,  courage  m. 
course  :  of  <*>,  bien  entendu 
court,  yard,  cour/ 
cousin,  cousin  m.  (f  -e) 
cover,    couvrir,    v.   irr.  (260) ;    ~ 

much  ground,  parcourir  du  pays 
covered  (with),  couvert  (de) 
COW,  vache/ 
cravat,  cravate/ 

crazy,  fou  (fol,/  folle,  m.pi.  fous) 
create,  crder,  ste?n  irr.  (249,  Note) 
cross  verb,  traverser 
cross  adj.,  mechant 


cross  noun,  croix/ 

crowd,  foule/ 

crowded  (with),  bonde  (de) 

crown  verb,  couronner 

crown  noun,  couronne/ 

cry  (out),  crier 

cuff,  manchette/ 

cup,  tasse/,  coupe  f. 

cure,  guerir 

curse,  maudire,  v.  irr.  (313,/) 

curtain,  rideau  ?n.  {pi.  -x) 

custom,  coutume/ 

customer,  client  m. 

cut,  couper ;  ~  off,  couper 

dare,  oser  (330) 

dark,  sombre 

dash,  elan  m. 

daughter,  fille/ 

day,  divisio?i  of  time,  jour  m. ; 

with  its  happenings,  jour nee/ ; 

~  before  yesterday,  avant-hier ; 

good  ~,  bonjour ;  one  (some)  ~, 

un  jour 
dead,  mort 

deal :  a  great  ~  of,  beaucoup  de 
dealer,  marchand  m. ;  shoe  03,  mar- 

chand  de  chaussures 
dear,  cher  (f  -ere) 
death,  mort/ 
deceive,  tromper 
December,  decembre  m. 
decide,  decider 
decorate,  decorer 
deep,  profond 

defeat,  vaincre,  v.  irr.  (313,  u) 
definite,  defini 
delicate,  tendre 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


509 


deny,  nier 

depart,  partir,  v.  irr.  (258) 

department,  of  France,  departe- 
ment  m. ;  of  a  store,  rayon  m.\<*> 
store,  magasin  de  nouveautds 

departure,  depart  m. 

depend  (upon),  dependre  (de) 

deputy,  depute  in. 

descend,  descendre 

describe,  decrire,  v.  irr.  (281) 

desert,  ddserter 

deserve,  meriter 

desire  (to),  de*sirer  (295,  a) 

desk, pupil's,  pupitre  in:,  teacher's, 
bureau  in. 

dessert,  dessert  in. 

did,  as  auxiliary,  see  86 

die,  mourir,  v.  irr.  (263) 

died  past  part.,  mort  (157);  past 
tense,  est  mort,  mourut,  etc. 

difference,  difference  y^ 

different,  different 

difficult,  difficile 

dine,  diner 

dining-room,  salle  a  manger 

dinner,  diner  m. ;  at  ~,  au  diner 

discreet,  discret  (f  -ete) 

dismissal,  sortie/ 

display,  etaler 

distinguish,  distinguer 

disturb,  deranger,  stem  irr.  (246) 

divide  (into),  diviser  (en) 

dizzy  spell,  e"blouissement  in. 

do,  faire,  v.  irr.  (290) ;  as  auxil- 
iary, see  125,141,  164;  ~with, 
faire  de;  ~  without,  se  passer 
de;  ~  one's  best,  faire  de  son 
mieux ;  how  ~  you  ~  ?  bonjour 


doctor,  medecin  m.,  docteur  m. 

does,  as  auxiliary,  see  125,  164 

dog,  chien  m. 

dome,  d6me  m. 

done,  fait ;    what 's  to  be  <~>  ?  que 

faire  ? 
donkey,  ane  m. 
door,  porte/i 
doubt,  douter 
down  :  come  ~,  descendre ;  sit  ~, 

s'asseoir;   upside  ~,  a  l'envers 
downstairs,  en  bas ;  go  (come)  ~, 

descendre 
dozen,  douzaine/] 
dress    verb,    tr.,    habiller;    intr., 

s'habiller 
dress  noun,  robe/i;  streets,  cos- 
tume de  ville 
dress  coat,  habit  m. 
dressmaker,  couturiere/I 
drink,  boire,  v.  irr.  (287) 
drive  :  go  for  a  ~,  se  promener  en 

voiture ;  cv>  out,  chasser 
druggist,  pharmacien  m. 
druid,  druide  m. 
dry,  sec  (f.  seche) 
duel,  duel  in. 
dunce,  imbecile  m. 
during,  pendant 
dwell,  demeurer ;  I  ~,  etc.,  je  de- 

meure,  etc.  (91) 

each,  chaque;  ~  one,  chacun(e); 

~  other,  l'un(e)  l'autre 
eager :  be  ~  to,  tenir  a. 
ear,  oreilley^ 

earlier,  de  meilleure  heure 
early,  de  bonne  heure 


5io 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


earn,  gagner 

easily,  facilement 

easy  (to),  facile  (de) 

eat,  manger,  stem  irr.  (246) 

edge,  bord  m.;  on  the  ~  of,  au 

bord  de 
effect,  suited 
egg,  ceuf  m. 
Egypt,  figypte/ 
eight,  *huit 
eighteen,  dix-huit 
eightieth,  quatre-vingtieme 
eighty,  quatre-vingts 
either,  after  ?ieg.,  non  plus 
elder,  plus  age 
electric,  electrique 
electricity,  e'lectricite/ 
eleven,  onze 
eleventh,  onzieme 
emperor,  empereur  m. 
employ,  employer,  stem  irr.  (247) 
employee,  employe  m. 
end  (in)  verb,  finir  (par) 
end  noun,  fin/,  bout  m. 
enemy,  ennemi  m. 
England,  Angleterre/ 
English,  anglais 
Englishman,  Anglais  m. 
enjoy,   jouir  de;     ~  one's    self, 

s'amuser 
enough,  assez  (de)  (113);  be  good 

<*>,  veuillez  (271,  Note  2);  ~  to 

live  on,  de  quoi  vivre 
enter  tr.,  entrer  dans  (chez)  {perf. 

auxiliary  etre);    intr.,  entrer; 

~  again,  rentrer 
enthusiasm,  elan  m. 
entire,  entier  (/.  -ere) 


envelope,  enveloppe/ 

erect,  eriger,  stem  irr.  (246);   con- 

struire,  v.  irr.  (289) 
escape    tr.,    echapper    a;     intr., 

s'echapper 
especially,  surtout 
Europe,  Europe/ 
even,  meme 
evening,  division  ofthne,  soir  m. ; 

with  its  happenings,  soiree/!; 

~s,  le  soir;    in  the  ~,  le  soir; 

yesterday  ~?  hier  soir 
ever,  jamais,  toujours 
every,  tous  (toutes)  les;  tout  (m.pl. 

tous) ;  ev  one  for  himself,  sauve 

qui  peut 
everybody,  tout  le  monde 
everything,  tout 
everywhere,  partout 
evident,  evident 
examination,  examen  m. 
examine,  examiner 
example,  exemple  m. 
except,  excepte 
exercise,  exercice  m. 
expect  (to),  s'attendre  (a)  (295,  c) 
expel,  chasser 
expensive,  couteux  (/  -se) 
explain,  expliquer 
express,  exprimer 
extremely,  extremement 
eye,  oeil  7n.{pl.  yeux) 

face,  figure/ 
fact :  in  ~,  en  effet 
fair,  foire/ 
faith,  foi/ 
faithful,  fidele 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


511 


faithfully,  fidelement 

fall  verb,  tomber  (per/,  auxiliary 

etre);  I  «3,  etc.,  je  tombe,  etc. 

(91);  ~  asleep,  s'endormir 
fall  noun,  chute/! 
false,  faux  {f  -sse) 
family,  famille/ 
famous,  fameux  (f.  -se) 
fan,  eVentail  m. 
far,  loin 
farm,  ferme/ 
farmer,  fermier  m.  (f.  -ere) 
farmhouse,  ferme/ 
farther,  plus  loin 
fast,  vite 
fat,  gras  {f  -sse) 
fate,  sort  in. 
father,  pere  m. 
favorite,  favori  {f  -ite) 
fear  (to)  verb,  craindre  (de),  v.  irr. 

(278;   295,  b);  avoir  peur  (de) 
fear  noun,  peur/i ;  for  ~  that,  de 

crainte  que 
feast,  festin  m.,  regal  m. 
February,  feVrier  m. 
feel,  sentir,  v.  irr.  (258);  tater;  ~ 

well,  se  sentir  bien 
fees,  honorairesy]//. 
felt,  feutre  m. 
few,  peu  (de)  (113);  a  ~,  quelques, 

peu  (de) ;  some  ~,  quelques 
fewer,  moins  (de)  (113) 
field,  champ  m.,  pre*  m. 
fifteen,  quinze 
fifth,  cinquieme 
fifty,  cinquante 
fight,  se  battre,  v.  irr.  (313,  /) 
fill,  remplir ;  ~  with,  remplir  de 


finally,  enfin;  finir  par  (295,  Note) 

find,  trouver 

fine,  beau  (bel,  f.  belle,  m.  pi. 
beaux;  precedes  noun);  be  e*>, 
of  weather,  faire  beau;  become 
<*>,  of  weather,  se  mettre  au 
beau;  become  ~  again,  se  re- 
mettre  au  beau 

finish,  finir  (de)  (295,  b) 

fire,  feu  m.  {pi.  -x);  {conflagra- 
tion) incendie  f. 

first,  premier  (f  -ere);  at  ~r 
d'abord;  ~-class  ticket,  billet 
de  premiere  classe 

fish  verb,  pecher 

fish  noun,  poisson  m. 

fishing,  peche/ 

fit,  aller,  v.  irr.  (256) 

fitting :  be  <*>,  convenir,  v.  irr.  (261 ) 

five,  cinq 

fix  the  hair,  (se)  coiffer 

flag,  drapeau  in.  {pi.  -x) 

flatter,  flatter 

flattering,  flatteur  {f  -se) 

flee,  fuir,  v.  irr.  (313,/) 

floor  {story),  etage  in. 

flour,  iarinef. 

flower,  fleur/ 

fluently,  couramment 

foliage,  feuillage  in. 

follow,  suivre,  v.  irr.  (283) 

following,  suivant,  qui  suit 

foot,  pied  in. 

for  prep.,  pour;  with  expressions 
of  time,  depuis,  pendant,  il  y  a 
(l55)'j  go  ~,  aller  chercher ;  send 
~,  envoyer  chercher 

for  conj.,  car 


512 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


forbid,  ddfendre ;  ~  some  one  to, 
defendre  a  quelqu'un  de 

foreign,  Stranger  {f  -ere) 

foreigner,  etranger  m.  {f  -ere) 

foresee,  pre  voir,  v.  irr.  (269) 

forest,  foretj^ 

forget  (to),  oublier  (de)  (295,  b) 

forgive,  pardonner  (a) 

fork,  fourchette/! 

form  verb,  former 

form  noun,  taille/i 

former  adj.,  ancien  (f.  -nne ;  pre- 
cedes noun);  the  ~,  celui-la,  etc. 
(196,^,  Note) 

formerly,  autrefois 

fortunate,  heureux  {f  -se) 

forty,  quarante 

found,  trouvd 

four,  quatre 

fourteen,  quatorze 

fourth,  quatrieme ;  in  fractions, 
quart  m. ;  in  dates,  quatre  m. 

franc,  franc  m. 

France,  France/^ 

Francis,  Francois 

frank,  franc  {/.  franche) 

free  adj.,  libre 

freeze,  geler,  stem  irr.  (248,  Note) 

French,  francais;  ~  book,  about 
French,  livre  de  francais;  in 
French,  livre  frangais 

Frenchman,  Frangais  m. 

fresh,  frais  {f  fraiche) 

Friday,  vendredi  m. 

friend,  ami  m.  (f.  amie) 

frighten,  effrayer,  stem  irr.  (247) 

frightened :  be  ~>,  s'eff rayer,  stem 
irr.  (247) 


from,  de ;   ~  the,  du,  de  la,  de  1', 

des ;  ~  it  (them),  en 
front :  in  «*  of,  devant 
fruit  adj.,  fruitier  {f  -ere) 
fruit  noun,  of  one  sort,  fruit  m. ; 

collectively,    fruits    m.  pl.\    ~ 

dealer,  fruitier  m.  (f  -ere) 
full,  plein 
fun,  plaisanteriej^;  make  ~  of,  se 

moquer  de 
furnish  (with),  munir  (de) 
furniture,  meubles  m.  pi. 
future  adj.,  futur 
future  noun,  futur  m. 

Gallic,  gaulois 

garden,  jardin  m. 

gas,  gaz  m. 

gather,  cueillir,  v.  irr.  (313,  d) 

Gaul,  the  country,  Gaulef;  a  per- 
son, Gaulois  m. 

gay,  gai 

general  adj.,  general  {pi.  -aux) 

general  7ioun,  general  m.  {pi.  -aux) 

generally,  gdneralement 

generous,  gdndreux  (/  -se) 

gentle,  doux  {f  douce) 

gentleman,  monsieur  m.  {pi.  mes- 
sieurs) 

German,  allemand 

Germany,  Allemagne/ 

get,  chercher,  procurer;  prendre, 
v.  irr.  (279) ;  of  weather,  se  faire ; 
«N3  along,  se  tirer  d'affaire ;  ~  into 
{a  vehicle),  monter  en ;  ~  out  of, 
descendre  de ;  ~  up,  se  lever 

gift,  cadeau  m.  {pi.  -x) 

girl,  fllle/,  jeune  fille 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


513 


give,  donner ;  I  ~,  etc.,  je  donne, 
etc.  (91);  <*>  back,  rendre;  ~  up, 
renoncer  a 

glad,  content,  bien  aise 

glance  verb,  jeter  un  coup  d'ceil 

glance  noun,  coup  d'ceil  {pi.  coups 
d'ceil) 

glass,  verre  tn. 

gloomy,  sombre 

glove,  gant  tn. 

go,  aller,  v.  irr.  (256)  (perf.  auxil- 
iary etre);  ~  and,  aller  +  itif. 
(256;  295,  a);  ~  away,  s'en  aller ; 
~  back  in(to),  rentrer  dans; 
«a  by,  passer ;  <~>  down(stairs), 
descendre;  <v>  down  town,  de- 
scendre  en  ville ;  ~  for,  aller 
chercher ;  ~>  into,  entrer  dans ; 
~  out,  sortir;  ~  to,  aller  (257); 
~  to  bed,  se  coucher ;  ~  to  sleep, 
s'endormir ;  ~  to  town,  aller  en 
ville ;  ~  up(stairs),  monter 

go,  J  dpi.,  vont 

god,  dieu  m.  (pi.  -x) 

goes,  is  going,  va 

gold  adj.,  d'or 

gold  noun,  or  tn. 

good,  bon  (f.  -nne;  precedes  noun); 
«3  morning,  bonjour;  be  <*> 
enough  to,  veuillez  (271,  Note  2) 

good-by,  adieu  tn.  (pi.  -x),au  revoir 

goods,  piece  of,  dtoffe  /.;  cloth, 
€toiitsf.pl. 

gone,  alle  (157);  ~  out,  sorti  (157) 

grammar,  grammaire/ 

grandfather,  grand-pere  m-.,  aieul 
tn. 

grandmother,  grand'mere/ 


grandparents,  grands-parents  tn. 

pi. 
grape,  raisin  tn. 
grasp,  saisir 
grass,  herbe/ 
gray,  gris 

Greek,  grec  (f.  grecque) 
green,  vert ;  grow  ~  again,  reverdir 
grind,  moudre,  v.  irr.  (313,  q) 
grippe,  grippe/, 
grocer,  epicier  tn. 
groceries,  e'piceries/  pi. 
ground,  terrain  tn. ;  ™  floor,  rez-de- 

chaussee  tn. ;  on  the  ~  floor,  au 

rez-de-chaussee 
grow,    crottre,    v.    irr.    (313,  0); 

pousser ;    I  ~,  etc.,   je  pousse, 

etc.  (91) 
grudge:    have  a  ~  against,   en 

vouloir  a 
guess,  deviner 
guide,  guide  tn. 
guidebook,  guide  tn. 

had,  avais,  etc.  (148);   ai  eu,  etc. 

(80) ;  as  auxiliary,  see  151,152; 

<*>  to,  falloir,  v.  irr.  (273,  274) 
hail,  call,  heler,  stem  irr.  (249) 
hair,  cheveux  m.  pi. ;  fix  one's  ~, 

se  coiffer 
hairbrush,  brosse  a  cheveux 
hairdresser,  coiffeur  tn. 
half,  demi  (218,  Note);  ~  an  hour, 

une  demi-heure 
hand,  main/ 
hand  out,  tendre 
handkerchief,  mouchoir  tn. 
hang  on,  accrocher  a 


514 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


happen,  arriver  (perf  auxiliary 
etre) 

happily,  heureusement 

happy,  heureux  (f  -se;  precedes 
noun) 

hard,  ferme 

has,  a ;  as  auxiliary,  see  157;  *» 
to,  falloir,  v.  irr.  (273,  274) 

hast,  as 

hasten  (to),  se  depecher  (de) 

hat,  chapeau  m.  {pi.  -x) 

hate,  *ha*ir,  v.  irr.  (31 3,^) 

hatter,  chapelier  m. 

have,  avoir,  v.  irr.  (148);  ai,  avons, 
avez,  ont  (85);  as  auxiliary, 
see  157;  causative,  faire  (291, 
292);  op  just,  venir  de  +  inf. 
(262);  ~  to,  falloir  (273,  274); 
will  you  ~,  do  you  want, 
voulez-vous  (271,  Note  3) 

he  conj.  pron.,  il ;  disj.,  lui ;  ce 
(198);  cvj  who,  eelui  qui 

head,  tete/I 

headache,  mal  h  la  tete 

health,  santef. ;  be  in  good  ~,  etre 
en  bonne  sante,  se  porter  bien 

healthy :  be  ~}  etre  en  bonne  santd 

hear,  entendre;  (by  report)  en- 
tendre dire  (293) ;  ~  from,  rece- 
voir  des  nouvelles  de;  ~  tell, 
entendre  parler 

heat,  chaleur/! 

heavy,  lourd 

help,  aider  (295,  c) 

henceforth,  ddsormais 

Henry,  Henri 

her  pers. pron.,  dir.  obj.,  la;  indir. 
obj.,  lui ;  obj.  of  prep.,  elle ;  poss. 


adj.,  son,  sa,  ses ;  lui  (se) . . .  le 

(la,  les)  (188);  cv,  who,  celle  qui 
here,  ici ;  ~  is  (are),  voici 
hero,  *heros  m. 
hers,  le  sien  (f  la  sienne)  (189); 

a  elle  ( 1 90,  319) 
herself  refl.,  se  (228);  intetisive, 

elle-meme  (233) 
hesitate,  hesiter 
hesitation,  hesitation/! 
high,  *haut ;  grand  (precedes  7101m) 
him  dir.  obj.,  le ;  indir.  obj.,  lui ; 

obj.  of  prep.,  lui 
himself  refl.,  se  (228);  intensive, 

lui-meme  (233) 
his  poss.  adj.,  son,  sa,  ses ;    lui 

(se)  .  .  .  le  (la,  les)  (188);    poss. 

pro?i.,  le  sien  (f  la  sienne)  (1 89); 

a  lui  (190,  319) 
hold,  tenir,  v.  irr.  (261);  maintenir 
hole,  trou  m. 
home  :  at  ~,  a  la  maison,  chez  soi 

(moi,  etc.) ;  to  (at)  my  (his,  etc.) 

~,  chez  moi  (lui,  etc) 
homely,  vilain  (precedes  noun) 
hope  (to),  espe'rer,  stem  irr.  (249 ; 

295,  a) 
horse,  cheval  m.  (pi.  -aux) 
hospitable,  hospitalier  (f  -ere) 
hostile,  hostile 
hot,  chaud ;  be  ~,  of  weather,  faire 

chaud  (294) ;  be  ~,  feel  hot,  avoir 

chaud 
hotel,  hotel  m. 
hour,  heure /! 
house,  maison/! ;  at  (to)  the  ~  of, 

chez;  at  (to)  my  (his,  etc.)  ~, 

chez  moi  (lui,  etc.) 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


515 


how,  comment :  ~  are  you  ?  com- 
ment allez-vous  ?  comment  vous 
portez-vous?  ~  long,  depuis 
quand,  combien  de  temps  (155); 
~  much  (many),  combien  (de) 
(113);  know  ~,  savoir 

however,  cependant 

hundred,  cent  (215,  b);  a  ~,  cent 

hunger,  faim/ 

hungry  :  be  ~,  avoir  faim 

hunt,  chasser 

hurry  (to),  se  depecher  (de) 

hurt,  blesser,  faire  mal  a 

husband,  mari  m. 

I  conj.  pron.,  je;  disj.,  moi 

ice,  glace/ 

idle,  paresseux  (f  -se) 

if,  si  (68,  d) 

ignorance,  ignorance/: 

ill,  malade 

ill-bred,  mal  e'leve' 

illustrated,  illustre' 

illustrative  sentence,  exemple  m. 

immediately,  tout  de  suite 

imperative,  imperatif  m. 

imperfect,  imparfait  m. 

important,  important;  be  ~,  im- 
porter 

imprison,  incarcerer 

in,  dans,  en  (332);  after  superla- 
tive, de(io8);  before  names  of 
countries,  en,  a  ( 1 20,  b,  Note) ; 
before  natnes  of  cities,  a ;  before 
years  and  names  of  months,  en ; 
~  it  (them),  y ;  «•  the  city,  a  la  ville 

inaptitude,  inaptitude/ 

indeed,  en  effet 


indefinite,  indefini 
independent,  independant 
indicative,  indicatif  m. 
infinitive,  infinitif  ;//. 
inform,  faire  savoir 
information,  renseignements  tn.pl. 
inhabit,  habiter 
inhabitant,  habitant  m. 
injure,  nuire,  v.  irr.  (289) 
ink,  encre/ 
inkstand,  encrier  m. 
insist  (upon),  tenir  a 
inspiration,  inspiration/ 
inspire,  inspirer 
intelligent,  intelligent 
intend  (to),  compter ;  avoir  l'inten- 

tion  de 
interesting,  interessant 
into,  dans,  en 
invasion,  invasion/ 
invite  (to),  inviter  (a)  (295,  c) 
ironical,  ironique 
is,  est;  as  auxiliary,  see  125,  241 ; 

~  it  not?  n'est-ce  pas?  ~  it  that, 

est-ce  que  ;  here  <x>,  void  ;  there 

~,  il  y  a,  voila  (150,  Note) 
island,  ile/ 
it  sub.,  il,  elle ;  ce  (1 78,  b) ;  obj.  of 

verb,  le,  la ;  obj.  of  prep.,  lui,  elle ; 

of  (from,  with)  ~,  en  (181);  to 

(at,  in)  ~;  y  (180) 
Italian,  italien  (/  -nne) 
Italy,  Italie/ 
itinerary,  itine'raire  m. 
its,  son,  sa,  ses;  en  -.  .  .  le  (la,  les) 

(3l8)  ,V.,'':^ 

itself  refl.,  se,  soi(228,  324);  inten- 
sive, lui-meme,  elle-meme(233); 


5i6 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


January,  Janvier  m. 

Japan,  Japon  m. 

jealous,  jaloux  (f.  -se) 

jewel,  bijou  m.  (pi.  -x) 

Joan,  Jeanne 

John,  Jean 

joke,  vouloir  rire 

journey,  voyage  m. ;  on  a  ~,  en 

voyage 
joyfully,  avec  joie 
Julius,  Jules 
July,  juillet  m. 
June,  juin  m. 
just :   to  have  ~,  venir  de  (262) ; 

~  now,  tout  a  l'heure 
justice,  justice/ 

keep,    garder;    ~   one's  promise, 

tenir  sa  promesse 
key,  clef  f. 
kill,  tuer 

kilometer,  kilometre  m. 
kind  adj.,  aim  able 
kind  noun,  sorte/* 
kindly  read,  veuillez  lire 
kindness,  amabilite/! ;  have  the  ~ 

to,  veuillez  (271,  Note  2) 
king,  roi  m. 
kitchen,  cuisine  f. 
knead,  petrir 
knee,  genou  m.  (pi.  -x) 
knew,  savais,  etc. 
knife,  couteau  m.  (pi.  -x) 
knock,  frapper 
know,  a  thing,  savoir,  v.  irr.  (268); 

a  person,  connaitre,  v.  irr.  (276); 

~  how  to,  savoir 
know(s),  sais,  sait 


lace,  dentelle/! 

lady,  dame/ 

lake,  lac  m. 

land,  terre/  ;  native  ~,  patrie/ 

landlord,  proprietaire  m. 

language,  langue/ 

large,  grand  (precedes  noun) 

last  verb,  durer 

last  adj.,  dernier  (f.  -ere);  just 

passed,  passe ;  at  ~,  enfin ;  ~ 

Monday,  lundi  dernier ;  ~  night, 

hier  soir ;  ~  year,  l'anne'e  passee 
late,  tard ;  to  be  ~,  etre  en  retard 
latter :  the  ~,  celui-ci,  celle-ci,  etc. 

(196,  c,  Note) 
laugh,  rire,  v.  irr.  (313,  s);  ~  at, 

(se)  rire  de 
law,  \oif. 
lawyer,  avocat  m. 
lay,  placer,  stem  irr.  (245) 
lazy,  paresseux  (f.  -se) 
lead,  mener,  stem  irr.  (248) ;  con- 

duire,  v.  irr.  (289) 
leaf,  feuille/ 

lean,  appuyer,  stem  irr.  (247) 
learn  (to),  apprendre  (a),   v.  irr. 

(279;   295,0 
least :  the  ~  adj.,  le  (la)  moindre 

(precedes  noun) ;  adv.,  le  moins ; 

at  ~,  au  moins 
leave,  quitter 
leaving,  sortie/! 
left  past  part.,  parti  de 
left  adj.,  gauche ;  to  (at)  the  ^,  a 

gauche ;  to  be  ~.5  rester  (a) ;  (I) 

have  ~,  il  (me)  reste 
left-hand,  de  gauche 
leg,  jambe/ 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


517 


legitimate,  legitime 

length,  longueur/i ;  at  ~,  longue- 

ment 
less  adj.,  moindre  {precedes  noun); 

adv.,  moins  (de)  (113) 
lesson,  lee, on/I ;  grammar  ~,  lecon 

de  grammaire ;  reading  ~?  lecon 

de  lecture 
lest,  que  .  .  .  ne,  de  crainte  que 

(with  subj.,  304);  de  crainte  de 

{with  inf.) 
let,  as  auxiliary  in  imv.,  see  140  ; 

que  (with  subj.,  301);  laisser(20,3) 
letter,  lettre  f ;  ~  box,  boite  aux 

lettres 
lettuce,  laitue/ 
library,  bibliotheque/; 
lie,  mentir,  v.  irr.  (258) 
life,  vie/; 

light  (by)  verb,  eclairer  (a) 
light  nou?i,  lumiere/; 
lighten,  faire  des  eclairs 
lightning,  e'clairs  m.  pi. 
like  (to)  verb,  aimer  (a)  (295,  c) ; 

should  (would)  ~,  cond.  <?/vouloir 
like/r^.,  comme 
line  (with),  doubler  (de) 
linen,  toile/ 
list,  liste/; 
listen  (to),  dcouter 
liter,  litre  in. 
little  adj.,  petit  {precedes  noun); 

adv.,  peu  (de)  (113);    some  ~, 

quelque ;  ~  by  ~,  peu  a  peu 
live,  dwell,  demeurer;  exist  {on), 

vivre  (de),  v.  irr.  (284) ;  enough 

to  ~  on,  de  quoi  vivre ;   long  ~ 

the  king  !  vive  le  roi ! 


lively,  vif  (/  vive) 

living,  vie/. 

lock,  fermer  a  clef 

London,  Londres  m. 

lonesome :  be  <*>,  s'ennuyer,  stem 
irr.  (247) 

long  adj.,  long  (f.  longue ;  precedes 
noun);  adv.,  longtemps;  how~, 
in  expressions  of  ti?ne,  depuis 
quand,  combien  de  temps (1 55,  b, 
Note);  in  dimensions,  combien 
de  longueur;  a  ~  time,  long- 
temps  ;  be  .  .  .  cv>,  in  dimensions, 
avoir  . . .  de  long  (longueur);  ~ 
live  I  vive! 

longer :  no  ~,  ne  .  .  .  plus 

look  :  £*>  at  (upon),  regarder ;  ~  for, 
chercher 

lord,  seigneur  m. 

lose,  perdre 

loss,  perte/; 

loud,  fort,  haut;  out  ~,  a  haute  voix 

loudly,  haut 

love,  aimer;  I  00,  etc.,  j'aime,  etc. 

(90 
low,  bas  (f.  -sse) 
luck  (good),  chance/; 
lucky,  heureux  (f.  -se) 
luggage,  bagages  m.  pi. 
lunch,   ddjeuner  m. ;    ~  counter, 

buffet  m. ;  ~  room,  restaurant  m. 
luncheon,  gouter  m. 
Luxemburg,  Luxembourg  m. 

madam,  madame,  Mme  (pi.  mes^ 

dames,  Mmes) 
magistrate,  magistrat  m. 
magnificent,  magnifique 


5i8 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


maid,  bonne/ 

mail  verb,  jeter  a  la  poste 

mail  noun,  courrier  m. 

mainly,  principalement 

make,  faire,  v.  irr.  (290,  291,  292); 
in  profits,  gagner ;  ~  responsible 
for,  rendre  responsable  de 

makes,'  fait 

man,  homme  m. ;  young  men, 
jeunes  gens  m.  pi. 

manufacturer,  industriel  m. 

many,  beaucoup  (de)  (113);  bien 
(des);  as~,autant(de)(ii3);  how 
~,  combien  (de)(i  13);  so  ~,  tant 
(de)  (113);  too  ~,  trop  (de)  (113) 

map,  carte/ 

March,  mars  m. 

market,  marche"  m. ;  to  ~,  au 
marche* 

marshal,  marechal  m. 

Mary,  Marie 

master,  maitre  m. 

masterpiece,  chef-d'oeuvre  m. 

mathematician,  mathematicien  m. 

mathematics,  mathematique  / 

matter,  affaire  / ;  what  is  the  ~ 
with  me  (you,  etc),  qu'ai-je 
(qu'as-tu,  etc.) 

may,  pouvoir,  v.  irr.  (267;  295,  a); 
as  sign  of  subj.,  que  (301);  <v> 
be,  se  pouvoir 

May,  mai  m. 

me  obj.  of  verb,  me,  moi ;  obj.  of 
prep.,  moi 

mean,  vouloir  dire 

meat,  viande/ 

medicine,  me'decine  /,  medica- 
ment m. 


meet,  rencontrer 

memory,  m^moire/ 

menace,  menace/ 

menu,  menu  m. 

merchandise,  marchandise/ 

merchant,  marchand  m.,  commer- 

cant  m. 
merit,  merite  m. 
merry,  gai 
meter,  metre  m. 
method,  methode/ 
middle,  milieu  m.  {pi.  -x) 
midnight,  minuit  in. 
might,  pouvais,  etc. ;  pourrais,  etc. 
mild,  doux  (f  douce);    be  ~,  of 

weather,  faire  doux 
mile,  mille  m. 
military,  militaire 
milk,  lait  m. 
mill,  moulin  in. 
milliner,  modiste/ 
million,  million  in. 
mind,  esprit  m. 
mine,  le  mien  (/  la  mienne)  ( 1 89) ; 

a  moi  (1 90);  a  friend  of  ~,  un  de 

mes  amis  (3 1 9) 
minute,  minute/ 
mischievous,  malin  (/  maligne) 
misdeed,  rndfait  m. 
miss,  manquer 
Miss,  mademoiselle,  MIle  (pi.  mes- 

demoiselles,  M1Ies) 
mistaken :  be  ~,  se  tromper 
model,  modele  in. 
modern,  contemporain,  moderne 
Moliere,  Moliere 
moment,  moment  m. 
Monday,  lundi  m. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


519 


money,   argent  m. ;   ~  changer, 

changeur  in. 
month,  mois  m. 
monument,  monument  m. 
moon,  lune/ 
more,  plus  (de)  (113);  ~  and «»,  de 

plus  en  plus ;  no  <*>,  ne  .  .  .  plus 
morning,  matin  in. ;  ~s,  le  matin  ; 

in  the  ~,  le   matin;    good  ~, 

bonjour 
mortal,  mortel  {/.  -lie) 
most  (the),  le  (la)  plus,  la  plupart 
mother,  mere/. 
mount,  mont  m. 
mountain,  montagne/ 
mouth,  bouche/ 
move,  mouvoir,  v.  irr.  (313,  * ) :  ~ 

about,  circuler 
moving  about,  mouvement  m. 
Mr.,  monsieur,  M.  {pi.  messieurs, 

MM.) 
Mrs.,    madame,    Mme   {pi.    mes- 

dames,  Mmes) 
much,   beaucoup  (de)  (113),   bien 

(des);    as  ~,  autant  (de)  (113); 

how  ~,  combien  (de)  (113);  so  ~, 

tant  (de)  (113);  too  ~,  trop  (de) 

(113);  very  ~,  fort 
museum,  musee  m. 
must,  necessity,  falloir,  v.  z'rr.{2J3; 

295,  a;  303,  Note  2);  inference, 

devoir,  v.  irr.  (264;  295,  a) 
mustache,  moustache/ 
mutton,  mouton  m. 
my,  mon,  ma,  mes ;  me  .  .  .  le  (la, 

les)(i88) 
myself  refl.,  me;  intensive,  moi- 

m&me 


name  verb,  nommer 

name  noun,  nom  in. ;  my  ev>  is,  je 

m'appelle 
named :  be  ~,  s'appeler,  stem  irr. 

(248,  Note) 
napkin,  serviette/ 
Napoleon,  Napoleon 
nation,  nation/ 
national,  national  {pi.  -aux) 
native  land,  patrie/ 
natural,  naturel  (/  -lie) 
naturally,  naturellement 
nature,  nature/ 
naughty,  me'chant 
near  (to),  pres  (de) 
necessary,  ne'cessaire;  be~,  falloir, 

v. irr. (27 3;  295,  a-,  303,  Note 2) 
necessities,  ndcessites///. 
necktie,  cravate/ 
need  verb,  avoir  besoin  de ;  falloir, 

v.  irr.  (273) 
need  noun,  besoin  m. 
neglect,  negliger,  stem  irr.  (246; 

255,  b) 
neighbor,  voisin  m.  {/.  -e) 
neighborly,  voisin 
neither  .  .  .  nor,   ne  .  .  .  ni  ne, 

ne  .  .  .  ni  .  .  .  ni  (171) 
nephew,  neveu  m.  {pi.  -x) 
net  bag,  filet  m. 
never,  ne  .  .  .  jamais  (168);  jamais 

(169) 
new,  different,   nouveau  (nouvel, 

/  nouvelle,  m.  pi.   nouveaux; 

precedes  noun)-,   newly  made, 

neuf  (/  neuve) 
news,  nouvelle/ 
newspaper,  journal  m.  {pi.  -aux) 


520 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


New  Year's,  jour  de  Tan 

next,  prochain ;  ~  week,  la  semaine 

prochaine 
niece,  niece/ 
night,  nuit/;  last  ~,  hier  soir; 

the  «b  long,  de  la  nuit 
nine,  neuf 
nineteen,  dix-neuf 
ninety,  quatre-vingt-dix 
ninth,  neuvieme 
no,   non ;   partitive,   ne  .  .  .  pas 

de(n6,  a)-,  pas  de  (169);  adj., 

nul (f  -lie);  ~ longer,  ne  . . .  plus 

(168);  ~more, ne. . .  plus (168); 

plus  de  (169) 
nobody,  ne  .  .  .  personne  (168); 

personne  (169) 
noise,  bruit  m. 
none,  n'en  .  .  .  pas  (181,  b) 
noon,  midi  m. 
nor :  neither  .  .  .  ~,  ne  .  .  .  ni  ne, 

ne  . .  .  ni . . .  ni  (171) 
nose,  nez  m. 
not,  ne  . . .  pas  ( 1 68) ;  ~  a,  i;e  . . . 

pas  de (116);  ~any,  ne  .  .  .  pas 

de  (1 16) ;  ~  at  all,  ne  .  .  .  point 

(168);  pas  du  tout 
notebook,  cahier  m. 
nothing,  ne . . .  rien  (168);  rien  ( 1 69) 
noun,  nom  m. 
November,  novembre  m. 
now,  maintenant ;  <*>  is,  voici 
number,  nombre  m. 
nursemaid,  bonne/ 
nut,  noix/ 

obelisk,  obelisque  m. 
obey,  obeTr  a 


oblige  (to),  obliger  (a),  stem  irr. 
(246) ;  be  ~d  to,  falloir,  v.  irr. 
(273,  274) 

obliging,  obligeant 

obtain,  obtenir,  v.  irr.  (261) 

occasion,  occasion/;  on  the  least 
~,  a  la  moindre  occasion 

occupy,  occuper 

o'clock,  heure  / ;  two  <*>,  deux 
heures;  twelve  ~,  noon,  midi 
m. ;  midnight,  minuit  m. 

October,  octobre  m. 

odious,  odieux  (/  -se) 

of,  de;  in  dates,  see  223;  with 
nouns  of  material,  en,  de 
(335>  a)\  ~  the,  du,  de  la,  de  1', 
des;  ~  it  (them),  en  (181);  ~ 
which,  dont  (203) ;  think  ~,  fix 
the  mind  on,  penser  a ;  have  an 
opinion  of,  penser  de ;  quarter  <~ 
ten,  dix  heures  moins  le(un)  quart 

off :  take  cv>,  6ter 

offer,  offrir,  v.  irr.  (260) 

office,  bureau  m. 

officer,  officier  m. 

often,  souvent 

old,  vieux  (vieil;  /  vieille;  pre- 
cedes ?iouri),  ancien  (/  -nne); 
in  years,  age* ;  how  ~>  are  you  ? 
quel  age  avez-vous?  I  am  ten 
years  ~,  j'ai  dix  ans;  je  suis 
igd  de  dix  ans 

omnibus,  omnibus  m. 

on,  sur ;  in  dates,  see  223 

once,  une  fois ;  at  <*>,  tout  de  suite 

one  nu?n.  adj.,  un  (/  une) ;  indef. 
pron.,  on  (242,  243);  ~  another, 
les  un(e)s  les  autres;  ~'s  self, 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


521 


se;  soi(324);  the  ~>  who  (which), 

celui  (celle)  qui 
only  adv.,  seulement ;  ne  .  .  .  que 

(168,  170);  adj.,  seul 
open  verb,  ouvrir,  v  irr.  (260) 
open  adj.,  ouvert 
open(s),  ouvre 
opera,  opera  in. 
opportunity,  opportunity/ 
opposite,  en  face  de 
or,  ou 

orange,  orange/! 
orchard,  verger  m. 
orchestra  seat,  f auteuil  d'orchestre 
order,   ordonner;   in  ~  to,   pour, 

afin  de;   in  ~  that,  pour  que, 

afin  que  (307,  c) 
Orleans,  Orleans  m. 
other,  autre ;  each  ~,  l'un(e)  l'autre ; 

some  .  .  .  ~s,  les  un(e)s  .  .  .  les 

autres 
otherwise,  autrement 
ought,  devoir,  v.  irr.  (264;  295,  a) 
our,  notre,  nos;    nous  .  .  .  le  (la, 

les)  (188) 
ours,  le  (la)  n6tre  (189);    a  nous 

(190) 
ourselves  rejl.,  nous  (228) ;  inten- 
sive, nous-memes  (233) 
out,  dehors  ;  break  ~,  exlater ;  go 

~,  sortir,  v.  irr.  (258) 
outer,  extdrieur 
over,  sur ;  ~  there,  la-bas 
overcoat,  pardessus  in. 
owe,  devoir,  v.  irr.  (264) 
owl,  *hibou  m.  (pi.  -x) 
owner,  propridtaire  m. 
ox,  bceuf  m. 


pack,  a  trunk,  faire  une  malle 
•page,  page/ 
painting,  peinture/ 
pair,  paire/ 
palace,  palais  m. 
paper,  papier  m. ;  news~,  journal 

tn.  (pi.  -aux) 
parents,  parents  m.  pi. 
Paris,  Paris  m. 
park,  pare  m. 
parlor,  salon  m. 
part,  partie/;  take  <v>  in,  prendre 

part  k 
participle,  participe  m. 
pass  (by),  passer 
passport,  passeport  m. 
past,  passe;    half  ~  three,  trois 

heures  et  demie  (224) 
pasture,  pre  m. 
path,  a\\6ef. 

patient,  a  sick  person,  malade  in. 
patriot,  patriote  m. 
pay,  payer,  stem  often  irr.  (247) ; 

~  for,  payer 
peace,  paix/! 

pear,  poire/! ;  ~  tree,  poirier  m. 
peasant,  paysan  m.  (f.  -nne) 
pebble,  caillou  m.  (pi.  -x) 
pedestrian,  pieton  m. 
pen,  plume/ 
pencil,  crayon  m. 
penholder,  porte-plume  m.       * 
people,  les  gens  in.  andf.pl.)  on 

(243) ;  tribe,  peuple  m. 
perceive,  apercevoir,  v.  irr.  (266) 
performance,  representation/ 
perfume,  parfum  in. 
perhaps,  peut-etre 


522 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


perish,  peVir 

permit,   permettre,   v.  irr.  (277; 

295,  V) 
person,    personne  f. ;    young  ~s, 

jeunes  gens  m.pl. 
persuade  (to),  decider  (a)  (295,  c) 
Peter,  Pierre 

photograph,  photographies 
phrase,  phrase/! 
picture,  tableau  m.  (pi.  -x),  gra- 

vure/i 
piece,  morceau  in.  (pi.  -x) 
pity,  plaindre,  v.  irr.  (278) 
place  verb,  placer,  stem  irr.  (245) 
place  noun,  place  /.,  lieu  in.  (pi. 

-x),  endroit  m.,  point  m. ;  take 

«»,  avoir  lieu,  se  faire 
plate,  assiette/ 
play  verb,  jouer ;  play  a  musical 

instrument,  jouer  de ;  I  «v>,  etc., 

je  joue,  etc.  (91) 
play  noun,  piece/! 
plaything,  joujou  m.  (pi.  -x) 
pleasant,  agrdable 
please  intr.,  plaire,  v.  irr.  (285); 

tr.,  plaire  a;  veuillez  (271);  if 

you  <v>,  s'il  vous  plait,  je  vous  prie 
pleased  with,  content  de 
pleasure,  plaisir  m. ;  with  ~,-  avec 

plaisir 
pluperfect,  plus-que-parfait  m. 
plural,  pluriel  m. 
P.  M.,  de  l'apres-midi,  du  soir 
pocket,  poche/ 
poet,  poete  m. 
point,  point  m. 
polite,  poli 
poor,  pauvre 


population,  population  f. 

populous,  peuple 

portrait,  portrait  m. 

possible,  possible 

post,  afficher;    mail,  mettre  a  la 

poste 
postal  card,  carte  postale 
posted  (on),  renseigne  (de) 
postman,  facteur  m. 
post  office,  bureau  de  poste 
potato,     pomme     de     terre    (pi. 

pommes  de  terre) 
pound,  livre/ 
pour,  rain,  pleuvoir  a  verse;  it  ~s, 

la  pluie  tombe  a  verse 
praise,  louer 
prefer,  aimer  mieux;  preferer,  stem 

irr.  (249) 
preferable,  preferable ;  be  ~,  valoir 

mieux 
preparation,  preparatif  m. 
prepare   tr.,   preparer ;    intr.,   se 

preparer  h,  s'appreter  h;  I  ~, 

etc.,  je  prepare,  etc.  (91) 
prescribe,    prescrire    (like   ecrire, 

281) 
present  adj.,  present;    be  ~  at, 

assister  k 
present  noun,  present  m. ;  gift, 

cadeau  m.  (pi.  -x) 
president,  president  m. 
prettily,  joliment 
pretty,  joli  (precedes  noun) 
prevent    (from),    empecher    (de) 

(295,^;  305,^) 
priest,  pretre  m. 
prince,  prince  m. 
princess,  princesse/! 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


523 


prisoner,  prisonnier  m.  (/.  -ere) 
private,  particulier  (f.  -ere) 
proclaim,  proclamer 
proclamation,  proclamation/; 
procure,  procurer 
professor,  professeur  m. 
promise  verb,  promettre,  v.  irr. 

(277;     295,  £);    keep  one's  ~, 

tenir  sa  promesse 
promise  noun,  promesse  f. 
pronounce,  prononcer,   steni    irr. 

(245) 

pronunciation,  prononciation/! 

properly,  bien 

proud,  fier  (f.  -ere) 

provide,  pourvoir,  v.  irr.  (313,  k)\ 
~d  that,  pourvu  que  (307) 

province,  province  f. 

prudent,  prudent 

public,  public  {/.  publique) 

pull  out,  tirer 

pulse,  pouls  m. 

punish,  punir 

punishment,  punition/I 

pupil,  eleve  m.  and/. 

purchase,  emplette/ 

pure,  pur 

purse,  bourse  f. 

pushcart  peddler,  marchand  ambu- 
lant 

put,  mettre,  v.  irr.  (277);  ~  on, 
mettre;  ~  to  bed,  coucher, 
mettre  au  lit 

quarter,  quart  m. 
queen,  reine/ 
quickly,  vite 
quite,  assez 


railroad,  chemin  de  fer ;  ~  time- 
table, indicateur  des  chemins  de 
fer 

railway  station,  gare/ 

rain  verb,  pleuvoir,  v.  irr.  (313,7) 

rain  noun,  pluie/i 

raise,  lever,  stem  irr.  (248) 

rare,  rare 

rarely,  rarement 

ray,  rayon  m. 

read,  lire,  v.  irr.  (282) 

read  past  part.,  lu 

reading,  lecture/ 

reads,  lit 

ready  (to),  pret  (a) 

reason,  cause/! 

recall,  rappeler,  stem  irr.  (248, 
Note) 

receive,   recevoir,   v.   irr.   (266) 

received  past  part.,  regu 

recent,  rdcent 

recently,  re'cemment 

recite,  reciter 

red,  rouge 

refuse  (to),  refuser  (de)  (295,  b) 

regard  :  with  ~  to,  a  l'egard  de 

register,  recommander ;  have  ~ed, 
faire  recommander 

regret  verb,  regretter 

regret  noun,  regret  m. 

reign  verb,  regner,  stem  irr.  (249) 

reign  noun,  regne  m.  . 

relic,  relique/ 

remain,  rester  {per/,  auxiliary 
etre) 

remark,  remarque/i 

remember,  se  souvenir  de,  v.  irr. 

Renaissance,  Renaissance/ 


524 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


render,  rendre 

repeat,  repe'ter 

repent,  se  repentir,  v.  irr.  (258) 

repertory,  repertoire  m. 

reply,  rdpondre,  repliquer 

represent,  representer ;  I  «w,  etc., 

je  represente,  etc.  (91) 
republic,  rdpublique/^ 
resolve,  rdsoudre,  v.  irr.  (313,  r); 

be  ~d  to,  se  re'soudre  h  (295,  b) 
respect,  dgard  m.\   with  ~  to,  a 

l'egard  de 
responsible,  responsable ;  make  ~> 

for,  rendre  responsable  de 
rest,  repos  m. 
restaurant,  restaurant  in. 
result,  resultat  in. 
return,  come  back,  rentrer;  revenir, 

v.   irr.  (261)  (perf.   auxiliary 

etre) ;  go  back,  retourner ;  give 

back,  rendre 
revive,  ranimer 
ribbon,  ruban  in. 
rich,  riche 

ride  horseback,  monter  a  cheval 
right,  droit ;  to  (at)  the  <*>,  a  droite ; 

be  ~,  avoir  raison 
right-hand,  de  droite 
rigorous,  seVere 
ring,  a  bell,  sonner ;  I  ~,  etc.,  je 

sonne,  etc.  (91) 
ripe,  mur 
ripen,  murir 
river,  fleuve  m.,  riviere  f.  (p.  96, 

Note) 
road,  chemin  m.,  route  f. 
roadway,  chausse'e/ 
roast  beef,  rosbif  m. 


room,  chambre_/i,  salle/!,  piece /.; 

lunch  03,  restaurant  in. 
roommate,  camarade  de  chambre 
rose,  rose/! 
round,  rond 
route,  itine'raire  m. 
royalist,  royaliste  m. 
rude,  rude 
rule,  regie/ 
ruler,  regie  f. 
run,  courir,  v.  irr.  (259);  <*>away, 

se  sauver 
running,  courant 
Russia,  Russie_/i 

sad,  triste 

sadly,  tristement 

said  past  part.,  dit 

saint,  saint  in.  (f.  -e) 

salad,  salade/ 

sale,  vente  f. ;    on  ~,  en  vente ; 

for  ~,  a  vendre 
salt,  sel  m. 

same,  meme  (precedes  noun) 
satisfied  with,  content  de 
Saturday,  samedi  m. 
save,  sauver,  economiser 
savings,  Economies  f.pl. 
say,  dire,  v.  irr.  (280);  ~  again, 

redire  (280,  Note) 
says,  dit 
scarcely,  ne  .  .  .  guere  (168);  a 

peine 
school,  dcole/. ;  at  (to)  ~,  a  l'dcole 
school-teacher,  maitre  d'e'cole 
scorn,  rndpris  m. 
sea,  merf. 
seacoast,  c6te/ 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


525 


search,  fouiller  ;  ~  for,  chercher 
seashore,  hord  de  la  mer 
season,  saison/ 
seat  verb,  asseoir,  v.  irr.  (272) 
seat  noun,  place/!,  siege  m. 
seated  past  part.,  assis;   be  ~, 

s'asseoir 
second,  in  series  of  two,  second ; 

in  longer  series,  deuxieme 
secret,  secret  (f.  -ete) 
security,  se'curite'/ 
see,  voir,  v.  irr.  (269;  293);  behold, 

voila;  ~  again,  revoir;  «*  you 

again  soon,  a  bientot 
seek,  chercher 

seem,  sembler ;  it  ~s,  il  semble 
seen,  vu 
Seine,  Seine/ 
seize,  saisir 
select,  choisir 
self,  -meme 
sell,  vendre 
sells,  vend 
senator,  se'nateur  m. 
send,  envoyer,  v.  irr.  (255);  ~  back, 

renvoyer;  <*>  for,  envoyer  cher- 
cher 
sentence,  phrase/ 
separate  adj.,  se'pare' 
September,  septembre  m. 
serious,  serieux  (f.  -se) 
servant,  domestique  m. 
serve,  servir,  v.  irr.  (258) 
served  past  part.,  servi 
set:    <~  out,  partir,  v.  irr.  (258) 

(Perf.    auxiliary   etre);    ~   to 

work,  s'y  prendre 
seven,  sept 


seventeen,  dix-sept 

seventy,  soixante-dix 

several,  plusieurs 

severe,  severe 

sew,  coudre,  v.  irr.  (313,  n) 

shall,  see  136 

shame,  *honte/ 

share,  partager,  stem  irr.  (246) 

sharp,  aigu  (f.  aigue) 

shave,  faire  la  barbe,  raser 

she,  elle,  ce  (198);   ~  who,  celle 

qui 
sheet,  of  paper,  feuille/! 
shelf,  rayon  m. 
shine,  luire,  v.  irr.  (289) 
shirt,  chemise/ 
shoe,  Soulier  m. ;  ~>s  (footwear), 

chaussures  f  pi. 
shop  verb,  faire  des  emplettes 
shore,  rive/ 

short,  court  (precedes  noun) 
shortly,  sous  peu 
should,  see  138,  139;  265,  a;  308 
shout,  crier 
show,  montrer,  faire  voir ;  I  ev>,  etc., 

je  montre,  etc.  (91) 
show  window,  devanture/ 
shut,  fermer 
sick,  malade 
sickness,  maladie/ 
side,  cote  m. 
sidewalk,  trottoir  m. 
sight,  vue/ ;  by  ~,  de  vue 
sign,  signer 
signature,  signature/ 
silent :  be  ~,  se  taire  (286) 
silk,  soie/ 
silver,  argent  m. 


526 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


since  ft  rep.,  depuis ;  conj.,  depuis 

que 
sing,  chanter ;  I  ~,  etc.,  je  chante, 

etc.  (91) 
single,  seul 

sir,  monsieur  (pi.  messieurs) 
sister,  soeur/! 
sit  down,  s'asseoir,  v.  irr.  (272); 

imv.,  asseyez-vous 
situated,  situd 
six,  six 
sixteen,  seize 
sixty,  soixante 
size,  grandeur  f 
skillfully,  adroitement 
skin,  peau/:  (pi.  -x) 
skirt,  jupe/; 
sky,  ciel  m.  (pi.  cieux) 
slaughter,  tuerie/ 
sleep  verb,  dormir,  v.  irr.  (258); 

go  to  ~,  s'endormir 
sleep  noun,  sommeil  m. 
sleeping  room,  chambre  a  coucher 
sleepy :  be  ~,  avoir  sommeil 
sleeve,  manche/i 
small,  petit  (precedes  noun) 
smell,  sentir,  v.  irr.  (258) 
smoke,  fumer ;  ~  a  pipe,  fumer  la 

pipe 
snow  verb,  neiger,  stem  irr.  (246) 
snow  noun,  neige/C 
so,  si,  le  (176);  cv>  .  .  .  as,  si  .  .  . 

que ;  ~  much  (many),  tant  (de) 
sock,  chaussette/i 
soft,  mou  (mol,  f  molle,  m.  pi. 

mous) 
sojourn,  sejour  m. 
soldier,  soldat  m. 


some  adj.,  du,  de  la,  de  1',  des; 

pron.,  en  (181);  ~  little  (few), 

quelque(s)(3i6,  c);  ~  .  .  .  others, 

les  un(e)s  .  .  .  les  autres ;  ~  day, 

un  jour 
somebody,  on  (243),  quelqu'un(e) 
something,  quelque  chose 
sometimes,  quelquefois 
son,  fils  ;//. 
soon,  bientSt,  tot ;  as  ~  as,  aussitSt 

que,  des  que  (137,  152)     - 
sorcerer,  sorcier  (f.  -ere) 
sou,  sou  m. 
soup,  soupe/i 
south,  midi  m. 
Spain,  Espagne/: 
speak,  parler ;  I  <*>,  etc.,  je  parle, 

etc.  (91) ;  03  about,  parler  de  ;  so 

to  ~,  pour  ainsi  dire 
special,  special  (pi.  -aux) 
spell :  dizzy  ~?  e'blouissement  m. 
spend,    money,    de'penser;    time, 

passer 
spite  :  in  <*>  of,  malgre' 
spoon,  cuiller/; 
sport:    make  <~  (of),  se  moquer 

(de) 
spring,  printemps  m. ;  in  (the)  <~, 

au  printemps 
square  adj.,  carre 
square  noun,  of  a  city,  place  f 
stable,  for  cattle,  Stable  f ;  for 

horses,  €c\xnz  f 
stairs,  staircase,  escalier  m. 
stamp,    timbre   m. ;    ~   window, 

guichet  m. 
standing,  debout 
star,  e'toile/ 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


527 


start,  partir,  v.  irr.  (258)  (per/. 

auxiliary  etre) 
started  past  part.,  parti;  ~  from, 

parti  de 
state,  etat  m. ;  in  a  ~  of,  en  etat  de 
station,  railway,  garef 
statue,  statue/: 
stay  verb,  rester  (per/,  auxiliary 

etre) 
stay  noun,  sejour  m. 
steal,  voler ;  ~  from,  voler  a 
still,  encore 
stirred :  be  ~  by,  s'emouvoir  (313, 

i,  Note)  de 
stocking,  bas  m. 
stop  tr.,  arreter;  intr.,  s'arreter 
store,  magasin  m. 
story,  of  a  house,  dtage  m. 
stout,  gros  (f.  -sse  ;  precedes  noun) 
stranger,  etranger  (/  -ere) 
strawberry,  f raise/? 
street,  rue/ ;  ~  car,  tramway  m. ; 

<*>  dress,  costume  de  ville 
strike,  f  rapper;  of  a  clock,  sonner 
strong,  fort 

student,  ecolier  m.  (f  -ere) 
studious,  studieux  (f  -se) 
study  verb,  etudier 
study  noun,  etude  f 
stupid,  sot  (/.  -tte) 
sturdy,  robuste 
subject,  sujet  (/  -tte) 
subjunctive,  subjonctif  m. 
succeed  (in),  rdussir  (a)  (295,  c) 
such,  tel  (f  -lie ;  precedes  noun) 
(101);  ~  a,  un  tel  (f  une  telle) 
suddenly,  tout  a  coup 
suffer,  souffrir,  v<  irr.  (260) 


sufficient :  be  ~,  suffire,  v.  irr. 

sugar,  sucre  m. 

suit  verb,  aller,  v.  irr.  (246) ;  con- 

venir  a 
suit  noun,  costume  m. 
suitable :  be  ~,  convenir,  v.  irr. 

(261 ;  303) 
summer,  ete  m. ;  in  (the)  ~,  en  6te 
sun,  soleil  m. 
Sunday,  dimanche  m. 
superb,  superbe 
supper,  souper  m. 
suppose,  supposer 
supposing  that,  suppose  que  (307) 
sure,  sur,  vrai 
surely',  surement,  vraiment 
surprised :  be  ~  (at),  s'etonner  (de) 
suspect,  soupqonner 
swamp,  marecage  m. 
sweet,  doux  (f  douce) 
sweetly,  doucement 
swim,  nager,  stem  irr.  (246) 

table,  table/ 

tablecloth,  nappe/ 

tailor,  tailleur  m. 

take,  prendre,  v.  irr.  (279);  aper- 
so?i,  amener,  stem  irr.  (248);  <>o 
along,  emporter ;  ~  away,  enle- 
ver ;  ~  back,  reporter ;  03  from, 
prendre  a ;  ~  oflf,  6ter ;  ~  part 
in,  prendre  part  a;  ~  place,  avoir 
lieu,  se  faire;  ~  the  trouble, 
prendre  (se  donner)  la  peine ;  ~ 
a  walk,  se  promener 

taken  past  part.,  pris 

talk,  parler,  causer ;  ~  about,  parler 
de ;  cv>  business,  parler  d'affaires 


528 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


tall,  grand 

tapestry,  tapisserie/i 

taste,  gout  m. 

teach  (to),  enseigner  (a)  (295,  c) 

teacher,    of  a   primary    school, 

maitre  m.  (f  -resse) ;  of  a  higher 

school,  professeur  m. 
tell,  dire,  v.  irr.  (280;  295,  b);  a 

story,  raconter 
ten,  dix 
tender,  tendre 
Thames,  Tamise/ 
than,  que ;  followed  by  a  numeral, 

de 
thank  (for),  remercier  (de) ;  ~  you, 

merci 
that   rel.  pron.,   qui,  que,   lequel 

(laquelle,    etc.)    (199,    200);    ~ 

which,  ce  qui,  ce  que,  ce  .  .  .  quoi 

(206) ;  all  ~,  tout  ce  qui  (que) 
that  dem.  adj.,  ce,  cet,  cette  (193); 

emphatic,  ce  (cet,  cette)  ...  -la 

(194);    dem.  pron.,   celui,  celle 

(195);  cela,  ?a(i97);  ce  (198); 

emphatic,  celui-la  (celle-la)(  1 96,  c) 
that  conj.,  que 
the,  le,  la,  1',  les 
theater,  theatre  m. 
thee,  obj.  of  verb,  te,  toi ;  obj.  of 

prep.,  toi 
their,  leur  (185 ;  see  188);  en  .  .  . 

le  (la,  les)  (318) 
theirs,  le  leur  (1 89) ;  a  eux,  a  elles 

(190) 
them,  dir.  obj.,  les ;    indir.  obj., 

leur;  obj.  of  prep.,  eux,  elles 
themselves   refl.,   se ;    intensive, 

eux-memes,  elles-memes  (233) 


then,  alors,  puis,  ensuite 

there,  la,  y  (180,  Note),  la-bas; 
ev.  is  (was,  etc.),  il  y  a  (avait,  etc) 
(1 50) ;  calling  attention,  voila ! 

thereupon,  la-dessus 

these  adj.,  ces;  emphatic,  ces  .  .  . 
-ci  (194);  pron.,  ceux,  celles 
(195);  ce(i98);  emphatic,  ceux- 
ci  (celles-ci)  (196,  c) 

they  conj.  pron.,  ils,  elles ;  disj., 
eux,  elles;  ce(i98);  indefinite, 
on  (243);  ~  who,  ceux  (celles) 
qui  (196) 

thick,  <£pais  (/  -sse) 

thief,  voleur  m. 

thine,  le  tien  (/  la  tienne)  (1 89) ;  a 
toi  (190) 

thing,  chose/ 

think,  penser ;  croire,  v.  irr.  (288); 
I  ~,  etc.,  je  pense,  etc.  (91); 
oa  about  (of),  fix  the  mind  on, 
penser  a;  have  an  opinion  of, 
penser  de 

third,  troisieme ;  infractions,  tiers 

thirst,  soiffi 

thirsty  :  be  ~,  avoir  soif 

thirteen,  treize 

thirty,  trente 

this  adj.,  ce,  cet,  cette  (193);  em- 
phatic, ce  (cet,  cette)  .  .  .  -ci 
(194);  pron.,  celui,  celle  (195); 
ceci  (197);  ce  (198);  emphatic, 
celui-ci  (celle-ci)  (196,  c) 

those  adj.,  ces ;  emphatic,  ces  .  .  . 
-Ia(i94);^/wz.,ceux,celles(i95); 
ce  (198);  emphatic,  ceux-la 
(celles-la)  (196,  c) 

thou  conj.  pron.,  tu ;  disj.,  toi 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


529 


though,  quoique,  bien  que  (305) 

thousand,  mille;  in  dates,  mil 
(220) ;  a  05,  mille 

threat,  menace/ 

three,  trois 

throat,  gorge/ ;  sore  ~,  mal  a  la 
gorge;  my  ~  is  sore,  j'ai  mal  a 
la  gorge 

through,  par ;  ~  which,  par  ou  (322) 

throw,  jeter,  stem  irr.  (248,  Note) 

thundering :  be  «w,  f aire  du  tonnerre 

thunderstorm,  orage  m. 

Thursday,  jeudi  m. 

thus,  ainsi 

thy,  ton,  ta,  tes  {see  1 88) 

thyself  refl.,  te;  intensive,  toi- 
meme  (233) 

ticket,  billet  m. ;  ~  window,  gui- 
chet  m. 

time,  temps  m.,  occasion/I,  fois/ ; 
have  a  good  ~,  s'amuser ;  in  «v>, 
a  temps;  on  ~,  a  l'heure,  a 
temps;  a  long  ~,  longtemps; 
what  ~  is  it  ?  quelle  heure  est- 
il  ?  three  ~s  a  day,  trois  fois  par 
jour ;  two  cxjs  two,  deux  fois  deux 

time-table,  railway,  indicateur  des 
chemins  de  fer 

tip,  pourboire  m. 

tired,  fatigue 

to,  a ;  as  sign  ofindir.  obj.,  see  1 72, 
173;  with  names  of  countries, 
en,  a ;  in  order  to,  pour,  arm  de 
(309) ;  ~  the,  au,  a  la,  a  1',  aux ; 
<v>  it  (them),  y  (1 82) ;  ev  the  house 
of,  chez 

today,  aujourd'hui;  m  is  Monday, 
c'est  aujourd'hui  (le)  lundi 


together,  ensemble 

told  past  part.,  dit 

tomato,  tomate/i 

tomb,  tombeau  m.  (pi.  -x) 

tomorrow,  demain;  ~  morning, 
demain  matin 

tongue,  langue/! 

too,  trop ;  also,  aussi ;  ~  much 
(many),  trop  (de)  (113) 

took,  prit,  prirent  (279) 

tooth,  dent/ 

toothbrush,  brosse  aux  dents 

top,  haut  m. 

tower,  tour/ 

town,  ville/  ;  in  (to)  ~,  en  ville 

toy,  joujou  m.  (pi.  -x) 

trace  out,  tracer,  stem  irr.  (245) 

tragedy,  trage"die/ 

tramcar,  tramway  m. 

translate,  traduire,  v.  irr.  (289) 

travel  verb,  voyager,  stem  irr. 
(246) 

travel  noun,  voyage  m. 

traveler,  voyageur  m.  (f.  -se) 

treacherous,  traitre  (f.  -resse) 

treasure,  tresor  m. 

tree,  arbre  m. 

tribe,  peuple  m. 

trim  (with),  garnir  (de) 

troop,  troupe/ 

trouble,  peine  /,  des  ennuis  m. 
pi. ;  take  the  ~  (to),  prendre  (se 
donner)  la  peine  (de) ;  be  worth 
the  ~,  en  valoir  la  peine 

trousers,  pantalon  m. 

true,  accurate,  vrai ;  loyal,  fidele 

trunk,  malle/ 

truth,  ve'ritd/ 


53Q 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


try  (to),  essayer  (de),  stem  some- 
times irr.  (247 ;  295,  b) 

Tuesday,  mardi  m. 

Turkish,  turc  (f  turque) 

turn,  tour  m. 

twelve,  douze ;  o'clock,  {noon)  midi 
m.,  {night)  minuit  m. 

twenty,  vingt 

twenty-first,  vingt  et  unieme 

twenty-one,  vingt  et  un 

twice,  deux  fois 

twin,  jumeau  (/.  -elle ;  m.pl.  -x) 

two,  deux 

ugly,  vilain  (precedes  noun) 

umbrella,  parapluie  m. 

uncle,  oncle  m. 

under,  sous 

undergo,  subir 

understand,  comprendre,  v.  irr. 

United  States,  fitats-Unis  m.  pi. 

unless,  a  moins  que  (307) 

until  con/.,  jusqu'a  ce  que  (307); 

prep.,  jusqu'a  (309,  Note) 
up,  out  of  bed,  leve,  sur  pied 
upside  down,  a  l'envers 
upstairs,  en  haut 
us,  nous 
use,   employer,    stem   irr.   (247); 

se  servir  de 
used  to,  see  130 
useful,  utile 
useless,  inutile 
usually,  d'ordinaire 

vacation,  vacances  f  pi. ;  have  a 

~,  etre  en  vacances 
valise,  valise/ 


value  correctly,  apprdcier 
vase,  vase  m. 
veal,  veau  m. 
vegetable,  legume  m. 
verb,  verbe  m. 
very,  tres ;  ~  much,  fort 
vest,  gilet  m. 
vice,  vice  m. 
victory,  victoire/ 
Vienna,  Vienne/i 
view,  vuef 
village,  village  m. 
violence,  violence^ 
virtue,  vertu/ 
visit  verb,  visiter 
visit  nou?i,  visite/ 
visitor,  visiteur  m.  (f  -se) 
voice,  voix  f. ;  in  a  low  ~,  k  voix 
basse 

wait,  attendre;  0=  for,  attendre; 
~  until,  attendre  que  (307) 

waiter,  garcon  m. 

waiting-room,  salle  d'attente 

waken,  se  reveiller 

walk,  marcher;  se  promener,  stem 
irr.  (248);  go  for  a  ~,  se  pro- 
mener (a.  pied);  take  a  ~,  se 
promener 

wall,  mur  m. 

walnut  tree,  noyer  m. 

wander  about,  vagabonder 

want,  vouloir,  v.  irr.  (271 ;  295,  a) 

war,  guerre/! 

warm,  chaud;  be  <~>,  of  a  person, 
avoir  chaud;  of  the  iveathe?', 
faire  chaud 

warn,  avertir 


ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 


531 


was,  e"tais,  etc. ;  ai  ete,  etc. ;  as 
active  auxiliary,  see  1 30 

wash,  laver 

watch,  montre/ 

water,  eau/  {pi.  -x) 

way,  chemin  m.,  route/.;  on  the 
~,  en  route,  chemin  faisant; 
this  (that)  ~,  par  ici  (la) 

we,  nous ;  indefinite,  on  (243) 

wealth,  richesses/i//. 

wear,  porter 

weather,  temps  m. ;  be  fine  ~, 
faire  beau  temps 

Wednesday,  mercredi  m. 

week,  semaine  f.,  huit  jours ;  last 
~,  la  semaine  derniere,  la  se- 
maine passee ;  a  ~  from  today, 
d'aujourd'hui  en  huit 

weep,  pleurer 

well  adj. :  be  ~,  aller,  v.  irn ;  se 
porter 

well  adv.,  bien ;  intj.,  eh  bien ! 

well-bred,  bien  eleve 

were,  e'tions,  etc. ;  avons  ete,  etc. ; 
as  active  auxiliary,  see  130 

west,  ouest  m. ;  in  the  ~,  a  l'ouest 

what  rel.  pron.,  ce  qui,  ce  que,  ce 
.  .  .  quoi  (206) ;  int.  pron.,  que, 
quoi,  qu'est-ce  qui,  qu'est-ce  que 
(21 1,  323);  int.  adj.,  quel  (f.  -lie) 
(2 1  o) ;  intj.,  comment !  ~  a,  quel 
(f.  -lie)  (2 10,  Note  2);  ~  is  that? 
qu'est-ce  quec'est  que  cela?  (323) 

whatever  pron.,  quoi  que  (307, d); 
adj.,  quel  que  (307,  d) 

wheat,  ble  m. 

When,  quand  (137,  152),  lorsque, 
ou ;  int.,  quand 


whence,  d'ou  (322);  from  ~,  d'ou 

where,  ou ;  from  ~,  d'ou  (322) 

whether,  si  (139,  Note  3),  que 
(304,  Note  3) 

which  rel.  pron.,  qui,  que  (199); 
lequel  (laquelle,  etc.)  (200);  int. 
pron.,  lequel  (laquelle,  etc) 
(212,  b);  int.  adj.,  quel  {/.  -lie) 
(2 1 2,  a) ;  of  (from,  with)  ~,  dont 
(203) ;  duquel  (de  laquelle,  etc.) 
(200,  Note  2) ;  to  (at,  in)~,  auquel 
(a  laquelle,  £/<:.)  (200,  Note  2);  ou 
(205) ;  through  ~,  par  ou  (322) ; 
that  of  ~,  ce  de  quoi,  ce  dont, 
ce  h.  quoi  (206) 

while,  time,  pendant  que;  con- 
cession, tandis  que ;  with  pres. 
part.,  en,  tout  en  (162,  298) 

white,  blanc  (f.  blanche) 

who  rel.,  qui  (199);  int.,  qui  (208); 
qui   est-ce   qui,   qui   est-ce   que 

(323) 

whoever,  qui  que  (307) 

whole :  the  ~,  tout  le  (101) 

wholesale,  en  gros       • 

whom  rel.,  que,  qui  (199);  int.,  qui 
(208);  qui  est-ce  que  (323);  of 
(from,  with)  ~,  dont  (203);  de 
qui;  duquel  (de  laquelle,  etc.) 
(200,  Note  2) 

whose  rel.,  dont,  de  qui,  duquel 
(de  laquelle,  etc)  (203 ;  200, 
Note  2);  int.,  (possession)  a  qui, 
(relationship)  de  qui  (209) 

why,  pourquoi;  intj.,  comment! 
mais ! 

wicket,  window,  guichet  m. 

wide,  large 


532 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


width,  largeur/ 

wife,  femmej^ 

will,  see  136 

William,  Guillaume 

willing :  be  ~,  vouloir  bien,  v.  irr. 

(271);    are  you  «*,  voulez-vous 

(271,  Note  3) 
wind,  vent  m. 
window,  fenetre/ 
windy :  be  oa,  f  aire  du  vent 
wine,  yin  m. 
wineglass,  verre  a  vin 
wing,  ailef 
winter,  hiver  m. ;   in  (the)  ~,  en 

hiver 
wish,  vouloir,  v.  irr.  (271 ;  295,  a; 

304) 

with,  avec ;  ~  it  (them),  en 

without  {&)prep.,  sans  (298);  con/., 
sans  que  (307) ;  do  ~,  se  passer 
de  ;  ~  saying,  sans  dire 

woman,  femme/ 

wood,  bois  m. 

wooden,  de  bois 

wool,  laine/ 

word,  in  speech,  parole  f. ;  gram- 
matical linit,  mot  m. 

work  verb,  travailler;  I  ~,  etc.,  je 
travaille,  etc.  (91) 

work  noun,  travail  m:  {pi.  -aux); 
(of  art)  ceuvre/; 

world,  monde  m. 

worse  adj.,  pire  {precedes  noun) ; 
adv.  pis 

worship,  adorer 

worst  (the)  adj.,  le  pire  {precedes 
noun) ;  adv.  le  pis 


worth:  be  ~,  valoir,  v.  irr.  (270); 

be  ~  the  trouble,  en  valoir  la 

peine 
would,  see  130,  138,  139 
wrap  up,  envelopper 
wreath,  couronne/] 
write,  e'cris,  etc.  (p.  49);    ecrire, 

v.  irr.  (281) 
writes,  ecrit 
wrong,  tort ;  be  ~,  avoir  tort 

yard,  coury: 

year,  as   a   date,  an  m.\    as   a 

whole,  anne'e_/\ 
yellow,  jaune 
yes,  oui ;  si  (330);  ~  indeed,  mais 

oui 
yesterday,  hier;  ~  evening,  hier 

soir;  day  before  ~,  avant-hier 
yet,  encore 

yield,  cdder,  stem  irr.  (249) 
yonder,  la-bas 
you,  vous;  familiar,  tu,  toi  (142); 

indefnite,  on  (243) 
young,  jeune  {precedes  noun) 
younger,  cadet  (/  -tte) 
your,     votre,     vos     (185,     188); 

familiar,  ton,  ta,  tes  (142,  185, 

188) 
yours,  le  v6tre  (189);  a  vous  ( r  90) ; 

familiar,  le  tien  {f  la  tienne) 

(189);  a  toi  (190) 
yourself  refl.,  vous;  fa?niliar,  te; 

intensive,  vous-meme  (1 79);  fa- 
miliar, toi-meme 
yourselves  refl.%  vous;  intetisive, 

vous-memes  (179) 


GENERAL   INDEX 


References  are  to  pages 


a,  contractions  with,  29,  193 

distinguished  from   dans,    en, 
169,  392 

in  compound  nouns,  392 

with  geographical  names,  95 

with  units  of  measure,  259 
a  moins  que,  368 
a  qui,  244 

abstract  nouns,  article  with,  94 
accents,  3 
acquerir,  380,  440 
address,  titles  of,  49 
adjectives,  agreement  of,  60 

comparison  of,  77 

demonstrative,  221 

feminine  of,  60,  71,  378 

interrogative,  244-246 

plural  of,  60 

position  of,  64,  388 

possessive,  29,  212 

used  as  nouns,  65 
adverbs,  comparison  of,  83 

formation  of,  82,  430 

of  quantity,  83 

position  of,  82,  390 
affiches,  252 

afin  de,  with  infinitive,  370 
afin  que,  subjunctive  after,  368 
age,  expression  of,  265 
ag6  and  vieux,  79,  265 
agreement,  of  adjectives,  60 

of  participles,  168,  434 

of  possessives,  213 

of  verbs,  33,  224 


aller,  conjugation  of,  303,  440 

idioms  with,  303 
alphabet,  2 
anterior,  past,  156 
apostrophe,  3 
apposition,  omission   of  article  in, 

383 

articles,  for  possessives,  212 
forms  of,  25,  26 
repetition  of,  26 
special  uses  of,  94 
with  names  of  languages,  137 
with  names  of  relatives,  383 
with  names  of  seasons,  185 
with  titles  of  sovereigns,  265 

aspirate  h,  18 

assaillir,  380,  440 

asseoir,  323,  444 

aussi  .  .  .  que,  78 

aussitot  que,  125,  156 

auxiliaries,  perfect  tenses,  155,  163, 

434 
with  reflexive  verbs,  273 

avant  que,  subjunctive  after,  368 

avoir,  as  auxiliary,  155 

conjugation  of,  149,  435 
idiomatic  uses  of,  150,  260 
with  parts  of  the  body,  2 1 3 

battre,  381,  448 

bien,  used  with  de,  383 

boire,  334,  448 

bon,  comparison  of,  78 

bouillir,  380,  440 


533 


534 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


ca,  223 

campagne  and  pays,  66 

capitals,  use  of,  2 
cardinal  numbers,  253 

in  dates,  264 

in  titles,  265 
ce,  use  of,  222,  223 
ce  dont,  238 
ce  que,  238 
ce  qui,  238 
ce  quoi,  238 
ceci,  223 
cedilla,  3 
cela,  223 
celui,  222 
celui-ci,  223 
celui-la,  223 
cent,  254 
ci,  222 

classroom  phrases,  422 
combien,  as  adverb  of  quantity,  83 

in  interrogative  sentences,  179 
comparatives,  followed  by  ne,  363 
comparison,  of  adjectives,  yy 

of  adverbs,  83 
compound  nouns,  formation  of,  392 

gender  of,  428 

plural  of,  429 
compound    tenses,    155,    163,    434, 

435 
compound  verbs,  302 
concession,  clauses  of,  368 
conclure,  381,  448 
conditional,  conjugation  of,  129 

formation  of,  129,  301 

uses  of,  129 
conditions,  expression  of,  130,  157 
conduire,  335,  448 
conjugation,  of  irregular  verbs,  300- 
341,  440-455 

of  regular  verbs,  102-141,  432, 

433 


conjunctions,  compared  with  prep- 
ositions, 370 

conjunctive  pronouns,  192 

connaitre,  328,  448 

consonantal  vowels,  13 

consonants,  sounds  of,  17-22 

contractions  with  the  article,  29 

conversational  phrases,  424 

coudre,  381,  448 

countries,  prepositions  with  names 
of,  95 

courir,  308,  440 

couvrir,  309,  443 

craindre,  328,  450 

croire,  335,  450 

croitre,  381,  450 

cueillir,  380,  440 

dans,  distinguished  from  a,  en,  169, 

392 

dates,  expression  of,  263,  264 

days  of  the  week,  264 

de,  contractions  with,  29,  193 
in  compound  nouns,  392 
to  express  in,  j8 
to  express  material,  214 
with  adverbs  of  quantity,  83 
with  geographical  names,  95 
with  nouns  of  measure,  90,  260 
with  passive  voice,  282 

de  qui,  237,  244 

definite  article,  contractions  of,  29 
forms  of,  25 
inclusive  use  of,  94 
partitive  use  of,  89 
possessive  use  of,  212 
uses  of,  94,  95 

demander,  construction  with,  200 

demi,  259 

demonstrative  adjectives,  221 

demonstrative  pronouns,  222 

dependent  infinitives,  348 


GENERAL  INDEX 


535 


depuis,  157 

des  que,  with  past  anterior,  1 56 
descriptive  past,  see  imperfect 
devoir,  316,  444 
diaeresis,  3 
digraphs,  1 1 
dire,  329,  450 

disjunctive  pronouns,  199,  384 
dont,  237 
dormir,  308,  440 

doubting,    clauses   following   verbs 
of,  362 

e  mute,  9 
6crire,  329,  450 
elision,  23 

empecher,  use  of  ne  after,  363 
en,  preposition,  distinguished  from 
a.  dans,  392 
preposition,  to    express   mate- 
rial, 214,  393 
preposition,  with  dates,  263 
preposition,     with     names     of 

countries,  95 
preposition,  with  present  parti- 
ciple, 168 
preposition,  with  seasons,  185 
pronoun,  position  of,  206 
pronoun,  possessive  use  of,  384 
pronoun,  use  of,  204 
endings  of  verbs,  431 
entendre,    construction    following, 

341     • 

envoyer,  303,  440 

est-ce  que,  177 

etre,  as  auxiliary,  163,  434 
conjugation  of,  163,  435 
to  express  ownership,  213,  244 

faillir,  381,  442 
faire,  conjugation  of,  339,  450 
idiomatic  uses  of,  339,  341 


falloir,  conjugation  of,  323,  446 

uses  of,  323 
fearing,      construction      following 

verbs  of,  361,  363 
feminine,  of  adjectives,  60,  71,  378 

of  nouns,  61,  428 
final  consonants,  linking  of,  22 

pronunciation  of,  17 
first  conjugation,  103,  108,  433 

irregularities  of,  294,  438 
fleuve  and  riviere,  96 
fractions,  259 
fuir,  381,  442 
future,  conjugation  of,  124 

formation  of,  124,  301 

uses  of,  125 

gender  of  nouns,  25,  428 
geographical  names,  95 

h,  aspirate,  18 

hair,  381,  442 

heure,  264 

huit,  no  elision  before,  254 

hyphen,  3 

ilya,  151,  157 

imperative,  conjugation  of,  135 

formation  of,  135,  301 

translation  of,  135 

use    of    singular    and    plural, 
136 
imperfect,  conjugation  of,  109 

formation  of,  109,  301 

use  of,  no,  116 
imperfect  subjunctive,  conjugation 
of,  141 

formation  of,  141,  301 
impersonal     verbs,      construction 
after,  356 

definition  of,  323 
inclusive  article,  94 


536 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


indefinite  article,  forms  of,  26 

omission  of,  95 
indicative,  use   of,  contrasted  with 

subjunctive,  355 
indirect  object,  192 

after  special  verbs,  195,  200 
infinitive,  after  prepositions,  350 

as  noun,  350 

denoting  purpose,  349 

dependent,  348 

distinguished  from  subjunctive, 

369 

endings  of,  102 

for  finite  verb,  350 

negativing  an,  350 

with  a,  349 

with  de,  349 

without  preposition,  348 
intensive  pronouns,  200 
interrogation,  44,  177 
interrogative  adjectives,  244-246 
interrogative  pronouns,  244-246, 385 
interrogatives,  order  with,  178 
intransitive  verbs,  perfect  of,   164, 

434 
inversion  of  verb  and  subject,  390 
irregular  verbs,  conjugation  of,  303- 

341,  440-455 
it  and  they,  34,  192,  199,  223 


Latin  and  French,  1 
le,  definite  article,  25 

to  avoid  repetition,  194 
lequel,  interrogative,  245 

relative,  229,  230,  385 
letters,  names  of,  2 
liaison,  22 
lire,  329,  452 
l'on,  287 
luire,  335,  452 

map  of  France,  257 

Marseillaise,  425 

material,  nouns  of,  90,  214,  393 

maudire,  381,  452 

measure,  expressions  of,  90,  259 

mentir,  308 

menu,  209 

mettre,  328,  452 

mil,  263 

mille,  254 

milliard,  254 

million,  254 

models  of  correspondence,  394 

months,  names  of,  264 

moudre,  381,  452 

mourir,  309,  442 

mouvoir,  381,  446* 

mute  e,  9 


jeux  lV esprit,  218 
joindre,  328,  450 

jusqu'a  ce  que,   subjunctive  after, 
368 

1,  liquid,  19 

V,  in  elision,  25 

la,  204,  223 

laisser,  construction  following,  340, 

34i 
languages,    names  of,   construction 
with,  137 


naitre,  263,  328 

narrative  past,  see  past  definite 

nasal  sounds,  14 

ne,  after  comparatives,  363 

in  negative  expressions,  183 

omission  of,  184 

pleonastic,  362 
ne  .  .  .  que,  183,  184 
necessity,  expression  of,  324 
negation,  39,  183 
negatives,  183 
n'est-ce  pas,  179 


GENERAL  INDEX 


537 


neuf  and  nouveau,  72 

ni,  184 

nouns,  as  adjectives,  49 
feminine  of,  61,  429 
gender  of,  25,  428 
plural  of,  26,  55,  378,  429 
position  of,  when  subject,  178, 

nuire,  335,  453 
numerals,  cardinals,  253 
ordinals,  258 

object  pronouns,  position  of,  193 

offrir,  309,  442 

on,  uses  of,  287 

onze,  no  elision  before,  254 

order  of  elements  in  sentence,  206 

ordinal  numbers,  258 

orthographic  marks,  3 

irregularities  in   first  conjuga- 
tion, 294,  438 
Oil,  in  interrogative  sentences,  178 

used  as  a  relative,  237,  385 
ouvrir,  309,  442 
ownership,  expression  of,  213,  244 

par,  in  expressing  units  of  time,  259 
with  faire  and  infinitive,  340 
with  passive  voice,  282 

paraitre,  328,  449 

participle,  agreement  of,  168 
past,  endings  of,  108 
present,  after  en,  168 
present,  endings  of,  108 

partir,  308,  442 

partitive  construction,  89,  150,  20 ', 

383 
pas,  omission  of,  318,  391 
passive  voice,  agent  after,  282 
agreement  in,  280 
conjugation  of,  280,  437 
on  used  for,  287 


reflexive  used  for,  286 

.tense  usage  in,  281 

use  of,  286 
past  anterior,  156 
past  definite,  conjugation  of,  115 

formation  of,  115,  301 

uses  of,  116 
past  indefinite,  116,  117' 
payer,  construction  with,  195 
peindre,  328,  452 
pendant,  157 
penser  with  a  or  de,  205 
perfect  tenses,  436 

formation  of,  155,  163 

uses  of,  156 
personal  pronouns,  192-200 
personne,  183,  184,  390 
petit,  comparison  of,  78 
phonetic  alphabet,  6 
phonetic  material,  415 
phonetic  transcription  of  models,  418 
plaire,  334,  452 
pleuvoir,  381,  446 
plupart,  383 
pluperfect,  156 
plural,  of  adjectives,  60 

of  nouns,  26,  55,  378,  429 
position,  of  adjectives,  64,  388 

of  adverbs,  82,  390 

of   conjunctive    personal   pro- 
nouns, 193,  206 

of  en  and  y,  206 

of  negatives,  184 

of  reflexive  pronouns,  273 
possession,  expression  of,  29,  213 
possessive    adjectives,     agreement 
of,  29,  213 

article  used  for,  212 

list  of,  212 

use  of,  211,  385 
possessive  pronouns,  213 
pour,  with  infinitive,  104 


538 


ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 


pour  que,  subjunctive  after,  368 

pourvoir,  381,  446 

pouvoir,  317,  446 

premier,  subjunctive  after,  363 

prendre,  329,  454 

prepositions,  before  infinitives,  370 

compared  with  conjunctions,  370 

with  geographical  names,  95 
present  indicative,  conjugation   of, 
102,  103 

formation  of,  102,  108,  300 

uses  of,  48,  103 
present  subjunctive,  conjugation  of, 
140 

formation  of,  140,  301 
preterit,  see  past  definite 
price,  expression  of,  259 
principal  parts  of  verbs,  107,  108, 

142,  300 
pronouns,  demonstrative,  221-224 

intensive,  200 

interrogative,  244-246,  385 

personal,  192-200 

possessive,  211,  213 

reflexive,  273 

relative,  229-238 
pronunciation  of  French,  5 
punctuation,  24 
purpose,  clauses  of,  368 

quand,ininterrogativesentences,\i78 

with  future,  125,  157 

with  past  anterior,  1 56 
quantity  of  vowels,  16 
que,  for  other  conjunctions,  391 

interrogative  pronoun,  244,  385 

meaning  than,  78 

relative  pronoun,  229,  238 

with  subjunctive,  355 
qu'est-ce  qui,  245,  385 
quel,  244 
quelque,  384 


questions,  method  of  asking,  177-179 
qui,  interrogative  pronoun,  244,  385 

relative  pronoun,  229,  238 
qui  est-ce  qui,  385 
quoi,  interrogative  pronoun,  245 

relative  pronoun,  238 

recevoir,  317,  446 
reciprocal  use  of  reflexives,  387 
reflexive  pronouns,  agreement  of,  275 
distinguished  from  intensives, 

275 

list  of,  273 

position  of,  273 

used  as  reciprocals,  387 
reflexive  verbs,  conjugation  of,  274 

idiomatic  use,  276 

used  for  passive,  286 
regular  verbs,  102-141,  432 
relative  pronouns,  229-238 
repentir,  308,  442 
rSsoudre,  381,  454 
rien,  183,  390 
rire,  381,  454 

savoir,  318,  446 

se,  273 

sentir,  308,  442 

sequence  of  tenses,  355 

servir,  308,  444 

seul,  subjunctive  after,  363 

si,  130,  369,  392 

si  .  .  .  que,  78 

size,  expression  of,  260 

soi,  386 

sortir,  308,  444 

souffrir,  309,  443 

sounds,  of  consonants,  17-22 

of  vowels,  8-1 5 
sovereigns,  titles  of,  265 
stem  of  verb,  102 
stress,  22 


GENERAL  INDEX 


539 


subjunctive,  after  impersonal  verbs, 

356 
after  superlatives,  363 
after  verbs  of  doubting,  etc.,  363 
after  verbs  of  emotion,  361 
after  verbs  of  thinking,  etc.,  362 
after  verbs  of  wishing,  etc.,  362 
in  adjective  clauses,  363 
in  adverbial  clauses,  368 
in  concessive  clauses,  368 
in  conditional  clauses,  369 
in  indefinite  relative  clauses,  368 
in  object  clauses,  361 
in  principal  clauses,  355 
in  purpose  clauses,  368 
in  relative  clauses,  363 
in  subject  clauses,  356 
in  time  clauses,  368 
imperfect,  conjugation  of,  141 
present,  conjugation  of,  140 
tenses  of,  140,  355 
use  of,  compared  with  indica- 
tive, 355 
use  of,  compared   with   infini- 
tive, 369 
use  of  ne  with,  362,  363 

suffire,  381,  454 

suivre  334,  454 

syllables,  4 

synopsis,  141,  155,  164 

taire,  334,  454 

tel,  65 

tenir,  309,  444 

tenses,  in  subordinate  clauses,  125, 

13O'  *57 

of  the  subjunctive,  355 
time,  clauses  of,  368 

of  day,  expression  of,  264 
titles,  of  address,  49 

of  sovereigns,  265 
tout,  65,  391 


tressaillir,  380,  441 

trigraphs,  11 

tu,  contrasted  with  vous,  135 

un,  article,  26 

numeral,  253 
unit  of  time,  expression  of,  259 

vaincre,  381,  454 

valoir,  322,  446 

venir,  conjugation  of,  309,  444 

idiomatic  uses  of,  309 
verbs,  agreement  of,  33 

conjugation  of,   102-141,  301- 
341,  432-455 

endings  of,  43  t 

formation  of,  300-302 

impersonal,  323 

irregular,  303-341 

prepositions  that  follow,  349 

principal  parts  of,  107,  108 

pronominal,  see  reflexive 

reflexive,  273 

regular,  1 02-1 41 
vetir,  381,  444 
vingt,  254 
vivre,  334,  454 
voici,  151,  193 
voila,  151,  193 
voir,  318,  448 

construction  following,  340 
vouloir,  195,  322,  448 
VOUS,  contrasted  with  tu,  135 
vowels,  sounds  of,  8-15 

weather,  expression  of,  341 
wishing,  subjunctive   after   clauses 
of,  362 
subjunctive  in  clauses  of,  355 

y,  position  of,  206 
use  of,  204 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 
NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


SEP  2  8  218 


AUG  2  5  2003 


12,000(11/95) 


YB  36340 


889455 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


